





























δ κῇ 
ἐν ΜΉΝ 
τΆ ἢ ae 

















i) ΕἸ 
ἊΨ ciate via 
Ὰ Ξ 


tea 




















y iy ip mas Sa PE CE AE Re ee. Sa gee 


are 
BR aN 





tt 





henge 


2% ήταν 
τς ΓΝ “sat ὙΠῸ Daa Ave 
SW ir idee, pe ΤΡ] ΠΗ 
4 bleh oh hipey di Hi 
a Ἰ Ἢ fits : 
fade “2 
ἧς ΠΡ ve ren 
i ' ἐὰν» ay τ" the ss : 
ΠΝ ἦνθον 









































4 Aaa jhely 


uf “ἢ 


πος - 





f 
Ab ἱρυσονῖ 

ΜΉΝ "δηι 
rue fs Hit ih 








ee 


τ σο ως 
τος 
τιν τως 


eles τατον τῖττ 








ν 








=e ὅδα 
Ss ee 


Sv 








ἜΞΞ 
ees 











a ene eee 








Sissies Ω 
=. é 


dete ed phe 
taloh oe ' 
Mis 





Μὴ; yt ἜΡΙΝ 


AWAD 
+ ΠΣ 








σις 


9 

ἘΠ Ἐν 

fly ene ΠΝ ὯΝ 

᾿ ΠΣ ἶ 
iat RB ' ‘ 





ἩΉΗ 

by 

“init 
‘led 


Se 





4 











Higa Ha 


Wei ἯΙ ry 
ΠῚ 





iif i fey 
hay 
bil ih 


fu 
AGA ἦν Τῇ ἐπι " 
ΜΉΝ» 

ϑ 4 








Β i 
Γι Pe, 


eis 
ae 
i, 














τσ, τ. ὐν νιον 


προ τ ὅν να ιν ἐπ πὸ 





i ᾿ . ἘΞ. 
“a τα ee 


- 
Vt. ῖ "eco 
ot y 





| 


Digitized by the Internet Archive 
in 2007 with funding from 
Microsoft Corporation 


http://Awww.archive.org/details/greekgrammarforu00sophrich 








>i. 
7) ᾿Ὶ 


‘ies, 


ὦ 


ae 


; it, ie | ; YB 
ΤΙ a γι 
oN co DE SSD? tite i. 





ἜΨΗΖ 
2 96°] 


GREEK GRAMMAR. 


FOR THE 


‘USE OF SCHOOLS AND COLLEGES, 





BY E. A. SOPHOCLES, A. M. 





 Bebised Edition, 


HARTFORD: 
WILLIAM J. HAMERSLEY, PUBLISHER. 
1867. 





GREEK TEXT BOOKS. 


W. J. HAMERSLEY & CO., PUBLISHERS, 


HARTFORD, CONN. 


SOPHOCLES’ FIRST BOOK IN GREEK, for the use of beginners. 

SOPHOCLES’ GREEK LESSONS, new edition, adapted to the re- 
vised edition of the Author’s Greek Grammar. 

SOPHOCLES’ GREEK GRAMMAR, revised edition, for the use of 
Schools and Colleges. 

SOPHOCLES’ GREEK ar ta ἐν with an English and Greek 
vocabulary. 

SOPHOCLES’ GREEK GRAMMAR, for the use of learners, being 
the first edition of the Author’s Grammar. 

FELTON’S GREEK READER, containing selections in Prose and 
Poetry, with Notes and a Lexicon adapted to the Greek Grammar 
of E. A. Sophocles, by C. G. Felton. 

THE ANTIGONE OF SOPHOCLES, with notes, by Theodore D. 
Woolsey; new edition, revised. 

THE ALCESTIS OF EURIPIDES, with notes, by Theodore D. 
Woolsey ; new edition. 

THE PROMETHEUS OF ASCHYLUS, with notes, by Theodore 
D. Woolsey ; revised edition. 

THE ELECTRA OF SOPHOCLES, with faten eo Theodore D. 
Woolsey; revised edition. 

THE GORGIAS OF PLATO, chiefly according to Stallbaum’s 
text, with notes by Theodore D. Woolsey, new edition with ad- 
ditions. 





ENTERED, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1847, 
BY E. A. SOPHOCLES, 
In the Clerk’s Office of the District Court of Connecticut. 





VSRSSSSSSSASFGRSESRSESELSREKSRSERERLBY 


PAZSP 


The sections of the old and new edition HOR AB Zz ¢ 


62 


TSRKRIBASSLIRRLA 


SESSSRERASVSSSS 


98, 115 


xen [067 


139 et seq, 
139 


Old. New. Old. New. Old. New. 
162 177 187 194 211 91] 
163 181 188 195, 199 212 211 
164 181 - 189 200 213 212 
165 184 190 200 214 214 et seq 
166 185 191 196 215 218 © 
167 182 192 231 216 213 et seq 
168 186 193 196 217 216 
169 186 194 231 918 218 
170 186 195 202 219 222 
171 183 196 201 290 223 
173 187 197 201 921 291 
1704 156 198 203,206 222 295 
175 190 199 206 297 
176 187 200 206 224 229 
177 188 201 204 995 230 
178 191 202 _ 204 226 231 
179 192 203 231 227 233 
180 197 204 155 223 236 
181 200 205 207 929 138 
182 192, 193 206 208 230 237 
183 194 207 209 231 233 
184 189, 197 208 210 232 2338 
185 187 209 211 
186 198 210 211 





Tus new edition has been enlarged and considerably altered. 
Every example in nouns and verbs has been fully expanded. 

The arrangement of the different heads is more natural in — 
the new than in the old edition. 

In accordance with the practice of recent grammarians, the © 
simple and regular βουλεύω has taken the place of the com-— 
plicated and wregular τύπτω. The uncontracted form of con- — 
tract verbs is not given, because it does not differ from the | 
regular paradigm, and because -dw is rare and Epic, and -€o 
chiefly Ionic. As to verbs in -ὄω, their uncontracted form is — 
never used. (See §119, ns.) 

The portions which should be read first, and which, in 
reality, constitute a Greek accidence, are printed in the largest — 
type. The rules, however, contained in $178, though belonging — 
to the elementary portion of the grammar, are, for typographical 
reasons, printed in smaller type. The notes are iftended for 
the advanced scholar. 





ANTRODUCTION, 


a ian 
3 . f ΡΣ . aay ea 


i oer 
3 ff 


Tue classical Greeks were divided into three principal tribes, 
the Holic, Doric, and Ionic. The olians occupied Thessaly, 
Beeotia, AZolis, Lesbos, and some other places. The Dorians 
occupied Peloponnesus, Megaris, Doris, Sicily, Southern Italy, 
and marty other places. The Jonians inhabited Attica, Ionia, 
and some of the islands in the /Zgean Sea. 

_ The principal dialects of Greece were the Holic, Thessalian, 
 Beotic, Doric, Ionic, and Attic. 

The Holic dialect, properly so called, was spoken in Lesbos 
Ἶ and AXolis. 

_. The Beotic was the dialect of Boeotia; and although a 
_ vranch of the Aéolic, it differs essentially from its Asiatic sister. 
_ The Thessalian dialect was used in Thessaly ; it differed 
} considerably from the Beeotic and Azolic. 

The Doric consisted of many branches, as the Laconian, 
Cretan, Argive, Sicilian, Tarentine. 

_ The Ionic is divided into old and new; the old Ionic, called 
also the Epic, or Homeric, was spoken in Attica and Ionia; it 
i is the basis of the language of Homer and Hesiod. The new 
_ Tonic was spoken in Ionia. ς 

ἶ The Aitic was the language of Attica, or rather of Athens, 
_ the capital of Attica. It was the most cultivated of all the 
dialects of Greece, and, on that account, is made the basis of 

_ Greek grammar. 

With respect to purity, the Greek, like any other dead lan- 
_ guage, may be said to have seen four different ages ; the golden, 





eo ae 








ry 


ἢ 
q 
γ 


6 INTRODUCTION. 


silver, brazen, and iron ages. The writers of the silver and 
brazen ages are often called the later Greek writers, and their 


language the later Greek. 


In the following list of Greek authors, A‘. stands for Zolic 
B., for Baeotic, D., for Doric, E., for Epic, and 1., for Ionie. 


Golden Age. — From Homer to Aristotle. 


neas Demosthenes 
ZEschines, a philosopher Empedocles 


Eschines, an orator §Ephorus 
Eschylus Epicharmus (D.) 
Alcaeus (£.) Erinna (.) 
Alcidamas upolis 
Aleman (D.) Euripides 
Anacreon (I.) Gorgias 
Andocides Hanno 
Antimachus (E.) Heraclitus 
Antiphanes Herodotus (1.) 
Antiphon Hesiodus (E.) 
Antisthenes Hippocrates (1.) 
Archilochus (1.) Hipponax 
Archytas (D.) Homerus (E.) 
Aristophanes Hyperides . 
Asclepiades Ibycus (D.) 
Bacchylides (D.) Ton 

Callinus (E.) Isaeus 
Callistratus Isocrates 
Cebes Lesches (E.) 
Charon Lycurgus 
Corinna(B.) Lysias 
Cratinus elissus 
Ctesias Mimermnus 
Demades Ocellus 


Panyasis (E.) 
Parmenides 
Pherecrates ~ 
Philistus 
Pindarus (D.) 
Plato, a poet 
Plato, a philosopher 
Praxilla (D.) 
Pythagoras (E.) 
δ κε ικας (8. 
Scylax 


Simonides of Amergoa 
Simonides of Ceos (D.} 
Solon (E.) 

Sophocles 

Sophron (D.) 

Stasinus (E.) 
Stesichorus (D.) 
Thucydides 

Timaeus the Icrian 


(D.) 
Tyrtaeus (E.) 
Xanthus 
Xenophanes 
Xenophon 


Silver Age.— From Aristotle to about A. Ὁ. 1. 


Agatharchides Callimachus (E. & D.) Lesbonax ᾿ 
Alexis Cleanthes + es aay 
Antigonus Demetrius Phalereus anetho 
Apollodérus Dicaearchus Matron 
/ipollontus of Rhodos Dinarchus Meleager 

E. Diodorus Menander 
Apollonius of Perga Dionysius of Halicarnas- Mosehus (D.) 
Apollonius Sophista sus Nicander (E.) 
Ardtus (E.) Dionysius Thrax Nicolaus of Damascus 
Archimédes (D.) Dionysius Periegétes Palaephatus 
Aristarchus of Samos Epictrus Parthenius 
Aristoteles Euclides Phanocles 
Aristoxenus Geminius Philemon 
Babrius Heraclides Ponticus _—Philétas 
Berosus Hermesianax Philo of Byzantium 
Bion (D.) Hipparchus Philochorus 


INTRODUCTION. 7 


Philodemus Scymnus , Theocritus 
Polybius Septuaginta Interpretes Theophrastus 
Posidonius Simmias Timon 


_ Rhianus Strabo 


es 





Brazen Age.— From A. D. 1 to about A. D. 300. 


Achilles Tatius Diogenianus Onesander 
JElianus of Praeneste Dioscorides Oppianus (E.) 
fflianus the Tactician Dositheus Origenes 
_ Alcinous Draco Pausanias 
Alciphron Epictétus Philo the Jew 
Alexander Aphrodisieus Erotianus Philostratus the elder 
Annaeus Galenus . Philostratus the younger 
Antoninus Hephaestion Phlegon 
Antonius Liberalis Hermogenes Phrynichus 
Apollonius, a gramma- Herddes Plotinus 
rian Herodianus, a historian Plutarchus 
Appianus Herodianus, a gramma- Polemo 
Apion rian Polyaenus 
Arcadius Iamblichus Polydeuces 
Aretaeus (I.) Josephus Sin es 
Aristides Justinus Ptolemaeus 
Arrianus Longinus Sextus . 
Artemidorus Lucianus Sibylline Oracles 
Athenaeus Marcellus Tatianus 
Athenagoras Maximus of Tyre Theon of Smyrna 
Clemens of Alexandria Memnon Tiberius 
᾿ Cleomedes Moeris Timaeus, a Sophist 
Dio Cassius Musonius Ruphus Trypho 
Dio Chrysostomus Nichomachus Ulpianus 
Diogenes Laertius Novum Testamentum 
Iron Age. — From A. D. 300 to A. D. 1453. 
Aétius Etymologicum Magnum Hierocles 
Agathias Eudocia_ . Himerius 
“Esopic Fables Eunapius Johannes of Damascu 
Ammonius Eusebius Johannes Laurentius Ly 
Anna Comnéna Eustathius,thecommen- dus_, 
Aphthonius tator Johannes Chrysostomus 
Armenopalus Eustathius of Egypt Julianus 
Aristaenetus Gazes,a grammarian _Lascaris 
Athanasius Glycys Leo the Deacon 
Basilius Gregorius of Nazianzus Libanius 
Cantacuzénus Gregorius, bishop of Longus 
Cedrénus Nyssa Marinus 
Cephalas Gregorius, bishop of Co- Moschoptlus 
Chalcondyles rinth Musaeus 
Chariton Harpocration Nemesius 
Chrysoloras Heliodorus Nicephorus 
Coluthus Heraclitus Nicephorus Gregoras 
Damascius . Hesychius, a lexicogra- Nicétas 
D:ophantus pher Nonnus 
Epiphanius Hesychius, a historian Oribasius 


8. INTRODUCTION. 


Orphica Quintus Theodosius Metochites © 
Pappus Sallustius Theon 

Paulus of A‘gina Simplicius Theophilus 

Paulus of Alexandria Sozomenus Theophylactus Simocata 
Philemon, a grammarian Stephanus of Byzantium Theophylactus, bishop 
Photius Stobaeus of Bulgaria 
Phrantzes Suidas Thomas Magister 
Planudes Symeon Sethus Try phiodorus 
Porphyrogennétus Synesius Xenophon of Ephesus 
Proclus Syrianus _ Zonaras 

Procopius Tzetzes Zosimus 

Psellus Themistius . And many others. 


Ptochoprodromus Theodorétus 


Spurious Works. 


Chion . Phocylides Themistocles 
_ Phalaris Theano 





It may be remarked here, once for all, that, in this edition, 
the remarks on the Aolic, Beeotic, Thessalian, Arcadian, and 
Doric dialects are based on Ahrens’s work on the Greek Dia- 
‘lects. Struve’s dissertation on the dialect of Herodotus also has 
been used. shes 

The Catalogue of Anomalous Verbs is taken from a revised 
copy of the author’s Catalogue of Greek Verbs. 

The chapter on versification is based on Munk’s Greek and 
Roman Metres. | 

In the Appendix, the remarks on the Alphabet are based on 
Franz’s Elementa Epigraphices Graecae, Boeckh’s Corpus In- 
scriptionum Graecarum, the Heraclean Tables, and. Gesenius’s 
Scripturae Linguaeque Phoeniciae Monumenta. 

The remarks on the Digamma are based on the above-men- 
tioned works of Boeckh, Franz, and Ahrens, and on the Herac- 
lean Tables. . 

The short chapter on Numerals is based on Franz’s above- 
mentioned work. ; 


CONTENTS. 





The Alphabet 
Vowels and Diphthongs 
Breathings ς Ξ 
Consonants 


Change, Transposition, Addition, and Omission of Letters 


Euphonic Changes 


Contraction and Synizesis 


Crasis and Elision 
Syllabication . . 
Quantity . . 
Accent , 


Enclities and Prosiies.” 


Punctuation Marks . 


Parts of Speech 

Noun é i 
First Declension 
Second Declension 
Third Declension 


PART I. 
LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. 


PART Π. 


e 


INFLECTION. OF WORDS. 


Anomalous, Defective, and I Indeclinable Nouns 


Adjectives 


nomalous and Defective Adjectives 
Comparison of Adjectives and Adverbs 


™ronoun and Article . 


Numerals . ° 
Verb : ; : 
Augment . 


Formation of the Tenses 
Personal Endings and Connecting Vowels 


Contract Verbs 


Onaission of the Connecting. 
Anomalous and Defective 


_ Adverbs ‘ ; 

P cepositions 2 . 
Conjunctions . 
Interjections . 
Derivation of Words 
Composition of Words 


Vowel 


erbs 


10 CONTENTS. 


PART ΠΙ. 
SYNTAX. 
Subject and Predicate . "Late eet 
Nominative . . . . . 
Vocative . ° ° . 


Substantive and Adjective Ὰ . . 
Pronouns and Article . υ ° 
Article . - Ἔ . Hs Ξ 


Relative x : Ἂ - . ° 
Numerals δον ὦ . 
Object. — Oblique eases ee et Ὴ Ὁ..." 
Accusative . . . . © 


Gen itive 7 © Φ ° αν 4 
Dative . x 6 ᾿ ° . 


Voices . - e Ν . . . 
‘ Tenses . . . - © 7 
Moods . . . . . . 
Quotations ὦ ε ‘ ° . 
End, Motive > ° . . . 
Conditional Sentences ; > ° 


Expression of a Wish. . : 
Relative Sentences . 
Exhortations, Commands, "Prohibitions 
Interrogative Sentences , ° ° 
Comparative Sentences ° . . 
Infinitive Ξ ὃ τ - . 
Participle . . ° ° ° ° 
Adverb . ° Ἀ - . 
Preposition . 5 ° ° . . 
Conjunction ᾿ ° . . 
Irregular Construction ; ° . . 
Arrangementof Words . ee 


PART IV. 


‘VERSIFICATION. 


Trochaic . 5 Ξ ° ᾿ ° 
. fambie . ; ‘ ς 3 Ἢ . 
Dactylic . ‘ ξ ° : . 
Anapestic . ° . . . . 


Cretic or Peonic 5 Ξ ς Ξ 
Choriambic a . Σ ἷ . o . 
Ionic : . ° . : : 
APPENDIX. 
Remarks on the Alphabet . . . 
Numerals ὃ 5 


Remarks on Prouuntiation ὦ é ᾿ 


eee ἣν ας νιν μεν ὦ... 


Γ 





αν Δ δά. 


ον γιὰ“, ow 


_ oa 


PART I. 
LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. 


THE ALPHABET. 


§ 1. 1. The Greek alphabet consists of the 
following twenty-four letters : 





Figure, Representative. Name. 


Ag @! TAN “Alpha 
BBé b Βῆτα Beta 
Ey. g Τάμμα-" -Gamma 
4 ὃ d Δέλτα. Delta — 
at Ε ε é Ἔ ψιλόν Epsilon 
ΕἸ σις z Zina~ Lia 
͵ Hn Gia *Hra~ = Eta 
Qa 30 th Θῆτα-- Theta 
: ar 1 Iora Tota 
Ke, k orc hard Κάππα-- Kappa 
ow. Gay l Δάμβδα-- Lambda 
M p m Mo Mu or My 
P Ng n No~ Nu or Ny 
of Ξ- & rae a "ΝΣ re δάσος: 
O o 0 μικρόν Omicron 
Pox » he oe 
<P » r Ρῶ- Rho 
ΝΣ cS: final 8 Σίγμα Sigma 
5 T ¢ t ave , Lau 
| You Uu or y Ὗ iro Upsilon) 
: ᾧ φ ph Di Phi 
| “xy ch Xt Chi 
a ae ee ps ΨῚ Ps 
vy fo 0 "22 μέγα Omega 


The character ς is used at the end of a word; as σεσωσμένος 
y editors put it also at the end of a word compounded with anoth 
om ; a8 εἰς-έρχομαι, Sus-ruxns, ds-ris. In manuscripts only σ᾽ is ased 


“ 
᾿- 
"᾿ 
τ) 
ys 


a 


Ε΄ ς 


ζ΄ 


12 LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. [δ 2%, ὅ 


2. The letters are divided into vowels and con- 
sonants. ‘The vowels are α, ε, 7, ὁ, 0, v, o Lhe 
consonants are f, 7, ὃ, ζ ὃ, κ, λ, μ, ν, & π, ρ, σ, τ, 

ἐ | 


φ, χ, Ψ. 


Nore. For the obsolete letters Bad or Δίγαμμα, Κόππα, and Σάν, 
see Appendix. 


VOWELS AND DIPHTHONGS. 


§ 2. There are five short vowels, and five cor- 
responding long ones. ‘The short vowels are ἄ, 6 
i, o, ὕ ; the long, a, », 7, ὦ, v. 


The mark (~) is placed over a short vowel, and (-) over a long 
one. These marks, however, are necessary only in the case of a, 4, 
and v, since the characters 7 and represent long E and O respec- 
tively. 


Nore 1. The vowels e and o are often called the short vowels, ἡ 
and @, the long vowels, and a, 1, v, the doubtful vowels. - 

By the term doubiful, we are not to understand that the quantity of 
a, t, v is uncertain in any given syllable, but that in some syllables 
these vowels are always long, and im others always short. Εἰ. g. vin 
the words ϑυμός, πῦρός, wheat, is always long; in the words wvAn, 
ὑπό, always short. 

There are, indeed, instances where the quantity of these letters is 
variable, as a in “Apns, ¢ in μυρίκη, and v in κορύνη ; but we should 
recollect, that the sounds E and O also are, in certain instances, vari- 
able, as ξηρός ξερός, ἴωμεν ἴομεν. : 

Nore 2. In strictness, the Greek alphabet has but five vowels, 
A, E, I, O, Y. The long differ from the short in guantity, but not 


. in power. 


§ 3. There are thirteen diphthongs, of which 


Seven, dt, au, εἰ, ev, ot, ov, and ὕει, begin with a short 


vowel, and six, ᾷ, av, 7, nv, φ, and ov, with a long 


one. ‘The former are generally called proper diph- 
thongs, and the latter, zmproper. 3 


The ε is written under the long vowel, and is called iota subscript. 
in capitals it is written as a regular letter; as THI ‘ATIAI τῇ ἁγίᾳ, 
TQI ΣΟΦΩΙ τῷ σοφῷ. So when only the first letter is capital; "Ado 
al * A 
ᾷδω, “Hidew dew, “Qryero ᾧχετο. 


Nore 1. During the most flourishing period of the Greek language, 


the zofa subscript, so called, was pronounced like any other iota ; 


§ 4. BREATHINGS. 13 


and in inscriptions cut before the Reman period (say before the year 
100 B. C.) it is never omitted; as TEPOYSIAI yepo cig, BOYAHL 
βουλῇ, ΔΗΜΩ͂Ι δήμῳ. 

In process of time it became a silent letter, and consequently it was _ 
omitted in writing; hence in inscriptions belonging to the Roman 
period (say from B.C. 100 to the commencement of the fourth cen- 
tury of our era) it is almost always omitted ; as TEPOY3IA γερουσίᾳ, 
BOYAH βουλῇ, TYMNASIO γυμνασίῳ. 

The orthography a, 7, , as also the expression improper diphthongs 
(δίφθογγοι καταχρηστικαί), generally used in grammars, was intro- 
duced long after this iota ceased to be pronounced. 


Norte 2. According to the.ancient grammarians, the diphthong ve 
eannot stand before a consonant. ‘The ¢olic dialect, however, has 
rutoe, here. 


Nore 3. The diphthong w (with long v) is found nowhere ; it may 
be supposed, however, to have-once existed in the perfect pussive op- 
tative of verbs in ὕω; thus, AeAdro was perhaps originally λελῦιτο, 
after the analogy of κεκλῆιτο, κεκτῆιτο, μεμνῆιτο. 


Nore 4. In the old Beeotic dialect, AI, ΟἹ were sometimes written 
AE, OE, as in Latin ; as AESXPONAAS Αἰσχρώνδας, LAAYXAE Πλαύ- 


 xut Πλαύχᾳ, AIONYZOE Διονύσοι Διονύσῳ, found in inscriptions. 


i te 


: 


Nore 5. QY owes its existence entirely to crasis; as witds, τωὐὺ- 

“-“ » ,ὔ > / id > / ~ > ~ A > , 53 > ’ 
τοῦ, τωὐτό, ωὐριπίδη, for ὁ αὐτός, τοῦ αὐτοῦ, τὸ αὐτό, ὦ Ἐὐριπίδη. 

As to ov in the lonic words ἐμεωυτου, σεωυτοῦ, ewuTov, ὅωυμα, and 
τρωύμα, they, according to the ancient grammarians, constitute two 
syllables, wi ; thus, ἐμεωῦτοῦ, σεωῦτοῦ, ἑωῦτοῦ, SHvpa, Tpwipa. 


BREATHINGS. 


es 4. 1. Every Greek word beginning with a 
rowel has either the rough breathing (‘), corre- 
sponding to h, or the smooth breathing (°), over that 
vowel; as “Aprua, Harpy ; ἀήρ, atr. 


The breathing, as also the accent, is, in all recent editions, placed 
over the second vowel of a diphthong; as Αἵμων, Hemon; Αἰνείας, 
Agnéas. 4 , 

_ But in the diphthongs a, 7, ᾧ, these marks are placec over the first 
letter ; as dd@ “Aida, ἦδον Ἦιδον, ὠφδή ᾿Ωιδή. 

When a word is written in cayitals, both the breathing and the ac. 
cent may be omitted ; as APITYIA, AHP, AINELAS. 


ὥς The rough breathing is placed also over p 
t the beginning of a word. When p is doubled 
in the middle of a word, the first one takes the 


14 ‘LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. [54.᾿ 


smooth breathing, and the other the rough. E. g. 
ῥόδον, rose ; ἄῤῥην, male ; ἄῤῥητος, unspeakable. 


Nore 1. It must be learned from observation what words take the 
rough breathing, and what the smooth. It is only added here, that 
derivatives generally take the breathing of their primitives ; and that 
v, at the beginning of a word, generally takes. the rough breathing ; 
as ὕπνος, sleep ; ὑπέρ, over. 


Nore 2. Many words which now appear without the rough breath- 
mg were once pronounced with it. Thus, in inscriptions we find . 
Αβδηρῖται, ἅγαλμα, ᾿Ἀγρυλῆθεν, “Ἀγρυλῆσι, Gye, Αἵσωπος, ἀκούσια, 
ἀνάλωμα, ἁνήρ, ἅρνησις, éx, ἑνιαυτός, ἐπί, Amis, ἕλπίζω, Eros, ἵδιος, 
igos, οἶκος, οἴσω (from φέρω), ὁκτώ, ὁπισθοφανής. 

On the other hand, words beginning with the rough breathing were 
often pronounced and written without it. Thus, in Doric and Attic 
inscriptions cut before the archonship of Euclides, we find IMI0ME- 
AON Ἱππομέδων, O 6, OI of, Ej, A ἅ, AIS ais, EKASTOI ἑκάστῳ, 
ἼΤΌΣΙΟΝ ὅσιον, EMEPAI ἡμέρᾳ, ETEPON ἕτερον. 


Nore 3. The rough breathing was also used in the middle of a 
word. Thus, in ancient inscriptions we find TPIHEMIIIOAIOS τρι- 
ἡμιποδίους τρι-ημιποδίους, from τρίς ἥμισυς πούς ; ENHOAIA ἐν-ὁδία. 
ἐν-οδία, from ἐν ὁδός ; τρι-ἡμίγυον, παρ-ἕξοντι, πεντα-ἑτηρίς, ἀν-ἑώσα- 
σθαι, ἀν-ἑλόμενος. Compare ἐνυδρίς, enhydris, ἔνυδρος, enhydrus, 
πολυΐστωρ, polyhistor, Πολύμνια, Polyhymnia; also the barbar- 
ous word Sanhedrim, συνέδριον, from σύν ἕδρα. 


_ Note 4. The olic dialect did not make much use of the rough 
_breathing ; as ἄμμες, ἄμμιν, ἄμμε, types, ὕμμιν, Dupe, for dyes, ἁμῖν, 
μέ, ὑμές, ὑμῖν, ὑμέ. 

Nore 5. The character (᾽) was employed by the ancient gramma- 
rians to denote the effort with which a vowel, not depending on a pre- 
ceding letier, is pronounced. Let, for example, the reader pronounce 
first the word act, and then, enact, and mark the difference between 
the a in the first, and the a in the second word. He will perceive, 
that the utterance of a in act requires more effort than that of a in 
enact. 

As, however, no vowel at the beginning of a word can be uttered 
without a slight effort or breathing, it is evident that this character 
is about as important as the dot over the Roman i; thus, ἔχω, εἶμι, 
Αἴας are nothing more than έχω, εἶμι, Αἴας. . 


Nore 6. The rough breathing is never found in connection with p 
or pp in ancient inscriptions. Thus, Ρηγίνοις, ἀῤῥαβδώτους, Πύῤῥος, 
ἀποῤῥαίνονται are, in inscriptions in which H: represents the rough 
breathing, written PETINOIS, APPABAOTOS, ΠΥ͂ΡΡΟΣ, ATIOPPAI- 
NONTAI. Further, οὐκ never becomes οὐχ before p; as ov pyrés, 
never οὐχ ῥητός. It is inferred therefore that the orthography p, pp 
was employed by the grammarians to indicate the re/ing sound of p at 
the beginning of a word, and of the second p in the middle of a word 


-~ ὙΠ > |, eee ee, ee Ὁ 


~ 


ee Ύ ΨΥ ΨΥ 


§§ 5, 6] CONSONANTS. 15 


It may be remarked here that some of the most learned editors now 
employ pp instead of ῥῥ ; as ἄρρην, ἄρρητος, Πύρρος. 


Nore 7. The ancient grammarians placed the rough breathing also 
over p after a rough mute (3, φ, x); and the smooth “breathing over p 
after a smooth mute (τ, 7, x); aS Spdvos, appds, xpdvos, Arpevs, κάπρος. 


CONSONANTS. 


§ 5. According to the organs with which they 
are pronounced, the consonants are divided into ~ 
labials π, B, φ, μ, 
linguals τ, δ, ὃ, 6 σ, λ, ν, ρ, 
Ῥαίαίαί5 K, Ὑ; X: 


τ ‘The labials are pronounced chiefly with the ips; the Zinguals, with 
the tongue; and the palatals, with the palate. 


οὖ Φ. 1. The consonants 4, μ, ν, p are, on account 
of their gliding pronunciation, called liquids. 


2. The consonants ἕν w are called double con- 
sonants ; because & stands for xo; and w for ro. 


3. The consonants 7, 8, φ, κ, γ, x, τ, δ, 3 are 
called mutes. ‘They are divided into 
smooth mutes m, κ, τ, 
middle mutes 8, y, ὃ 
rough mutes ᾧ, x, ὃ. 
These letters correspond to each other in the 
perpendicular direction ; thus, ¢ is the correspond- 
ing rough of 7. 


4. ‘The letter σ, on account of its hissing suund, 
is called the sibilant letter. 


- δ. The consonants », p, σ, & are the only ones 
that can stand at the end of a genuine Greek word. 


Except κ in the preposition ἐκ, from, out of, and in the adverb οὐκ 
or ov x, not. 


Nore. According to Dionysius and the ancient grammarians, Z 


16 LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. [Ὁ 1. 


stands for SA. This however does not mean that Z is a mere abbre- 
_Viation for SA, but that, in pronunciation, it has the power of a double 
consonant, and that the A£olians and Dorians, in the middle of a word, 
very often used SA, where the Ionians and Athenians employed Z 
(§ 10). We add further that the Beotians and Megarians used AA, 
and the Tarentines ΣΣ for Z, but only in the middle of a word, from 
which it cannot certainly be inferred that Z was a mere abbreviation 
for AA or 33. 

Had Z been sounded like SA, Dionysius and Quintilian would not 
have admired its beautiful sound (‘‘ ἡ συχῇ τῷ πνεύματι δασύνεται.,᾽" it 
is gently aspirated, and *‘ jucundissima littera’’), and the Roman 
grammarians would not have asserted that the Latin had no sound 
corresponding to it. 

It is evident therefore that Z is not a double consonant, in the usual 
acceptation of the term double. (See also ᾧ 25, n. 3.) 


Doubling of Consonants. 


) 7. 1. All the single consonants, except the rough mutes 
and ¢, admit of being doubled; the liquids A, μι v, p, and o are 
very often doubled, and next to them,r; as ἄλλος, other ; ἄμμος; 
sand ; yewdo, to beget; θάρρος, daring, courage ; πράσσω or 
πράττω, to do. 


x2. At the beginning of a word p is doubled when, in the for- 
mation of a word, it happens to stand between two vowels; as 
ῥίπτω ἔρριψα ἔρριμμαι, to throw ; ἀναρρίπτω, to throw up. 
Except when the first component part is εὖ, well; as εὔρω- 
στος, vigorous. 


3. A rough consonant (¢, x, 3) is not doubled ; but instead 
of this, its corresponding smooth (, x, τὴ is placed before it; 
as Σαπφώ, Βάκχος, Πιτθεύς, for Tappa, Bayxos, Πιθθεύς. 


Nore 1. The Poets, except the Attic Poets, often double a conso- 
nant for the sake of the metre ; as ποσσί, νέκυσσι, τελέσσαι, ἔλλαβον, 
τύσσος, ὀπίσσω, ὅττι, ὅππως. ; 

On the other hand, the same Poets sometimes employ one conso- 
nant where that consonant is commonly doubled; as Αχιλεύς, Odv- 
σεύς, ἔραπτον. 


Note 2. The doubling of ν in Πελοπόννησος, ἹΤροκόννησος, is an 
accidental peculiarity ; al-o the doubling of p in βορρᾶς (contracted 
from βορέας), the north wind. ; 

Nore 3. Some words, which originally were written with one o, 
‘were in later times written with oa; as Κνωσός Κνωσσός, Cnossus ; 
Παρνησός Παρνησσός, Parnassus; Κηφῖσός Κηφισσός, Cephissus ° 
Κρῖσα Kpiooa, Crissa. 





Ὁ 8, 9.] CHANGE, TRANSPOSITION, ETC., OF LETTERS. 17 


Nore 4. In some of the most ancient inscriptions, not unfrequent-, 
ly a word is written with a single consonant, where commonly that 
consonant is doubled; as Ἱπομέδων, ἀλάλοις, Gra, καδαλήμενοι, éypa- 
μένῳ, Tupavd, for Ἱππομέδων, ἀλλάλοις, ἄλλα, καδδαλήμενοι, ἐγραμμέ-. 
νῷ, Τυρρᾶνά. 

Nore 5. Σ was often doubled before a consonant, especially befure 
τ; thus, in inscriptions we find Αρισστόδαμος, Αρισστοφάνης, Τελέσ- 
στας, Ἀσσκληπιόδωρος. 

We find also ἐξσατραπέύω (ἐκσσατραπεύω), for σατραπεύω, in an 
Tonic inscription. 


Nore 6. A rough mute was sometimes doubled in the middle of a 
word; as κάθθεσαν, Κλεοθθίς, Αφφιανός, "Apduov, Οφφιανός, Bayxi- 
das, Σάφφου, for κάτθεσαν, Κλεοτθίς, Ἀππιανός, “Ammiov, Οππιανός, 
Βακχίδας, Σάπφου, found in inscriptions. — Sada for Σαπῴφώ is found 
in an inscription. . 


_ CHANGE, TRANSPOSITION, ADDITION, AND OMISSION, 


OF LETTERS. 
§ 8. Commutation of Vowels. 
ἅ, ε: μέγεθος, ἄρσην, μνάα, τέσσαρες, pda, Ionic μέγαθος, ἔρσην, μνεα, 
τέσσερες, ὁρέω ; “Aprejus, ἕτερος, γέ, ἱερός, πιέζω, Doric ἔΑρταμις, 


5:4 δ, .δ ‘ ΄ 
ἅτερος, γά, ἱαρός, πιάζω. 


4 


τ G, 6,0: τρέπω τράπω vst δέ δὲ τρόπος. 


G,o: ἀνά, στρατός, ἐφθάρθαι, AXolic ὁν-τέθην (ἀνατεθῆναι), στρότος, 
ἔφθορθαι ; γράφω, τέτταρες, Doric γρόφω, τέτορες. 

α, ὦ : (ao (ow, κράζω κρώζω ; ΑΓΑΓῺ ἀγωγή, ΑΚΑΚΩ ἀκωκή. ; 

do, ew: λᾶός λεώς, vads νεώς, ἵλᾶος ἵλεως : 50 in the genitive of the 
first declension ; Beeotic Tudeidao, Lonic Τυδείδεω. 

€, 4: ἕζομαι ilo, ἔχω ἴσχω ; χρύσεος, χάλκεος, ὀψέ, Alolic χρύσιος, 
χάλκιος, ἡ ὦ ; ϑεός, συκέα, Doric Suds, συκία. The Beeotic regularly 
changes ε before a vowel into .; a8 ypios, Férva, Δαμοτέλιος. 

€,0: λέγω λόγος, πένομαι πόνος ; Ἀπόλλων, Doric Απέλλων. 


_ €,@: AEPQ ἄωρτο, πλέω πλώω, λέπω λώπη, στρέφω στρωφάω. 
1, @: ῥήγνυμι ἔρρηγα ἔρρωγα ῥώξ, πτήσσω πτώσσω πτώξ, ἀρήγω dow- 


γή ἀρωγός, Μαιῆτις Μαιῶτις. 
n, εἴ ἠδέ ἰδέ ; rare. ᾿ 
t, v: ὕψος, ὑψηλός, ὕπαρ, ὑπέρ, “ο116 ἴψος, ἴψηλος, ἴπαρ, ἱπέρ. 


2 3, 


0, uv: ὄνομα, ὄζος, Οδυσσεύς, ἀπό, πρύτανις, ΤΥΧΩ, AXolic ὄνυμα, 


ὕσδος, Ὑδύσσευς, ἀπύ, πρότανις, τόσσαι (τύξαι). 


§ 9. Commutation of Diphthongs. 


ἃ, αὐ: the Molic uses a for a, when it arises from avro, avo. 
at, ev: εἰ, Doric ai: the Beotic sometimes changes az into εἰ ; as Aéa 


νεῖος, Tavaypeios, Θειβεῖος. 
αι, ἡ : the Beotic regularly changes a into ἡ ; εὐεργέτης, κεκόμιστη, 
. ἀπογράφεσθη, Ταναγρῆος, for εὐεργέταις, κεκόμισται, ἀπογράφεσθαι, 
Tavaypatos. 


a 


18 LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. [§ 10. 


av, ov AYPQ ἀπ-ούρας ἀπ-ουράμενος 
et, 7: the Beotic changes ἡ into εἰ ; Θείβαθεν, Θειβῆος, ἐπόεισε : the 
Doric often uses n for εἰ ; κήρυλος, Νῆλος, ἐπιτάδηος, ἀσαμήωτος. 
ει, 7: the Beotic regularly changes εἰ into τ ; dpyt, ἀσφάλϊα, Ἐελάτϊα, 
Φιδίας. * 
During the silver and brazen ages of the language, e was often pre- 
fixed to t merely to show that it was long ; that is, ε, in this case, was 
an orthographical mark ; as τεῖσαι, κρείνω, τειμῆσαι, found in inscrip~ 
tions. During the latter part of the brazen age, this ε was prefixed 
even to {; as Tiros, Πεῖος, γυμνασειαρχήσας, in inscriptions. (See 
Appendix.) P 
et, οἱ : δείδω δέδοικα, ἀείδω ἀοιδός ἀοιδή, λείπω λοιπός. 
εὖ, ov: σπεύδω σπουδή, ἘΛΕΥΘΩ εἰλήλουθα. 
ot, 0: the Beotic regularly changes οἱ into ὕ ; as τύδε, τῦς ἄλλυς προ- 
ξένυς, Fuxia, for roide, τοῖς ἄλλοις προξένοις, οἰκία. 
ot, ov: the AXolic uses οἱ for ov, when it arises from οντσ, ove. 
ov, v: the Beotians and Laconians changed v into ov, and pronounced 
ov long or short according as the original v was long or short ; thus, 
in οὔδωρ, σούν, σούγγραφος, ἀργούριον, ov was short ; in οὔλη, ἀσου- 
hia, long. 

ov, ὦ : the Doric uses ὦ for ov, but only when it arises from o, ove, oo, 
oe: the Thessalian uses ov for @; aS ἀνάλουμα, κοινάουν, Φείδου- 


oe 
vi, εἰ : in the feminine perfect participle, the Doric sometimes uses εἰ 
for ve ; as ἐρρηγεῖα, ἐπιτετελεκεῖα, ἑστακεῖα, συναγαγοχεῖα. 
νι, 0: Suny, φύην, λελῦτο, Sawiro, πηγνῦτο, for the analogical duuyy, 
eh λελυιτο, δαινυιτο, πηγνυιτο. 
inscriptions we find ὑός, παρειληφῦα, for vids, παρειληφυῖα. 


ὃ 10. Commutation of Consonants. 


“Πα, B, φ, p, of the same organ: ἀσφάραγος ἀσπάραγος ; πατεῖν βατεῖν, 
πικρός βικρός, Ἀμπρακία Ἀμβρακία; ἅπαξ ἄμακις, ὕπνος SOMNUS ; 
ἄβαξ ἀμάκιον, κυβερνήτης κυμερνήτης, μέλλειν βέλλειν, μέγα βάγιον 
magis, μάρψαι βράψαι, σέβομαι σεμνός, ἐρέφω ἐρεμνός, στίλβω 
στιλπνός, στρέφω στρεβλός, ῥοφάω sorbeo. 


κ, γὙ, X, of the same organ: δέχομαι δέκομαι ; γναφεύς κναφεύς, γνάμ- 


πτω κνάμπτω, Κνωσός Τνωσός ; ἄγχω ango. 

τ, 5, 3, σ, of the same organ: τίριος ϑέρεος ; δίδωσι, πλούσιος, ἐνιαύ" 
σιος, εἴκοσι, Dorie δίδωτι, πλούτιος, ἐνιαύτιος, Feixatt; παρθένος, 
Seds, ἐλθεῖν, Laconian παρσένος, σιός, ἐλσῆν. 

π, κ, τ, of the same power : ποῖος κοῖος, ποῦ Κοῦ, ὁποῖος ὁκοῖος, OLD ὁπ- 
τίλλος ὀπτίλος ὄκταλος OCuluS; πέμπε πέντε ααΐϊπα 08 ; πίσυρες 
πέτταρες Quatuor; ἐνέπω inquam; κῆνος τῆνος, κῆλον telum, 
πότε πόκα ; στέλλω σπέλλω σπολάς ; λύκος Lupus. ΐ 

B; y, δ, of the same power: βλῆρ δέλεαρ, Δελφοί Βελφοΐ, ὀβελός dde 
λός ; γυνή Bavd, γλήχων βλήχων ; δνόφος γνόφος, γλυκύς dulcis. 

tb, x, 5, of the same power : Shp φήρ fera, ϑηρίον φήριον, Sapoos fortis, 
ea fores, door; αὐχήν αὔφην or ἀμφήν, πλήθω πλήχω, dures 

OVLXES. 


§ 111] CHANGE, TRANSPOSITION, ETC., OF LETTERS. 19 


B, ζ: βάραθρον, ἐπιβαρέω, βάλλω, Arcadian ζέρεθρον, ἐπιζαρέω, ξέλ- 
λω ; 80 ΝΙΒΩ νίζω, ΛΑΒΩ λάζομαι. 

, ὃ, δὸ, ᾧ od: The Doric and “0116 generally use od for ¢ in the mid 
die of a word ; as φράσδω, συρίσδω, for φράζω, cvpifo. The Dor- 
ic and Beotie often use 6 for ¢ at the beginning of a word ; as Δεύς, 
Δάν, Svydv, Sadov, for Ζεύς, Ζάν, ζυγόν, ζῆλον. The Beotic and 
some of the branches of the Doric use 86 for ¢ in the middle of a 
word ; as γυμνάδδομαι, iepecdddovros, for γυμνάζομαι, ἱερειάζοντος. 

di, ζ : διαβάλλειν, καρδία, Διώνυσος, AXolic ξαβάλλειν, κάρζα, Ζόννυξος. 

ὃ, : : δάκρυον lacryma, Οδυσσεύς Ολυσσεύς Ulysses, δασύς λάσιος 

α- λα-. : 

¢, 00: σαλπίξω, ἀνάσσω, Tarentine σαλπίσσω, ἀνάξω. 

Su, py, wr: ὄμμα, ἄλειμμα, Alolic ὄππα, ἄλειππα : ὄθμα, στέθμα, γρά- 
Oya, for ὄμμα, στέμμα, γράμμα, in Hesychius. 

A, ν: βέλτιον βέλτιστος, φίλτατος, ἦλθον, κέλτο, Dorie βέντιον βέντι- 
στος, φίντατος, ἦνθον, κέντο. 

A, v: αὐκάν ἀλκάν, αὐκύονα ἀλκυόνα, αὔμα ἅλμη, αὖσος ἄλσος, ϑεύγε- 
σθαι ϑέλγεσθαι, αὐγεῖν ἀλγεῖν, εὐθεῖν ἐλθεῖν, in Hesychius. 

A, ρ: κλίβανος κρίβανος, ῥάκη λάκη axis. 

v, σ : as λέγομεν, ἦν, Doric λέγομες, ἧς. 

pp, po: ἄρσην ἄρρην, ϑάρσος ϑάρρος. 

p, 7: the Laconian dialect very often changes o into p; as πίθος πί- 
cop, eds σιόρ, πούς πόρ, dos (nas) aBap. 

ov, tr: the Doric and [onic use oo, the Beotic and Attic, rr; as 
πράσσω πράττω, πλάσσω πλάττω, ϑάλασσα ϑάλαττα. 

στ, Tr: ἴστω, ἐπιχαρίστως, Beotic irra, ἐπιχαρίττως ; ἀνάστηθι, La- 
conian ἄττασι, that is ἄν-σταθι. 

σ, ἢ : dds, ἅλας, ἅλμη, sal, salum, salt; ἕξ, sex, six; ἑπτά, septem, 
seven; ἥμισυς, ἡμι-, SEMIS, S€MI-; ὕλη, Sylva; ὑπέρ, Super; 
tro, Sub; ὕπνος, Somnus, 

According to the ancient grammarians, in some of the branches of 
the Dorie dialect (as the Laconian), σ᾽ was often changed into ἡ (ἢ) in 
the middle of a word ; as ποιῆσαι ποιῆι (ποιῆλαι), μῶσα pod (μῶλα), 
βουσόα βουδα (Bovhda), πᾶσα wad (wala). 


Lengthening, Shortening, Protraction, and Resolution of 
Vowel-sounds. 


§ Εἴ. 1. When from any cause a short vowel is to be 
lengthened, the following changes take place: 

& is lengthened into ἃ; as πρᾶγμα, codia, τιμᾶ, ἅλιος, ἁμέρᾶ. The 
Ionic dialect lengthens it into n, and this is its chief peculiarity; as 
πρῆγμα, σοφίη; τιμή, ἥλιος, ἡμέρη. The Attic follows the Ionic, ex- 
cept when the a is preceded by a vowel or p; as τιμή; ἥλιος, σεμνό- 
τῆς; copia, ἡμέρᾶ, πρᾶγμα. ‘The exceptions to this rule are very 
trifling. 

When 7 arises from ε, it cannot be changed into a; thus, the clas- 
sical A¢olians and Dorians never said θεοσεβάς ἐλέχθαν, because the 
roots are θεοσεβε-; λεχθε-. 


20 LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. [$ 12 


_-_ Not unfrequently @ is lengthened into a; as ἀγαίομαι, φαίνω, διαΐ, 
from ἀγάομαι, PBANQ, διά. 

€ --η, OF εἰ; λιμήν λιμένος, μέλω μέμηλα, ΣΠΕΡΩ σπείρω. In gener- 
al, in the ZBolic and old Doric, it is lengthened into 7; in the Ionic 
and Attic, into εἰ ; ; as AXolic συμφέρην, συνέχην, χήρ, lonie and At- 
tic συμφέρειν, συνέχειν, χείρ ; Doric παραγγήλωντι, Ionic and Attic 


παραγγείλωσι. 
t—i, or εἰ; ΚΛΙΝΩ κλίνω, ΛΙΠΩ λείπω. 


ο -- ὠ, or ov, rarely οἱ; δηλόω δηλώσω, AKOQ ἀκούω, ποέω ποιέω. 
The AZolians and Dorians commonly lengthen it into ὦ ; the loni- 
ans and Attics, into ov ; as Aolic ὄρανος ὥρανος, Doric ὠρανός, Ionic 
and Attic οὐρανός ; Dorie Bas, Ionic and Attic βοῦς. 

τ“ --ὖ, Ore; ΑΙΣΧΥΝΩ αἰσχῦνω, ΦΥΓΤῺ φεύγω. 


2. A long vowel or diphthong is shortened by simply revers- 
ing the preceding rule. 


3. Protraction is the repetition of the same vowel-sound ; it 
is confined to the Epic dialect ; as ποδοῖν ποδοῖιν, ὅμοιος Siseliae: 
᾿ ἀχαιάς Ayauds, περᾶν περάαν, ἦν ἤην, πρϑῖψες κραιαίνω, ἤ ἠέ, ἕ €€, οὗ δου. 

4. When ἃ diphthong does not arise from the lengthening of 
a short vowel (8 1, 1), it originally consisted of two distinct 
syllables ; as πάϊς παῖς, Maiov Maiev, ave “aie, ἀῦτός αὐτός, ἔϊδον 
εἶδον, Ατρεΐδας Arpeidas, Ἀργέϊος Ἀργεῖος, €U εὖ, ὀΐγω οἴγω, ὀΐομαι 
οἴομαι. Except εἰ, ev, when they arise from ee, eo; respectively ; 
as ἔδεε ἔδει, καλέονται καλεῦνται. 


ὅ. The [onic dialect lengthens the first vowel of the original 
form of a diphthong as follows : 

(a) It changes ει (originally ei) into ni; as βασιλεία βασιληΐη, ση- 
μεῖον σημήϊον, κλείς κληΐς, κλείω κληΐω, λεία ληΐζω. 

(0) It changes av (ad) into ov in the following words : ἐμαυτοῦ ἐμε- 
@UTOV, σεαυτοῦ σεωῦτοῦ, ἑαυτοῦ ἑωῦτοῦ, ϑαῦμα ϑώῦμα, τραῦμα Tpevpa. 


(See also ᾧ 3, n. 5.) 


ἐΐ ἢ 


6) Other changes; ἐΐς jis v, εὖτε ἠῦτε ὃς vs, Maiev — 
(c) g nus, ἐὺ nv, HUTE, γραῦς γρηῦς, 


Μηΐων Μήων. 


Note 1. When a short vowel is followed by a liquid, the Xolic 
dialect usually lengthens the syllable by simply doubling that liquid ; 
as ἔστελλα, Βάλλος, πέδιλλον, βόλλα, βόλλομαι, ἔ Epp, Feupa, χρίμμα, 
ἄμμες, ὕ ὔὕμμες, κτέννω, κρίννω, κλίννω, ἐγέννατο, ἰἱμέρρω, φθέρρω, ἀέρρω, 
ὀλοφύρρ ω. 

Sometimes it doubles the liquid even after the vowel has been length- 
ened ; as μῆννος, κάλημμι, προαγρημμένω. 

Nore 2. In an Ionic inscription, φεογειν, φεογετω are found 
for φεύγειν, φευγέτω. 

Nore 3. In an inscription, ev is shortened into ε ; ἐπισκευάζειν em 
σκεαζειν, σκευοθήκη σκεοθηκη. 











Ν 12.] CHANGE, TRANSPOSITION, ETC., OF LETTERS. 21 


Fransposition, Addition,'and Omission. 


8 1. 1. Metathesis is an interchange of place between two 
letters in the same word: one of the letters thus transposed is 
commonly a liquid ; as καρδία κραδίη, κάρτος κράτος. 


2. ‘Prosthesis is the prefixing of one or more letters to a 
te as ἔλδομαι ἐέλδομαι, μικρός σμικρός. 

So στάχυς ἄστάχυς, σταφίς ἀσταφίς, στεροπή ἀστεροπή : ᾿ξέλδωρ, ἐ ἐεί- 
δομαι, ἐέλπομαι, ἐέργω, ἐθέλω, ἑορτάζω, ἐχθές. 

3. Apheresis is the taking of one or more letters from the 


beginning of a word; as λείβω εἴβω, φημί ἡμί, σκεδάννυμι κεδάν- 
νυμι, ΓΝΟΟΣ νόος, mind. 


4. Epenthesis is the insertion of one or more letters in the 
middle of a word ;-as ΜΑΘΩ μανθάνω, ἕπομαι ἔσπομαι. 


So ϑάνατος (ΘΑΝΩ), κάματος (KAMQ), κόναβος (ΚΟΠΩ), στεγανός 
στεγνός, τέμενος (τέμω), ἐνέπω (ΕΝΠΩ), ϑράσσω ταράσσω, ἀριθμός ἀρ- 
θμός. 50 ὀμφή (ΕΠΩ), κόμβος κόπος, ῥίμφα (ΡΙΦΩ), βένθος βάθος, 
κιγχάνω κιχάνω, πίμπρημι (ΠΡΑΩ), πίμπλημι (ΠΛΑΩ), καγχλάζω (XAA- 
ZQ), κιγκράω (KPAQ). So δαρδάπτω δάπτω, ἀκροάομαι ἀκούω, ἄγρυπνος 
aimvos. 


5. Syncope is an omission of the vowel-sound of a syllable 
from the middle of a word ; as πατέρος πατρός, μιμένω μίμνω, ἤλυ- 
θον ἦλθον. 


This term is used also when one or more consonants are omitted 
from the middle of a word; as ἔκπλαγλος ἔκπαγλος, λελίλημαι λελίη- 
μαι, πλύελος πύελος. 


6. Paragoge is the adding of one or more letters to the end 
of a word ; 88 ἐκεῖνος ἐκεινοσί, ἔφης ἔφησθα. 


7. Apocope is the cutting off of one or more letters from the 
end of a word; as dpa dp, παρεχόντων παρεχόντω, μισθούσθων 
μισθούσθω. 


Nore 1. When μὰ, yp arise from a syncope or metathesis, the 
labial 8 (kindred to μ) is inserted between them ; thus MOAQ μέμβλω- 
κα, pedo μέμβλεται, sted ἡμέρα μεσημβρία, γαμερός γαμβρός, ἁμορτός 
ἄμβροτος, ἥμαρτον ἤμβροτον, εἵμαρμαι ἔμβραμαι. 

At the beginning of a word, μβλ, μβρ drop p; thus Brocka, ren 
tés, for μβλώσκω, μβροτός. 

As to βλάξ, βλίσσω, from μαλακός, μέλι, they might have come 
from μβλάξ, μβλίσσω ; or from μλάξ, μλίσσω, by changing p into β, 
according to another analogy. 


Note 2. Not unfrequently, the same word undergoes apheresis or 
syncope ; as ξύν (κσύν) ξυνός, σύν, κοινός, Cu, CON-, COMMuUnNIS 
common 


22 LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. {§ 13. 


So κτείνω, καίνω, Seivw, Saveiv, caedo, cudo, cut; Ἐρήγνυμι, py 
prupe, Εάγνυμι, ἄγνυμι, frango. 


EUPHONIC CHANGES. 


AB 18. 1. When two mutes come together, the first is changed 


into its corresponding smooth, middle, or rough, according as 
the second is smooth, middle, or rough: when both are of the 
sameé power, no change takes place. Εἰ. g. τέτριβται τέτριπται, 
ἦγται Herat, ἐλέγθην ἐλέχθην. 

So γέγραφται γέγραπται, τέτευχται τέτευκται, ἐτμίβθην ἐτρίφθην, ἐτύ- 
wOnv ἐτύῴθην, ἐπλέκθην ἐπλέχθην, κύφδα κύβδα, ἐπιγράφδην ἐπιγρά- 
᾿βδην, ἔπδομος ἕβδομος, ὄκδοος ὄγδοος. 

it is observed here that a lingual (7, 8,3) is never found before a 
Jabial or palatal (mw, 8, @; κ, y, x)» 


2. A palatal (x, x) before » is commonly changed into y; γ) 
of course, undergoes no change before μὲ; as πέπλεκμαι πέπλε- 
γμαι, τέτευχμαι τέτευγμαι. ΐ 

Sometimes κ before » becomes x; as ἰωκμός ἰωχμός, ἀκακμένος ἀκα- 
χμένος, αἰκμή αἰχμή. 

3. A palatal (y, x) before σ is changed into x, in which case 


xo is written €; x, of course, undergoes no change before σ ; as 
λέγσω λέξω (λέκσω), τεύχσω τεύξω (τεύκσω). 


4. A labial (π, 8, ¢) before p» is always changed into p; as 
λέλειπμαι λέλειμμαι, τέτριβμαι τέτριμμαι, γέγραφμαι γέγραμμαι. 


5. A labial (8, ¢) before σ is changed into π, in which case 
wo is written ~; a, of course, undergoes no change before c, 


as τρίβσω τρίψω (τρίπσω), γράφσω γράψω (γράπσω). 
7. A lingual (r, 8, 6, ¢) before » is commonly changed into 
σ; as ἦδμαι ἧσμαι, πέπειθμαι πέπεισμαι, φρόντιζμα φρόντισμα. 


8. A lingual (τ, δ, 6, ¢) before σ, or before a palatal (x, , 


x), is always dropped; as ἔπετσα ἔπεσα, ᾷδσω dow, πλάθσω πλά- - 


ve, φροντίζσω φροντίσω : ἧδκα ἧκα, πέπειθκα πέπεικα, πεφρόντιζκα 


σ-εφρόντικα. : 
9. A lingual (7, 8, 6, ¢) before another lingual is, in verbs 


and verbal nouns, changed into σ᾿; as ἦδται ἧσται, tre ἴστε, πέ-. 


vAabra πέπλασται, φροντιζτής φροντιστής. 


10. A mute consonant béfore co is, in certain cases, changed, 
by assimilation, into σι; as φρίκσω φρίσσω, πέπσω πέσσω, βλίτσω 


δλίσσω. ΚΑ 





§ 18.} EUPHONIC CHANGES, 23 


So πράγσω πράσσω, τύχσαι τόσσαι (for τύσσαι), φάβσα acca, 
orca ὄσσα, πλάθσω πλάσσω, Fadca Faooa, πίκσα πίσσα. 


11. When κατά loses its final vowel before a consonant, 
the τ is by assimilation changed into that consonant. But 
when that consonant is ¢, x, the r becomes a, x, respectively. 
Before 3 or another τὶ it of course remains unchanged. (ὃ 7, 3.) 
Ih. g. κατάβαλε κάββαλε, καταθανεῖν κατθανεῖν, κατακείοντες κακκεί- 
DYTES. 


So κατέλιπον κάλλιπον, καταμένω καμμένω, κατανεύσας καννεύσας, 
᾿ κατέπεσε κάππεσε, καταρέζω καρρέζω, κατατανύσας καττανύσας. So in 
elision, κατὰ γόνυ, καγγόνυ (pronounced kag-gonu); κατὰ δύναμιν, 
καδδύναμιν ; κατὰ ϑάλασσαν, κατθάλασσαν; κατὰ κεφαλήν, κακκεφα- 
λήν ; κατὰ μὲν, καμμὲν ; κατὰ τό, καττό ; κατὰ φάλαρα, καπφάλαρα. 


Before two consonants, xar- becomes κα- 3 aS κατέκτανε κάκτα- 
ve, κατέσχεθε κάσχεθε, κατάβλημα κάβλημαυ ‘The Doric dialect, 
however, sometimes drops the 7, even before a single conso- 
nant; as κατάβηθι κάβασι, κατέπετον κάπετον. 


12. = between two consonants is dropped; as ἔψαλσθε 
ἔψαλθε, πεφάνσθαι πεφάνθαι, ἐσπάρσθαι ἐσιπάρθαι. 


Nore 1. The preposition ἐκ before a consonant remains unaltered ; 
as ἐκσκορπίζω, ἐκδέρω, ἐκθρώσκω, ἐκμαίνω. 


(a) In ancient inscriptions, ἐκ before β, 8, A, μ, or F, is often 
changed into ἐγ; as ἐγ Βενδιδείων, ἐγδόσεις, ἐγ λιμένος, ἐγ Μυρίνης, 
ἐγεηληθίωντι. 


(Ὁ) Before σ, ἐκ in Attic inscriptions is sometimes written éy ; 
thus, ἐχ Σάμου. 


(c) Frequently, the κ of ἐκ and the initial o of the noun following 
were represented by €; as ἐξουνιέων, ἐξύρου, for ἐκ Σουνιέων, ἐκ Σύ- 
_ pov, found in inscriptions, 


(4) We find also, ἔλλυσιν, ἐττῶν, ἐχθειάσας, ὑπέχθηται, ὑπεχθεσι- 
μος, for ἔκλυσιν, ἐκ τῶν, ἐκθειάσας, ὑπέκθηται, ὑπεχθέσιμος. ΄ 


Nore 2. In one of the most ancient inscriptions, ἄπθιτον is found 
for ἄφθιτον. 


Nore 3. During the most flourishing period of the Attic dialect, a 
palatal before o was changed into x, and a labial, into ᾧ ; as ἔδοχσεν 
ἔδοξεν, χσυνελέχσαμεν ᾿ξυνελέξαμεν, παραδεχσάσθων παραδεξάσθων; 
᾿ γρύφς γρύψ,, ἀνέγραφσαν ἀνέγραψαν, found in inscriptions. 

__ In the other dialects, a palatal before ¢ was changed into κ, and ἃ 
Tabial, into. In process of time this rule became general ; that is, 


_ &, Ψ were, by the later Greeks, sounded like xo, ro, respectively. 


Nore 4. Words beginning with o followed by a consonant do not 
lose their o in composition with πρός ; as προσσπένδω, προσσχών. 


24 ᾿ | LETTERS AND SYLLABLSs. [§ 14. 


_ Nore 5, In ancient inscriptions we find ταστήλας, εἰστῆλας, for 
Tas στήλας, εἰς στήλας. 


Nore 6. TS is found only in foreign words; as Toudy, Tsade, a 
Hebrew letter.. 


As to the unintelligible inscription SOTSOTOSAES, most preposter- — 


ously tortured into Σώζου rod Σαῆς, that is, This is the vase ‘‘of So- 


zus the son of Saé”’ (his mother), it is nothing more than a string οὗ 


Greek letters without any meaning. (Franz’s Epigraph. Graec., 
9. 345.) 


Ss 14. 1. Before a labial (z, 8, ¢), ν is changed into μ: as 
ἐνπίπτω ἐμπίπτω, συνβαίνω συμβαίνω, ἐνφανής ἐμφανής, ἔνψυχος (Eve 
τουχοςῚ)ὴ ἔμψυχος. 


2. Before a palatal (x, y, x), v is changed into y; as συνκαίω 
συγκαίω, συνγενής συγγενής, συνχέω συγχέω, ἐνξέω (ἐνκσέω) ἐγξέω, 
μελάνκαρπος μελάγκαρπος. 


3. Before ἃ liquid (A, μ, p), ν is changed into that liquid, 


as συνλέγω συλλέγω, ἐνμένω ἐμμένω, συνρέω συρρεω. 


4. In many instances ν is dropped before σ, and the preced- 
ing vowel, if short, is lengthened; in which case ε, o become 
ει, ov, respectively ; as péAavs μέλᾶς, κτένς κτείς, διδόνσι διδοῦσι, 
δεικνύνσι δεικνῦσι ; βουλεύωνσι βουλεύωσι. : ; 

So τάλανς τάλας, μούσανς μούσας, βεβουλεύκανσι βεβουλεύκᾶσι, 
ἱστάνσι ἱστᾶσι, ἕνς εἷς, τιθένσι τιθεῖσι, βουλεύονσι βουλεύουσι, λόγονς 
λόγους. 

5. When after the ν a lingual (7, 8, 3) has also been dropped 
before σ (ὃ 13, 8), the preceding short vowel is almost always 
lengthened ; as βουλεύσαντς βουλεύσας, ϑέντς Seis, A€ovTar λέουσι, 
δύντς dvs. 

So δεικνύντς δεικνύς, φθίντσα φθῖσα, σπένδσω σπείσω, πένθσομαι 
πείσομαι. 

The dative plural of adjectives in εἰς does not lengthen the e be- 
fore σι; as φωνήεντσι φωνήεσι, perhaps the only example. 


6. When the root of a noun of the third declension ends in 
ν, this letter is dropped before σι in the dative plural, without 
_any further change ; as Saipovor δαίμυσι, λιμένσι λιμέσι, μηνσὶ 
μησί. 


7. Σύν in composition drops ν when the word with which it~ 


is compounded begins with ¢ or with o followed by a conso- 
nant; as σύνζυγος σύζυγος, συνστροφή συστροφή. ᾿ς 
The same rule applies to the Aolic ὁν- for ἀν-, dvd; a8 ὀνσκάπτω 





8 141 EUPHONIC CHANGES. 2: 


ὀσκάπτω, ὄνστασαν ὄστασαν, ὀνστάθεις ὀστάθεις. So ἄττασι, Lacoman 
for ἄν-σταθι ἀνάστηθι. 


8. Sometimes, ν before σ followed by a vowel is changed 
mto σ᾽ ; 85 σύνσιτος σύσσιτος, πανσυδί πασσυδί. 


So παλίνσυτος παλίσσυτος, χαρίενσα χαρίεσσα, πρόφρανσα προ- 
φρασσα. 


9. In the Ionic dialect, the personal ending vo. becomes acs, 
in verbs in pe; Yr at, in all kinds of verbs, becomes ἄται; as 
ἱστάνσι (ἱστάασι) ἱστέασι, τιθένσι τιθέασι, ἔνσι ἔασι, διδόνσι διδόασι, 
δεικνύνσι δεικνύασι : δέδεχνται δεδέχαται, πεπότηνται πεποτήαται. 


Note 1. The combinations pr, μβ, wp, yx, yy, yx were original- 
ly written vir, vB, vd, ve, vy, vx, even in words in which p and y are 
apparently radical letters ; as συνπρόεδρος, Πάνφιλος, ἔ ἔνκαιρος, παλιν- 
λύτων, συνμαχία, πένπτος; λανβάνειν, ἀμενφές, Μίνκων, ἐνγύς, λανχά- 
νειν, found in ancient inscriptions. 

Nore 2, At the end of a word, ν was often pronounced and written 
as if it were a part of the following word ; as τὴμ πόλιν, ἐστιμ᾽ περί, 
ἐμ βουλευτηρίῳ, τὸμ φόρον, μὲμ Ψψυχάς : τῶγ καιρῶν, ἂγ καί, roy 
γραμματέα, ἱερῶγ χρημάτων : τὸλ Adyov, TOA λογιστῶν, τὴμ Μυσίαν : ᾿ 
ἐς Σιδῶνι, ἐς Σάμῳ, ἐς σύλῳ, ἐς στήλῃ (also ἐστήλῃ OF εἰστήλῃ), ἐς Σίγ- 
ye, all found in ancient inscriptions. 


Note 3. (a) The olic dialect changes avo OT ayto, ove OF ovra, 
into αισ, 010, respectively ; ; as μέλανς μέλαις, νύμφανς νύμφαις, πάντς 
πάνς παΐς : τόνς τοίς, νόμονς νόμοις, ἀρμόζοντσα ἀρμόζονσα ἀρμόζοισα. 

(Ὁ) The old Dorie dialect changes evo, OVO, into no, ao, respec 
tively ; as ἕνς ἧς, χαρίεντς χαρίενς χαρίης, καταλυμακωθέντς καταλυ- 
μακωθής: διδόντσι διδόνσι διδῶσι, μετέχοντσι μετέχονσι μετέχωσι, τόνς 
τώς, ἵππονς ἵππως. 

(c) The Beeotic changes ove into wo, after the analogy of the Dor- 
ic ; 3- aS ἰόνσα ἐῶσα, ἐσγόνονς ἐσγόνως. 


Notes 4. The Latin ending -ens is, in Grecized names, changed into 
~ns, after the analogy of the Doric dialect ; as Clemens, Κλήμης. 

Nore 5. Ν is not dropped before o in the following cases : 

(a) In the ending -vs; thus, ἔλμινς, πείρινς, Τίρυνς. 

(b) In the second person singular of the perfect passive, and in ver 


bal nouns in -νσὲς ; as πέφανσαι, πάχυνσις, πέπανσις. Also in κέν 
σαι, aor, act, inf. from κεντέω. 


(c) Πάλεν and πᾶν often retain » before o; as παλίνσκιος, πανσέ- 
Anvos. 

(d) The Argives and Cretans retained the original combination vo , 
as evs, τιθένς, τόνς, πρειγευτάνς, ὑπαρχόνσας, πάνσας. 

Nore 6. Ey usually remains unaltered before σ, p, ᾧ; a8 ἐνράπτω, 
ἐνσάττω, ἐνζεύγνυμι. 
2 


26 ‘LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. - [§ 15. 


Norte 7. The Doric and Thessalian dialects often changed the end- 
ings -avs, -evs, -ovs, into -ds, -ες, τος; as τέχνανς τέχνᾶς, πά- 
σανς πάσᾶς, τάλανς τάλᾶς, μέλανς μέλᾶς, Αἴαντος Αἴᾶς, πράξαντς πρά- 
ξᾶς, χαρίεντς χαρίες ; εὐεργετέντς εὐεργετές, ‘Thessalian. 

Nore 8. (a) ΓΑγαν drops ν in ἀγακλυτός, ἀγασϑενής, ἀγάστονος. 

(0) The A£olic ὁ ν-, for ἀν-, and that for ἀνά, drops ν in ὀ-μνάσϑην, 
for ἀναμνησϑῆναι, found in an inscription. 

Note 9. Ἔππασις or ἔπασις, Beotic for ἔγκτησις, possession, 
property, compounded of ἐν and πάσις from ΠΑΟΜΑΙ. 


*§ 18. 1. When, in the formation of a compound word, a 
‘smooth consonant (z, x, τὴ comes in contact with a vowel hay- 
ing the rough breathing, that smooth consonant 1s changed into 
its corresponding rough consonant (¢, x, 6), and the rough 
breathing disappears ; as ἀφ-ίημι, for ἀπ-ἴημι, from ἀπό ty; δε- 
xnpepos, for δεκ-ἥμερος, from δέκα ἡμέρα; καθ-αιρέω, for κατ-αἱρέω, 
from κατά αἱρέω. 


y2. When, of two successive words, the first ends in a smooth 
consonant, and the next begins with a vowel having the rough 
breathing, that smooth consonant is changed into its correspond- 
ing rough; as ἀφ᾽ οὗ, for ἀπ᾽ ov; οὐχ ὑμεῖς, for οὐκ ὑμεῖς ; μεθ᾽ 
ἡμῶν, for μετ᾽ ἡμῶν. 


So ἔσθ᾽ ὅπως, for ἔστιν ὅπως ; νύχθ᾽ ὅλην, for νύκτ᾽ ὅλην ; τίφθ᾽ οὗ 


tas, for τίπτ᾽ οὕτως ; (ᾧ 13, 1.) 


3. In reduplications, when two successive syllables would 
each have a rough consonant, the first rough consonant is 
changed into its corresponding smooth; as πέφηνα, κέχηνα, τέθη- 
Aa, for φέφηνα, χέχηνα, θέθηλα. 


So φροντίζω πεφρόντικα, χράω κέχρηκα, ϑλάω τέϑλακα, ϑέω τίϑημι, 

ΑΦΩ ἀπαφίσκω, AXO ἀκαχίζω, ΦΛΑΖΩ παφλάζω. 
~(a) Also, in the aorist passive of Siw and τίθημι; thus, ἐτύθην, 
ἐτέθην, for ἐπύθην, ἐθέθην. 

(Ὁ) Also, in the following words: ΘΑΦΩ, barra, ἐτάφην; ΘΑΧΥΣ 
ταχύς, θάσσων; ΘΡΕΦΩ, τρέφω. θρέψω; OPAXQ, θράσσω, τέτρηχα; 
ΘΡΕΧΩ, τρέχω, θρέξομαι; ΘΡΥΦΩ, θρύπτω, ἐτρύφην; θρίξ, τριχός. 

4. The personal ending θὲ of the aorist passive imperative 
becomes rz when the preceding syllable has a rough consonant ; 
as βουλεύθητι for βουλεύθηθι. 

Nore 1. In a few instances, the rough breathing affects the smooth 


mute without coming in immediate contact with it; thus, τέθριππον 
<zfr "apes ἵππος), φροῦδος (πρό ὁδός), Soiparioy (τὸ ἱμάτιον), Shere 





§ 16.] ' EUPHONIC CHANGES. 27 


pov (rod ἡμετέρου), Sovdaros (τοῦ ὕδατος), Sarepou (τοῦ ἁτέρου), χὠ 
(καὶ 6), x@ (καὶ οἱ), φροίμιον (πρό οἴμη or οἵμη, κὶ 4, n. 2). 


Norte 2. ΘΑΦΩ, to be astonished, has pertect τέϑαφα, τέϑ ἡπα. 
Ἔχω, to have, has perfect participle συντ-οχω κὼ ς, for συν-οκωχώς. 


Ν oTE 3. The Ionic dialect deviates from the first two rules ; as am- 
κνέομαι, κατεύδω, ar οὗ, οὐκ οἷος, μετ᾽ ἡμῶν, for ἀφικνέομαι, Kadevdeo, 
a? οὗ, οὐχ οἷος, peS ἡμῶν. 

This seems to show that the Ionians did not pronounce the rough 
breathing ; for the sake of uniformity, however, this breathing is, in 
our editions of the Ionic writers, suffered to retain its place. 


' Nore 4. In strictness, the second rule ought to read thus: When, 
of two successive words, the first ends in a smooth consonant, and the 
_ next begins with a vowel having the rough breathing, that smooth con- 
 sonant is changed into its corresponding rough, and the rough breath- 
_ ing disappears. Thus, in inscriptions, in which H stands for the rough 

_ breathing, we find KAOEKASTON, καθ᾽ ἕκαστον ; ΚΑΘΟΤΙ, καϑ᾽ ὅτι. 

In order however not to disturb the usual orthography of the second 
. hate the rough breathing is, in our editions, suffered to retain its 
_ piace. 












Movable N, 3, K. 


$46, 1. The dative plural in « is written witha final ν 
_ when the next word bégins with a vowel ; as θηρσὶ κακοῖς, θηρσὶν 
᾿ ἀγρίοις. 

This rule applies also to the adverbial datives in σι; as Αθή- 
mow, Θήβησιν, Πλαταιᾶσιν, Ολυμπιᾶσιν. 


: 2. Also, the Epic siege pe; as θύρηφιν, ἀγέληφιν, θεόφιν, 
ὄχεσφιν. 


᾿ 3. Also, the demonstrative ending é i, but rarely, and then al- 
ways after To 3 as ἐκεινοσίν, οὑτοσίν, τουτουσίν, οὑτωσίν. 





4, Also, all third persons in «and ε:; as φησὶ Σωκράτης, φη- 
σὶν οὗτος 3 τύπτουσι τούτους, τύπτουσιν αὐτούς 3 ἔλεγε τούτοις, ἔλε- 
γεν αὐτοῖς. 


5. Also, the numeral εἴκοσι, which however can stand before 
a vowel without ν movable; as εἴκοσι ἔτη. 
6. Also, the adverbs πέρυσι, νόσφι, νύ, κέ. 


Nore 1. The Poets may for the sake of the metre use this » be- 
fore a consonant ; as ἔστερξιν μέγα. 


_ Norse 2. The Poets may drop ν in the adverbial ending Sev; as ἄλ- 
Aose for ἄλλοθεν. 



















28 LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. [88 17, 18. 


Note 3. The Tonians- most commonly omit this » before a vowel ; 
as προσέλασε ὁ ἱππεύς. 


Norte 4. N movable may be used also at the end of complete sen- 
tences, sections, books, and most kinds of verse. 


Note 5. In ancient inscriptions, this ν is often used before a conso- | 
nant, and as often omitted before a vowel; as ἐγραμμάτευε Εὐπείϑης 
εἶπε ἀποδοῦναι, ταμίασι οἷς, ἔδοξεν τῇ Beane. ἔδωκεν Συκειεῦσιν. 


417. 1. Ex before a vowel, or at the end of a verse, be- 
comes ἐξ (ἐκς, éxs); as ἐκ τούτου, ἐξ ἐκείνου, ἐκτίνω ἐξέτινον ; κακῶν 
ἕξ, for ἐκ κακῶν. 

Οὕτω s, thus, commonly drops s before a consonant ; as οὕτως 
εἶπεν, οὕτω φησί. 

“Axpes and μέχρις drop s before a consonant, and often 
even before a vowel; as μέχρι σκότος ἐγένετο ; ἄχρι ἂν ζῶ ; μέ:- 
xpt ἐνταῦθα. [ 

Ατρέμα, μεσηγύ, ἄφνω, before a vowel ἀτρέμας, μεσηγύς, 
ἄφνως. 

1θύ or ἰθύς, straight to, Ionic. 





2. Adverbs in axis may, in the Ionic dialect, drop s; as moA- 
Adxis, lonic πολλάκι. 


3. οὐ, before a vowel οὐκ, before a vowel with the rough 
breathing οὐχ; but only when it is immediately connecte¢ with 
the following word ; as ov σοφός, οὐκ ἐγώ, οὐχ ἡμεῖς. 

At the endifa clause, it is always pronounced and written 
ov, no, not. 

M 7 follows the analogy of οὐ only in the compound μηκέτι, 
formed after the analogy of οὐκέτι. 


Note. Sometimes the addition or omission of ς slightly modifies 
the meaning of the word ; thus, ἀμφί ἀμφίς, ἐν εἰς (evs), ἀντικρύ ἄντι- 


Kpus, ev3U ἐυπύς, πώς πω. 


CONTRACTION AND SYNIZESIS. 


§ 18. Two successive syllables, of which the former end 
m, and the other begins with, a vowel, may be contracted i 
one long syllable. 


Ν᾿ - 
1. Two syllables may be contracted by simply removing 
mark of dizresis (7) ; as τείχεϊ τείχει, ὀΐομαι οἴομαι, πληθύϊ wr 
εἰΐσσω ᾷσσω, ἤϊα 7a, λώϊστος λῷστος. 


2. Ἑ before or after εἰ, ἡ, ἢ» οι, Ov, ὦ, av, is dropped ; as Pd εἰ 


- 


. 


ᾧ 18.] CONTRACTION AND SYNIZESIS. 29. 


φιλεῖς, φιλέητε φιλῆτε, φιλέῃ φιλῇ, φιλέοι φιλοῖ, φιλέουσι φιλοῦσι. 


φιλέω φιλῶ, ἑαυτοῦ αὑτοῦ. 


3. Ο before or after αι, οἱ, , @, ov, also after εἰ, is dropped ; 
as διπλόαι διπλαῖ, δηλόοις δηλοῖς, δηλόω SNAG, TAd@ πλῷ, δηλόουσι 
δηλοῦσι, πλεῖον πλεῖν. ι 


4. A before g, a, and after ov, is dropped ; as μνάᾳ μνᾷ, μνά- 
αι μναῖ, ovas οὖς. 


5. The remaining cases are exhibited in the following table. 


αα ---- ἃ ; aS μνάα μνᾶ. 

ae — ἃ, Doric and Beeotic n ; νικάετε νικᾶτε 1). νικῆτε, ἐνίκαε ἐνίκα 
D. ἐνίκη, ὅραε ὅρα 1). ὅρη. 

an — ἃ, Doric 7 ; τιμάητε τιμᾶτε, ὁράῃ ὁρᾷ D. dp7. 

αο ----- , olic, Boeotic, and Doric ἃ ; τιμάομεν τιμῶμεν, ἀσαόμε- 

vou ἀσώμενοι AL. Β. Ὁ. ἀσάμενοι, πεινάοντι 1). πεινᾶντι, ἤραο ἤρω 
ἦρα, ArpeiSao Ατρείδᾶ, Μενέλαος Μενέλας. 

aw —, Aolic and Doric ἃ; μουσάων μουσῶν AL. μοισᾶν Ὦ. μω- 
σᾶν, Ποσειδάων Ποσειδῶν AL. Ιποσείδαν 1). Ποσειδάν, φάωντι φᾶντι͵ 
ἰσάωντι ἰσᾶντι. 

ea — 13 συκέα συκῆ, Ἑρμέας ‘Eppis, κρέας Doric κρῆς. In neuters 
of the second declension, and in the accusative plural of the 
first, ea becomes ἃ ; as ὀστέα ὀστᾶ, χρύσεα χρυσᾶ, συκέας συ- 
kas; also when it is preceded by ἃ vowel or p; as ὑγιέα ὑγιᾶ, 
xoéa χοᾶ, Πειραιέα Πειραιᾶ, κλέεα κλέα, ἀργυρέα ἀργυρᾶ. 

But in the third declension -pea becomes -py ; as τριήρεα τρι- 
jpn. In the same declension, ea sometimes becomes ἢ even 
after a vowel ; as διφυέα διφυῆ. 

ee — εἰ, (olic and Doric 7; as φιλεέτω φιλείτω AL. 1). φιλήτω, 
φιλέετε φιλεῖτε AL. D. φιλῆτε. The Attic sometimes follows 
the analogy of the Doric; as βασιλέες βασιλεῖς or βασιλῆς, 
περικαλλέε περικαλλῆ. 

eo —ov, Doric and Ionic ev; as ϑέρεος ϑέρευς, ϑάμβεος ϑάμβευς, 
φιλέομεν φιλεῦμεν, στεφανέονται στεφανοῦνται στεφανεῦνται. ‘The 
verbal ending edox for οὔσι is contracted from ἔον σι ; as οἶγνε- 
ovat οἰχνεῦσι (οἰχνέονσι). 

ue —i; as ἱερός ἱρός, ἱέραξ ἴρηξ, AZolic, Beeotic, and Ionic. 

u —t3 as πόλιι πόλι, Sivos δῖος, Χίιος Χῖος. 

οα --- ἃ OF w3 ἁἅπλόα ἁπλᾶ. 

οε -- οὐ, old Doric ὦ ; δηλόετε δηλοῦτε, προεγγυεύω mpovyyuria 
Doric πρωγγυεύω. So in the Doric infinitives μαστιγόεν μαστι- 
γῶν, prydev ῥιγῶν, στεφανόεν στεφανῶν. 


on — @; δηλόητε δηλῶτε, διδόητε διδῶτε. In nouns of the first de- 


clension, o is dropped ; as ἁπλόη ἁπλῆ. 


30 LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. [δὲ 19, 20. 


oo—ov, AXolic, Baeotic, and old Doric ὦ ; δηλόομεν δηλοῦμεν, 
πλόον πλοῦν, μισθόοντι μισθῶντι. 
ve —v ; ἰχθύες ἰχθῦς, δρύες δρῦς. 


6. When the second syllable is a diphthong, its first vowel is 
contracted with the preceding syllable according to the preced- 
ing paragraph (except the cases mentioned in the second, 
third, and fourth paragraphs) ; as τιμάεις or τιμάῃς τιμᾷς, Doric 
τιμῇς; τιμάοιμεν τιμῷμεν, χρυσέᾳ χρυσῇ, τιμήεις τιμῇς, διδόῃς διδῷς. 
-aov, in verbs, contracts ao into and then drops v; as χράου 

χρῶ, τιμάου τιμῶ. 

-eat, in nouns, merely drops ε: as χρύσεαι χρυσαῖ, συκέαις συ- 
καῖς ; in verbs it becomes -ῃ, Attic -εἰὶ ; as βουλεύεαι βουλεύῃ 
βουλεύει. : 

“αι in the subjunctive passive becomes -ἢ; as βουλεύηαι βου- 
λεύῃ, οἴηαι οἴη. 

-o€t, -o7, in verbs in ow, become -or; 85. δηλόεις δηλοῖς, δηλόῃς δη- 
ois, δηλόῃ δηλοῖ. As to such contractions as δηλοῦν, Οποῦς, 
from δηλόειν, Orders, they came from the original -dev, -devs ; 
thus δηλόεν δηλοῦν, Orders Οποῦς. : 

In verbs in ow, the Doric contracts oe, οῃ into ῳ ; as στε- 
φανόει, πριόῃ, Doric στεφανῷ, pr, found in inscriptions. 


§ 19. Two successive syllables, of which the former ends 
in, and the other begins with, a vowel, may be so rapidly 
uttered as to form but one syllable. ‘This is called synizésis or 
synecphonésis. : 

The first of the vowels thus contracted is most commonly ε, 
and sometimes 43; as στήθεα, ἡμέας, κρέα, θεοί, θεοῦ, πόλιος, Ἵστιαί 
αν, ἱερεύουσα, χρυσέῳ. So ὄγδοον (Od. 7, 261), δακρύοισι, δηΐοιο, 
δηΐων, δηΐοισι, ἤϊα. 

Nore. In such cases ε and « were probably sounded not unlike y 
in yet, yes, you, your; thus πόλιος πόλψος ; ἱερεύουσα, Yepevouca ; 
χρυσέῳ ava (originally χρυσεοι ava), χρῦσψο avd. It must not be sup- 
Sed bison that « and ε, thus hardened, had the power of ordinary 
consonants, for they never make position with a preceding consonant ; 
thus πόλψος is a pyrrhich, not a trochee. 


CRASIS AND ELISION. 


§ 29. Two successive words are, in many instances, con- 
tracted into one, when the former ends in, and. the next begins 
with, a vowel. ‘This kind of contraction is called crasis. The 
ποόρμρι (ὴ is generally placed over the syllable thus con- 
tracted. ; ῖ 





——— ὁ «οὐδ δου ον Στ, 5 


ὭΣ 





—— μμομνῥα, 





§ 21.} CRASIS AND ELISION. 31 


1. The words, of which the final syllable may be contract- 
ed with the next word, are chiefly the article, the relative pro- 
noun, and the conjunction καί, and ; as ὁ ἀνήρ, ἁνήρ ; ἃ ἐδανείσα. 
το, Gdaveioaro ; ἃ ἄν, ἅν. ; 

So ὁ ἐκ, οὗκ ; ὁ ἐπί, οὑπί ; ἡ ἐπαρή, ἡπαρή ; τὸ ἀληθές, τἀληθές ; τὸ 
ἐναντίον, τοὐναντίον ; τὸ ὄνομα, τοὔνομα ; τὰ ἀγαθά, τἀγαθά; ὃ ἐφόρουν, 
οὑφόρουν ; ἐγὼ οἶδα, ἐγῴδα ; ποῦ ἐστιν, ποῦ ᾽στιν. 


2. When the preceding word ends in ἃ diphthong, the sec- 
ond vowel (1, v) of that diphthong is dropped before the two 
words are contracted into one ; as of ἀδελφοί, ἁδελφοί ; τῷ dov- 
Aw, τὠσύλῳ 5 Kal εἶτα, Kara. 

So τῇ ἐπαρῇ; τἠπαρῇ ; τοὶ Ἀργεῖοι, τἀργεῖοι ; καὶ ἐγώ, κἀγώ ; καὶ ἐπί- 
στατον, κἀπίστατον ; καὶ ἀφ᾽ ὕψους, Kap’ ὕψους ; καὶ ἐν, κἄν ; τοῦ ἡμε- 
τέῤου, Onperépov ; τοι ἄν, Tay ; τοι ἄρα, τἄρα ; μέντοι ἄν, μεντᾶν. 


Nore 1. In many editions, the ἐ of καί is subscribed; as κἀγώ, Kay. 
But this orthography is incorrect, first, because no contraction can take 
place as long asc retains its place ; secondly, because in ancient in- 
scriptions it is omitted. : 

The Elean inscription however has TOINTAYT, which is commonly 
supposed to stand for τῷ ’vradr’, that is τῷ ἐνταῦθα. In another in- 
scription we find also KAIMON, that is καὶ μὸν, κἀμόν ; but this seems 
to be an error of the stone-cutter, for in the same inscription we find 
KA®YVOY3, that is cad’ ὕψους, καὶ ἀφ᾽ ὕψους. 


Note 2. The forms ἅτερος θατέρου θατέρῳ θάτερον come from 4, 
τοῦ, τῷ, TO, and ἅτερος for the usual ἕτερος. 


Nore 3. Kai drops a before the diphthongs az, et, ev, ov; 85 καὶ 
αἴτις, καΐτις ; Kal εἴκοσι, KelkooL; Kal εὐσεβέων, κεὐσεβέων ; Kal οὐκέτι, 
> 7 
κοὐκέτι. 


Nore 4. In crasis, the lonic dialect contracts oa into ὦ ; as τὸ dyad 
μα τὥγαλμα ; ὁ ἄριστος, ὥριστος ; of ἄλλοι, ὥλλοι ; ὁ αὐτός, wdTds ; TOT 
ἀγῶνος, τὠγῶνος. 

Note 5. When the first werd apparently remains unaltered, the 
coronis may be placed over the space Separating the two words; as 
“ἃ ἔδωκας, Gdwxas or ἅ ᾽δωκας. 

So ὦ ἄνθρωπε, ὥνθρωπε ΟΥ̓ ὦ νθρωπε; ὦ ἄνερ, dvep or ὦ ’vep; ὦ 
ἀγαθέ, ayabe or ὦ ᾽γαθέ; ποῦ ἐστι, ποὖστι OF ποῦ ᾽στι ; μὴ ἔθιγες, μῆ- 

43 fii Ne we ve , € 9 , 
θιγες or μή ᾽θιγες ; ἡ ἐπαρή, ἡπαρή OY ἡ ᾽παρή. 

Note 6. Crasis was very often left to pronunciation. Thus, in 
ancient inscriptions we find τοῦ αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἀρετῆς, τὸ ἄντρον, καὶ εὐσε- 
βέων, where the metre requires τωὐτοῦ, κἀρετῆς, τἄντρον, κεὐσεβέων. 

Even in our editions crasis is sometimes left to pronunciation ; as 
> Ν » \ > a > a > ‘a ’ > , Ἁ > , 
ἐπεὶ οὐ, μὴ OV, ἢ OV, ἢ εἰσόκεν, Ἐνυαλίῳ ἀνδρειφόντῃ, δὴ ἀφνειότατος, 
μὴ ἄλλος, εἰλαπίνη ἠέ, ἀσβέτῳ οὐδ᾽. 


ΦΙΕ,, When of two successive words the former ends with 


32 LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. [§ 22. 


a short vowel (except 3), and the other begins with a vowel, 
the former often drops, by elision, its final vowel, and the 
apostrophe (’) is put over the vacant space ; as διὰ ἐμοῦ, δι᾽ ἐμοῦ 
ἀχλὰ ἐγώ, ἀλλ᾽ ἐγώ ; ὅδε ἀνήρ, ὅδ᾽ ἀνήρ. 

So κατὰ αὐτῆς, κατ᾽ αὐτῆς ; ἀντὶ ἐκείνης, ἀντ᾽ ἐκείνης ; λέγοιμι ἄν, λέ- 
γοιμ᾽ ἄν ; ἐπὶ ἡμῖν, ἐφ᾽ ἡμῖν ; ἀντὶ ὧν, ἀνθ᾽ ὧν ; νύκτα ὅλην, νύχθ᾽ ὅλην. 

(a) Περί ἀπὰ πρό never lose their final vowels in the Attic dialect - 
as περὶ αὐτόν, πρὸ ἐμοῦ. 

(0) The dative of the third declension, and the conjunction ὅτε 
never lose « in the Attic dialect. 


Nore 1. The diphthong -az at the end of a word is sometimes elided 
by the Poets, but only in the verbal endings μαι, oat, ται, σθαι, and 
in the nominative plural of the first declension ; as βούλομαι ἐγώ, Bov- 
λομ᾽ ἐγώ ; ἦσαι ὀλιγηπελέων, Ho’ ὀλιγηπελέων ; ὀξεῖαι ὀδύναι, ὀξεῖ᾽ ὀδύ- 
sii. . 

Notre 2. The ®olians, Beotians, Dorians, and the Poets, some- 
‘times reject the final. vowel even when the next word begins with a 
consonant. This takes place in the prepositions ἀνά, παρά, κατά 
(δ 13, 11), and the adverb dpa; as ἂν vexvas, ἂν δέ, ἂμ μέγα, ἂμ πέλα- 
γος, ἂμ φόνον ; πὰρ Ζηνί, πὰρ ποσί; καδδύναμιν ; ἂρ φρένας. 

Strictly speaking, the preposition, in this case, and the next word 
should be written as one word ; thus ἀννέκυας, ἀνδέ, ἀμμέγα, ἀμπέλα- 
γος, ἀμφόνον, παρζΖηνί, maproci. 

Tort drops « before the article; as ποττό, worrois, ποττούτοισι, ποτ- 
τά. 

Nore 3. Elision was often left to pronunciation ; thus, in ancient 
metrical inscriptions we find εἰμὶ ἀνδριάς, ἔδρασε ἀγαϑά, τοιῶνδε ἀν- 
δρῶν, γένους τε ἕκατι, δὲ Ἀριστοκλῆς, σε ἄχρι. 


SYLLABICATION. 


§ 22. 1. There are as many syllables in a Greek 
word as there are vowel-sounds in it. 


2, Words of one syllable are called monosylla- 
bles ; of two, dissyllables ; and of more than two; 
volysyllables. 


3. The last syllable but one is called the penult , 
the last but two, the antepenult; thus, in ὀφϑαλμός, 


eye, μος is the last syllable, ¢Sad, the penult, and 6 
the antepenult. 








§§ 23, 24. ] SYLLABICATION. 33 


4. A syllable is called pure, when its vowel- 
sound is immediately preceded by the vowel-sound 
of the preceding syllable ; as a in Sea, goddess ; os 
In Seeds, god, ἥλιος, sun. 


§ 23. 1. Any single consonant can commence a Greek 
word. : 


2. The following combinations of consonants may com- 
mence a Greek word or a syllable: Bd, BA, Bp, yA, γν, γρ, ὃμ, 
dv, dp, OA, Ov, Op, KA, κμ, KY, KP, KT, py, TA, TY, TP, TT, OB, σ 6, ok, 
OKA, σκν, Op, OT, OTA, OT, OTA, OTP, TH, TX; TA, TH, TP, PO, PAs, 
Pps χθ, χλ, XM XP 

The following combinations also may commence a syllable : 
γδ, γμ, θμ, Tr, Pry χμ. 


§ 24. With respect to dividing a Greek word into syllables, 
the following rules are observed in the best editions : 


1. A single consonant standing between two vowels, or a 
combination of consonants capable of commencing a syllable, 
is placed at the beginning of the syllable ; as φυ-γή, flight ; 
ἑ-σπέ-ρα, evening ; ἐ-ρυ-θρός, red ; νέ-κταρ, nectar. 


2. When the combination cannot commence a syllable, its 
first consonant belongs to the preceding syllable; as ἵπ-πος, 
horse ; dv-rpov, grotio ; σκῆπ-τρον, sceptre ; τύρ-σις, lower; ay- 
χω, to choke, strangle. 


3. A compound word is resolved into its component parts, if 
the first part ends with a consonant. But if the first part ends 
with a vowel, the compound is divided like a simple word, even 
when that vowel has been cut off. E. g. ἐν-άγω, ἐξ-άγω, ἐκεφέ- 
0@, προσ-έρχομαι, av-d&tos, πα-ρουσία, ἀν-θίστημι. 


4. When elision takes place, the ‘preceding word is, in pro- 
nunciation, regarded as a part of the following; as ἀλ-λ᾽ οὐ-δέν, 
πα-ρ᾽ ἐ-μοῦ, ἐ-φ᾽ ᾧ, σέ-μν᾽ ἔ-πη. 2 

Nore. Syllabication is not based on any linguistic principle.. Ac- 


cording to Sextus, it is foolish talk (uwpodoyia). In ancient inscrip- 
tions, a word is divided where the line ends; as a-xpis, ax-pis, axp-ts, 


axpi-s. 


Q* 


84 LETTERS AND SYLLABLES, [δ 25. 


QUANTITY. 


ἃ 25. In any Greek word, every syllable is cither 
long or short. 3 


1. A syllable is long by nature when it has a 
long vowel or diphthong ; as, the penult of οἶκος, 
house, ἄνϑρωπος, man, caw, to burn, τιμή, honor. 


2. A syllable is said to be long by position when 
its vowel, being short by nature, is followed by two 
w more consonants, or by & & w; as, the penult of 
πίστις, confidence, ὅρκος, oath, φράξζω, to say, ἕψω, to 
cook. ᾿ 


3. When ἃ short vowel is followed by a mute and 
a liquid, the syllable is short in the Attic dialect; 
in the other dialects it is generally long; as, the pe- 
nult of τέκνον, child, ὕπνος, sleep, ὕβρις, haughtiness. 

But the syllable is almost always long when its 
vowel, being short by nature, is followed by Aa, yA, 
ye, γν, Su, Sv; as in ἀγνώς, unknown. 


ἄς Every syllable, which cannot be proved to be 
long, must be assumed to be short. 


This rule has reference only to a, 1, v. As to ε, 0, ἡ, ὦ, they pre- 
sent no difficulty whatever. 


Nore 1. A syllable may be long both by nature and by- position 
at the same time; as in μᾶλλον, Spat, πρᾶσσω, πρᾶγμα, πρήσσω, 
πρῆγμα, διωγμός. 

Nore 2. It must not be supposed that, when a syllable was long by 
position, its vowel was prolonged in pronunciation ; for, had this been 
the case, the Greek would have used ἡ for e, and @ for o, and such 
words as ra ἴσμεν, σκύμνος would have been accented ra 
ἶσμεν, kn cL ay the "nia would have used ἡ for a. i 

It is observed also that, when the Greeks wrote Latin words in 
Greek characters, they employed ε, o when the Latin e, 0 were short 
by nature, and ἡ, ὦ when they were long by nature, without reference 
to position; as centurio κεντυρίων, Tertius Τέρτιος, Sextus Σεξτος, 
Cornelius Κορνήλιος, census κῆνσος, Festus Φῆστος, Constantinus Κων- 





$§ 26, 27.]} | QUANTITY. | 35 


σταντῖνος. So Marcus Μάρκος, Flaccus Φλάκκος, Felix Φῆλιξ, where 
the accent shows that, in these words, a, ὃ are short by nature. 


Nore 3. © and ¥ make position because they are double consonants 
(§ 6,2). As to Z, its making position was owing to its strong vocal 
hassing ; for it has already been shown that it is not a double conso- 
nant. (§ 6, 2.) 


§ 26. The quantity of a, 1, v, in radical syllables, must be 
learned by observation. As a general rule, these vowels are 
short. Further, τ 


7. Every a, t, U, arising from contraction is long by nature ; 
as ἀέκων ἄκων, ἱέρηξ ἵρηξ, βότρυες Bérpis. 


%. Every ao, wo, vo, arising from ayro or avo, wo, ὑντσ᾽ ΟΥ̓ vva, 
is long by nature ; as μέλανς μέλᾶς, b tas φθῖσα, Cevyvivts ζευ- 


γνύνς Faryots: 


3. Derivative words generally retain the quantity of their 
primitives ; as τιμή dripos wodvripytos τμάω. 


4. The accent very often indicates the quantity of the last 
two syllables of a word. (See below.) 


5. A is long by nature when the Ionic dialect changes it into 
Nn, aS Πρίαπος, ἾΑγις, lonic Πρίηπος, Ἦγις. 


§ 27. Quantity of the Endings of the Declensions. 


1. First Declension. 


-a of the nominative singular is always short when the genitive enas 
in -ys; as d6&a δόξης. 

All proparoxytones and properispomena of course have the a 
short ; as ἀλήθεια, μοῖρα, δῖα. 

Oxytones and paroxytones which have τας in the genitive have τα 
long in the nominative ; as χαρά χαρᾶς, πέτρα πέτρας. Except pid, 
Κίρρᾶ, Πύρρᾶ. 

-a of the vocative singular from nouns in -as is always long ; from 
nouns in -ἧς it is always short; as ταμίας rapid, πολίτης πολῖτἅ. 
-a of the nominative, accusative, and vocative dual is always long ; 
povod, Tapia, τελώνα. 
ταν of the accusative singular always follows the quantity of its rom- 
inative ; as δόξᾶν, μοῦσᾶν, πέτρᾶν. 
-as is always long ; as rapids, μούσᾶς. The Doric dialect however 
may make it short in the accusative plural; as πάσᾶς, τέχνᾶς. 
ao, -dwv, always a long ; 3 as Arpeidao, Tay, ἀλλᾶων. 
σι, always short ; as ποίμναισϊ, μοὐσῃσὶ. 


s 


36 LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. [$$ 28, 29. 


9 Second Declension. 
-a. always short; as doréa, EVAG, σῦκᾶ, χρύσεᾶ. 
-ot, always short; as λόγοισι, ϑεοῖσι, τοῖσι. 
3. Third Declension. mh! 
τι, -τσι, -a, -as, short; as κόρακι, κόραξι, κόρακα, κόρακας, τείχεα... 
Nouns in evs however may have -ἃ, -ᾶς ; as βασιλέᾶ, βασιλέᾶς. 
The quantity of the last syllable of the root of nouns of the third 


declension must be learned by observation. It is only added here, 
that, τ: 

(a) Monosyllabic words are long; as πᾶν, pis, δρῦς. Except the 
pronouns τίς, τὶς, Ti, τὶ. 

(0) The vowels a, ε, v, when they stand at the end of the root, are 
short ; as γῆρας γήρᾶος, πόλις πόλϊος, δάκρυ δάκρῦος. Except γραῦς 
γρᾶός, and ναῦς ναός. 

(c) In substantives, av, w, vy, at the end of the root, are long; as 
Τιτάν Τιτᾶνος, Σαλαμίς Σαλαμῖνος, Φόρκυς Φύρκῦνος. 

§ 28. Quantity of the Verbal Endings. 


“μι, -σι, -TL, -νσι, -ντι, always short; as torn, ἵστησι, δίδωτι, 
βουλεύουσι, μοχθίζοντι. 
The connecting vowel a is always short; as ἐβουλεύσᾶμεν͵ 
ἐβοὐλευσᾶς, ἐβουλεύσᾶτο. πε 


ACCENT. 


§ 29. 1. There are three accents ; the acute (’), 
the grave (*), and the circumflex (“ or 7). 

The acute can stand only on one of the last 
three syllables ; the circumflex, only on one of the 
last two,-and the grave only on the last. Further, 
the circumflex can be placed only on a syllable 
long by nature. 


2. A word is called oxytone, when it has the 
acute accent on the last syllable; as βραχύς, short ; 
μηχανή, machine. 

Paroxytone, when it has the acute on the penult ; 
as κόραξ, crow; δόμος, house. 

Proparoxytone, when it has the acute on the an- 
tepenult ; as ἀσπάραγος, asparagus ; φάσηλος, bean 








§ 30.] ACCENT. 37 


Perispomenon, when it has the circumflex on the 
last syllable ; as τιμῶ, to honor ; μετρῶ, to measure. 

Properispomenon, when it has the circumflex on 
the penult ; as σῦκον, jig; oivos, wine, 

Barytone, when its last syllable has no accent at 
all; as πλέως, full ; yana, milk ; τρίαινα, trident ; 
αὖθαρ, udder. 


Nore 1. According to the ancient grammarians, the grave accent 
is understood on every syllable which appears unaccented. ‘Thus ἀν- 
θρωποκτόνος, τύπτω, are ἀνθρὼπὸκτόνὸς, TUmT®. The grave accent 
then is no accent at all. 


Nore 2. The circumflex, according to ancient authorities, is com 
posed of the acute and the grave; thus, “ἡ, or *, 7,7. 


Notre 3. The place of the accent in any particular word must be 
learned from the lexicon. As soon however as the place is known, 
the kind of accent is generally determined by the following rules. 


§ 30. 1. If the last syllables long either by na- 
ture or by position, no accent can be placed on the 
antepenult. 


2. If the antepenult is accented, it always takes 
che acute; as σμάραγδος, emerald ; πέπερι, pepper ; 
πέλεκυς, AXE. 


3. The penult, if accented, takes the acute when 
its vowel is short by nature, or when the last sylla- 
ble is long by nature ; as λόγος, word ; πίσσα, pitch ; 
σελήνη, MOON. 


4. When the vowel-sound of the penult is long 
by nature, and at the same time the vowel of the 
last syllable is short by nature, the penult can take 


only the circumflex; as μῆλον, apple; καταϊτυξ, a 
kind of helmet. 


5. When a word which has the acute on the 
last syllable stands before other words belonging 
to the same sentence, this acute becomes grave (ἡ): 


38 LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. [§ 31. 


"ἶν Ἀ A . 3 x > 7 7 
aS Tous πονηροὺς καὶ τοὺς ἀγαθοὺς ἀνθρώπους, NOt τοὺς 
" wt 3 ΄ 
πονηρούς Kai τούς ὠγαθούς ἀνθρώπους. 
The interrogative pronoun ris, τί, who? what? which? always re 
tains its acute accent. 


Nore 1. The olic dialect throws the accent as far back as the 
last syllable permits ; as θῦμος, βόλλα, ἄμμιν, δύνατος, ἄεισι, for the 
common θυμός, βουλή, ἡμῖν, δυνατός, ἀεῖσι. repens are except- 
ed, as weda, the same as μετά. 


Nore 2. It will be perceived that, in Greek, the accent of the pe- 
nult and antepenult is regulated by the quantity ‘of the last syliable; in 
Latin, the accent of the antepenult is determined by the penult, 


§ 31. 1. The endings -as and -o. are, with re-— 
spect to accent, short ; as λέγονται, ἄνθρωποι, μοῦσαι, : 
λῦπαι, οἶκοι, ὦμοι. ᾿ 

(a) Except the third person singular of the opta-— 
tive active ; as τιμήσαι, τιμήσοι. 


(Ὁ) Except also the adverb οἴκοι, at home, which — 
in reality is the original form of the dative οἴκῳ. 


2. In nouns in as of the second declension, in 
the genitive of some nouns of the third declension, 
and in the Ionic genitive in ew of the first declen- 
sion, the final syllable permits the accent to stand 
on the antepenult ; as εὔγεως εὔγεω εὔγεῳ εὔγεῳς, εὐ- 
ρύκερως εὐρύκερω : πόλεως πόλεων 3 Τυδείδεω, Πηληϊά- 
dew. Also, in the lonic ὅτεων for ὅτων. 


Norte 1. The first of these apparent anomalies is explained in the 
following manner ; the « in the diphthongs a: and οι, at the end of a 
word, had ordinarily an obscure or weak sound. But when it was an 
essential letter, as in the dative and optative, its sound was clear or 
strong ; as in poi, coi, Tol, οἴκοι. 

The second anomaly is ΟΣ plained as follows; ew was, by synizesis, — 
ordinarily pronounced as one syllable, not unlike -yoh. As to the com- 
pounds of γέλως and κέρας, as φιλόγελως, εὔκερως, they ordinarily suf- 
fered a kind of syncope; thus φιλόγ᾽ὶ as, etx’ pas. 


Nore 2. According to the ancient grammarians, barytone nomina- 
tives in -o«, and barytone verbal forms in -ezraz, in the Doric dialect, 
take the acute on the penult, according to the general rule (§ 30, 3); 
1S ἀγγέλοι, ἀνθρώποι, φιλοσόφοι, πωλουμένοι ; φορείται, ἐσσείται ; from 








δῷ 32, 33.] ACCENT. . 39 


_ which it may be inferred that the Doric did not recognize , the tules ex- 
hibited in this section. 


Accent as affected by Contraction, Elision, Anastrophe, and 
Crasis. 


A § 32. 1. If the first of the syllables to be danteseiad has 
the acute or circumflex, and the second the grave, that is, no.ac- 
cent (§ 29, ns. 1. 2), the contracted syllable’ takes the circum- 
flex; aS πλέετε πλεῖτε, τιμάω τιμῶ, ovas οὖς. 
But when the first has the grave, that is, when it is unaccent- - 
ed, and the second the acute, the contracted syllable has the 
acute ; as φιλεόμεθα φιλούμεθα, φιλεόντων φιλούντων, ἐάν ἤν, ἐών ὦν. 


2. If neither of the syllables to be contracted has the accent, 
the accent of the word generally retains its place; as πόλεες 
. πόλεις, βουλεύεαι βουλεύῃ. ᾿ 


_ Nore 1. Exceptions to the first rule: (a) The contracted nomina- 
τ "we dual of the second declension; as'tAé mo. 


᾿ς (Ὁ) The contracted genitive, dative, and accusative plural of poly- 
τ syllabic compounds i In οος ; as avtimvoos ἀντίπνους, ἀντιπνόου ἀντίπνου ; 
ἀντιπνόῳ ἀντίπνῳ ; εὐνόους εὔνους, προπλόους πρόπλους ; that is, they 
take the accent of the contracted nominative. 
(c) The adjective ἀθρόος ἄθρους, ἀθρόον ἄθρουν, crowded, 
᾿ς (d) The contracted subjunctive passive and middle of verbs in μὲ 
most commonly deviates from the first rule; as δυνέωμαι δύνωμαι, 
ἱστέωμαι ἵστωμαι, ξυμβλέηται ξύμβληται. 
(6) The genitive plural of adjectives in ἤθης (from jos), and of 
τριήρης, αὐτάρκης ; as rs συνήθων, τριηρέων τριήρων, αὐταρκέων 
ἄρκων. ε 
a ) The contracted genitive plural of barytones of the second declen- 
sl10n; as Aoydav λόγων, ἀνθρωπόων ἀνθρώπων. 
(g) The genitive singular of masculines in ὦ ς of the second declen- 
sion; as ve@o vew, Πετεῶο Πετεώ, Kayo ayo. 


Nore 9. Exceptions to the second rule: (a) The contracted forms 
of adjectives i in εος ; aS χρύσεος χρυσοῦς, χρύσεα χρυσᾶ. So τὸ κά- 
_veoy κανοῦν. 

(b) The contracted genitive and dative singular of Sais, δέλεαρ, Θρή- 
i&, dis, obas, στέαρ, φάος, φρέαρ, pais. (See below.) 

(c) The contracted second person singular of the second aorist mid- 
_ dle imperative usually takes the circumflex on the last syllable; as λά 
_ Beo λαβοῦ, ἐκβάλεο ἐκβαλοῦ. 


᾿ (ἃ) The imperfect ἐχρῆν, from ἔχραεν, from the impersonal χρή. 


§ 33. 1. In prepositions and conjunctions, if the elided 


40 -LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. [§ 34. 


vowel had the accent, this accent also is cut off with the vow- 
el; as ἀμφὶ αὐτῷ, ἀμφ᾽ αὐτῷ; ἀλλὰ εἰπέ, ἀλλ᾽ εἰπέ. 

In all other words the accent is thrown back upon the pre 
ceding syllable ; ; as σεμνὰ ἔπη, σέμν᾽ ἔπη ; γαληνὰ ὁρῶ, γαλήν᾽ 
ὁρῶ ; φημὶ ἐγώ, φήμ᾽ ἐγώ. β 

2. When ἃ dissyllabic preposition is, by anastrophe, put after — 
its substantive, or after the verb with which it is compounded, 
its accent is placed on the penult ; as ἀπὸ ϑεῶν, ϑεῶν ἄπο ; ἀπο- — 
'λέσας, ὀλέσας ἄπο. ν 

The prepositions ἀμφί, ἀντί, ἀνά, διά, διαί, ὑπαί, ὑπείρ, παραΐ ne 
never subject to anastrophe. 

3. When the dissyllabic prepositions stand for εἰμί, to be, 
compounded with themselves, or rather when εἰμί is under- 
stood, they take the accent on ‘the -penult ; as ἔνι, πάρα, πέρι, ἔπι, 
SC. ἐστί. 











4. In crasis, the contracted syllable can take the circumflex 
only when one of the original syllables had it; or when the 
acute is immediately followed by the grave, that is, by an unac- 
cented syllable (ᾧ 29, ms. 1. 2); as καὶ οἶνον, κὦνον ; ἐγὼ οἶδα, 
ἐγῷδα : καὶ εἶτα, Kara. 

But if the acute is followed by another acute, or if the grave 
is followed by the acute, the contracted syllable can have only 
the acute ; as καὶ ἄν, κἄν ; μέντοι ἄν, pevrav; τὰ a ἄλλα, τἄλλα; τὰ 
ὅπλα, τιῆπλα: 3 τὸ ἔργον; τοὔργον. 





Accent of Nouns. ΄ 


»*<§ B4. 1. The place of the accent remains the same as in 
the nominative, if the last syllable permits it; if not, it is re- 
moved to the next syllable, towards the end ; as ϑάλασσα ϑαλάσ- 
σης ϑάλασσαι, ἄνθρωπος ἀνθρώπῳ, νῆσος νήσου," κόραξ κόρακος κορά- 
KOU, πρᾶγμα πράγματος, ddovs ὀδόντος. 


rules; thus, νῆσος becomes νήσου g 30, 1 3); πρᾶγμα πράγματος 
(ᾧ 30, 9), ὀδούς ὀδόντος ὀδοῦσι (ᾧ 30, 8 : 


2. The genitive and dative of oxytones of the first two de- 
clensions take the circumflex according to the _general ΤῸ 
(8 32, 1); as τιμή τιμῆς from τιμῇος, τιμῇ from τιμῆϊ, τιμῶν fi 
τιμάων OF τιμέων, Seds Seov from Sedo, Seq from Sedi ϑεῶϊ. 

The dative plural and dual of these declensions always 
the accent of the dative singular ; as τιμαῖσι τιμαῖς Per 
Seois ϑεοῖν. 


ᾧ 34.] ACCENT. } 41 


Nore 1. Exceptions in the first declension : (a) The contracted gen- 
itive plural of the feminine of barytone adjectives and participles in os 
takés the accent on the penult, contrary to the genera] rule (§ 32, 1) ; 
that is, the genitive of the feminine is the same as that of the mascu- 
line ; as λεγόμενος, λεγομενέων λεγομένων ; ἄξιος, ἀξιέων ἀξίων. 


(0) Also, the genitive plural of ἡ ἀφύη, οἱ ἐτησίαι, ὁ χρήστης, 6 
χλούνης ; thus ἀφύων, ἐτησίων, χρήστων, χλούνων. 


(c) Méa, from εἷς, one, has μιᾶς, μιᾷ, with the accent on the last 
syllable. 


(d) Δεσπότη ς, master, has vocative δέσποτα, proparoxytone. 


» Nore 2. Exceptions in the second declension: (a) The genitive sin- 


gular of masculines in ὡς takes the acute, contrary to the general rule 
(ὃ 32, 1); as νεώς, vem (from vedo), Πετεώς, Πετεώ (from Πετεῶο). 


(b) The Epic ending -é¢. or - ὄφιν is always paroxytone ; as τέκνον 
τεκνόφι, ἐσχάρα ἐσχαρόφιν. 


Nore 3. Exceptions in the third declension : (a) Monosyllabic sub- 
stantives and adjectives throw the accent in the: genitive and dative of 
all the numbers upon the last syllable: here the genitive plural and 
dual takes the circumflex.; as kis kids κιί κιῶν κιοῖν, εἷς ἑνός ἑνί. 


(b) The following monosyllables throw the accent in the genitive 
singular, and dative singular and plural, upon the last syllable; in the 
genitive plural and dual they follow the general rule (1) : 
ὁ Suds, Suwds δμωΐ δμωσί, slave ; 

ὁ Sas, ϑωός Sol Swat, jackal 
τὸ KPAS, κρατός xpari κρασί, head 
6, ἡ παῖς, παιδός παιδί παισί, child 
ὁ ons, σεός Or σητός, moth 
ὁ Tpas, Τρωός Tpwi Τρωσί, Tros, Trojans, 


The Doric dialect however places the accent on the last syllable 
even in the genitive and dative plural; as παιδῶν, Τρωῶν. 


(c) Πᾶς, all, throws the accent in the genitive and dative singular on 
the last syllable; the plural is regular; thus, παντός παντί πάντων 
Tat. 

The Dorians throw the accent on the last syllable of the genitive 
plural also; thus, παντῶν for πάντων. 


τ (ὦ Tis; who? follows the general rule throughout ; as τίνος, τίνες 
, 
 TL@V. 


(e) The contracted form of the following nouns is accented after the 
analogy of monosyllables (a, b) : 
Bais Sas Sadds Sadi δάδων δάδοιν Saci, torch 
Θρήϊξ Θρήξ Θρᾷξ Θρᾳκός Θρᾳκί Θρᾳκῶν Θρᾳξί, a Thracian 
is οἷς oids οἰί οἰῶν, sheep 
᾿ οὗας οὖς ὦτός ὠτί ὥτων ὦτοιν ὠσί, ear 
στέαρ στῆρ στητός, tallow 


42 LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. ᾿ς [8.88 


φρεαρμ ᾧρητός φρητῶν, a well 
φάος φῶς φωτός φωτί φώτων, ight 


pais dos φῳδός Pedi φῴδων Podow φῳσί, blister 
(f) AéXeap, bait, in the contracted forms, takes the accent on the | 
first syllable ; as δόλξατος δέλητος. 


(6) The following nouns are more or less irregular in their accent : 


ἀνήρ, man, ἀνέρος, regular ; but ἀνδρός ἀνδρί ἄνδρα ἄνερ ἄνδρες ἀνδρῶν 
ἄν pas. ὠς 

γαστήρ, belly, γαστέρος, regular ; but γαστρός γαστρί. 

γυνή, woman, γυναικός, -κί, -αἴκα, ὦ γύναι, ~aixes, -κῶν, -ξί, -αἴκας. 

δαήρ, husband’s brother, regular ; but ὦ daep. 

ar Ht Demeter, Δημήτερος, regular ; but Δήμητρος Δήμητρι Δήμητρα 

μητερ. 

θυγάτηρ, daughter, θυγατέρος, paroxytone ; but θυγατρός θυγατρί θύγα- 

,ρα θύγατερ θύγατρες. 
μήτηρ, ΠΡ. μητέρος, paroxytone ; but μητρός μητρί μῆτερ. 
πατήρ, Ξ πατέρος, regular ; but πατρός πατρί πάτερ. 
σωτήρ, ἐπξιρδκας σωτῆρος, regular ; but ὦ v@rep. 

(h) The vocative and neuter singular of adjectives in wv G. ovos, 
take the accent on the antepenult; as εὐδαίμων, ὦ εὔδαιμον, τὸ εὔδαι- — 
μον ; καλλίων, τὸ κάλλτον. , 

(i) The vocative of the following nouns in @y takes the accent on 
the antepenult: Απόλλων ΓΑπολλον, Ποσειδῶν Πόσειδον, Ἀγαμέμνων 
Ἀγάμεμνον, Ἀμφίων Αμφῖον. 

(1) The vocative and neuter singular of some compounds i in ns G. 
eos, take the accent on the antepenult ; as Σωκράτης Σώκρατες, κακοή- 
Sys κακόηϑες, φιλαλήϑης φιλάληϑες. 

(1) In the Dorie dialect, the nominative and accusative plural of the 
third declension take the acute on the penult ; as χείρες, waides, dpvi- 
Ses, yuvaixes, πτώκας. : 

(m) The olic dative plural in ἐσσι always takes the accent on 
the antepenult ; as πάντεσσι, πολίεσσι. 


Accent of Verbs. 





‘ 
% 3. 1. In verbs, both simple and compound, the accent 
is placed as far back as the last syllable permits ; as βουλεύω 
βουλεύετε βεβούλευμαι, ἵστημι ἔστησαν ἕστατον, ἀνάγω ἀνήγαγον, πα- 
βέχω πάρασχε, παρατίθημι παρέθηκαν, ἀποδίδωμι ἀπόδοτε, κατατίθημι 
κατάθεσθε. ᾿ 
(2. The aorist active infinitive, the perfect passive infinitive 
and participle, the second aorist middle infinitive, and the in- 
finitive in vac and μεν take the accent on the penult ; as βουλεῦ- 





§ 35.] AGCENT. 43 


σαι, βεβουλεῦσθαι βεβουλευμένος, λιπέσθαι θέσθαι περιθέσθαι ἀποδό- 
σϑαι, βεβουλευκέναι διδόναι δόμεν. 

But the Epic infinitive in μεναι follows the first rule ; as ἔμ- 
μεναι, ἔδμεναι, τιθήμεναι. 


3. The second aorist active participle, participles in εἰς, ovs, 
vs, os, and participles in’as from verbs in μὲ take the acute on 
the last syllable ; as λιπών, βουλευθείς τιθείς, διδούς, δεικνύς, BeBov- 
λευκώς ἐπιπλώς, ἱστάς. 

4 The second aorist active infinitive takes the circumflex on 
the last syllable ; as λιπεῖν, πιεῖν, φαγεῖν. 


5. The contracted form of the second person singular of the 
second aorist middle imperative usually takes the circumflex on 


᾿ς the last syllable (ὃ 32, n. 2, c) ; as AdBeo λαβοῦ, ἐκβάλεο ἐκβαλοῦ, 


᾿ πίθεο πιθοῦ. 


-6. In compound verbs in μὲ the second person of the second 


ξ aorist middle imperative takes the circumflex when the prepo- 


sition with which it is compounded consists of one syllable ; but 
if it consists of two syllables, this, person follows the first rule ; 


aS mpodod ἐνθοῦ ἀφοῦ, ἀπόδου ἀπόθου κατάθου. 


i. 
A 


7. When the connecting vowel is omitted, the third person 
plural in vox takes the accent on the penult; as ἱστᾶσι, τιθεῖσι, 
διδοῦσι, δεικνῦσι, βεβᾶσι, ἑστᾶσι, τεθνᾶσι, τετλᾶσι. ᾿ 


Nore. Exceptions to the preceding rules: (a) The imperatives 
ἰδέ, εἶπέ or εἰπόν, ἐλθέ, εὑρέ, λαβέ, from “EIAQ, ΕΙΠΩ, ἔρχομαι, εὑρί- 
σκω, λαμβάνω, take the acute on the last syllable, contrary to the gen- 
eral rule. In composition, however, they are regular ; as εἴσιδε, ἄπελ- 


Oe, μετάλαβε. 


(0) The compounds of δός, és, 3és, σχές, are always paroxytone 


_ as ἀπόδος, mpdes, παράθες, πρόσχες. 


ξ 


(9) The dissyllabic forms of the present indicative of εἰμί and φημί 
deviate from the rule; as ἐστί, ἐσμέν ; φατέ, φασί. In composition, 
they are regular ; as σύνειμι, παράφημι. 

The second person singular ᾧ ἡ ς retains its accent even in composi- 
tion ; as συμφῇς, ἀντιφής. The imperative of φημί is φάθι or padi. 


(4) The following participles deviate from the first rule; ἐών dv, « 
ay, ἰών, from εἰμί, κίω, εἶμι. 


(8) The AXolic accentuation is employed in the following infinitives 
and participles: ἀκάχησθαι ἀκαχήμενος ἀκηχέμενος, ἀλάλησθαι ἀλαλή- 
μενος, ἀλιτήμενος, ἀρηρέμενος, ἐληλάμενος, ἥμενος, ἐσσύμενος, ἐγρήγορ- 
θαι, τετύπων, πέφνων, οἴσειν, ἔγρεσθαι, πρίασθαι, ὄνασθαι, ἔρεσθαι. 

Also in the indicative, imperative, and participle of the compound 


44 LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. [δὴ 36, 37. 


κάθημαι, as κάθησαι, κάθησο, καθήμενος ; the accent of καθῆσθαι is reg- 
ular (§ 36). 

(Ὁ) The accent of the contracted subjunctive passive of polysylla- 
bic verbs in μὲ most commonly follows the first rule ; as δύνωμαι δύνῃ, 
δύνηται, ἀφίστηται, κέρωνται, πίμπρῃσι, €parat. 

(gz) The optative passive of verbs in μὲ takes the accent on the pe- 
nult even when the last syllable is short; as ἱσταῖο ἱσταῖντο. 

But the optative of ἄγαμαι, δύναμαι, ἐπίσταμαι, πρίαμαι, and a few 
others, always throws the accent as far back as the last syllable per- 
mits ; as δύναιο δύναισθε, ἐπίσταιτο, πρίαιο πρίαιτο, κρέμαιο, ὄναιο, 
OVOLTO. 

(h) The Doric dialect retains the original accent of the third person 
plural of the imperfect and aorist active ; as ἐτρέχον, ἐλέγον, ἐλάβον, 
ἐλύσαν, ἐστάσαν, from the original ἐτρέχοσαν, ἐλέγοσαν, ἐλάβοσαν, 
ἐλύσασαν, ἐστάσασαν. 

So in the third person plural of the aorist passive, and of the im- 
perfect and eS ἐς aorist active of verbs in μὲ ; as ἐκοσμήθεν, ἀνέθεν, © 
for ἐκοσμήθησαν, ἀνέθεσαν. 


§ 36. 1. In compound dissyllabic verbs, the accent cannot 
go farther back than the augment ; as προσεῖχον, ἀνέσταν, ἀνέ- 
σχον, ἐπῇδον, κατεῖδον. 

So when the compound verb begins with a long vowel or 
diphthong ; as ἐξεῦρον. 

2. But when the augment is omitted, the accent is placed on 
the preposition ; as ἔμφαινον, πάρθεσαν, ὑπείρεχον, ἀπόερσε, σύνα- 
γεν. . 
3. When the syllabic augment upon which the accent would 
have been placed is omitted, the accent is, in dissyllabic verbs, 
put on the penult ; as πίπτε, βαῖνε, δαῖε, for ἔπιπτε, ἔβαινε, dare. 

4. Long monosyllabic forms take the circumflex when the 
syllabic augment is omitted ; as βῆ, φῆ, γνῶ, for ἔβη, ἔφη, ἔγνω. 


ENCLITICS AND PROCLITICS. 


§ $37. 1. An enclitic is a word which is pronounced as if it 
ere a part of the preceding word. ‘The enclitics are 


(a) The personal pronouns μοῦ poi μέ, σοῦ σοί σέ, οὗ of € piv 
viv, and the oblique cases of those beginning with o¢, as riot 
σφίν choir. ς 
: (b) The indefinite pronoun ris, ri, through all the cases, as 

the words rod, τῷ, for τινὸς, Twi. 








“(ἡ 


a ee 





§ 37.] ENCLITICS AND PROCLITICS. “Ὁ 


(c) The present indicative of εἰμί, to be, and φημί, to say ; 
except the monosyllabic second person singular εἶ, and φής. 


(d) The particles ποθέν, ποθί, roi, πῇ, πού, πώς, ποτέ, γέ, θήν, 
κέ OF κέν, νύ OF νύν, πέρ, πώ, τέ, τοί, ῥά, and the inseparable par- 
ticles «δε, -6e, “Xt. - 


2. If the word before the enclitic has the acute on the ante- 
penult, or the circumflex on the penult, the accent of the en- 
clitic is dropped, and the acute is placed on the last syllable of 
the preceding word ; as ἄνθρωπός τις, δεῖξόν μοι, οὗτός ἐστιν. 


3. When the word before the enclitic has the accent on the 
last syllable, the accent of the enclitic is simply dropped ; and 
if the accent on the last syllable of that word be the acute, it 


remains so; as ἐγώ φημι, πολλοῖς τισιν, σοφός τις. 


Monosyllabic enclitics lose their accent also when the pre- 


ceding word has the acute on the penult; as τούτου ye, πόσος 


τις, 


4. A dissyllabic enclitic retains its accent, (a) When the pre- 
ceding word has the acute on the penult; as ἄνδρες τινὲς. 


(b) When the syllable, upon which its accent would have 
been thrown back, has been elided ; as πολλά ἐστι, πόλλ᾽ ἐστί: 
πολλοὶ δέ εἶσι, πολλοὶ δ᾽ εἰσί. 


ὅ. When several enclitics succeed each other, the preceding 
takes the -accent of the following according to the last three 
rules ; as οὐδέποτέ ἐστί σφισιν, for οὐδέποτε ἐστὶ σφίσιν. 


Nore 1. (a) Enclitics, which can stand at the beginning of a clause 


_ or sentence, retain their accent ; as 30d γὰρ κράτος ἐστὶ μέγιστον, For 


THY power is greatest ; Φησὶν οὗτος. 

(b) Eipi, after εἰ, οὐκ, ὡς, retains its accent; as εἰ ἐσμέν, οὐκ ἐσμέν. 
ὡς ἐσμέν. 

Eori, at the beginning of ἃ sentence, or after ἀλλ᾽, εἰ, οὐκ, μή, ὡς, 
καί, μέν, ὅτι, ποῦ, is accented on the penult ; as ἔστι ταῦτα, ἔστιν ἐντυ- 


᾿ χεῖν; ἀλλ᾽ ἔστι, εἶ ἔστι, οὐκ ἔστι: also, after τοῦτ᾽ for τοῦτο ; as τοῦτ 


ἔστι. 


(c) The baits ar pronouns σοῦ, σοί, σέ retain their accent when 
they depend upon a preposition ; as μετὰ σοῦ, ἐπὶ σοί, κατὰ σέ. 
ey retain it also in antithesis, and after καί ; as ἐμοί, ov aol; ἐμὲ 


The forms μοῦ, poi, μέ are very seldom found after prepositions 


except μέ in the expression πρός pe. 


(4) ἜἜγωγε, for ἐγώ ye, is an Holicism 


46 LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. [8 38. 


6) The pronouns οὗ, of, € retain their accent when they are re- 
ἢ Ρ y 
exive, 


Nore 2, (a) 17 The inseparable - δε is found in the demonstrative pro- 
nouns ὅδε, τοσόσδε, τοιόσδε, τηλικόσδε, and in pronominal adverbs ; as 
ἐνθάδε. Also, in adverbs answering to the question whither ? as οἶκόν- 
δε, ὅνδε δόμονδε. Also, in οὐδέ, μηδέ. 

The accent of demonstrative pronouns strengthened by -de is always 
on the penult; as τοσόσδε, τοῖσδε τοισίδ. But τοΐσδεσσι, in Ho- 
mer, for τοισίδε, is irregular. 


(b) The particles -Se, -x« are found in εἴθε, ναίχι, ἧχι. 


Norte 3. Of the above-mentioned words, the following are always ¢ en- 
clitic ; “μοῦ μοί μέ, τοῦ τῷ, ποθέν Tobi Toi TH πού πώς ποτέ, γέ ϑήν κέ νύ 
πέρ πώ τέ τοί ῥά. 


Nore 4. Frequently the indefinite pronouns and cvorel: of the par- ὁ 
ticles are not separated by a space from the attracting word ; as ὅστις, 
ὅτις, εἴτις, οὔτις, μήτις, ὅσπερ, ὥσπερ. ὥστε. 

Sometimes 6 τι, whatever, 6 τε, and the, τό re, and the, are written 
ὅ,τι, ὅ,τε, τό,τε, to prevent their being confounded with ὅτι, that, ore, 
when, τότε, then. 


§ 38. A proclitic is a word which is pronounced as if it 
were part of the word before which it stands. 

The proclitics (commonly called aténa, that is, unaccented 
words) are εἰς or és, to, ἐν or εἶν, in, ἐκ or ἐξ, from, οὐ ΟΥ οὐκ or 
οὐχ, not, as, as, to, and the articles 6, oi, 7, ai, also εἰ, if, 

It is remarked here, that, when a proclitic precedes an enclitic, it 
takes the acute accent; as, εἴ Tis, ἔν τινι, οὔτις; οὔπως, ὥστε. Ex- 
cept εἶ, οὐκ, ὧς, before εἰμί (ᾧ 37, n. 1, b.). 


Norte. (a) Ἐξ at the end of a verse takes the acute ; thus, ἔξ: as 


κακῶν ἔξ, for ἐκ κακῶν. 


(0) οὐ at the end of a clause is always written οὔ, no, not; as οὐχ 
ὁ μὲν 6 δ᾽ οὔ. 


(c) ‘Qs, when it is equivalent to the Semconbotine adverb ras, thus, 
is written Ss; as ds εἰπών, thus having said. 


(d) The article 6 takes the acute when it stands for the relative és. 
(Il. 16, 835 ; Od. 2, 262.) 

According to the ancient grammarians, when 6, ἧ, οἱ, ai are demon- 
strative, they should be read as if they were accented ; thus, ὁ in Ὁ yap 
βασιλῆς χολωθείς, is to be read 6. 











§ 39.] PUNCTUATION MARKS. 7 47 


§ 39. PUNCTUATION MARKS. 


Comma 

Colon. : ; 
Period ‘ ‘ 
Interrogation . 


[ 
[ 
[ 
Apostrophe . ; x ἄγ, 
[ 
[ 
[ 


e 
χω 
» 


Ὁ “e 


μι... ..1...... 1.2... 1... 


Coronis’ : ‘ ς 

Dieresis . : ; ς 
Marks of quantity , ; - 
Marks of parenthesis. - τ 
Mark of admiration, little used [!] 


( 
μι 


The mark of ἀϊαγοδὶβ is placed over ὁ or v to prevent its 
forming a diphthong with the preceding vowel. FE. g. γήραϊ, 


airy, χρηΐζω are trissyllables; but γήραι γήρᾳ, αὐτή, χρήιζω χρήζω 
are dissyllables 


PART IL. 
INFLECTION OF WORDS. 





PARTS OF SPEECH. - | 


| § 40. 1. The declinable parts of speech are the 
noun, the article, the pronoun, the verb, and the 
participle. 


2. The indeclinable parts of speech are the ad 
verb, the preposition, the conjunction, and the in- 
terjection. 


3. The declinable parts of speech have three 
numbers ; the singular, the dual, and the plural. 

The dual may be used when two things are 
spoken of, but not necessarily. | 










NOUN. 


§ 41. 1. Nouns are grammatically divided into 
substantive and adjective. 

Substantives are divided into proper and com 
mon. 


2. The noun has three genders; the masculine, 
feminine, and neuter. 








The genders are, in grammar, distinguished by the artic 
6, 7, τό, respectively ; as 6 ἀνήρ, the man, ἡ γυνή, the woma 
τὸ σῦκον, the fig. 


§ 491 NOUN, . | 49 


Nouns which are either masculine or feminine are said to be of the 
common gender, Such nouns are, in grammar, distinguished by the 
articles ὁ, ἡ ; as 6, ἡ ἄνθρωπος, a human being, man or woman, 


3. The noun has three declensions ; the first, 
second, and third. 


4. The cases are five; the nominative, genitive, 
dative, accusative, and vocative. 


5. All neuters have three of the cases alike; the 
nominative, accusative, and vocative. In the plural 
these cases end in a. 


6. The nominative, accusative, and vocative du- 
al are alike. The genitive and dative dual are 
“also alike. 

In the plural, the vocative is always like the 
nominative. 


Nore 1. In nouns of the common gender, the masculine is com- 
monly employed to denote the Species; as ὃ ἄνθρωπος, man, man- 
kind, the human race ; but ἡ ἄνθρωπος, the woman, 


Note 2. Many names of animals have but a single gender (γένος 
ἐπίκοινον) which is used without reference to sex; as 6 ἀετός, eagle, 
ὁ yo, vulture, ὁ λαγώς, hare, ἡ χελιδών, swallow, ἡ ἀηδών, nightin- ~ 
gale, ἡ ἀλώπηξ, fox. ; . Ἶ 

§ 42. 1. The root of a noun consists of those 
letters which are found in every part of that noun. 

The first declension comprises nouns of which 
the root ends in a; as τιμή, Loot τιμα- ; the second, 
those of which the root ends in 0}; aS λόγος, root 

_ Aoyo-; the third, all the rest. 


2. The case-endings, that 15, those parts of a 
noun which denote the different cases, are exhibit- 
_ ed in the following table : 


| Singular, Plurals Ὁ Dual, 

᾿ Nominative -ς -ες -€ 
Genitive τος, -ws των Wy 
Dative -t «σι, -s ~w 
Accusative -»ν, -a “VS, -as -€ 
Vocative -ς -ες ~@ 


50 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [S 42. 


-s is dropped in feminines and A®olic masculines of the first declen- 
sion ; 85 μοῦσα, τιμά τιμή, ἱππότα; also, in a few feminines of the 
second declension ; as ἠχώ, πειθώ ; also, in many nouns of the third 
declension ; as λέων, πρᾶγμα. In neuters of the second declension 
it is softened into ν ; as σῦκον, μῆλον. 

When the vocative is not like the nominative, it is the same as the 
root. (For particulars, see below.) 

eos, in most nouns of the second declension, and in masculines of the 
first, drops the s and is then contracted with the radical vowel ; as 
Aoyo-os Aoyo-o λόγου, Ilereds Πετεῶ-ο Πετεώ ; τελώνα-ο τελώνᾶ Te- 
λώνου. Further, in the second declension, -oo may become -ouo, τοι, 
(both Thessalian;) as θεός θεοτο θεοῖ-ο, ἕαυτοτο ἑαυτοῖο ἑαυτοῖ. 
(Compare the Latin illius, hujus, ejus, istius, tpsius, cujus, alius, 


nullius, solius, totius,-ullius, unius, alterius, utrius, neutrius.) Tt © 


drops s also in the pronouns ἐμέο, σέο, ἕο, τεοῖο, τέο, 6reo. In fem- 
inines of the first declension, it is always contracted with the radi- 

_ Cal vowel ; as οἰκια-ος οἰκίας, τιματ-ος τιμᾶς τιμῆς. In some nouns 
of the third declension, it may become -@s ; a8 πόλε-ος πόλε-ως. 

The common ending -ov, in the first declension, presupposes a 
change of -ao into -ἐο, contracted -ov. 

«in the first and second declensions is always contracted with the 
radical vowel ; as povoa-i μουσαι μούσᾳ μούσῃ, Aoyo-i Aoyor λόγωι 
λόγῳ, metOo-i πειθοῖ, vew-i νεῷ. 

. The dative singular. of the first two declensions was originally 
formed by annexing « to the root without any further change; as 
τιμα ἵ τιμαι, λογο-ἴ Aoyor. In the course of time the radical vowels 
(~,0) were lengthened (ἃ, ἡ, @) ; a8 τιμᾶ-ἴ τιμᾷ, τιμη-ἴ τιμῇ, λογω-ἢ 
λόγῳ. dada», anciently, and χαμαί, humi, on the ground, seem 
to be relics of the original form of the dative of the first declension. 

‘ The original dative of the second declension is found in the adver 
bial datives in o4; as οἴκοι, domi, at home, ποῖ, Φαληροῖ. Also in 
feminines in and ὡς ; as ἡ χοῖ, abbot _ It is found also in inscriptions 
cut after the introduction of @; as τῶι Ολυμπίοι, roi δάμοι, βωμοῖ, 
Zecivo. Further, the Beotic endings -y and -v do not come from 
@, 7, @, but from the original -a, τοι. (ᾧ 9.) 

-v 1s always used in the first two declensions, and sometimes in the 
third. In the third declension it was generally preceded by a, that 
is, it was -ay, which, by dropping the ν, becamea. (Compare 
Latin -em, as in patr-em, matr-em, mulier-em.) 

τες in the first two declensions drops s, and changes ε into « which 
is contracted with the radical vowel ; as μουσα-ες μουσα-ε μοῦσαι, 
Aoyo-es ἃ λόγοι. In the third declension it was originally -ns; 
hence, in the Dorie dialect, the nominative plural of this declension 


is never proparoxytone. (ᾧ 34, n. 3, 1; compare also the Latin -és.)_. 


τῶν is formed from -s by changing s into y. In the second declension, 
it is always contracted with the radical vowel; as ἃ ν λόγων. 
“σι, --ς, in the first and second declensions is ponies 
the dative singular; as μούσᾳ (originally μούσαι) μούσαισι μούσαις, 
λόγῳ (originally λόγοι) λόγοισι λόγοις. the third declension -σε 
is appended to the root; as κόρακ-σι κόραξι, ἐλπίδ-σι ἐλπίσι. 


y appended _to 


Ἷ 
8 





— 8.421] NOUN. 51 


᾿ς vs, -as, formed by annexing ς to the accusative singular ; as μοῦσαν 

' μούσανς μούσας, λόγον λόγονς λόγους, κόρακα κόρακας. In the third 

declension -ἄς was originally - ἃ ς (arising from -ays) ; hence, in the 

᾿: Dorie dialect, the accusative plural of this declension can never be 

-proparoxytone (§ 34, n. 3, 1), 

ε is ἃ modification of -es ; in the first two declensions it is contracted 

Ἢ with the radical vowel ; as μουσα-ε μούσα, Noyo-e λόγω. : 

_ -tv, a modification of the dative plural -is, is always contracted with 

the radical vowel; as ripa-w τιμαῖν, λογυ-ιν λόγοιν. ΑΒ to -ow of 
the third declension, it is borrowed from the second. 


Nore 1. The Greek has four other cases, three of which however 
are commonly regarded as adverbs; the locative, ablative, terminal, 
and instrumental, 

Locative -61, where? as ἄλλοθι, 7661, οὐρανόθι. Its functions are 

rformed by the dative or genitive. Relics of its original force are 
700: πρό, Ἰλιόθι πρό, οὐρανόθι πρό, in Homer, Ὁ) 

Ablative -Θεν, whence? as πόθεν, ἄλλοθεν, οὐρανόθεν. In process 
_ of time it became confounded with the genitive. (Compare ἐμέθεν, 
σέθεν, ἕθεν.) Its functions are performed by the genitive. ‘The Ho- 
_ Mneric expressions ἐξ οὐρανόθεν, ἀπ᾽ οὐρανόθεν, ἐξ Αἰσύμηθεν are relics 
_ of its original character, 

Terminal -δε, -ce, -Ce, whither? as ἅλαδε, οἴκαδε, οἶκόνδε, πόσε, 

ποτέρωσε, θύραζε. Its functions are performed by the accusative, 

| Instrumental -« or - φ εν, with what? Tn the progress of the lan- 
_ guage it became confounded with the genitive and dative, (Compare 

the latin -b2, -bis, in εἰδὲ, sibi, ibi, ubi, nobis, vobis.) Its functions are 

_ performed by the dative or genitive. 


_ Nore 2. The Epie ending -φι or πῷῴιν denotes the dative and geni- 

fave of all the numbers; it is appended to the root according to the 
following analogies: 

κεφαλή κεφαλῆφι, Bin Bindu, first declension. 

θεός θεόφιν, ὀστέον ὀστεόφιν, second declension. 

στῆθος στήθεσφι, ὄχος ὄχεσφι, third declension, 


In the third declension, it becomes -o pe when it is appended to the 
_ root of neuters in -ος, gen. -eos. It is observed further, that, in this 
declension, with the exception of ναῦφι from ναῦς, and the adverbial 
_ dative ἶφι from is, and perhaps a few others, it is confined to neuters 
in -os, gen, -eos. . τ 
 Ἐρέβευσφι, from Ἔρεβος, annexes gx to the contracted genitive 
Ἐρέβευς. 
 Κράτεσφι from ΚΡΑΣ, κρατός, prefixes an ε to -σῴι, as if the 
hominative were KPATOS. 
. 4 Bares pty, and κοτυληδονόφεν, from ἐσχάρη, κοτυληδών, fol- 
_ Jow the analogy of the second declension. 
____In nouns of the first declension, the ending -ηφι of the dative sin 
‘gular is, in the best editions, written τῆφι, as if -ῴι were appended 
_ to the common dative. This orthography is founded on tradition, 
_ (Compare -y 04a, -ῃσι, of the Epic subjunctive. ) 





52 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§ 43. 


FIRST DECLENSION, 


§ 43. 1. The following table exhibits the case- 
endings and the last vowel of the root united : 


Singular. Dual. Plural. 
Feminine. Masculine. Masc. & Fem. Mase. & Fem, 
N. a, 7 as, ns |N.A. Via at 
G. as, ns ov G.D. aw ων 
. 4, ἢ 4, ἢ : αις 
A. ay, nv αν, nv as 
: ν᾽ α, ἢ αι 








2. Nouns in aor ἡ are feminine; nouns in as, 
ms are masculine ; as οἰκία, house, χαρά, joy, δόξα, 
glory, μοῦσα, musa, muse, θάλασσα, the sea, δίκη, 
judgment, γνώμη, opinion ; ταμίας, steward, τελώνης, 
publican, κριτής, judge. 


3. Nouns in a pure, pa, and some others, retain 
the a throughout the singular ; ; aS οἰκία οἰκίας οἰκίᾳ 
᾿οἰκίαν, χαρά χαρᾶς χαρᾷ χαράν. 

So ἀλαλά, ἐπίβδα, σκανδάλα, Avdpopeda, pede ἐφ Τέλα, Διοτίμα, Κι- 
- μαίθα, Κισσαίθα, Κυναίδα, Anda, Σιμαίθα, φιλομήλα. 

4. The following classes of nouns in ἧς have ἃ 


in the vocative singular : : es 
(a) Nouns in τῆς; as ποιητής ποιητά, poeta, poet, κομήτης κομῆτα, - 
cometa, comet. 


In Homer, aivapérns, unhappily brave, has aivapérn, contrary to 
the rule. In Appolonius Rhodius Αἰήτην has Αἰήτη. 


(0) Verbal nouns in ns; as γεωμέτρης γεωμέτρα, apo geo- 


neter ; φαρμακοπώλης φαρμακοπῶλα, pharmacopola, druggist 


(c) All national appellations; as Σκύθης Σκύθα, Scythian, Iipons 


Πέρσα, Persian. 

(d) A few proper names; as Sispubepae Πυραῖχμα, Pyraechmes ; 
Ὑστάσπης Ὑστάσπα, Hystaspes, 

5. Nouns in aa, ea, eas, en, and on are contract- 
ed; as μνάα μνᾶ, Mina, συκέα συκῆ, ficus, fig-tree, 
Ἕρμέας ‘Epuns; Hermes, ἁπλόη ἁπλῆ, simple, Bopeas 
βορρᾶς, boreas, the north wind (δὲ 7, ἡ. 23; 44). 














ᾧ 43.] 


ἧ, honor. ἡ, judgment 


N. Tin 
G. τιμῆς 
Ὦ.. τιμῇ 
A, τιμήν 
V. τιμή 


Ν. ΑΟΥ͂. τιμά 


α. Ὁ. τιμαῖν 
Ν. τιμαί 
α. τιμῶν 
D. τιμαῖς 
A. τιμάς 
V. τιμαί 
ἡ» house, 
Ν. οἰκία 
α. οἰκίας 
D. οἰκίᾳ 
Α. οἰκίαν 
V. οἰκία 


G.D. οἰκίαιν 
Ν. οἰκίαι 
α. οἰκιῶν 
D. οἰκίαις 
Α. οἰκίας 
V. οἰκίαι 


FIRST DECLENSION, 


6. Examples. 


δίκη 
δίκης 
δίκῃ 
δίκην 
δίκη 


δίκα 
δίκαω 


δίκαι 
δικῶν 


δίκαις, 


δίκαφ 
δίκαι 


ἡ, Joy. i, glory. 


xapa 
xapas 
χαρᾷ 
χαράν 
χαρά 


χαρά 
χαραῖν 


. xapai 


χαρῶν 
χαραῖς 
χαράς 
χαραί 


Singular. 

ἡ, opinion, 6, publican. 
γνώμη τελώνης 
γνώμης τελώνου 
γνώμῃ τελώνῃ 
γνώμην τελώνην 
γνώμη τελώνη 

Dual. 
γνώμα τελώνα 
γνώμαιν τελώναιν 

Plural. 
γνῶμαι τελῶναι 
γνωμῶν τελωνῶν 
γνώμαις τελώναις 
γνώμας τελώνας 
γνῶμαι τελῶναι 

Singular. 

ἡ; muse, 
δόξα μοῦσα θάλασσα 
δόξης μούσης θαλάσσης 
δόξῃ μούσῃ θαλάσσῃ 
δόξα μοῦσαν θάλασσαν 
δόξα μοῦσα θάλασσα 

Dual. 

δόξα μούσα θαλάσσα 
δόξαν μούσαιν θαλάσσαιν 

Plural. * 

δόξαι μοῦσα θάλασσαι 
δοξῶν μουσῶν θαλασσῶν 
δόξαις. μούσαις θαλάσσαις 
δόξας μούσας θαλάσσας 
δόξαι μοῦσαι θάλασσω 


59 


6, judge, 
κριτής 
κριτοῦ 
κριτῇ 
κριτήν 
κριτά 


κριτά 


κριταῖν 


κριταί 
κριτῶν 
κριταῖς 
κριτάς 
κριταί 


9, sea. 6, steward, 


ταμίας 
ταμίου 
ταμίᾳ 
ταμίαν 
ταμία 


ταμία 
ταμίαιν 


ταμίαι 
ταμιῶν 
, 
ταμίαις 
ταμίας 
τακίᾳ 


54 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [8 44. 
Contracts. 
Singular. 
7], mina, ἡ, Sig-tree. 6, Hermes, 
N μνάα μνᾶ gikéa συκῆ ἝἙρμέας “Epps 
G. μνάας μνᾶς συκέας συκῆς Ἑρμέου ἝἙ ρμοῦ 
D. μνάᾳ μνᾷ συκέᾳ συκῇ Ἑρμέᾳ Ἑρμῇ 
Α. μνάαν -“μνᾶν συκέαν συκῆν » Ἑρμέαν “Epuny 
Υ. μνάα μνᾶ συκέα συκῆ ‘Eppea Ἕρμῆ 
Dual. 
N. A.V. μνάα μνᾶ GuKea συκᾶ ‘Eppéa ‘Eppa 
'G.D. μνάαιν μναῖν συκέαιν συκαῖν Ἑρμέαιν ἝἙ ρμαῖν 
Plural. 
N. μνάαι μναῖ συκέαι συκαῖ Ἕρμέαι Ἕρμαϊ 
G. μναῶν μνῶν συκεῶν συκῶν Ἑρμεῶν Ἑ μῶν 
D. μνάαις μναῖς συκέαις συκαῖς Ἕρμέαις “Eppais 
Α. μνάας μνᾶς συκέας συκᾶς Ἑρμέας Ἕρμᾶς 
¥. μνάαι ᾿ μναῖ συκέαι συκαῖ Ἑρμέαι “Eppat 


For examples in -péa, and -dy, see the feminine of the adjectives 
ἀργύρεος, and ἁπλόος, below. 


§ 44. Dialects. 


S.N.-ns, old lic -a, used chiefly by the Epic poets; as ἱππότᾶ. 
τη, της, AXolic, Beotic, Thessalian, and Dorie -ἃ, -as; as τιμά, 
Sosy oN 
-a, τᾶς, lonic -n, -ns; 88 οἰκίη, ταμίης. 

G.-ov, Beotic ἂν" ‘Thesealian ean ἰδᾶο : Arcadian -av; as 
Απολλωνίδαυ, Εὐμηλίδαυ : Dorie and Atolic-a ; as Arpeida : Ionic 
-ew, after a vowel, τω; as Arpeidew: Epic -ao, -εω (-w). The 
Attics sometimes use the Doric genitive, especially in proper 
names; as βορρᾶς βορρᾶ, Τωβρύας Τωβρύα. So in all cireum- 
flexed nouns in as; as Macxas Maoxa. ‘The early Attic au- 
thors sometimes use the Ionic genitive in -e@, but only in proper 
names; 85 Θάλης Θάλεω, Τήρης Τήρεω. 

-ns, AXolic, Beotic, Thessalian, and Doric -ds; as τιμᾶς, δό- 





-as, Ionic τῆς; as οἰκίης, ins, Ovpns. : 
D. -, Holic, Thessalian, ἴω Tene oy as τιμᾷ, δόξᾳ: Beotic ἡ 
(for the original az) ; as τῆ. : 

-a, Ionic τῇ ; as οἰκίῃ, σοφίῃ: Beeotic -η (for the original -az); as 
Fedarin, ἀγορῆ, immacin. ᾿ 
A. -nv, Zolic, Beotic, Thessalian, and Doric -ἂν ; as τιμάν, τελώ- 


vay. 
-av, Ionic -ν ; as οἰκίην, σοφίην. 





§ 45.] SECOND DECLENSION. ne 55 


V.-a feminine, Aolic -a ; as Adpddira, νὐὑμφᾶ. 
-n, Adolic, Thessalian, and Doric -@; as τελώνᾷ. 
P. N. -az, Beeotic "ἢ ; as ἱππότη. 

α. -ὧν, Beotic -ἄων; as τιμάων: ype : -dovy; a8 Πελασγι- 
ourdouy : Abolic ‘and ore “ἂν; ; aS τιμᾶν : Tonic -έων; aS 
τιμέων, μουσέων : Kipic -ἄων, -ἔων. 

D. -αες, Old and Poetic - -atot; aS ταμίαισι, τιμαῖσι: Beotie - “$3 
as τιμῆς, εὐεργέτης : lonic -σι, - ys; as μούσῃσι μούσῃς : 
Epic -αὐσι, -ῃσι, τῇ --. 

A. -ἂς, ΔΖ. ο11Ο -ais; as τέχναις : Doric -ἄς; as τέχνᾶς, πάσᾶς : 
Cretan -avs; a8 πρειγευτάνς, in an inscription. 


1. Some proper names in ἢ ς, belonging to the later Greek, make 
the genitive singular in ἢ ; as eric G. Ἰαννῇ, D. Ιαννῇ, A. Ἰαννῆν, V. 
Tavvn, Jannes. ° 
2. The endings -ara1, -yeoe, of the dative plural, were sometimes 
3 pronounced and written without the first.; as ταμίασι, τῆσι, αὐτῆσι, 
_ ἐπιστάτησι, found in ancient inscriptions. 

In the adverbial dative plural these endings are written -ags, τησι; 
as Αθήνησι, ᾿Αγρυλῆσι, ᾿Αλωπεκῆσι, found in inscriptions, - 


3. Adverbial datives in -a, -ἢ are often written without the.. Dur- 
ing the classical period, however, this twas not omitted ; thus, in in- 
scriptions we find ὅπῃ, Doric ὅπᾳ, not ὅπη, dra. 


SECOND DECLENSION. 


§ 45. 1. The following table exhibits the case- 
endings and the last vowel of the root united : 


Singular. . Dual. Plural. 
Masc. & Fem. Neut. All genders. Mase. & Fem. Neut, 
Ν. ος ον N. A.V. o ot a 
ov ov G. D. ow ov ov 
; ῳ ῳ οἷς ous 
A. ov ov ous a 
AS € ov οι α 








2. Nouns in os are masculine, feminine, or com- 
mon; nouns in ov are neuter; as ὁ λόγος, word, ἡ 
δοκός, beam, ὁ, ἡ ἄνθρωπος, a human being, man, wo 
man, σῦκον, ficus, fig. 


3. Some nouns of this declension lengthen the 
radical vowel o into w throughout; as ὁ λαγώς, 16 - 
pus, hare, ὃ, ἡ εὔγεως, fertile, τὸ εὔγεων, fertile 


56 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [8 45. 


In nouns of this description, the genitive smgular and the nomina- 
tive of the neuter plural end in - (contracted from -@o, -wa). The 
vocative is always like the nominative. 

4. A few feminines of this declension (commonly 
referred to the third) take the following endings in 


the singular : N. ὦ, G. οὖς, D. of, A. o, V. ot; as — 


ἠχώ, EChO, πειθώ, persuasion. 
Two nouns of this class have - ὦ ς in the nominative singular; ἡ 7s, 
morning, and ἡ αἰδώς, shame, respect. 

5. The termination wv of the accusative singular, 
in some masculines and feminines, drops vy; as ὁ 
"Abas, Tov Ἄθω; ὁ λαγώς, τὸν λαγών or ayo ; ἡ ἕως, 
τὴν ἕω, Morning. 

6. ‘The following neuters have o instead of ov; 
ἄλλο, αὐτό, ἐκεῖνο, ὅ, τό, and τοῦτο, from ἄλλος, αὐτός, 
ἐκεῖνος, ὅς, ὃ, οὗτος. 

7. Nouns in cos, οος, eov, οον are contracted ; as 
πλόος πλοῦς, sailing, ὀστέον ὀστοῦν, bone. 


8. Examples. 
— οἷ 


N. λόγος | δοκός νῆσος ines ᾿ ἔργον σῦκον 








57 


ᾧ 45.] SECOND DECLENSION. 
Singular. 
6, temple, ὃ, 7, fertile. ‘rd, hail. 7, echo. ἧ, morning, 
N. νεώς εὔγεως ἀνώγεων ἠχώ ἠώς 
, > , > - ᾿ - 
G. νεώ εὔγεω ἀνώγεω ἠχοῦς ἠοῦς 
D. νεῷ εὔγεῳ ἀνώγεῳ ἠχοῖ not 
A. νεών εὔγεων ἀνώγεων ἠχώ ἠῶ 
V. νεώς εὔγεως ἀνώγεων ἠχοῖ ἠοῖ 
Dual. 
N. A. V.. veo εὔγεω ἀνώγεω ἠχώ 
G. Ὁ. νεῷν εὔγεῳν ἀνώγεῳν ἠχοῖν 
Plural. 
N. veg εὔγεῳ ἀνώγεω nxot 
G. νεῶν εὔγεων ἀνώγεων ἠχῶν 
D. νεῷς εὔγεῳς ἀνώγεῳς ἠχοῖς 
Α. νεώς εὔγεως ἀνώγεω ἠχούς 
Ὗ. νεῴ εὔγεῳ ἀνώγεω nxot 
Contracts. 
Singular. 
6, sailing. “τὸ, bone. 
N. πλόος πλοῦς ὀστέον ὀστοῦν 
G. πλόου πλοῦ ὀστέου ὀστοῦ 
D. πλόῳ. πλῷ ὀστέῳ ὀστῷ -" 
A. πλόον πλοῦν ὀστέον ὀστοῦν 
V. πλόε πλοῦ ὀστέον ὀστοῦν 
Dual. 
N. A. V. -πλόω πλώ ὀστέω ὀστώ 
G. D. πλόοιν πλοῖν ὀστέοιν ὀστοῖν 
Plural. 
N. πλόοι πλοῖ ὀστέα ὀστᾶ 
G. πλόων πλῶν ὀστέων ὀστῶν 
D. πλόοις πλοῖς ὀστέοις ὀστοῖς 
Α. πλόους πλοῦς ὀστέα ὀστᾶ 
V. πλόοι πλοῖ ὀστέα ὀστᾶ 


For examples in cos, oov, see the adjectives χρύσεος, ἀργύρεος, ἁπλό- 


os, below. 


Nore 1. The vocative of nouns in os is sometimes the same as the 


nominative ; as ὦ φίλος, ὦ dios αἰθήρ. 


3* 


58 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [SS 46, 47. 


Norte 2. ‘The vocative of nouns in os is the same as the root with 
a change of o into ε: as λόγε, ἄνθρωπε, for λόγο, ἄνθρωπο. 

That of feminines in @, ὡς, lengthens the raaical vowel o into o: ; as 
ἠχοῖ, ἠοῖ, for ἦχό, 7d. 


§ 46. Dialects. 


S. G.-ov, Holic, Beotic, and Doric -o ; as μεγάλω, οὐρανῶ : old 
Thessalian -o1o, later Thessalian-o1; as θεοῖο, πόνοιο, 
ἑαυτοῖ, ἸΠΤαυσανιαίοι, Σιλάνοι : Epic -o10, sometimes, - οὔ. 

-@, original and Epic -wo; thus, Πετεῶο, from Πετεώς. 
-οῦς, Aolic and Doric -ws ; as Adras, Λατῶς. 

D.-@, Beotie -d (for the original -o1); as ri δάμυ, Εὐβώλυ, 
Ἐξελατιήυ, for τῷ δάμῳ, Εὐβώλῳ, Ἐλατειαίῳ : ‘Thessalian 
πους 4S TOU κοινου, αὕτου. 

A. -ὠ, from feminines, AZolic -ων; as Λάτων: Tonic -οῦν; as 

οὔν, Tour. 
D.G.D. -orv, Epic -οεὲν; as ἵπποιιν. 

P.N. -o1, Beotic -v ; as τύ, rude, for roi, τοίδε. 

D. τοις, Old and Poetic -οεσε; as λόγοισι, θριγκοῖσι : Beeotic 
-Us3; 85 ἄλλυς, προβάτυς. 

A. -ους, Aolic -o1s ; as νόμοις, τοίς : Beotic-as ; as ἐσγόνως : 
Doric -@s, -os ; 85 λύκως, λύκος : Cretan -ονς; as τόνς, 

m 6. 

1. Inancient inscriptions, ᾧ, in the expression ἐφ᾽ 6, -on condition 
that, is always written without the « subscript; thus, EQ. 

2. Proper names in -οῦς are inflected like contracts in -ods; ex- 
cept that they make the dative in -οῦ; as Ιησοῦς, G. Ιησοῦ, D. Ιησοῦ, 
A. Ἰησοῦν, V. Ἰησοῦ, Jesus, or Joshua. 

In the Septuagint, the dative of Ἰησοῦς is also Inwot. - 

3. In ἃ Doric inscription, Aaros is found for the genitive Λατῶς, 
that is Λητοῦς. 

4. In inscriptions cut during the brazen period of the language, the 
endings -ες, τε v are found for -cos, -cov ; as Anunrpts, Ἑλλάδις; Διο- 
νύσις, Αὐρήλις, Iovdus, Ἀπολλινάρις ; τὸν Axéow, Adpodeiow, KadXi- 


στιν, Ἐλευθέριν ; neuter τὸ μαρτύριν for ὕριον. 
Also 6 Ἂν ae E:pynvats, Ἑστιαις, for Αθήναιος, Εἰρηναῖος, Ἑστιαῖος. 


THIRD DECLENSION. Mea 
§ 47. 1. The root of this declension is obtained 
by dropping os of the genitive singular; as κόραξ 
κόρακος, YOOt Kopax ; λέων λέοντος, TOOt λεοντ. 


2. The following table exhibits the case-erdings 
of the third declension: | 











ᾧ 47.] THIRD DECLENSION. 59 
Singular. Dual. ; Plural, 
All genders, | All genders. Mase. & Fem. Neut. 
N. ς N.A.V. ε ες α 
G. ος, ὡς α. D. οιν ων ων 
Ὀ ι σι σι 
Α a, v as a 
V ς ες α 


3. The following table exhibits the endings (not 
the case-endings) of the nominative and genitive 
singular, of the third declension. 


The ending of the nominative contains a part of the root and very 
often the case-ending -s ; the ending of the genitive always contains a 
part of the root followed by the case-ending -os. Thus, in πρᾶγμ-α 
πράγμ-ατος, -a is a part of the root, and -aros, a part of the root fol- 
lowed by the case-ending -os; in π-αῖς π-αιδός, -αἰς is a part of the 
root and the case-ending -s. 


-a Ὁ. dros, neuter; as πρᾶγμα, thing, σῶμα, body. But γάλα Ὁ. γά- 
λακτος, lac, milk. Kapa, head, has a long in the last syllable. 

ats —atdos, atros ; 6, ἡ mais παιδός, puer, child, boy, girl, τὸ σταίς 
σταιτός, dough; ἡ Sais dards, feast. 

-ἂν — avos, masculine ; παιάν, paean, Πάν, Pan, Τιτάν, Titan. 

τἄν ---- avos, αντος, neuter to -ds ; μέλαν, βουλεῦσαν. 

τἂρ ---- ατος, apos, neuter ; ἧπαρ, -aros, hepar, the liver, νέκταρ, -apos, 
nectar, οὖθαρ, -aros, uber, udder. But ὁ Wap ψαᾶρός, starling, ὁ 

μάκαρ, -apos, blessed, ἡ δάμαρ, -aptos, wife. When -ap is preceded 

by e, a contraction may take place; as δέλεαρ, δελέατος δέλητος, bait, 

ἔαρ np, ver, the spring, κέαρ κῆρ, cor, heart, στέαρ στῆρ, tallow, 

Sat, φρέαρ, φρέατος φρητός, a well. 


-as — Gros, aos, neuter; as κέρας, cornu, horn, κρέας, caro, meat, 
τέρας, prodigy Nouns of this class may drop the τ ; as κέρας 
Képaos, κρέας Kpéaos, τέρας tépaos. Some nouns of this class 
always appear without the τ; as δέπας, -aos, goblet, σέλας, -aos, 
effulgence. 

-ἅς — ados, feminine ; as λαμπάς, torch, μονάς, unit. But adjectives 
of this ending are of the common gender; as 6, ἡ λογάς, picked, 
chosen. 

-ἂς (-ἄς, -ats)—avros, avos, masculine; ἐλέφας, elephas, ele- 
phantus, elephant, yiyas, gigas, giant, Aias, Ajax. Only two 
have (ἃ. avos, μέλας, black, and τάλας, unfortunate.—The short end- 
ing -ἄς in nouns of this description is Doric; as Aids, πράξᾶς, 
τινάξᾶς, nods, τάλᾶς, μέλᾶς. (ᾧ 14, n. 7.) Theending-acs is 
Aolic ; as mais, Kipvais, μέλαις, τάλαις. 

-as — adds, feminine, contracted from -ais ; Sas dadds, torch. 

-avs — dos ; ἡ γραῦς, old woman, 7 vais, navis, ship, the ouly nouns 
in -avs. ; 

-erp—ecpds; 6 φθείρ, louse, ἡ χείρ χειρός or χερός, hand. 

-eLs — evos; ὃ εἷς, UNUS, One, 6 κτείς, pecten, comb, the only ex- 

amples 


60 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [547 


τεἰς (- “ES, τες, τῇ s) — evros, masculine ; βουλευθείς, τιθείς, χαρίεις, 
ἀστερόεις, αἱματόεις. When it is preceded by ἡ Or o, a contraction 
inay take place ; as τιμήεις τιμῇς, πλακόεις πλακοῦς. ---- Some names 
of cities in -dets -οῦς are feminine; as Τραπεζοῦς, τοῦντος, Trape- 
zus, — The endings -evs, -ns are Doric ; as τιθένς, xapins, ἀστερό- 
ns, αἱματόης, καταλυμακωθής. The ending -es is Miossslian and 
Doric ; as εὐεργετές (Thessalian participle from εὐεργέτημι), χαρί- 
ες, ἀστερόες, αἱματόες. 

τεις --εἰδος ; ἡ κλείς, cClavis, key, lock. 

-ev (-εἰν) —evros, evos, neuter to -εἰς G. evros, evos 3 as ἕν, βουλευθέν. 
The ending -εἰν belongs to the later Epic dialect; as σκιόειν, δα- 
κρυόειν, in Apollonius, 

τες — eos, neuter to -7s G. eos ; as ἀληθές, σαφές. 

-evs—é€os, Attic ἕως ; as βασιλεύς, king. 

τη —nTos,.; τὸ κάρη, head, Ionic for κάρα, the only example. 

τὴν —nV0S, ενος, masculine, sometimes feminine; 6 μήν “μηνός, men- 
515, month, ὁ σπλήν, -nvés, lien, spleen, ὃ Agi τ -évos, haven, 9 
φρήν φρενός, mind. 

τηρτ---ηρος, Epos, masculine, sometimes feminine ; as ὁ σωτήρ, τῆρος, 
preserver, ὁ θήρ θηρός, fera, wild beast, 6 anp, τέρος, ἃ δ τ, ar, ὁ ai- 
θήρ, -έρος, aether, ether; ἡ μήτηρ, ἡ θυγάτηρ, ἡ 9 Δημήτηρ, ἡ γαστήρ, 
ἡ Κήρ, ἡ ῥαιστήρ. ---- For -ἢρ contracted, see -ap. 

7s—eos, masculine or feminine ; ἡ τριήρης, triremis, 6, ἡ ἀληθής, 
true. 
της ---ητος, feminine, sometimes masculine ; all abstract nouns in γτης 
are feminine ; as ἡ θεότης, divinity, 7 βραδύτης, slowness. Πάρνης, 
6. -néos, Parnes, a mountain. 

-ns —evros, Doric for - εἰς, evros. Also in Latin names, as Κλήμης, 

Clemens. 


τῆ ς --- ndos, contracted from τηΐςς ἡ παρής, Cheek, ἡ Νηρής, ΝΝετεϊά. 

-t—wos, eos (ews), neuter; σίνᾶπι, sinapi, mustard, πέπερι, piper, 
pepper. But μέλι μέλετος, mel, honey, τί τίνος or τινός, from τίς, 
τὶς. 

-ἶν ---- vos, another form of -is ἵνος. 

-ts—uos, Attic ews, Poetic cos, feminine ; 3 as πόλις, state, city, ὕβρις, 
superbia, haughtiness, TUpots, turris, tower, κάνναβις, Canna- 
bis, hemp, σάγαρις, securis, axe. Except ὁ xis, 6 ὄρχις, ὁ ὄφις, 
oi, ai κύρβεις, 6, ἡ ἔχις, 6, ἡ κόρι 

τες πττίτος, ιδος, tOos, generally feminine, sometimes masculine or com- 
ne ; ἡ χάρις, -tTos, grace, ἣ ἐλπίς, -idos, Nope: ἃ, ἡ ὄρνις, -ἴθος, 

“ts ΟΥ̓ τὰν — wos, masculine, rarely feminine ; as ὁ δελφίς or δελφίν, 
delphin, dolphin, ἡ pis, nose, ἡ is, Vis, strength. But ris, ris, G. 
Tivos, Tivds. 

-As —Nos, ὁ ἅλς, sal, salt, ἡ ἡ Gs, salum, the sea, the only example. 

fe vOos; ἡ € Aryuvs, ἡ πείρινς, ἡ Tipuvs, perhaps the only exam 
ples. 

-§—kos, γος, xos, generally masculine, sometimes feminine ; as 6 xé- 
pag, -axos, Corvus, crow, ὃ κόκκυξ, τυγος, ΘΟΘΟΥ͂ΧΣ, cuckoo, ὁ ὄνυξ 
τυχος, UNguis, παῖ], ἡ 7 θρίξ τριχός, hair, ὃ, ἣ ἅρπαξ, rapax, rape 








§ 47.] THIRD DECLENSION. . 61 


cious. But ὁ ἄναξ (α. ἄνωκτος, sovereign, ἡ νύξ G. νυκτός, nox, 
night, ἣ ἀλώπηξ G. ἀλώπεκος, vulpes, for. 

~o.s —ovos, contracted from -ois ; ἡ ois, ovis, sheep, 6 φθοῖς, a kind 
of cake, the only examples, 

κὸν — ovos, ovros, neuter to -wy, ovos, ovros ; a8 εὔδαιμον, βουλεῦον. 

-op — opos, neuter; as ἦτορ, heart. ' 

-os — εος, neuter; as γένος, genus, race, νέφος, nubes, cloud, ῥίγος, 
frigus, cold, Ajvos, lana, wool, ἕλκος, ulcus, ulcer. 

-¢s— ὅτος, neuter to -ὡς, οτος ; as βεβουλευκός. 

-ovv— οδος, neuter to the compounds of ποῦς ; as δίπουν. 


_ -ovs —ovros, masculine ; as ddovs, dens, tooth. But 6, ἡ βοῦς Bods, 


bos, ox, cow, ὁ χοῦς χοός, a measure, 6, ἡ ῥοῦς, rhus, sumach, ὃ 
πούς ποδός, pes, foot. 

εὖ — cos (ews), neuter ; ἄστυ, γλυκύ. 

εὖν — vvos, another form of -vs ὕνος. 

-¥ y— vrtos, neuter to -vs, uvtos ; as Suv, δεικνύν. 

-vp — upos ; τὸ πῦρ πυρός, fire, 6 μάρτυρ, -vpos, witness. 

-vs— vos, eos (ews), masculine or feminine ; as 6, ἡ σῦς, SUS, swine, 
sow, hog, ὁ μῦς, mus, mouse, 6 ἰχθύς, fish, ὁ γλυκύς, -Kéos, dulcis, 
sweet. In masculine substantives the Attic genitive is in ews; as 
ὁ πέλεκυς, -κεως. ; 

-vs —v0os, vos, feminine ; as δαγύς, -ῦδος, κώμυς, -ῦθος. 

-ὖς οὐ -U vy —vvos, masculine or feminine ; as ὁ Φόρκυς, ἡ Τόρτυς. 


_ -ts— vrtos, masculine; as δεικνύς, pis, dvs. 


-Ψ — πος, Bos, pos, masculine, rarely feminine ; as 6 yi γυπός, vul- 
ture, 6 "Apaw, -aBos, ἡ κατῆλιψ, -upos, trap-door ? 

κων — wvos, ovos, masculine, feminine, or common; as 6 αἰών, -ὥνος, 
aevum, age, ὁ ἄξων, -ovos; axis, axle-tree, 6, ἣ εὐδαίμων -ovos, 
happy. Ποσειδάων is contracted into Ποσειδῶν, Poseidon. 

τῶν ---- οντος, masculine; λέων, leo, lion, γράφων, writing. Proper 
names in -φάων are contracted; as, Ξενοφάων, Ξενοφῶν, Xeno- 
phon. 


ΟΠ -@p— pos, opos, masculine, sometimes feminine or common; as 6 


pop φωρός, fur, thief, 6 ῥήτωρ, -opos, ἡ προμήτωρ, τορος. But τὸ 
ἔλδωρ, τὸ ἕλωρ, τὸ ὕδωρ. 


_ -@s— τος, wos, masculine ; as γέλως, -wros, laughter, φώς φωτός, 


man, θώς θωός, Μίνως, -wos. But ἡ das, dos, gift, τὸ φῶς, (φάος,) 
light. 
-@s— dros, participle masculine ; βεβουλευκώς. 


᾿ς -@s — bos, only ἡ dos φῳδός, blister, a burn, contracted from dais. 


ων 


4, Many nouns of the third declension, of which 


tne root ends in ε, 4, v, are contracted. 


The contracted accusative plural is always like 
the contracted nominative plural. 


ο΄ (4) Nouns in ns, es, os are contracted when the vowel of the case- 


_ ending comes in contact with the vowel of the root; as τριήρης, 
_ Tpinpeos τριήρους ; σαφές, σαφέος σαφοῦς ; τεῖχος, τείχεος τείχους. 


62 


INFLECTION OF WORDS. 


[§ 47. 


(Ὁ) Nouns in ts, ες vs, v, and evs are contracted in the dative singu 
lar, and in the nominative, accusative, and vocative plural; as πόλις, 
πόλιι TAL; ἰχθύς, ixOvi ἰχθυῖ; βασιλεύς, βασιλέες βασιλεῖς. 

(6) The radical vowels « and v are, in many nouns, changed into ε 
in all the cases, except the nominative, accusative, and vocative, sin- — 
gular; as πόλις πόλεως, πέλεκυς πελέκεως. 

(4) Neuters in as often drop the r and are contracted when the 
vowel of the case-ending comes in contact with the a; as κέρας, κέρα 
Tos κέραος κέρως. 

(6) Bods, 6,9, bos, ox, cow, ἡ γραῦς, old woman, and ἡ ναῦς, 
navis, ship, are contracted only in the accusative plural; thus βόας, 
Bods, ypaas γραῦς; vaas vais. 


5. Examples. 





Singular. | 
6, crow. 6, vulture. ἡ, grace. 7, hope. 6, jackal. 6, orator. © 
κόραξ yor χάρις ἐλπίς θώς ῥήτωρ 
κόρακος γυπός χάριτος ἐλπίδος Oads ῥήτορος 
κόρακι yori χάριτι ἐλπίδι θωΐ ῥήτορι 
κόρακα γῦπα χάριν ἐλπίδα θῶα ῥήτορα 
κόραξ γύψ χάρι ἐλπί θώς ῥῆτορ 

Dual. 

κόρακε yore χάριτε Amide θῶε ῥήτορε 
κοράκον γυποῖν χαρίτοιν ἐλπίδοιν θώοιν ᾧῥητόροιν» 

Plural. 
κόρακες γῦπες χάριτες ἐλπίδες θῶες ῥήτορες 
κοράάω γυπῶν χαρίτων ἐλπίδων θώων ῥητόρων 
κόραξι i χάριτι ἐλπίσι θωσί ῥήτορσι 
κόρακας γῦπας χάριτας ἐλπίδας θῶας ὄδήτορας 
κόρακες γῦπες χάριτες ἐλπίδες θῶες ῥήτορες 

Singular. 
τὸ, thing. 6,age. 6, god. 6, haven. 6, lion. 6, giant — 
πρᾶγμα αἱἷν δαίμωο λιμν λέων ογίγᾶς 
πράγματος αἰῶνος δαίμονος λιμένος λέοντος γίγαντος 
πράγματε aia  Saivom λιμένε λέοντε γίγαντι 
πρᾶγμα αἰῶνα δαίμονα ἕνα λέοντα γίγαντα 
πρᾶγμα aiov δαῖμον λιμήν λέον γίγαν 

Dual. 

πράγματε aiave Saipove λιμένε λέοντε γίγαντε 
πραγμάτοιν αἰώνοιν δαιμόνοιν λιμένοιν λεόντοιν γιγάντοι» 








THIRD DECLENSION. 


63 


Plural. 
πράγματα αἰῶνες δαίμονες λιμένες λέοντες γίγαντες 
πραγμάτων αἰώνων δαιμόνων λιμένων λεόντων γιγάντων 
πράγμασι αἰῶσι δαίμοσι λιμέσι λέουσι γίγᾶσι 
πράγματα αἰῶνας δαίμονας λιμένας λέοντας γίγαντας 
πράγματα αἰῶνες δαίμονες λιμένες λέοντες γίγαντες 

Contracts. 

Singular. 

ἡ, galley, τὸ, wall, 6, fish. 
Tpinpns τεῖχος ἰχθύς 
τριήρεος τριήρους τείχεος τείχους ἰχθύος 
Tpinpet τριήρει τείχεὶ τείχει ἰχθύς ἰχθυῖ 
τριήρεα τριήρη τεῖχος ἰχθύν 
τρίηρες τεῖχος ἰχθύ 

Dual. 
Tpinpee τριήρη τείχεε. τείχη ἰχθύε 
τριηρέοιν᾽ τριηροῖν τειχέοιν τειχοῖν ἰχθύοιν 
Plural. 

, , é " " , > Δ’ 
τριήρεες τριήρεις τείχεα τείχη ἰχθύες ἰχθῦς 
τριηρέων τριήρων τειχέων τειχῶν ἰχθύων 
τριήρεσι τείχεσι ἰχθύσι 
τριήρεας τριήρεις τείχεα τείχη ἰχθύας ἰχθὺς 
τριήρεες τριήρεις τείχεα τείχη ἰχθύες ἰχθὺς 

Singular. 
ἡ, state. τὸ, mustard. 
πόλις σίνᾶπι 
πόλεος πόλεως σινάπεος 
πόλεὶ πόλει 'σινάπεξ σινάπει 
πόλιν σίναπι 
πόλι σίναπι 
Dual. 
πόλεε σινάπεε 
πολέοιν σιναπέοιν 
Plural. 
πόλεες πόλεις σινάπεα σινάπη 
πόλεων σιναπέων 
πόλεσι σινάπεσι 
- πόλεας πόλεις σινάπεα σινάπη 
᾿πόλεες πόλεις σινάπεα σινάπη 


Φ 


INFLECTION OF WORDS. 


Singular. 
6, cubit. τὸ, city. 6, king. 
N. πῆχυς ἄστυ βασιλεύς 
α. πήχεως ἄστεος βασιλέως 
D. mye πήχει ἄστεὶ ἄστει Bacrei βασιλεῖ 
Α. πῆχυν ἄστυ βασιλέα 
8 πῆχυ ἄστυ βασιλεῦ 
Dual. : 
N. A.V. πήχεε ἄστεε βασιλέε 
α. D. πηχέοιν ἀστέοιν βασιλέοιν 
Plural 
N. πήχεες πήχεις ἄστεα ἄστη ββσιλέες βασιλ-εῖς; -ἣσ 
α. πήχεων ἀστέων βασιλέων 
D. πήχεσι ἄστεσι βασιλεῦσι 
Α. πήχεας πήχεις ἄστεα ἄστη βασιλέας βασιλεῖς 
Υ. πήχεες πήχεις ἄστεα ἄστη βασιλέες βασιλεῖς 
Singular. 
τὸ, horn. τὸ, prize. 
N. κέρας γέρας 
G. Képaros κέραος κέρως γέραος γέρως 
D. κέρατι κέραϊ κέρᾳ γέρα γέρᾳ 
Α. κέρας γέρας 
γ. κέρας γέρας 
Dual. 
N. A.V. Képate κέραε κέρα γέραε γέρα 
α. ἢ. κεράτοιν κεράοιν κερῷν γεράοιν γερῷν 
Plural. 
N. κέρατα κέραα κέρα γέραα γέρα 
G. κεράτων κεράων κερῶν γεράων γερῶν 
D. κέρασι γέρασι 
Α. κέρατα κέραα κέρα γέραα γέρα 
ae κέρατα κέραα κέρα γέραα γέρα 
Nore 1. Proper names in -κλέης, contracted -κλῆς, undergo 
double contraction in the dative singular, and sometimes in the accus 
tive singular; as 
NN. Περικλέης Περικλῆς, Pericles 
G. περικλέεος Περικλέους 
D. περικλέεϊ Περικλέει Περικλεῖ 
A. περικλέεα Περικλέα Περικλῆ = 
V. περίκλεες Περίκλεις ; 


[§ 47. 








ὃ 48.] THIRD DECLENSION. : 65 


Nore 2, In later Greek, the genitive of nouns in vs may be con- 
tracted ; as πῆχυς; πηχέων πηχῶν. Further, the genitive singular and 
neuter plural of adjectives 1 in vs may be contracted; as ἥμισυ, ἡμίσεος 
ἡμίσους, ἡμίσεα ἡμίση, (Luc, 19, 8.) 


Nore 3, (a) The genitive singular of nouns in evs may be contract- 


ed after a vowel; as Tleipaseds, Ἡρρθήφε Πειραιῶς ; χοεύς, χοέως χοῶς, 
a kind of measure. 


(b) In the old Attic dialect, the ending ees of nouns in evs is con- 
tracted into ῆς ; as ἱππεύς ἱππῆς, πλυνεύς πλυνῆς. 


Nore 4. The ending ee of the dual of neuters in os was also con- 


tracted into εἰ ; as σκέλος σκέλει, ζεῦγος ζεύγει, found in Attic inserip- 
tions. 


Nore 5. The contracted dative poe of neuters in as lengthens 
_ the a after the analogy of the first declension ; as γέρας γέρᾶι γέρᾳ. 


_ Nore 6. The genitive singular of neuters may, in Attic Poetry, 
end in ὡς; as ἄστυ ἄστεως. In later Greek, such genitives were used 
also in prose ; as σίναπι σινάπεως, βραχύ βραχέως. 


Nore 7. According to the old grammarians, the Attic genitive and 
dative dual of nouns in ts and vs end in ὧν ; as πόλις πόλεῳν. 
48. 1. Most nouns of the third declension 
“a m the nominative singular by annexing ς to the 
root; as θώ-ς 90-08, σαφέ-ς cadé-os. 


en 


So kis κιός, wikié πόλιος, κόραξ κόρακος, θρίξ τριχός, γύψ γῦπός, 
᾿ κατῆλιψ κατήλιφος, χάρις χάριτος, ἕλμινς ἕλμινθος, μέλᾶς μέλανος, 
BovAevoas βουλεύσαντος, τιθείς τιθέντος. (δὴ 13; 14.) 

τς (a) When the rust ends in ες masculines and feminines lengthen es 
_ into ns ; as τριήρης τριήρεος, triremis, σαφής σαφέος. 

ἢ (Ὁ) The perfect active participle lengthens o into in the mascu- 
: line ; as βεβουλευκώς βεβουλευκότος. 


(c) All neuter substantives change es into os ; aS τεῖχος τείχεος, βέ- 
Ros βέλεος. 


(4) Some neuters change , into p; as ἧπαρ ἥπατος, φρέαρ φρέατος 
᾿ς (δ) Πούς, pes, foot, lengthens os into ovs. Homer has ἀρτίπος, 
_ sound-footed, - 

(f) Nouns whose root originally ended in ar, er, oF, change F into 


ᾧ vu ὈΘΙΌΓΘ ς ; ἃ5 Ψαξς ναῦς, γραῦς γραῦξ, βασιλεῖς βασιλεύς, ZeFs Ζεύς; 
᾿ rs βοῦς, xoFs χοῦς. poFs ῥοῦς. 
7 


_ 2. When the nominative is not formed according 
_to the preceding rule, it is the same as the root 


need 


66 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [$4 49, 50. 


with the omission of such consonants as cannot 
stand at the end of a Greek word (δ 6, 5). Mas- 
culines and feminines lengthen ε and o, in the last 
syllable, into 7 and ὦ, respectively. E. g. αἰών 
αἰῶν-ος, λιμήν λιμέντος, ῥήτωρ ῥήτορτ-ος. 

So πρᾶγμα πράγματος, παιάν παιᾶνος, δάμαρ δάμαρτος, χείρ χειρός, 
σίναπι σινάπιος, πῦρ πυρός, δαίμων δαίμονος, λέων λέοντος. 

§ 49. 1. The accusative singular of masculines 
and feminines is formed by, annexing a to the root; 
as κόραξ κόρακ-α, λέων λέοντ-α. 


2. Nouns in ἐς, vs, avs, ovs, of which the τοοί ends 
in a vowel, form their accusative by dropping s of 
the nominative and annexing vj; as πόλις πόλιν, 
ἰχθύς ἰχθύν, πέλεκυς πέλεκυν. 

So γραῦς γραῦν, ναῦς ναῦν, βοῦς βοῦν, χοῦς χοῦν, ῥοῦς ῥοῦν. 

3. If the root ends in a consonant, paroxytones 
and proparoxytones in ἐς and vs have α or v in the 
accusative ; as ὄρνις, ὄρνιθα or ὄρνιν ; κόρυς, κόρυθα or 
κόρυν ; εὔελπις, εὐέλπτιδα OF εὔελπιν. 


The accusative in a, in nouns of this description, is rather Poetic. 


Nore. In the Epie dialect, the following nouns often have a in the 
accusative singular, contrary to the second rule : βοῦς βόα, edpis εὐ- 
ρέα, ἰχθύς ἰχθύα, ναῦς νέα, πόλις πόληα. 

The accusative of ΔῚΣ (originally AIFS) is always Δία. . 


§ 50. In many instances, the vocative singular 
of masculine and feminine nouns is like the nom- 
inative singular. 


1. The vocative of nouns in ἄς (arising from aps, 
avrs), εἰς (from εντς np, ὧν, wp, is the same as the 


root with the omission of such consonants as ~~ 


not stand at the end of a Greek word (§ 6, 5); 


γίγας γέγαντος γίγᾶν, πατήρ πατέρος πάτερ. 


δὴ 51, 52.] THIRD DECLENSION. 67 


So χαρίεις χαρίεντος χαρίεν, Salwar δαίμονος δαῖμον. So also yur 
_ γυναικός γύναι, ἄναξ ἄνακτος ἄνα. 
L 
1 2. Nouns in vs, vs, evs, and the compounds of 
πούς, foot, drop the ς of the nominative: εὖ is al- 
ways circumflexed ; as ἐλπίς ἐλπί, ἰχθύς ἰχθύ, βασὶ- 
λεύς βασιλεῦ, πόνος χαλκόπου. 


So also γραῦς γραῦ, old woman, παῖς παῖ, child. 
3. Nouns in 7s, G. εος; shorten ης into es in the 


-vocative ; as Σωκράτης xo WKPATES, τριήρης τρίηρες, ἀλη- 
Ons ἀληθές. 





ἦι, Απόλλων, Ποσειδῶν, and σωτήρ shorten the 
final syllable 1 in the vocative ; thus, "Ἄπολλον, Πόσει- 
δον, σῶτερ. 


1. The dative plural is formed by annex- 

ing oto the root; as θώς Owes θωσί, ἰχθύς ἰχθύος 
ἰχθύσι. 

N So τριήρης τριήρεος τριήρεσι, θρίξ τριχός θριξί, πούς ποδός ποσί, τά- 


λας τάλανος τάλασι, τιθείς τιθέντος τιθεῖσι, λέων λέοντος λέουσι, δεικνύς 
δεικνύντος δεικνῦσι. (δὲ 18 ; 14.) 


_ 2. Nouns in eds form their dative plural by drop- 
: ping s of the nominative and annexing ov; as βα- 
4 σιλεύς βασιλεῦσι. 






_ Also γραῦς γραυσί, ναῦς ναυσί, βοῦς βουσί, χοῦς χουσί, ῥοῦς ῥουσί. 


Note. Syncopated nouns in np annex the Doric case-ending doe 


' to the syncopated root ; see ἀνήρ, γαστήρ, θυγάτηρ, μήτηρ, πατήρ, also 
‘ dpvés, ἀστήρ, vids, in the Catalogue of nomalous Nouns. 


§ 62. Dialects. 


ΟΡ, D.-o1, Molic and Beotic -εσσιε; as πούς πόδεσσι, ἐλθών ἔλθόν. 
2 τεσσι;, διάλυσις διαλυσίεσσι : Doric - “Gl, τασσι, -εσι ; as 

ὑπάρχων ὑπαρχόντασσι, πράσσων πρασσόντασσι, θήρ θή- 

ρεσι, ἴς ἴνεσι, μάθημα μαθημάτεσι : Epic -εσσι, -εσι» 

-σσι; 85 πούς ποσσί, ἔπος ἔπε-σσι. 

D. G. Ὁ. -o1v, Epic ou ; as Σειρήν Σειρήνοιιν, πούς ποδοῖιν. 


————-  . ἐ —— 


68 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§ 52. 


1 Example of nouns in ἐς of which the root ends in e: 
S. Ν. πόλις, city, state 
G. Zolic, Beotic, Thessalian, Doric, and lonie πόλιος 
D. (πόλι), ZE. Β. Th. Ὁ. 1. πόλε 
A. πόλιν, in all the dialects 
. A. Ionic πόλιε 
. D. Ionic πολίοιν 
N. 2. B. Th. 1. πόλιες, Doric πολίες 
G. 4. B. Th. D. 1. πολίων 
D. 2. B. Th. D. πολίεσσι, Ionic πόλισι 
A. ZE. B. Th. πόλιας, Dorie πολίας, Ionic πόλιας πόλϊς 


2. Example of nouns in -evs: ἢ 
Ξ. Ν. βασιλεύς, Holic βασίλευς, Doric βασιλεῦς, kin ne 
G. Dorie and Ionic βασιλέος, Beotic βασιλεῖος, lic βασί- 
Anos, Epic βασιλῆος 
D. Ionic βασιλέϊ, Doric βασιλεῖ, Beotic βασιλεῖι, Holic βασί: 
Ani, Epic βασιλῆϊ 
A. Ionic βασιλέα, Dorie βασιλῆ, Beotic βασιλεῖα, Holic βασί- 
as Epic βασιλῆα. The Attic Poets sometimes use the 
oric accusative ; as ἱερεύς ἱερῆ, & evs & 
. A. Epic βασιλῆε, G. D. sae, es Tees 
N. Dorie and Ionic βασιλέες, Beeotic βασιλεῖες, Aolic βασίληες, 
aan βασιλῆες 
G. Doric and ΤΩΣ βασιλέων, Βαοῖς βασιλείων, AXolic and 
Epic βασιλήων. 
D. Doric, Beotic, Ionic, and Epic βασιλεῦσι, JE. βασιλήεσσι 
A. Doric and Ionic βασιλέας, Beotic βασιλεῖας, AXolic βασί- 
ληας, Epic βασιλῆας 


3. Nouns in ἔῃ ς (especially proper nouns in -κλέη ς), and neuters 
in €os are sometimes inflected without the ¢; that is, they are syn- 
copated ; as 

Ἡρακλέης Ἡρακλῆς, G. Ἡρακλέος, D. Ἡρακλέϊ, A. Ἡρακλέα, V 

Ἥρακλες, Jonic and Dorie, i in part. 
τὸ κλέος, τὰ κλέᾶ ; τὸ σπέος, τοῖς σπέσσι, Epic. 






















So δυσκλέᾶ, ὑπερδέᾶ, 1 in Homer; εὐκλέἄς, in Pindar. Also, τὰ κρέᾶ, 
τὰ κέρᾶ, from Kpéas, κέρας. 

Νηλής for νηλεής, and θεουδής for θεοδεής, drop the ε in the nom- 
inative. 

4. The Ionic contracts -eos, from nouns in gs, os, into -evs; 
θάμβος, G. θάμβεος θάμβευς. 

5. In nouns in -κλέης, the Epic contracts ce into ἡ or εἰ, and th 
Beotic into εἰ; as Ἡρακλέης, -κλέεος -κλῆος, -κλέεϊ -κλῆϊ, -κλέεα -κλῆα 
eUppens, evppecos etppeios ; ἐὐκλεής, ἐὐκλεέας ἐϊκλεῖας ; Δαμοκλῆς, 
μοκλέεος Δαμοκλεῖος. 


6. The later Greeks made G. -κλείους from nouns in -xens; 
Πασικλῆς -κλείους, Ἀριστοκλῆς -κλείους. 


§ 53.] AN )MALOUS NOUNS, | 69 


7. According to the ancient grammarians, the A®olic vocative of 
contract nouns in ἧς is the same as the root; as Αριστοφάνης Api- 
στόφανε, Σωκράτης Σώκρατε. 

8. The later Dorians sometimes shortened -εἰς of the contracted 
nominative and accusative plural into -e¢ ; as of, τοὺς iapés, βιοπλανές, 
Πριανσιές, from ἱερεύς, βιοπλανής, ἹΠριανσιεύς. 

9. In inscriptions belonging to the brazen age of the Greek language, 
the accusative singular of the third declension often ends in ay, which, 
properly speaking, is the original case-ending of this declension; as 
τὸν dvdpay, τὴν γυναῖκαν, τὴν μητέραν. ; 

10. In later Greek, some diminutives in ὃς retain the v through- 
“a a fol . a ec “a A , “ 
Out ; as 6 Διονῦς, τοῦ Διονύ, τῷ Atovd; ὁ Κλαυσῦς, τοῦ Κλαυσύ, τῷ 


Κλαυσῦ. (Bekker. Anecd. Gr. πο. 1195.) 


ANOMALOUS, DEFECTIVE, AND INDECLINABLE 
NOUNS. 


§ &2. Nouns which have more than one root are regarded 
as anomalous. 


_ 1. All contract proper names in 7s of the third declension 
_ may be inflected after the analogy of the first. In classical 
Greek, however, this rule applies chiefly to the accusative sin- 
gular. E. g. . 

Ἀριστοφάνης, A. Ἀριστοφάνη or Ἀριστοφάνην 

Τισσαφέρνης, A. Τισσαφέρνην, V. Τισσαφέρνη 

Καλλισθένης, G. Καλλισθένου 


Ἀριστοκλῆς, Μενεκράτης, V. Αριστοκλῆ, Μενεκράτη 
The olic dialect applies this principle also to adjectives; as ὁ 
| Svoperns, τὸν δυσμένην ; ὁ κυκλοτέρης, τὸν κυκλοτέρην. 
2. On the other hand, masculines of the first declension may, 
in the Ionic dialect, make the accusative in €a, €as; as 
Γύγης, δεσπότης, A. Γύγεα, δεσπότεα, δεσπότεας. 
Ἀρταξέρ ξης, in an Ἰοηΐο inscription, has G. Αρταξέρξευς, contract- 
ed from Apragép£eos. 
3. Some nouns in ἐς have G. wos or wos; as μῆνις μήνιος or 


᾿μήνιδος, Θέτις Θέτιδος or Θέτιος. See also ὄρνις, κλείς, θέμις, τί- 
γρις, in the Catalogue. 


_ 4. Some neuters in as, G. aos, change, in the Ionic dialect, a 


into e, in the inflection. See βρέτας, κνέφας, κῶας, οὖδας, ΥΔΑΣ, 
ΔΟΡΑΣ, in the Catalogue. 


5. Nouns in ἄς (arising from avs, avs) of the third declen- 
Sion sometimes are inflected after the analogy of the first ; as 


Π 
» 












70 . INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§ 54. 


Πολυδάμας, V. Πολυδάμα, Pols 'ydamas 
λυκάβας, μέλας, Alas, ἅπας, A. λυκάβαν, μέλαν, Αἶαν, ἅπαν 


6. Απόλλων, Ποσειδῶν, and κυκεών commonhy drop ν in the ac. 
cusative, and then contract a into ὦ ; thus, Ando, Ποσειδῶ, 
κυκειῶ (Epic). 


7. Sometimes the genitive of the second declension is form- 
ed after the analogy of the first; thus, Herodotus has Βάττος, 
Κλεόμβροτος, G. Barrew, Κλεομβρότεω. 


So βλεφάρων κυανεάων, in Hesiod; νῆσος νησάων (Ahrens, I, p. 
999). 


8. The ending ὧν (circumflexed) of the genitive plural οὐ 
the third declension may be changed into ἔων by the Ionians, 
and into ἂν by the Dorians, | after the analogy of the first; as 
pis ῥινέων, χήν χηνέων, αἴξ αἰγᾶν. 

So Σειρήν Σειρηνάων, χιλιάς χιλιαδέων (Her. 7, 103). 


9. The later Doric uses also -οἐς for - “ot, in the dative plural © 
of the third declension ; as ἀγών ἀγώνοις, ἐντυγχάνων ἐντυγχανόν- 
τοις, Λαμιεύς Λαμιέοις, γέρων γερόντοις. (Compare Latin -matis 
for -matibus, as poéma poématis; also -ocv of the dual of 
the same declension. ) 


So ἤγυ ὼ that is, αἴγοις, from αἴξ, goat, found in a Beotic inscrip-— 
tion. 

10. Some nouns in np, which make the genitive in epos, are 
generally syncopated i in the genitive and dative "Singular. 
ἀνήρ, γαστήρ, Δημήτηρ, θυγάτηρ, μήτηρ, and πατήρ, in the μῶν 
logue. 

11. Some nouns of the second declension are masculine in 
the singular, and masculine or neuter in the plural; as 6 λύ-, 
xv0s, οἱ λύχνοι or τὰ λύχνα ; ὃ δεσμός, οἱ δεσμοί or τὰ δεσμά ; δ᾽ 


σῖτος, τὰ σῖτα. 


, 
᾿ 
} 
ὃ 
ἶ 
ἐδ 
"| 


12. Many nouns have more than one form even in the nom- 
-native ; such nouns are commonly called redundant ; as ἡ ἕως 
and ἠώς, morn, morning ; ἡ γάλως, Ionic yards, glos, "husband’s 
sister ; τὸ δένδρον and δένδρος -εος, tree ; ἣ χώρα and 6 χῶρος, 
place, space. 


§ 64. 1. Defective nouns are those of which only some of — 
the cases are in use ; as τὸ γλάφυ, cave, τὴν vida, snow. 






2. Names of festivals are used only in the plural; as ra 
Παναθήναια, τὰ Ολύμπια, Πύθια, Νέμεα, Ἴσθμια. 


δὲ δῦ, 56.] ANOMALOUS NOUNS. | ἢ 





§ 83. Indeclinadle nouns are those which have only one 
form for all the genders, numbers, and cases. Such are, 


1. The names of the letters of the alphabet ; as τὸ ἄλφα, rod 
᾿ς ἄλφα, τῷ ἄλφα. 


᾿ 2. The cardinal numbers, from 5 to 100 inclusive ; as of 
᾿ πέντε; ai πέντε, τὰ πέντε, τοὺς πέντε. 


3. All foreign names not Grecized ἢ 886 Addu, τοῦ Addy, τῷ 
Addy, τὸν Addy, Adam. 


4. Χρεών, τὸ, necessity, destiny, fate. — Θέ pes, in the expres- 
‘sion θέμις εἶναι, to be lawful. 








%6. In the following Catalogue, assumed or imaginary 
minatives are written in capital letters, 


ἀηδών (AHAQ), dvos, ἧ, nightingale, regular. Also, G. ἀηδοῦς, V. 
— ἀηδοῖ. . 
a Αἴδης (Α:1Σ), ov, 6, Hades, regular. Also, G. ’Aidos, D. "Aidt, A 
“Aida. 
_ ἀλκή (AAZ), ἧς, ἡ, strength, regular. Also, D. ἀλκί. 
_ ἄλφιτον, ov, τὸ, meal, bread, regular. Also, τὸ ἄλφι, Epic. 
ἅλως, ὦ or wos, 7), threshing-floor. 
᾿ ἄναξ, ἄνακτος, 6, sovereign, regular. When employed to invokea god, 
it has V. ἄναξ or ἄνα ; elsewhere the vocative is always like the 
nominative. 
ἀνδράποδον (ANAPATIOYS), ov, τὸ, slave, regular. Also, Ὁ, Pl. avdpa 
πόδεσσι, Epic. 5 
np» 6, man, vir, G. ἀνέρος ἀνδρός, D. ἀνέρι ἀνδρί, A. ἀνέρα ἄνδρα, 
- ἄνερ, Dual N. A. Υ. ἀνέρε ἄνδρε, G. D. ἀνέροιν ἀνδροῖν, Plur. 
ἀνέρες ἄνδρες, G. ἀνέρων ἀνδρῶν, Ῥ. ἀνδράσι, A. ἀνέρας ἄνδρας, V. 
ἀνέρες ἄνδρες. (In this word, € is dropped, and the lingual ὃ is in- 
__ Serted between ν and p.) 
Ἀπόλλων, ὁ, Apollo, G. Ἀπόλλωνος, Ὁ. Απόλλωνι, A. Απόλλωνα Απόλ- 
| ho, V. "Απολλον. 
ἢ “Ἄρης, 6, Ares, G.”Apeos, rarely "Apews, D. "Αρεὶ “Apert, A. *Apea “Aon 
_ “Apny, V.” Apes. — Epic, G. “Apnos, D.”Apni, A. ” Apna. 
_ APN-, 6, 7, lamb, G. ἀρνός, D. ἀρνί, A. ἄρνα, Dual dpve ἀρνοῖν, Pl. N. 
ο΄ ἄρνες, &. ἀρνῶν, D. ἀρνάσι, A. ἄρνας. 
ὅν ἀστήρ, έρος, 6, stella, star, regular; but D. Pl. ἀστράσι, after the 
analogy of πατράσι from πατήρ. 
_ Barros, ov, ὁ, Battus, regular. Herodotus has G. Βάττεω. 
βοῦς, 6, ἡ, bos, ox, cow, G. Bods, D. Boi, A. βοῦν (Poetic βόα), V. 
_ Bod, Dual N. A. βόε, G. Ὁ. βοοῖν, Pl. N. βόες, G. βοῶν, D. βουσι, 
A. βόας Bots. —Beeotie Pl. G. βουῶν, D. βούεσσι, found in inserij> 
tions. 
_ βρέτας, eos, τὸ, a wooden emage, Poetic. 
γαστήρ, ἡ, venter, belly, (ἃ. γαστέρος γαστρός, 1). γαστέρι γαστρί, D 
δ - γαστράσι rarely γαστῆρσι; the rest is regular, - | 


2 ae a. ae 6 =e >. 
anova τον 








72 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ὁ do. 


γέλως, @ros oF a, ὃ, laughter, 
γλάφυ, τὸ, cave, defective. 
γόνυ (TONAS, TOYN), τὸ, genu, knee, G. γόνατος, D. γόνατι, Dual 
N. A. γόνατε, ἃ. Ὁ. yovarow, Pl. N. A. γόνατα, G. γονάτων, D. — 
γόνασι. Poetic forms, G. γουνός, D. youvi, Pl. N. γοῦνα, G. you- 
νων. The Ionic changes o into ov in the inflection, as G. γούνατος. 
γραῦς, 4, old woman, G. ypads, D. ypai, A. γραῦν, V. γραῦ, Dual N. 
A.V. ypae, G. D. γραοῖν, Pl. N. ypaes, ἃ. γραῶν, D. γραυσΐ, A. 
γραῦς, .} ypaes. ‘The Ionic changes a into ἡ ; γρηῦς, γρηῦ. It fur- © 
ther uses nv for nu; thus, ypnis, γρηῦ. 
rr (TYNAIZ), 7, woman, wife, G. yoni, D. γυναικί, A. γυναῖκα, 
. γύναι, Dual N. A. V. γυναῖκε, G. D. γυναικοῖν, Pl. N. γυναῖκες, 
G. γυναικῶν, D. γυναιξί, A. γυναῖκας, V. γυναῖκες. The comedians 
sometimes inflected γυνή after the analogy of the first declension ; as 











THY γυνην. 

Sais (AAS), ides, 4, fight, regular. Also, D. dai. 

δάκρυον, ov, τὸ, lacryma, fear, regular. Also, τὸ δάκρυ, Pl. D. da- 
κρυσι, Poetic. 

δέμας, τὸ, body, defective. : 

Δημήτηρ, ἡ, Demeter, G. Δημήτερος Δήμητρος, D. Δημήτερι Δήμητρι, 

- Δημήτερα Δήμητρα, V. Δήμητερ. - es 

δόρυ (AOPAS, δοῦρας, AOP AOYP), τὸ, , G. δόρατος, D. δόρατι, 
Dual N. A. ddpare, G. D. δοράτοιν, PL N. A. δόρατα, G. δοράτων, 
D. δόρασι. Poetic forms, G. δορός, Epic δούρατος, doupés, D. δορί, 
δόρει, Epic δουρί, δούρατι, Dual Epic δοῦρε, Pl. N. dépn, Epic δοῦ- 
pa, Sovpara, G. δούρων, 1). δούρεσσι. 

δορυξόος (AOPYZOS), ov, 6p spear-polisher, regular. V. δορυξέ. 

δῶμα, aros, τὸ, domus, house, regular. Also, τὸ δῶ, Epic. 

ἔγκατα, Ta, entrails, D. Pl. ἔγκασι. 

ἔγχελυς, vos, 7, anguilla, eel, regular. The Attic has Pl. N. ἐγχέ 
λεις, G. ἐγχέλεων. 

εἰκών (EIKQ), dvos, ἧ, image, regular. Also, G. εἰκοῦς, A. εἰκώ, Pl. 
A. εἰκούς. 

ἐτησίαι, wy, of, etesian or trade winds. 

Ζεύς (AIS), 6, Zeus, G. Διός, D. Au, A. Δία, V. Zed. Also Ziv, G. 
Ζηνός, D. Ζηνί, A. Ζῆνα, Poetic. In Doric inscriptions we find D. 
Ai, and Ari. 

ἦρα. ra, used only in the expression ἦρα φέρειν, to show favor, to 

umor. : 
ἥρως, wos, 6, hero, regular. Also, D. ἥρῳ, A. ἥρω, A. Pl. ἥρως. 

Θαλῆς, ov, 6, Thales, regular. The early Attic authors use ἃ. Θά 
Aew. In later Greek it is inflected Θάλης, Θάλητος, -ητι; τ-ητα. 

θέμις, wos, Ionic cos, Doric eros, Epic coros, 9, justice, reght. 

ere (@EPAY), ovros, 6, attendant, regular. Also, A. 6épara, Pl. 

. θέραπες. 

θυγάτηρ, ἧ, daughter, G. θυγατέρος θυγατρός, 1). θυγατέρι θυγατρί, A. 

θυγατέρα, Poetic ἐἈρκαμί τα ret , Dual N es γ΄. wees εἰ P 

θυγατέροιν, Pl. N. θυγατέρες, Poetic θύγατρες, ἃ. θυγατέρων. 

Poetic θυγατρῶν, 1). θυγατράσι, A. θυγατέρας, V. θυγατέρες. 
ἱδρώς, ὦ or ὥτος, 6, Sudor, sweat, 











ᾧ 86. ANOMALOUS NOUNS. 3 73 


ixrivos (IKTI2), ov, 6, a kind of hawk, regular. Also, A. ixriva, N. 
Pl. ixrives. 

ἰχώρ (IXQ3), ὦ Gpos, 6, ichor, regular. Also, A. ἐχῶ. 

ἰωκή (IQ=), As, ἡ, din of battle, regular. Also, A. ἐῶκα. 

κάλως (κάλος), @, later Epic wos, cable. Also, Pl. N. κάλοει, A. kddovs. 

κάρᾷ (ΚΡΑΣ, KPAAS, KAPHAS), Tonic κάρη, τὸ, head, G. κάρητος 
κράατος κρᾶτός καρήατος, also τῆς κρατός, D. κάρητι κράατι κρᾶτί 
καρήατι κάρᾳ κάρῃ, A. “κάρα κάρη, τὸ OF τὸν κρᾶτα, Pl. Ν, καρήατα 
κάρα,α. κράτων, D. κρᾶσί, Α. καρήατα κράατα, τοὺς κρᾶτας. Later 
Greek ἡ κάρη, τῆς κάρης ; latest ἡ κάρα, τῆς κάρας. 

ΚΑΡΗΝΟΝ, ov, τὸ, head, regular. 

κέρας; aTos, aos, εος; τὸ, cornu, horn, 

cyan (KAAS), ov, 6, bough, regular. Also, D. κλαδί, Pl. D. κλα- 

ect. ᾿" 

κλείς, Ionic κληΐς, old Attic κλής, ἡ, clavis, key, lock, G. κλειδός κληΐ- 
Sos κλῃδός, regular. Also, A. κλεῖν, Pl. N. A, ahi: 

Κλεόμβροτος, ov, 6, Cleombrotus, regular. Herodotus has G. Κλεομ- 
βρότεω. 

es τὸ, darkness, ας, Epic xvépaos κνέφεος, Attic κνέφους, later 
κνέφατος. 

κοινωνός (ΚΟΙΝΩΝ), οὔ, ὁ, partaker, regular. Also, Pl. N. κοινῶνες, 
Α. κοινῶνας. 

κρέας, ατος, aos, εος, τὸ, CAYO, meat. 

κριθή, ἢ ῆς, 9, barley, regular. Also, Epic τὸ xpi. - 

κρίνον (ΚΡΙΝΟΣ), ov, τὸ, Zély, regular. Also, Pl. xpivea, D. κρίνεσι. 

κρόκη (KPO), qs, ἡ, woof, the filing, regular. te A. κρόκα, Pl. 

κρόκες. 
πρίν & ὥνος, 6, a kind of mixed drink, regular. Also, A. κυκειῶ, 
pic. 

κύων (KYN-), 6, ἥ, canis, dog, bitch, G. κυνός, D. κυνί, A. κύνα, ᾿ς ΕἾΝ 
κύον, Dual N. A. κύνε, G. D. κυνοῖν, Pl. N. κύνες, G. κυνῶν, Ὁ). 
κυσί, A. κύνας. 

κῶας, κώεος, τὸ, fleece, 

λᾶας λᾶς, 6, lapis, stone, G. λᾶος λάου, D. λᾶϊ, A. λᾶαν ay, rarely 
Aaa, Pl. D. λάεσσι. 

λέων, ovros, 6, leo, Hon, regular. Also, Epic N. dis, A. λῖν, later 
Epic Pl. N. Ales, D.drieoow “΄᾿. 

λιβάς (ATV), άδος, ἡ ἣν drop, regular. Also, A. λίβα. 

λίπα (ΛΙΨῚ), τὸ, fat, oil, chiefly in the Epic expression Aim’ ἐλαίῳ, 
with olive-oil. 

AIS, 6, fine linen, D. duri, A. λῖτα, defective. 

μάλης, armpit, a defective Genitive used in the phrase ὑπὸ ae undes 
the arm, that 1 is, clandestinely. 


μάρτυς, later μάῤευρν δὲ ὁ, witness, G enderepee, Ὁ. ἔρτυρι, Α. yep 


rarely | ἴρτυν, N. μάρτυρες, G. μαρτύρων, D. μάρτυσι, A. μάρ- 
τυρας, V. μάρτυρες. 
μάστιξ (MATIZ), ἐγος, 7, scourge, whip, regular. Also, D. μάστϊ, 
στ lv. 


μῆλον (ΜΗΛΑΣΣ), ov, τὸ, sheep, regular. Also, G. Pl. μηλάτων, rare. 
μήτηρ, ἧ, Mater, mother, G. μητέρος μητρός, 1). μητέρι μητρί, A. μη- 


74 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [8 56 


rp V. μῆτερ, Pl. N. μητέρες, G. μητέρων, D. μητρασι, A. μητέρας, 

- μητέρες. 

μήτρως, ὦ OF wos, ὃ, maternal uncle, 

Μίνως, ὦ or wos, ὃ, Minos. 

μύκης, ov OF nros, ὃ, mushroom. 

ναῦς, vads, 7, navis, ship, regularly inflected like γραῦς. The 
Attic inflection is as follows; ναῦς, G. νεώς, D. νηΐ, A. ναῦν, Dual 
G. D. veoiv, Pl. N. νῆες, G. νεῶν, Ὁ. ναυσί, A. vais. The Tonic 
changes a into ἡ, as νηῦς νηός νηΐ νῆα : it has also (ἃ. νεός, A. νέα, 
Dual G. D. νεοῖν, Pl. N. νέες, G. νεῶν, A. νέας. 

NIV, 7, nix, snow, A. vida, defective. 

νόος vous, 6, mind, regular. In later Greek it is inflected like Bois. 

Οἰδίπους (OIAITIOAHS), 6, Cidipus, G. Οἰδίποδος, Οἰδίπον, Οἰδιπόδᾶο, 
Οἰδιπόδα, Οἰδιπόδεω, D. Οἰδίποδι, Οἰδιπόδη, A. Οἰδίποδα, Οἰδίπουν, 
Οἰδιπόδην, V. Οἰδίπου, Οἰδιπόδα. 

δὶς οἷς, 6, ἡ, οΥἶ5, sheep, G. dios οἷός, D. die ott, A. div οἷν, Pl. N. 
dies οἷες dis, G. diwy οἰῶν, D. dear, A. dias οἷας dis. : 

ὄνειρον (ONEIPAS), τὸ, dream, (ἃ. ὀνείρατος, D. ὀνείρατι, Pl. N. A. 
ὀνείρατα, sometimes ὄνειρα, G. ὀνειράτων, 1). ὀνείρασι. Also, τὸ 
ὄναρ. 

Phd EY 6, 7, bird, regular. Also, Pl. N. ὄρνεις ὄρνις, G. ὄρνεων. 

ΟΣΣ-, ΟΣΣΟΝ, τὸ, eye, Dual N. A. ὄσσε, G. ὄσσων, Ὁ. ὄσσοις ὄσσοι- 
σι, defective. 

οὖδας, -deos, τὸ, floor. 

οὖς (ovas), Doric és, τὸ, ear, G. ὠτός, D. ὠτί, Dual N. A. ὦτε, G. Ὁ. 
ὦτοιν, Pl. N. A. ὦτα, G. ὥτων, D. ὠσί. 

ὄφελος, τὸ, advantage, defective. 

πατήρ, 6, pater, father, G. πατέρος πατρός, D. πατέρι πατρί, A. πατέ- 
ea 5 ᾿κ πάτερ, Pl. N. πατέρες, G. πατέρων, D. πατράσι, A. πατέρας, 

. πατέρες: 

Πάτροκλος, ov, ὃ, Patroclus, regular. In Homer also G. Πατροκλῆος, 
A. Πατροκλῆα, V. Πατρόκλεις, as if from a nominative in -ens. 

maT pas, @ OF wos, 6, patruus, paternal uncle. 

Πρύξ (IIYKN-), 7, Pnyx, a place of meeting in Athens, G. Πυκνός, 
D. Πυκνί, A. Πύκνα. Later forms Πνυκός, Πνυκί, Πνύκα. 

πόλις, ews, }, city, state, regular. Epic also G. πόληος, D. πόληϊ, Pl. 

. πόληες, A. πόληας. . 

Ποσειδάων Ποσειδῶν, 6, Posidon, G. Ποσειδάωνος ἸΤοσειδῶνος, D. Πο- 
reins Ποσειδῶνι, A. Ποσειδάωνα Ποσειδῶνα Ποσειδῶ, V. Πό- 
σειδον. 

πρέσβυς, 6, old man, A. πρέσβυν, V. πρέσβυ, Pl. N. πρέσβηες (in 
Hesiod). The rest is from the regular πρεσβύτης. 

πρέσβυς, ews, 6, ambassador, Pl. N. A. πρέσβεις, G. πρέσβεων, D. 
πρέσβεσι. The rest is from πρεσβευτής, οὔ. 

πρόσωπον (IIPOSQIAS), ov, τὸ, face, regular. Also, Pl. N. προσώ- 
mara, D. προσώπασι. 

mpdxoos (IIPOXOYS), dov, 7, ewer, regular. Also, D. Pl. πρόχουσι- 

πῦρ (IIYPON), πυρός, πυρί, τὸ, fire. Also, Pl. πυρά, G. πυρῶν, D. 
πυροῖς, fires, watch-fires. 

ῥήδον (POAOS), ov, τὸ, rosa, rose, regular. Also, D. Pl. ῥοδέεσσι, 
later Epic. 








ᾧ 57.] ADJECTIVES. | 75 


Σαρπηδών, ὄνος, ὁ, Sarpedon, regular. Also, G. Σαρπήδοντος, D. 
Σαρπήδοντι, V. Σαρπῆδον, Epic. 
ans, weds OY σητός, 6, moth. - 
σκώρ (KAS), τὸ, G. σκατός, D. cari. 
σμῶδιξ, vyyos, 7, wale, ᾿ 
σπέος Or σπεῖος (ΣΠΕ-), specus, grotto, G. σπείους, D. σπῆϊ, Pl. G. 
σπείων, 1). σπέσσι, σπήεσσι, Epic. 
σταγών (STAZ), dvos, ἧ, drop, regular. Also, N. Pl. στάγες. 
στίχος (STIZ), ov, ὃ, row, regular, Also, G. τῆς στιχός, D. τῇ στιχί, 
6. 
Στρεψιάδης, ov, ὃ, Strepsiades, reguiar ; but V. Στρεψίαδες. 
σωτήρ, ἦρος, 6, preserver, regular ; but V. σῶτερ. 
τάν, used in the expression ὦ ray, U thou! 
ταώς (TAOS), ὦ, 6, pavo, peacock, regular. Also, N. Pl. ταοί. 
τίγρις, tos or wos, tiger, Pl. N. τίγρεις, G. riypewv; the rest is regular. 
᾿ς Τισσαφέρνης, -vous, -vet, -ynv, -νη, 6, Tissaphernes, 
J v8wp (ὝΔΑΣ, vdos), τὸ, water, (ἃ, ὕδατος, D. ὕδατι (rare ὕδει), Pl. N. 
A. ὕδατα, G. ὑδάτων, D. ὕδασι. 
vids (‘YIEYS, “YIS), ov, 6, regular. Also, G, υἱέος, D. viet, &c., like 
βασιλεύς. Also, Epic, G. υἷος, D, vit, A. via, Dual vie, Pl. N, 
; υἷες, D. υἱέσι or υἱάσι, A. υἷας. é 
_ ὕπαρ, τὸ, waking, opposed to ὄναρ. 
topivn (ὝΣΜΙΣ), ns, 7, battle, regular. Also, D. ὑσμῖνι. 
φάρυγξ, γγος; n, gullet, regular. Poetic, G. φάρυγος. 
φθόϊς φθοῖς, ὁ, a kind of cake, A. Pl. φθοῖς. 
χείρ, χειρός, ἡ, hand, regular ; but D. Pl. χερσί. Poetic forms, G. 
χερός, D. χερί, Dual χεροῖν. 
- χελιδών (ΧΕΛΙΔΩ), dvos, ἡ; swallow, regular. Also, V. χελιδοῖ, 
χοῦς xods, 6, a measure, inflected like Bots.—'The form χοεύς has 
G. χοῶς (χοέως), A. χοᾶ, A. Pl. χοᾶς. --- Χοῦς, a heap of earth, 
is always inflected like βοῦς. 
χρέως (XPAOS), τὸ, debt, ἃ. χρέως. The rest is from the regular 
χρέος ; Pl. N. A. χρέεα χρέα. 
χρώς, χρωτός, 6, skin, 1). χρωτί, A. γρῶτα. ΧΡΟΥ͂Σ is inflected like 
βοῦς, as G. χροός. ‘The dative χρῷ, in the expression ἐν χρῷ, fol- 
lows the analogy of πλῷ from πλοῦς. 


ADJECTIVES. 


§ 57. 1. In adjectives of three endings, the fem- 
inine is always of the first declension; the mascu- 
line and neuter are either of the second or of the 
| third. 

2. Adjectives of two endings are either of the 
second or of the third declension ; the feminine is 
Τ the same with the masculine. 





76 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§ 58. 


3. Adjectives of one ending are either of the first 
or of the third declension. As to gender, they are 
either masculine, feminine, or common. 


§ 58. 1. Most adjectives in os have three end 
ings, os, ἢ, ov; aS σοφός, σοφή, σοφόν, wise. 

When ος is preceded by a vowel or by p, the 
feminine ends in @; as ἄξιος, ἀξία, ἄξιον, worthy ; 
μακρός, μακρά, μακρόν, long. 

All. participles in os are declined like σοφός ; as βουλευόμενος, 
βουλευομένη, βουλευόμενον. 

2. Many adjectives in os, especially such as have 
the accent on the _antepenult, shave only two end- 
ings, 0s, ον ; aS ὁ, ἡ ἥσυχος, TO ἥσυχον, quiet ; ὁ ἄλο- 
γος, ἄλογον, irrational. 


3. Adjectives in oos have ἡ in the feminine, ex- 
cept when oos is preceded by p; as dmdvos, ἁπλόη, 
ἁπλόον, stmple ; ; ἀθρόος, ἀθρόα, ἀθρόον, crowded to 
gether, in a heap. 

_ ἃ. Adjectives 1 in ws have two endings, ὡς, ὧν ; as 

ἡ εὔγεως, τὸ εὔγεων, Jertile ; ; ἀγήρως, ἀγήρων, Uun- 
“nding 

5. Adjectives in eos, ea, cov, and dos, on, dov, may 

be contracted ; as χρύσεος χρυσοῦς, χρυσέα χρυσῆ. 


χρύσεον χρυσοῦν, golden ; ; ἀργύρεος ἀργυροῦς, argen- 
teus, of silver, silvery; dmdoos ἁπλοῦς, simple. 


6. Examples. 


Singular. 
N. σοφός σοφή σοφόν ἥσυχος ἥσυχον 
α σοφοῦ σοφῆς σοφοῦ ἡσύχου ἡσύχου 
D. σοφῷ σοφῇ σοφῷ ἡσύχῳ ἡσύχῳ 
Α ὸ jy σοφήν σοφόν ἥσυχον ἥσυχον 
V. cope σοφή σοφόν ᾿ ἥσυχε ἥσυχον 











§ 58.] 


N. A.V. 
G. D. 


SPSQA 


A 


<P OO 


QA 
Ρν 
a 


9 


ΡΞΩΙΖ 


ἴω 


ΞΡΘΩΣ 


A 


ΞΡΘΩΖ 


ἡσύχω 
ἡσύχοιν 


ἥσυχοι 
ἡσύχων 
ἡσύχοις 
ἡσύχους 
ἥσυχοι 


ἡσύχω 
ἡσύχοιν 


ἥσυχα 
ἡσύχων 
ἡσύχοις 
ἥσυχα 
ἥσυχα 


ἄξιος 
ἀξίου 
ἀξίῳ 
ἄξιον 
ἄξιε 


ἀξίω 


ἀξίοιν 


ἄξιοι 
ἀξίων 
ἀξίοις 
ἀξίους 
ἄξιοι 


ἀξία 
ἀξίας 
ἀξίᾳ 
ἀξίαν 
ἀξία 


ἀξία 


ἀξίαιν 


ἄξιαι 

ἀξίων 
ἀξίαις 
ἀξίας 


ἄξιαι 


ἄξιον 
ἀξίου 
ἀξίῳ 
ἄξιον 


ἄξιον 


ἀξίω 


ἀξίου 


ἄξια 
ἀξίων 
ἀξίοις 
ἄξια 
ἄξια 


ADJECTIVES. 
Dual. 
σοφῷ σοφά σοφώ 
σοφοῖν σοφαῖν σοφοῖν 
Plural. 
σοφοί σοφαί σοφά 
σοφῶν σοφῶν σοφῶν 
σοφοῖς © σοφαῖς σοφοῖς 
σοφούς σοφάς σοφά 
σοφοί σοφαί σοφά 
Singular. 
μακρός μακρά μακρόν 
μακροῦ μακρᾶς μακροῦ 
μακρῷ μακρᾷ μακρῷ 
μακρόν μακράν μακρόν 
μακρέ μακρά μακρόν 
Dual. 
μακρῷ μακρά μακρώ 
μακροῖν μακραῖν μακροῖν 
Plural. 
μακροί μακραί μακρά 
μακρῶν μακρῶν μακρῶν 
μακροῖς μακραῖς μακροῖς 
μακρούς μακράς μακρά 
μακροί μακραί μακρά 
Singular. 
εὔγεως εὔγεων 
εὔγεω εὔγεω 
εὔγεῳ εὔγεῳ 
εὔγεων εὔγεων 


εὔγεων 
Dual. 
εὔγεω 
εὔγεῳν 
Plural. 
evyew 
εὔγεων 
εὔγεῳς 
εὔγεω 
εὔγεω 


ἀγήρως 
ἀγήρω 


ἀγήρων 
ἀγήρως 


ἀγήρω 
ἀγήρῳν 


ἀγήρῳ 
ἀγήρων 
ἀγήρῳς 
ἀγήρως 
ἀγήρῳ 


ἀγήρων 


δι. Φ 


ὥ 


N. χρύσεος χρυσοῦς 
G. αχρυσέου χρυσοῦ 
D. ἄχρυσέῳ χρυσῷ 
A. χρύσεον χρυσοῦν 
N. A. χρυσξω χρυσώ 
α. D. χρυσέοιν χρυσοῖν 
N. χρύσεοι χρυσοῖ 
G. χρυσέων χρυσῶν 
D. αχρυσέοις χρυσοῖς 
A. χρυσέους χρυσοῦς 


(ἃ. ἀργυρέων ἀργυρῶν 
ἀργυρέοις ἀργυροῖς 
‘A. ἀργυρέους ἀργυροῦς 


Ν. ἁπλόος ἁπλοῦς 
α. ἁπλόου ἁπλοῦ 
D. ἁπλόῳ ἁπλῷ 
A. ἁπλόον ἁπλοῦν 


N. A. ἁπλόω ἁπλώ 
G. D. ἁπλόοιν ἁπλοῖν 


INFLECTION OF WORDS. 


Contracts. 
Singular. 
χρυσξία χρυσῆ 
χρυσέας χρυσῆς 
χρυσέᾳ χρυσῇ 
χρυσέαν χρυσῆν 
Dual. 
xpvcéa χρυσᾶ 


χρυσέαιν χρυσαῖν 


Plural. 
χρύσεαι χρυσαῖ 


χρυσέων χρυσῶν 
χρυσέαις χρυσαῖς 


χρυσέας χρυσᾶς 


Singular. 
ἀργυρέα ἀργυρᾶ 
ἀργυρέας ἀργυρᾶς 
ἀργυρέᾳ ἀργυρᾷ 
ἀργυρέαν ἀργυρᾶν 
Dual. 
ἀργυρία ἀργυρᾶ 
ἀργυρέαιν ἀργυραῖν 
Plural. 
ἀργύρεαι ἀργυραῖ 
ἀργυρέων ἀργυρῶν 
ἀργυρέαις ἀργυραῖς 


ἀργυρέας ἀργυρᾶς 
Singular. 
ἁπλόη ἁπλῆ 
. ἁπλόης ἁπλῆς 
ἁπλόῃ ἁπλῇ 
ἁπλόγν ἁπλῆν 
Dual. 
ἁπλόα. ἁπλᾶ 
ἁπλόαιν ἁπλαῖν 


[§ 58, | 


χρύσεον χρυσοῦν 
χρυσέου χρυσοῦ 
΄ ΄“ 
dab: ME sn 
χρύσεον χρυσοῦν 


χρυσέω χρυσώ 
χρυσέοιν χρυσοῖν 


χρύσεα χρυσᾶ 
χρυσέων χρυσῶν 
χρυσέοις χρυσοῖς 
χρύσεα χρυσᾶ 


ἀργύρεον ἀργυροῦν 
ἀργυρέου ἀργυροῦ 
ἀργυρέῳ ἀργυρῷ 

ἀργύρεον ἀργυροῦν 


ἀργυρέοις ἀργυροῖς 


ἀργυρεα αἀργυρα 
ἅπλόον ἁπλοῦν 
ἁπλόου ἁπλοῦ 
ἁπλόῳ ἁπλῷ 
ἁπλόον ἁπλοῦν 
ἁπλόω ἁπλώ 
ἁπλόοιν ἁπλοῖν 














§ 59.] ADJECTIVES. 79 


Plural. 
N, ἁπλόο, ἅπλοῖ ἁπλόαι ἅπλαϊ ἁπλόα ἅπλᾶα 
τ. ἁπλόων ἁπλῶν ἁπλόων ἁπλῶν ἁπλόων ἁπλῶν 
D. . ἁπλόοις ἁπλοῖς ἁπλόαις ἁπλαῖς ἁπλόοις ἁπλοῖς 
Α. ἁπλόους ἁπλοῦς ἁπλόας ἁπλᾶς ἁπλόα daha 


Note. In Attic writers and in the Poets, many adjectives in OS, 
which commonly have three endings, are found with only two ; as 6, 77 


ἐλεύθερος, τὸ ἐλεύθερον, free; κλυτὸς Ἱπποδάμεια, the illustrious Hip- 
podamia. 


Even comparatives and superlatives are sometimes found with only 
two endings, as ἡ ἀπορώτερος, 7 δυσεμβολώτατος, ὀλοώτατος ὀδμή, α 
very offensive odor, πρώτιστον ὀπωπήν, first sight, (Hom. Hym. 4, 157 ) 


59. 1. There are but three adjectives in as ; 
ras πᾶσα πᾶν, OY ἅπας ἅπασα ἅπαν, all, inflected like 
ἱστάς ; μέλας μέλαινα μέλαν, black ; and τάλας τάλαι- 
va τάλαν, unfortunate, inflected like μέλας. 


2. Participles in as have three endings, as, aca, 
av 3 aS 6 ἱστάς, ἡ ἱστᾶσα, τὸ ἱστάν, erecting. 


3. Adjectives i in eos: have three endings, εἰς, €ood, 
ev, as ὁ χαρίεις, ἡ χαρίεσσα, τὸ χαρίεν, graceful. 


4.. Participles in είς have εἰς, εἶσα, ἐν ; a8 ὁ τιθείς, 
ἡ τιθεῖσα, τὸ τιθέν, placing, putting. 


5. Participles in ὧν have three endings, av, ovea, 
ov; as 6 βουλεύων, ἡ βουλεύουσα, τὸ βουλεῦον, Coun- 
selling. 

Those in ἄων, ἔων, owv are contracted throughout ; 
as φιλέων φιλῶν, φιλέουσα φιλοῦσα, φιλέον φιλοῦν, G. 
φιλέοντος φιλοῦντος. 


. Adjectives in wy have two endings, ων; ov; as 
ὃ, ἡ πέπων, τὸ πέπον, ripe. 
But ἑκών ἑκοῦσα ἑκόν, willing, and its compound 
ἄκων ἄκουσα ἄκον, umouling, have three endings, and 
are inflected like βουλεύων. 


80 INFLECTION OF WORDS. | [8 59 


7. Participles in ovs have three endings, ovs, οὔ- 
σα, ov; as ὁ διδούς, ἡ διδοῦσα, τὸ διδόν, giving. 


8. Participles i in vs have three endings, ds, dca, 
wy; as ὁ δεικνύς, ἡ δεικνῦσα, τὸ δεικνύν, showing. 


4 Participles 1 in ὡς have three endings, WS, υἷα, 
0s; aS ὁ βεβουλευκώς, ἡ βεβουλευκυῖα, τὸ βεβουλευκός, 
having counselled. 


10. Contract adjectives 1 in ἧς have two endings, 
ἧς, ες; aS ὁ, ἡ ἀληθής, TO ἀληθές, true; πρηνής, pro- 
nus, with the Jace downward. 


δ; Adjectives iM vs have three endings, us, ea, 
v3; aso γλυκύς, ἡ γλυκεῖα, τὸ γλυκύ, dulcis, sweet; 
βραχύς, brevis, short. 


12. There are but two adjectives in mv; ὃ τέρην, 


7 τέρεινα, τὸ τέρεν, G. τέρενος, tener, tender, and 6 
ἄρσην or ἄρρην, τὸ ἄρσεν or ἄρρεν, α. ἃ ἄρσενος ΟΥ̓ ἄρρε- 
vos, male. 


19, Adjectives i in ἐς have two endings, ἐς, 4; as 
6, ἡ ἴδρις, τὸ ἴδρι, knowing. 


σ 


14. Examples. 


Singular. 
N. ἱστάς ἱστᾶσα iordy μέλας μέλαινα μέλαν 
G. ἱστάντος ἱστάσης ἱστάντες μέλανος μελαίνης μέλανος 
D. ἱστάντε ἱστάσῃ tordvre μέλανι μελαίνῃ μέλανι 
Α. ἱστάντα ἱστᾶσαν ἱστάν μέλανα μέλαιναν μέλαν 
ws istds ἱστᾶσα ἱστόν Ἐ μέλαν μέλαινα μέλαν 
Dual. 
N. A. V. ἱστάντε ἱστάσα ἱστάντε μέλανε pedaiva μέλανε 
G.D. ἱστάντοιν ἱστάσαιν ἱστάντοιν μελάνοιν μελαίναιν μελάνοιν 


et 


Pie ov 


eS ee, 


ee ee eee ee 


a δ. i, —_— 


ek 








§ 59.] ADJECTIVES. 81 
Plural. 
N. ἱστάντες ἱστᾶσαι ἱστάντα μέλανες μέλαιναι μέλανα 
α. ἱστάντων ἱστασῶν ἱστάντων μελάνων μελαινῶν μελάνων 
1). ἱστᾶσι ἱστάσαις ἱστᾶσι μέλασι μελαίναις μέλασι 
Α. ἱστάντας ἱστάσας ἱστάντα μέλανας μελαίνας μέλανα 
¥. ἱστάντες ἱστᾶσαι ἱστάντα μέλανες μέλαιναι μέλανα 
Ζ Singular. 
N. χαρίεις χαρίεσσα χαρίεν τιθείς τιθεῖσα τιθέν 
α. χαρίεντος χαριέσσης χαρίεντος τιθέντος τιθείαῃς τιθέντος 
D. χαρίεντε χαριέσσῃ χαρίεντι τιθέντι τιθείσῃ τιθέντι 
Α. χαρίεντα χαρίεσσαν χαρίεν τιθέντα τιθεῖσαν τιθέν 
Υ. χαρίεν χαρίεσσα χαρίεν τιθείς τιθεῖσα τιθέν 
Dual. 

N.A.V. yapievre χαριέσσα χαρίεντε ribévré τιθείσα τιθέντε 
α. 1). χαριέντοιν χαριέσσαιν χαριέντοιν τιθέντοιν τιθείσαιν τιθέντοιν 
Plural. 

, , , 4 an , 
N. χαρίεντες χαρίεσσαι χαρίεντα τιθέντες τιθεῖσαι τιθέντα 
α. χαριέντων χαριεσσῶν χαριέντων τιθέντων τιθεισῶν τιθέντων 
D. xapieot χαριέσσαις χαρίεσι τιθεῖσι τιθείσαις τιθεῖσι 
Α. χαρίεντας χαριέσσας χαρίεντα τιθέντας τιθείσας τιθέντα 
V. χαρίεντες χαρίεσσαι χαρίεντα τιθέντες τιθεῖσαι τιθέντα 
Singular. 
N. βουλεύων βουλεύουσα βουλεῦον πέπων πέπον 
G. βουλεύοντος βουλευούσης βουλεύοντος πέπονος πέπονος 
D. βουλεύοντε βουλευούσῃ βθουλεύοντι πέπονι πέπονι 
A. βουλεύοντα βουλεύουσαν βουλεῦον πέπονα πέπον 
V. βουλεύων βουλεύουσα βουλεῦον πέπον πέπον 
Dual. 

Ν. Α.Υ. βουλεύοντε βουλευούσα βουλεύοντε πέπονε πέπονε 
G. D. Bovdevdvrow βουλευούσαιν βουλευόντονν πεπόνοιν πεπόνοιν 
Plural. 

N. βουλεύοντες βουλεύουσαι Bovdevovra πέπονες πέπονα 
α. βουλευόντων βουλευουσῶν βουλευόντων πεπόνων πεπόνων 
D. βουλεύουσι βουλευούσαις Bovrevovot πέποσι πέποσι᾽ 
Α. βουλεύοντας βουλευούσας βουλεύοντα πέπονας πέπονα 
Υ. βουλεύοντες βουλεύουσαι βουλεύοντα πέπονες πέπονα 


4* 


INFLECTION OF WORDS. 
Singular. 

διδούς διδοῦσα διδόν δεικνύς - 
διδόντος διδούσης διδόντος 
διδόντε διδούσῃ διδόντι δδεικνύντι 
διδόντα διδοῦσαν διδόν 
διδούς διδοῦσα διδόν δεικνύς 

| Dual. 


δεικνῦσα 
δεικνύντος δεικνύσης δεικνύντος 
δεικνύσῃ δεικνύντι 
δεικνύντα δεικνῦσαν δεικνύν 

δεικνῦσα 


[8 59. 


δεικνύν 


δεικνύν 


N.A.V. διδόντε διδούσα διδόντε = Sev Te ΓΎΡΕΣ ἘΠῚ δεικνύντε 


GD. διδόντοιν διδούσαιν διδόντοιν δεικνύντοιν δεικνύσαιν δεικνύντοιν 


διδόντες διδοῦσαι 


Plural. 
διδόντα 


δεικνύντες δεικνῦσαι δεικνύντα 


διδόντων διδουσῶν διδόντων δεικνύντων δεικνυσῶν δεικνύντων 


διδοῦσι διδούσαις διδοῦσι 


διδόντας διδούσας 


διδόντες διδοῦσαι 


διδόντα 
διδόντα 


Singular. 


δεικνῦσι 


δεικνύσαις δεικνῦσι 
δεικνύντας δεικνύσας δεικνύντα 
δεικνύντες δεικνῦσαι δεικνύντα 


βεβουλευκώς βεβουλευκυῖα βεβουλευκός 
βεβουλευκότος βεβουλευκυίας βεβουλευκότος 
βεβουλευκότι βεβουλευκυίᾳ βεβουλευκότι 
βεβουλευκότα βεβουλευκυῖαν βεβουλευκός 
βεβουλευκώς βεβουλευκυῖα βεβουλευκός 

Dual. 
βεβουλευκότε βεβουλευκυία βεβουλευκότε 
βεβουλευκότον: δβεβουλευκυίαιν βεβουλευκότοιν 
Plural. 
βεβουλευκότες βεβουλευκυῖαι βεβουλευκότα — 
βεβουλευκότων βεβουλευκυιῶν βεβουλευκότων 
βεβουλευκόσι βεβουλευκυίαις βεβουλευκόσι 
βεβουλευκότας βεβουλευκυίας βεβουλευκότα 
βεβουλευκότες βεβουλευκυῖαι βεβουλευκότσ 
Contracts. 

ἀληθής ; ἀληθές 

ἀληθέος ἀληθοῦς ἀληθέος ἀληθοῦς 

ἀληθέξ ἀληθεῖ ἀληθέϊ ἀληθεῖ 
ἀληθέα ἀληθῆ ἀληθές 

ἀληθές ἀληθές 








ΩΖ 


ΦΡΘΩΣ 


A 


SPSS 


1Z 


“ΘΩ͂ ἃ 


ΡΘΩΙΖ 


Ἃ 


ADJECTIVES. 
Dual. 
Grnbée ἀληθῆ ἀληθέξφ ἀληθῆ 
ἀληθέοιν ἀληθοῖν ἀληθέοιν ἀληθοῖν 
Plural. 
ἀληθέες ἀληθεῖς ἀληθές ἀληθῆ 
ἀληθέων ἀληθῶν ἀληθέων ἀληθῶν 
ἀληθέσι ἀληθέσι 
ἀληθέας ἀληθεῖς ἀληθέαἩ ἀληθῆ 
ἀληθέες ἀληθεῖς | ἀληθέάς ἀληθῆ 
Singular. 
γλυκύς γλυκεῖα γλυκύ 
γλυκέος γλυκείας γλυκέος 
γλυκέξ γλυκεῖ γλυκείᾳ γλυκέξ γλυκεῖ 
γλυκύν γλυκεῖαν γλυκύ 
γλυκύ γλυκεῖα γλυκύ 
Dual. 
Ὗ. γλυκέε γλυκεία γλυκέε 
γλυκέοιν γλυκείαιν γλυκέοιν 
Plural. 
γλυκέες γλυκεῖς γλυκεῖαι γλυκέα 
γλυκέων γλυκειῶν γλυκέων 
γλυκέσι γλυκείαις γλυκέσι 
γλυκέας γλυκεῖς γλυκείας γλυκέα 
γλυκέες γλυκεῖς γλυκεῖαι γλυκέα 
Singular. Plural. 
ἴδρις ἴδρι ἴδριες ἴδρια 
ἴδριος ἴδριος ἰδρίων ἰδρίων 
(ἴδριι) tpt (ἴδριι) tpi ἴδρισι ἴδρισι 
ἴδριν ἴδρι ἴδριας ἴδρις ἴδρια 
ἴδρι ἴδρι ἴδριες ἴδρια 
Dual. N. A.V. pre G. Ὁ. ἰδρίοιν 


Participles of Contract Verbs. 


τιμάων 


τιμάων 


τιμῶν 
τιμάοντος τιμῶντος 
τιμάοντι τιμῶντι᾽ 
τιμάοντα τιμῶντα 
τωιϊῶν 


Singular. 


τιμάουσα τιμῶσα 
τιμαούσης τιμώσης 
τιμαούσῃ τιμώσῃ 
τιμάουσαν τιμῶσαν 
τιωαάουσα τῳῶσα 


τιμάον 


τιμῶι 
τιμάοντος τιμῶντος 


83 


τιμάοντι τιμῶντι 


τιμάον 
TLUdOV 


τιμῶν 
τιμῶν 


54 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§ 59. 


Dual. 

N.A.V. τιμάοντε τιμῶντε τιμαούσα τιμώσα τιμάοντε τιμῶντε 
α. 10. τιμαόντοιν τιμώντοιν τιμαούσαιν τιμώσαιν τιμαόντοιν τιμώντοιν 
Plural. 

N. τιμάοντες τιμῶντες τιμάουσαι τιμῶσαι τιμάοντα τιμῶντα 
α. τιμαόντων τιμώντων τιμαουσῶν τιμωσῶν τιμαόντων τιμώντων 
D. τιμάουσι τιμῶσι τιμαούσαις τιμώσαις τιμάουσι τιμῶσι 
A. τιμάοντας τιμῶντας τιμαούσας τιμώσας τιμάοντα τιμῶντα 
V. τιμάοντες τιμῶντες τιμάουσαι τιμῶσαι τιμάοντα τιμῶντα 
Singular. 

N. φιλίων φιλῶν φιλέουσα φιλοῦσα φιλέν φιλοῦν 
(ἃ. φιλέοντος φιλοῦντος φιλεούσης φιλούσης φιλέοντος φιλοῦντος 
D. φιλέοντι φιλοῦντι φιλεούσῃ φιλούσῃ φιλέοντι φιλοῦντι 
A. φιλέοντα φιλοῦντα φιλέουσαν φιλοῦσαν φιλένν φιλοῦν 
V. garde φιλῶν φιλέουσα φιλοῦσα φιλέον φιλοῦν 
Dual. 
N. A.V. φιλέοντε φιλεούσα φιλέοντε 
φιλοῦντε φιλούσα φιλοῦντε 
G. D. φιλεόντοιν φιλεούσαιν φιλεόντοιν 
φιλούντοιν φιλούσαιν φιλούντοιν 
Plural. 
N. ὠφιλέοντες φιλοῦντες φιλέουσαι φιλοῦσαι φιλέοντα- φιλοῦντα 
G. φιλεόντων φιλούντων φιλεουσῶν φιλουσῶν φιλεόντων φιλούντως 
D. φιλέουσι φιλοῦσι φιλεούσαις φιλούσαις φιλέουσι φιλοῦσι 
A. φιλέοντας φιλοῦντας φιλεούσας φιλούσας φιλέοντα φιλοῦντα 
V. ὠφιλέοντες φιλοῦντες φιλέουσαι φιλοῦσαι φιλέοντα φιλοῦντα 
Singular. 
N. δηλόων δηλῶν δηλόουσα δηλοῦσα δηλόονν δηλοῦν 
G. δηλόοντος δηλοῦντος δηλοούσης δηλούσης δηλόοντος δηλοῦντον 
D. δηλόοντι δηλοῦντε δηλοούσῃ δηλούσῃ δηλόοντι δηλοῦντι 
A. ὅδνδώυντα δηλοῦντα δηλόουσαν δηλοῦσαν δηλόον δηλοῦν 
V. δηλόων δηλῶν δηλόουσα δηλοῦσα δηλόον δηλοῦν 
Dual. 
N. A. V. δηλόοντε δηλοούσα δηλόοντε 
δηλοῦντε δηλούσα δηλοῦντε 
α. Ὁ. δηλοόντοιν δηλοούσαιν δηλοόντοιν 


- δηλούντοιν δηλούσαιν δηλούντοιν 








\ 


3 
. 

ἣν 
ὃ 
J 
B 
ta 
4. 





§ 60.] ADJECTIVES. 85 


Plural. 


N. δηλόοντες δηλοῦντες δηλόουσαι δηλοῦσαι δηλύοντα δηλοῦντα 
G. δηλοόντων δηλούντων δηλοουσῶν δηλουσῶν δηλοόντων δηλούντων 
D. δηλόουσι δηλοῦσι δηλοούσαις δηλούσαις δηλόουσι δηλοῦσι 
A. δηλόοντας δηλοῦντας δηλοούσας δηλούσας δηλόοντα δηλοῦντα 
Υ͂. δηλόοντες δηλοῦντες δηλόουσαι δηλοῦσαι δηλόοντα δηλοῦντα 


Note 1. The endings -ἤεις, τήεσσα, -ἣεν are contracted into -7s, 
-7 004, -ἣν; as 
τιμήεις τιμῇς, τιμήεσσα τιμῆσσα, τιμῆεν τιμῆν, valuable, (ἃ, τιμήεντος 
τιμῆντος, τιμηέσσης τιμήσσης, τιμήεντος τιμῆντος. : 
The endings -όεις, -όεσσα, -dev are contracted into -οῦς, 
τοῦσσα, -οῦν; as 
πλακύεις πλακοῦς, πλακόεσσα πλακοῦσσα, πλακόεν πλακοῦν, flat, α. 
πλακόεντος πλακοῦντος, πλακοέσσης πλακούσσης; πλακόεντος πλα- 
κοῦντος. 
Nore 2. In the Ionic dialect, the feminine of adjectives in vs com- 
monly ends 1 in ea oF én; as βαθύς βαθέα or βαθέη, βαρύς βαρέα, θῆλυς 
θήλεα, ἥμισυς ἡμίσεα. 


Nore 3. (a) In the Epic dialect, the feminine of adjectives in vs 
sometimes is like the masculine; as 6, ἡ ἡδύς, 6, ἡ θῆλυς, 6, ἡ που- 
Avs, in Homer. 


«τ, (0) In Homer, ἡμυϑύμες. ἀνθεμόεις, ἀργινόεις, ἜΗΝ sometimes 


seem to agree with feminine nouns, 


Nore 4. The Poets sometimes form feminines in e:a from adjec- 
tives in js; as μουνογενής μουνογένεια, ἡδυεπής ἡδυέπεια, θεσπιεπής 
θεσπιέπεια. So ἠριγένεια, θάλεια, δυσαριστοτόκεια. 


Nore. 5. The feminine of adjectives and participles in ds, εἰς, ovs, 
vs, ὧν is formed by annexing a to the root, and changing τ into 7; as 
ἱστάντα ἱστάνσα ἱστᾶσα, χαρίεντα χαρίενσα χαρίεσσα, ἀβένεα, τὐδένσα 
τιθεῖσα, διδόντα διδόνσα διδοῦσα, δεικνύντα δεικνύνσα δεικνῦσα, ἑκόντα 
ἑκόνσα ἑκοῦσα. 

The feminine of adjectives in ὕς" 18 formed by annexing a to the root, 
and lengthening the radical e into εἰ ; the lonic however retains ε be- 
fore a Or 7; aS γλυκύς, γλυκεῖα, lonic γλυκέα or γλυκέη. 


§ 60. Compound adjectives, of which the last component 
part is a substantive, follow the declension of that substantive. 

Compound adjectives of the third declension may have a 
neuter, when it can be formed by dropping s, or by changing @ 
intoo. Εἰ. g. 

εὔχαρις, ι, G. τος, graceful ; εὖ, χάρις. 

εὔελπις, t, G. wos, hopeful ; εὖ, ἐλπίς. 

ἄδακρυς,υ, G. vos, fearless ; a-, δάκρυ. 

εὐδαίμων, ον, G. ovos, happy ; εὖ, δαίμων. - 

μεγαλήτωρ, op, G. ορος, magnanimous ; μέγας, ἦτορ. 


86 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§ 61. 


(a) The compounds of πόλες generally have G. wos; as ἄπολες, t, 
“Ε. ἀπόλιδος, vagabond. ν 

(0) The compounds of πατήρ, μήτηρ, and φρήν change 7 into ὡ; 
aS ἀπάτωρ, op, ἀμήτωρ, op, G. ἀπάτορος, ἀμήτορος ; σώφρων, ον, G. 
σώφρονος. --- Homer has ἡ εὐπατέρεια. 

(9) The compounds of γέλως and κέρας are either of the second 
or third declension; as φιλόγελως, ov, α. φιλόγελω or φιλογέλωτος, 
τρίκερως, wv, G. τρίκερω Or τρικέρωτος. 

(d) The compounds of ποῦς, foot, have -ovy in the neuter, after 
the analogy of contracts of the second declension ; as δίπους δίπουν, 
G,. δίποδος, bipes, two-footed ; τρίπους τρίπουν, tripes, three-footed. 

(6) In Homer, the following compounds of ἀνήρ end in -ειρα; ἡ 
βωτιάνειρα, 7 ἀντιάνειρα, ἡ κυδιάνειρα. 


§ GI. Adjectives of one ending are generally derivative or 
compound : 

-άς Ὁ. ddos, 6,7 ; Noyds, picked; φυγάς, fugitive; immds, pands, σπο- 
pas, δρομάς. 

-as G. ov, 6; γεννάδας, noble ; μονίας, solitary. 

-ας G. avros, 6; ἀκάμας, indefatigable. 

-ap Ὁ. apos ; 6, ἡ μάκαρ, ἡ μάκαιρα, happy, the only example. 

την G. nvos ; 6, 7 ἀπτήν, unfledged, the only example. 

-ns G. ov; 6 ἐθελοντής, εὐώπης, tpraxovrovtns. Some of them have a 
feminine form in -ες G. dos ; as ἡ εὐῶπις, τριακοντοῦτις. 

της G. nros, 6, 9, formed from nouns in -nros or -ήτης; ἀδμής, 
ἀκμής, ἡμιθνής, γυμνής, χερνής. --- Ἀργής, τῆτος or -éros, white, 

Πένης (πενέστης), ἡ πένη σσα;, poor. 
τες G. ἐδος, 6, 7, commonly feminine ; 6, 7 ἄναλκις, ἡ πατρίς, patria, 

country, μητρίς. 

-€ G. Kos, γος, xos, ὅ, ἡ ; ὁ βλάξ, -ακός ; ἅρπαξ, -ayos; ἧλιξ, -txos ; 
ἐπίτεξ, -κος ; πολυάϊξ, -ἰκος. 

-us G, υδος, 6, ἡ ; νέηλυς, ἔπηλυς. 

τΨ 6. πος, 6, ἡ ; αἰγίλιψ, παραβλώψ. 

τῶν G. wvos, 6; αἴθων, burning, bright. 

τως G. eros, 6, ἡ ; ἀβρώς, ἀγνώς, ignotus, unknown, 

Norte. Adjectives of one ending are sometimes used as neuters in 
the genitive and dative ; very rarely in the nominative plural ; as ἐν 
mevntt σώματι, in a poor body; μανιάσιν λυσσήμασι, with raving 
i Hae ; δρομάσι βλεφάροις, rapidly moving eyelids. 


ANOMALOUS AND DEFECTIVE ADJECTIVES. 


G2. The following list contains most of the anomalous 
nd defective adjectives. | 
βριθύς, εἴα, ὑ, heavy, regular. Also, rd Api, rare. 
δυσδάμαρτος (dvo-, δάμαρ), τοῦ, τ ily married. 
EAAXYS3, sma.l, fem. ἐλάχεια. 











§ 62.] ANOMALOUS AND DEFECTIVE ADJECTIVES. 87 
ἜΛΕΓΧΥΣ, infamous, Pl. N. ἐλεγχέες. 
gpinpos, dear, regular. Also Pl. N. ἐρίηρες, A. ἐρίηρας, Epic. 
ἐρυσάρματες, of, A. ἐρυσάρματας, chariot-drawing. 
ἐὺς nus, neuter ev nv ev, good, G. ἐῆος, A. civ niv, Pl. G. ἐᾶων, of 
| good things (neuter 1). 
fads (ZAOS), living, regular. Also (as. 
ἦλέ, wandering in mind, a defective vocative used in the Homeric ex- 
_ pression φρένας ἦλέ, madman, Full form ἦλεέ from ἠλεός. 
ἠριγένεια, 7, born, or daughter, of the morning. 
θάλεια, ἡ, Tich, sumptuous, as a feast. 
θαμέσι, τοῖς, θαμέας, τοὺς, frequent. 
“καλλιγύναικα, τὴν, producing fair women. 
Ais, ἡ, smooth, as a rock. 
yeyas (METAAOS), μεγάλη, μέγα, magnus, great, large; for its in- 
| flection, see below. 
μέλε, in the expression ὦ μέλε, my good friend or sir. 
πίων (ΠΙΗΡῚ, fat, rich, regular. Also, feminine πίειρα. 
πλέως πλέων, plenus, {μ, borrows its feminine from πλέος ; thus 
πλέως πλέα πλέων. composition it has only two endings, ws, 




















= 


ov. 
πολύαρνι, τῷ, rich in sheep, owning many sheep. 

τολύς πολλή πολύ, much ; Ionic πολλός πολλή πολλόν ; Epic πολύς πο- 

eta πολύ; for its Attic inflection, see below. 

_ The syncopated οἱ πλέες, τοὺς πλέας, in the Epic dialect, have the 
signification of the comparative πλείονες, πλείονας, more. 

ότνια or πότνα, ἧ, venerable, revered, τὴν πότνιαν πότναν, ai πότνιαι. 

ρᾶος, meek, borrows many of its parts from the regular πραῦς πραεῖα 

_ pat, G. mpaéos ; for its inflection, see below. 

πρέσβυς (IIPESBOS, IIPESBHP), old, aged, regular. Also, feminine 

πρέσβα and πρέσβειρα. 

πρόφρων (IIPOSPAS), kind, compliant, regular. Also, feminine πρό- 

᾿ς φρασσα. 

ἄδιος, a, ov, easy, regular. Also, τὸ pa, rare. 

σῶς (ZAO3), 6, 7, Salvus, safe, rarely ἡ σᾶ; neuter σῶν, A. σῶν, A. 

_ Pl. σῶς, neuter Pl. ca. Regular form σῶος, a, ον. 

ὑψικέρᾶτα, τὴν, high-peaked, as a rock. 

φροῦδος, ἡ, ov, gone, used in the nominative ; φρούδου is found in the 

_ genitive absolute (Soph. Νὰ 264)., 

“XEPHS, χέρηος, D. χέρηϊ, A. xépna, Pl. N. χέρηες, neuter χέρηα or 

| xé€peva, with the signification of χερείων, worse. 


oe 


A Fe ae oe 


i Inflection of μέγας, πολύς, and πρᾶος. 


; Singular. 

Ν , μέγας μεγάλη μέγα πολύς πολλή πολύ 

ἶ Ξἢ μεγάλου μεγάλης μεγάλου πολλοῦ πολλῆς πολλου 
Dv. μεγάλῳ μεγάλῃ μεγάλῳ πολλῷ πολλῇ πολλῷ 
ΧΆ μέγαν μεγάλην μέγα πολύν πολλήν πολύ 


μεγάλε μεγάλη μέγα 





ῷ 





INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§ 68. 
Dual. 
N. A. V. μεγάλω μεγάλα μεγάλω 
G. ἢ. μεγάλοιν μεγάλαιν μεγάλοιν 
Plural. 
N. μεγάλοι μεγάλαι μεγάλα πολλοί πολλαί πολλά 
α. μεγάλων μεγάλων μεγάλων πολλῶν πολλῶν πολλῶν 
D. μεγάλοις μεγάλαις μεγάλοις πολλοῖς πολλαῖς πολλοῖς 
A. μεγάλους μεγάλας μεγάλα πολλούς πολλάς πολλά 
<P μεγάλοι μεγάλαι μεγάλα 
Singular. Ὁ Plural. 
N. πρᾶος πραεῖα πρᾶον πρᾶοι πραεῖς πραεῖαι πραέα 
α. πράου πραείας πράου πραέων πραειῶν πραέω 
D. mpa@ πραείᾳ πράῳ πράοις πραέσι πραείαις πραέσιε 
A. πρᾶον πραεῖαν πρᾶον πράους πραεῖς πραείας πραέα 
Υ. πρᾶε πραεῖα πρᾶον πρᾶοι πραεῖς πραεῖαι πραέα 
Dual. 
N. A. V. πράω πραεία πράω 
G. Ὁ. πράοιν πραείαιν πράοιν 


COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES AND ADVERBS. 
Χ § 68. 1. Adjectives in os are compared by drop- 


ping s, and annexing repos for the comparative, and 
τατος for the superlative. If the penult of the posi- 
tive be short, o is changed into ὦ. Εἰ. g. 
σοφός. wise, σοφώτερος, wiser, σοφώτατος, wisest 
ἄξιος ἀξιώτερος ἀξιώτατος, worthy 
ἄτιμος ἀτιμότερος ἀτιμότατος, dishonorable 
σεμνός σεμνότερος σεμνότατος, venerable ᾳ > 
In general, o remains unaltered when it is preceded by a mute 
a liquid ; as πυκνός πυκνότερος πυκνότατος, dense; πικρός πικρότε 
πικρότατος, 2 
(a) The comparative and superlative of adjectives in eos are con 
tracted after they have been formed according to the preceding rule; 
as πορφύρεος πορφυροῦς, πορφυρεώτερος πορφυρώτερος, πορφυρεώτα 
τος πορφυρώτατος, purple. 
(b) Some adjectives i in os are compared by dropping os and 
ing airepos aitaros ; a8 μέσος μεσαίτερος μεσαίτατος, middle, 
So εὔδιος εὐδιαίτερος εὐδιαίτατος, ἴδιος ἰδιαίτερος ἰδιαίτατος, 


ἰσαίτερος, ὄρθιος ὀρθιαίτερος ὀρθιαίτατος, ὄψιος ὀψιαίτερος ὀψιαΐ 


§ 63.] COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES AND ADVERBS. 89 


(6) A few adjectives in os drop os and annex repos τατος ; a8 περαῖ- 
os περαίτερος περαίτατος, on the other side. 

(d) Adjectives in dos, and many others in os, drop os and annex 
έστερος έστατος ; here οέστερος οέστατος are contracted into overepos 
οὕστατος ; a8 ἁπλόος ἁπλούστερος ἁπλούστατος, simple, 

So αἰδοῖος αἰδοιέστατος, ἄκρατος ἀκρατέστερος ἀκρατέστατος, avinpds 
ἀνιηρέστερος, ἐρρωμένος ἐρρωμενέστερος ἐρρωμενέστατος. 

hose in dos are sometimes compared according to the first rule ; 
aS εὔπνοος εὐπνοώτερος, εὔχροος εὐχροώτερος. 

(6) Some adjectives in os are compared by dropping os and annex- 
ing iorepos ίστατος ; aS λάλος λαλίστερος λαλίστατος, loquacious. 

So dpopdyos, povopdyos, πτωχός. 


ΧΩ, Adjectives in vs are compared by dropping s, 
and annexing tepos τατος ; as ὀξύς ὀξύτερος ὀξύτατος, 


sharp. 


3. Μέλας, black, and τάλας, unfortunate, annex 
τερος τατος to the root; thus, μέλας μέλάντερος με- 
λάντατος, τάλας ταλάντερος ταλάντατος. 





4, Adjectives in ἧς and es shorten these endings 
into es, and annex Tepos τατος ; as ἀληθής ἀληθέστε- 
pos ἀληθέστατος, true; χαρίεις χαριέστερος χαριέστα- 


τος, graceful. 


5. Adjectives in wy annex ἔστερος ἔστατος to the 
root ; as σώφρων σωφρονέστερος σωφρονέστατος, dis- 
creet. 


6. Some comparatives and superlatives are de | 
rived from substantives, adverbs, prepositions, or 
verbs ; as, ; 

βασιλεύς, king, βασιλεύτερος, more kingly, a greater king, βασιλεύ- 
τατος, most kingly, a very great king. © 

ἄνω, up, ἀνώτερος, upper, ἀνώτατος, uppermost. 

ὑπέρ, over, ὑπέρτερος, higher, ὑπέρτατος or ὕπατος, highest. 

φαίνω, to shine, φαάντερος, brighter, φαάντατος, brightest. 

7. The comparative and superlative may be 
formed by means of the positive and μᾶλλον, magis, 
more, μάλιστα OF πλεῖστα, Maxime, most ; as, 





99 INFLECTION OF WORDs. [§ 64. 


μᾶλλον φίλος, μάλιστα φίλος 
. μᾶλλον σώφρων, πλεῖστα μῶροι 
Nore 1. In the Epic dialect, ο may be changed into even when 
the penult of the positive is long; as κακοξεινώτερος, ὀϊζυρώτερος ὀϊζῦ- 
potatos, λᾶρώτατος. 
Even the Attic Poets sometimes change o into w after a mute and a 
liquid ; as εὐτεκνώτερος, δυσποτμώτερα. 


Note 2. Substantives, pronouns, and participles, as such, do not 
admit of different degrees in their signification. The comedians how- 
ever compare αὐτός ; thus, αὐτός, himself, airérepos, himselfer, αὐτό- 
τατος, tpsissimus, himselfest. ‘They compare also proper names; as 
Δαναός Δαναώτατος, Danaus. 


Nove 8. In the Epic dialect, some superlatives end in aros; as 
μέσος μέσατος OF μέσσατος. See also νέος, μυχός, mpd, ἐξ, πυθμήν, 
ὑπέρ, below (ᾧ 65). 


Nore 4. Ina few instances, new comparatives and superlatives are 
formed from adjectives which are already in the comparative or super- 
lative degree ; aS πρῶτος πρώτιστος. See also ἀγαθός, ἐξ, κακός, pu- 
κρός, below (§ 65). 

X64. 1. Some adjectives in vs drop this ending, 
and annex ἴων for the comparative, and ἐστος for 
the .superlative; as ἡδύς ἡδίων, ἥδιστος, 508 Υ]18, 
pleasant. 


2. Some adjectives in vs form the comparative 
by dropping vs and annexing cov; aS παχύς πάσ- 
cov, pinguis, fat. (§ 13, 10.) 

See also βαθύς, βραδύς, γλυκύς, EAAXYS, ἭΚΥΣ, μακρός, ταχύς; 
below (ᾧ 65). 

ΤᾺ Comparatives in ὧν are inflected according 
Ὁ the following example : 


Singular. 
N. ἡδίων ἥδτον 
G. ἡδίονος ἡδίονος 
D. ἡδίονι ἡδίονι 
A, ἡδίονα ἡδίω ἥδιον 
V. ᾿ ἡδίων ἥδιον 

Dual. 
NLA, ἡδίονε 4 

G. D. ἡδιόνοιν 








‘ 
4 


> 


§65.] coMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES AND ADVERBS. 91". 
Plural. 
N. ἡδίονες ἡδίους ἡδίονα ἡδίω 
G. ἡδιόνων ἡδιόνων 
D. ἡδίοσι ἡδίοσι 
Α. ἡδίονας ἡδίους ἡδίονα ἡδίω 
Υ. ἡδίονες ἡδίους ἡδίονα ἡδίω 


The endings -ova, -oves, -ovas drop ν and are then contracted into -, 
τους. 
_. Nore. Κρατύς, κρέσσων or κρείσσων, changes a into ε which in 
the Attic dialect becomes «. The Doric comparative is κάρρων form- 
ed from κρατύς as follows ; κρασσων, καρσων, κάρρων. 
᾿ς Μέγας, μέζων or μείζων, and ὀλίγος, ὀλίζων, imply METYS, OAI- 
 ΤῪΣ, whence μεσσων ολισσων, μέζων ὀλίζων. (ᾧ 10, ᾧ, oo.) : 


_ 8 65. The comparison of an adjective is anomalous when 
that adjective has, or implies, more than one positive. 

__ The comparison is defective when the adjective has no posi- 
tive in use. 


7 
ἢ 
_ The following list contains nearly all the adjectives which are 
anomalous or defective in their comparison. 
ἀγαθός, good, Comparative ἀμείνων, βελτίων, κρείσσων οἵ 
᾿ κρείττων, λωΐων λῴων, Ionic κρέσσων, Doric κάρρων, Poetic 
ἀμεινότερος, βέλτερος, λωΐτερος, ἀρείων or ἀρειότερος, φέρτερος ; Su- 
perlative ἄριστος, βέλτιστος, κράτιστος, λώϊΐστος λῷ- 
στος, Poetic ἀγαθώτατος, βέλτατος, κάρτιστος (Epic), φέρτατος, 
᾿ς φέριστος, Doric βέντιστος. 
ἄγχι Or ἀγχοῦ, near, ἀγχότερος, ἀγχότατος or ἄγχιστος. 
αἰσχρός (ΑἸΣΧΥΣῚ), ugly, αἰσχίων, sometimes αἰσχρότερος, αἴσχιστος. 
᾿ἀλγεινός (AATYS), painful, ἀλγεινότερος, ἀλγεινότατος, sometimes 
᾿ς ἀλγίων ἄλγιστος. 
ἄνω, Up, ἀνώτερος, Upper, ἀνώτατος, uppermost. 
ἀοιδός, bard, ἀοιδότατος, very celebrated. 
ἅρπαξ, rapax, rapacious, ἁρπαγίστερος, ἁρπαγίστατος. 
ἄφαρ, quickly, ἀφάρτερος, quicker. 
 ἀφήλιξ, having passed the meridian of life, ἀφηλικέστερος. 
ἄφθονος, abundant, ἀφθονέστερος, ἀφθονέστατος, or ἀφθονώτερος, 
᾿ς ἀφθονώτατος. 
ἄχαρις, disagreeable, ἀχαρίστερος. 
βαθύς, deep, βαθύτερος, βαθύτατος, Epic βάσσων, βάθιστος. 
βασιλεύς, king, βασιλεύτερος, more kingly, a greater king, βασιλεύτα- 
tos, most kingly, a very great king. 
βλάξ, stupid, βλακώτερος, βλακώτατος or βλακίστερος, βλακίστατος. 
βραδύς, tardus, bardus, slow, βραδύτερος, βραδύτατος, Epic βράσ- 
᾿ς σῶν, βάρδιστο. 
_ yepatds, old, venerable, γεραίτερος rarely γεραιότερος, γεραίτατος. 
γλυκύς, dulcis, sweet, γλυκύτερος, γλυκύτατος, Epic γλυκίων, rarely 
᾿ γλύσσων. εν 


ὦν | 


92 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [8 65. 


διάκονος, sé1 vant, διακονέστερος, more attentive to his duty, a better ser- 
vant, ; 

διπλόος, duplex, double, διπλότερος, in the New Testament. 

EAAXYS, ἐλάσσων, chepiasne: see μικρός. 

EAETXY3, infamous,  ἐλέγχιστος. 

ἐξ (ἐχε), ex, out of, ἔ ἔσχατος, last; also ἐ ἐσχατώτερος, ἐσχατώτατος. 

ἔξω, out, ἐξώτερος, exterior, outer, ἐξώτατος, extremus, exti- 
mus. 

ἐπιλήσμων, forgetful, ἐπιλησμότατος. 

ἐπίχαρις, agreeable, ἐ ἐπιχαριτώτερος, ἐπιχαριτώτατος. 

ie πον ‘friend, ἑ ἑταιρότατος, most friendly, a very good friend, the best 

rien 

ἐχθρός (ΕΧΘΥΣ), hostile, ἐχθρότερος, ἐχθρότατος, or ἐχθίων, ἔχθιστος. 

‘HEYS, ἥσσων, ἥκιστος, see κακός. . 

ἠρέμα, quietly, ἢ ἠρεμέστερος, more quiet, ἠρεμέστατος, most quiet. 

ἥσυχος, quiet, ἡσυχαίτερος OF ἡσυχώτερος, ἡσυχώτατος. 

κακός (ΚΑΚΥ͂Σ), bad, Comparative κακίων (Poetic κακώτερος), 
χεί pev (Poetic χερείων, “χερειότερος, ,Χειρότερος), ἥ ἥσσων (lands 
ἕσσων); Superlative κάκιστος, χείριστος, Poetic ἥκιστος. 

καλός (ΚΑΛΛΥΣ), beautiful, καλλίων, κάλλιστος. 

κάτω, down, κατώτερος, lower, κατώτατος, lowest, lowermost. 

KEPAYS, crafty, κερδίων, κέρδιστος. 

KHAY3, ‘dear, κήδιστος. 

states, thief. κλεπτίστερος, more thievish, a greater thief, κλεπτίστα- 

- τος, most thievish, a very great thief. 
κυδρός (KYAY2), glorious, κυδίων, κύδιστος. 

κύων, canis, dog, κύντερος, more impudent, xivratos, most impudent. 

μάκαρ, happy, paxdprepos, paxdpraros. 

μακρός (MAKY2, MHKY2), long, μακρότερος, μακρότατος, also μάσ- 
oar, μήκιστος. 

μέγας (METY2), magnus, great, μείζων (lonie μέζων). “μέγιστος. 

μέσος, medius, middle, μεσαίτερος, scales (Epic μέσατος, μέσσα- 
τος). 

μικρός, small, Comparative μικρότερος; ἐλάσσων οἵ ἐλάττων, 
μείων (Poetic μειότερος), ἐλαχιστότερος ; Superlative μικρό- 
τατος; ἐλάχ ιστος Poetic ᾿ μεῖστος. 

μυχός, TeCess, aati OF μυχοίτατος, innermost, Epic. 

νέος, NOVUS, New, young, regular. Poetic superlative véaros, Epic 
velaros, ᾽ 

oixrpds (ΟΙΚΤΥΣ), pitiable, οἰκτίων, οἴκτιστος OF οἰκτρότατος. 

ois, OViS, Sheep, οἰότερος, more sheepish, a greater 

ὀλίγος (OAITYS), little, in the plural few, ὀλίζων ter ὀλιγώτερος 
(Sextus), ὀλίγιστος. It borrows also the comparatives and superlas — 
tives of μικρός. 

ὀπίσω, behind, ὀπίστατος, hindermost. 

ὅπλα, arms, ὁπλότερος, younger, ὁπλότατος, youngest. 

παλαιός, old, παλαίτερος or παλαιότερος, παλαιότατος. 

παχύς, pinguis, fat, παχύτερος, παχύτατος, Epic πάσσων, πάχιστος 

πένης, nTos, poor, πενέστερος, πενέστατος. 

πέπων, Tipe, πεπαίτερος, πεπαίτατος. 








ᾧ 66.] | COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES AND ADVERBS. 93 


πίων, fat, πιότερος, πιότατος. 

πλεονέκτης, a covetous person, πλεονεκτίστατος. ; 

πλησίος, near, wAnotaitepos, πλησιαίτατος, OF πλησιέστερυς, πλησιέ- 
στατος. 

πολύς, much, πλείων OF πλέων, πλεῖστος, plus, plurimus, 

πρέσβυς, οἷά, πρεσβύτερος, πρεσβύτατος Epic πρέσβιστος. 

πρό, prae, before, mpérepos ΤΆΥΘΙΥ προτεραίτερος, prior, former, πρῶ- 
tos (mpo-aros), πρώτιστος, Doric mparos, primus, first. 

πρόσω, y nae προσώτερος, προσώτατος. 

προὔργου, to the purpose, προὐργιαίτερος, προὐργιαίτατος. 

πυθμήν, bottom, πύματος, hindermost, last, Epic. 

cr ᾿ ε er t¢n- 5 e # € fase 

padios (PA-YS), lonic ῥηΐδιος, easy, pawv, ῥᾷστος, lonic ῥηΐων. ῥήϊ- 
στος, Epic pnirepos, ῥηΐτατος. 

ῬΙΤῪΣ, frigidus, cold, dreadful, ῥίγιον, ῥίγιστος. 

σπουδαῖος, serious, earnest, σπουδαιέστερος, σπουδαιέστατος OF σπου- 
δαιότερος, σπουδαιότατος. 

᾿ρχολαῖος, slow, σχολαίτερος Or σχολαιότερος, σχολαίτατος. 

ταχύς (ΘΑΧΥΣ), swift, ταχίων commonly θάσσων, τάχιστος. 

ὑβριστής, an insolent person, ὑβριστότερος, ὑβριστότατος. 

ὑγιής, healthy, regular. Doric comparative ὑγιώτερος. 

ὑπέρ (‘YII-), super, over, iméprepos, higher, imépraros or ὕπατος, high- 

_ est, superior, Supremus or summus. 

ὑπό, Sus-, under, ὕστερος, later, ὕστατος, latest. 

“YVYS, high, tier rarely ὑψίτερος, ὕψιστος. 
ivo, to shine, φαάντερος, brighter, φαάντατος, brightest. 

φίλος (ΦΙΛΥΣ), friendly, dear, beloved, φιλώτερος φιλώτατος, φιλαίτε 
ρος φιλαίτατος, φίλτερος φίλτατος, οΥ φιλίων φίλιστος. 

γα fur, thief, φώρτατος, very thievish, a very great thief. 














Ψευδής, false, ψευδέστερος or Ψευδίστερος, ψευδίστατος. 

ὠκύς, swift, ὠκύτερος, ὠκύτατος Epic ὥκιστος, ocior, ocissimus 
ἶ Comparison. of Adverbs. } 
ὃ} 66. 1. The comparative of an adverb de 
rived from an adjective is the same with the neuter 
singular of the comparative, and the superlative is 
the same with the neuter plural of the superlative, 
of that adjective ; as 

ae —copas, wisely, σοφώτερον, more wisely, σοφώτατα, most wise- 
bys very wisely 

ὀξύς --- ὀξέως, sharply, ὀξύτερον, ὀξύτατα 

ἀληθής ---- ἀληθῶς, truly, ἀληθέστερον, ἀληθέστατα 

χαρίεις ---- χαριέντως, gracefully, χαριέστερον, χαριέστατα 

σώφρων --- σωφρόνως, discreetly, σωφρονέστερον, σωφρονέστατα 


, ες 


vs — ἡδέως, pleasantly, ἥδιον, ἥδιστα 
ταχύς --- ταχέως, quickly, θᾶσσον or θᾶττον, τάχιστα 


2. Primitive adverbs generally make the com-. 





Ps 


94 ΟΙΝΡΙΞΟΤΙΟΝ OF WORDS. [$$ 67 68. | 


i 
parative in tepo, and superlative in tatw; as ἄνω, 
ἵ 


up, ἀνωτέρω ἀνωτάτω. 


So ἀγχοῦ ΟΥ ἄγχι, near, ἀγχοτέρω ΟΥ ἄσσον (Epic a ἀσσοτέρω, Doric . 
ἄσσιον), ἀγχοτάτω ΟΥ̓ ἄγχιστα: : ἄπο; far, ἀπωτέρω, ¢ ἀπωτάτω: 8 ἐγγύς, 
near, ἐγγυτέρω ἐγγυτάτω, ἐγγύτερον ἐγγύτατα, ΟΥ ἔγγϊον ἔγγιστα; ἑκάς,, 7 
ar, ἑκαστέρω. ἑκαστάτω : - ἔνδον; within, in, ἐνδοτέρω, ἐνδοτάτω ; κάτω, 
down, κατωτέρω, κατωτάτω ; πέρα; further, beyond, περαιτέρω ΟΥ-πε- 1} 
ραίτερον, TEPALTAT@ ; πόρρω, ’ far, πορρωτέρω, ph ἀνε esis 'τηλοῦ or TH 
Ae, τηλοτέρω, τηλοτάτω. ͵ 












Nore 1. Some adverbs of the comparative degree end in ὡς ; as 
χαλεπῶς χαλεπωτέρως, ἀληθῶς ἀληθεστέρως, καλῶς καλλιόνως, μεγάλοι 
μειζόνως. Superlatives in ὡς are very rare. 


Nore 2. The following adverbs ἃ are more or less anomalous in their 

comparison : 

ἰθύ, straightforward, ἰθύντατα. 

μάλα, very, μᾶλλον (Doric μάλλιον), more, rather, μάλιστα, very much, 
especially. 

νύκτωρ; noctu, nighily, by night, νυκτιαΐτερον, Sarther back in the 
night, that is, early in the morning, νυκτιαίτατα, very early in the 
morning . 

πολλάκις, often, πλεονάκις, πλειστάκις. 


προὔργου, to the purpose, προὐργιαίτερον, more to the purpose, προὐργιαί- 
tara, very much to the purpose. 


PRONOUN AND ARTICLE. 


§ 67. There are eight'kinds of pronouns; the 
personal, reflexive, reciprocal, possessive, interroga- 
tive, indefinite, demonstrative, and relative. The 
personal, reflexive, and reciprocal are usually called 
substantive pronouns, the rest, adjective. 


, 68. 1. The personal pronouns are ἐγώ, ego, 
, vo, we two, both of us, ἡμεῖς, we, σύ, tu, thou, 
σφώ, you two, both of you, ὑμεῖς, you, t, is, he, σφεῖς 
they, αὐτός, ipse, he, himself. 


Singular. 
N. ἐγώ ov ({) αὐτός αὐτή αὐτά 
G. ἐμοῦ, μοῦ σοῦ οὗ αὐτοῦ αὐτῆς αὐτοῦ 
Ὦ. ἐμοί, μοί σοί οἷ αὐτῷ αὐτῇ αὐτῷ 
Α. ἐμέ, μέ σέ ἕ αὐτόν αὐτήν αὐτό 





§ 69.] : PRONOUN AND ARTICLE. 95 
Dual. 

N. A. vo σφώ awe αὐτώ αὐτά αὐτώ * 
α. Ὁ. νῷω;ων σφῷν σφωΐν αὐτον αὐταῖν αὐτοῖν 
Plural. 

N. ἡμεῖς ὑμεῖς σφεῖς, σφέα αὐτί αὐταί αὐτά 
σα. ἡμῶν ὑμῶν σφῶν αὐτῶν αὐτῶν αὐτῶν 
D ἡμν ὑμῖν σφίσι αὐτοῖς αὐταῖς αὐτοῖς 
A. ἡμᾶς ὑμᾶς σφᾶς, σφέα αὐτούς αὐτάς ᾿ αὐτά 


2. Αὐτός with the article before it means idem, 
the same, and is often contracted with the article ; 
AS TOU αὐτοῦ, ταὐτοῦ ; τῷ αὐτῷ, ταὐτῷ ; TH αὐτῇ, ταὐτῇ. 
(§ 20.) 


When this contraction takes place, the neuter has o or ov; thus, τὸ 
᾿αὖτό, ταὐτό OF ταὐτόν. 


Nore 1. According to the anci ient grammarians, the nominative of 
the third person singular was 7, is, ea, id, he, she, it. 


Nore 2. The forms σῴφωέ opaiy belong to the Epic dialect, 
Σ φω ἔ is always an accusative. —Z¢€éa is neuter. 


Nore 3. The particle γέ is often appended to the pronouns of the 
first and second persons for the sake of emphasis ; ye a egomet, 
J indeed, for my part; σύγε, tute, tutemet, thou inde 


§ 69. The reflexive pronouns are ἐμαυτοῦ, of my- 
self, my own, σεαυτοῦ, of thyself, thy own, and ἑαυτοῦ, 
of himself, his own. 'They are compounded of the 
oblique cases of the personal pronouns and αὐτός 


Singular. Plural. 
G. ἐμαυτοῦ ἐμαυτς: δ ἡμῶν αὐτῶν 
1. ἐμαυτῷ ἐμαυτῇ ἡμῖν αὐτοῖς (αὐταῖς) 
Α. ἐμαυτόν ἐμαυτήν ἡμᾶς αὐτούς (αὐτάς) 
α. σεαυτοῦ σεαυτῆς ὑμῶν αὐτῶν 
ΩΝ n ς “ > “ > ”~ 
D. σεαυτῷ σεαυτῇ ὑμῖν αὐτοῖς (αὐταῖς) 
ΡΝ 2 - > > , 
A. σεαυτόν σεαυτὴν ὑμᾶς αὐτούς (αὐτάς) 
; G ς ae a ς a n +A 
: ἑαυτοῦ ἑαυτῆς ἑαυτῶν, OF σφῶν αὐτῶν 
D ς “ ς “ ς ΟΕ , > a ( is) 
‘ ἑαυτῷ ἑαυτῇ ἑαυτ-οῖς, -αἷς, OY σφίσιν αὐτ-οῖς (“αἷς 


, “ ’ 
A. ἑαυτόν ἑαυτήν ἑαυτό ἑαυτ-ούς, -ds, -ά, OY σφᾶς αὐτ-οὐξ(-ἀς) 





96 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [88 70 -- 2. 


Σεαυτοῦ and ἑ ἑαυτοῦ are often contracted ; thus, G. σαυτοῦ σαυτῆς, 
αὑτοῦ αὑτῆς, αὑτῶν, D. σαυτῷ σαυτῇ, αὑτῷ αὑτῇ, αὑτοῖς αὑταῖς, A. 
σαυτόν σαυτήν, αὑτόν αὑτήν αὑτό, αὑτούς αὑτάς αὑτά. Also, G. Dual 
αὑτοῖν. 


§ 70. The reciprocal pronoun is ἀλλήλων, of one 
another, formed from ἄλλος. ‘The nominative case 
and the singular number are of course wanting. 


Plural. Dual. 
G. ἀλλήλων ἀλλήλων ἀλλήλων ἀλλήλοιν ἀλλήλαιν ἀλλήλοιν 
D. ἀλλήλοις ἀλλήλαις ἀλλήλοις ἀλλήλοιν ἀλλήλαιν ἀλλήλοιν 
A. ἀλλήλους ἀλλήλας ἄλληλα ἀλλήλω ἀλλήλα ἀλλήλω 


§ 71. The possessive pronouns are derived from 
the personal pronouns. ‘They are inflected like 
adjectives in os. 
ἐμός, ἡ, όν, meus, my, mine: veirepos, a, ov, of us two, our, 

Epic: ἡμέτερος, a, ον, Noster, our, ours. 
ods, σή, σόν, tuus, thy, thine: σφωΐτερος, a, ov, of you two, 

your, Epic: ὑμέτερος. a, ov, Vester, your, yours. = te 
ὅς, ἥ, ὅν, suus, his, her, hers, its, Epic: σφέτερος, a, ov, Suus, 

their, theirs. 


72. 1. The interrogative pronoun ris, quis? 
who? which? what? always takes the acute on 
the ε- 

The indefinite pronoun tis, aliquis, quidam, 
ullus, any, certain, some, takes the accent on the 
last syllable. 


Interrogative. Indefinite. 
Singular. 
M. F. N. M. F. N. 
N. tis τί τὶς τὶ 
α. τίνος, τοῦ τίνος, τοῦ τινὸς, τοῦ τινὸς, TOU 
D. τίνι, τῷ τίνι; τῷ ἡ τινὶ, τῷ τινὶ, τῷ 
Α. riva τί τινὰ τὶ 
"Ὁ Dual. 

N. A. tive τινὲ 
G. D. rivow Two 











δῷ 73, 74.] PRONOUN AND ARTICLE. 97 


Plural. } 
Ν. τίνες τίνα τινὲς τινὰ 
G. τίνων τίνων τινῶν τινῶν 
D. τίσι τίσι τισὶ τισὶ 
A. τίνας τίνα τινὰς τινὰ, ἄσσα 
ΟΥ̓ ἄττα 


2. The indefinite demonstrative δεῖνα, such-a- 
ene, is declined as follows: 





Sing. ὃ, ἧ, τὸ Piur. ol, ai, τὰ 
Ν. δεῖνα δεῖνες 
G. δεῖνος δείνων 
Ὦ. δεῖνι 
A, δεῖνα δεῖνας 


Sometimes it is found indeclinable ; as τοῦ δεῖνα, (Arist. Th. 629.) 


§ 73. The article ὁ (originally TOS) is declined 
in the following manner : 


Singular. Dual. Plural. 
M.- Ta Ν, Μ Ἐς N, M. FB LN, 
N. ὁ ἡ τό N.A. τώ τά τώ |Ν. of αἱ τά 
G. τοῦ τῆς τοῦ | G.D. τοῖν ταῖν τοῖν Ϊ ἃ. τῶν τῶν τῶν 
τῷ τῇ τῷ D. τοῖς ταῖς τοῖς 


D. 
A. τόν τήν τό A. τούς τάς τά 


Ks 74. The demonstrative pronouns are ὅδε, οὗτος, 
ic, thes, and ἐκεῖνος, that. “Οδε is simply the arti- 
cle with the inseparable particle -3e; thus, ὅδε ἥδε 
τόδε, (ἃ. τοῦδε τῆσδε τοῦδε, 1). τῷδε τῇδε τῷδε, Kc. 











Singular. 
Ν = σ a | ian. | ee >¢ 
Ξ οὗτος αὕτη τοῦτο ἐκεῖνος ἐκείνη ἐκεῖνο 
΄’ ’ 
G. τούτου ταὕτης τούτου ἐκείνου ἐκείνης ἐκείνου 
’ ’ ’ 3 , 3 ’ 3 ld 
Dp. τούτῳ ταύτῃ τούτῳ éxeivg ἐκείνῃ ἐκείνῳ 
A. τοῦτον ταύτην τοῦτο ἐκεῖνον ἐκείνην ἐκεῖνο 
Dual. 
N A , e Ld 3 ’ 3 , Ι 3 , 
.A. tovr@ ταύτα τούτω éxeiva ἐκείνα ἐκείνω 
΄ ’ ’ 
G.D. τούτοιν ταύταιν τούτοιν éxeivow ἐκείναιν ἐκείνοιν 


ὅ. 


98 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [δ 75, 76. 


Plural. 


οὗτοι αὗται ταῦτα ἐκεῖνοι ἐκεῖναι ἐκεῖνα 
τούτων τούτων τούτων ἐκείνων ἐκείνων ἐκείνων 
τούτοις ταύταις τούτοις ἐκείνοις ἐκείναις ἐκείνοις 
τούτους ταύτας ταῦτα ἐκείνους ἐκείνας ἐκεῖνα 


Ν, 

G. 

D. 

A. ΝᾺ 

x § 75. The relative pronoun ὅς, qui, who, which, 
ha 


t, is declined as follows : 








Singular. Dual. Plural. 
M F. N. M. F. N. M: .- 27s 
N. és 7 ἃ. Δ΄ <4 @: 1 NS ἘΞ ae 
G. οὗ ἧς οὗ |G. Ὁ. οἷν a οἷν α. ὧν ὧν ὧν 
D ¢ .ὅ᾽ ¢ 3 D. ois αἷς οἷς 
A. @w Ww ὁ A. ots ἅς 4G 
who 


Pas The relative ὅστις, quisquis, whoever, 
s compounded of ὅς and the indefinite pronoun tis, 
which are separately declined. ‘Thus, 


M. F. N. 
Ν. ὅστις ἥτις ὅ τὶ 
6. οὕτινος, ὅτου ἧστινος , ὅτου 
ἢ. ᾧτινι, ὅτῳ yr ᾧτινι, ὅτῳ 
A. ὅντινα ἥντινα ὅ τι 

Plural. 

N. οἵτινες αἵτινες ἅτινα, ἅσσα ἅττα 
G. ὧντινων, ὅτων ὧντινων ὧντινων, ὅτων 
D. οἷστισι, ὅτοισι αἷστισι οἷστισι, ὅτοισι 
A. οὕστινας ἅστινας ἅτινα, ἅσσα ἅττα 


§ 76. 1. The following pronouns and adverbs, or pronomt- 
nal adjectives and adverbs, are derived from ΠΟΣ, ΤΟΣ, and © 


Interrogative. Indefinite. 
πόσος, quantus, quot, how ποσός, of a certain quantity 
much? how many? 
_ ποῖος, qualis, of what quality? ποιός, of a certain quality 
πότερος, uter, which of the 
two? 


. πόστος, quotus, of what num- 
ber ? ᾿ 


σι κι ἷἱὸό 


. ποσταῖος, in how many days? 


; § 16.] PRONOUN AND ARTICLE, 99 


G6. πηλίκος, how old or large? πηλίκος, of a certain age or size 

7. ποδαπός, cujas, of what coun- 
try 7 

8. quantulum, how Uittle? 

Demonstrative. ; Relative. 

1. τόσος, τοσόσδε, τοσοῦτος, tan- ὅσος, ὁπόσος, quantus, quot, 
tus, tot, so much, so many as, as much as, as many as ~ 

2. τοῖος, τοιόσδε, τοιοῦτος, talis, οἷος, ὁποῖος, 4 ualis, as, such as 
such 

3. ὁπότερος, whichever of the two 

4. ὁπόστος, of what number soever 

5. ὁποσταῖος, in whatever number of 

days 


6. τηλίκος, τηλικόσδε, τηλικοῦτος, ἡλίκος, ὁπηλίκος, as old as, as large 
80 old, so large as 
7. ὁποδαπός, of what country soever 
8. τύννος, τυννοῦτος, tantulus, quantulum, as Uitile as 
tantillus, so Little 





Adverbs. 
4 Interrogative. Indefinite. 
1, ποῦ, πόθι, ubi, where? πού, alicubi, somewhere 
| 2. πόθεν, unde, whence? ποθέν, alicunde, from some place 
8. ποῖ, πόσε, quo, whither 7 mol, aliquo, to some place 
4. πῇ, Qua, in what direction or πῇ» in some direction 
. way ? ᾿ 
5. πότε, quando, when? ποτέ, aliquando, quondam, at. 
some time, once 
_ 6. πῶς, quomodo, how? πώς, quodammodo, somehou , in 
ὦ manner 
ἢ. πηνίκα, at what time of the day? 
8. πῆμος, when ? 
9. ποσάκις, quoties, how often? é 
: Demonstrative. Relative. 
1. τόθι, hic, here οὗ, ὅθι, ὅπου, ὁπόθι, αι δὶ, where 
2. τόθεν, thence ὅθεν, ὁπόθεν, unde, whence 
3. oi, ὅποι, ὁπόσε, Quo, whither 
4. τῇ, τῇδε, ταύτῃ, hac, in this ἣν» ὅπῃ, ua, in which direction or 
δ direction or way way 
5. τότε, then ὅτε, ὁπότε, quando, when 
| 5. ras, ὧδε, οὕτως, ὥς, sic, thus, 
᾿" 80 
7. τηνίκα, τηνικάδε, τηνικαῦτα, αἱ ἡνίκα, ὁπηνίκα, at which time of the 
s thes or that time of the day da 
8. τῆμος, τημόσδε, τημοῦτος, then ἦμος, ὁπῆμος, when 
9. τοσάκις, toties, so often ὁσάκις, ὁποσάκις, quoties, as of- 
ten as 
10. τέως, so long ἕως, till, until 


JN. τόφρα, so long as ὄφρα, as long as 


Ἵ 


100 INFLOCTION OF WoRDs. 0 


















(Ὁ) The adverbs with, ποδὶ, πόδι, ὅθι, rider, for τὰς, 
πῆγμεις, ἦμος, Tens, πηρμμᾶσδε, πηρμκοῦπες, THA, at Toe ey 


(©) In the expressions τοτὲ μὸν... . . . wore δέ, and dre per... .. Gre 
ὃς the advetlen τοι and ec have he force off the μόνον wend. 


(ad) The adverbs δεῦρο, Eba, ἐνθάδε. evraiba (lomie ébavra), Erber, 
and demnomstra~ 


2. The following adjectives are regarded as pronouns : 
λα. 9, a, alins, other, énother: ἄλλοδιαπτᾶς, }, én, from anather 
country, foreign. 
Matrepes, ας an, uterque, each, inth, sud of two: ὅκαστος, 9, ὧν, 
Quisque, each, every. 


ἕτερος, δ, or, COLTS, COLCTUM, alter, other, enothor, said of two : 
neuter, mathor, 








>> am, torus, whole. 
qeabunie i de ceten panne 
3. The indefinite ἔνεοι, sunt gui, some, is declined like the 
Plural of afer; thus, Zum, a, G. a&ior, D. dims, as, x, A. 
oun, 2s, a. 


4. The followimg pronouns are formed by prefixing οὐ, 
ei to Tis: οὔσις, οὔτι, MO ORT, ROME: pars, pir, Requis, none, 
lest any ont: cir, εἴτι, siquis, if any ont. 


of ee ee ie Ss ree to the 
pronouns and pronominal adjectives, and to some of 
ταὶ τὸν αεονσωῆευ δ κων παν ωῦξια of γαιῖς ἕο &S οἵτοσί 


ἘΣ ah pS. Tevwresi, as much as you 


“ae rowel is dropped befire εἰ thas, 2 4% τεῦς, 


©. Τῷ μύλον stage Ν 


§ 18.] PEONOUN AND ARTICLE. 191 


to the relative pronouns and pronominal adjectives, and 

to some of the relative adverbs, for the sake of emphasis; as 
ὅστερ ἥπερ ὅπερ, Οὐ. οὗπερ ἧστερ. 

So ὅσος ὅσον » G. ὅσον ody 
ak Gmee ont a gonad hf type Bes μή ὡ. 
ΠΑ. ὄὀντιναοῦν, quscungue : ἀρ θρονὶ Sxcots ; ὁποιοσδηεατεῖν, 423 
liseunque, what sort svever : ὥσπερ, ὡσπεροῦν, ὁπουοῦν. 

αὖ hen fhe κικάνο adverbs tr ii ὑεῖ, ἐκδῷ at me 


§ 78. Dialects. 
Personal Pronouns. 
᾿ πρὸ eds 
me Ν “epg «βρης αἱ ἑών, ἰώσει Epic ἐγών 
Gers went γωγε, Dorie 
G. ἐμοῦ, μοῦ, πα Aa ἐμεῦ, i 
μέθεν- B pots: Holic ¢, - Louie ἐμεῦ, enclitie 
μεῦ : Epic ἐμέο, ἐμεῖο, ἐμέθεν. 
D. ἐμοί, piv, ἐμένη: Beotie ἐμό. “Eporye, Dorie 
A. ἐμέ, μέ, Doric ; also in an 
Ὁ. N. A. »ὦ, Epic naz: Beotic vac.’ ὦ Ὁ. vgs, Ἐρῖε nite. 
St? ἡμεῖς, lonic ἡμέες: Dorie ἅμές (4): and Epic ἄμμες, 
ped adele ge, Dor a - appear : 
Ὁ. pir, Dove tng © | Hele nd Eric ἄρμι, Sep; Hk 
: Poetic ἡμίν (i), ἧμῖν. 
A. ἡμᾶς, lonic ἡμέας: Dorie ἅμέ (4): Holic and Epic ἄμμε: 
octic ἡμάς (a), ipas. 
Σύ. 
Ss. N. σύ, Dorie τύ, τύνη: Laconian τούνη: Aolic τύ: Beotie 


τού, Tour : Epic τύνη. ry eg Θετι λάδι Βαοτίς τούγα. 
- σοῦ, Dorie τέος, τέο, τεοῦς, τεοῦ, τεῦς, τεῦ, τίος, Tia, τίως - 
τέορ : Beotic τεοῦς, τιοῦς, τεῦς: Holic σέθεν : Ionic 
σεῦ: Epic σέο, σεῖο, σεῦ, σέθεν, τεοῖο. 
D. wel, Sees tats vie, 20s, «ἔν: Tonie τοί. 
A. σέ, Dette τέ, rel το ancl, vin Beotic τίν : Cretan τρέ 


ΝΑΑ. ὩΣ, hg D. ν, Epie σφῶν. 
= ak Dorie 2, (5) : Holic and Epic ὅμ- 


ἌΓΑΝ, ee £olic ὑμμέων : Beotic οὐμίων : Epic 
ὑμείων. 

Ὁ. ὑμῖν, Dorie é 5 f£olie and E 
fin, Doric ὑμῖν (, Spe Epic Spps, ὄρρμιν: 





102 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§ 78. 


A. ὑμᾶς, Ionic ὑμέας : Doric ὑμέ: Molic and Epic dppe: 


Poetic ὑμάς (a). 
5 oh 
5, G. οὗ, Doric ἑοῦς, ἑοῦ, οὗς : Beeotic ἑοῦς, rio: «0116 rébev: 


Tonic εὗ: Epic ἕο, cio, ἕθεν, later Epic ἑεῖο. 
D. of, AXolic and Beotic roi: Beotic also 6, éiv: Doric ἵν 
(Fiv): Epie ἑοῖ. 
A. ἕ, olic ré: Epic éé: Ionic and Epic piv: Doric viv, 
used also by the Attic Poets for αὐτόν, αὐτήν, αὐτούς, αὐτάς, 
αὐτά, (Eur. Bach. 814. 979 1) 
αν G. σφῶν, lonic σφέων: Molic, Doric, and Epic σφείων : 
Doric also ὧν, rare. 
. pict, Doric, Ionic, and Epic σφί, σφίν : Molic ἄσφι : 
nian diy: Syracusan wiv. 
A. σφᾶς, Ionic σφέας : Epic σφέ: Molic ἄσφε : Syracusan 
= : Poetic opas (a). The Attic Poets use σφέ in all gen- 
ers and numbers, jam, her, it, them. 


Θ 


Αὐτός. 

S. G. αὐτοῦ, in an Ionic inscription AFYTO aFvrod. — The Ionic 
inserts ε before the long endings ; as αὐτέῃ for avr7.—In the Doric 
dialect αὐτός was sometimes reduplicated; thus, αὐταυτῶ, αὐταυτόν, 
αὐταυτῶν, after the analogy of οὗτος τούτου, from TOS, and of ἀλλή- 
λων from ἄλλος. 


2. Reflexive Pronoun. | 

(a) The Ionic uses εωὖ for av ; thus, ἐμεωῦτοῦ, σεωῦτοῦ, éwivTod. 

(b) In the Epic dialect, the component parts of these pronouns are 
always separate ; as G. ἐμεῦ αὐτῆς, ἐμέθεν αὐτῆς, D. of αὐτῷ, A. ἔμ᾽ 
αὐτόν, αὐτόν μιν. 

3. Possessive Pronoun. 

Ἡμέτερος, Doric and Beotic duds (a) : Aolic ἄμμος, ἀμμέτερος : 
Epic duds (a4). — ds, Doric reds: olic réos: Beeotie τιός. ---- Ὑ pé- 
tepos, Doric and Epic ὑμός (Ὁ) : Beeotic or Laconian οὐμός : AXolic 
typos. —"Os, ALolic and Dorie rés: Epic ἑός. ---Σ φέτερος, Lolic 
and Epic odds. Aleman uses σφός for ὅς, his. 

4. Interrogative and Indefinite Pronoun. 
S. N. ri, Dorie σά, rare. 
G. rod, Ionic and Epic τέο, red ; indefinite reo, rev, enclitic, 
D. τῷ, Ionic and Epic τέῳ, indefinite τεῳ énclitic: olic rio. 


P. 6. TON, Ionic τέων ; indefinite rewy enclitic. 
D. ΤΟΙΣ, Ionic τέοισι : Alice τίοισι. 


Ποῖος, πότερος, lonic (κοτερος) κότερον. 


5. Article. 


_ The article has all the dialectic peculiarities of the first two declen 
sions ; as Doric τῶ ras τᾷ, Beeotic τῶ ras τῆ, for τοῦ, τῆς, τῇ. 








§ 79.} NUMERALS. 103 


Further, the Doric has roi, rai, for of, ai, formed from the fu‘l 
form TO. 


6. Demonstrative Pronoun. 


"Ode, Pl. G. τῶνδε, Holic révdeav, D. τοῖσδε, Epic τοΐσδεσσι or 
τοΐσδεσι. ---Οὗτος, N. Pl. οὗτοι αὗται, Doric τούτοι ταύται. The 
Ionic inserts ε before the long endings; as τουτέου, τουτέων. --- Exei- 
vos, lonic κεῖνος : A®olic and Doric κῆνος : Doric also τῆνος, used com- 
monly when the object is near the person addressed, that which is near 

-you.— Tdaos, Poetic τοσσάτιος. 


7. Relative Pronoun. 
Os, 6. οὗ, Epic dav, éns. 


S.° N. ὅστις, 6 re, Epic ὅτις, ὅ ττι. 

G. of rivos, Doric ὅτινος. ---Ὅ του, Ionic ὅτεο, ὅτευ : Epic ὅτευ, 
ὅττεο, ὅττευ. 

D. ᾧτινι, Doric ὅτινι. ---Ὅ τῳ, Ionic and Epic ὅτεῳ. 

A. ὅντινα, Epic ὅτινα. 

N. οἵτινες, Asolic ὅττινες. 

G. ὅτων, Tonic and Epic ὅτεων. 

D. ὅτοισι, Ionic and Epic éréocoi, feminine ὁτέῃσι. 

A. οὕστινας, ἅτινα, Bole ὅττινας : Epic ὅτινα, neuter. 


Ὅσος, Epic ὅσσος, ὁσσάτιος : Poetic ὁσάτιος. ---- Ὁπόσος, Beotic 
ὁπόττος : Epic ὁππόσος : lonic ὁκόσος. --- Ὁ ποῖος, Epic ὁπποῖος : 
lonic ὁκοῖος. --- πότερος, Epic ὁππότερος. 


Pronominal Adverbs. 


Ποῦ, lonic κοῦ. Πῶς, Ionic κῶς. 

ὋὉπόθεν, Ionic ὁκόθεν, Epic ὁππόθεν. ---Οπόθι, Epic ὁππόθι. ---- 
Ὅπως, lonic ὅκως, Epic ὅππως. --Ὁπόσε,; ὁπότε, ὁποσάκις, 
Epic ὁππόσε, ὁππότε, ὁπποσάκις. 


τ΄ 


NUMERALS. 


7. Numeral words are divided into cardinal, ordinal, 
‘multiplicative, numeral adjectives, substantives, and adverbs. 


Cardinal, Ordinal. Adverbs. Substantives. 
1. εἷς πρῶτος ἅπαξ μονάς 
2. δύο δεύτερος δίς δυάς 
- 8. τρεῖς τρίτος τρίς τριάς 
4. τέσσαρες τέταρτος τετράκις τετράς 
5. πέντε πέμπτος πεντάκις - πεντάς 
6. ἕ ἕκτος ἑξάκις ἑξάς ἢ 
7. ἑπτά ἕβδομος ἑπτάκις ἑβδομάς 
8. ὀκτώ ὄγδοος ὀκτάκις ὀγδοάς 
9. ἐννέα ἔννατος ἐννεάκις ἐννεάς. 


104 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [8 19. 
10. δεκα δέκατος δεκάκις δεκάς 
11. ἕνδεκα ἑνδέκατος ἑνδεκάκις ἑνδεκάς 
12. δώδεκα δωδέκατος δωδεκάκις δωδεκάς 
13. τρισκαίδεκα τρισκαιδέκατος 
14, τεσσαρεσκαΐδεκα τεσσαρακαιδέ- 

κατος 

15. πεντεκαίδεκα πεντεκαιδέκατος 

16. ἑκκαίδεκα ἑκκαιδέκατος 

17. ἑπτακαίδεκα ἑπτακαιδέκατος 

18. ὀκτωκαίδεκα ὀκτωκαιδέκατος 

19. ἐννεακαίδεκα ἐννεακαιδέκατος 

20. εἴκοσι εἰκοστός εἰκοσάκις εἶκάς 

21. εἷς καὶ εἴκοσι πρῶτος καὶ εἶκο- 

στός 
30. τριᾶκοντα τριακοστός τριακοντάκις 
40. τεσσαράκοντα τεσσαρακοστός τεσσαρακον- τεσσαρακοντάς 
[ τάκις 

50. πεντήκοντα πεντηκοστός 

60. ἑξήκοντα ἑξηκοστός ἑ axis 

70. ἑβδομήκοντα ἑβδομηκοστός ἑβδομηκοντάκις 

80. ὀγδοήκοντα ὀγδοηκοστός 

90. ἐννενήκοντα ἐννενηκοστός 

100. ἑκατόν ἑκατοστός ἑκατοντάκις ἕκατοντάς 

200. διακόσιοι διᾶκοσιοστός διακοσιάκις 

300. τριᾶκόσιοι τριᾶκοσιοστός 

400. τετρακόσιοι τετρακοσιοστός 

500. πεντακόσιοι πεντακοσιοστός ἅ & PT 

600. ἑξακόσιοι ἑξακοσιοστός 

700. ἑπτακόσιοι ἑπτακοσιοστός 

800. ὀκτακόσιοι ὀκτακοσιοστός 

900. ἐννακόσιοι ἐννακοσιοστός 
1000. χίλιοι χιλιοστός χιλιάκις χιλιάς 
2000. δισχίλιοι 
10000. μύριοι μυριοστός μυριάκις μυριάς 

. δισμύριοι δισμυοιοστός 
&e. &e. 


1. The cardinal numbers answer to πόσοι; how many? From 5 
to 100, inclusive, they are indeclinable. Those in soz are declined like 
the plural of ἄξιος ; as χίλιοι χίλιαι χίλια. 

Thousands are formed by prefixing the numeral adverbs to χίλιοι ; 
as δισχίλιοι, two thousand. Tens of thousands are formed by prefixing 
these adverbs to μύριοι ; as τρισμύριοι, three myriads. 


2. The ordinal numbers answer to πόστος, which in order? one 
of how many? They end in ros (except δεύτερος, ἕβδομος, ὄγδοος), 
and are inflected like σοφός ; δεύτερος is inflected like μακρός. 


3. Multiplicatives, answering to ποσαπλάσιος, how many fold? 
how many times as large? end in -πλόος, -πλᾶσιος (Ionic -πλήσιος), 
or -πλασίων, -plex, -fold; as διπλόος or διπλάσιος, duplex, double, 


a 





ᾧ 79.] NUMERALS. 105 


δὶ : ' 
Those in -πλόος refer to size; those in -πλάσιος or -rAaciwv com- 
monly refer to number. 


4, Numeral adjectives answering to ποσταῖος, on what day? end 
in atos; they are formed from the ordinals; as Sevrepaios, on the 
second day. 


4 5. Numeral substantives end in ds G. ddos, feminine; as μονάς, 
monad, unit, τριάς, triad, trinity. 

A few end in vs; thus ἡ τριτύς, τριττύς (τριττύα), ternary, ἡ τε- 

τρακτύς, quaternary, ἡ χιλιοστύς, a thousand. 

6. The numeral adverbs answer to ποσάκις, how often? they end 
άκις, except the first three. 
Add to these πολλάκις, πλεονάκις, πλειστάκις, ὀλιγάκις, συχνάκις, 
ἀμφοτεράκις, ἑκατεράκις. 

7. The ending xos or χθος appears chiefly in the adverbs δίχα 
διχῆ dix Od, τρίχα τριχῆ τριχθά, τετραχῆ τετραχθά, πένταχα, ἕπταχα; 
and a few others. Δισσός and τρισσός ‘fete διξός, τριξός) are — 
formed from -yos by annexing o to x. 


8. Εἷς, unus, one, δύο, duo, two, τρεῖς, tres, three, and τέσσαρες 
or τέτταρες, quatuor, four, are inflected as follows : 


? , μὲ 4 , vd 
N. εἷς pia ev oi, τὼ δύο, δύω 

ε Ὁ δ᾽. δ Ua m. “~ oo. -“ 
α. ἑνός μιᾶς ἑνός τοῖν δυοῖν, δυεῖν, τῶν δυῶν 
Ὦ. κδνί μιᾷ ἑνί τοῖν δυοῖν, τοῖς δυσί 

, 

A. ἕνα μίαν ἕν τὼ, τοὺς δύο, δύω 
Ν. τρεῖς τρία τέσσαρες τέσσαρα 
G. τριῶν τριῶν τεσσάρων τεσσάρων 
D. τρισί τρισί τέσσαρσι τέσσαρσι 
Α. τρεῖς τρία τέσσαρας τέσσαρα 


9. The negatives οὐδείς, μηδείς, nullus, no one, not one, none, 
can be used also in the plural; thus, N. οὐδένες, G. οὐδένων, 1). οὐδέ- 
ot, A. οὐδένας, none, also insignificant persons, 


10. In cardinals and ordinals after εἴκοσι, εἰκοστός, the smaller is 
usually put first, and is connected to the larger by καί ; as εἷς καὶ εἴκο- 
ow; ἕξ καὶ εἴκοσι καὶ ἑκατόν ; ἕκτος καὶ εἰκοστὸς καὶ ἑκατοστός. When 
the larger is put first, καί is usually omitted; as εἴκοσι eis; ἑκατὸν 
εἴκοσι ἕξ ; ἑκατοστὸς εἰκοστὸς ἕκτος. 

Sometimes the cardinals and ordinals from 13 to 19, inclusive, fol- 
low this analogy ;- as τρεῖς καὶ δέκα ; τρίτος καὶ δέκατος. When δέκα 
precedes, the two parts are written as one word; thus, δεκατρεῖς, de- 
κατέσσαρες, δεκαπέντε, δεκαέξ, δεκαεπτά, δεκαοκτώ, δεκαεννέα ; in which 
case δεκατρεῖς, δεκατέσσαρες, also the first component part of 
τεσσαρεσκαίδεκα, are declined like τρεῖς, τέσσαρες, respectively. 


11. “Auda, G. Ὁ. ἀμφοῖν, ambo, both, of all genders, and its com- 
parative duddrepos, a, ov, both, answer to πότερος, which of the 
two? 

5* 


106 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [Ὁ 80. 


Nore 1. Δύο, Ava, in Homer, are indeclinable.—*A pda is found: 


indeclinable in one of the Homeric hymns. — Εἷς καὶ εἰκοστός is found 
for πρῶτος καὶ εἰκοστός. 


Nore 2. The ancient grammarians say that μύριοι, proparoxytone, 
means fen thousand ; but μυρίοι, paroxytone, innumerable, countless, 


Nore. 3. Sometimes, in numerals larger than εἴκοσι, εἰκοστός, the 
conjunction καί was omitted; thus in an inscription we find ἑπτα 
ὀγδοήκοντα ὀκτακόσια ; ἕν ἑβδομήκοντα ; τέσσαρες ἐνενήκοντα; τέσσαρα 
ἐνενήκοντα διακόσια τετρακισχίλια ἕξ δέκα μυριάδες ; ἕν ἑβδομήκοντα 
ἐνακόσια χίλια. 

The same order was sometimes observed in numeral figures ; as fi, 
ςπρ, 9p; Ord, for 18, prs, pgs, PrP. 


Note 4. Ἐννενήκοντα, ἐννακόσιοι were also written with one 
y. (See the preceding note.) 


Nore 5. When a declinable cardinal number agrees with a collect- 
ive noun in the singular, it takes the endings of the singular; as (Xen, 
An. 1, 7, 10) ἀσπὶς μυρία καὶ terpaxocia. 


§ 80. Dialects. 


1. εἷς, Doric fis: pia, Holic ta: ἑνί, in Homer ἰῷ : πρῶτος, Doric 
mparos : ἅπαξ, Cretan ἀμάκις, Tarentine ἀμάτις. 

2. δύο, Epic dorm δοιοί, inflected throughout: δυσί, Aolic δύεσι. 

3. τρεῖς, Dorie rpis: τρίτος, Aolic répros, tertius, Epie rpira- 
ros: for τρίς, Laconian τριάκις. 

4. τέσσαρες, ALolic πίσυρες πέσσυρες ; Beeotic wérrapes, quatu- 
or; Doric réropes rérropes ; lonic τέσσερες : for τέσσαρσι, τέταρτος, 
Poetic τέτρασι, rérparos. 

5. πέντε, Holic πέμπε, quinque. 

6. ἕξ, ἕκτος, Doric réé, Féxros, in the Heraclean Tables. 

7, 8, 9. ἕβδομος, ὄγδοος, ἔννατος, Epic ἑβδόματος, ὀγδόατος, ἔνατος 
ΟἹ εἴνατος. 

11. ἕνδεκα, Doric δέκα εἷς, rare. : 

19. δώδεκα, Doric and Ionic δυώδεκα ; Doric also δέκα δύο ; Poetic 
δυοκαίδεκα : for δωδέκατος, Poetic δυωδέκατος. 

14. Ionic τεσσερεσκαίδεκα, indeclinable ; also τεσσερεσκαιδάτη for 
τεσσαρακαιδεκάτη. 

90. εἴκοσι, Beotic Είκατι, Viginti; Doric Fixati, Feixatt, βείκατι, 
εἴκατι, ἴκατι ; Epic ἐείκοσι. 

30, 40, 80, 200, 300. Ionic τριήκοντα, τεσσερήκοντα, ὀγδώκοντα, δι- 
ηκόσιοι, τριηκόσιοι. For τεσσαράκοντα, Beotic πετταράκοντα, Doric 
τετρώκοντα. 

60, 70. ἑξήκοντα, ἑβδομήκοντα, Doric reEjxovra, ἑβδεμήκοντα. 

200-900. For -κόσιοι, Beeotic -κάτιοι ; as διακάτιοι, τριακάτιοι, τε- 
τρακάτιοι, πεντακάτιοι. : 

1000. χίλιοι, Beotic χείλιοι. 

9000, 10000. Epic ἐννεάχτλοι, δεκάχϊἴλοι. 


a ὐπωννδουνναι δυνά “... «ἢ 


§§ 81, 82.] VERB. 107 


VERB. 


§ si. I. The Greek verb has three voices; ac- 
tive, passive, and middle. 


ὦ, There are five moods ; indicative, subjunctive, 
optative, imperative, and infinitive. 


3. There are seven tenses ; present, imperfect, 

perfect, pluperfect, future, aorist, and future perfect. 
he primary or leading tenses are the present, 

perfect, and future. 

The seéondary or historical tenses are the im- 
perfect, pluperfect, and aorist. 

The indicative is the only mood in which the 
imperfect and pluperfect are found: the subjunc- 
tive and imperative want also the future. 


ἧς There are three persons; the first, second, one 
third. 


5. Deponent verbs are those which are used only 
in the passive or middle. ‘They are called depo- 
nent passive or deponent middle according as their 
aorist is taken from the passive or middle. 

Note. The later Greeks sometimes formed a future subjunctive ; : 
as μεμισθώσωνται, in the Heraclean Tables; καυθήσωμαι, κερδηθήσων- 
rat, in the New ‘Testament. 

§ 82. 1. A regular verb is conjugated by form- 
ing the present, future, aorist, perfect active, per- 
fect passive, aorist passive ; ; as βουλεύω βουλεύσω 
ἐβούλευσα βεβούλευκα βεβούλευμαι ἐβόυλεύθην. 


2. A deponent verb is conjugated by forming 
the present, future middle, perfect, and aorist pas- 
sive or middle (as the case may be); as ἀρνέομαι 
ἀρνήσομαι ἤρνημαι ἠρνήθην ; χαρίζομαι χαρίσομαι κεχά- 
ρίσμαι ἐχαρισάμην. 


Is 83. 


OF WORDS. 


INFLECTION 


108 


Soaap.onaynog 
Soaarlp.onayaog 


Soaarlo.onayaogag) 


Soarnaaynogag 
δ 19ράϑγηοο! 
Soaarlo.oligaayaog 


Soaarlonsyaog 


smyna yaoglag) 
Sponaynog 
am.ons yaog 


amnaynog 


‘o[dionszeg 


Mp.0v.0NI\AOG 
109.03.0n2\A0g 


alirtyw.0naynog 
alirlo.0n3yaog 


morl.0naynog 


alirlp.onsyaogs 
mrl0.0n3ynog 


OAISSUq OY} Ul SB ΘΒ OY} oayrodn[g pure Yooyreg “jooyroduy “uasorg 


109-03.0na\ynog)ag 
mp0naVyaog/a¢ 
maligaayaog 
m9.02.0lignaynog 


mg-0anaynog 


Marna yaogsag 
monsaynog 
aa.0naynog 


manayaog 


ΛΠ] 


90204 Φ)ΡΡΊΠΙ 


alirhoonayaog eg 


o.0naynogag aliya Soaarnaynog)ag) 


altyagnayaog 
alirhooligasyaog 


alirfonayaog 


910 aassn gy 


mhoxnayaog)ag 
aimonaynog 
mhoons yaog 


mhonayaog 
‘oaneidg 


9101 gayay 


@ Soastlaaynogag) 
φθαϑυλορ! 


mrleonayaog 


mxnaynogag] 


mo9>\n0g 


mn2ynog 
‘eatountqng 


-astapp J2SUN09 01 ‘onsxacg ajduiexa oy) Jo sisdoukg 


mrlo.onayaogag 
alirlnaynogag)s 
mrlaaynogag} 

__ aligns yaog)p 
mrlooligasyaog 
alirlonayaog)s 
mrlona yaog 


mawnaynogag)a 
pynaynogac 
p.onsynog)> 
monaynog 

, AOnaY NOG? 
o@nsyaog 


‘oANwOIpUy 


‘es ἃ 


Frog Wy 
Ἵρομοάπ)ᾳ 
ἽἼοομος 
ΒΟΥ 
"OININ 
‘yoojroduiy 
ἽΠΟΒΘΑΙ 


Ἵρομοάῃᾳ 
‘JOOJ19q 
‘SLOW 
“ΟΧΠΊΠ J 
οομούσπῃη 
"JUOSO1 


§ 84.] 

















109 














VERB. 
§ 84. Inflection of βουλεύω. 
Indicative Active. 

Present. Future. Perfect. 
βουλεύω βουλεύσω βεβούλευκα 
βουλεύεις βουλεύσεις βεβούλευκας 
βουλεύει βουλεύσει βεβούλευκε 
βουλεύετον βουλεύσετον βεβουλεύκατον 
βουλεύετον βουλεύσετον βεβουλεύκατον 
βουλεύομεν βουλεύσομεν βεβουλεύκαμεν 
βουλεύετε βουλεύσετε βεβουλεύκατε 

_ βουλεύουσι βουλεύσουσι βεβουλεύκᾶσι 
Imperfect. Aorist. Pluperfect. 
ἐβούλευον — ἐβούλευσα ἐβεβουλεύκειν 
ἐβούλευες ἐβούλευσας ἐβεβουλεύκεις 
ἐβούλευε ἐβούλευσε ἐβεβουλεύκει 
ἐβουλεύετον ἐβουλεύσατον ἐβεβουλεύκειτον 
ἐβουλευέτην ἐβουλευσάτην ἐβεβουλευκείτην ’ 
ἐβουλεύομεν ἐβουλεύσαμεν ἐβεβουλεύκειμεν 
ἐβουλεύετε ἐβουλεύσατε ἐβεβουλεύκειτε 
ἐβούλευον ἐβούλευσαν ἐβεβουλεύκεισαν ΟΥ̓ 

ἐβεβουλεύκεσαν 
Subjunctive Active. ‘ 

Present. Aorist. Perfect. 
βουλεύω βουλεύσω βεβουλεύκω 
βουλεύῃς βουλεύσῃς βεβουλεύκῃς 
βουλεύῃ βουλεύσῃ βεβουλεύκῃ 
βουλεύητον βουλεύσητον βεβουλεύκητον 
βουλεύητον βουλεύσητον βεβουλεύκητον 
βουλεύωμεν βουλεύσωμεν βεβουλεύκωμεν 
βουλεύητε βουλεύσητε βεβουλεύκητε 
βουλεύωσι βουλεύσωσι βεβουλεύκωσι 


110 INFLECTION OF WORDS. 


Present 


S. Bovrcvorue 
βουλεύοις 
βουλεύοι 








βουλεύοιτον 

βουλευοίτην 
Ῥ, βουλεύοιμεν 

βουλεύοιτε 


βουλεύοιεν 


S. βουλεύσαιμι 


βουλεύσαις or βουλεύσειας 
βουλεύσαι or βουλεύσειε 


Present. 


S. 2 βούλευε 


[§ 84. 


Optative Active.-. 


3 βουλευέτω 


D. 2 βουλεύετον 


3 βουλευέτων 


P. 2 Bovdevere 


3 βουλευέτωσαν ΟΥ̓ 


Future. Perfect. 
βουλεύσοιμι βεβουλεύκοιμι 
βουλεύσοις βεβουλεύκοις 
βουλεύσοι βεβουλεύκοι 
βουλεύσοιτον βεβουλεύκοιτον 
βουλευσοίτην βεβουλευκοίτην 
βουλεύσοιμεν βεβουλεύκοιμεν 
βουλεύσοιτε βεβουλεύκοιϊε 
βουλεύσοιεν βεβουλεύκοιεν 
Aorist. 

D. Ρ, βουλεύσαιμεν 
βουλεύσαιτον βουλεύσαιτε 
βουλευσαίτην ββθουλεύσαιεν OF 

τ βουλεύσειαν 
Imperative Active. 

Aorist, Perfect. 
βούλευσον βεβούλευκε 
βουλευσάτω. βεβουλευκέτω 
βουλεύσατον βεβουλεύκετον 
βουλευσάτων βεβουλευκέτων 
βουλεύσατε βεβουλεύκετε 
βουλευσάτωσαν or βεβουλευκέτωσαν 

βουλευσάντων 


βουλευόντων 


Infinitive Active. 


Present. 
Future. 
Aorist. 
Perfect. 


βουλεύειν 
βουλεύσειν 
βουλεῦσαι 
βεβουλευκέναι 


Participle Active. 


βουλεύων 
βουλεύσων 
βουλευσας 
βεβουλευκώς 























VERB. 111 
Indicative Passive. 

Present. Perfect. Future. 
βουλεύομαι βεβούλευμαι βουλευθήσομαι 
βουλεύ-ῃ, -εἰ βεβούλευσαι βουλευθήσ-η: -εἰ 
βουλεύεται βεβούλευται βουλευθήσεται 
βουλεύεσθον βεβούλευσθον βουλευθήσεσθον 
βουλεύεσθον βεβοῤφλευσθον βουλευθήσεσθον 
βουλευόμεθα βεβουλεύμεθα βουλευθησόμεθα 
βουλεύεσθε βεβούλευσθε βουλευθήσεσθε 
βουλεύονται βεβούλευνται βουλευθήσονταν 

Imperfect. Pluperfect. Aorist. 
ἐβουλευόμην ἐβεβουλεύμην ἐβουλεύθην 
ἐβουλεύου ἐβεβούλευσο ἐβουλεύθης 
ἐβουλεύετο ἐβεβούλευτο ἐβουλεύθη 
ἐβουλεύεσθον ἐβεβούλευσθον ἐβουλεύθητον 
ἐβουλευέσθην ἐβεβουλεύσθην ἐβουλευθήτην 
ἐβουλευόμεθα ἐβεβουλεύμεθα ἐβουλεύθημεν . 
ἐβουλεύεσθε ἐβεβούλευσθε ἐβουλεύθητε 
ἐβουλεύοντο ἐβεβούλευντο ἐβουλεύθησαν 

Future Perfect. 
βεβουλεύσομαι D. -- P. βεβουλευσόμεθα 
βεβουλεύσ-ῃ, -εἰ βεβουλεύσεσθον βεβουλεύσεσθε 
βεβουλεύσεται βεβουλεύσεσθον βεβουλεύσονται 
Subjunctive Passive. 

Present. Perfect. Aorist. 
βουλεύωμαι βεβουλευμένος ὦ βθουλευθῶ 
βουλεύῃ βεβουλευμένος ἧς βθουλευθῇς 
βουλεύηται βεβουλευμένος 7 βουλευθῇ 
βουλεύησθον βεβουλευμένω ἦτον βουλευθῆτον 
βουλεύησθον βεβουλευμένω ἦτον βουλευθῆτον 
βουλευώμεθα . βεβουλευμένοι ὦμεν βουλευθῶμεν 
᾿βουλεύησθε βεβουλευμένοι ἦτε βουλευθῆτε 
βουλεύωνται βεβουλευμένοι ὦὧσι βουλευθῶσι 














112 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§ 84. 
Optative Passive. 
Present. Perfect. Future. 

S. βθουλευοίμην βεβουλευμένος εἴην βουλευθησοίμην 
βουλεύοιο βεβουλευμένος εἴης βουλευθήσοιο 
βουλεύοιτο βεβουλευμένος εἴη βουλευθήσοιτο 

Ὦ. ---........ 
βουλεύοισθον βεβουλευμένω εἴητον βθουλευθήσοισθον 
βουλευοίσθην βεβουλευμένω einrny βθουλευθησοίσθην 

P. ββθυλευοίμεθα βεβουλευμένοι εἴημεν βθουλευθησοίμεθα 
βουλεύοισθε βεβουλευμένοι εἴητε βουλευθήσοισθε 
βουλεύοιντο βεβουλευμένοι εἴησαν βθουλευθήσοιντο 

Aorist. 

S. Bovdrgevbeinv 1), P. βουλευθ-είημεν, -ciper 
Bovdevbeins βουλευθείητον βουλευθ-είητε, -εἴτε 
βουλευθείη βουλευθειήτην βουλευθ-είησαν, -εἴεν 

: Future Perfect. 

S. βεβουλευσοίμην D.————— FP. βεβουλευσοίμεθα 
βεβουλεύσοιο βεβουλεύσοισθον βεβουλεύσοισθε 
βεβουλεύσοιτο βεβουλευσοίσθην βεβουλεύσοιντο 

Imperative Passive. 
Present. Perfect. Aorist. 
S. 2 βουλεύου βεβούλευσο βουλεύθητι 
3 βουλευέσθω βΒεβουλεύσθω βουλευθήτω 
D.2 βουλεύεσθον βεβούλευσθον βουλεύθητον 
3 βουλευέσθων βεβουλεύσθων βουλευθήτων 
P. 2 βουλεύεσθε βεβούλευσθε βουλεύθητε 
3 βουλευέσθωσαν or βεβουλεύσθωσαν or βουλευθήτωσαν ΟΥ̓ 
βουλευέσθων βεβουλεύσθων βουλευθέντων 
Infinitive Passive. Participle Passive. 
Present. βουλεύεσθαι βουλευόμενος 
Perfect. βεβουλεῦσθαι βεβουλευμένος 
Aorist. βουλευθῆναι βουλευθείς 
Future. βουλευθήσεσθαι βουλευθησόμενος 
Fut. Perf. ββεβουλεύσεσθαι βεβουλευσόμενος 


§ 85.] VERB. 118 
Indicative Middle. 








Future. 

S. βουλεύσομαι D. _ Ρ, βουλευσόμεθα 
βουλεύσ-ῃ, -εἰ βουλεύσεσθον βουλεύσεσθε 
βουλεύσεται βουλεύσεσθον βουλεύσονταε 

Aorist. re 

S. ἐβουλευσάμην D.. ——_——_ Ῥ, ἐβουλευσάμεθα 
ἐβουλεύσω ἐβουλεύσασθον ἐβουλεύσασθε 
ἐβουλεύσατο ἐβουλευσάσθην ἐβουλεύσαντο 


Subjunctive Middle. 





Aorist. 

S. βουλεύσωμαι Dip ee Ῥ, βουλευσώμεθα 
βουλεύσῃ βουλεύσησθον βουλεύσησθε 
βουλεύσηται βουλεύσησθον βουλεύσωνται 

Optative Middle. 
Future. 

S. βουλευσοίμην Ὁ. ———— P. βουλευσοίμεθα 

~ βουλεύσοιο βουλεύσοισθον βουλεύσοισθε 
βουλεύσοιτο βουλευσοίσθην βουλεύσοιντο, 

Aorist. 

S. βουλευσαίμην D. -- P. βουλευσαίμεθα 
βουλεύσαιο βουλεύσαισθον βουλεύσαισθε 
βουλεύσαιτο βουλευσαίσθην βουλεύσαιντο 


Imperative Middle. 


: Aorist. 
S. 2 βούλευσαι D. βουλεύσασθον P. βουλεύσασθε 
3 βουλευσάσθω βουλευσάσθων βουλευσάσθωσαν or 
βουλευσάσθων 
Infinitive Middle. Participle Middle. 
Future. βουλεύσεσθαι βουλευσόμενος 
Aorist. βουλεύσασθαι βουλευσάμενος 


§ 83. 1. The first person singular of the example βου- 
λεύω translated : 
Indicative Active. 


Present. I advise, I do advise, I am advising. 
Imperfect. I was advising, I advised. 


114 INFLECTION OF WORDS. | [8 85. 


Future. J shall, or will, advise. 

Aorist. J advised, I did advise, I have advised, I had advised. 
Perfect. I have advised. 

Pluperfect. J had advised. 


Subjunctive Active. 


Present. I may, or can, advise or be advising, I advise, I am advising. 

Aorist. I may, or can, advise or have advised, I shall, or will, advise, I have 
advised, I shall, or will, have advised. 

Perfect. I may, or can, have advised, I have advised. 


Optative Active. 
Present. 1] might, could, would, or should, advise or be advising, I was advising, 
I advised. 
Future. J should, or would, advise. 
Aorist. J might, could, would, or should, δον ee hens οὗδια I hal ahaa 
Perfect. I might, could, would, or should, have advised, I had advised. 


Imperative: Active. 
Present. Advise, do advise, be advising. 
Aorist. Advise, do advise. 
Infinitive Active. 


Present. To advise or be advising. 
Future. Should, would, shall, will, advise. 
Aorist. To advise, to have advised. 
Perfect. To have advised. : 
Participle Active. 
Present. Advising. 
Future. Being about to advise, who shall advise, and in certain connections, fo 
advise, in order to advise. 
Aorist. Advising, having advised, who has advised. 
Perfect. Having advised. 


Indicative Passive. 


Present. J am advised, continually. 

Imperfect. J was advised, continually. 

Future. J shall, or will, be advised. 

Atrist. I was advised, I have been advised, I had been advised. 

Perfect. 7 have been advised. 

Pluperfect. I had been advised. 

Future Perfect. τῶ ty coil, bast den spilelansl Liddell in ath. hs alae. 


Subjunctive Passive. 


Present. I may, or can, be advised, I am advised, continually. 

Aorist. I may, or can, be advised or have been advised, I shall, or will, be ad- 
vised, I have been advised, I shall, or will, have been advised. 

Perfect. I may, or can, have been advised, I have been advised. 


Optative Passive. 
Present. I might, could, would, or should, be advised, I was advised, continually. 


“~ 


ᾧ 86.] . VERB. 115 


Future. J should, or would, be advised. 

Aorist. I might, could, should, or would, be advised or have been advised, I had 
been advised. 

Perfect. I might, could, should, or would, have been advised, I had been advised 

Future Perfect. J should, or would, be advised. 


Imperative Passive. 


Present. Be advised, continually. 
Aorist. Be advised. 
Perfect. Be advised. 


Infinitive ‘Passive. 


Present. To be advised, continually. 

Future. Should, would, shall, will, be advised. 
Aorist. 70 be advised, to have been advised. 

Perfect. 70 have been advised. 

Future Perfect. Should, would, shall, will, be advised. 


Participle Passive. 


Present. Being advised, continually. 

Future. Being about to be advised, who shall be advised, to be adv se2, in order 
to be advised. 

Aorist. Being advised, having been advised, who has been advised. 

Perfect. Having been advised. 

Future Perfect, like the future. 


Middle. ; 


The middle is the same as the active with the reflexive pronoun appended 
to it; as, Present, I advise myself, simply J deliberate. 


2. The Latin paradigm amo adapted to the Greek. 


Indic. Subj. Opt. Imperat. Inf. Part. 
Pres. amo amem amarem ama amare amans 
Imperf. amabam 
Aor. amavi amaverim amavissem amavisse 
Perf. amavi amaverim amavissem amavisse 
Plup. amaveram 
Fut. amabo amaturussim amaturus es- amaturus es- amaturus 

or fuerim semorfuissem se or fuisse 


F. Per. amavero 


§ 86. Example of the future active and middle 
of liquid verbs: ἀγγέλλω, to announce. 


Synopsis. 
Indicative, Optative. Infinitive. Participle. 
F. A. ἀγγελῶ ἀγγελοῖμι ἀγγελεῖν ἀγγελῶν 


F.M. ἀγγελοῦμαι. ἀγγελοίμην ἀγγελεῖσθαι ἀγγελούμενος 


116 


Indicative. Optative. 
S. αγγελῶ 


> - 
ἀγγελεῖς 
ἀγγελεῖ 


[5 87. 


INFLECTION OF WORDS. 


Future Active. 


Infinitive, Participle. 


> ~ , > ~ > ΄“ 
ἀγγελ-οῖμι, -oinv ἀγγελεῖν ἀγγελῶν 
ἀγγελ-οῖς, -οίης 


» ~ ’ 
ἀγγελ-οῖ, -oin 





. ss ς 
ἀγγελεῖτον 
ἀγγελεῖτον 


P. ἀγγελοῦμεν 


ἀγγελεῖτε 
ἀγγελοῦσι 


S. ἀγγελοῦμαι 


ἀγγελ-ῇ, -εἴ 
ἀγγελεῖται 


ἀγγελ-οῖτον, -oinrov 
ἀγγελ-οίτην, -οιήτην 
ἀγγελ-οῖμεν, -οίημεν 
ἀγγελ-οῖτε, -οίητε 

ἀγγελ-οῖεν, -οἴησαν 


Future Middle. 
ἀγγελοίμην ἀγγελεῖσθαι 
ἀγγελοῖο᾽ 
ἀγγελοῖτο 


ἀγγελούμενος 





ἀγγελεῖσθον 
ἀγγελεῖσθον 


P. ἀγγελούμεθα 


ἀγγελεῖσθε 
ἀγγελοῦνται 


ἀγγελοῖσθον 
ἀγγελοίσθην 
ἀγγελοίμεθα 
ἀγγελοῖσθε 
ἀγγελοῖντο 


§ 87. Examples of the second aorist, second 
perfect and pluperfect, and second future passive : 
λείπω, to leave. 








Synopsis. 
Indic. Subj. Opt. Imp. Inf. Part. 
9Α.Α. ἔλιπον λίπω λίποιμο λίπε λωιπεῖν λιπών 
2 Α. Μ. ἐλιπόμην λίπωμαι λιποίμην λιποῦ λιπέσθαι λιπόμενος 
29 Α.Ρ. ἐλχίπην λιπῶ λιπείζνν λίπηθι λιπῆναι λιπείς 
2F. P. λιπήσομαι λιπησοίμην λιπήσεσθαι λιπησόμενος 
2P. λέλοιπα λελοίπω λελοίποιμι λέλοιπε λελοιπέναι λελοιπώς 
2Pl. ἐλελοίπειν 
Indicative. . 
2 Aor. Act. 2 Aor. Mid. 2 Aor. Pass. 2 Fut. Pass. 
S. ἔλιπον ἐλιπόμην ἐλίπην λιπήσομαι ; 
ἔλιπες ἐλίπου ἐλίπης λιπήστη, τι 
ἔλιπε ἐλίπετο ἐλίπη λιπήσεται 
ἐλίπετον ἐλίπεσθον ἐλίπητον λιπήσεσθον 
ἐλιπέτην ἐλιπέσθην ἐλιπήτην λιπήσεσθον 
ἐλίπομεν ἐλιπόμεθα ἐλίπημεν λιπησόμεθα 
ἐλίπετε ἐλίπεσθε ἐλίπητε λιπήσεσθε 
ἔλιπον ἐλίποντο ἐλίπησαν Ἀν» ὡς 












































§ 87.] VERB. 117 
2. Perfect. 

S. λέλοιπα D, ———— P. λελοίπαμεν 
λέλοιπας λελοίπατον λελοίπατε 
λέλοιπε λελοίπατον λελοίπᾶσι 

2 Pluperfect. 

S. ἐλελοίπ-ειν, ἡ OD. | P. ἐλελοίπειμεν 
ἐλελοίπ-εις, τῆς ἐλελοίπειτον ἐλελοίπειτε 
ἐλελοίπ-ει, -εἰν ἐλελοιπείτην ο΄. ἐλελοίπ-εισαν, -εσαν 

Subjunctive. 

2 Aor. Act. 2 Aor. Mid. 2 Aor. Pass. 2 Perf. 

S. λίπω λίπωμαι λιπῶ λελοίπω 
λίπῃς λίπῃ λιπῇς λελοίπῃς 
λίπῃ λίπηται λιπῇ λελοίπῃ 
λίπητον λίπησθον λιπῆτον λελοίπητον 
λίπητον λίπησθον λιπῆτον λελοίπητον 

P. λίπωμεν λιπώμεθα λιπῶμεν λελοίπωμεν 
λίπητε λίπησθε λιπῆτε λελοίπητε 
λίπωσι λίπωνται λιπῶσι λελοίπωσι 

Optative. 

2 Aor. Act. 2 Aor. Mid. 2 Aor. Pass. - 2 Fut. Pass 

S. λίποιμι λιποίμην λιπείην λιπησοίμην 
λίποις λίποιο λιπείης λιπήσοιο 
λίποι λίποιτο λιπείη λιπήσοιτο 

D. — — 
λίποιτον λίποισθον λιπ-είητον, -εἴτον λιπήσοισθον 
λιποίτην λιποίσθην λιπ-ειήτην, -εἰτην λιπησοίσθην 

P. λίποιμεν λιποίμεθα λιπ-είημεν, -εῖἴμεν λιπησοίμεθα 
λίποιτε λίποισθε λιπ-είητε, -εἴτε λιπήσοισθε 
λίποιεν λίποιντο λιπ-είησαν; elev λιπήσοιντο 

2 Perfect. 

S. λελοίπ-οιμι, -oinv D. -- P. λελοίπ-οιμεν, -οίημεν 
λελοίπ-οις, -οίης λελοίποιτον λελοίπ-οιτε, -οίητε 
λελοίπ-οι, -oin λελοιποίτην λελοίπ-οιεν, -οἴησαν 

Imperative. 

2 Aor. Act. 2 Aor. Mid. 2 Aor. Pass. 2 Perf. 

S. λίπε λιποῦ λίπηθι λέλοιπε 
λιπέτω λιπέσθω λιπήτω λελοιπέτω 

D. λίπετον λίπεσθον λίπητον λελοίπετον 
λιπέτων λιπέσθων λιπήτων λελοιπέτων 

P. λίπετε λίπεσθε λίπητε λελοίπετε 
λιπέτωσαν, λιπέσθωσαν, λιπήτωσαν, λελοιπέτωσαν 

λιπόντων λιπέσθων λιπέντων 


118 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§ 88. 


᾿ Infinitive. 
5Α.Α.λιπεῖν 9 Α. Μιλιπέσθαι 2. Α. Ριλιπῆναι 2F.P.rAumjoecOu 
2 Perf. λελοιπέναι 

Participle. 
2A.A.dimov 9 Α. Μιλιπόμενος 9 Α. ιλιπείς 2 F. Ρι λιπησόμενος 
2 Perf. λελοιπώς 


§ 88. Examples of the perfect and pluperfect 


passive and middle of mute and liquid verbs: τρίβω, 
to rub, πλέκω, to knit, πείθω, to persuade, ἀγγέλ. ὦ, 
to announce. 

Perfect Passive and Middle. 





Ind. S. τέτριμμαι πέπλεγμαι πέπεισμαι ἤγγελμαι 
τέτριψαι πέπλεξαι πέπεισαι ἤγγελσαι 
τέτριπται πέπλεκτι πέπεισται ἤγγελται 

D. τέτριφθον πέπλεχθον πέπεισθον ἤγγελθον * 
Ρ. τετρίμμεθα πεπλέγμεθα πεπείσμεθα ἠγγέλμεθα 
τέτριφθε πέπλεχθε πέπεισθε ἤγγελθε 

τετριμμένοι πεπλεγμένοι πεπεισμένοι ἠγγελμένοι 
εἰσί εἰσί εἰσί εἰσί 

Imp.S. τέτριψο πέπλεξο πέπεισο ἤγγελσο 
τετρίφθω πεπλέχθω πεπείσθω ἠγγέλθω 

D. τέτριφθον πέπλεχθον πέπεισθν  Ἔἤγγελθον 
τετρίφθων πεπλέχθων πεπείσθων ΩΣ 
P. τέτριφθε πέπλεχθε πέπεισθε ἤγγελθε 


τετρίφθωσαν, πεπλέχθωσαν, πεπείσθωσαν, ἠγγέλθωσαν, 
τετρίφθω.ν πεπλέχθων πεπείσθων ἠγγέλθων 








Inf. πτετρῖφθαι πεπλέχθαι - πεπεῖσθαι ἠγγέλθαι 
Part. τετριμμένος πεπλεγμένος πεπεισμένος ἠγγελμένος 
Pluperfect Passive and Middle. 

S. ἐτετρίμμην ἐπεπλέγμην ἐπεπείσμην ἠγγέλμην 
ἐτέτριψο ἐπέπλεξο ἐπέπεισο ἤγγελσο 
ἐτέτριπτο ἐπέπλεκτο ἐπέπειστο ἤγγελτο 

Ὁ. ἐτέτριφθον ἐπέπλεχθον ἐπέπεισθον ἤγγελθον 
ἐτετρίφθην ἐπεπλέχθην ἐπεπείσθην ἠγγέλθην 

P. ἐτετρίμμεθα ἐπεπλέγμεθα ἐπεπείσμεθα ἠγγέλμεθα 

_ ἐτέτριφθε ἐπέπλεχθε ἐπέπεισθε ἤγγελθε 
τετριμμένοι πεπλεγμένοι πεπεισμένοι ἡγγελμέ 
cay: ἦσαν ἦσαν ἦσαν 


The perfect and pluperfect passive and middle of verbs in πω, Ba, 
da, are inflected like τέτριμμαι ἐτετρίμμην ; of verbs in κω, yea, χω, 
like πέπλεγμαι ἐπεπλέγμην ; of verbs in τω, d0, ba, fa, like πέπει 
σμαι ἐπεπείσμην ; οἵ verbs in ra, va, pa, like ἤγγελμαι ἠγγέλμην. 


ee ee ee ee 





§§ 89 --91.] AUGMENT. 119 


§ 89, 1. Not unfrequently the tenses are, for the sake of 
greater strength, formed by means of the participle and the auz- 
iliary verbs εἰμί, γίγνομαι, διαγίγνομαι, Kupéw, ὑπάρχω, πέλω, and 
ἔχω ; also ἔρχομαι with the future participle ; as, 

Present. βουλεύων εἰμί 

Imperfect. βουλεύων ἦν 

Future. βουλεύων ἔσομαι, βουλεύσων εἰμί or βουλεύσων ἔρχομαι 

Aorist. βουλεύσας ἔχω, Or βουλεύσας εἶχον ; passive Bovdevbeis 
εἰμι 

Perfect, Pas Me εἶμι, Sometimes βεβουλευκὼς ἔχω 

Pluperfect. βεβουλευκὼς ἦν, sometimes βεβουλευκὼς εἶχον 

Fut. Perf. βεβουλευκὼς ἔσομαι, or βουλεύσας ἔσομαι 


3 And so through all the voices, moods, numbers, persons, and gen- 
ers. 


2. MéAXa, to be about to do any thing, to intend, shall, fol- 
lowed by the present, future, or aorist, of the infinitive, forms a 
periphrastic Suture ; as Μέλλει τιθέναι, He is about to place. 

[cela 


AUGMENT. 


§ 90. 1. The perfect and future perfect of all 
the moods and of the participle, and the imperfect, 
aorist, and pluperfect of the indicative, receive an 
mcrease at the beginning, called augment. 


2. ‘There are two kinds of augment; the syllabic 
augment, and the temporal augment. 


The syllabic augment is formed by prefixing a 


syllable or two syllables to the verb. 
The temporal augment is formed by lengthening 
the first syllable of the verb. 


χὰ 91. 1. When the verb begins with a conso- 

ant followed by a vowel or a liquid, the augment 
of the perfect is formed by prefixing to the verb that 
consonant together with ane. ‘This kind of aug- 
ment is called reduplication. E. g. βουλεύω BeBov- 
λευκα βεβούλευμαι, γράφω γέγραφα γέγραμμαι. 


So θύω τέθυκα, φύω πέφῦκα, χαίνω κέχηνα, χράομαι κέχρημαι, θεάο- 
μαι τεθέαμαι. (ᾧ 15.) 


—_ 


190 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§ 91. 


2. When the verb begins with two consonants 


the second of which is not a liquid, or with & ἕξ, w, 


the augment of the perfect is formed by prefixing 
an e to the verb; as σκάπτω écxada, ξητέω ἐζήτηκα, 
ψεύδομαι ἔψευσμαι. . 

3. The augment of the pluperfect is formed by 


prefixing an e to the reduplication of the perfect ; 
as βουλεύω βεβούλευκα ἐβεβουλεύκειν. ΝῊ 


4. When the augment of the perfect is simply e, 
the pluperfect takes no additional augment; as 

’ + > / / Ig ἢ / 
σκώπτω ἐσκαφα ἐσκάφειν, ἕητέω εζήτηκα εζητήκειν. 


5. When the verb begins with a consonant, the 
augment of the ztmperfect and aorist is formed by 
prefixing an e; as βουλεύω, ἐβούλευον, ἐβούλευσα ; 

7 x ΝΜ 
γράφω, ἔγραφον, ἔγραψα. 

6. When the verb begins with p, the augment is 
formed by prefixing an e, and doubling the p; as 
ῥάπτω, imperf. ἔρραπτον, perf. ἔρραφα, pluperf. ἐρρά- 
φειν, aor. ἔρραψα. 

Nore 1. (a) Some verbs beginning with a mute and liquid some 
times take ε instead of the reduplication of the perfect ; those begin- 
ning with yv always take ε; as βλαστάνω βεβλάστηκα ἐβλάστηκα, 
κατα-γλωτίζω κατ-εγλώτισμαι, γνωρίζω εἶμι ato See also γλύφω, 
γράφω, κληΐζω, τρέφω, in the Cataeares of Verbs. 

Μιμνήσκω (MNAQ) has μέμνημαι μεμνήσομαι, but its kindred μνη - 
μονεύω has ἐμνημόνευκα. , 

(0) A few verbs beginning with a liquid take εἰ instead of the redu- 
plication, which is nothing more than the augment ε lengthened ; as 
Angin εἴληχα. See also λαμβάνω, kéya, μείρομαι; in the Catalogue 
of Verbs. Observe further that μείρομαι has also ἔμβραται ἐμβραμένη. 

Παρα-νομέω takes ἡ instead of the reduplication in the form πα- 
ρηνομημένος. ‘ 
‘Nore 2. (a) Some verbs take the reduplication contrary to the sec- 


ond rule; as κτάομαι κέκτημαι. See also πτερυγόω, πτήσσω; in the 
Catalogue of Verbs. 


\(b) The perfect of ἔχω, in an inscription, has παρ-είσχηται, for πα 


αέσχηται. 
‘the pluperfect of io rn pe is ἑστήκειν and εἱστήκειν. 











δι9.}. AUGMENT. 121 


Nore 3. The augment of the perfect of iarnpe takes the rough 
breathing; thus, ἕστηκα ἑστήκειν. Στέλλω has ἕσταλκα, in the com- 
pound ἀφ-εστάλκαμεν, found in an inscription. 


Nore 4, The additional augment of the pluperfect is often omitted ; 
as τελευτάω τετελευτήκειν, ἀναβαίνω ἀναβεβήκειν, ΚΕ ΝΣ καταδε- 
δραμήκειν. 

Note 5. Some verbs lengthen the syllabic augment ε into n, in the 

émperfect and aorist; as βούλομαι, ἐβουλόμην ἠβουλόμην, ἐβουλήθην 
᾿ ἠβουλήθην. See also ἀπολαύω, δύναμαι, μέλλω, παρανομέω, in the 
Catalogue of Verbs. 

Nore 6. (a) The following Poetic forms take the reduplication, con- . 
trary to the analogy of verbs beginning with p; ῥαπίζω pepamiopat, 
ῥίπτω ῥερίφθαι, ῥ ῥυπόω ῥερυπωμένα. 

(0) Some Poetic forms do not double the p after the syllabic aug- 
ment ; thus, ῥάπτω ἔραπτον, ῥέζω ἔρεζον ἔρεξα, pintw ἔριψα ἐρίφην. 

(6) PEQ, to say, may take εἰ- instead of ep- in the aorist passive ; 
thus, εἰρέθην εἰρήθην. In the perfect it always takes ei- for ἐρ- ; thus, 
εἴρηκα, εἴρημαι. 


xs 92. 1. When the verb begins with a short 
owel the augment of all the past tenses is formed 
by lengthening that vowel; in this case, a and ε 
become y, and o becomes ὦ ; as, 


ἀκολουθέω, imperf. ἠκολούθεον, sit ἠκολούθηκα, pluperf. ἠκολου- 
θήκειν, aor. ἠκολούθησα 
Cea ἠλέεον, ἠλέηκα, ἠλεήκειν, ἠλέησα, ἠλεήθην 
ὀρθόω, ὠρθούμην, ὥρθωμαι, ὠρθώμην, ὥρθωσα 
Σ ἵκετεύω, ἱκέτευον, ἱκέτευσα 
ὕγιαίνω, ὕγίαινον, vyiava 


2. If the vowel is already long, no change takes 


place ; except that a (long) is commonly changed 
Into 3 aS ἡμερόω ἡμέρουν, ὠδίνω ὥδινον, Giocw Higa. 


3. When the verb begins with a diphthong, the 
augment is formed by changing the first vowel of 
that diphthong “ecording to the first rule ; 3 as αἰτέω 
ἥτεον, ἄδω ; 00D, ᾿αὐλέω ηὔλεον, εὔχομαι ηὐχόμην, οἰκέω 
ᾧκεον. 


(a) OY is never augmented ; as οὐρανόω οὐράνουν, andes οὕταζον. 
(b) EI is augmented only i in EIAQ, εἰκάζω, and εἶμε ; thus, ἤδειν, 
ἤκαζον ἤἥκασα ἤκασμαι, yew. 


6 





122 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [δῷ 93, 94. 


KG 93. 1. Verbs, which originally began with the digamma F, 
ate augmented as if the digamma was still prefixed to them ; 
that is, they take the syllabic augment «. Some of them take 
the temporal augment in addition to the syllabic. E. g. ἄγνυμε; 
Zaéa ἔᾶγα ἐάγην 3 οἴγω, ἔῳξα ἔῳχα ἔῳγμαι ἐῴχθην ἔῳγα. 

See also ἁλίσκομαι, ἀνάσσω, ἁνδάνω, ἅπτω, ἔθω, EIAQ, εἴκω, εἴλέω, 
εἴλω, εἶμι, ΕΙΠΩ, εἴρω, to join, ἔλπω, ἕννυμι, ἑορτάζω, ἕρδω, “EQ, to 
per. inut, οἰκέω, οἰνοχοέω, ὁράω, οὐρέω, ὠθέω, ὠνέομαι, ἴῃ the Cata- 

gue of Verbs. 


2. Some digammated verbs, after the omission of the digam- 


ma, contracted the initial syllables εε- into εἰ ; as ἐάω; εἴαον εἴς 
Goa εἴᾶκα εἴάθην. 

See-also ἐθίζω, ἑλίσσω, ἑλκόω, ἕλκω, ἝΛΩ, ἕπω, ἐργάζομαι, ἑρπύζω, 
ἕρπω, ἑστιάω, ἔχω, ἝΩ, to place, inut, in the Catalogue of Verbs. 

Nore 1. EIAQ and εἶμε lengthen the syllabic augment ε into 7, 
in the forms }-cidew, #-iov j-icav.—"EO@ lengthens the augment ε 
into εἰ in the forms εἴτωθα εἰ-ώθειν. 

ore 2. The forms Zo6a εἴωθα, ἕωκα ἕωνται, from ἔθω, ἵἴη μι, pre- 
su εσθα ειοθα, €oxa ἕονται. 
e pluperfects ἐῴκειν, ἐώλπειν, ἐώργειν, from εἴκω; ἔλπω, ἕρδω;, 
come directly from their perfects ἔοικα, ἔολπα; ἔοργα. 
_ Note3. In some of the dialects, these verbs were also augmented 
in the usual way; as ἕλκω ἧλκον, ἔχω ἦχον. So ἐξ-ηργάσατο, from 
ἐξ-εργάζομαι, found in a later inscription. 

Nore 4. Some verbs of this class retain the augment of the aorist 
throughout the dependent moods ; thus, ἄγνυμι, ἐξ-εαγεῖσα κατ-εάξας 
κατ-εαγῶ κατ-εαγείς ; EIAQ, ἐεισάμενος ; εἴλω, ἐέλσαι ; ἝΩ, εἷσον εἴ- 
σας; ὠνέομαι, ἐωνηθῆναι. 


§ 94. 1. Some verbs beginning with ἄ, ε, o, fol- 
lowed by a single consonant, form the augment of 
the perfect by prefixing the first two letters of the 
root to the temporal augment. ‘This kind of aug- 
ment is called the Aftic reduplication. E. δ. 


ἀκούω perf. ἀκ-ήκοα 
ἐμέω “Ὁ ἐμ-ήμεκα, ἐμ-ήμεσμαι 
ὀρύσσω “ς΄ ὀρ-ὠρυχα;,υ, Φουγμαι 


See also ἀγείρω, ἄγω, αἱρέω, ἀκαχίζω, ἈΚΩ, ἀλάομαι, ἀλείφω, ἀλέω, 
ἀλυκτάζω, ANE@Q, ἀραρίσκω, ἀρέσκω, ἀρόω, ἐγείρω. ἔδω, ἐλαύνω, ἐλέγ- 
χω; ἑλίσσω, ἘΝΕΘΩ, ἐρείδω, epeixa, ἐρείπω, ἐρίζω, ἔρχομαι, ἔχω, 
ἡμῖν, ΟΔΥΩ, ὄζω, ὄλλυμι, ὄμνυμι, ὁράω, ὀρέγω, ὑφαίνω, φέρω, in the 

atalogue of Verbs. 
























§ 95.] AUGMENT, 123 


- 2. When the perfect takes the Attic reduplica- 
tion, the pluperfect takes no additional augment; as, 
ἀγείρω ἀγήγερκα, pluperf. . ἀγηγέρκειν.. 

Except ἀκούω, ἀραρίσκω, ἔἐλαύνω, ἐρείδω, ὄξω, ὄλλυμι, ὄρνυμι, which 
see in the Catalogue of Verbs. 

Note. -(a) The Epic forms ἀκάχημαι, ἀκαχμένος, ἀλάλημαι, dda- 
λύκτημαι, from ἀκαχίζω, ΑΚΩ, ἀλάομαι, ἀλυκτάξω, and the femi- 
nine participle ἀρᾶρυϊα, from ἃ ραρίσκω, do not lengthen the second 


syllable. The common perfect apapa, from ἀραρίσκω, merely length- 
ens the second syllable, 


(0) The Epic ἠρήρεισμαι and εἰλήλουθα, from ἐρείδω, ἔρχομαι, 
lengthen the first syllable, 


(c) The Epic form ἐρέριπτο from épeima, and the later ἐμεμέκειν 
om ἐμ έω, omit the temporal augment, 


(4) Aipéw and jude shorten the reduplication ; . thus ἀραίρηκα 

ἀραίρημαι, with the smooth breathing ; ὑπ-εμνήμυκε with ν inserted. 
(e) The perfect ἐγρήγορα, from ἐγεί p®, prefixes ἐγρ- to the tem- 

poral augment ; that is, it prefixes the root without the second e. 


(f) The perfect participle συν-οχωκώς, from ἔ x, changes ε into ο 
before it takes the Attic reduplication ; thus, ἔχω OXQ, wya, οχ-ωχα, 
ὄχωκα. 


(6) The perfeet ἀγήγοχα or ἀγήοχα, ἴτοτη ἄγω, comes from the re- 
duplicated theme ATATQ, 


AS 95. 1. Verbs compounded with a preposition 

receive the augmient after that preposition. 
Prepositions ending in a vowel lose that vowel 

efore the syllabic augment €; except περί and 

po. Eg. 

προσ-γράφω, προσ-έγραφον, προσ-γέγραφα, προσ-εγεγράφειν, προσ- 
έγραψα | 


> , ld 
ἀπο-κόπτω, ἀπ-έκοπτον, ἀπο-κέκοφα, ἀπ-εκεκόφειν, ἀπ-έκοψα 


So περι-γράφω περι-έγραφον περι-γέγραμμαι περι-εγεγράμμην περι- 
ράφην, προ-λέγω προ-έλεγον, ἐμπίπτω ἐνέπιπτον, ἐγκρίνω ἐνέκρινον 
κέκρικα, συλλύω συνέλυον συλλέλυκα, συζυμόω συνεζύμουν, ἐκλύω 


έλυσα. (§§ 14; 17.) 


2. Verbs compounded with εὖ and duc-, if they 
gin with a, ε; 0, take the augment after these 
articles ; in all other cases the augment precedes 
hem, or, in compounds with ev, it may be omitted 


194 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§ 96. : 


as, εὐαρεστέω, εὐηρέστουν εὐηρέστηκα ; δυσαρεστέω, δυ- : 
σηρέστουν δυσηρέστηκα. 
So εὐδοκιμέω ηὐδοκίμουν ηὐδοκίμηκα, δυστυχέω ἐδυστύχουν δεδυστή- , 


χηκα, δυσωπέω ἐδυσώπουν, εὐεργετέω εὐηργέτουν. So also dyrev- 
Tow ἀντευ-πεποίηκα, συνευ-πεπονθώς from πάσχω. 




















Note 1. The augment is regularly put after the preposition, even 
when the simple verb has no existence ; a8 ἀπολαύω ἀπέλαυον ἀπολέ- 
λαυκα, ἐγκωμιάζω ἐ ἐνεκωμίασα ἐγκεκωμίακα. 


: So ἐ ἐγχειρέω, ἐκκλησιάζω, ἐνθυμέομαι. ἐπιτηδεύω, κατηγορέω, Tapavo- 
μέω, προφασίζομαι, προφητεύω, συνεργέω. 

Ν ὉΤῈ 2. Some verbs take the augment before the preposition; 85 
ἀνοίγω ἤνοιγον. 

A few verbs take the augment before and after the preposition at the 
same time; as ἀνέχω ἠνειχόμην. 

See also ἀ ἀμπέχ @ ἀμφιάζω, ἀμφιγνοέω, ἀμφιέννυμι ἀμφισβητέω, a ἀνα- 
λίσκω, ἀνέχω, bropbbe, ἀντιβολέω, ἀφεύω, tdtage, διοικέω, ἐμπεδόω, 
ἐγγυάω, ἐμπολάω, ἐναντιόομαι, ἐνοχλέω, ἐ ἐπίσταμαι, καθέζομαι, καθεύδω, 
κάθημαι, καθίζω, μεθί ἴημα, παροινέω, προχειρίζομαι, mpwyyveva, ΤᾺ 
in the Catalogue of Verbs. 

Nore 3. Ex- τκλησιάζω may repeat ἐκ in the imperfect and aorist ; 
thus ἐξ-εκ-κλησίαζον, ἐξ-εκ-κλησίασα. 

Εγ- γυάω repeats ey-(év) i in the forms ἐν-εγ-γυώμην, ἐν-εγ-γύησα, 
ἐν-εγ-γυησάμην, ἐν-εγ-γεγυήμην. . 

Note 4. Διαιτάω and d:axovéw are augmented as if d:-, du 
were the ‘Preposition διά ; thus, διαιτάω, ἐδιήτησα δεδιήτη ἥτημαι διῃτώ ne 
διητήθην ; διακονέω, διδόναι δεδιηκόνηκα δεδιηκόνημαι ἐδιακονήθη 
(ᾧ 95, n. 2.) 

Note 5. Αμφισβητέω, derived from an imaginary verbal sub 
stantive in -yrns, compounded of ἀμφίς and βαίνω, takes the augmen 
before the preposition (§ 95, 7.2). Two of its forms, howeve 
namely, ἠμφ-εσβήτουν, ἡμῷ εσβήτησα, take the augment also afte 
ἀμφ-, as if the simple verb began with of-. 

Note 6. Verbs derived from compound nouns, the first component 
part of which is a noun, are augmented like simple verbs; as ἀσεβέ 


ησέβουν ἠσέβηκα. Except ἀριστοποιέομαι. ἱπποτροφέω μελοποιέω ; 
pans nts κα which see in the ibe Chtelagas of Verbs. Ὁ 





§ 96. 1. The present of some verbs, beginning with 
consonant followed by a vowel or a liquid, prefixes to the 
that consonant together with an 23; as Baw βιβάω Biman, TS 
τιτράω, TENQ γίγνομαι. ͵ 

(a) In a few instances, the present takes the reduplication of 
‘perfect ; as TPAQ rerpaivw. 


§ 97.] AUGMENT. | 125 


(b) Idyo and ἑέω ἴημι come from AXQ, ἝΩ, originally FAXQ, 
FEQ. (Compare ᾧ 93.) —Imrapa: and ἵστημι come from ΠΤΑΩ 
and STAQ. (Compare ᾧ 91, 2, n. 3.) 


(6) The reduplication of the present of some verbs is irregular; as 
δάπτω δαρδάπτω, καγχλάζω καχλάζω, κοχύω, λαλαγέω, μαιμάω, παι- 
φάσσω. i 


2. In a few instances the present prefixes ¢ to the root, which pre- 
fix has the appearance of the syllabic augment ; as θέλω ἐθέλω, ὁρτά- 
ζω ἑορτάζω. 

3. In a few instances the present seems to take the temporal aug- 
ment ; ἃ5 ἄγω ἡγέομαι. 

4, Sometimes the root of a verb takes the Attic reduplication, but 
without the temporal augment of the second syllable ; as AXQ AKA- 
ΧΩ ἀκαχίζω, 2 A. ἤκαχον. 

See also ἄγω, ἀλέξω, ἀπαφίσκω, ἀραρίσκω, ἔλελίζω, ἐνίπτω, ὄρνυμε, 
in the Catalogue of Verbs. 

Ατιτάλλω, ὀνίνημι, and ὀπιπτεύω, from ἀτάλλω, ONAQ, ΟΠ- 
ΤΗΣ, change the second vowel into ἐ after the Attic reduplicaticn. 


§ 97. Dialects. 


1. The Epic, A£olic, and Doric Poets often omit the augment; ex- Ὁ 
cept the syllabic augment of the perfect and pluperfect. ‘The Ionic 
prose-writers often omit the temporal augment. Εἰ. g. φέρω φέρον, 
τελευτάω τελεύτησα, λαμβάνω AdBov; ἀγορεύω ἀγόρευον, ἐργάζομαι 
ἔργασμαι, ὁμιλέω ὁμίλεον. 

he following verbs often omit the augment even in the Attic dia 
lect : ἀηθέσσω, dia, αὐαίνω, olaxoorpopew, dipole, olvdopat, οἰστρέω, 
οἴχομαι, οἰωνίζομαι. 

2. The Epic dialect lengthens ¢ in the reduplication into εἰ in the 
following verbs ; δείδω δείδοικα; δείκνυμι deideypar Seidexro δει- 
δέχαται δειδέχατο; di, to fear, δείδιμεν Sevdvia ἐδείδιμεν; εἴκω 
(Fetk@) εἰοικώς (Εειβοικως). The common εἴωθα (ΡειΕωθα), rom 
ἔθω, follows the same analogy. 


3. Some Epic forms beginning with a liquid, or 7, double that con- 
sonant after the augment e; as λαγχάνω ἔλλαχον, veiw ἐσσείοντο. 

See also δείδω, λαμβάνω, λείπω, λίσσομαι, μανθάνω, MEIPQ, véa, 
SEYQ, in the Catalogue of Verbs. 


4. In the Ionic dialect, the syllabic augment of the pluperfect is 
sometimes formed after the analogy of the imperfect ; as FL Set me 
ἐμηχάνωτο, παλλιλογέω ἐπαλλιλόγητο, in Hippocrates and Herodotus, 


δ. In the Epic dialect the second aorist active and middle some- 
times takes the reduplication of the perfect ; as κάμνω κεκάμω, φράζω 
πέφραδε. 

ee also δάκνω, AAEQ, to teach, θιγγάνω, θρώσκω, κέλομαι, κεύθω, 
λαγχάνω. λαμβάνω, λανθάνω, λάσκω, μάοπτω, πάλλω, πείθω, πλήσσω, 


126 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [88 98 -- 100. 


TALQ, ΤΕΜΩ, τέρπω, τιτρώσκω, τιτύσκομαι, τύπτω, φείδομαι, ΦΈΝΩ, 
χάζω, χαΐρω, in the Catalogue of Verbs. 

Κέλομαι, TEMQ, SENQ, and φράζω may take the syllabic aug- 
ment ε in addition to the reduplication ; thus κεκλόμην mnie τέ- 


τμον ἔτετμον, πέφνον ἔπεφνον, πέφραδον ἐπέφραδον. 


6. Ἐνίπτω and ἐρύκω take, in the second aorist, a kind of Attic 
reduplication at the end of the root ; thus ἠνίπαπον, npvxaxoy, Epic. 


FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 


The title, “ Formation or THE TeEwnsEs,” relates only to the first per- 
son singular of the tenses of the indication. For the inflection of the 
tenses in the other moods, see below. 


§ 98. 1. The root of a verb consists of those 
letters which are found in every part of that verb; 
as τιμάω, λέγω, μένω, roots τιμα-; λεγ-, μεν- 

2. Verbs are divided into pure, mute, and liquid, 
according as the root ends in a vowel, a mute 
(7,8, $3 κ, γ, X37 ὃ, θ, also ζ), or a liquid 
(A>, #5 ν, p); aS βουλεύω, a pure verb; λείπω, δέχομαι, 
mute verbs ; μέλω, ὀδύρομαι, liquid verbs. 


99. The root ofa pure verb is obtained by dropping ὦ or 

μαι of the present; as τιμά-ω, piré-@, ἀρνέτομαι. The root of a 

iquid verb may be obtained by dropping ὠς ova of the present, 
or ὦ of the future ; as μέν-ω, ddvp-opar, βάλλω βαλ-ῶ. 

The root of a mute verb may be obtained by dropping oa, 
ομαι of the present, ov, ony, nv of the second aorist, a of the 
second perfect; or from some kindred word ; as λέγ-ω, ἐ-τάγ-ην, 
ἅπτω ἁφ-ή, κρύπτω ἐ-κρύβ-ην κρύφ-α. 

§ 100. Very frequently, the root of a verb is, by the addition 
of one or more letters, strengthened in the present; for exam- 
ple, the roots of the presents μανθάνω, πυνθάνομαι, διδάσκω, πράσ- 
co are pavbav-, πυνθαν-. διδασκ-, πρασὸ-, but the roots of these 
verbs are ΜΑΘ-, ITY@-, AA-, ΠΡΑΓ-. For practical purposes, an 
© is often appended to the root of the verb when it is obscured 
in the present; in which case it is called the simple theme, or 
simple or imaginary present ; ‘thus, the simple themes of μανθά- 
veo, πυνθάνομαι, διδάσκω, πράσσω are MAGQ, ΠΥΘΩ, AAQ, ΠΡΑΓῺ. 

As a common rule, when the root is modified in the present, 
the other tenses, except the imperfect, are derived from the 








ὁ 101.] FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 127 


simple present ; for example, the perfect active of ἀγγέλλω is 
ἤγγελ-κα, from AITEA-, ATTEAQ. 


Ὁ 1. 1. Verbal roots are strengthened by the addition of 
, Z, 8, K, N, 2, 2K, Τί X; also by doubling A, ν, p, when they 
_ stand at the end of the root. 


~atv@ OF -ἄνω is often appended to roots ; as ἀλφαίνω, ὀσφραίνομαι, 
avfdve, ἀπεχθάνομαι, ixavw. So δεικ-αν-άω, icx-av-aw. — Not un- 
frequently a root is strengthened by annexing -avw (sometimes -a:- 
vw), and inserting ν before its last letter; as dvddve, μανθάνω, épvy- 
γάνω, λαγχάνω, λαμβάνω, (ᾧ 14.) 

-S@ is appended to the root of a few verbs; ἀμέρδω, δείδω, ἝΔΩ, 
AXEAQ, EAAAQ, BAAQ vado. 

-€LV@, IN ἀλε-είνω, ἐρε-είνω, φα-είνω. 

-€@ is not unfrequently appended to the root in the present; if the 
root ends in ἃ consonant, -ζω is preceded by a, ει; or v; as σχάζω, 
δακνάζομαι, ἀκαχίζω, κτίζω, ἑρπύζω. ----  πθ root of some primitive 
verbs in -ζω“6Π68 ἴῃ ὃ ; as ἕζομαε, ὄζω, φράζω. Here ὃ is changed 
into its kindred ᾧ (ὃ 10). In general however the root of verbs in 
τ-ζω ends in ¢; as ἐλπίζω, φωτίζτω, roots ελπεζ-, pori{-. — See 
also -σσω. 

@ is not unfrequently appended to the root; when the root ends in 
a consonant, -θῳ is commonly preceded by a, ε, or v; πελάθω, ἀλή- 
60, πλήθω, σήθω, ἔσθω (ἔδ-θω), φλεγέθω, ἠγερέθομαι, τελέθω, φθινύ- 
6. In this case, the present indicative in -a@q is not used; thus, 
αλκαθω, apvvabw, diwkabw, εεργαθω, εἰργαθω, epyabw, κιαθω are 
used only in the dependent moods and imperfect ; as ἀλκάθειν, ἀμυ- 
vabew, ἐδιώκαθον. 

“LVM, -LVE®, IN dp-iva, ἀγ-ινέω. 

-«@ is appended to the root of a few verbs ; as ἐρύκω, ὀλέκω. 

-AA@ comes from -λω by doubling A; as dyyéA-Aw, σφάλ-λω, Tir. 
So ὀλλύω ὄλλυμι, from OAQ, with v annexed to the root. 

vaw Or -νη μι, formed by inserting v before a; in which case, ε, in 
the first syllable of the verb, becomes ε ; thus, πιλνάω, κιρνάω, πέ- 
τνημι, σκίδνημι, κίδνημι, from meAdw, Kepdw, πετάω, SKEAAQ, KE- 
AAQ. But πέρνημι, κρεμνάω κρημνάω do not change ε into ε. 

-vew is sometimes appended to the root; as Buvéw, ἱκνέομαι, ἰσχνέ- 
oat. 

-»ν i from -v@ ; an Avolic peculiarity ; as κρίννω, for κρίνω. 

-v¥@ or -νυμι is often appended to the root; as ἄγνυμι, δαίνυμι, 
δέχνυμαι. If the root ends in a vowel, the ν is generally doubled ; 
further, o is lengthened into before v; as ἔννυμι (εἱνύω), ζώννυμι, 
τίνυμι τίννυμι. So κτίννυμι from KTENQ, with a change of ε into «. 

νὼ is often appended to the root; as κάμνω, δάκνω, κορθύνω, ἱστάνω, 
φθίνω. So πίτνω from UETQ, with a change of e into «. 

- ἔξω, in the present, comes from -κω or -ye, by annexing σ᾽ to the root ; 
thus, ἀλέξω, αὔξω, ὀδάξω. 

πτω, in the present, comes from -πω, -Ba, -pw, by annexing r to the 


198 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [$§ 102, 103. 


root; as τύπτω (πὶ), een (8), σκάπτω (p). For the euphonie 
changes see above (ᾧ 13, 

-ppo comes from -pe by doubling Pp; aS €p-pa, ἀέρ-ρω, inep-pa. This 
is an A¢olic peculiarity. 

-o yo, only in μέσγω, from MITO. ; 

‘oxo is, ina ew instances, formed by inserting o before -x or -x@; 
thus, ἀλύσκω, ἐΐσκω, Nike, τιτύσκομαι, δεδίσκομαι, διδάσκω. 

Roots, ending in a vowel, are very often strengthened, in the 
present, by ox; in which case the radical vowel i is often lengthened 
before ox; as βάσκω βιβάσκω, ἀρέσκω, πιπίσκω, βιβρώσκω, θνή 
“oxo, κικλήσκω. --- Πἰ the root ends in a consonant, ε is inserted be- 
fore ox; as ἁλίσκομαι, ἀμβλίσκω, εὑρίσκω ; also κυΐσκω. 

σσπω is formed by inserting o before w in the forms & ἕσπομαι, ἔσπετε, 
ἐνίσπ' a. 

-σσω οἵ-ττω, in the present, comes from -xa, -Ύω, or -y@, and some- 
times from -ra, -θω, oF -πω, by annexing σ to the root (ᾧ 13, 10) ; ; 
as μαλάσσω (x), gata (y), ταράσσω (χ) : λίσσομαι (τ), κορύσ- 
go (θ) : ἐνίσσω (π), ὄσσομαι (7), πέσσω (π). ---- Sometimes oo is 
ehanged into ¢; thus ἁρμόσσω ἁρμόζω, ἕλίσσω ἐλελίζω, βράσσω 
βράζω, συρίττω συρίζω, σφάττω σφάζω. In some verbs of this 
description -σσω is always changed into -ζω ; as ἁρπάζω (γ), ἀλαλά- 
ζω (γ), βρίζω, δαΐζω, ἐναρίζω, κλάζω (γ), κοΐζω, κράζω (y), λάζομαι 
(8), μαστίζω (γ), νίζω (β), οἰμώζω (γ), ὀλολύζω (γ), παίζω (γ, ὃ), 
pore (y), pelo (γ), nig (y), σταλάζω, στηρίζω, στενάζω (x), 
στ ζὼ ea ύζω, τρίζω @). — — A few roots ending in a vowel are * 

VY oo OF TT; as ἀηθέτσσω, ἀφά-σσω, ἀλύ-σσω. 

-σ et ω, aes in tox from ἔ ἔχω. : 

τῷ, in a few pure verbs ; ἀρύτω, avira. 

ὦ, rare ; νήχομαι, AIAAXQ, στεν-ά-χω with a inserted. 
@, in the present of ἕψω (ἔπ-σω). 


2. Some roots ending in a consonant are strengthened by in- 
serting v before that consonant; ENErKQ, MAAITQ, ΣΑΛΠΙΓΤῺ, 
ἘΝΠΩ. (§ 14.) 


§ 102. The radical vowel is often lengthened in the fol- 
lowing manner : 

@ into ἡ or at, sometimes into ἃ: as ΛΑΘΩ λήθω, ἀγάομαι ἀγαίομαι, 
ΦΑΝΩ φαίνω ἔφηνα, ΚΑΩ καίω κᾶω, ΠΡΑΓῺ πέπρᾶγα. In the aorist 
active of liquid verbs, and in the second perfect, it is commonly 
jengthened into η. 

€—et, commonly 1 ‘in liquid verbs; rarely into 7; as AMEPQ ἀμείρω, 
ΣΠΈΕΡΩ σπείρω ἔσπειρα, ENO ΕἸΠΩ, EQ εἰμί; μέλω μέμηλα. 

ἐπτ- εὶ; before a liquid intot; as ΑΛΊΦΩ ἀλείφω, ΛΙΠΩ λείπω, ΤΙΛΩ 
ἔτιλα, ΚΛΙΝΩ κλίνω ἔκλινα. 

o—ov; ΑΚΟΩ ἀκούω, βόλομαι βούλομαι. 

v—e; before a liquid into i; ΦΥΓῺ φεύγω, ΚΥΘΩ κεύθω, AISXYNQ 
αἰσχῦνω. 


§ 1063. 1. When the radical vowel of a dissyllabic liquid 





§ 104.] FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 129 


verb is ες it is changed into a in the perfect, pluperfect, aorist 
passive, future passive, second aorist, and sometimes in the 
present, future active, and aorist active. This commutation 
takes place also in dissyllabic mute verbs when ε is preceded 
or followed by a liquid. E. g. 

στέλ-λω, ἔσταλκα ἔσταλμαι, ἐστάλθην, ἐστάλην 

τρέπω τράπω, τέτραμμαι, ἐτράφθην, eis ἐπρόπην 

See also δέρκομαι, δέρω, δρέπω, εἴλω, κείρω, κτείνω; λέπω, πείρω, 
πέρθω, πλέκω, σπείρω, στρέφω, τέμνω, μείρομαι, τέρπω, τρέφω, τρέχω, 
in the Catalogue of Verbs. 

The following retain the e in the second aorist : TENQ, EAQ, EPO- 
MAI, θείνω, θέρομαι, λέγω, to collect, crepéw, τέμνω,; τέρσομαι, φλέγω. 


2. When the radical vowel of a verb ise, it is regularly 
changed into o in the second perfect, and sometimes in the per- 
fect, and second aorist active ; as, 

δέρκομαι δέδορκα, TENQ γέγονα, στέργω ἔστοργα 

κλέπτω κέκλοφα, πέμπω πέπομφα, πλέκω πέπλοχα 

μείρομαι ἔμμορα μεμορμένος ἔμμορον 

See also ΑΝΈΘΩ, ἔλπω, ἐ ἐγείρω, ἘΝΈΘΩ, ἕρδω, ἐσθίω, input, λαγχά 
VO, λέγω, to collect, ΛΈΧΩ, MENQ, ξυν-νεφέω, πάσχω, chs oe στρέ- 
φω, τίκτω, τρέπω, τρέφω, τρέχω, φέρβω, φέρω, χέζω, in the Catalogue 
of Verbs. 

(a) In some verbs, the ε of the diphthongs es and ev becomes o in 
the perfect ; see δείδω, EIAQ, εἴκω, EAEYOQ, λείπω, πείθω, in the 
Catalogue of Verbs. 

(b) N ot unfrequently the radical vowel ε is changed into w; as 
AEPQ dwpro, πλέω thaw. Most commonly, however, ε becomes o, ὦ; 
and ew, aw are annexed to the root; as στρέφω στρωφάω. 


3. Sometimes ε is changed into Rt as ἕζομαι ἵζω, ἝΩ tw, ἔχω 
ἴσχω. 

4. Sometimes the radical vowel a is changed into o or ὦ; as 
μηχανάομαι, ἀτιμάω, Tonic pluperfect ¢ ἐμηχάνωτο, ἠτίμωτο, imply ing 
-dopat, -d@ 3 fd (oo, TPATQ “τρώγω. 

See also ἄγω, ἁμαρτάνω, πάσχω, in the Catalogue of Verbs. 

ΑΥ̓ΡΩ changes a into o in the forms ἀπ-ούρας ἀπ-ουράμενος. 


§ 104. 1. Roots are very often prolonged by annexing e, 
sometimes a or 9, rarely t or v, to their last letter; as αἴδομαι 
αἰδέομαι, ἰσχάνω ἰσχανάω, ‘AAQ ‘AAOQ, ἔσθω ἐσθίω, a ἄνω avio. 

Particularly in the Ionic dialect, verbs in @ are not unfre- 
quently inflected after the analogy ‘of verbs in ea ; 3 aS ἀγόμενος 
dyedpevos, βάλλειν βαλλέειν, σχέθειν σχεθέειν, βαλλόμενος βαλλεό- 
μενος, δύνουσι δυνέουσι, achqin ee pedpevos. 


6* 


190 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§§ 105-107. 


So ciyee, eee, ὥφλεε, Ἰοηΐο for εἶχε, fre, ὦφλε, from ἔχω, ero, 
ὀφλισκάνω. 

2. When the root is thus prolonged, the radical vowel ε is 
very often changed into o. The Poets may further change it 
into ὠς and then prolong the root by annexing a to it; as APE- 
MQ δρομάω δρωμάω ; πέρθω πορθέω. 

3. When a root contains two consonants without an inter- 
vening vowel, it may be prolonged by inserting a short vowel 
between those consonants; thus, ENIIQ ἐνέπω ἘΝΙΠΩ, θράσσω 
ταράσσω, TINY πινύσκω. 


105. 1. Sometimes the root is syncopated ; in which 
vase, monosyllabic roots lose their vowel; dissyllabic and poly- 
syllabic roots most commonly drop their last vowel ; as ἀγείρω 
ἀγρόμενος, TENQ γίγνομαι. 


See also ἀλέξω, € ἐγείρω, ἔρχομαι, κέ ἔλομαι, κεράννυμι, μίμνω. πελάω, 
πε ἔλω, πιπράσκω, πετάω, ἵπταμαι, πέτομαι, πίπτω, ἕπω, ἔχω, TAAAQ, 
τίκτω (for τίτ-κω), ΤΕΜΩ, ΦΈΝΩ, in the Catalogue of Verbs. 

2. In some verbs the root undergoes a metathesis ; as δέρκο- 
μαι ἔδρακον ἐδράκην. 

See also ἁμαρτάνω, βάλλω, ἄμορφον Brooke, Sauda, δέμω, θνή- 


σκω, θρώσκω, καλέω, κάμνω, μείρομαι, μέλ @, πέρδομαι, πέρθω, ΠΟΡΩ, 
ΣΚΕΛΛΩ, τέμνω, στρώννυμι, τέῤπω, τιτρώσκω. 


§ 106. New themes are sometimes formed from the per- 
fect active, and second aorist, by changing a, ον, ouny into a, 
ομαι ; aS γίγνομαι γέγαα, New present yeydopar; AAEQ δέδαα, de- 
δάομαι. 

So ἐ ἐγείρω ἐγρήγορα, ἐγρηγοράω, yenyopew, both 1 prolonged ; 3 ἵστημι 
ἕστηκα, στήκω ; τέμνω τέτμηκα, τμήγω. So also type (ἧκα), ἥκω ; ἴω 
(ἷκα) tke. , 

X§ 107. The last vowel of the root of a pure 
verb, if short, is lengthened in all the tenses, ex- 
cept the present and imperfect. 

In this case, a is lengthened into η: when how- 
ever it is preceded by ε, 4, or p, it is only “fog | 
ened. E. g. 


τιμάω τιμήσω ἐτίμησα τετίμηκα τετίμημαι ne eo 
eo φιλήσω ἐφίλησα πεφί ληκα πεφίλημαι ἐφιλήθη 
nido δηλώσω ἐδήλωσα δεδήλωκα δεδήλωμαι ἐδηλώθην 





§ 108.] FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 131 


- τίω Tlow erica τέτϊκα τέτιμαι 

δακρύω δακρύσω ἐδάκρῦσα δεδάκρῦκα δεδάκρῦμαι 

ἐάω ἐᾶσω εἴασα εἴᾶκα εἰᾶθην 

ἰάομαι ἰᾶσομαι ἰᾷσάμην 

δράω δρᾶσω ἔδρᾶσα δέδρᾶκα δέδραμαι 

Note 1. Ακροάομαι, θοινάω, ITAOMAI, πελάω (ΠΛΑΩ), and ποινάο- 
μαι, do not change a into ῃ ; as ἀκροάσομαι, θοινάσομαι, πάσομαι. ἐπλά 
θην, ποινάσομαι. --- ἸΤίμπρημει (IIPAQ), τιτράω (TPAQ), χράω χράομαι, 
change ἃ into ἡ ; as πρήσω, ἔτρησα, χρήσομαι. ---- -Ἕω, to place, has F. 
εἴσομαι. Θέω (τίθημι), to put, has Perf. τέθεικα, τέθειμαι. 

yNorz 2. Many pure verbs retain the short radical vowel through all 
the tenses ; as, ν 

γελάω γελᾶσω ἐγέλᾶσα, καλέω καλέσω ἐκάλεσα. 

See also ἄγαμαι, AEQ, ἀηθέσσω, ἀκέομαι, ἀκηδέω, ἀλέομαι, ἀλέω, ἄλ- 
θομαι, ἀμφιέννυμι, ἀντιάω, ἀνύω, ἀραρίσκω, ἀρέσκω, ἀρκέω, ἀρόω, ἀρύω, 
ἀφύω, ἄχθομαι, βδέω, γελάω, δαίνυμε, δαίομαι, εἰμί, ἐλαύνω, EAYQ, ἔν- 
νυμι, ἔραμαι, ἐράω, ἐρύω, ἐσθίω, ζέω, θλάω, ἱλάσκομαι, καλέω, κεράννυ- 
μι, κλάω, κοτέω, κρεμάννυμι, λοέω, μαίομαι, μεθύσκω, ναίω, νεικέω, ξέω, 
ὄλλυμι, ὄμνυμι, ὄνομαι, ὄρνυμι, πατέομαι, πετάννυμι, πιπράσκω, πτύω, 
σκεδάννυμι, σπάω, στορέννυμι, TAAAQ, τανύω, τελέω, τρέω,. φθίω, 
χαλάω, χέω, in the Catalogue of Verbs. é 


Note 3. The quantity of the last radical vowel of some pure verbs 


is variable ; as, 
αἰνέω, αἰνέσω, αἰνήσω, ἤνησα, ἥνεκα, ἤνημαι, ἠνέθην 
See also AAQ, ἀγρέω, αἰδέομαι, αἰνέω, aipéw, ἀκαχίζω, dio, ἀφάω 
Baive, γαμέω, δέω, to bind, δίδωμι, δύναμαι, δύω, εἰρύω, ἕλκω. ἐμέω, 
εὐνάω, εὑρίσκω, εὐτυχέω, ἔχω, κήδω, κορέννυμι, λύω, μάχομαι, νέμω, ὄξω, 
ὀνίνημι, πεινάω, πίμπρημι, πινύσκω,. πίνω, ποθέω, πονέω, PEQ, tu say, 
ῥύομαι, σβέννυμι, στερέω. τίθημι, ΦΈΝΩ, φημί, φθάνω, φθονέω, φορέω, 
in the Catalogue of Verbs. 
Present and Imperfect. | 
§ 108. 1. All verbal forms are, in practice, re- 
ferred to the present indicative. 
For example, ἔμαθον, ἐλείφθην, ἔσφηλα, are, in parsing, said to 
come from μανθάνω, λείπω, σφάλλω.. 
2. To form the present passive, drop ὠ of the 
present active, and annex ομαι ; as βουλεύω βουλεύ 
ομαι. 


_ 8. To form the imperfect active, drop of the 
present, annex ov, and prefix its augment; as βου 
λεύω ἐβούλευον. 


192 {NFLECTION OF WORDS. [ζ 109. 


4. ‘To form the imperfect passive, drop ova: of 
the present, annex oun, and prefix its augment; as 
βουλεύω, βουλεύομαι ἐβουλευόμην. 


Future and Aorist Active and Middle. 


§ 109. 1. To form the future active, drop ὦ of 
the present, and annex cw; as βουλεύω βουλεύσω. 

So τιμάω τιμήσω, καλέω καλέσω, ἌΣ πλέξω, γράφω γράψω, ἄδω 
ave, ἐλπίζω ἐλπίσω, σπένδω σπείσω. (δὲ 107; 13.) So also also κράζω 
(KPATQ) κράξω, βλάπτω (ΒΛΑΒΩ) βλάψω, πράσσω (ΠΡΑΓῺΩ) πράξω, 
πλάσσω (ΠΛΑΘΩ) πλάσω. (ᾧ 101.) 

2. To form the future active of a liquid verb, 
annex ew, contracted ὦ, to the root ; as μένω pevew 

ὦ, kabaipw καθαρέω καθαρῶ. 

ee κρίνω κρινῶ, ἀμύνω ἀμυνῶ, φαίνω φανῶ, κτείνω κτενῶ, ἀγγέλλω 
ἀγγελῶ, στέλλω στελῶ, σπείρω σπερῶ. (δῷ 100 -- 103.) 

3. To form the future middle, drop of the 
future active, and annex ovat; as ᾿βουλεύω βου- 
λεύσω βουλεύσομαι ; ; ἀμύνω ἀμυνέω ἀμυνέομαι Ccon- 
tracted ἀμυνοόῦμαι. - 


Nortel. (a) Futures in doo and εσω, from verbs in aa, ato, ew, 


ofien drop o, and are contracted like verbs in aw and ew. The Attic 


dialect uses only the contracted form. E. g. 

ἐλαύνω, βιβάζω, F. ἐλάσω ἐλῶ, BiBacw βιβῶ 

δικάζω, τελέω, F. δικάσω δικῶ, τελέσω τελέω τελῶ 

The future middle, in this case, is contracted chiefly in ἐμέω ἐμέσο- 
μαι ἐμοῦμαι, κολάζω κολάσομαι κολῶμαι, μάχομαι μαχέσομαι μαχέομαι 
μαχοῦμαι. : 

(b) In a few instances, dow, ὡσω seem to be contracted into ὦ ac- 
eording to the preceding analogy ; thus, δράω, ἐρημόω, δέομαι, F. δρά- 
ow dpa, ἐρημώσετε ἐρημοῦτε, δεησόμεθα Seovpeba. 

(c) In the Epic dialect, AAEQ (AAQ), to teach, ἐρύω, to draw, 
KEIO or KEQ, ¢o cause to lie down, and τανύω, to stretch, drop the σ 
in the future ; thus, F. δήω, I shail find, ἐρύσω ἐρύω, κείω or κέώ, 1 
shall lie down., τανύσω τανύω. 


Note 2. Futures in too, from verbs in ζω, drop ow and annex 
€o, which is always contracted into @; that is, iow ίσομαι becume ἐῶ 
ιοῦμαι, δος Segre ely ; as, 

οἰκίζω. I. οἰκίσω οἰκιῶ, οἰκίσομαι οἰκιοῦμαι 


φροντίζω, I. φροντίσω φροντιῶ φροντιοῦμαι 


— 





ᾧ 110.) FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 133 


Nore 3. (a) Some mute verbs form the future middle after the 
analogy of liquid verbs ; thus, καθέζομαι καθεδοῦμαι, μανθάνω μαθεῦμαι 
Dorie for μαθοῦμαι, τίκτω τεκοῦμαι, τρίβω συν-τριβεῖται. 

(0) ‘The following form the future middle without the characteristic 
ao: ἔδω (SATO), to eat, F. ἔδομαι, φάγομαι, I shail eat ; πίνω, to drink, 
ἘΝ πίομαι, 1 shall drink. 

_ ΒΥ ἔδομαι, πίομαι, the later Greeks said ἐδοῦμαι; πιοῦμαι, formed 
according to the preceding analogy. 

(c) The future δράμομαι, for δραμοῦμαι, from τρέχω (APEMQ), is 
formed after the analogy of ἔδομαι. 


§ 110. 1. To form the aorist active, drop ὦ of 

e present, annex ca, and prefix its augment ; as, 
βουλεύω ἐβούλευσα. : 

So τιμάω ἐτίμησα, γελάω ἐγέλασα, καλέω ἐκάλεσα, πλέξω ἔπλεξα, 
γράφω ἔγραψα, dda joa, ἐλπίζω ἤλπισα, σπένδω ἔσπεισα. (δὺ 107; 


13.) So also βλάπτω (ΒΛΑΒΩ) ἔβλαψα, πράσσω (IIPATQ) ἔπραξα, 
πλάσσω (ΠΛΑΘΩ) ἔπλασα. (ᾧ 101.) 


ΧΩ. To form the aorist active of a liquid verb, an- 
nex a to the root, lengthen the radical vowel, and 
prefix its augment 5 as κρίνω ἔκρῖνα, στέλλω ἔστειλα. 


So ἀμύνω ἤμῦνα, τίλλω ἔτϊλα, σπείρω ἔσπειρα, μένω ἔμεινα, σφάλλω 
ἔσφηλα, φαίνω ἔφηνα, καθαίρω ἐκάθηρα. (ᾧ 102.) 


. 3. To form the aorist middle, drop a of the aorist 
active, and annex ἀμην; as βουλεύω, ἐβούλευσα ἐβου- 
λευσάμην : κρίνω, ἔκρινα ἐκρινώμην. 


ANore 1. These three verbs, δίδωμι, τέθημι, and inpe, take κα 
instead of oa in the aorist; thus, ἔδωκα, ἔθηκα ἐθηκάμην, ἧκα ἡκάμην. 


Nore 2. Some verbs do not take σ in the aorist; as ἀλέομαι or 
᾿ ἀλεύομαι ἠλεάμην or ἠλευάμην. See also δατέομαι, καίω, SEYQ, de- . 
po, χέω, in the Catalogue of Verbs. 


Nore 3. Ina few instances, the aorist annexes gov, σόμην to the 
root, that is, it is inflected after the analogy of the second aorist. See 
ἄγω, ἀείδω, Baiva, δύω, iko, AEXQ, ὄρνυμι, πίνω, πίπτω, φέρω, χέζω. 
in the Catalogue of Verbs. 


Nore 4. Verbs in -μαίνω and -paiveo lengthen the radical vowel 
into ἃ ; aS πιαίνω émiava, περαίνω ἐπέρᾶνα, ἐπικραίνω ἐπέκρανα. Also 
the following : ἰσχναίνω toyvava, κερδαίνω ἐκέρδᾶνα, κοιλαίνω ἐκοίλᾶνα, 
λευκαίνω ἐλεύκᾶνα, ὀργαίνω ὥργᾶνα, πεπαίνω ἐπέπᾶνα. But τετραίνω 
ἐτέτρηνα ἐτετρηνάμην, μιαίνω ἐμίηνα rarely ἐμίᾶνα. 


194 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§ lll 


Note 5. The radical vowel of αἴρω and ἅλλομαι becomes ἡ only 
in the indicative, in consequence of the augment; in the other moods 
it is merely lengthened ; thus αἴρω ἦρα ἄρω ἄραιμι ἄρον ἄρας, ἠράμην 
ἄρωμαι ; ἅλλομαι, ἡλάμην ἅλωμαι. 

Νοτεθ. In later Greek, verbs in -αίνω and -αίρω often lengthen 
the radical vowel into ἃ ; as σημαίνω ἐσήμᾶνα, kabaipw éxabapa, ἐχθαί- 
p® ἤχθαρα, paiva ἔφᾶνα. 

Note 7. The aorist in -yva, -npa, from verbs in -aive, -aipa, is 
often written -yva, -ypa, with iota subscript, as if ac were changed into 
7- But this is incorrect, first, because the aorist of liquid verbs comes 
from the root; secondly, because in ancient inscriptions it is written 
without this x; thus, ἐπ-έκρᾶνε, ἀν-έφηνε, καθηράντων, Kat-Gpat ἐπ-άρῃ 
ἐπ-άρας, ἦρε aparo. 

Nore 8. The future and aorist of some liquid verbs are formed after 
the analogy of other verbs; that is, by annexing oa, oa to the root ; 
as, ματα . κέρσω, A. ἔκερσα. See also ἀείρω, ἀέρρω, ἔρρω, ἀραρί- 
σκω, εἴλω, ἐλαύνω, θέρομαι, κέλλω, κύρω, μείρομαι, ὄρνυμι, τείρω, φθεί- 
pw, dupe, in the Catalogue of Verbs. 


Perfect, Pluperfect, and Aorist and Future Passive. 


§ 111. 1. To form the perfect active, drop o 
of the present, annex «a, and prefix its augment ; 
as βουλεύω βεβούλευκα. - 

So τιμάω τετίμηκα, Go ἧκα, πείθω πέπεικα, ἐλπίζω ἤλπικα. (δὲ 107, 


13, 8.) ὅ850 also ἀγγέλλω ἤγγελκα, φαίνω πέφαγκα, καθαίρω κεκάθαρ- 
ka, στέλλω ἔσταλκα, σπείρω ἔσπαρκα. (δ 100; 101; 103; 14.) 


2. To form the perfect active of mute verbs 
whose root ends in a labial (7, 8, φ) or a palatal 
(x, yx), drop of the present, annex a, change 
the preceding smooth or middle mute into its cor- 
responding rough mute (¢, vy), and prefix its aug- 
ment; ¢ and y of course remain unchanged ; as 
τρίβω τέτριφα, πλέκω πέπλεχα. 
ἃ 10 γράφω γέγραφα, ῥίπτω ἔρριφα, τεύχω τέτευχα, πράσσω πέπραχα. 
3. To form the perfect passive; drop » of the 
present active, annex μαι; and prefix its augment ; 
as βουλεύω βεβούλευμαι. 


§ 111.} FORMATION OF THE TENSES. , 135 


So τιμάω τετίμημαι, ἀνιάω ἠνίᾶμαι, πλέκω πέπλεγμαι, λείπω λέλειμμαι, 
πείθω πέπεισμαι, χωρίζω κεχώρισμαι, σπένδω ἔσπεισμαι. ($$ 107; 
13; 14.) So also ἀγγέλλω ἤγγελμαι, αἰσχύνω ,ἤσχυμμαι, καθαίρω 
κεκάθαρμαι, αἴρω ἦρμαι, στέλλω ἔσταλμαι, σπείρω ἔσπαρμαι. ($$ 100; 
103 ; 14. 


4... To form the pluperfect active, drop a of the 
perfect, annex ew, and prefix its augment; as βου- 
λεύω βεβούλευκα ἐβεβουλεύκειν. 


5. To form the pluperfect passive, drop μαι of 
the perfect passive, annex μὴν; and prefix its aug- 
ment; as βουλεύω βεβούλευμαι ἐβεβουλεύμην. 


6. ‘To form the aorist passive, drop ω of the pres- 
ent active, annex θην, and prefix its augment; as 
βουλεύω ἐβουλεύθην. 


So τιμάω ἐτιμήθην, πλέκω ἐπλέχθην, λέγω ἐλέχθην, ali ἐλείφθην, 
πείθω ἐπείσθην, χωρίζω ἐχωρίσθην. ($$ 107; 13.) So also ἀγγέλλω 
ἠγγέλθην, φαίνω ἐφάνθην, αἰσχύνω A phd oe καθαίρω ἐκαθάρθην, αἴρω 

ἤρθην ; στέλλω ἐστάλθην. (δῷ 100; 103.) 


7. To form the future passive, drop θην of the 
aorist passive, annex θησομαι, and reject the aug 
ment ; as βουλεύω ἐβουλεύθην βουλευθήσομαι. 


Notre 1. (a) The following mute verbs change ε into a in the per- 
fect passive; στρέφω ἔ ἐστραμμαι, τρέπω τέτραμμαι, τρέφω τέθραμμαι. 
The Ionic dialect changes it also in the aorist ; thus ἐστράφθην, ἐτρά- 
φθην. (ὃ 103.) Tpéma has also perfect active τέτραφα. 

(0) In some instances the radical vowel ε becomes ο; rarely ὠ, in the 
perfect and pluperfect ; as κλέπτω κέκλοφα ἐκεκλόφειν. (ὃ 103, 2. ) See 
also deipw, δείδω, ἔ ἔχω, ἴημι, λαγχάνω, AEXQ, μείρομαι, ξυννεφέω, πέμ- 
πω, πλέκω, στρέφῳ, τίκτω, τρέπω, φέρω; in the Catalogue of Verbs, 

(c) "Ayo and πάσχω change the radical a into o in the forms ἀγή- ᾿ 
voxa Or ἀγήοχα; πέποσχα. (ᾧ 103, 2, b.) 

Note 2. When, in the perfect passive, yy or pp would come te 
stand before pat, μεθα, the combinations yyp, μμμ become Yes μμ: for 
the sake of ‘euphony ; ; as ἐλέγχω ἐλήλεγγσμαι ἐλήλεγμαι, κάμπτω κέ- ᾿ 
καμμ-μαι κέκαμμαι. 

When pp would come to stand after a consonant, it drops one p; 
τέρπω τέτερμ-μαι τέτερμαι. 

Note 3. Ina few instances, the linguals δ, Θ remain unchanged 


΄"Ὥ 


136 : INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§ 112. 


before μ; as KAAQ, κέκαδμαι κορύσσω, κεκόρυθμαι, in Homer; πυκά- 
ζω πεπύκαδμαι, in Sappho. 


Note 4. Many pure verbs, especially such as do not lengthen the 
radical vowel, insert o before pat, μεθα, μένος, and ται of the perfect 
passive, and before θην of the aorist passive ; as τελέω, τετέλεσμαι 
τετελέσμεθα ἘΣ τὸ τ τ ont. τετέλεσται; ἐτελέσθην. 


See also AAQ, ἄγαμαι, αἰδέομαι, ἀκούω, ἀλέω, ἄλθομαι, ἀμφιέννυμι, 
ἀνύω, ἀρέσκω, ἀρύω, ἄχθομαι, βαίνω, Bodo, Bvéw, γελάω, γιγνώσκω, 
δαίνυμι, δαίομαι, δέω, Spdw, δύναμαι, εἰρύω, ἐλαύνω, EAYQ, & ἕννυμι, ἔδω, 
ἝΩ, to seat, ζέω, ζώννυμι, θλάω, θραύω, ἱλάσκομαι, καλέω, κελεύω, κε- 
ράννυμε, κλαίω, κλάω, to break, κλείω, to shut, κληΐω, κναίω, κνάω, κο- 
λούω, κορέννυμι, κρεμάννυμι, κρούω, κυλίω, λεύω, to stone, μάχομαι, με- 
θύω, μιμνήσκω, ναίω, νέω, E€a, οἴομαι. ὄμνυμι, ὄνομαι, παλαίω, πατέο- 
μαι, παύω, πετάννυμι, πίμπλημι, πίμπρημι, πιπίσκω, πλέω, πνέω, πρίω, 
πτύω, ῥαίω, ῥώννυμι, σάω, to sift, σβέννυμι, σεΐω, σκεδάννυμι, σπάω, 
στορέννυμι, τανύω, τίνω, ὕω, φέρω, φλάω. φλύω, φρέω. χαλάω, χόω, χρά- 
ομαι, χράω, χρίω, χώννυμι, Ψαύω, in the Catalogue of erbs. 

Nore 5. (a) The following verbs in va drop v in the perfect ac- 
tive and passive, and aorist passive; κλίνω, κέκλικα κέκλιμαι ἐκλίθην ; 

ίνω, κέκρικα κέκριμαι ἐκρίθην ; πλύνω, πέπλυκα πέπλυμαι ἐπλύθην. 
‘The P he Poets however often retain the y in the aorist it pasnive 5 thus ἐκλίν- 
θην, expivOny, ἐπλύνθην. 

(0) The perfect drops the » also in a few other verbs in y@; aS Kep- 
δαίνω κεκέρδακα, βραδύνω ἐβεβραδύκειν, τραχύνω τετράχυμαι. 


Note 6. Some verbs in vo drop ν before the endings μαι, μεθα, 
μενος, of the perfect passive, and insert σ᾽ ; as φαίνω πέφασμαι πεφά- 
opeba πεφασμένος. 


So σημαίνω σεσήμασμαι -opeba -σμένος, περαίνω πεπέρασμαι -σμεθα 
-σμένος, ῥαίνω ἔρρασμαι, παχύνω πεπάχυσμαι, μολύνω μεμόλυσμαι, λυ- 
μαίνομαι λελύμασμαι, μιαίνω μεμίασμαι, ὑφαίνω ὕφασμαι. ---Ξηραίνω 
has ἐξήραμμαι and ἐξήρασμαι. 


Nore 7. In the following forms, the perfect takes the characteristic 
of the aorist : ἴσᾶσι, εἴξασι, γεγράψαται (Tabul. Heracl.), for 
Waar, cixact, γεγράφαται, from IAQ, εἴκω, γράφω. 


Future Perfect. 


§ 112. 1. To form the future perfect active, 
drop a of the perfect, and annex co, which may 
assume the middle form σομαι; as θνήσκω, τέθνηκα 
τεθνήξω or τεθνήξομαι. 

See also δείδω, ἵστημι, κήδω, κλάζω, κράζω, χαίρω, in the Catalogue 
of Verbs. 


2. To form the future perfect passive, drop a of 


§ 113.] FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 137. 


the second person singular of the perfect passive, 
and annex ομαι ; as βλάπτω, βέβλαψαι βεβλάψομαι. 


See also βάλλω, βιβρώσκω, γράφω, δαμάω, δέχομαι, δέω, to bind, δη- 
λόω, θάπτω, καλέω, κλαίω, κλείω, κόπτω, ,“κρύπτω, κτάομαι, λαμβάνω, 
λανθάνω, λέγω, λείπω, λύω, μίγνυμι, μιμνήσκω, ΠΑΟΜΑΙ, παύω, πίμ- 
πρημι, πιπράσκὼ, πλήσσω, ποιέω, πράσσω, ΡΕΩ, to say, σιγάω, σκο- 
πέω, τανύω, τάσσω, τέμνω, τεύχω, τιμάω, τρέπω, φάω, PAQ, to kill, 


φιλέω, φύρω, χολόω, χράομαι, in the Catalogue of Verbs. 


Nore 1. The future perfect of δείδω, «nda, and κράζω, inserts ἡ 
before ow, after the analogy of verbs in ew; further, the future per- 
fect of κήδω retains the radical vowel ; thus, δεδοικ ἡ σω, κεκἄδ-ή-σο: 


μαι, κεκραγήσω. 
Nore 2. The future perfect of δέω, τεύχω, and AQ, imply a per 


fect passive in -npat, ~evypat; thus, δέω, δέδεσαι SeBporopiar': ; τεύχω, 
τέτυξαι τετεύξομαι ; PAO, πέφᾶσαι i τὸς τῶν 


Second Aorist, Second Perfect and Pluperfect, and Second 
Future Passive. 


4113. Some primitive verbs form their aorvst, 


erfect and pluperfect active, and future passive, by 
annexing the following endings to the root : 


Aorist Active τον; a8 λείπω ἔλιπον, τέμνω ἔτεμον 
Aorist Passive την; as λείπω ἐλίπην, φλέγω ἐφλέγην 
Aorist Middle -dpnv; as λείπω ἐλιπάμην 
Perfect Active -a; as λείπω λέ λοιπα, πράσσω πέπρᾶγα 
Pluperfect Active τειν; . as ἐλελοίπειν, ἐπεπράγειν 

- Future Passive -ἡσομαι; as λείπω λιπήσομαι 


These tenses are commonly designated by the numeral second, in 
order that they may be distinguished from the regular tenses of the 
same name, which commonly are designated by the term first. 

For practical purposes, the second pluperfect may be formed by sim- 
ply changing a of the second perfect into ev; the second future pas- 
sive, by changing ny of the second aorist passive into ἡσομαι. 


A list, of verbs in which these tenses are found :  ἀγγέλλω, ἀ ἀγείρω, 
ἄγνυμι, ἄγω, αἱρέω, αἴρω, αἰσθάνομαι, ἀκαχίζω, ἀκούω, ἀλείφω, ἀλέξω, 
ἀλιταίνω, ἀλλάσσω, ἅλλομαι, ἀλφαίνω, ἁμαρτάνω, a ἀμπέχω, ἀμπλακίσκω, 
ἁνδάνω, ΑΝΕΘΩ, ἀνοίγω, ἀνώγω, ἀπαφίσκω, ἀραρίσκω,. ἀριστάω, ἁρπά- 
ἕω, βαίνω, βάλλω, Barro, BAPEQ, βιβρώσκω, βλάπτω, βλαστάνω, 
βλώσκω, βούλομαι, ΒΡΑΧΩ, βρέχω, βρίϑω, BPOXQ, γεγωνίσκω, γηθέω, 
γίγνομαι, γλύφω, γράφω, AAEQ, δαίω, δάκνω, δαμάω, δαρθάνω, δει- 
πνέω, δέρκομαι, δέρω, δίδωμι, ΔΙΚΩ, δίω, δουπέω, δρέπω, δύω, ἐγείρω, 
ἔθω, Ἐ1ΔΩ, εἴκω, εἴλω, ἘΙΠΩ, ἔλπω, ἐναίρω, ἘΝΈΘΩ, ἐνέπω, ἐνίπτω, 

12* 


. 198 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ὃ 114. 


ἐπαυρίσκομαι, ἕπω. ἕρδω, ἐ ἐρείκω, ἐρείΐπω, ἘΡΟΜΑΙ, ἔρχομαι, ἐρυγγάνω, 
ἐρύκω, ἐσθίω, εὑρίσκω, ἔχω, ζεύγνυμι, θάλλω, θάπτω, ΘΑΦΩ, ,θείνω, 
θέμομαι, θιγγάνω, θλίβω, θνήσκω, θρύπτω, θρώσκω, ἱκνέομαι, ἵστημε, 
καίω, κάμνω, ΚΑΦΕΩ, “κείρω, κέλομαι, κεύθω, κήδω, κιχάνω, κλάζω, 
κλέπτω, κλίνω, κλύω. κόπτω. κορέννυμι, κοτέω, κράζω, KPIZQ, sap 
κτείνω, KTUTE@, λαγχάνω, λαμβάνω, λάμπω, Sekine: λάσκω, λέγω, ἴθ 
««οἰϊοοί, λείπω. λείχω, λέπω, λίσσομαι, μαίνομαι, μανθάνω. μάρπτω, μάσ- 
σω, MAQ, μείρομαι, pedo, μένω, μηκάομαι, μίγνυμι, μύζω, μυκάομαι, 
οἴγω, ὀλισθαίνω, ὄλλυμε, ὁ ὁράω,, ὄρνυμε, ὀρύσσω, ὀσφραίνομαι, ὀφεί λω, 
ὀφλισκάνω, πάλλω, πάσχω, πείθω, πείρω, siphon πέρθω, πέτομαι, 
πήγνυμι, πίνω, πίπτω, πλέκω, πλήθω, πλήσσω, πν ω, ΠΟΡΩ, πράσσω, 
πτάρνυμαι, πτήσσω, πτύρομαι, πτύσσω. πτύω. πυνθάνομαι. ῥάπτω, ῥέω, 
ῥήγνυμι, ῥιγέω, pinta, σαίρω, 2EYQ, σήπω, σκάπτω. ΣΚΕΛΛΩ, σμύχω, 
σπείρω, στείχω, στέλλω, στέργω, στερέω, στρέφω, στυγέω, σύρω, σφά- 
ζω, σφάλλω, TATQ, TAAAQ, τάσσω, τέμνω, TEMQ, τέρπω, τέρσομαι, 
τήκω, TIEQ, τίκτω, τιτρώσκω, τιτύσκομαι, τίω, τμήγω, τορέω, τρέπω, 
τρέφω, τρέχω, τρίβω. τρίζω, τρώγω, τυγχάνω, τύπτω, τύφω, SATO, 
φαίνω, φείδομαι, ΦΈΝΩ, φέρβω, «φέρω, φεύγω, φθείρω, ΦΛΑΖΩ, φλέ- 
γω, φλίβω, φράζω, φράσσω, φρίσσω, φρύγω, φυλάσσω, dion, dia, 
χάζω, χαίνω, χαίρω, χανδάνω, χέζω, XAAZQ, χλιδάω, XPAISMEQ, 
ψύχω, which see in the Catalogue of Verbs. 


Note 1. Some of these verbs have also the regular form of the 
aorist, perfect, pluperfect, and future passive; but, as a general rule, 
when the second aorist, perfect, pluperfect, and future passive are used, 
the > regular forms are of rare occurrence ; thus, the usual aorist of ἄγω 
is ἤγαγον, the regular ἦξα being little used. 


Note 2. The perfects dedna, μέμηνα, σέσηρα, πέφηνα, from δαΐω, 
μαίνομαι, σαίρω, and φαίνω, are often written with an iota sub- 
script ; thus, dedya, μέμηνα, σέσῃρα, πέφῃνα. But as they come from 
the roots AA-, MAN-, SAP-, @AN-, this iota should he omitted. (Com- 
pare § 110, x. 7.) 


§ 114. Dialects. 


{. (a) The Doric forms the future generally by. annexing to the 
root - :σέω, middle -σεόμαι, which are generally contracted into - σῶ, 
-σούμαι OF - σεύ μαι, and the future then is inflected throughout like 
contract verbs in €@ ; as οἰκοδομέω, F. (οἰκοδομησέω) οἰκοδομησῶ, F. M. 
(οἰκοδομησεόμαι) οἰκοδομησούμαι or οἰκοδομησεύμαι. So ἀπογράφω, 


. ἀπογραψῶ, inf. ἀπογραψέν. 
‘The Attic makes use of this Doric future i in the verbs θέω, to run, 


νεύω. κλαίω. παίζω, πίπτω, πλέω, πνέω, πυνθάνομαι, χέζω, which see 
in the Catalogue of Verbs. — The future χεῶ, from χέω, is the Doric 
future without the o. 


(b) Not unfrequently the Doric changes -σέω, — into -cia, 
-σιόμαι; a πράσσω, βοηθέω, προλείπω, φυλάσσω, F. πραξίω, Bo- 


πθησίω, προλειψίω, φυλαξίω. 
(6) The Dorians sometimes formed the future passive by simply 


§ 115.] 2 PERSONAL ENDINGS. 139 


changing -ny of the aorist into -σω ; thus, δειχθησοῦντι, συναχθησοῦν- 
τι, φανήσειν, ὠατωθήσω, from δείκνυμι, συνάγω, paive, QATOQ. 


2. (a) The future of liquid verbs is inflected throughout like verbs in 
ew. Its uncontracted form is lonic and Epic; as κτείνω, Ionic future 
κτενέω, Attic κτενῶ. 


(0) The Doric may change -ἔω into -ἰω in the future of liquid 
verbs ; as ἐμμένω, ἀναγγέλλω, I. ἐμμενίω, avayyehio. 


3. (a) The Doric often conjugates verbs in ζω, and sometimes verbs 
in a, as if the root ended ink; as ὁρκίζω, δοκιμάζω, χαριζόμαι, ἐγδι- 
kalo, ἐργαζόμαι, F. ὁρκιξέω, δοκιμάξω, χαριξιόμαι, ἐγδικαξούμαι, épya- 
ξούμαι : σῴζω, γελάω, φθάνω, A. ἔσῳξα, ἐγέλαξα, ἔφθαξα. So κρα- 
τηρίζω ἐκεκρατηρίχην, νομίζω νενόμιγμαι, πορίζω ἐπορίχθην, θλάω τέ- 
θλαγμαι. 


(b) In the Doric dialect, some verbs in ew are conjugated as if the 
root ended in a; as φωνέω havace, πτοέω ἐπτοᾶθην, φιλέω πεφίλᾶκε, 
ὠνέομαι ὠνασείται. 


(c) In the Ionie dialect, verbs in aw are sometimes conjugated as if 
the root ended in o or w; aS ἀτιμάω, μηχανάομαι, Plup. ἠτίμωτο, 
ἐμηχάνωτο. 


4, The Poets, except the Attic Poets, often double the o of the 
future and aorist after a short vowel; as τελέω τελέσσω ἐτέλεσσα, 
ἀνύω aviccopa ἤνυσσα, δικάζω ἐδίκασσα. 


PERSONAL ENDINGS AND CONNECTING VOWELS. 


§ 115. 1. The letter or letters which are pecu- 
liar to a tense are called the characteristic of that 
. tense; thus, Σ΄ is the characteristic of the aorist and 
future active and middle; E, of the future active 
and middle of liquid verbs; OE, OH, E, or H, of 
the aorist passive ; K, of the perfect and _pluper- 
fect active; OH, HX, of the future passive. 


2. That which denotes the person and number 
of a verbal form is called the personal ending; thus, 
- μεν is the personal ending of λέγτ-ο-μεν ; -τε, of 
λέγ-ε-τε. 


3. The following table exhibits the personal 
endings of the indicative. 


140 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§ 115 


Primary Tenses. 

Active, ΄ 
Person. Ist. 2d. 3d. 
Singular. μὲ σι, s, σθα τι, σι 
Dual. τς τον τον 
Plural. pes, pev τε ντι, vTes, νθι, 

= vol, vi, Got 

Passive and Middle, 

Person. Ist. 2d. 3d, 

Ss . μαι σαι, αι ται 

Dual. (pe8ov) σθον σθον 

Plural. μεθα, μεθεν,μεσθα σθε vrat, Gras 
Secondary Tenses. 

Active. 

Person. Ist. 2d. 3d. 

Singular. ν s, 76a — 

Dual. — . «τον τᾶν, τὴν 

Plural. pes, μεν τε σαν, v 
Passive and Middle. 

re. Ist. 2d. 3d. 

ingular. pay, μὴν 0,0 TO 
Dual. ~ σθον σθᾶν, σθην 
Plural. μεθα, μεσθα σθε ντο, aTo 


-p is found in the indicative of verbs in μὲ; in the Epic subjunctive 
active ; and in the optative active. In the secondary tenses, and in 
the optative active of verbs in μὲ, the element μ᾿ becomes ν, and ε is 
dropped. In the greatest number of verbs this ending is dropped. — 
The endings pes, μεν, pat, pay, μην, peda, μεσθα, μεθεν, peOov are 
modifications of -μι. 

-σι of the second person is found only in the Epic ἐσσί, thou art, 
from the root ES- ; in all other cases it becomes -s, which is some- 
times strengthened by 6a.— The endings re, τὸν, σαι, σθε, σθον, 
co, σθαν, env are modifications of σι, oa. 

-τι Doric, -o. common, found in verbs in με, and in the Epic subjunc- 
tive active. Inthe greater number of verbs it is dropped; as ἔλεγε 
for ἐλέγεττι. ---- The endings ταν, την, ται, ro are its modifications. 

-ντι Doric, -yo« common, formed from rx by prefixing ν. Its modifi- 
eations are vrai, vTo, aTat, aro. 

-cay, a modification of vax, is found in verbs in μὲ; in the pluperfect 
active ; aorist passive; and-in the imperfect, second aorist, and opta- 
tive, of some Beeotic forms. 


Nore. The personal endings are fragments of personal pronouns ; 
thus, the endings beginning with M are modifications of p-od, p-oi, 
μέ, ἡ-μεῖς ; those beginning with Σ and T come from o-v, τού, ΤΌΣ, 
ré. It is evident therefore that, in G:eek, the pronoun is annexed to 
the root; as Aéyo-pev, we-say, héye-re, you-say, λέγο-ντι, thee * 


a να 


§§ 116, 117.] PERSONAL ENDINGS. "141 


§ 116. The vowel which stands between the 
personal ending and the root or characteristic of a 
verbal form is called the connecting vowel. In the 
first person of all the numbers, and in the third 
person plural of the indicative, it is an o; in all the 
other persons of the same mood, it is ane. Ex- 
cept that, 

(a) The connecting vowel of the perfect active, and aorist active and 


middle, is ana. But in the third person singular of the perfect and 
of the aorist active it is an e. 


(b) The connecting vowel-sound of the pluperfect active is ane. In 
the third person plural it is an εἰ or ε. 


(c) The present and future active lengthen o into in the first per- 
son snguist, and ε into εἰ in the second and third person singular, 


117. 1. The following table exhibits the personal end- 
ings and the connecting vowels of the indicative, united. 


Present and Future. 





Active. Passive, 
P=) Ist 2d. 3d. Ist. 2d. 3d. 
Ss. @ εἰς ει ομαι εαι, ἢ, εἰ εται 
Ὥ. -- ετον ετὸον — εσθον εσθον 
P. ope ere ovat (ovat) | opeba εσθε ovTat 
Imperfect and Second Aorist. 
Active. Middle. 
S. ον ες ε, ομην €0, OV €TO 
DR — ετον ετὴν -- εσθον εσθην 
P. ομὲεν ετε ov ομεθα εσθε ovTo 
Aorist. 
Active. Middle. 
a as € αμην ao, ὦ ατὸ 
DL -- ατον ατην ασθον ασθη; 
P. ἀἂμὲεν arte αν αμεθα ασϑε αντο 
Perfect Active. Pluperfect Active, 
a as € ew , εἰς ει 
- ατον ατον — εἰτον εἰτὴν 
αμεν = are Gow (ανσι) | εἰμεν εἰτε εισαν; εσὰν 


2. The subjunctive takes the terminations of the primary 
baie of the indicative, but lengthens the connecting vowels ὁ, 


ε into @, η, respectively. 


112 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§ 117. 


Active, | Passive and Middle. 
5S. @ ns n pat nat, ἢ ηται 
D. τον τον ησθον ησθον 
Ρ. ὡμὲεν ne wot (@vor) | ὠμεθβα node ὠνται 


3. The optative takes the personal endings of the secondary 
tenses of the indicative. 

(a) But the first person singular of the optative active takes -μι, and 
the third person plural ends in -ev. 


(b) For its connecting vowel-sound the optative has o:; but in the 
aorist active and middle it has at. 





Active, Passive and Middle. 
S. ome ots ot οἰμην ovo otro 
D. οἶτον οιτὴν οισθον ova Onv 
P. oimev ore οιεν οἰμεθα οισθε owTo 

Aorist Active. Aorist Middle. 

S. aye as at atpny ato aiTo + 
D. αιτον αἰτην αισθον avo Onv 
P. ame aire atey αιμεθα αισθε αιντο 


_(e) The optative active has also the following endings : 
4 S. qv, ns, 9, D. τὸν, nrqv, P. ἡμεν, ητε, noav. 
These endings are found in the second perfect and second aorist of 
a few verbs in @; in contract- verbs ; in the future of liquid verbs ; 
and in verbs in ps; as πείθω πεποιθοίην, φεύγω πεφευγοίην, ἔρχομαι 
ἐληλυθοίην ; ἔχω σχοίην, ὄλλυμι ὀλοίην ; εἴρω ἐροίην, φαίνω φανοίην. 
4. The first of the following tables exhibits the personal 
endings of the imperative; the second and third exhibit the 
personal endings and the connecting vowels (e, a, o) united. 





Active. Passive and Middle, 
2d. 3d. 2d. 3d. 

πῶ To ~ g0,0 cba 

Ὦ, τον τῶν σθον σθων 

Pee τωσαν, ντων, σθε σθωσαν, σθων, 

ντω, VTOV σθω, σθον 

Ss ε €T@ €0, ov ecb 

D. ετον €T@V eo Gov εσθων 

Ρ. ee ετωσαν, οντων εσθε εσθωσαν, εσθων 

Aorist Active. Aorist Middle. 

Ss. op aT@ at ασθω 

D. ατον ατων ασθον ασθων 

P. are ατωσαν, avTev ασθε ασθωσαν, ασθων 


θι is used only when the connecting vowel is omitted ; as κέκραχεοθι, 
ἔστ 01, ἴσ-θι, φά-θι, δίδω-θι.. 


§ 118.] PERSONAL ENDINGS. 143 


5. The original endings of the infinitive active are -μεναι; 
“μεν. In the Attic dialect the endings and connecting vowels 
are as follows : 

Present, Future, and Second Aorist Active, e:-v 


Perfect Active, ᾿ ; ; ~ é-vat 
Aorist Active, . ὦ . "a 
Passive and Middle, . < ε-σθαι 
Aorist Middle, > . . . α-σθαι 


6. The root of the active participle ends in vr, preceded by 
o; in the aorist active, preceded by a. Inthe perfect active, the 
root ends in τ preceded by o. Ἢ 

In the passive and middle, the participle ends in -pevos pre- 
ceded by o; in the aorist middle, preceded by a. 


Nore 1. In the dual of the secondary tenses of the active, τὸν 15 
sometimes used for την, and τὴν for τον; thus, δεώκετον, λαφύσσετον, 
and perhaps τετεύχετον, for διωκέτην, λαφυσσέτην, τετευχέτην, in the 
Iliad. On the other hand, εἰπέτην, ἐπεδημησάτην, ἤστην, ἐλεγέτην, ἐκοι- 
νωνησάτην, for εἴπετον, ἐπεδημήσατον, ἦστον, ἐλέγετον, ἐκοινωνήσατον; 
are found in Plato ; ἠλλαξάτην for ἠλλάξατον 1 (Eurip, Alc. 672.) . 

Note 2. The dual has no first person; consequently, when two 
persons speak, they use the first person plural. 

In a few instances, however, the passive uses the ending -μεθον 
when two persons speak. Thus, περι-δώμεθον (1). 23, 489), λελείμ- 
peOov (Soph. El. 950), ὁρμώμεθον (Id. Ph. 1079) ; συντριβησόμεθον 
(Athen. 3, 19), ἀπολούμεθον (Id. abid.). 

Note 3. (a) The aorist active and middle, in a few instances, takes 
the connecting vowels of the second aorist; ἃ5. πίπτω ἔπεσον, βαίνω 
ἐβησόμην. See also ἄγω, ἀείδω, δύω, ikw, AEXQ, ὄρνυμι, πίνω, φέρω, 
χέζω, in the Catalogue of Verbs. 

(b) On the other hand, the second aorist sometimes takes the con 
necting vowels of the aorist ; 85. ΕἸΠΩ εἶπα, εὑρίσκω εὑράμην. See 
also aipéw, AYPQ, δέρκομαι, EIAQ, ὀσφραίνομαι, φέρω, in the Cata- 
logue of Verbs, 

Nore 4. In the second perfect of Baiva, γίγνομαι, and ἵστημι, the 
feminine participle ends in -ὥσα (for -ονσα) ; as βεβαῶσα, yeyadoa, 
ἑστεῶσα, contracted βεβῶσα, yeyaoa, ἑστῶσα. This is, properly 
speaking, a Doricism. 

Nore 5. The imperfect few of εἶμι (EIQ), to go, takes the end- 

ings of the pluperfect. δ 


§ 815. Dialects. 


1. Indicative Active. 


εἰς, 2 pers. sing. of the present and future, Doric -es, as συρίσδες, 
dpedyes : Atolic -era Oa, as ἔχω ἔχεισθα. 


144 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [δ 118 


aS 
~pev, 1 pers. plur. of all the tenses and moods, Doric “pes, as εὑρί 
σκομες, ἀπεστάλκαμες., κατετάμομες, ἐκβαλοῦμες. 
τουσι, 3 plur. of the present and Suture, Dorie -οντι, as ἔχοντι ἑξοῦν- 
τι (ἑξέοντι) : Cretan - τονι, τοντες, aS ἔχω ἔχονι, διεξάγω δειξάγοντες : 
lic -ovot, aS ἐμμενέοισι, οἰκήσοισι. 
«ἄσι, 3 plur. of the perfect, Doric -avrs, as ἀνατίθημι ἀνατεθέκαντι : 
Cretan -ayres, as ἀπεστάλκαντες: Beeotic -av 61, as ἀποδίδωμι ἀπο- 
δεδόανθι : Alexandrian -ἄν, as ἔοργαν, εἴρηκαν, πέφρικαν, ἀπέσταλ- 
καν, ἐλήλυθαν. 
τον, 3 plur. of the imperfect and second aorist, Beotic -οσαν, as ἐσχά- 
ζοσαν. δολιόω ἐδολιοῦσαν (ἐδολιόοσαν), Pub Goiend: εἴδοσαν, used chief- 
ἘΜῈ in the Septuagint. 
v, 3 pers. dual of all the secondary tenses and of the optative, 
ric -τᾶ ν, a8 ἐποησάτᾶν. 


(a) In the following Ionic forms, the imperfect takes the connecting 
yowel of the aorist : €a or ἦα, éas, plur. ἔατε, ἔασαν, from εἰμί ; fia or 
ἦα, from εἶμι ; ἐτίθεα, from τιθέω. Further, during the iron age οὗ 
the language, -ἄσιε was used for -ov (-av) ; as, 3 pers. plur. ἐτιθέασι, 
for ἐτίθεον or rather érideay, from τιθέω. 


(0) The Ionic dialect inflects the singular of the pluperfect after — 
the analogy of the aorist ; that is, it USES ~€a, τεᾶς, ~€€, which the 
Attic contracts into τη, της, τῇ (Ό; ; as χαίνω, Ionic ἐκεχήνεα ἐκεχήνε- 
ας ἐκεχήνεε, Attic ἐκεχήνη ἐκεχήνης ἐκεχήνη (1). The ending -εε of 
the third person singular may become -eev, contracted -exy, rare'y 
την: thus, πεποίθειν, ἑστήκειν, βεβλήκειν, δεδειπνήκειν, qoew Or ἤδην. 
— Herodotus has pluperf. 2 pers. plur. συνῃδέατε for συνήδειτε. 


(c) When an action is repeated, the Ionic (both the old and new) 
uses the iferattve endings σκον, σκόμην, which, in the imperfect, and 
second aorist active and middle, are preceded by ε:; in the aorist active © 
and middle, bya. When, however, the root ends in a vowel, these 
endings are, in the imperfect, commonly annexed without e. They 
are used only in the indicative, and appear without the augment. As 
to eumciarietg they follow the analogy of the common imperfect. E.g — 


ἀνοίγω, € δ 





ἀναοίγεσκον, ἕρδεσκον 





ΕἼΠΩ, εἴκω --- εἴπεσκον, εἴξασκεν 

ἐρύω, δαίομαι — ἐρύσασκε, δασάσκετο 

ἀγινέω, καλέω -- ἀγίνεσκον ; ; καλέεσκον Or Κάλεσκον, καλέσκετο ' 
πωλέομαι, ῥύομαι ------ πωλέσκετο, ῥύσκεο ῥύσκευ 


In ἃ few instances, these endings are preceded by a even in the 
imperfect ; thus, γοάασκον (γόασκον), δρομάασκον, κρύπτασκον, ναιετά- 
ασκονς πεδάασ. KOV, ῥίπτασκον, ἀνασ σ: εἶασ. KOV. 

(d) According to the ancient grammarians, some of the branches 
of the Doric dialect inflected the perfect and pluperfect indicative active 
after the analogy of the present and imperfect respectively ; as πεποιή- 
xo, δεδοίκω, ὀλώλω. (Compare the endings - εἰν, -nv, των, of the 
perfect infinitive and participle.) 

The Epic dialect follows this analogy in the forms ἀνήνοθεν, ἐδείδιεν, 
ἐνήνοθεν, μέμαεν, ἐμέμηκον, apnpev, ἐπέφῦκον, and perhaps πέπληγον OF 





§ 118.] PERSONAL ENDINGS. 145 


ἐπέπληγον, τετεύχετον, from ANE®Q, diw, ἘΝΈΘΩ, MAQ, μηκάομαι, 
ἀραρίσκω, φύω, πλήσσω, τεύχω. 


2. Indicative Passive and Middle. 


τμεθα, 1 plur. of all the tenses and moods, Poetic -μεσϑα, as λεγό- 
μεσθα: Molic -μεθεν, as λεγόμεθεν, φερόμεθεν. 

“μὴν, 1 sing. of all the secondary tenses and of the optative, Doric 
“Pay, aS ἐμπορευόμαν, ἀνειλόμαν, γενοίμαν. 

σντο, 8 plur. of the imperfect passive and middle and second aorist mid- 
dle, Ionic -aro. In this case the connecting vowel becomes ε ; in 
pure verbs, however, -aro is appended to the root, E. 8. ἐγραφέ- 
ατο, ἐσινέ-ατο, ἐμηχανέτατο. Ὁ 


3. Subjunctive, 

τῷ, 1 sing., Epic -@ με, as τύχωμι, ἐθέλωμι. 

“ns, 2 sing., Epic -y 0a, as τύχῃσθα, ἐθέλῃσθα. 

τῇ», 3 sing., Epic -ῃσι, as τύχῃσι, ἐθέλῃσι : AXolic, Thessalian, and 
Doric -εἰ; as ἀρτύσει, ἀποθάνει, δόξει. Even the Attic and Ionic 
sometimes used -εἰ for -ἢ ; as ἐξέλθει, εἴπει, ἐπιψηφίσει, κατάξει, 
ἐκκόψει, ποιήσει, found in inscriptions. 

ot, 3 plur., Beotic -ωνθιε, as tov, for favre, ἔωσι, from εἰμί. 

The Epic may, for the sake of the metre, use the connecting vow- 
els of the indicative, ο, ε, for , 9; as ἐρύξομεν, ἴομεν, φθίεται, for ἐρύ- 
ξωμεν, ἴωμεν, φθίηται. 

XA Optative.. 

τοέμιε, 1 sing., very rare τοῖν, with the personal ending ν of the his- 
torical tenses ; thus, τρέφοι-ν ; also ἁμάρτει-ν (1) in Suidas, 

ows, 2 sing., Afolic and Epic -οεσθα; as χαίροισθα, κλαίοισθα. 

ποίην, 1 sing., Aolic - όη ν, rare, λαγχάνω λαχόην. 

“εν, 3 pers. plur., Beotic - σαν, as παρέχοισαν, εἶπα εἴπαισαν : Elean 
-αν, a8 ἀποτίνω ἀποτίνοιαν. 

“at pt, ~ats, -αι, plur.-acuer, -acey, of the aorist active, Aolic -eva, 
“tas, ~ece, plur. -erpev, -evay, which, with the exception of -eca, 
~€tmev, are common to all the dialectS. ~ “<> 

-otvro, 3 plur. opt. passive and middle, Ionic -ecare, as yevoiaro, 
κεχαροίατο, ὀψοίατο. 

γαιντο, 3 plur. aor. mid. opt., Ionic ~alaro, a8 ἀρησαίατο, φρα- 
σαίατο. 

5. Imperative. 
τῶν, 3 pl. imperative active, Cretan -ντω, as παρεχόντω, ἐόντω, 
ἀποστειλάντω, ποιούντω: Aolic -yro v, a8 φέροντον, φυλάσσοντον. 
σθων, 3 plur. passive and middle, Cretan -¢ θω, as μισθούσθω, κρι- 
νέσθω, ἐγδανειζέσθω: ΚΠ οἸϊα -o 6 ον, aS ἐπιμέλεσθον, from ἐπιμέλε- 
μαι. 
6. Infinitive. 

“εἰν, “nic -έμεναι, -έμεν, as πινέμεναι πινέμεν, ἐλθέμεναι ἐλθέμεν 3 
Beotw and Thessalian -é μεν, a8 πινέμεν: AXolic -yv, as πένῃην, 
ἔλθην : Doric -ev, as πῖνεν. 

7 


146 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§ 119. 


- ety of the second aorist, Ionie -éerv, as βαλεῖν βαλέειν, ἰδεῖν ἰδέειν : 
Dorie -év, as ἐλθέν. 

-evat of the perfect active, Aolic -ν, as τεθνάκην, ἐπιτεθεωρήκην : 
Doric -ῆμεν, -erv, as πεφυτευκῆμεν, πεπρωγγυευκῆμεν, γεγονειν, ἀμ- 

βατήκειν, γεγᾶκειν, ἁλώκειν. The endings -ny, -ew are borrowed 
om the present. (Compare 1, d.) 
7. Participle. 

-ovoa, the feminine of -ων, Doric and Beotic-@#aa, as idea for ἐοῦ- 
σα, from εἰμί : Cretan and Argive -ovca, as ὑπάρχονσα : Laconian 
τωὰ (-wha), as κλέωἁ for κλέουσα: AMolic -o1c a, as ἔχοισα. 

-as, τᾶσα, of the aorist active, Molic -ais, -asoa, as δισκήσαις, δι- 
σκήσαισα. , 
-ὡς of thé perfect active participle, olic - ὦ ν, the same as in the pres- 

ent, as dev mebey rat, πεπ κων. (Compare I, d, and 6.) 
-via, the feminine of the perfect active participle, Doric -oica, -eia, 

aS μεμενακοῦσα, ἀνεστακοῦσα, ἐπιτετελεκεῖα, ἑστακεῖα, συναγαγοχεῖα, 

ἐρρηγεῖα. 
Second Person Singular Passive and Middle. 

8. The original persona] endings of the second person singular pas- 
sive and middle are-g@as,-co. In the present, future, imperfect, and 
aorist, they drop σ and, in the Attic dialect, are then contracted with 
the connecting vowel. The optative merely drops ¢. The uncontract- 
ed forms belong to the A®olic and Ionic dialects. E. g. 

Pres. λέγεσαι λέγεαι, later Attic λέγῃ, early Attic λέγει ; subj. λέγη- 
σαι λέγηαι λέγῃ ; Opt. λέγοισο λέγοιο ; imperat. λέγεσο λέγεο 
λέγου. rs 

Fut. λέξεσαι λέξεαι, λέξῃ λέξει ; λεχθήσεσαι λεχθήσεαι λεχθήσῃ οἱ 

~ λεχθήσει ; opt. λέξοισο λέξοιο ; λεχθήσοισο λεχθήσοιο. 

Imp. ἐλέγεσο ἔλέγεο ἔλέγου 

Aor. ἐλέξασο ἐλέξαο ἐλέξω ; subj. λέξησαι λέξηαι λέξῃ ; Opt. λέξαισο 
λέξαιο. , 

The full ending -a az is found in some forms belonging to the later 
Greek ; as φάγεσαι, πίεσαι, καυχᾶσαι, ddvvaca, in the Septuagint and 
New Testament ; κοιμᾶσαι, in Hierocles. 


CONTRACT VERBS. 


119. Pure verbs in aa, ew, and ow are con- 
tracted by the Attics in the present and imperfect ; 
as τιμάω τιμῶ, to honor, φιλέω φιλῶ, to love, δηλόω 
δηλῶ, to manifest. 


The uncontracted form is inflected like βουλεύω. The conwracted 
form is inflected according to the following examples. 








ᾧ 119] 


S. 


Indicative Active 


S. τιμῶ 
τιμᾷς 
τιμᾷ 





τιμᾶτον 
τιμᾶτον 
Ρ, τιμῶμεν 
τιμᾶτε 
τιμῶσι 


te 
S. ἐτίμων 
ἐτίμας 


39 
ἐτίμα 





ἐτιμᾶτον 
ἐτιμάτην 
Ρ, ἐτιμῶμεν 
ἐτιμᾶτε 
ἐτίμων 


Subjunctive Active. 


S, τιμῶ 
τιμᾷς 
τιμᾷ 


τιμᾶτον 
τιμᾶτον 
Ρ, τιμῶμεν 
τιμᾶτε 
τιμῶσι 


πο ἀρ 
τιμτῷς, -ῴης 
τιμεξῷ, -ῴη 





a ’ 
ΤτΤιμτῷτ. OY, “@nTOV 


τιμ-ῴτην, -φήτην 


CONTRACT VERBS. 


Present. 
φιλῶ 
φιλεῖς 
φιλεῖ 





φιλεῖτον 
φιλεῖτον 
φιλοῦμεν 
φιλεῖτε 
φιλοῦσι 


Imperfect. 


ἐφίλουν 
ἐφίλεις 
ἐφίλει 





ἐφιλεῖτον 
ἐφιλείτην 
ἐφιλοῦμεν 
ἐφιλεῖτε 
ἐφίλουν 


φιλῶ 
φιλῇς 
φιλῇ 


φιλῆτον 
φιλῆτον 
φιλῶμεν 
φιλῆτε 
φιλῶσι 





Optative Active. 


φιλ-οῖμι, -οίην 
dir-ois, -οίης 
φιλ-οἵ, -οίη 





φιλ-οἴτον, -οίητον 
φιλ-οίτην, -οιήτην 


147 


δηλῶ 
δηλοῖς 
δηλοῖ 





δηλοῦτον 
δηλοῦτον 
δηλοῦμεν 
δηλοῦτε 
δηλοῦσι 


ἐδήλουν 
ἐδήλους 
ἐδήλου 


— -. 


᾿ ἐδηλοῦτον 


ἐδηλούτην 
ἐδηλοῦμεν 
ἐδηλοῦτε 
ἐδήλουν 


δηλῶ 
δηλοῖς 
δηλοῖ 





δηλῶτον ᾿ 
δηλῶτον 
δηλῶμεν 
δηλῶτε 
δηλῶσι 


δηλ-οἶμι, -οιην 
δηλ-οῖς, -οίης 
δηλ-οἵ, -οἰίη 





δηλ-οῖτον, 
δηλ-οίτην, 


-οίητον 
Ld 
-οιἰήτην 


148 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§ 119. 


P. τιμ-ῷμεν, -ῴημεν φιλ-οῖμεν, -οίημεν δηλ-οῖμεν, -οίημεν 


τιμτῷτε, -ἕητε φιλ-οἴτε, -οίητε dyA-oire, -οίητε 
τιμτῷεν, -ῴησαν φιλ-οῖεν, -οίησαν δηλ-οῖεν, -οίησαν 


Imperative Active. 


S. 2 τίμα φίλει δήλου 
3 τιμάτω φιλείτω δηλούτω 
D. 2 τιμᾶτον φιλεῖτον δηλοῦτον 
3 τιμάτων φιλείτων δηλούτων 
Ρ, 2 τιμᾶτε φιλεῖτε δηλοῦτε 
3 τιμάτωσαν, φιλείτωσαν, δηλούτωσαν, 
τιμώντων φιλούντων δηλούντων 
Infinitive Active. Participle Active. 
τιμᾶν φιλεῖν δηλοῦν τιμῶν φιλῶν δηλῶν 


Indicative Passive and Middle. 








Present. 

S. τιμῶμαι prodpar 
Tie φιλ-ῆ, -εἴ 
τιμᾶται φιλεῖται 

D. 
τιμᾶσθον φιλεῖσθον 


τιμᾶσθον φιλεῖσθον 
P. τιμώμθα ο᾽ φιλούμεθα 
τιμᾶσθε φιλεῖσθε 


τιμῶνται φιλοῦνται 
Imperfect. 
ἐτιμῶ ἐφ 
ἐτιμᾶτο ἐφιλεῖτο 
D. 
ἐτιμᾶ ἐφιλεῖσθον 
ἐτιμάσθην ἐφιλεί 
P. ἐτιμώμεθα ἐφιλούμεθα 
ἐτιμᾶσθε ἐφιλεῖσθε 
ἐτιμῶντο ἐφιλοῦντο 


δηλοῦμαι 
δηλοῖ 
δηλοῦται 





δηλοῦσθον 
δηλοῦσθον 


δηλούμεθα 
δηλοῦσθε 


- δηλοῦνται 


ἐδηλούμην 
ἐδηλοῦ 
ἐδηλοῦτο 


ἐδηλοῦσθον 
ἐδηλούσθην 
ἐδηλούμεθα 
ἐδηλοῦσθε 


ἐδηλοῦντο 








§ 119.] 


CONTRACT VERBS. 


Subjunctive Passive and Middle. 


5. 


D. 


5. 2 
3 


D.2 
3 


P. 2 


3 τιμάσθωσαν, 
τιβάσθων 


τιμῶμαι 
τιμᾷ 


τιμᾶται 





τιμᾶσθον 
τιμᾶσθον 


τιμώμεθα 
τιμᾶσθε 
τιμῶνται 





φιλῆσθον 
φιλῆσθον 
φιλώμεθα 
φιλῆσθε 

φιλῶνται 


δηλῶμαι 
δηλοῖ 
δηλῶται 





δηλῶσθον 
δηλῶσθον 


δηλώμεθα 
δηλῶσθε 
δηλῶνται 


Optative Passive and Middle. 


τιμῴμην 
τιμῷτο 





τιμῷσθον 


τιμῴσθην 


τιμῴμεθα 
τιμῷσθε 
τιμῷντο 


φιλοίμην 
φιλοῖο 
φιλοῖτο 





φιλοῖσθον 


φιλοίσθην - 


φιλοίμεθα 
φιλοῖσθε 
φιλοῖντο 


δηλοίμην 
δηλοῖο 
δηλοῖτο 





δηλοῖσθον 
δηλοίσθην 


δηλοίμεθα 
δηλοῖσθε 


᾿δηλοῖντο 


Imperative Passive and Middle. 


τιμῶ 
τιμάσθω 


τιμᾶσθον 
τιμάσθων 


τιμᾶσθε 


φιλοῦ 
φιλείσθω 


φιλεῖσθον 
φιλείσθων 


φιλεῖσθε 


φιλείσθωσαν, 
φιλείσθων 


δηλοῦ 
δηλούσθω 


δηλοῦσθον 
δηλούσθων 


δηλοῦσθε 


δηλούσθωσαν, 
δηλούσθων 


Infinitive Passive and Middle. 


τιμᾶσθαι 


φιλεῖσθαι 


δηλοῦσθαι 


Participle Passive and Middle. 


τιμώμενος 


φιλούμενος 


149 


δηλούμενος 


Nore 1. The uncontracted form of verbs in a@ is rare and Epic, 
The uncontracted form of verbs in ew is lonic and Epic. The uncon- 
tracted form of those in ow is never used, 


150 INFLECTION OF WORDS, [§ 120. 


Note 2. Dissyllabic verbs in e@ are contracted only when two e’s 
come together; as, 


Ind. S. πλέω, πλεῖς, πλεῖ, P. πλέομεν, πλεῖτε, πλέουσι 
Subj. S. πλέω, πλέῃς, πλέῃ, P. πλέωμεν, πλέητε, πλέωσι 
Opt. S. πλέοιμι, πλέοις, πλέοι, Ῥ. πλέοιμεν, πλέοιτε, πλέοιεν 
p- S. πλεῖ, πλείτω, P. πλεῖτὲε, πλείτωσαν or πλεόντων 
πλεῖν : Part. πλέων πλέουσα πλέον, ἃ. πλέοντος 
Impf. S. ἔπλεον, ἔπλεις, ἔπλει, P. ἐπλέομεν, ἐπλεῖτε, ἔπλεον 


Δέω, to bind, may be contracted in all its forms; as δέουσι δοῦσι, 
δέον δοῦν, ἔδεον ἔδουν, δέομαι δοῦμαι. 


Nore 3. The following verbs in aw contract ae and ay into η, after 
the analogy of the Doric dialect : 


δέω ΩΣ to tharst, διψῇς, διψῇ ; διψῆτε : ἐδίψης, ἐδίψη, ἐδιψῆτε : 


iw fon to live, Cs, {3 ζῆτε: ἔζης, ἔζη: inf. ζῆν Ὰ 
κνάω κνῶ, to scrape, κνῆς, κνῇ ; κνῆτε : ἔκνης, ἔκνη, ἐκνῆτε : inf. κνῆν, 
κνῆσθαι 
ἜΣ πεινῶ, to hunger, πεινῇς, πεινῇ ; πεινῆτε : ἐπείνης, ἐπεινῆτε : 
πεινῆν 
σμάω σμῶ, to smear, σμῇς, σμῇ, σμῆτε, &c. Herodotus has σμᾶται, 
ἄνους 
μαι χρῶμαι, to use, χρῆται ; χρῆσθε : ἐχρῆτο, ἐχρῆσθε : inf. χρῆ- 
"σθαι. he Ionic contracts regularly, as χρᾶσθαι. 


a, ς: nal, χρή, χρῆν, ἐχρὴν 
fies ortn tet ἀρνοΣ, 


Nore 4. The contracted form of the infinitive of verbs in ao is, in 
ancient inscriptions, always found without the « subscript ; as τιμᾶν, 
ae ζῆν ; which shows that ἂν, ἣν arise not out of aew, but out 

the original or Doric aev. 


Note 5. The movable ν is sometimes appended to the contracted 
third person singular of the imperfect active; as ἤσκειν from ἤσκεεν, 
from ἀσκέω, in Homer ; also the impersonal ἐ ἐχρῆν, for ἔ ἔχραεν ; so the 
Doric ἔπλην, ἔρρην, for ἔπλεεν, Eppeev, from πλέω, pew. 


§ 120. Dialects. 


1. Verbs in -ἄω. 


(a) In verbs in aw, the Ionic changes a into e; as dpda, Ionic ὁρέω 
ὁρέεις ὁρέει. The Doric sometimes follows the analogy of the Ionic. 

(0) The Ionic may change ao into ew; a8 μηχανεώμενος, ἐχρέωντο. 

(c) The Epic protracts a, a, contracted, into aa, ag; w, contracted, 
into 0@, @0, a; ᾧ, contracted, into οῳ ; as 

aydopat, ae ἀγᾶσθε, Epic ἀγάασθε 

ἐάω ---- ἐᾷς, 








ᾧ 121.] OMISSION OF THE CONNECTING VOWEL. _ 151 


ἔλάω — ἐχῶσι, EF. ἐλόωσι i 

γελάω ---- γελῶ, Εἰ, γελόω ; γελῶντες, Εἰ. γελώοντες, γελόωντες 

μαιμάω --- μαιμῶσι, Ἐπ, μαιμώωσε ; μαιμῶντος, Εἰ. μαιμώοντος, pat- 
μώωντος 

αἰτιάομαι — αἰτιῷο, EB, αἰτιόῳο 


2. Verbs in -έω. 

(a) In verbs in ew, the Epic changes ε into εἰ, as πνείω, νεικείω ; the 
ZéBolic, into η, as ἀδικήω-; the Doric, into z, as ἀδικίω, ὁρμιόμαι. 

(Ὁ) The Doric may change co into tw: as ἐμετρίωμες, μετριώμενος; 
Βηλιώμενος (εἰλεόμενος). 

(c) The Doric shortens - εἷς of the contracted second person singu- 
Jar, and -eZy of the infinitive, into -és, -év, respectively ; as ποιέω, ποι- 
és ποιέν, φρονέω φρονέν, κρατέω κρατέν. 

(4) In the second person singular of the indicative and imperative 
passive and middle, the Ionic drops the connecting vowel €; that is, it 
changes -éeat, -έεο, into -έαι, -€0; aS ἐπαινέω ἐπαινέαι, πτωλέομαι πω- 
λέαι, μυθέομαι μυθέαι, φοβέομαι φοβέαι φοβέο, ἀκέομαι ἀκέο, ἐξηγέομαι 
ε oO. Ἢ 
he Epic contracts -έεαε, -ἔεο, into -εἶαε; -εἶο, respectively ; as 
μυθεῖαι, αἰδεῖαι, aideio. 


3. Verbs in -όω. 


(a) In verbs in ow, the Ionic contracts oo into ev, which implies a 
change of the radical o into ε ; as δικαιόω ἐδικαίευν, mAnpdw πληρεῦν- 
τες, ἀξιόω ἀξιεύμεθα. 


(0) Some protracted Epic forms from verbs in ow presuppose ἃ 
change of o into a (1, 6) ; thus, 


ἀρόω, contracted ἀροῦσι, Epic ἀρόωσι 
δηϊόω ---- δηϊοῦντο, Εἰ. δηϊόωντο ; δηϊοῖεν, Εἰ. δηϊόῳφεν 
ἱδρόω ---- ἱδροῦντας, Εἰ. ἱδρώοντας 


(ce) For the Doric contraction cf στεφανῷ, πριῷ. and of the infini- 
tives ῥιγῶν, μαστιγῶν, στεφανῶν, see ᾧ 18, 5. 6. 


OMISSION OF THE CONNECTING VOWEL. 
Verbs in μι. 


§ 121. Some pure verbs drop the connecting 
vowel in the present, imperfect, and second aorist 
active and middle. | 


They are called verbs in μι, because the first person singular of the 
indicative active takes the personal ending pu. 


INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§ 122. 


152 


Soaarog 
Ssoaanag 
Soaarpnd. 


Soaarinam3g 
Soaarlog1g 
Soaarlapre 
δΟΛΞΥΙ0...01 


sag 
sn0g 
5190 
SDLO 


δΑΛΥΊ30 

520919 

51 3901. 

SPL} 
‘e[dionseg 


199099 
9-039 
mp.onidi 


1m9.004%139 
109-0099 
10ρ.09ρ1. 
mg.0D1L0} 


mang 
manog 
ma139 
malt.o 


1™mAnAN13Q 
maoggig 
104 30 14 
1041)...01 

“oa UyUy 


0.099 alirtiog 

0.039 alirhag 

ορυγσα, alirlinids 
\ 

0.004139 alirfyonamag 
0.00919 alirtogig 
0.03914 alia. 
O0DL07 aliriyo1.0} 

‘APPL Pup aarssog 
1929 aling 
599 aliyog 
$39 aliag 
19.1.0 aliin1.0 
Aam13Q ihonamag 
n0g79 alizogng 
12ρ1. aliyaprt 
hsor aliiy1o} | 

ΔΙΊ ΒΘ "oaryeydg 

9619} 


Φ,ΑΧΊ90 
gg 
o's 
O40} 

*eatjounlqng 


ee a, ee eee eee 


alnoge 
alert 269 
alirlynd.ua 
alirlaanaga 
alirlogigp 
alirlsgr13 
alirlyso7 
mrlaan799 
rorlog79 
mnagt 
wilpso7 


a0Q2 
amg 
ali? 
alto2 


aNaw13Q2 


‘PIA Ὑ ὁ 


“οθμοάση 


*yuasOL J 


ἼΒΠΟΥ g 


“yooyzodur~ 


"yuOseL gy 


SATJLOIPUT 


*nalaqua J ‘ange (11) ‘ysnog 1 ‘almdus (TYMVIdI) ‘moys 01 ‘rlaamag 


‘018 0) ‘agig “yn 


01 “πίιρ).. ‘wounjs 07 ‘iutor sojduiexa aux jo sisdoukg 


‘een ἃ 


ᾧ 123.] 


123. 
td ‘put, δίδωμι, to 


tered. 


S. ἵστημι 
ἵστης 
᾿ ἵστησι 


ἵστατον 
ἵστατον 
P. ἕσταμεν 
ἵστατε 
ἱστᾶσι 


Indicative Active. 


Present. 

τίθημι δίδωμι 
τίθης δίδως 
τίθησι δίδωσι 
τίθετον δίδοτον 
τίθετον δίδοτον 
τίθεμεν δίδομεν 
τίθετε δίδοτε 
τιθεῖσι OF διδοῦσι ΟΥ̓ 

τιθέασι διδόᾶσι 

Imperfect. 

ἐτίθην ἐδίδων 
ἐτίθης ἐδίδως 
ἐτίθη ἐδίδω 
ἐτίθετον ἐδίδοτον 
ἐτιθέτην ἐδιδότην 
ἐτίθεμεν ἐδίδομεν 
ἐτίθετε ἐδίδοτε 
ἐτίθεσαν ἐδίδοσαν 


Second Aorist. 


ἔθην 
ἔθης 


ε 


ἔθετον 
ἐθέτην 
ἔθεμεν 
wf. 
ἔθετε 
ἔθεσαν 


"Ὲ 


ἔδων 
ἔδως 
ἔδω 


ἔδοτον 
ἐδότην 
ἔδομεν 
ἔδοτε 

ἔδοσαν 


OMISSION OF THE CONNECTING VOWEL. 


Inflection of ἵστημι, to station, τίθημι, 
give, δείκνυμι, to show, ἐπριάμην 
(from ITPIAMAI), 1 bought, iv (from div), I en- 


δείκνῦς 


δείκνῦσι 


δείκνυτον 
δείκνυτον 
δείκνυμεν 
δείκνυτε 
δεικνῦσι ΟΥ̓ 
δεικνύᾶσι 


ἐδείκνῦν 
3 , - 
ἐδείκνῦς 
3 ’ - 
ἐδείκνῦ 


ἐδείκνυτον 
᾽ ’ 
ἐδεικνύτην 
> , 
ἐδείκνυμεν 
3 td 
ἐδείκνυτε 

> | 
ἐδείκνυσαν 


ἔδῦν 


154 








INFLECTION OF WORDS. 


Subjunctive Active. 








- Present. 

τιθῶ τ διδῶ 
τιθῇς διδῷς 
τιθῇ διδῷ 
τιθῆτον διδῶτον 
τιθῆτον διδῶτον 
τιθῶμεν διδῶμεν 
τιθῆτε διδῶτε 
τιθῶσι διδῶσι 

Second Aorist. 











Present. 
τιθείην διδοίην 
τιθείης διδοίης 
τιθείη διδοίη 
τιθείητον διδοίητον 
τιθειήτην διδοιήτην 
τιθείημεν διδοίημεν 
τιθείητε διδοίητε 
τιθείησαν διδοίησαν 

Or thus, 
τιθεῖτον διδοῖτον 
τιθείτην διδοίτην 
τιθεῖμεν διδοῖμεν 
τιθεῖτε διδοῖτε 
τιθεῖεν διδοῖεν 


[ᾧ 198. 








§ 123.] OMISSION OF THE CONNECTING VOWEL. 155 


Second Aorist. 








S. σταίην θείην δοίην δῦην 
σταίης - θείης δοίης δύης 
σταίη θείη Soin δύη 

D. —- --- 
σταίητον θείητον δοίητον δύητον 
σταιήτην θειήτην δοιήτην δυήτην 

ῬΡ, σταίημεν θείημεν δοίημεν δύημεν 
σταίητε θείητε δοίητε δύητε 
σταίησαν θείησαν δοίησαν δύησαν 

Or thus, 

D. σταῖτον θεῖτον δοῖτον δῦτν 
σταίτην θείτην δοίτην δύτην. 

Ῥ, σταῖμεν θεῖμεν δοῖμεν δῦμεν 
σταῖτε θεῖτε δοῖτε δῦτε 


σταῖεν θεῖεν δοῖεν δῦεν 


Imperative Active. 


Present. 
S σ΄ (0 (δ ὃ , - 
. ἵστη ribet iSov εἰκνῦ 
ἱστάτω τιθέτω διδότω δεικνύτω 
TD. ἕἥστατον τίθετον δίδοτον δείκνυτον 
« , 4 4 δ ’ 
ἱστάτων τιθέτων . διδότων δεικνύτων 
P. {forare τίθετε δίδοτε δείκνυτε 
ἱστάτωσαν ΟΥΥΥΥ̓ τιθέτωσαν or διδότωσαν or δεικνύτωσαν ΟΥ̓ 
ἱστάντων τιθέντων διδόντων δεικνύντων 
Second Aorist. 
S. στῆθι θές δός ᾿ δῦθι 
, , = ’ ’ 
στήτω θέτω δότω δύτω 
D. στῆτον θέτον δότον δῦτον 
στήτων θέτων δότων δύτων 
Ῥ, στῆτε θέτε δότε δῦτε 
στήτωσαν OY θέτωσαν ΟΥ̓ δότωσαν or δύτωσαν or 
στάντων θέντων δόντων δύντων 
Infinitive Active. 
Pres. ἱστάναι τιθέναι ᾿ς διδόναι “δεικνύναι 


2Aor στῆναι θεῖναι δοῦναι δῦναι 


156 


Pres. 
2 Aor. 


ΓΕ ΟΝ] 
ἐστας 
΄ 


στας 


τιθείς 
θείς 


INFLECTION OF WORDS. 


Participle Active. 


διδούς 


δούς 


Indicative Passive and Middle. 








ἐπρίατο 





ἐπρίασθον 
ἐπριάσθην 
ἐπριάμεθα 
ἐπρίασθε 


ἐπρίαντο 














Present. 
τίθεμαι δίδομαι 
τίθεσαι or τίθῃ δίδοσαι 
τίθεται δίδοται 
τίθεσθον δίδοσθον 
τίθεσθον δίδοσθον 
τιθέμεθα διδόμεθα 
τίθεσθε δίδοσθε 
τίθενται δίδονται 
Imperfect. 

ἐτιθέμην ἐδιδόμην 
ἐτίθεσο or ἐδίδοσο or 

ἐτίθου ἐδίδου 
ἐτίθετο ἐδίδοτο 
ἐτίθεσθον ἐδίδοσθον 
ἐτιθέσθην ἐδιδόσθην 
ἐτιθέμεθα ἐδιδόμεθα 
ἐτίθεσθε ἐδίδοσθε 
ἐτίθεντο ἐδίδοντο 


ἐθέμην 

ἔθεσο ΟΥ̓ 
ἔθου 

ἔθετο 





ἔθεσθον 


ἐθέσθην 
ἐθέμεθα 
ἔθεσθε 


ἔθεντο 


Second Aorist Middle. 


ἐδόμην 

ἔδοσο ΟΥ̓ 
ἔδου 

ἔδοτο 





ἔδοσθον 
ἐδόσθην 
ἐδόμεθα 
ἔδοσθε 
ἔδοντο 








ἐδείκνυσθο» 
ἐδεικνύσθην 
ἐδεικνύμεθα 
ἐδείκνυσθε 
ἐδείκνυντο 





§ 128. 


OMISSION OF THE CONNECTING VOWEL. 151 


Subjunctive Passive and Middle. 


πρίησθον 
πρίησθον 
πριώμεθα 
πρίησθε 

πρίωνται 


Present. 
τιθῶμαι διδῶμαι 
τιθῇ διδῷ ᾿ 
τιθῆται διδῶται 
τιθῆσθον διδῶσθον 
τιθῆσθον διδῶσθον 
τιθώμεθα διδώμεθα 
τιθῆσθε διδῶσθε 
τιθῶνται διδῶνται 
Second Aorist Middle. 
θῶμαι δῶμαι 
θῇ δῷ 
θῆται δῶται 
θῆσθον δῶσθον 
θῆσθον δῶσθον 
θώμεθα δώμεθα 
θῆσθε δῶσθε 
θῶνται δῶνται 








δεικνύωμαι 
δεικνύῃ 
δεικνύηται 


δεικνύησθον 
δεικνύησθον 
δεικνυώμεθα 
δεικνύησθε 

δεικνύωνται 


΄ 


Optative Passive and Middle. 


ἱσταίμην 
ἱσταῖο 
ἱσταῖτο 


ἱσταῖσθον 
€ , 
ἱσταίσθην 
ε , 
ἱσταίμεθα 
ἱσταῖσθε 
ἱσταῖντο 


πριαίμην 
πρίαιο 
πρίαιτο 





πρίαισθον 


πριαίσθην 





Present. 
τιθείμην διδοίμην 
τιθεῖο διδοῖο 
τιθεῖτο διδοῖτο 
τιθεῖσθον διδοῖσθον 
τιθείσθην διδοίσθην 
τιθείμεθα διδοίμεθα 
τιθεῖσθε διδοῖσθε 
τιθεῖντο διδοῖντο 


Second Aorist Middle. 


θείμην 
θεῖο 


θεῖτο 


θεῖσθον 


θείσθην 


δοίμην 
δοῖο 
δοῖτο 


δοῖσθον 


δοίσθην 


δεικνυοίμην 
δεικνύοιο 
δεικνύοιτο 


δεικνύοισθον 
δεικνυοίσθην 
δεικνυοίμεθα 
δεικνύοισθε 
δεικνύοιντο 


bs ΄ INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§ 124. 


P. πριαίμεθα θείμεθα δοίμεθα 
πρίαισθε θεῖσθε δοῖσθε 
πρίαιντο θεῖντο δοῖντο 


Imperative Passive and Middle. 


Present. 
S. ἵστασο . τίθεσο δίδοσο δείκνυσο 
ΟΥ ἵστω ΟΥ̓ τίθου or δίδου 
ἱστάσθω τιθέσθω διδόσθω δεικνύσθω 


D. 'ἴστασθον τίθεσθον δίδοσθον δείκνυσθον 
ἱστάσθων τιθέσθων διδόσθων δεικνύσθων 
P. ἵστασθε τίθεσθε δίδοσθε δείκνυσθε 
ἱστάσθωσαν τιθέσθωσαν διδόσθωσαν δεικνύσθωσαν 
or ἱστάσθων or τιθέσθων οΥ̓ διδόσθων ΟΥ̓ decxvic bar 


Second Aorist Middle. 

S. (πρίασο) mpiw (θέσο) θοῦ (δόσο) δοῦ 
πριάσθω θέσθω δόσθω 

D. πρίασθον θέσθον δόσθον 
πριάσθων θέσθων δόσθων 

P. πρίασθε θέσθε δόσθε 
πριάσθωσαν θέσθωσαν δόσθωσαν 

or πριάσθων ΟΥ̓ θέσθων ΟΥ δόσθων 


Infinitive Passive and Middle. 
Pres. {toracOa τίθεσθαι δίδοσθαι δείκνυσθαι 
2 A.M. πρίασθαι θέσθαι δόσθαι 

Participle Passive and Middle. 


Pres. ἱστάμενος τιθέμενος διδόμενος δεικνύμενος 
2A.M. πριάμενος θέμενος δόμενος 


§ 124. Inflection of tus, to send, εἶμι, to be, 


εἶμι, to 0, φημί, to say, and κεῖμαι, to lie down. 


Present. Ἴημι. 
Ind. ᾿ 5. ἴημι, ins, ἵησι, Ὦ. it ἕετον, | Ρ leper, tere, ἱεῖσι or (ἑέασι) ἱᾶσι. 
Passive and Middle, S. ἕεμαι, ἵεσαι or fy, ἵεται, D. ἵεσθον, 
P. ἐέμεθα, ἵεσθε, ἵενται 
Subj. S. ia, iss, ἱῇ, D. ἰῆτον, P. idpev, ire, ἱῶσι. Passive and Mid- 
dle, S. ἑῶμαι, if, ἰῆται, Ὁ. ἑῆσθον, P. idpeba, ἰῆσθε, ἰῶνται 


ΝΣ a ὁμ ὑν.»«..΄«.. .ὕ 


§ 124] OMISSION OF THE CONNECTING VOWEL. 159 


Opt. S. ἑείην, teins, icin, 1). ἱείητον, ἱειήτην, Ρ, iein μεν; ἱείητε, ἱείησαν. 
Passive and Middle, | S. ἑείμην, ἱεῖο, ἱεῖτο, D. ἱεῖσθον, ἱείσθην. 
P. ἱείμεθα, ἱεῖσθε, ἱεῖντο 
Imp. S. ἵει, iérw, D. ἵετον, ἱέτων, P. ἵετε, ἱέτωσαν or ἱέντων. Pas- 
sive and Middle, S. ἵεσο or tov, ἱέσθω, D. ἵεσθον, ἱέσθων͵ 
P. teade, ἱέσθωσαν or ἱέσθων 
Inf. ἱέναι. Passive and Middle, ἵεσθαι 
Part. ieis, ἱεῖσα, ἱέν, G. iévros. Passive and Middle, ἱέμενος 
Tnipersoct. 
8. & inv (Zev), tys, ἴη, D. ἵ ἵετον, ἱέτην, Ρ ἵεμεν, tere, ἵεσαν. Pas- 
sive and Middle, S. ἱέμην, ἵεσο or tov, ἵετο, 1). tex Gov, ἱέσθην, 
P. ἱέμεθα, ἵεσθε, ἵεντο 
Second Aorist. Ἂ 
Ind. S. (ἦν, ἧς, ἣ), D. etrov or €rov, εἵτην or erny, P. εἷμεν ΟΥ̓ ἕμεν, 
εἶτε or ἕτε, εἷσαν or ἔσαν. Middle, S. εἵμην ΟΥ ἕμην, εἷσο 
εἶτο, Ὁ. εἷσθον, cicOnv, P. εἵμεθα, εἷσθε, εἷντο 
Subj. S. ὦ, ἧς, 7, Ὁ. ἧτον, P. Sper, fre, Sor. Middle, S. μαι, 7, Frat, 
- odor, P. ὥμεθα, ἦσθε, ὦνται 
Opt. 5. εἴην, εἴης; ein, D. elnrov, einrny, P. εἴημεν or εἷμεν, εἴητε OF 
εἶτε, εἵησαν OF εἷεν. Middle, S. εἵμην, elo, εἶτο, 1). εἷσθον, 
εἴσθην, ¥; εἴμεθα, εἴσθε, εἷντο 
Imp. S. és, éra, D. érov, ἕτων, P. re, ἔτωσαν or ἕντων. Middle, 
S. (ἔσο) οὗ, ἔσθω, D. ἔσθον, ἔσθων, P. ἔσθε, ἔσθωσαν or 
-΄ 
ἔσθων 


Inf. εἷναι. Middle, ἔσθαι 
Part. εἵς, εἷσα, ἕν, G. ἕντος. Middle, ἕμενος 


Present. Εἰμί and Bins 


Ind. 5. εἰμί (AXolic ἐ pt) εἶμι 
εἶ (Ionic εἷς, Epic éoai) εἷς, εἶ (Epic εἶσθα) 
ἐστί (Doric évri). εἶσι (Dorie ἔξ-ειτι) 
Ὦ. ἐστόν ἴτον 
Ρ. ἐσμέν([. E. εἰμέν, Poetic ἴμεν 
ἐμέν, 1). εἰμές) 
ἐστέ . ire 
εἰσί (1. ἔασι, D. évri) ἴᾶσι (rare εἶσι) 
Subj. 5. ὦ (1. ἔω, Epic εἴω) ἴω (rare εἴω) 
ἧς ἴῃς (E. ἴησθα) 
᾿- ἴῃ (BE. ἴῃσι) 
D. Ar ἴητον 
P, by ev > (D. apes, ἴωμεν) ἴωμεν (Ε. ἴομεν) 
ἴητε 
, ey (I. ἔωσι, Beeotic ἴωνθ.) ἴωσι 
Opt. S. εἴην ἴοιμι; ἰοίην (rare ieinv) 
| eins (1. 2 fous, P. εἴησθα) lous, i loins 


εἴη (1. ἔοι, Klean BA) ἴοι, ἰοίη (rare εἴη) 


160 


Imp. 


Inf. 


Part. 


Ind. 


Opt. 


Inf. 
Part. 


INFLECTION OF WORDS. 


εἴητον εἶτον 


"εἰήτην εἴτην 


εἴημεν εἶμεν 
εἴητε εἶτε 


εἴησαν εἶεν (Elean EAN) 


ἴσθι (ἔσο, ἔσσο) 

" » 

ἔστω (ἤτω) 

ἔστον 

ἔστων 

ἔστε 

ἔστωσαν, ὄντων (D. ἐόν- 
mm, ἔστων, Cretan ἐόντω 


εἶναι (Δ. ἔ ἔμμεναι, E. ἔμμε- 
ναι, ἔμεναι, ἔμμεν, ἔμεν, D. 
ἦμεν, ἦ ἦμες, εἶμεν, clues, εἴ- 
peer, ὅμεν ἢ 

ὦν, ὄν, G. ὄντος (I. ἐών, ἐόν ; 
D. εἴς, used only in the 
oblique cases, as évra, ἔν- 
τασσι) 

οὖσα, feminine ( ἐ ἐοῦσα, SE. 
ἔοισα, B. ἰῶσα, D. ἐοῦσα, 
ἐῶσα, εὖσα, ἔᾶσα Or ἐᾶσα) 


ἦν, ἢ (rarely WA I. Za, ja, 
€ov, ἔσκον, v) 
fis, re (1. gas, in éns, ἔη- 


Imperfect, 


ἦ, Pe (E. ἡ ἦεν, ENV, ἤην; Ι. ἔσκε, 


ee ? 
ἤτην, ἤστην 
fest (Ὁ. ἦμες) 


τε, ἦστε (. ἔατε) 
σαν(]. ἔσαν, ἔασαν, εἴαται 1) 


Future of εἰμί. 


L$ 124, 


ἴοιτον 
ἰοίτην 
ἴοιμεν 
ἴοιτε . 
» 
totev 

16 (in composition εὖ 

ἴτω 

ΕΣ 

tTov 4 
» 

των 

ἴτε 

ἴτωσαν, ἰόντων, trav 





ἰών, ἰοῦσα, ἰόν, G. ἰόντος 





ἤειν, E. fia, A. ἦα 
ets, ἤεισθα : 


Net, before | a vowel jet 
(E. ἤϊε, ἦ ἦε, ἴε) 

ἤειτον, ἦτον 

ἢ εἰτην, ἥτην (EK. try, 
trov) 

ἤειμεν, ἦμεν (E. ἤομεν) 

ἥειτε, ἦτε 

ἤἥεσαν (1. ἤϊσαν, ἦ ἦσαν, E. 
ἤϊσαν; ἦσαν, ἤϊον, ἴσαν) 


ἔσομαι, ἔσῃ OF ἔσει, ἔσεται Or ἔσται, (Doric ἐσσούμαι) 


»~ 

ἔσεσθον : 
ἐσόμεθα, ἔσεσθε. ἔσονται 
ἐσοίμην, ἔσοιο, ἔσοιτο 

»»» » ΄ 

ἔσοισθον, ἐσοίσθην 

3 , ἢ ~*~ 
ἐσοίμεθα, ἔσοισθε, ἔσοιντο 
ἔσεσθαι 

ἐσόμενος, 7, ον 


(a) The second person singular εἶ follows the analogy of the middle 
voice ; that is, it comes from EQ like φιλέει φιλεῖ from φιλέομαι. 


’ 





§ 125.] OMISSION OF THE CONNECTING VOWEL. 161 


(b) Ἤμην and ἔσο, ἔσσο take the personal endings of the mid- 
dle voice. ; 
(c) In the imperative ἴσθι the radical vowel becomes ε. 


Present. Φημί. 
Ind. S. φημί, φής, φησί, Ὁ. hardy, P. φαμέν, φατέ, paci. Middle, 
2 plur. φάσθε, as active. 
Subj. S. φῶ, φῇς, φῇ, Ὁ. φῆτον, P. φῶμεν, pire, φῶσι 
Opt. S. φαίην, φαίης, φαίη, D. φαίητον, φαιήτην, P. φαίημεν or φαι- 
μεν, φαίητε or φαῖτε, φαίησαν or φαῖεν 
Imp. S. φάθι or φαθί, φάτω, 1). φάτον, φάτων, P. hare, φάτωσαν or 
φάντων. Middle, 2 sing. φάο, 3 sing. φάσθω, 2 plur. φάσθε, 
all as active. 
‘Inf. ddva. Middle, φάσθαι, as active. 
Part. dds paca φάν, G. pavros. Middle, φάμενος, as active. 
Imperfect. 
S. ἔφην, ἔφης or ἔφησθα, ἔφη, D. ἔφατον, ἐφάτην, P. ἔφαμεν, ἔφατε, 
ἔφασαν. Middle, ἐφάμην, as active. 
The traditional orthography of the second person singular of the in- 
dicative active of φημί is dys, with iota subscript, contracted from 
φάεις. For its acute accent, compare χρή. 


Present. Κεῖμαι. 
Ind. S. κεῖμαι, κεῖσαι (Epic κεῖαι), κεῖται, D. κεῖσθον, P. κείμεθα, 
κεῖσθε, κεῖνται (lonic κέαται, κείαται) 
- Subj. S. κέωμαι (κείωμαι, διά-κειμαι), κέῃ, κέηται (κῆται, κεῖται), Ὦ. 
κέησθον, Ῥ. κεώμεθα, κέησθε, κέωνται 
Opt. S. κεοίμην, κέοιο, κέοιτο, D. κέοισθον, κεοίσθην, Ῥ. κεοίμεθα, 
κέοισθε, κέοιντο 
Imp. S. κεῖσο, κείσθω, D. κεῖσθον, κείσθων, P. κεῖσθε, κείσθωσαν 
Inf. κεῖσθαι (κέεσθαι) 
Part. κείμενος, ἡ; ov 
| Imperfect. 
S. ἐκείμην, ἔκεισο, ἔκειτο (iterative κέσκετο), Ὦ. ἔκεισθον, ἐκείσθην, 
Ρ, ἐκείμεθα, ἔκεισθε, ἔκειντο (lonic ἐκέατο, ἐκείατο) 
The infinitive of the compounds of κεῖμαι takes the circumflex on 
the penult, because it is contracted from the rare κέεσθαι ; aS κατακεῖ- 
σθαι, διακεῖσθαι. : 


§ 12%. 1. The radical vowel is lengthened in the singu- 
lar of the present and imperfect of the indicative active, and 
sometimes in all the numbers of the same tenses of the indica- 
tive passive and middle. 

The first and third persons singular of the present indicative 


162 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§ 125. 


active take the original personal ending μὲ, ot, respectively. 
E. g. 
ἱστάω gives ἵστημι ἵστης ἵστησι, for ἵσταομι ἱστάεις ἵσταεσι : ἵστα: 
μαι ἵστασαι ἵσταται, for ἱστάομαι ἵσταεσαι ἱστάεται. : 
τιθέω τίθημι τίθης τίθησι, for τιθεομι τιθέεις τιθεεσι : τίθεμαι 
τίθεσαι τίθεται, ἴοτ τιθεομαι τιθεεσαι τιθεεται. 
διδόω δίδωμι δίδως δίδωσι, for διδοομε διδοεις διδοεσι : δίδομαιε 
δίδοσαι δίδοται, for διδοομαι διδοεσαι διδοεται. : 
δεικνύω δείκνῦμι Seixvis δείκνῦσι, for δεικνύομι δεικνύεις δει- 
κνυεσι : δείκνυμαι δείκνυσαι δείκνυται, for δεικνύομαι δεικνυεσαι δει- 
κνύεται. 


2. The subjunctive of verbs in nut and wu takes the com- 
mon connecting vowels and is contracted. Verbs in μι from 
aw are contracted from the Ionic subjunctive; as ἱστέω icra, 
ἱστέῃς ἱστῆῇς. 

The subjunctive of verbs in vy is the same as that of verbs 


iN ve. 











3. The optative active of verbs in nus and wz annexes to the 
root of the verb the endings S. nv ns η, D. qrov ἡτην, P. μεν ητε 
σαν, preceded by «. (ᾧ 117, 3,c.) The optative passive and 
middle of verbs in nue and wp annexes the regular personal 
endings, likewise preceded by « (δ 117, 3.) 

The optative of verbs in vu is regularly the same as that of 
verbs in vo. ὦ 


4. The imperative annexes the regular personal endings to — 
the root. (See the examples.) 


5. The infinitive annexes -vaz, -σθαι to the root without any 
further changé. 


6. The root of the participle active 1s formed by annexing 
yr to the root of the verb. The participle passive and middle 
annexes -evos to the root of the verb. 


Nore 1. Ina few instances, the subjunctive coincides with the in- 
dicative ; thus, σκεδάννυμι, subj. 3 sing. σκεδάννῦσι, σκεδάννυται 5 
κτίννυμι, subj. 1 plur. κτίννυμεν ; κεῖμαι, subj. 3 sing. κεῖται. 

Note 2. (a) The dual and plural of the optative active often drop 9; 
in which case noav becomes ev; (see the paradigms.) 


(b) In a few instances the optative of verbs in υμὲ is formed after 
the analogy of verbs in ny or ops; the diphthong vw however becomes 
δ; thus, δαίνυμι, opt. 3 sing. dawiro or δαίνῦτο, 3 plur. dawiaro 
Ionic ; dive dinv, φύω inv, ζεύγνυμι Cevyviny, ὄμνυμι ὀμνῦην ; πή- 
γνυμι, 3 sing. πήγνῦτο. 











ᾧ 126] OMISSION OF THE CONNECTING VOWEL. 163 


(c) SIMI forms the optative after the preceding analogy; thus, 
φθίμην, φθῖο, for φθιιμην, φθιιο. 


(4) The optative passive and middle may adopt the terminations of 
verbs in ὦ; as ξυν-ιστοῖτο, for ξυν-ισταῖτο; mpo-oiro, for mpo-eiro. See 
also κρέμαμαι, μάρναμαι, ὄνομαι, τίθημι, in the Catalogue of Verbs. 


Note 4. The second person singular of the imperative active most 
commonly drops θὲ and lengthens the radical vowel; as ἵστη, τίθει, di- 
δου, Seixvi, for ἵστα-θι τίθε-τι δίδο-θι δείκνυ-θι. 


Note 5. As a general rule, all verbs in μὲ may be inflected like 
verbs in ὦ ; aS τιθέω τιθῶ,, τιθέεις τιθεῖς, τιθέει τιθεῖ ; ἱέεις Leis, ἱέει ict; 
’ . 5 
δεικνύω δεικνύεις δεικνύει δεικνύουσιν. The singular of the imperfect 
of τίθημι and δίδωμι is most commonly formed from τιθέω διδόω ; thus, 
a > ¢ > / 5." »ῷ" 5.7 
ἐτίθουν ἐτίθεις ἐτίθει ; ἐδίδουν ἐδίδους ἐδίδου. 


§ 126. 1. The second aorist active generally lengthens the 
radical vowel throughout the indicative and imperative, and in. 
the infinitive. ‘The second aorist middle commonly retains the 
short radical vowel in these moods. E, g. 


βίβημι, 2 A. ἔβην ns η, D. nrov ἡτην, Ῥι μεν nre noav, imperat, 

βῆθι nro, D. nrov ἡητων, P. nre ἡτωσαν, infin. βῆναι 

γιγνώσκω, 2 A. ἔγνων ὡς oa, D. erov wtnv, P. oper wre ὡσαν; im- 

perat. γνῶθι area, D. wrov ὠτων, P. wre wrwoar, infin. γνῶναι 
diva, 2 A. ἔδῦν ts ὕ, D. ὕτον ὕτην, P. ὕμεν ὕτε ὕσαν, imperat. δῦθι 
tra, D. ὕτον trav, P. ire ὕτωσαν, infin. δῦναι 

See also ἁλίσκομαι, ἀμβλίσκω, ἀμπνύω, ἁρπάζω, Baivw, βάλλω, βι- 
βρώσκω, βιόω, βλώσκω, βροντάω, γηράσκω, διδράσκω, δίδωμι, δύω, 
ἐγείρω, ἕπομαι, ἔχω, θνήσκω, ἵημι, ἵπταμαι, ἵστημι, κιχέω, κλάω, κλύω, 
κτείνω, κτίζω, λύω, ναίω, ὀνίνημι, οὐτάω, πελάω, πίμπλημι, πίνω, πλώω, 
TIPIAMAL, πτήσσω, σβέννυμι, SEYQ, σκέλλομαι, συν-αντάω, TAAAQ, 
᾿ τίθημι, τιτρώσκω, φθάνω, φθίω, φρέω, Pia, χέω, in the Catalogue of 
Verbs. — 

2. The second aorist middle optative, like the present middle 
optative, retains the radical vowel of its indicative ; as δίδωμι, 
ἐδό-μην δο-ίμην ; πίμπλημι, ἐπλή-μην πλή-ιμην πλή-μην. 

See also βάλλω, γιγνώσκω, ἵημι, ὀνίνημι, πρίασθαι, τίθημι, in the 
Catalogue of Verbs. 


_ Nore. The aorists ἔκτἄν, οὗτἄν, from κτείνω, οὐτάω, retain the 
short vowel of the root. The second aorist of δίδωμι and τίθημι 
lengthens it only in the singular of the indicative and in the infinitive. 
Nore 2. In a few instances the second aorist middle lengthens the 
radical vowel in the indicative, imperative, infinitive, and participle. 
See βάλλω, κιχάνω, ὀνίνημι, πίμπλημι, in the Catalogue of Verbs. 
Nore 3. In a few instances, οἱ, in the second aorist optative active 


of verbs in wu, is changed into @; as ἁλίσκομαι ἁλῴην. See alse 
‘Bide, δίδωμι, in the Catalogue of Verbs, 


164 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ὁ 127, 128. 


Norte 4. The imperatives βῆθι, στῆθι, from βαίνω, ἵστημι, in com- 
position often drop 6, and change ἡ into a; as ἀνάβᾶ κατάβα, ἀνάστα 
mapaora. (Compare § 125, n. 4.) 

Nore 5. The second person singular of the second aorist zmperative 
active in the following verbs drops « of the personal ending &, and 
changes @ into s; thus, δίδωμι δός, τίθημι θές, ἴημι Es, ἔχω σχές, φρέω 
φρές. 

Aorist Passive. 


ἢ 127. The aorist passive takes the personal endings of — 
the active voice, and, in its inflection, follows the analogy of 
verbs in nut from ew. (Compare the examples.) 


Second Perfect and Second Pluperfect. 


§ 128. The second perfect and pluperfect of some pure — 
verbs drop the connecting vowel, after the analogy of verbs in — 
pt. The singular of the indicative is not used ; except δέδια. 


1. Second Perfect of βαίνω, θνήσκω, ἵστημι, TAAAQ. 


Ind. 5. (βέβαα) (τέθναα) (€oraa) (rérAaa) 
D. BéBarov τέθνατον ἕστατον τέτλατον 
P. βέβαμεν τέθναμεν ἕσταμεν τέτλαμεν 
βέβατε τέθνατε ἕστατε τέτλατε 
ἑστέατε 
ἕστητε 
βεβᾶσι τεθνᾶσι ἑστᾶσι τετλᾶσι 
βεβάᾶσι ἑστέᾶσι 
“The forms βεβάᾶσι, ἕστητε are Epic; ἑστέατε, ἑστέᾶσι, lonic. 
Subj. 5. βεβῶ (τεθνῶ) ἑστῶ (τετλῶ) 
βεβῆς not found ἑστῇς not found 
εβῇ Wd | 
D. βεβῆτον ἑστῆτον 
P. βεβῶμεν ἑστῶμεν 
βεβῆτε ἑστῆτε 
βεβῶσι ἑστῶσι 
Opt. S. (βεβαίην) τεθναίην ἑσταίην τετλαίην 
not found reOvains ἑσταίης τετλαίης 
τεθναίη ἑσταίη τετλαίη 
τεθναίητον ἑσταίητον τετλαίητον 
τεθναιήτην ἑσταιήτην τετλαιήτην 
Pr, τεθναίημεν ἑσταίημεν τετλαίημεν 
τεθναίητε ἑσταίητε τετλαίητε 
τεθναίησαν ἑσταίησαν τετλαίησαν 








§ 198.] 
Imp. S. (βέβαθι) 
D. 
P. 


inf, βεβάναι 


τέθναθι 
τεθνάτω 


4 
τέθνατον 
τεθνάτων 


τέθνατε 


[2 
τεθνάτωσαν 


τεθνάναι 


OMISSION OF THE CONNECTING VOWEL. 


ἔσταθι 
ἑστάτω 
ἔστατον 
ἑστάτων 
ἔστατε 


ἑστάτωσαν 


"" , 
εστάναι 


165 


τέτλαθι 
τετλάτω 


’ 
τέτλατιν 
τετλάτων 


τέτλατε 


’ 
τετλάτωσαν 

ay 
τετλάναι 


Epic infinitives, βεβάμεν, τεθνάμεναι τεθνάμεν, ἑστάμεναι 
ἑστάμεν, τετλάμεναι τετλάμεν. ---Τεθνάναι is written also τε- 
θνᾶναι as if from τεθναέναι. 


Part. βεβαώς BeBavia BeBads, G. BeBadros, contracted βεβώς βεβῶσα, 


G. BeBaros 


τεθνεώς (reOvevia) reOveds, G. τεθνεῶτος ; Epic τεθνειώς or τεθνηώς 
τεθνηυῖα, G. -ῶτος or -dros, Doric τεθνᾶώς 

ς , Wp Ὰ ς ra . n e ae δ ὦ 

ἑσταώς, G. -ότος ; also ἑστηώς ἑστηυῖα, G. -ῶτος ; Ionic ἑστεώς ἕστε- 


ὥσα, G. -ῶτος ; Attic ἑστώς ἑστῶσα ἑστώς, G. -ὥτος 
τετληώς τετληυῖα, G. τετληότος 


S. (ἐβεβάειν) 

D. ἐβέβατον 
ἐβεβάτην 

P. ἐβέβαμεν 
ἐβέβατε 


ἐβέβασαν 







Ind. S. (γέγαα) 
Pp. ———— 
yeyaare 
γεγάᾶσι 
Imp. 
Inf. yeydpev (E.) 





D 3 éyeyarnv 


Ind. 5, δέδια 


δέδιας 


HF 1). δεδίατον 


Second Pluperfect. 


> , 

(ἐτεθνάειν) 

Ἵν, δὲ 
ἐτέθνατον 

> , 
ἐτεθνάτην 

δι΄. 
ἐτέθναμεν 

»- δ 
ἐτέθνατε 

> & 
ἐτέθνασαν 


(μέμαα) 


2 μέματον 


μέμαμεν 
μέματε 


μεμάᾶσι 


3 μεμάτω 


ς , 
(ἑστάειν) 
ἕστατον 
ἑστάτην 
ἕσταμεν 
ἕστατε 
ἕστασαν 


(ἠρίσταα) 


ἠρίσταμεν 


ἠριστάναι 


Second Pluperfect. 


3 ἐμέμασαν 


δέδιε (Epic δείδιε) 


3. Second Perfect of δίω, to fear, κλύω. 
(xéxAva) 


> , 

(ἐτετλάειν) 

δι Ὁ 
ἐτέτλατον 

> , 
ἐτετλάτην 

Ds δ 
ἐτέτλαμεν 

8'΄.Ζ 
ἐτέτλατε 

> 7 Ψ 
ἐτέτλασαν 


2. Second Perfect οἵ γίγνομαι, MAQ, ἀριστάω, δειπνέω (-ἀω). 


(δεδείπναα) 


δεδείπναμεν 


δεδειπνάναι 


166 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§ 129 


VP. δεδίαμεν δέδιμεν (Epic δείδιμεν) 
δεδίατε δέδιτε 


δεδίασι 
Subj. dedi, -ης, regular 
Opt. δεδιείην (like ieiny) 
Imp. 8.2 δέδιθι, Epic δείδιθι κέκλυθι 
P.2 δείδιτε Epic κέκλυτε 
Inf. δεδιέναι, Epic δειδίμεν 
Part. δεδιώς, regular | 
Second Pluperfect. 
S. ἐδεδίειν regular; alsol plur. Epic ἐδείδιμεν, 3 plur. ἐδέδισαν, 
Epic ἐδείδισαν 


/& 129. 1. A few mute and liquid verbs drop the connect- 
‘ing vowel in some of the parts of the second perfect and pluper- 
Sect ; as ἀνώγω ἄνωγ-μεν, κράζω κέκραχοθι. 

See also ἐγείρω, εἴκω, ἔρχομαι, πάσχω, πείθω, in the Catalogue of 
Verbs. 

2. οἶδα, novi, I know, the second perfect of EIA (IAQ), and — 
its second pluperfect ἤδειν, I knew, drop the connecting vowel 
in many of their parts. In the subjunctive and optative, οἶδα 
follows the analogy of verbs in με, that is, it presupposes EIAEQ 
EIAHMI. 


EE — 















Second Perfect. 
Ind. S. οἶδα Subj. S. εἰδῶ (Epic εἰδέω) 
οἶσθα (οἶδας, οἶσθας) εἰδῇς 
οἶδε εἰδῇ 
D. ἴστον εἰδῆτον 
Ρ ἴσμεν (οἴδαμεν, Ionic ἴδμεν) εἰδῶμεν (E. εἴδομεν) 
ἴστε (οἴδατε) εἰδῆτε 
ἴσᾶσι (οἴδασι) εἰδῶσι 
Opt. S. εἰδείην. Imp. 
εἰδείης ἴσθι 
εἰδείη ἴστω (Beotic irra) 
D. εἰδείητον. ἴστον 
εἰδειήτην ἴστων 
P. εἰδείημεν ᾿ 
εἰδείητε ἴστε 
εἰδείησαν, εἰδεῖεν ἴστωσαν 


[π΄ εἰδέναι (Epic ἴδμεναι, ἴδμεν, ἰδέμεν) 

Part. εἰδώς εἰδυῖα εἰδός, G. εἰδότος, (Epic feminine ἰδυῖα) 
The regular forms οἶδας, οἴδαμεν, οἴδατε, οἴδᾶσι are used chiefly by 

the later authors. 


) 






εἶ 





ἢ 180] ΟΜΊΒΒΙΟΝ OF THE CONNECTING VOWEL. 167 


᾿ Second Pluperfect. Σ 
S. ἤδειν or ἤδη, (lonic ἤδεα, Epic ἠείδειν) 
ἤδεϊς or ἤδης, ἤδεισθα or ἤδησθα, (Epic ἠείδεις, ἠείδης) 
ἤδει or ἤδη, ἤδειν Or ἤδην, (lonic ἤδεε εἴδεε, Once ἤειδε, Epic 
ἠείδει ἠείδη) 
Ὁ. ἥδειτον or ἦἧστον 
noeitny OF ἤστην 
Ρ, ἤδειμεν OF ἦσμεν 
ἤδειτε or ἦστε (lonic ἠδέατε) 
ἤδεσαν or ἦσαν (Epic ἴσαν) 

Notr. The forms ἀνώχθω, ἄνωχθε, from ἄνωγα, are explainea as 
follows; dvwyérw ἀνώγετε, syncopated ἀνώγ-τω ἄνωγ-τε ; the endings 
~yto, ~yre suggested the passive endings τχθω -χθε, (as in λελέ-χθω 
λέλε-χθε.) 

The forms ἐγρήγορθε, ἐγρήγορθαι, from ἐγείρω, are explained as 
follows ; ἐγρηγόρετε ἐγρήγορτε ἐγρήγορθε, ἐγρήγορθαι, -pre suggest- 
ung the passive endings -ρθε, -ρθαι, (as in ἔφθαρθε, μέμορθαι, τέτορθαι.) 

Πείθω has πέποσθε, formed as follows; πεπόνθατε πέπονθτε πέ- 
πονστε πέποστε, -στε Suggesting the passive ending -σθε, (as in πέ- 
greuc Ge.) 


Perfect and Pluperfect Passive and Middle. 


§ 130. 1. The perfect and pluperfect passive and middle 
have no connecting vowel. (See the examples, § 84, et seq.) 


2. In mute and liquid verbs, and sometimes in pure verbs, 
the third person plural of the perfect and pluperfect passive 
and middle indicative is formed by means of the participle and 
εἰσί, ἦσαν ; as, : 

τετριμμένοι (at, a) εἰσί, ἠγγελμένοι (αι, a) εἰσί, for τέτριβ-νται, ἤγ- 

γελ-νται 

τετριμμένοι (at, a) ἦσαν, ἠγγελμένοι (αι, α) ἦσαν, for ἐτέτριβ-ντο, ἤγ- 

γελ-ντο έ 

Pure verbs which take o before » andr (§ 111, π. 4) form 
this person after the analogy of mute verbs; as τελέω, τετελε- 
σμένοι εἰσί, τετελεσμένοι ἦσαν. : 


3. The perfect passive subjunctive and optative are formed 
by means of the participle and εἶναι, to be. . (See the exam- 
ples.) ἵ 

Nore. (a) The perfect passive subjunctive and optative of a few 
pure verbs is formed after the analogy of verbs in μὲ; aS κτάομαι κέ- 
κτήμαι, | 

Subj. κεκτῶμαι κεκτῇ κεκτῆται, &C., OF κέκτωμαι κέκτῃ. κέκτηται, &e. 

Opt. κεκτήμην κεκτῇο κεκτῇτο, ὅζο. atin 


168 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§§ 131, 132, 
See also βάλλω. κάθημαι, καλέω, λύω, μιμνήσκω, οἰκοδομέω, Spvupe, 
τέμνω, in the Catalogue of Verbs. 


(b) Κτάομαι and μεμνήσ κω form the perfect passive optative also 
after the analogy of contract verbs in dw ; thus, 

Opt. κεκτῴμην κεκτῷο κεκτῷτο, &c. 

μεμνῴμην μεμνῷο μεμνῷτο (Ionic resolved μεμνέῳτο) 

(c) Some of the parts of the perfect passive and middle of ἀραρίσκω, 
μιμνήσκω, and κάθημαι (EQ), take the terminations and accent of the 
present; as ἀραρίσκω, P. P. subj. 3 sing. mpoo-apnperat; κάθημαι. 
subj. κάθωμαι xan κάθηται, opt. καθοίμην. See these verbs in the 
Catalogue of Verbs. 


Present, Imperfect, and Second Aorist Middle. 


§ 131. 1. In the Epic dialect, the present, imperfect, and 
second aorist middle of a few mute and liquid verbs drop the 
connecting vowel in some of their parts; as ἄρχομαι dpy-pevos, 
δέχομαι δέξο (δέχ-σο), ἅλλομαι GAro. 


See also αἱρέω, ἁνδάνω, ἀραρίσκω, γεύω, γίγνομαι, Eda, ἐλελίζω, εὔ- 
χομαι, ἔχω, ἱκνέομαι, κέλομαι, λέγω, λείπω, AEXQ, μίγνυμι, ὄρνυμι, 
πάλλω, πέρθω, πῆγνυμι, σεύομάι, ΣΤΕΥΟΜΑΙ, φέρω, φυλάσσω, in the 
Catalogue of Verbs. 


2. The future middle drops the connecting vowel only in 


ἔσ-ται for ἔσεται. from εἰμί, to be. 


Note. The form προ-φύλαχθε, from φυλάσσω (®YAAKQ) is ex- 
plained as follows ; προφυλάσσετε προφυλάκετε προφύλακ-τε προφύ- 
λαχθε, after the analogy of ἄνωχθε for ἀνώγετε. 


§ 132. Dialects. 


1. Indicative Active. 


«σι, 3 sing. of verbs in με, Doric -rc, rarely -yre; as δίδωτι, τίθητι, 
nti, ἀφίητι, pari, ἀναδείκνυντι, ἐντί. 

-vot, 3 plur. Doric -ντε; as ἱστάντι : Tonic -ἄσι, as ἱστέᾶσι, ἑστέᾶσι, 
ἔασι. The Ionic ending -acx is used also by the Attics in διδόασι, 
τιθέασι, ἱᾶσι (ἱέασι), and in all verbs in -υμι. 

-σαν, 3 plur. imperfect and second aorist, and aorist passive, /Eolic, 
Doric, Beeotic, and Epic -» preceded by the radical vowel ; as ἔστᾶν, 
τίθεν, avebev, tev, ἔδον, διέγνον, for ἔστησαν, ἐτίθεσαν, ἀνέθεσαν, te- 
σαν, ἔδοσαν, ἔγνωσαν. In the aorist passive -σὰν becomes -εν, as 
ἐκόσμηθεν, κατεδίκασθεν. The forms ἔγνων, μιάνθην, for éyva-_ 

- gay, ἐμιάνθησαν, retain the long vowel. ᾿ 
(a) The A®olic lengthens the radical vowel a, o, into at, ot, in he 

singular of the indicative active of verbs in μὲ; as ἵσταιμι, πλά 

The Doric lengthens a into ἃ ; a8 ἴσᾶμι. 


= 


8. 132.] ΟΜΊΒΒΙΟΝ OF THE CONNECTING VOWEL. 169 


(b) The Beeotic lengthens ε into e in the singular of the indicative 
active of verbs in pe; as ἀδίκειμι., 

(c) The A®olians usually convert contract verbs into verbs in μὲ; as 
φίλημι, οἴκημι, ἀσυνέτημε, κάλημι, ἐλευθέρωμι, δοκίμωμι. Such forms 
as βρίθησι, ἔχησι, φαίνησι, φέρησε, φορέησι presuppose a theme in ew. 

(d) The éterative endings oxov, σκομὴν are appended to the root 
of verbs i in pe without any | further change ; as tornpe ἵστασκον στά- 
σκον ; εἰμί ἔσκον ἔσκε ; πέρνημι πέρνασκον ; ; κεῖμαι κέσκετο ; δίδωμε 
δόσκον ; ζώννυμι ζωννύσκετο ; ΔΥ͂ΜΙ δύσκεν. 


2. Indicative Passive sna Middle. 


-ytat, -ντο, 3 plur. Ionic -arat, -aro, as ἐπιστέαται, τιθέαται. 
(a) In the third person plural of the perfect and pluperfect passive and 
middle, w, 8 become @; x, y become x, and ¢ becomes δ, before -ara, 






















-ato; further, the ical vowel ε commonly remains unaltered before 
these ondingys as, 

οἰκέω ᾧκημαι — οἰκέ-αται, οἰκέ-ατ. Ὁ 

κρύπτω κέκρυμμαι ----κεκρύφ-αται, κεκρύφ-ατο 

λέγω λέλεγμαι τ--λελέχ-αται, λελέχ-ατο 


ἀγωνίζω ἡ ἡγώνισμαι--- ἀγωνίδ-αται, ἀγωνίδ-ατο 
φθείρω ἔφθαρμαι ---- ἐφθάρ-αται, ἐφθάρ-ατο 
The Attic dialect sometimes makes use of the Ionic third person. 
ἘΣ ural; as τετάχαται, ἐτετάχατο, in Thucydides and Xenophon. — 
erodotus has ἀπίκ-αται, from ἀπικνέομαι (ik-o). 


| (b) The A€olic and Epic lengthen the radical vowel ε into η in the 
i indicative passive and middle of verbs in μὲ; as ποίημαι, νόημαι, δίζη- 
᾿ μαι, ἐνοήμην, ἐδιζήμην, ἐκαλήμην. 


3. Subjunctive. 


Ἅ τῇς» 2 sing. Epic “408s in θήῃς, στήῃς, for θῇς, στῇς. 
τῇ, 38 sing. Epic -yn; thus, βήῃ, ἀνήῃ, στήῃ, pin, θήῃ, for βῇ, ἀνῇ, 
στῇ, φῇ, θῇ ; 80 in the aorist passive, δαμήῃ, σαπήῃ, φανήῃ, for δα- 
μῇ, σαπῇ, φανῇ. In the ΖοΙίς, Thessalian, and Doric dialects, 
this ending becomes -εἴ, but only in the aorist passive ; as ὀνγραφεῖ, 
᾿ ξυλογραφηθεῖ. 
᾿ς (a) The uncontracted form of the subjunctive of verbs in μὲ is Ionic 
Τ and Epic; as θέω, στέωμεν, ἕω, βέω, βέομαι, Epic also θείω θείῃς θείῃ, 
 θείομεν, θείομαι, στείομεν, ciw, βεΐω, βείομαι, for θῶ Ons θῇ, θῶμεν, 
i) θῶμαι, στῶμεν, ὦ, βῶ, βῶμαι. 
he aorest passive subjunctive is contracted from the original form 
τέω, -ens, -én, 1). -énrov, P. -ἔωμεν, énre, -€oor. The uncontracted 
_ form is Tonic and Epic, and has all the peculiarities of contract verbs 
| co; as μίγνυμει, μιγέω μιγείω ; δαμάω, ἐδάμην δαμείετε ; ἐξειλέω, 
ἐξειληθῶσι, Be orle ἐγεηληθίωντι. (ᾧ 120, 2, a.) 
_ (b) The Epic protracts ἡ in the forms βλήεται, στήετον, for βλῆται, 
στῆτον. 
8 


170 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§ 133 


(c) The Epic dialect lengthens the radical vowel in the second 
aorist subjunctive of ἁλίσκομαι, γιγνώσκω, δίδωμι, and dive, which 
see in the Catalogue of Verbs. 

(d) The personal ending -σι of the third person singular is found in 
the forms δῷσι for δῷ, and ὑπο-πίμπρῃσι, for ὑπο-πιμπρῇ OF -πίμπρῃ. 


4, Optative. 


The personal ending -σιὲ is found in παρ-φθαίησι for παρ-φθαίη, ᾿ 


and perhaps. ἴῃ ἀ-γνοίησι for ἀ-γνοίη. 


5. Imperative. 


The Epic dialect often lengthens the radical vowel of the impera- 
tive ; as ἄημι ἀήτω, δίδωμι δίδωθι. 


6. Infinitive. 

-vat, Aéolic -pevat, as ὀν-θέμεναι (ἀνα-θεῖναι) : Doric -μεν, later 
Doric -μειν, as διδόμεν, ποτιθέμειν, ἀποδόμειν : Epic -pevat, -μεν, 
as ἁλώμεναι. So in the aorist passive; as ὁμοιωθήμεναι, διακρινθῆ- 
μεν, ἀνοικοδομηθήμειν. ἴῃ the aorist passive the A‘olic has -ςν for 
pee rh as γενήθην, ὀντέθην, ἐπιγράφην, εἰσενέχθην, στεφανώθην, με- 

σθην. 
The Epic often lengthens the radical vowel in the infinitive of 
verbs in μὲ; 85 -yonpevat, pophpevat, διδοῦναι, δίζησθαι, βλῆσθαι. 


ἡ. Participle. 
The “ΖΕ οΙς and Epic may lengthen the radical vowels a, ε; in the 


participle passive and middle ; as vonpevos, καλήμενος, φοβήμενος,; δι-. 


ζήμενος. 
Second Person Singular Passive and Middle. 


8. (a) In the passive and middle of verbs in ju, the endings -acas 
-ago, -εσαι -εσο, and -οσο; may drop σ and be contracted into -¢, 


-@, τῇ, and -ov, respectively ; as ἐπίστασαι ἐπίστᾳ, ἵστασο ἵστω, τίθεσαι 


τίθεαι rin, θέσο θέο θοῦ, δίδοσο δίδου. So ἐπίστῃ, δύνῃ, contracted 
from tlie Ionic ἐπίστεαι, δύνεαι. The uncontracted forms are not 
Attic. 

(b) In the Epic dialect, the perfects βέβλησαι, μέμνησαι; from βάλ- 
Ao, μιμνήσκω, become βέβλττι; μέμνηαι μέμνῃ. 


ANOMALOUS AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 


>€ 1338. 1. Verbs which have more than one root are re- 
garded as anomalous. Also, all verbal forms which omit ths 
connecting vowel; except the perfect, pluperfect, and aorist, 
passive. 


o's athe ee —— 


Se. 





§ 133.] ANOMALOUS AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 171 


A verb is defective when only some of its parts are in use, 


2. In the following Catalogue of Anomalous Verbs, roots 
and assumed or imaginary themes are written in capitals, 
Tenses of easy formation, as the pluperfect, are usually oinit- 
ted. 


When the future middle has the force of the future active, it 
occupies the place of that tense. ; : 


A. 


AAQ, to injure, Epic, A. daca, contracted doa, A. P. ἀάσθην. Mid. 
(ἀάομαι) 3 sing. ἀᾶται as active, A. ἀασάμην ; contracted ἀσάμην as 
active, The quantity of da- is variable in the aorist. 

ἀβροτάξομεν, miss, A, subj. 1 plur. Epic for ἀβροτάξωμεν, defective. 

ἄγαμαι (ἀγάομαι), to admire, F. ἀγάσομαι, P. ἤγασμαι, A. P. ἠγά- 
σθην, A. M. ἠγασάμην rare. 

ἀγγελλω (AITEA-), to announce, regular ; 2 A. ἤγγελον, 2 A, P. ἠγγέ- 
λην, 2 A. Μ. ἠγγελόμην. 

ἀγείρω (ATEP-), to assemble, regular ; P, ἀγήγερκα, 2 A. Μ. ἠγερό- 
μην. ---ἀἀγηγέρατο, Pluperf. Μ. 3 plur. Ionic. — dypédpevos, 2A, 
M. part. Epic, for ἀγερόμενος. ~ ; 

ἀγνοέω, ignoro, not to know, regular ; F. ἀγνοήσω, rarely ἀγνοήσομαι. 

-—dyvooacke, A, 3 sing. iterative, for ἀγνοήσασκε. 
ἄγνυμι, ἀγνύω, (ΑΓ-), to break, F. ἄξω, A, ἔαξα, rarely #£a, A. P, 

ἐάγην, rarely ἄγην, 2 P. éaya, Ionic nya, as intransitive or passive, 

-- ἐξ-εαγεῖσα, 2 A. P. part. fem. 
ἀγρέω, Folic for aipéw, P. P. ἄγρημμαι, A, P. ἀγρέθην. —dypet, 

ἀγρεῖτε, imperat, 9, pers. as exclamations, up / on ! quack ! 

ἄγω, ago, to lead, bring, F. ἄξω, A. Ἶξα rare, P. ἦχα, rarely ἀγήγοχα 
or ἀγήοχα Doric dyayoxa, P. P. ἦγμαι, A. P, ἤχθην, 2 A. ἤγαγον, 
A. M. ἠξάμην not Attic, 2 A. M. ἠγαγόμην. ---ἄξετε, A, imperat. 

_ . 2plur. Epic, for dare. — dayedpevos, lonic for ἃ όμενος. 

AAEQ (AA-), to be sated, to be disgusted with, Epic, A. opt. 3 sing. 
ἀδήσειεν or ἀδδήσειεν, P. part. ἀδηκώς or ἀδδηκώς. Pass, aerat, 
rare. 
ἀείδω, to sing, regular; F, ἀείσω, ἀείσομαι. ----ἀ εἰ σεο, A. M. imperat, 
2 sing. Epic, for ἄεισαι. 
᾿ ἀείρω (AEP-), to raise, lift, Poetic and Ionic, regular; F. dep@, con- 
_ _ tracted apa. —éapro, Plup. P. 3 sing. for #epro. 
| do, ἠέξησα, ἀεξήθην, ἀεξήσομαι; Poetic and Tonic for αὔξω. 

AEQ, to sleep, A. ἄεσα (ἃ or ἅ), contracted aga. 

᾿ἀηθέσσω (AHOE-), to be unused, Imperf. ἀήθεσσον, A. ἀήθεσα. 

tin (AE-), to blow, breathe, Epic, imperat, 3 sing. ἀήτω, inf. ἀῆναι an- 
μεναι, part. deis, Imperf. dv. Pass, ἄημαι, Imperf. anunv. — der 

, σι, 3 plur. an Aolicism, for ἀεῖσι. } 

ἀθερίζω, to slight, Epic, F. ἀθερίξω, A. ἀθέριξα, ἀθέρισα (oo). 

αἰδέομαι, Poetic αἴδομαι, to respect, Ἐν. αἰδέσομαι (ac), rare αἰδήσομαι, 

=P. ἥδεσμαι, A. Ρ. ἠδέσθην, A. ἠδεσάμην. ----- αἰδεῖο, imperat, 2 sing 
contracted from aidéeo, Epic. 


172 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [Ὁ 133. 


awe, rarely αἴνημι, to praise, F. αἰνέσω, αἰνέσομαι, Epic aivnow, A. 
ἦνεσα, Epic ἤνησα, P. ἥνεκα, P. P. ἤνημαι, A. P. ἠνέθην. 

aivupa, to take, Epic, Imperf. αἰνύμην. 

aipéw (‘EA-), to take, F. aipnow, rarely AG, P. ἥρηκα, Ionic ἀραίρηκα, 
P. P. ἥρημαι, lonic dpaipnua, A. Ῥ. ἡἠρέθην, 2 A. εἷλον, ἕλω, ἕλοι- 
pt, Ede, ἑλεῖν, ἑλών, 2 A. M. εἱλόμην (εἱλάμην), ἕλωμαι, ἑλοίμην, 
ἑλοῦ, ἑλέσθαι, ἑλόμενος, Ἐ᾿. M. αἱρήσομαι, rarely ἑλοῦμαι. --- γέντο, 
he seazed, 2 A. Μ. 3 sing. for ἕλετο (Εελετο). 

αἴρω (AP-), to raise, lift, F. ἄρῶ, A. ἦρα, ἄρω ἄραιμι, ἄρον, ἄραι, ἄρας, 
P, ἦρκα, P. P. ἧἦρμαι, A. P. ἤρθην, A. Μ. ἠράμην, ἄρωμαι, apaipny, 
ἀράμενος, 2 A. M. ἠρόμην, ἄρωμαι, ἄροίμην, ἄρέσθαι. ---- ἐξ- ἄρῃ; 
2 Α.. subj. 3 sing. rare and doubtful. —7#pa, A. Μ. 2sing. Beotic, 
for ἤραο ἤρω. Ὶ 

αἰσθάνομαι (AIS@-, ΑΙΣΘΕ-), to feel, perceive, F. αἰσθήσομαι, Ῥ. ἤσθη- 
μαι, Ὁ A. ῃσθόμην. 

ἀΐω, to hear, Imperf. ἄϊον, A. ἐπ-ήϊσα. 

arayice (AX-, AKAX-, AKAXE-, AXEA-, AXE-), to grieve, affiict, 

- ἀκαχήσω, P. M. ἀκάχημαι, ἀκάχησθαι, ἀκαχήμενος Or ἀκηχέμενος, 

as Present, A. ἀκάχησα, 2 A. ἤκαχον, 2 A. Μ. ἠκαχόμην. --- ἀκηχέ- 
δαται, P. M. 3 plur. Epic.—dxayeiaro, Plup. M. 3 plur. Epic. 

ἀκέομαι, to mend, F. ἀκέσομαι (oo), A. ἠκεσάμην, A. act. part. ἐξ-ακέ- 
σας; rare. — dxetdpevos, corrupt, for ἀκειόμενος Epic. 

. ἀκηδέω, to neglect, A. axndeca. 

ἀκούω (AKO-), to hear, F. ἀκούσομαι, A. ἤκουσα, P. ἄκουκα Doric, P. 
P. ἤκουσμαι, A. P. ἠκούσθην, 2 P. ἀκήκοα, 2 Plup. ἀκηκόειν, ἠκηκόειν. 

ἀκροάομαι, to listen, F. ἀκροᾶσομαι, A. nxpododpny. : 

AKQ, acuo, to sharpen, point, P. P. part. ἀκαχμένος, Epic. ᾿ 

ἀλαλάζω, to raise a war-cry, F. ἀλαλάξομαι, A. ἠλάλαξα. 

ἀλάομαι, to wander, F. ἀλήσομαι, P. ἀλάλημαι, ἀλάλησθαι, ἀλαλήμενος, 
as Present, A. ἀλήθην. 

ἀλδαίνω (AAAAN-, AAA-), alo, to nourish, increase, Poetic, Imperf. 
ἤλδανον as Aorist. 

ἀλδήσκω (AAA-, AAAE-), alo, to nourish, cause to grow, also alesco, 
to thrive, grow, A. ἀλδήσασκον iterative. 

ἀλείφω (AAI®-), to anoint, regular ; P. ἤλειφα, ἀλήλιφα, P. Ρ. ἤλειμ- 
μαι, ἀλήλιμμαι, 2 A. P. ἠλίφην. 

ἀλέξω (AAEZE-, ἀλέκω, AAK-, AAAAK-), to help, ward off, Poetic in 
the active, F. ἀλεξήσω, rarely ἀπ-αλέξω, A. ἠλέξησα, rarely ἤλεξα, 
2 A. ἤλαλκον, F. M. ἀλεξήσομαι, rarely ἀλέξομαι, A. M. ἠλεξάμην. 
— AAKA®@Q, inf. ἀλκάθειν, Imperf. ἤλκαθον, both Aoristic. 

ἀλέομαι, to shun, escape, Epic, A. ἠλεάμην, ἀλεαίμην, ἀλέασθε, ἀλέασθαι. 

ἀλεύω, to avert, protect, Poetic, F. ἀλεύσω, A. ἤλευσα, ἄλευσον, A.M 
ἀλευάμην. 

ἀλέω, to grind, F. ἀλέσω ἀλῷ, A. ἤλεσα (oo), P. ἀλήλεκα, P. P. ἀλή- 
λεσμαι, ἀλήλεμαι. , 

ἄλθομαι (ΑΔΘΕ-), to become healed, Epic, A. P. ἀλθέσθην, F. Μ. ἀλ- 
θήσομαι as Passive. é 

ἀλίνδω, ἀλίνδομαι, also ἀλινδέω, ἀλινδέομαι, to roll, A. ἤλῖσα, P. ἤλτ- 
“κα, regular. 

ἁλίσκομαι (‘AA-, ‘AAO-, AAQMI), ἐο be captured, F. ἁλώσομαι, Ῥ. ἥλω 








§ 133.] ANOMALOUS AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 17% 


ka ἑάλωκα, 2 A. ἥλων, commonly ἑάλων, ἁλῶ, ἁλοίην (ἁλῴηνῚ, GAS: 
vat, ddovs, all passive in signification. — dro, ns, η, 2 A. sabj. 
Epic. ---εὐὑάλωκεν (that is eradwxev), Perf. 3 sing. for ἑάλωκεν. 

ἀλιταίνω or ἀλιτραίνω (AAIT-, AAITE-), fo err against, A. ἀλίτησα 
rare, P. M. part. ἀλιτήμενος as an adjective, wicked, 2 A. ἤλιτον, 
2 A.M. ἠλιτόμην. 

ἅλλομαι (‘AA-), salio, to leap, spring, F. ἁλοῦμαι, A. ἡλάμην, ἅλω 
par (a), 2 A. ἡλόμην. ---- Epic forms: 2 A. M. 2 sing. ἄλσο, 
3 sing. ἄλτο; subj. 3 sing. ἄλεται ; part. ἄλμενος, only in com- 
position. 

ἀλυκτάζω (AAYKTA-), to be in distress, P. M. ἀλαλύκεημαι as Preseut. 

ἀλύσκω, ἀλυσκάζω, (AAYSKAN-, AAYK-) to shun, escape, Poetic, Im 
perf. ἀλύσκανον as Aorist, F. ἀλύξω, A. ἤλυξα. 

ἀλφαίνω (AAG-), to find, procure, bring as price, 2 A. ἦλφον. 

ἁμαρτάνω (“AMAPT-, “AMAPTE-), Zo err, miss, Εἰ, duaprnow, common- 
ly ἁμαρτήσομαι, A. ἡμάρτησα later, P. ἡμάρτηκα, P. P, ἡμάρτημαι, 
A. P. ἡμαρτήθην, 2 A. ἥμαρτον, Epic ἤμβροτον. 

ἀμβλίσκω, ἀμβλόω, (AMBA-, AMBAQMI) to miscarry, A. ἤμβλωσα, 
P. ἤμβλωκα, P. P. ἤμβλωμαι, 2 A. ἤμβλων rare. 

ἀμείρω, ἀμέρδω, to deprive, A. ἤμερσα, A. P. ἠμέρθην. 

ἀμπ-έχω, ἀμπ-ίσχω, (ἀμφί, ἔχω, ἴσχων to wrap around, clothe, Imperf. 
ἀμπεῖχον, ἄμπεχον, I. ἀμφέξω, 2 A. ἤμπισχον. Mid. ἀμπέχομαι, 
ἀμπίσχομαι, ἀμπισχνέομαι, to put on, wear, Imperf. ἠμπειχόμην, ἀμ- 
φεχόμην (1). 2 A. ἠμπισχόμην, ἠμπεσχόμην. 

ἀμπλακίσκω (AMITAAK-, AMITAAKE-, AMBAAK-), to err, miss, P. P. 
ἠμπλάκημαι, 2 A. ἤμπλακον, ἤμβλακον, part. ἀμπλακών, ἀπλακών. 

ἀμ-πνύω (AMIINYMI, ΠΝΥ-), Epic for ἀναπνέω, to recover breath, A. 
P. ἀμπνύνθην as active, 2 A. M. 3 sing. ἄμπνῦτο as active. 

ἀμύνω, to assist, ward off, regular. — AMYNA@Q, in Attic Poetry, im- 

erat. ἀμύναθε, inf. duvvabew, Mid. ἀμυναθοίμην, ἀμυνάθου, Imperf. 

ἡμύναθον, ἡμυναθόμην ; commonly with an Aoristic force. 

ἀμφιάζω, later for ἀμφιέννυμι, A. nudiaca, P. ἠμφίακα. 

ἀμφι-γνοέω, to doubt, Imperf. ἠμφιγνόουν, ἠμφεγνόουν, A. ἠμφεγνόησα, 
A. P. part. ἀμφιγνοηθείς. 

ἀμφι-έννυμι., to clothe, Imperf. ἠμφιέννυν, F. ἀμφιέσω ἀμφιῶ, A. ἠμφί- 
εσα, P.M. ἠμφίεσμαι. 

ἀμφισ-βητέω, to dispute, Imperf. ἠμφισβήτουν, ἠμφεσβήτουν, A: np- 
at rgd ἠμφεσβήτησα, P. ἠμφισβήτηκα, A. P. ἠμφισβητήθην, 

. M. ἀμφισβητήσομαι as passive. 

ἀναίνομαι (a-, AIN-), to refuse, Imperf. ἠναινόμην, A. ἠνηνάμην, ἀνή- 
vopat. 

de ahirka, ἀν-αλόω, to expend, Imperf. ἀνήλισκον, ἀνάλουν, F. ἀναλώ- 
oo, A. ἀνάλωσα, ἀνήλωσα, κατ-ηνάλωσα, P. dvddoxa, ἀνήλωκα, P. 
P. ἀνάλωμαι, ἀνήλωμαι, κατ-ηνάλωμαι, A. P. ἀναλώθην, ἀνηλώθην. 

ἀνάσσω, to reign, reguiar.—édvaooe, Imperf. 3 sing. for ἤνασσε; 
rare. 

ἁνδάνω (‘AAE-,‘AA-), to please, Ionic and Poetic, Imperf. ἥνδανον, édv- 
davov, ἑήνδανον, F. ἁδήσω, P. ἅδηκα rare, 2 A. éadov, ἅδον, Epic εὖὔ- 
adoy (that is era8ov), dda, ἁδεῖν, 2 P. gada, Doric ἔᾶδα, 2 A. M 
part. dopevos as an adjective, pleased, with pleasure. 


174 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§ 183. 


ANEOQ, ἐο trickle out, issue forth, 2 P. ἀνήνοθα as Present, 2 Pluperf. 
ae erg ἀνήνοθεν with the ending and force of the Imperfect (ᾧ 118, 
1, d) 
ἀν-έχω, to hold up, Imperf. ἀν-εἶχον, &c., as in ἔχω, Imperf. M. ἦνει- 
χόμην," 2 A. M. ἠνεσχόμην, rarely a ἀνεσχόμην. 
ἀν-οίγω, ἀν-οίγνυμι, to open, Imperf. ἀνέῳγον, ἤνοιγον, Tonic and Epic 
ἀνῷγον, F. ἀνοίξω, A. ἀνέῳξα, ἤνοιξα, onic and Epic ἀνῷξα, ἄνοιξα, 
P. ἀνέῳχα, P. P. ἀνέῳγμαι, later ἠνέῳγμαι, |e ἴ ἀνεῴχθην. later 
ἠνοίχθην, 2A. P.7 ἠνοίγην, 2 P. ἀνέῳγα as Present intransitive, to 
stand open. 
ἀν-ορθόω, to set upright, Imperf. P. ἠνωρθούμην, F. ἀνορθώσω, A. 
ἠνώρθωσα, ἀνώρῤδωσα, P. P. ἠνώρθωμαι 
ἀντάω (ΑΝΤΗΜΏ), to meet, Poetic and τως regular ; F. ἀντήσω, ἀπ- 
αντήσομαι, 2 A. 8 dual συν-αντήτην. 
ἀντ-ευ-ποιέω, to do a favor in return, regular ; P. ἀντευπεποίηκα. 
ἀντι-βολέω. to meet, supplicate, Imperf. ἠντιβόλουν, F. ἀντιβολήσω, 
A. ἀντεβόλεσα, ὀνγεβάλωσα, A. P. part. ἀντιβοληθείς. 
ἀνύω, ἀνύτω, (Ὁ) to accomplish, F. ἀνύσω(ὕ), Epic ἀνύω, A. ἤνῦσα (σσῚ, 
. ἠνῦκα, Ῥ. P. ἤνυσμαι, A. P. ἠνύσθην. — ANYMI, Imperf. 1 plur. 
ἄνυμες Doric ; Imperf. P. 3 sing. ἄνῦτο, ἤνῦτο. 
ἀνώγω, to order, request, exhort, Ionic and Poetic: Tmperf. ἤνωγον, ἢ ἠνώ- 
γεον, ἘΝ. ἀνάξω, A. ἤνωξα, 9 Ρ. ἄνωγα as Present, 2 Plup. ἠνώγειν 
as Imperfect. — Syneopated forms: 2P.1 plur. ἄνωγμεν, im- 
perat. ἄνωχθι, ἀνώχθω, avay be. 
ἀπ-αυράω (AYP-), to take away, Poetic, Imperf. ᾿ἀπηύρων as Aorist, 
2 A. part. ἀπούρας, 2 A. M. ἀπηυράμην, part. ἀπουράμενος. 
erties (A®-, ATTA®-, ATTASE-), to deceive, Poetic, F. ἀπαφήσω, 
A. ἠπάφησα, 2 A. Faacor, ἀπάφω, 2 A. M. opt. ἀπαφοίμην as 
active. 
ἀπ-έκιξαν, they blew off or away, scattered about, a defective A. 3 plur. ᾿ 
ἀπ-εχθάνομαι, ἀπ-έχθομαι, (ΕΧΘΕ-) to be hated, Imperf. ἀπήχθετο, ἘΝ. 
(ἀπεχθήσομαι, P. ἀπήχθημαι, all as passive. 
ἀπο-λαύω, to enjoy, Impert. ἀπέλαυον, ἀπήλαυον, F.. ἀπολαύσω, com- 
monly ἀπολαύσομαι, A. ἀπέλαυσα, ἀπήλαυσα, P. ἀπολέλαυκα. 
ἅπτω (‘A®-), to fasten, cause to take hold of, regular.—éag6n ot 
ἐάφθη, was fastened, A. Ῥ. 3 sing. Epic. 
ἀράομαι, to pray, regular. — APHMI, inf. ἀρήμεναι, Epic. 
ἀραρίσκω (AP-, APE-), to fit, adapt, join, Epic, | A. ἦρσα, Ρ. Μ. ἀρήρε- 
μαι, ἀρηρέμενος, A. P. ἤρθην, 2 A. ἤραρον ἀράρω, 2 A. Μ. opt. 2 
plur. ἀραροίατο as passive, part. ἄρμενος as an sapere, jitting, 
le, 2 P.a ἄρα, lonic ἄρηρα, as Present intransitive, to fit, 
2 Plup. ἀρήρειν, npnpeny as Imperfect intransitive. — dpdpvia, 2 P, 
part. fem. ag" ἀραρυῖα, Epic. — ἄρηρεν, 2 Pluperf. 3 sing. with the 
ending and force of the Imperfect active. (ὃ 118, 1,d.) —apoc- 
apiperat, P. M. subj. 3 sing. for προσ-αρηρῆται, (δ 130, n. 6.) 
ἀρέσκω (AP-, APE-), to please, F'. dpéow, A. ἤρεσα, P. dpnpexa, A. P. 
ἠρέσθην as active. 
ἀρημένος (a), oppressed, a defective P. P. part. Epic. 
ἀριστάω, to dine, regular. — Syncopated forms : "9 P. 1 pl. ἠρίστα 
μεν, inf. ἠριστάναι. 








ᾧ 133.] ‘ANOMALOUS AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 175 


ἀριστο-ποιέομαι, to dine, regular ; P. ἠριστο-πεποίημαι. 

ἀρκέω, to assist, suffice, defend, ward off, F. ἀρκέσω, A. ἤρκεσα. 

ἁρμόττω, ἁρμόζω, to fit, adjust, A. ἥρμοσα, P.M. ἥρμοσμαι, A.P. 
ἁρμόχθην later. 

ἄρνυμαι (αἴρω, AP-), fo win, earn, acquire, Imperf. ἀρνύμην, 2 A. ἠρό- 
μην, ἀρόμην, (Il. 9, 124; 8, 121.) 

ἀρόω. aro, to plough, F. ἀρόσω, A. ἤροσα, P. P. dpnpowa, A. P. 
ἠρόθην.---ἀρόωσιν, 3 plur. Epic from APAQ.—APOMI, inf. ἀρόμ- 
μεναι, Epic. 

ἁρπάζω -(‘APIIAY-), rapio, to seize, carry off, snatch, Ἐς, ἁρπάσω, 
ἁρπάσομαι, also ἁρπάξω not Attic, A. ἥρπασα, not Attic ἥρπαξα, 

. ἥρπακα, P. P. ἥρπασμαι, later ἥρπαγμαι, A. P. ἡρπάσθην, later 

ἡρπάχθην, 2. A. P. ἡρπάγην later. —‘APIIHMI, 2 A. M. part. dp- 
πάμενος. 

ἀρύω, ἀρύτω, to draw as water, A. ἤρῦσα, A. P. ἠρὕθην, ἠρύσθην. 
Mid. also ἀρύσσομαι, rare. 

ἄρχομαι, to begin, regular.— adpypevos, Pres. part. for ἀρχόμενος. 

dodopat, ἀσάω, to be sated, loathe, feel sad. be grieved, A. ἡσήθην. ---’ 
dodpevot, part. Atolic, contracted from ἀσαόμενοι. 

ἀτύζω, to terrify, Poetic, A. inf. ἀτύξαι, A. P. part. ἀτυχθείς as middle. 

avaive, to dry, regular; A. P. ἐπ-αφ-αυάνθην, implying αὑάνθην. 

αὐδάω, to speak, regular. Forms not Attic ηὔδαξα aidagaca, nidaga- 


μην. 

αὐξάνω, αὔξω, (AYZE-,-AYT-) augeo, to increase, F. αὐξήσω, A. 
ηὔξησα, P. ηὔξηκα, P. P. ηὔξημαι, A. P. ηὐξήθην, rarely (ηὔχθην) αὖ- 
x67. — αὐξουμένη, part. for αὐξομένη, in an inscription, 

AYPQ, see ἀπαυράω, ἐπαυρίσκομαι. 

avo, to shout, F. ἀὕύὔσω (Ὁ), A. ἤῦσα (Ὁ), imperat. ἀῦσον (Ὁ). 

ἀφάω, ἀφάσσω, to handle, feel, F. ἀφήσω, A. ἤφησα, ἤφᾶσα. 

ἀφ-εύω, to singe, roast, P. P. ἤφευμαι, A. P. part. dpevdeis. 

ἀφ-ιέω, Imperf. ἠφίουν, the same as ἀφίημι. 

ἀφ-ίημι, to let go, dismiss, Imperf. ἠφίην, rarely ἠφίειν, F. ἀφήσω, 

_ A. ἀφῆκα, Epic ἀφέηκα, used only in the indicative, P. ἀφεῖκα, 
P.P. ἀφεῖμαι, A. P. ἀφείθην, ἀφέθην, F. P. ἀφεθήσομαι, 2 A. 
(ἀφῆν), ἀφῶ, ἀφείην, ἄφες, ἀφεῖναι, ἀφείς, 2 A. M. ἀφείμην, ἀφέ- 
σθαι, ἀφέμενος. ‘The plural of the aorist ἀφῆκα, except ἀφῆκαν, is 
rarely used. —adinre, 3 sing. Doric for ἀφίησι. ---- a hé a, -έῃς; -έῃ, 
2 A. subj. Epic, for ἀφῶ, -7s, ἢ. ---ἀφέωνται, P. P. 3 plur. for 
ἀφεῖνται. 

ἀφύὕω, ἀφύσσω, to pour out as liquids, to draw, accumulate, F. ἀφύξω, 
A. ἠφῦσα. ᾿ 

Fidos ἀχέων, being grieved, a defective participle, Epic. 

ἄχνυμαι, ἄχομαι, to grieve, sorrow, be sad, Imperf. ἀχνύμην. 

ἄχθομαι (AXOE-), to be indignant or displeased, ¥’. ἀχθέσομαι, A. P. 
ἠχθέσθην, F. P. ἀχθεσθήσομαι equivalent to ἀχθέσομαι. 

dw, to sate, satisfy, Epic, F. dow, A. doa, loo, F. M. doopat, 3 sing. 
(ἄσεται ἄεται Grav) dara protracted, A. M. dodpnyv.— dpevas, 
inf. Epic, from HMI. 

dw, to blow, Imperf. dor. 


176 INFLECTION OF WORDS. | [§ 133. 


B. 


βάζω, to utter, F. Bafo, P. P. βέβαγμαι. 

Baiva (Baw, βιβάω, βίβημι), vado, to walk, go, F. βήσομαι, P. βέβη- 
xa, P. P. βέβαμαι, βέβασμαι, A. Ῥ. ἐβάθην, A. M. ἐβησάμην or ἐβη- 
σόμην Epic, 2 A. ἔβην, BO, Bainv; βῆθι, βῆναι, Bas, 2 a. (βεβαα), 
βεβῶ, βεβαίην, βεβάναι, βεβαώς βεβώς, 2-Plup. (ἐβεβάει). When 
it is equivalent to βιβάζω, to cause to go, it has F. βήσω, A. ἔβησα. 
—2 A. 3 dual βάτην, for ἐβήτην; 3 plur. Bacay for ἔβησαν: 
subj. βέω or βείω ; 3 sing.-8ny for 87; 1 plur. βείομεν, Doric 
Bapes (Bdopes), for βῶμεν. --- βέομαι or Beiopar, 2 A. M. subj. 
Epic, as Future, J shail live. 

βάλλω (BAAAE-, BAA-, BAA-, BAE-, BAHMI), ¢o cast, throw, hit, 
F. βαλῶ, Poetic also βαλλήσω, P. βέβληκα, P. P. βέβλημαι, A. P. 
ἐβλήθην, F. Perf. βεβλήσομαι, F. M. ξυμ-βλήσομαι, 2 A. ἔβαλον, 
Epic ἔβλην, 2 A. M. ἐβαλόμην, Epic ἐβλήμην as passive. — ὑπερ 
βαλλέειν, ξυμ-βαλλεόμενος, lonic for -βάλλειν, -BaddAdpevos. — 
P. P. 2 sing. βέβληαι, Epic; 3 plur. βεβλήαται, Epic; opt. 
2 plur. δια-βεβλῇσθε. ---- ἢ A. opt. 2 sing. Breins as passive. — 
2 A.M. 2sing. βλῇο or βλεῖο; subj. 3sing. (βλῆται) βλήεται 
protracted. 

BAPEQ, to load, render heavy, F. Bapnow, regular; 2, P. part. BeBa- 
ρηώς ds passive, Epic. . 

βάσκω, βιβάσκω, equivalent to βαίνω. ---ἐπε-βασκέμεν, inf. Epic, 
causative. : . 

βαστάζω, to carry, support, F. βαστάσω, A. ἐβάστασα, later ἐβάσταξα, 
A. P. ἐβαστάχθην. 

Bdew, to foist, A. ἔβδεσα. 

BIAQ, to force, Epic and Tonic, P. βεβίηκα, regular. 

βιβρώσκω (BOP-, BPO-, BPQMI), de-voro, ἕο eat, rare in the Pres 
ent, F. βρώσομαι, A. part. κατα-βρώξασαι, P. βέβρωκα, P. P. Be- 
Bpopa, A. P. ἐβρώθην, F. Perf. βεβρώσομαι, 2 A. ἔβρων, 2 P. part. 
βεβρώς, -Gros, contracted from βεβροώς. --- ΒΕΒΡΩΘΩ, opt. 2 sing. 
βεβρώθοις. 

βιόω (BIOMI), vivo, to live, F. βιώσω, commonly βιώσομαι, rarely 
βώσομαι, regular; 2 A. ἐβίων, Bid, βιῴην, βιώτω, βιῶναι, Brovs. — 
βιόμεσθα, Pres. 1 plur. implying βίομαι. τς 

βιώσκομαι (βιόω), to restore to life, or to be brought to life agazn, A. 
ἐβιωσάμην, ἀν-εβιωσάμην, 2 A. ἀν-εβίων intransitive, to revive. 

βλάπτω (BAAB-), to hurt, regular; F. Perf. βεβλάψομαι, 2 A. P. 
ἐβλάβην. ---βλάβομαι, for βλάπτομαι, rare. 

βλαστάνω, βλαστέω, (BAAST-) to sprout, F. βλαστήσω, A. ἐβλάστη- 
σα, P. βεβλάστηκα, ἐβλάστηκα. 

βλώσκω (MOA-, BAO-, BAQMI), to go, to come, F. μολοῦμαι, P. μέμ- 
βλωκα, βέβλωκα, 2 A. ἔμολον, rarely ἔβλων. 

βοάω (BO-), boo, to call aloud, regular. Ionic conjugation, βώσομαι, 
Baca, βέβωμαι, ἐβώσθην. : 

BOAEQ, equivalent to βάλλω, P. P. βεβόλημαι, Plup. P. ἐβεβολημην. 

βόσκω (BOSKE-), pasco, fo pasture, Ἐς, βοσκήσω, A. P. ἐβοσκί,θην 
later. Mid. βόσκομαι, vescor. 








8 133.] aNOMALOUS AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 17 


βούλομαι (BOYAE-), volo, to will, 2 sing. βούλει, Imperf. ἐβουλόμην. 
ἠβουλόμην, F. βουλήσομαι, P. βεβούλημαι, A. ἐβουλήθην, ἠβουλή- 
θην, 2 P. προ-βέβουλα as Present. — BdéreoGe, 2 plur. for βούλε- 
σθε. 
BPAXQ, to resound, ring, 2 A. ἔβραχε. 
βρέχω, to wet, regular; 2 A. P. ἐβράχην. 
BPOXQ, to swallow up, gulp, A. ἀνέβροξα, κατ-έβροξα, A. P. part. 
kata-BpoxGeis, 2 A. P. part. dva-Bpoxev. 
βρυάζω, to teem, exult, revel, shout, E Bpvdcopa, A. ἐβρύαξα. 
βρυχάομαι (BPYX-), to roar, P. βέβρῦχα as Present, to roar, A. P. 
part. Bpvyndeis, A. M. ἐβρυχησάμην. 
βυνέω, Biew, (BY-) to caulk, F. βύσω, A. ἔβυσα, P. P. βέβυσμαι. 
Pass, also βύνομαι. 
Tr. 
yapeo (TAM-), to marry, said of the man, F. (yapéow) γαμέω γαμῶ, 
later γαμήσω, A. ἔγημα, later ἐγάμησα, P. eydunka, P. P. γεγάμη- 
pat, A. P. ἐγαμήθην, part. γαμεθεῖσα. F. Μ. γαμέσσομαι, Epic, well 
procure a wife for. 
TANOQ, ἐο delight, P. P. γεγάνωμαι, A. P. ἐγανώθην as middle, to re- 
joice, 
γάνυμαι, to rejoice, be delighted, F. yavicopa (oo), P. yeydvipat. 
Li meron. yeyavew, yeyove, (TQN-) to shout aloud, call, proclaim, 
mperf. ἐγεγώνεον, ἐγέγωνον, as Aorist, F. γεγωνήσω, A. ἐγεγώνη- 
σα, 2 P. yeyova, γεγώνω, γέγωνε, γεγωνέμεν, γεγωνώς, as Present. 
γείνομαι (TEN-), nascor, éo be born, rarely to beget, Epic in the pres- 
Pence imperfect, A. ἐγεινάμην, ALolic ἐγεννάμην, to beget, give 
wrth to. 
γελάω, to laugh, F. γελάσω, commonly γελάσομαι, A. ἐγέλᾶσα, Dor- 
ic ἐγέλαξα, A. P. ἐγελάσθην. 
γελοιάω, Epic for yeAdw, regular.—yehoiavres, part. for γελοιῶντες. 
yeva, to cause to taste, yevoua, gusto, to taste, regular; A. P. ἐγεύ- 
σθην. --- γεύμεθα, Pres, 1 plur. for γευόμεθα. 
γηθέω (ΤΉΘ-, TAO-), gaudeo, to rejoice, regular; 2 P. γέγηθα, 
Doric yéya6a, as Present. — γεγᾶθέω, a new Present, Doric. 
. γηράσκω, ynpdw, (THPHMI) fo grow old, F. γηρᾶσω, γηρᾶσομαι, A. 
eynpaca, P. yeynpaxa, 2 A. ἐγήρᾶν, ynpavat, γηράς. 
γίγνομαι, γίνομαι, (TENE-, TEN-, TA-) gignor, to become, to be, ἜΝ, 
γενήσομαι, P. γεγένημαι, A. ἐγενήθην not Attic, 2 A. ἐγενόμην, 2 P. 
γέγονα (Poetic yeyaa) as middle, to be, 2 Plup. éeyeydvew (ἐγεγά- 
ev). —yeydao Oe, new Pres, 2 plur. protracted from γεγᾶσθε (ye- 
γάεσθε); 3 plur.yeydovrar as Future.—-yevro, 2 AM. 3 sing. 
for éyévero. — γεγᾶκειν, P. inf. Doric, equivalent to γεγονέναι. 
γιγνώσκω, γινώσκω, ((NO-, TNQMI) nosco, cognosco, to know, 
F. γνώσομαι, A. ἔγνωσα only in the compound ἀν-έγνωσα, P. ἔγνω- 
κα, P. P. ἔγνωσμαι, A. P. ἐγνώσθην, 2 A. ἔγνων, γνῶ, γνοίην, γνῶ- 
θι, γνῶναι, γνούς, 2. A. M. opt. 3. sing. ξυγ-γνοῖτο as active. — 
Epic forms : 2 A. 3 plur. ἔγνων, for ἔγνον, ἔγνωσαν : subj. γνώ ὡν, 
γνώομεν, γνώωσι, for γνῶ, γνῶμεν, γνῶσι : opt. 3 sing. d~yvoi 
nowt : 


8: 


178 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§ 133. 


γλύφω, scalpo, sculpo, to engrave, regular; P. P. γέγλυμμαι, 

»  €yAuppar, 2 A. P. ἐγλύφην. ἐν . sy 

yoda (TO-), to bewail, mourn, regular ; Imperf. γόον, Epic. —yo7- 
μεναι, inf. Epic, from TPOHMI. 

γράφω (ΤΡΑΦΕ-), scribo, to scratch, write, regular; P. γέγραφα, 
rarely γεγράφηκα. P. P. γέγραμμαι. rarely ἔγραμμαι, F. Perf. ye 
γράψομαι, 2. A. P. ἐγράφην. --- ypéheoy, part. Doric for γράφων. 


AAEQ (AA-, AAHMI), to teach, P. δεδάηκα as middle, to know, 2 A. 
δέδαον, 2 A. P. ἐδάην as middle, to learn, 2 P. δέδαα, to have taught, 
or to have learned. Mid. AAEOMAI, ἐο learn, F. δαήσομαι, P. de- 
Sanya. — Sanpevos, Pres. part. as an adjective, skilled. —8edda- 
σθαι, new Pres. inf. protracted from δεδᾶσθαι (SedderOar).— dja, 

eS for δῶν; ~~ ρον Ὡς ; 
ἵζω, to rend, F. δαΐξω, A. ἐδάϊξα, Ῥ. P. δεδάϊγμαι, or δέδαι tris- 
yllabic, A. P. ἐδαΐχθην. ~ Late | 

δαίνυμι, δαινύω, (AAI-, AA-) to feast, F. δαίσω, A. ἔδαισα, A. P. 
ἐδαίσθην, rarely κατα-δασθῆναι, A.M. ἐδαισάμην, ἐδασάμην. ---- δαι- 
νῦτο or δαίνῦτο, opt. 8 sing.; δαινύατο, opt. 3 plur. Ionic for 


δαινῦντο. 

δαίομαι (AA-), divido, to divide, F. δᾶσο P. δέδασ δέδαι 
hoth passively, A. P. ἐδάσθην, A. M. ἐδᾶσά ν. ΓΝ si 

Saim (AAY-, AA-), to burn, P. P. δέδαυμαι, 2 P. δέδηα as Present in- 
transitive, to burn, 2 A. P. ἐδάβην, κατ-εδάην, 2. A. M. ἐδαόμην. 

δάκνω (AHK-, AAK-), to bite, F. δήξομαι, P. P. δέδηγμαι, A. P. ἐδή- 
χθην, 2 A. ἔδακον (δέδακον). 

δαμάω (AAM-, AMA-), Poetic for δαμάζω, domo, to tame, subdue, F. 
δαμᾶσω, P. P. δέδμημαι, A. P. ἐδμήθην, F. Perf. δεδμήσομαι, 2 A. 
P. ἐδάμην. --- δαμάᾳ, δαμόωσι, F. protracted, for Saya, δαμῶσι, 
(δαμάσει, δαμάσουσι.) ----δαμήη, 2 A. P. protracted, for δαμῇ. 

δαμνάω, δάμνημι, δάμναμαι. the same as the preceding. 

δαρθάνω (AAPOE-, AAPO-), to sleep, P. δεδάρθηκα, 2 A. ἔδαρθον, ἔδρα- 
Gov, 2 A. P. ἐδάρθην, ἐδράθην, as active. 

δατέομαι, to divide, A. inf. dareac Oat. 

δέατο, δόατο, he, it appeared, A. δοάσατο, subj. δοάσσεται, defective. 

Sedoxnpevos, on the look out, watching, a defective P. M. part. Epic. 

ειἰδίσσομαι, to frighten, rarely to fear, A. ἐδειδιξάμην. 

δείδω (AEI-, diw), to fear, Epic in the present and future, F. deico- 
pa, A. ἔδεισα: Epic ἔδδεισα. P. δέδοικα, Epic δείδοικα, Doric dedoi- 
κω, as Present, to be afraid, P. P. δέδειμαι rare, F. Perf. δεδοικήσω. 
—A. περί-δδεισα, Epic for περιέδεισα ; part. ὑπο-δδείσας, 
Epic for ὑποδείσας. ---δέδοιγμεν, P. 1 plur. for dedoixaper. 

aes having taken an afternoon’s luncheon, a defeetive A. part. 

pic. 

δείκνυμε, δεικνύω, (AEIK-, AEK-) to show, F. δείξω, A. ἔδειξα, P. δέ- 
δειχα, P. P. δέδειγμαι, A. P. ἐδείχθην. Ionic conjugation, defo, 
dea, δέδεγμαι, ed€xOnv.—P. M. Seideypar, 3 plur. δεεδέχαται. 
Epic: Plup. M. 3 sing. deidexro, as Aorist; 3 plur. δειδέχατο, 
as Imperfect. 


᾿ᾧ 133.] ANOMALOUS AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 179 


δειπνέω, to sup, regular. —deSeimvapev, δεδειπνάναι, 2 P.1 plur. 
and inf, 

δέμω (AME-), fo luild, A. ἔδειμα, P. P. δέδμημαι, A. M. ἐδειμάμην. 

δέρκομαι, to look sharply, to see, Ἐς, δέρξομαι rare, A. ἐδέρχθην, 2 A. 
ἔδρακον (ἔδρακα), 2 A. P. ἐδράκην, 2 P. δέδορκα as Present. — dép- 
κειν, inf. act. 

ϑέρω, to flay, flog, regular ; 2 A. P. ἐδάρην. 

δεύομαι (AEYE-), Epic for δέομαι, F. δευήσομαι, A. ἐδεύησα. 

δέχομαι, to receive, regular; F. P. δεδέξομαι. ---- Epic forms: Pres. 
3 plur. δέχαται (dex-vrat) ; imperat. 2 sing. δέξο, 2 plur. déx Oe, 
Aoristic ; inf. δέχθαι, Aoristic; part. déypevos as Present or 
Aorist: Imperf. ἐδέγμην, I was expecting, 3 sing. δέκτο or ἔδε- 

- «to Aoristic. 

δέω, to bind, tie, F. δήσω, A. ἔδησα, P. dedexa, rarely δέδηκα, P. P. 
δέδεμαι, δέδεσμαι, A. P. ἐδέθην, F. Perf. δεδήσομαι. 

δέω (AEE-), to want, to be wanting, F. δεήσω, A. ἐδέησα, Epic ἔδησα, 
P. δεδέηκα, P. M. δεδέημαι, A. P. ἐδεήθην as middle. Mid. δέομαι, 
to need, beg. — deovpeda, F. M. for δεησόμεθα. 

Aci, debet, ἐξ is necessary, there is need, it ought, impersonal, 

δέῃ, δέοι, δεῖν; δέον, Ε'. δεήσει, A. ἐδέησε. 

δηλόω, to manifest, regular; I’. Perf. δεδηλώσομαι. 

διαιτάω, to feed, decide, F. διαιτήσω, A. ἐδιήτησα, P. δεδιήτηκα, P. P. 
δεδιήτημαι, A. P. διῃτήθην as middle. 

Staxovew, to wait upon, Imperf. διηκόνουν, F. διακονήσω, P. δεδιηκόνῃ- 
κα, P. P. δεδιηκόνημαι, A. P. ἐδιακονήθην. 

διδάσκω (AIAASKE-, AIAAX-), doceo, to teach, F. διδάξω, A. ἐδίδα- 
ξα, Epic ἐδιδάσκησα, P. δεδίδαχα, P. P. δεδίδαγμαι, A. P. ἐδιδά- 

Vv. 

δίδωμι (déw), to bind, Imperf. ἐδίδην. 

διδόω (AO-), to give, 2 sing. διδοῖς, διδοῖσθα, 3 sing. διδοῖ, Imperf 
ἐδίδουν, F. διδώσω Epic. 

διδράσκω (APA-, APHMI), to run away, used only in composition, F. 
dpacopa, A. ἔδρᾶσα, P. dedpaxa, 2 A. epay, tonic ἔδρην, dpa, 
Spainv, Spava, Spas. 

δίδωμι (διδόω, AO-), do, to give, F. δώσω, A. ἔδωκα only in the in- 
dicative, P.. δέδωκα, P. P. δέδομαι, A. P. ἐδόθην, 2 A. dar, δῶ, 
δοίην (Sony), δός, δοῦναι, δούς. The singular ἔδωκα, ἔδωκας, ἔδωκε, 
and the 3 plur. ἔδωκαν are with good writers much more common 
than the remaining forms of the aorist. On the other hand, the sin- 
gular of the 2 A. ἔδων is not used in the indicative ; except in some 
compounds, as διέδω (Xen. Cyr. 1). --- δίδωτι, 3 sing. Doric for 
δίδωσι. ---ἀπο-δεδόανθι, 2 P. 3 plur. Beotic. — Epic forms: im- 
perat. 2 sing. δίδωθι, for δίδοθι ; inf. διδοῦναι, for διδόναι: 2 A. 
subj. δώω, Sans, δώῃ or donot or δῷσι, δώομεν, δώωσε, for 
the common δῶ, δῷς, δῷ, δῶμεν, δῶσι ; inf. δόμεναι, δόμεν, for 

ος δοῦναι. --- δίδοι, imperat. for δίδοθι, “0116. 

δίζημαι (AIZE-), to seek, Ionic, δίζησθαι, διζήμενος, retains the n in the 
inflection, Imperf. ἐδιζήμην, F. διζήσομαι, A. ἐδιζησάμην. 

δίζω, to consider, φροντίζω, doubt, Imperf. ἔδιζον - Mid. δίζωμαι, equiv 
alent to δίζημαι, Sapna ἐδιζόμην." Ἶ 


180 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§ 133. 


δίημι (διά, int), to morsten, sprinkle; part. diets. Mid. δίεμαι, as ac- 
tive 

Sinut, to chase away, Imperf. 3 pl. ἐδίεσαν. Mid. δίεμαι, to speed. 

AIKQ, to fling, Poetic, 2 A. ἔδικον, dixe, δικών. 

δι-οικέω, to manage, regular. P. P. δεδιῴκημαι, rare. ; 

δίω, to fear, Epic in the present and imperfect, 2 Perf. δέδια, Epic dei- 
δια. as Present, to be afraid, dediw, δεδιείην, δέδιθι, δεδιέναι, δεδιώς, 
2 Pluperf. édediew. Mid. δίομαι, to cause to fear, to frighten, scare. 
— ἐδείδιον, δείδιεε, 2 Pluperf. with the ending and force of the 
Imperfect. 

διώκω, to pursue, regular.— ΔΙΩΚΑΘΩ, subj. διωκάθω, inf. διωκάθειν, 
Imperf. ἐδιώκαθον. 

δοκέω (AOK-), to seem, think, F. δόξω, A. dofa,P. P. δέδογμαι, A. P. 
ἐδόχθην rare. ‘The regular forms δοκήσω, ἐδόκησα, δεδόκημαι, ἐδο- 
κήθην are Poetic.—Sdoxevpevos, for δοκεόμενος, equivalent to do- 
κῶν. 

Δοκεῖ, it scems, appears, impersonal, ἘΝ. δόξει, A. ἔδοξε, Ῥ. P. δέ- 

δοκται. Poetic δοκήσει, eddxnoe, δεδόκηκε, δεδόκηται. 

δουπέω (AOYH-, ΓΔΟΥΠΕ-, ΓΔΟΥΠ-), to sound heavily, as in falling, 
Poetic A. ἐδούπησα, ἐγδούπησα, 2 A. ἔδουπον, 2 P. δέδουπα, δεδου- 
πώς fallen, dead, 

δράω, to do, F. dpaca, A. ἔδρᾶσα, P. δέδρᾶκα, P. P. δέδρᾶμαι, δέδρα- 
cpa, A. P. e3pac6nv.—8pa, as Future. (Arist. Pl. 59.) —8paoe 
pu, opt. as if from APQQ. 

APEMQ. see τρέχω. 

δρέπω, sometimes dperra, to pluck, enjoy, A. ἔδρεψα. A. P. ἐδρέφθην 
rare, 2 A. ἔδραπον, δραπών. 

δύναμαι (AYNA-), to be able, I can, Imperf. ἐδυνάμην, ἠδυνάμην, F. δυ- 
νήσομαι, P. δεδύνημαι, A. ἐδυνήθην, ἠδυνήθην, rare ἐδυνάσθην, A. M. 
ἐδυνήσατο ἘΣ ΡΟ. ---- δύνῃ, 2sing. for δύνασαι. --- δύνη αι, subj. 2 sing, 
for δύνῃ, Epic ; δυνεώμεθα, δυνέωνται, subj. lonic for δυνώμεθα, 
δύνωνται. ι 

δύνω (δύω, AYMI), in-duo, to enter, to put on, go down, set, sink, . 
A. ἔδῦνα later, P. δέδῦκα, 2 A. ἔδῦν, δύω, δύην, δῦθι, δῦναι, dvs. — 
δυνέουσι, Pres. 3 plur. Ionic. 

δύω (AYMI), to cause to enter, envelope, immerse, sink, F. δύσω (Ὁ), 
A. ἔδῦσα. P. δέδῦκα, P. P. δέδύὕμαι, A. P. ἐδύθην (ὕ), 2 A. P. ἐδύην. 
Mid. δύομαι, later ἐν-διδύσκομαι, induo, to enter, to put on, go down, 
set, sink, F. δῦσομαι, A. ἐδυσάμην, Epic ἐδυσόμην, 2 A. ἐδύμην, im- 
perat. περί-δυσο ἀπό-δυσο, rare. ᾿ 


E. 


édo, Epic cidw, to permit, let, let alone, F. ἐάσω, A. εἴᾶσα, P. εἴᾶκα, 
A. P. cian», F. Μ. ἐάσομαι as passive. 

ἐγγυάω (ἐγγύη), to betroth, proffer, Imperf. ἠγγύαον, ἐνεγύαον, A. ἢγ- 
yinoa, ἐνεγύησα, ἐνεγγύησα. P. ἠγγύηκα. ἐγγεγύηκα, P. P. ἠγγύημαι, - 
ἐγγεγύημαι, Plup. P. ἐγγεγυήμην and ἐνεγγεγυήμην, A. P. nyyentyy. 
Mid. ¢yyvdoua., to accept a proffer, bind one’s self, engage, Imp. ny 
γυώμην, ἐνεγυώμην, F. éyyunoopa, A. ἠγγυησάμην, ἐνεγγυησάμην. 
ἐγγυησάμην. 


§ 133.] ANOMALOUS AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 181 


εγείρω (ETEP-, ETP-, ETPHMI), to rouse, waken, raise, I". ἐγερῶ, A. 
ἤγειρα, P.M. ἐγήγερμαι, Plup. 3 sing. ἤγερτο, A. P. ἠγέρθην, 2 P. 
ἐγρήγορα as Present intransitive, to be awake, 2 A. (ἔγρην) imperat. 
3 sing. ἐγρέτω rare, 2 A. M. ἠγρόμην, ἔγρωμαι, ἐγροίμην, ἔγρεο 

' Epic, ἐγρέσθαι or ἔγρεσθαι, eypduevos. — Epic forms ; 2 P. 3 plur. 
ἐγρηγόρθᾶασι, as if from ἘΓΈΡΘΩ ; imperat. 2 plur. éypnyop- 
Oe; inf. ἐγρηγόρθαι or ἐγρήγορθαι. ---ἔγρονται; 3 plur. for 
ἐγείρονται. , 

ἔδω, see ἐσθίω. 

ἐείδομαι, ἐέλπομαι, ἐέργνυμι, see εἴδομαι, ἔλπομαι, ἔργνυμι. 

ἐέργω, Epic and Ionic for ἔργω εἴργω, to shut out; also for ἔργω εἵρ- 
γνυμι, to shut in, in which sense it has P. P. part. éepypeévos, closely 
compacted. —EEPTA@Q, Imperf. ἐέργαθον, as Aorist. — ἐέρχατο, 
Plup. 3 plur. lonic, for ἐεργμένοι ἦσαν. 

ἕζομαι (“EA-, ‘EAE-), sedeo, to sit, Poetic, Imperf. é€éunv as Aorist. 
For the other forms, see καθέζομαι. 

ἐθέλω (ECEAE-), to will, tv wish, F. ἐθελήσω, A. ἠθέλησα, P. ἠθέ- 
Anka. 

ἐθίζω, to accustom, ἐθίσω, εἴθισα, εἴθικα, εἴθισμαι, εἰθίσθην. 

ἔθω, suesco, to be accustomed, part. ἔθων Epic, 2 P. εἴωθα, Ionic ἔωθα, 
as Present, 2 Plup. εἰώθειν, lonic ἐώθειν, as Imperfect. — ed €O axa 
(that is, ere@oxa), P. from ESOQ. 

EIAQ (EIAE-, IAE-, IA-), video, to see, 2 A. εἶδον (εἶδα, tov), ἴδω, 
ἴδοιμι, ἴδε or ἰδέ, ἰδεῖν, ἰδών, F. ἰδησῶ Doric. Mid. εἴδομαι and ἐεί- 
Sopa, generally Poetic, to seem, appear, resemble, A. εἰσάμην and 
ἐεισάμην, εἰσάμενος OF ἐεισάμενος, 2 A. εἰδόμην or ἰδόμην, ἴδωμαι, 
ἰδοίμην, ἰδοῦ, ἰδέσθαι, ἰδόμενος rarely εἰδόμενος, generally with the 

sense of the active, J saw. 

The 2 P. οἶδα has the force of the Present, and means J know, 
2 Pluperf. ἥδειν as Imperfect, 1 knew, F. εἰδήσω, commonly εἴσομαι, 
I shall know, A. etdnoa, I knew, rare. — εὔτδε (that is eride), 2 A. 
for cide. — βιδεῖν, 2 A. inf. Laconian for ἰδεῖν. 

εἴκω, to appear, to seem, to resemble, Imperf. εἶκον as Aorist, F. εἴξω, 
2 P. ἔοικα (onic οἶκα, rare eika) as Present, ἐοίκω (oikw), ἐοίκοιμι, 
ἐοικέναι (εἰκέναι), ἐοικώς (εἰκώς), 2 Pluperf. ἐῴκειν (rarely ᾧκειν) as 
Imperfect. — Epic and Poetic : 2 P. dual ἔϊκτον, for ἐοίκατον (εἴκα- 
tov); 1 plur. ἔοιγμεν, for ἐοίκαμεν ; part. εἰοικώς, for ἐοικώς ; 
2 Plup. 3dual ἐΐκτην, for ἐῳ κείτην (εἰκείτην) ; 3 plur. ἐοίκεσαν, 
for ἐῴκεσαν. 

Ἔοικε (Oixe), it seems, appears, is likely, fitting, impersonal, 
part. εἰκός, fitting, proper, natural, reasonable, 2 Plup. ἐῴκει, as 
Imperfect. 

εἴκω, to yield, regular. — EIKA@Q, εἰκάθω, εἰκάθοιμι, εἰκάθειν, εἰκάθων, 
Imperf. εἴκαθον, all Aoristic. 

εἴλέω (OAE-), to roll, Imperf. εἴλεον, ἐείλεον, F. εἰλήσω, P. P. ἐόλημαι, 
Pluperf. P. ἐόλητο. 

εἴλυω, to wrap up, envelop, cover over, roll round, gather up, regular; 
A. εἵλῦσα, A. P. part. εἱλυσθείς, with the rough breathing. . 

εἴλω (ΕΔ-), volvo, to roll up, εἴλομαι, Epic, A. ἔλσα, ἔλσαι ἐέλσαι, 


182 ΠΟ ANFLECTION OF WORDS. [5 133. 


ἔλσας (rarely εἴλας), P. P. ἔελμαι, ἐελμένος, 2 A. P. ἐάλην and 
ἄλην (ἅ). ἀλῆναι, ἀλείς. 

εἰμί (ΕΣ-, E-, HMI), sum, to be, to exist, ὦ, εἴην, ἴσθι (ἔσο, ἔσσο), €- 
ναι, ὦν, Imperf. ἦ ἦν or ἦ, sometimes ἤμην, ΠΕ, ἔσομαι, ἐσοίμην, ἔσεσθαι, 
ἐσόμενος. Sometimes γέγονα, from γίγνομαι, is used as Perfect to 
εἰμί, (Aristot. Rhet. 1, 1, 8.) 

εἶμι (1, EI-, IMI, IHMI), €0, 20 50, I shall go, ἴω, ἴοιμι (ἰοίην), ἴθι, ἰέ- 
Ἐν ἰών, Imperf. 7 jew and ἦα, Εἰ. εἴσομαι, A. M. εἰσάμην or ἐεισάμην 

pic. 


eiviw, Epic for ἑννύω, ἕννυμε, only in composition, Imperf. κατα-είνυον, 


I covered. Mid. ἐπι-είνυσθαι. 

EIQ (Εη-,  ESII-), to say, to tell, 2 A. εἶπον (Epic ἔειπον), εἴπω, 
εἴποιμι, εἰπέ, εἰπεῖν, εἰπών. also εἶπα (Epic ἔειπα), εἴπαιμι, εἶπον 
or εἰπόν, εἶπαι, εἴπας, 2 A. Mid. εἰπάμην, ἀπ-ειπάμην, to refuse, dis- 
claim, disown, to say no. — All the forms of εἶπα, except εἶπαν, 
εἶπαι, εἴπας, are used by good Attic writers, Further, εἰπάτω, εἴπα- 
τον, εἴπατε, Of the imperative, are preferred to εἰπέτω, εἴπετον, εἴ- 
mere. The present is borrowed from φημί, λέγω, and, in certain 
connections, from ἀγορεύω : the other parts are borrowed from εἴρω, 
PEQ, which see; thus, F. ag uf εἴρηκα, Ρ. Ρ. εἴρημαι, A. P. ἐρρή- 
θην, ἀῤρέδην; ἘΣ εἰρέθην, F. Pert. εἰρήσομαι. ---- ἔσπετε, 2 Α. 
, umperat. 2 pl ur, Epic. 

as and ‘ene (EPY-, ἝΙΡΓ-), fo shut in, F. εἴρξω, A. efpéa, 

εἷργμαι, A. P αὐξοχϑὴν. 
sore < (ἔργω), arceo, to shut out, F. εἴρξω, A. εἶρξα, P. Ρ. εἶργμαι, 
. εἴρχθην (3), F. Μ. εἴδξορμας as passive. — ΕἸΡΓΆΘΩ, εἰργάθω, 
εἰργάθειν, Σ εἴργαθον, Aoristic. Mid. imperat. εἰργάθου. 
εἰρέω (εἴρω), ta say, to tell, Epic. 

εἴρομαι, rarely eipeopat, Tonic for EPOMAI, to ask, Imperf. εἰρόμην, F. 
εἰρήσομαι. 

εἰρύω, for ἐρύω. to draw, F. 2 Ἢ (ὕ), A. εἴρῦὕσα, Ρ. Ρ. εἴρῦμαι and 

εἴρυσμαι, Plup. εἰρύμην (0), A. Ρ. εἰρύσθην. Mid. εἰρύομαι (ὕ), Fiei- | 

voopa, A. . εἰρυσάμην. —EIPYMI, Pres. inf. εἰρύμεναι. Pres, 
P. 3 plur. eipvarat (vu); inf. εἴρναθϑαι: ae 9° sing. εἴρῦτο, 
3 plur. εἴρυντο. 

εἴρω (EP-), to say, to tell, not Attic in the present and imperfect, 
F. ἐρέω, ἐρῶ, F.M. a ἀπ-εροῦμαι, : shall refuse. 

εἴρω (EP-), sero, to join, eipa, P. eipxa, P. P. εἷρμαι, Ionic ἔρμαι, Epic 
«ἕερμαι, Plup. P. ἐέρμην. 

ἐΐσκω, to liken, think like, compare, 7 make similar, assimilate, causative of 
εἴκω, to be like, Imperf. fi ἤϊσκον, ἔϊσκον. Mid. P. 2 sing. ἤϊξαι, 3 sing 
ἤϊκται, equivalent to ἔοικας, ἔοικε, Plup. 3 sing. ἤϊκτο, €ixro, equiv 
alent to ἐῴκει. 

ἐκκλησιάζω ἐκκλησία), to call an assembly, regular ; Imperf. ἐκκλησία- 
Cov, ἐξεκκλησίαζον, F. ἐκκλησιάσω, A. ἐκκλησίασα, ἐξεκκλησίασα. 

ἐλαύνω, Poetic also ἐλάω, (εἴλω, EA-) to drive; F. ἐλάσω, ἐλῶ, A. 
praca, P. ἐλήλᾶκα, P. P. ἐλήλᾶμαι. ἐλήλασμαι, Plup. P. ἐληλάμην, 
ἠληλάμην, A. P. ἠλάθην (a), Tonic ἠλάσθην, A.M. ἠλασάμην transi- 
tive. -- ἐληλάδατο, P. P. 3 plur. Epic, as if from EAAAQ. — 

ἠλσάμην, A. Mid. from the radical form EAQ.—é€AnAdpevos, 
P. P. part. proparoxytone. 








"- 





§ 133.] ANOMALOUS AND DEFLCTIVE VERBS. 183 


ἐλέγχω. to examine, refute, confute, convict, regular; P.P. ἐλήλεγμαι, 
or ἤλεγμαι. 

ἐλελίξζω (edeAed), to raise a war-cry, to shout ἐλελεῦ, A. ἐλέλιξα. 

ἐλελίζω (Alcow), to twirl rapidly, to shake, Epic, A. ἐλέλιξα, A. P. 
ἐλελίχθην as middle, A. M. ἐλελιξάμην, to wharl one’s self, coil one’s 
self.— ἐλέλικτο, Imperf. 3 sing. for ἐλελίζετο, sometimes Ao- 
ristic, 

EAEYOQ, see ἔρχομαι. 

ἑλίσσω or ἑλίττω (‘EAIK-), to twirl, F. Aiéo, A. εἵλιξα, P.P. eDe- 
γμαι, later ἐλήλιγμαι, A. P. εἱλίχθην. 

ἑλκόω, ulcero, to ulcerate, regular ; Plup. P. εἱλκώμην, A. P. εἰλκώ- 
θην, not Attic. 

ἕλκω (EAKY-), vello, vellico, to pull, F. ἕλξω, Axiow, A. εἷλξα, 
εἵλκῦσα, P. εἵλκυκα, P. P. εἵλκυσμαι, A. P. εἵλκύσθην. --- ἧλκον, 
Imperf. for εἷλκον. 

ἔλπω, to give hope, Epic, 2 Perf. ἔολπα as_ Present middle, ἐο hope, 
2 Pluperf. ἐώλπειν as Imperfect middle, I hoped, was hoping. Mid. 
ἔλπομαι, ἐέλπομαι, to hope, expect, Imperf. ἐλπόμην, ἐελπόμην. 

EAYQ, volvo, to roll, Epic, A. P. ἐλύσθην, part. ἐλυσθείς. 

*EAQ, see aipéo. 

ἐμέω, vomo, to vomit, F. ἐμέσω, ἐμέσομαι ἐμοῦμαι, A. ἤμεσα, Epic 
ἤμησα, P. ἐμήμεκα, Pluperf. ἐμεμέκειν later, P. P. ἐμήμεσμαι. 

ἐμ-πεδόω, to confirm, regular ; Imperf. ἠμπέδουν. 

ἐμ-πολάω, to traffic, F. ἐμπολήσω, A. ἠμπόλησα, P. ἠμπόληκα, later 
ἐμπεπόληκα, P. P. ἠμπόλημαι, Ionic ἐμπόλημαι. , 

évaipw (ENAP-), to slay, A. M. ἐνηράμην, 2 A. ἤναρον. 

ἐν-αντιόομαι, to oppose, regular ; P. P. nvavriopa, A. P. ἠναντιώθην. 

ἐναρίζω, to slay, Poetic, F. ἐναρίξω, A. ἐνάριξα, ἠνάρισα, P. P. nva- 
ρίσμαι. 

ENETKQ (ENEK-), see φέρω. 

ENE@Q, to sit, to rest upon, 2 P. ἐπ-ενήνοθε, xat-evnvobe, as Present, 
2 Pluperf. 3 sing ἐπ-ενήνοθε, xat-evnvobe, with the ending and force 
of the Imperfect. (ᾧ 118, 1, d.) 

ENEIKQ (ENEK-), see φέρω. 

ἐνέπω Or ἐννέπω, rarely ἐνίπτω, (EII-, ENIII-, ENISTE-, ENISI-) in 
quam, ἐο tell, say, Poetic, Imperf. ἔνεπον, ἔννεπον, F. éraypo 
ἐνισπήσω, 2 A. ἔνισπον, ἐνίσπω, ἐνίσποιμι, ἔνισπε, ἐνισπεῖν. 

ἐνίπτω or ἐνίσσω (ΕΝΙΠ-, ΕΝΙΣΠ-), to chide, Poetic, 2 A. ἐνένισπον 
or évevizrov, also ἠνίπαπον. 


ἕννυμι and ἑννύω (‘E-), vestioy to clothe, Poetic, F. ἔσω, A. éca. 


Mid. ἔννυμαι, to put on, Imperf. ἑννύμην, F. ἔσομαι, P. εἷμαι, ἕσμαι, 
Plup. ἕσμην, ἑέσμην, A. ἑσάμην, ἑεσάμην. 

ἐν-οχλέω, to annoy, vex, Imp. ἠνώχλεον, F. ἐνοχλήσω, A. ἠνώχλησα, 
P. ἠνώχληκα, P. P. ἠνώχλημαι. 

ἑορτάζω, lonic ὁρτάζω, to celebrate a festival, Imperf. ἑώρταζον, F’. éop- 
taco, A. ἑώρτασα, ἑορτάσαι. 

ἐπ-αυρίσκω or ἐπ-αυρέω (AYP-), to enjoy, hit, Poetic and Ionic, F’. M. 
ἐπαυρήσομαι, 2 A. ἐπαῦρον, 2 A. M. ἐπηυρόμην or ἐπαυράμην. 

ἐπι-μέλομαι Or ἐπι-μελέομαι, to take care of, F'. ἐπιμελήσομαι, &e., all 
from the second form. 


184 INFLECTION OF WORDS. L$ 133 


ἐπ-ΐσταμαι (ἘΠΙΣΤΑ-, ἐπί, 1A-), to know, understand, learn, Imperf. 

ἠπιστάμην, EF. ἐπιστήσομαι, A. ἠπιστήθην. --- ἐξ-επίστεαι, 2 sing. 
onic, for ἐξ-επίστασαι. 

ἕπω (SEII-), to be employed, to be after any thing, Imperf. efrov, A. P. 
περι-έφθην, 2 A. ἔσπον, σπεῖν, σπών. Mid. ἕπομαι, sequor, to 
follow, Imperf. εἱπόμην, F. ἕψομαι, A. ἑψάμην rare, 2 A. (ἐσπόμηνῚ, 
σπῶμαι, σποίμην, σποῦ, σπέσθαι, σπόμενος.---σπεῖο, 2 A. imperat. 

. Epic, for σπέο σποῦ. ---σπείομεν, 2 Δ. subj. 1 plur. Epic, from 
ae Pies Ἔ Impeitt. Solfo, ἂν 

ἔραμαι, Poetic for ἐράω, Imperf. ἠράμην, A. ἠρασάμην. --- ἔρᾶται, 

perry 3 sing. Fike or Dorie, coated from ee δι . 


inTat. 
ἐράω (a), to be passionately fond of, to be in love, ως ἤραον, A.P.. 


ἠράσθην, F.P. ἐρασθήσομαι, both as active. 

ἐργάζο to work, do, Imp. εἰργαζόμην, F. ἐργάσομαι, P. εἴργασμαι; 
A. ῥ᾽ ἀρνόσϑην passive, A. Μ. εἰργασάμην. ---ἐξ-ηργάσατο, A. 
Μ. 3 sing. later. 

ἔργνυμι, ἐσ-έργνυμι, for εἴργνυμι, εἰσ-είργνυμι, Imperf. ἐέργνυν. 

EPTQ, see ἕρδω, fo do. 

ἕργω or épyw, the theme of εἵἴργνυμι, to shut in, not found in the pres- 
ent, F. ἔρξω, ξυν-έρξω, ἐφ-έρξω, ἀφ-έρξω, A. épéa or ἔρξα, P. P. 
ἔργμαι, A. P. ἔρχθην. --- Epic P. P. 3 plur.€pxarac; Plup. 3 plur. 
ἔρχατο. 

ἔργω, the original form of εἴργω, arceo, to shut out, A. ἔρξα, ἄπ-ερξα, 

. P. épypat, ἄπ-εργμαι, FM. ἔρξομαι as passive. — EPFA@Q, Pec 
re imperat. ἐργάθου transitive, Imperf. ἔργαθον, ἐργαθόμην, as 
orist. 

ἕρδω or ἔρδω (EPT-), to do, work, Ionic and Poetic, Imperf. épdov, ἔρ- 
δον, F. ἔρξω, A. ἔρξα. 2 P. ἔοργα, 2 Plup. ἐώργειν, lonic edpyea. — 
ἔοργᾶν, 2 P. 3 plur. for edpyact. 

ἐρείδω, to prop, regular; P. M. ἤρεισμαι, ἐρήρεισμαι, later ἠρήρει- 
opat, Plup. npnpeiopnv. —Epic forms: P. 3 plur. ἐρηρέδαται, or 
ἐρήρεινται, Plup. 3 plur.épypédaro, or ἡρήρειντο. 

ἐρείκω (EPIK-), rumpo, Zo rend, tear, burst, break in pieces, A. ἤρει- 
éa, rare ἤριξα, Ῥ. Ρ. ἐρήριγμαι, 2 A. ἤρικον, commonly intransitive, 
to be rent, torn, burst, broken in pieces. 

ἐρείπω (EPII-), to cast down, F. ἐρείψω, A. ἤρειψα, P. P. ἐρήρειμ- 
pa, Pluperf. P. 3 sing. ἐρέριπτο, 2 A. ἤριπον, 10 fall down, 2 A. 


P. ἠρίπην, 2 P. ἐρήριπα as passive, to have fallen, A. M. ἀν-ηρειψά- 


μην, 2 A. ἠριπόμην as passive, later. 


ἐρεύθω, ἐρυθαίνω, ἐρυθραίνω, (ἘΡΥΘ-) to redden, A. ἔρευσα, ἐρύθηνα, 


2 A. Ρ. opt. ἐρευθείην. 
ἐρέω, or ἐρέομαι, to ask, Epic.— pero, imperat. 2 sing. contracted 
from épéeo, with the accent on the antepenult. 


ἐριδαίνω, ἐριδμαίνω, (EPIAE-), for ἐρίζω, A. épidnva, A. M. ἐριδήσα- 


σθαι. 

ἐρίζω, to quarrel, F. ἐρίσομαι, regular; P.M. ἐρήρισμαι, as Present 
active. 

EPOMAI (ἐρέομαι), to ask, question, F. ἐρήσομαι, 2 A. ἠρόμην, ἔρω- 
μαι, ἐροίμην, ἐροῦ, ἐρέσθαι or ἔρεσθαι, ἐρόμενος ; the rest is borrowed 
from ἐρωτάω. 


a ey 


—: 





§ 133.] ANOMALOUS AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 185 


épri¢e, another form of pre, A. etprvca. 

ἕρπω, serpo, to creep, Imperf. eiprov, F. ἔρψω. 

ἔρρω (EPPE-, EP-), to go to destruction, 1’. ἐρρήσω, A. ἤρρησα, (subj. 
3 sing. ἀπο-έρσῃ, Opt. 3sing. ἀπο-έρσειε, both Epic,) P. ἤρρηκα. 

ἐρυγγάνω (EPYTQ), erugo, ructo, zo eruct, 2 A. ἤρυγον. 

épuxa, to keep back, regular ; 2 A. ἠρύκακον, Epic. 

épva, to draw, pull, Epic, Imperf. ἔρυον, F. (ἐρύσω) ἐρύω, A. epiaa, 
F. M. (ἐρύσομαι) ἐρύομαι. ---- EPYMI, Pres. M. 3 sing. ἔρῦται, inf. 
ἔρυσθαι, Imperf. 2 sing. ἔρῦσο, 3 sing. ἔρῦτο, 3 plur. ἔρυντο. 

ἔρχομαι (EAEYO-, EAYO-, EAO-), tu come, to go, F. ἐλεύσομαι; 
2 P. ἐλήλυθα, Epic εἰλήλουθα, rarely ἤλυθα, ἐλήλουθα, 2 A. ἤλυθον 
Poetic, commonly ἦλθον, ἔλθω, ἔλθοιμι, ἐλθέ, ἐλθεῖν, ἐλθών, to 
ΘΟ. ---εἰλήλουθμεν, 2 P. 1 plur. Epic for εἰληλούθαμεν. --- 
ἐλήλυμεν, ἐλήλυτε, 2 P, for ἐληλύθαμεν, ἐληλύθατε. 

ἐσθίω, sometimes ἔσθω, ἔδω, (EAE-, ΦΑΓ-) edo, ἐο eat, F. ἔδομαι, 
later ἐδοῦμαι, φάγομαι, P. ἐδήδοκα, P. P. ἐδήδεσμαι, rarely ἐδήδεμαι, 
Epic ἐδήδομαι, A. Ρ. ἠδέσθην, 2 A. ἔφαγον, 2 P. ἔδηδα Epic. — 
ἔδμεναι, Pres, inf. Epic for ἐδέμεναι, ἔδειν. 

ἕσπομαι (ἔπομαι), to follow, ἔσπωμαι, ἑσποίμην, ἑσπέσθω, ἕσπεσθαι 
(ἑσπέσθαι 1), Imperf. ἑσπόμην usually as Aorist. 

ἑστιάω (ἑστία), to feast, I. ἑστιᾶάσω, A. εἱστίασα, P. εἱστίᾶκα, P. M 
εἱστίαμαι, A. P. εἱστιᾶθην. 

evdo (“EYAE-), to sleep, Imperf. εὗδον, nidov, F. εὑδήσω. 

εὐεργετέω (εὐεργέτης), to do good, benefit, Imperf. einpyéreov, evep- _ 
yeteov, I, εὐεργετήσω, A. εὐηργέτησα, εὐεργέτησα, P. εὐηργέτηκα, 
εὐεργέτηκα, P. P. εὐηργέτημαι, evepyernpat. 

evvaw, to put to bed, regular; A. P. εὐνήθην, rarely εὐνέθην. 

εὑρίσκω (‘EYP-), to find, F. εὑρήσω, P. εὕρηκα, P. Ps εὕρημαι, A. P. 
εὑρέθην, 2 A. εὗρον (εὗρα), 2 A. M. εὑρόμην (εὑράμην). ---εὕρειαν, 
2 A. opt. 8. plur. with the ending of the aorist, 

εὐτυχέω, to prosper, regular. — εὐτύχεσα, A. later for εὐτύχησα. 

εὔχομαι, to pray, regular. —etypevos, part. for edyduevos. — εὖκτο, 
mperf. 3 sing. for εὔχετο, Aoristic.— «td xovpnyv, lmperf. later for 
εὐχόμην. 

ἐχθοδυπῆσαι, to have a contention with, a defective A. inf. 

ἔχθω, to hate, Poetic, used only in the present. Pass. ἔχθομαι, Imperf. 

ο΄ χθόμην. 

' Exe (exo, OX-, SEX-, SXE-, SXHMI), ¢o have, Imperf. εἶχον, F. ἔξω, 

σχήσω, P. ἔσχηκα, Ῥ. Ῥ. ἔσχημαι, A. P. ἐσχέθην, 2 A. ἔσχον, σχῶ, 

σχοίην (σχοῖμι), σχές, σχεῖν, σχών, 2 A. Μ. ἐσχόμην, σχῶμαι, σχοί- 

μην, σχοῦ, σχέσθαι, σχόμενος, 2 Ἐ. part. συν-οχωκώς. ----αἴχεε, lm- 

perf. 3 sing. loniec for εἶχε. --- ἔγμεν, inf. Epic for ἐχέμεν. -- eto χη- 

pat, P. P. later for ἔσχημαι. ----ἐπ- ὦχατο, Plup. δ᾽ 3 ΡΙυγ. --ΣΧῈ- 

ΘΩ, σχέθω, σχέθοιμι, σχέθε, σχέθειν (pic σχεθέειν), σχέθων, Im- 

* perf. ἔσχεθον, all Aoristic. 

 ἔψω (‘EVE-, ‘EII-), to cook, ἘΝ, ἑψήσω, ἑψήσομαι, A. ἥψησα (Hwa), 

P.P. ἥψημαι, A. ἡψήθην (part. ἑφθέντες rare). — epee, Imperf. 

___ Ionie, 3 sing. for fe. 

‘EQ, to seat, set, A. εἷσα. ἕσα, εἷσον, éoas or eicas. Mid. ‘EOMAI, to 

seat one’s self, to sit, F. εἴσομαι, ἔσομαι, P. ἣμαι as Present, to sit, 








186 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [8 133. 


ἧσο, ἧσθαι, ἥμενος, Pluperf. ἥμην as Imperfect, A. εἱσάμην, ἑσάμην, 
ἑεσάμην, to place, erect, build, ἕσσαι, εἱσάμενος, ἑσσάμενος. ---- ἴῃ the 
Perfect and Pluperfect, 8 sing. ἧσται, ἣ στο are more common than 
the regular ἧται, fro. — ἕαται, Plup. M. 3 plur. for ἧνται. ---εἴατο 

or ἕατο, Plup. M. 3 plur. for ἧντο. 
ἕωνται, see ἀφίημι. 
Φ . A 


ζάω (ZHMI), to live, imperat. ζῆ, ζῆθι, inf. ζῆν, Imperf. ἔζαον, also 
ἔζην in the first person singular, F. ζήσω, ζήσομαι, A. ἔζησα, P. ἔζη- 
xa, later. : 

ζεύγνυμι, ζευγνύω, (ZEYT-, ZYT-) jungo, to yoke, F. ζεύξω, A. ἔζευ- 
fa, P. P. ἔζευγμαι, A. P. ἐζεύχθην, 2A. P. ἐζύγην. --- Cevyviper, 
Pres. inf. Epic for ζευγνύναι. --- ζευγνύην, opt. act. 

ζέω, later ζέννυμι, ζεννύω, to boil, commonly intransitive, F. ξέσω, A. 
ἔζεσα, P. ἔζεκα, P. P.€feopar, A. P. ἐζέσθην. 

ζώννυμι, ζωννύω, (ZO-) to gird, F. ζώσω, A. ἔζωσα, P. ἔζωκα, P. P 
ἔζωσμαι, A. P. ἐζώσθην. : 


H. 

ἡβάω, to be at the age of puberty, to be vigorous, also ἡβάσκω, to ap- 
proach the age of puberty, F. ἡβήσω, A. ἥβησα, P. ἥβηκα. ---- ἩΒΩΩ, 
opt. ἡ βώοιμι. 

ἠθέω (ΗΘ-), to strain as fluids, regular; A. part. ἦσας, in Galen. 

npi (φημί). inguam, say I, I say, colloquial, Imperf. ἦν, 7, in the 
phrases ἦν δ᾽ ἐγώ, said I, ἢ δ᾽ ὅς, said he. But 9, he said, is used by 
the Epic Poets without the appendage δ᾽ és. — ri, 3 sing. Doric. 

ἠμύω (v, rarely Ὁ), to bow down, A. ἤμῦσα, P. 3 sing. ὑπ-εμνήμῦκε, 
are bent down. 

ἠσθημένος, lonic ἐσθημένος, (ἐσθής, vestis) clothed, a defective P. P. 
part., Plup. 3sing. ἤσθητο, he had on, was clothed in, later. 


8. 

θάλλω (OAA-, GAAAE-, OAAE-), to bloom, F. θαλλήσω, will give birth 
to, F. M. θαλήσομαι, later, 2 A. ἔθαλον, 2 P. τέθηλα as Present. — — 
τεθᾶλυϊα, 2 P. part. Epic for τεθηλυῖα. 

θάομαι, to gaze at, a Doric verb, imperat. θάεο, θᾶσθε, F. θάσομαι; θα- © 
σοῦμαι, A. ἐθασάμην, θησαίμην, θᾶσαι, θάσασθαι. ----θάοντα, part. 
act. acc. ---σαωμένη, part. Laconian, for θαομένη. ---ἐσάμεθα͵ 
Tmperf. 1 plur. Laconian for ἐθαόμεθα. : 

θάπτω (ΘΑΦ-), to bury, F. θάψω, Ῥ. τέταφα, Ῥ. Ρ. τέθαμμαι, A.P. 
ἐθάφθην rare, 2 A. ἐτάφην, F. Perf. τεθάψομαι. ----τεθάφαται, 
P. P. 3 plur. Ionic. 

ΘΑΦΩ, ΘΗΦΩ, to be astonished, Ionic, P. τέθαφα, to astonish ; but ré- 
θηπα as Present intransitive, to be astonished, Pluperf. ἐτεθήπεα as 
Imperfect intransitive, 2 A. ἔταφον. 

@AQ, to suckle, Epic, A. ἔθησα. Mid. (θάεσθαι) θῆσθαι, to milk, A. 
ἐθησάμην, to suck, also to suckle, 

θείνω (GEN-), to smite, Poetic, Imp. ἔθεινον, F. θενῶ, A. ἔθεινα, 2 A. 
ἔθενον, θένω, θένε, θενεῖν, θένων (θενών). ᾿ 





§ 133.] ANOMALOUS AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 187 


θέλω {OEAE-), the same as ἐθέλω, F. θελήσω, A. ἐθέλησα, P. τεθέλη- 
ka later, 

sie a to warm one’s self, Poetic, F. θέρσομαι, 2A. P. ἐθέρην as 
muadie, 

θέσσασθαι, to obtain by prayer, to pray that it may be, found only in 
the A. M. 3 plur. θέσσαντο, and part. θεσσάμενος. 

θέω (GEY-), to run, Ἐς, θεύσομαι, later θεύσω. δ 

béw, to put, see τίθημι. 

θιγγάνω (ΘΙΓ-), tango, to touch as with the hand, F. θέξομαι, 2 A. 
ἔθιγον (réOryor). ! 

θλάω, to bruise, break, F. θλᾶσω, A. ἔθλᾶσα, P. P. τέθλασμαι, Doric 

᾿ς τέθλαγμαι. 

 θλίβω, to squeeze, regular; 2 A. P. ἐθλίβην. 

 θνήσκω (OAN-, ONA-, ONHM1I), ἐο be dying, to die, F. θανέομαι θανοῦ- . 

pat, P. τέθνηκα, I. Perf. τεθνήξω, τεθνήξομαι, 2 A. ἔθανον, also ἔθνην 

rare, 2P.(réOvaa), τεθναίην, τέθναθι, τεθνάναι, tebvems, 2 Plup 

(éreOvaew). — re Ovaxny, P. inf. A®olic, for τεθνηκέναι. 

- Gowdw (OOINIZ-), to entertain festively, Imperf. ἐθοίναον, I feasted, 

intransitive, A. ἐθοίνισα, A. P. ἐθοινήθην as middle. Mid. θοινάο- 

pat, to feast, feast upon, I. θοινήσομαι or θοινᾶσομαι, P. τεθοίνᾶμαι, 

A. ἐθοινησάμην. 

- 800, to feast, entertain. Mid. θῶται, θῶνται, θῶσθαι, θωμένους, to 

feast, eat, Doric forms, contracted from θόεται θόονται θόεσθαι θοομέ- 

vous, Εἰ, θώσομαι, P. τέθωμαι, A. ἐθώθην, A. M. inf. θώσασθαι. 

| Opaocw (OPAX-), to disturb, A. ἔθραξα, θρᾶξαι, Ῥ. τέτρηχα as Pres- 

_ ent intransitive, to be tumultuous, Pluperf. érerpnyew as Imperfect 
~ intransitive, A. P. ἐθράχθην, F. M. θραξοῦμαι. 

Ν: gers to crumble, regular ; P. P. τέθραυμαι, réOpavopa, A. P. ἐθραύ- 

᾿ς σθῆην. 

| θρύπτω (ΘΡΥΦ-), to crumble, A. ἔθρυψα, P.M. τέθρυμμαι, A. P. ἐθρύ- 

1 dnv, 2 A. P. ἐτρύφην. 2 

| Opacxw (ΘΟΡ-, OPO-), to leap, spring, jump, F. θορέομαι θοροῦμαι 

_ 2A. eopov (τέθορον). 

| Gia, and θῦνω, to rage, rush, move rapidly, Imperf. é6vov, ἔθῦνον, F. 

—« Obaw, rap-bicoa, A. ica. 

| Ova, to sacrifice, F. θύσω, A. ἔθῦσα, P. τέθὕκα, Ῥ. Ῥ. τέθὑὕμαι, A. P. 

| érvOnv, A. M. ἐθυσάμην. 




















I 
idx, iayéo, (AX-) to shout, Imp. ἴαχον, F.iaynow, A. ἰάχησα, P. part. 
fem. ἀμφ-ιαχυῖα as Present, screaming around. 
| i8pdw, sudo, to sweat, regular. —‘IAPAQ, opt. 3 sing. ἱδρῴη ; part. 
| idSpeovras (idpavras), Epic ; part. fem. δρῶ σα. --- ἽΔΡΩΩ, part. 
| fem. idpaovea. 
| pve, ‘IAPYNQ, 0 seat, locate, F. ἱδρύσω, Α. ἵδρῦσα, P. P. ἵδρῦμαι, 
| A. P. ἱδρύθην or ἱδρύνθην. 
ἢ tepar (εἶμι), to hasten, Imperf. ἰέμην. . 
ἢ ἕω (‘E-), to send, μεθ-ιέω, inf. iciv, ξυνιεῖν, Imperf. tour. 

ἵζω, ἱζάνω, (Copa, “IZE-) to seat, place; also to sit, Imperf. ifov, A. 
itnoa, Ῥ. ἵζηκα. Mid. ἵζομαι, to sit, Εἰ, καθ-ιζήσομαι. 


188 INFLECTION OF WORDS. — [§ 138. 


ἴημι (iw, “E-), to send, Imperf. ἴην, F. ἥσω, Epic also ἀν-έσω, A. ἧκα 
only in the indicative, Epic ἕηκα only in composition, ἀφ-έηκα, ἐφ- 
énxa, Evv-énxa, also opt. ἀν-έσαιμι, P. etka, P. P. εἷμαι, A. P. εἴθην or 
eOnv, ἑθῶ, F. P. ἑἐθήσομαι, A. M. ἡκάμην rare in Attic, used only in 
the indicative, 2 A. ἣν, ὦ, εἴην, és, εἶναι, cis, 2A. M. εἵμην or ἔμην, _ 
Spat, εἵμην, (ἔσο ἕο) οὗ, ἔσθαι, ἕμενος. The singular ἧκα ἧκας ἧκε 
and the 3 plur. ἧκαν are with good writers much more common than 
the remaining forms of the aorist. On the other hand, the singular 
of the 2 A. ἣν is not used in the indicative. —€oxa, pac or 
ἕομαι, Perf. with the syllabic augment, for cixa, eiva:; 3 plur. 
ἕωνται, ἀφ-έωνται, adv-€wvrat Or ἀνέονται, for εἷνται, ἀφεῖν- 
ται, ἀνεῖνται.---προ-οἴτο, 2 A. Μ. 8 sing. for προ-εῖτο. 

ἱκάνω (ἵκω), to come, to have come, Poetic, Imperf. ἵκᾶνον as Aorist. 

ἱκνέομαι (ἵκω), to come, to arrive, F’. ἵξομαι, Ῥ. ἵγμαι, 2 A. ἱκόμην. Prose- 

᾿ writers use the compound ἀφικνέομαι. ---- κτο, ixpevos, 2A. M. 
for ἵκετο, ixdpevos. 

ἵκω (<), to Come, Epic Imp. fkov, A. ἷξον. 

ἱλάσκομαι, rarely ἱλέομαι, ἱλεόομαι, Epic dopa, to propitiate, F. ἱλᾶ- 
copa, later Epic ἱλάξομαι, A. P. ἱλάσθην passively, A. M. ἱλᾶσά- 
μην, later Epic ἱλαξάμην. 

ἵλημι (ἱλάομαι), to be propitious, imperat. ὕλᾶθι, ἵληθι, P. (ληκα) ἱλή- 
κω, ἱλήκοιμι, as Present. Mid. ἵλαμαι equivalent. to ἱλάσκομαι. 

ἱππο-τροφέω, to keep horses, regular ; Ῥ. ἱππποτρόφηκα and καθ-ιπποτε- 
τρόφηκα. τ 

ἵπταμαι (πετάομαι, ΠΤΑ-, ἹΠΤΗΜΙ), fo fly as a bird, Imp. ἱπτάμην, 

. πτήσομαι, 2 A. ἔπτην, πταίην, πτῆναι, mrds, 2 A. M. ἐπτάμην, 

πτῶμαι, πτάσθαι, mrapevos. 

ἴσᾶμι (IZA-), to know, a Doric verb, 2 sing. ἴσης ; 3 sing. ἴσᾶτι, 1 plur. 
ἴσαμεν, 2 pl. ἴσατε, 3 pl. ἴσαντι, part. ἴσας (not ἰσάς), ALolic ἴσαις. 
-ἰσᾶντι, subj. 3 plur. contracted from ἰσάωντι. 

ἴσκω for ἐΐσκω, Imperf. ἴσκον. 

ἱστάω, the same as ἵστημι, Imperf. ἵστων. 

ἵστημι (STA-), statuo, to cause to stand, set up, erect, raise, place, sta- ὦ 
tion, στήσω, A. ἔστησα, P. ἕστηκα as Present intransitive, sto, to — 
stand, later ἕστἄκα active, Pluperf. ἑστήκειν or εἱστήκειν as Imperfect 
intrausitive, was standing, P. P. éoraya rare, A. P. ἐστἄθην, ἘΝ, 
Perf. ἑστήξω, ἑστήξομαι, shall stand, as future to ἕστηκα, 2 P. (€oraa), — 
ἑστῶ, ἑσταίην, ἕσταθι, ἑστάναι, ἑστώς, as Present intransitive, to — 
stand ; 2 Pluperf. (éordew) as Imperfect intransitive, was standing, 
2A. ἔστην, στῶ, σταίην, στῆθι, στῆναι, ards. — ξυν-ιστοῖτο, opt. 
3 sing. for ξυν-ισταῖτο. ---ἔστἄσε, A.3sing. for ἔστησε ; 3 plur. 
ἔστἄἅσαν, for ἔστησαν. --.«ἐστἄάθην, A. P. for ἐστἄθην. : 

In some compounds whose middle is intransitive, the Perfect 

active may be translated as a real perfect; as ἀνίστημι, to set up, 
ἀνίσταμαι, to rise up, ἀνέστηκα, to have risen up. 

ἴσχω (ἔχω), to have, hold fast, F. σχήσω, P. ἔσχηκα, &ce., as in ἔχω. 
—ioyes, imperat. 2 sing. for ἔσχε, formed after the analogy of 
σχές, Aine ἔχω. 

ἴω (Ω), another form of ἵἴημι, found only in composition, ἀφίω, ἀφί- 
oyu, Imperf. ξύν-ιον, P. P. part. μεμετ-ιμένος, from μεθίημι. 














§ 133.] ANOMALOUS AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 189 


καθ-έζομαι (ἔζομαι, ἝΔΕ-, “EA-), to sit down, Imperf. ἐκαθεζόμην, Poet- - 
ic also καθεζόμην, usually as Aorist, F. καθεδοῦμαι, later καθεδήσο- 
pa, A Ρ. ἐκαθέσθην as middle, F’. P. καθεσθήσομαι as middle. 
καθ-εύδω (eda, ‘EYAE-), to sleep, Imp. ἐκάθευδον, καθεῦδον, or καθηῦ- 
δον, Εἰ, καθευδήσω, A. καθεύδησα. 
κάθ-ημαι (Ἕ-, fac), Perf. of ἝΩ, as Present, to sit, sit down, κάθωμαι, 
καθοίμην, κάθησο, καθῆσθαι, καθήμενος, Plup. ἐκαθήμην, καθήμην, as 
Imperfect. —xd6n, 2 sing. later for κάθησαι. ---καθήμεθα, opt. 
1 plur.— x«a@ov, imperat. 2 sing. contracted from κάθεο, later for 
Kabnoo. 
καθ-ίζω (ἵζω, “IZE-), to set, place, F. καθίσω, καθιῶ, A. ἐκάθισα, P. M. 
κεκάθισμαι rare, I’. M. καθιζήσομαι, A. M. ἐκαθισάμην. 
καίνυμαι (KAA-), to excel, to be distinguished, Poetic pos ἐκαινύμην, 
᾿ς Ρ, κέκασμαι, κεκάσθαι, κεκασμένος and κεκαδμένος, Plup. ἐκεκάσμην. 
καίνω (ΚΑΝ-), fo kill, Poetic, F. cava, 2 A. ἔκανον, 2 P. κέκαναϊ 
καίω also Kaw (KAY-, KE-), to burn, F. καύσω, καύσομαι, A. éxavoa, 
Poetic ἔκεα, Epic ἔκηα or ἔκεια, P. κέκαυκα, P. P. κέκαυμαι, A. P. 
ἐκαύθην, 2 A. P. ἐκἄην. ---καυθήσωμαι, F. P. subj. 
καλέω (KAA-, KAA-), to call, F. καλέσω καλέω καλῶ, A. ἐκάλεσα, P. 
κέκληκα, P. P. κέκλημαι, A. P. ἐκλήθην, rare ἐκαλέσθην, F. Perf. κε- 
κλήσομαι. --- P. P. opt. 2 sing. κεκλῇο, 1 plur. kexAnpe da. 
Kanye, inf. καλήμεναι, for καλέω, καλεῖν. 
κάμνω (KAM-, KMA-), to labor, F. καμέομαι καμοῦμαι, P. κέκμηκα, 
_ 2A. ἔκαμον, 2 Ῥ, part. κεκμηώς, -@ros or -dros, 2 A. M. ἐκαμόμην as 
active, Epic. 
_ KATIYQ, to breathe, Epic, A. ἐκάπυσσα. 
_ κατα-γλωτίζω, to kiss, regular; P. P. part. κατεγλωτισμένος. 
| κατ-άγνυμι, κατ-αγνύω, to break to pieces, Β'. κατάξω, A. κατέαξα, rately 
᾿ς karnga, A. P. κατεάχθην, 2 A. P. κατεάγην, 2 P. xaréadya, rarely κα- 
τῆγα.---κατεάξω, I. for κατάξω; κατεάξας, A. part. for κατά- 
fas; kateayo,2A.P. subj. for καταγῶ ; κατεαγείς, 2 A. P. 
part. for καταγείς. ---καυάξαις, A. opt. 2 sing. for κατάξαις ; formed 
as follows, xata-Fa&ais, xat-Faéais, xa-Fafats, κα-υάξαις, like κατά- 
ο΄ Babi κάτ-βαθι xaBaor. 
Shee (KA®-), to pant, Epic, P. κέκηφε, is dead, part. κεκαφηώς as 
; resent. 
κεδάννυμι (KEAA-), Epic for σκεδάννυμι, A. ἐκέδᾶσα, Pluperf. P. κε- 
᾿ς κέδαστο, A. P. ἐκεδάσθην. 
κεῖμαι (KE-, KEI-), Ionic κέομαι, to lie down, κέωμαι OF κείωμαι, κεοί: 
μην, κεῖσο, κεῖσθαι (κέεσθαι), κείμενος, Imperf. ἐκείμην, I. κείσο- | 
᾿ μαι. ¥ 
| keipw (KEP-), to shear, F. xépow, commonly κερῶ, A. éxepoa, com- 
_ monly ἔκειρα, P. P. κέκαρμαι, A. P. ἐκέρθην, 2 A. P. ἐκάρην. 
Keim or κέω, I will le down, desire to lie down, Epic for κείσω, κέσω 
_ ---κάκκη, imperat. 2 sing. Doric for xardkee. 
κελεύω, to command, regular; P. P. κεκέλευσμαι, A. P. ἐκελεύσθην. 
Fs κέλλω (KEA-), to come, or bring, to land, as a ship, Εἰ, κέλσω, A. exer 
oa 


ne 












᾿ 
᾿ 
as 


190 INFLECTION ΟΕ WORDS. [2 133. 


κέλομαι (KEAE-), to order, request, exhort, Poetic, Εἰ. κελήσομαι, A. 
ἐκελησάμην, A. ἐκέλησα rare, 2 A. κεκλόμην, ἐκεκλόμην. ---κέκλο- 
“μαι, κεκλόμενος, new Present, from κεκλόμην. ---- κέντο, Imperf. 
3 sing. Doric for κέλ-το, κέλετο, a8 Aorist. 

κεντέω (KENT-), to prick, regular. A. inf. κένσαι, Epic. 

κεράννυμι and κεραννύω (κεράω, KPA-), to mix, as wine and water, F. 
κερἄσω κερῶ, A. ἐκέρᾶσα, lonic ἔκρησα, P. P. κέκρᾶμαι, sometimes 
κεκέρασμαι, A. Ρ. ἐκράθην, ἐκεράσθην. 

κεράω, to miz, Epic, imperat. κέρα and κέραιε. ---κέρωνται, subj. 
3 plur. as if from κέραμαι. 

κερδαίνω (KEPAA-, KEPAAN-), to gain, F. xepdava, later κερδήσω, 
κερδήσομαι, A. éxépdava, ἐκέρδησα, P. xexepdayxa, κεκέρδηκα, later 
κεκέρδακα. ---κερδηθήσωνται, F, P. subj. 3 plur. 

κεύθω, Epic κευθάνω, (KYO-) to hide, F. κεύσω, A. ἔκευσα, P. P. 
3 sing. κέκευται, 2 A. ἔκυθον (xéxvOov), 2 P. κέκευθα as Present, 
2 Pluperf. ἐκεκεύθειν as Imperfect. 

κέω, SCE κείω. 

κήδω (KHAE-, KAA-), to ver, trouble, afflict, Epic F. κηδήσω, A. M. 
ἐκηδεσάμην, 2 Perf. κέκηδα as Present middle, F. Perf. κεκἄδήσομαι 
as future to κέκηδα. | 

κίδνημι, κικλήσκω, Poetic for κεδάννυμι, καλέω. 

κίνυμαι, Epic for κινέομαι, to move one’s self, Imperf. éxtvipny. 

κιρνάω, κίρνημι, for κεράννυμι, imperat. κίρναθι, inf. κιρνάμεν Epic, 
part. κιρνάς, “2011ς κίρναις, Imperf. ἐκίρνων, ἐκίρνην. 

κιχάνω, κιγχάνω, κιχέω, (KIX-, KIXHMI) ἐο find, reach, Poetic, Imperf. 
ἐκίχανον, ἐκίχεον, F. κιχήσομαι, Epic κιχήσω, 2 A. ἔκιχον, also ἐκί- 
χην, (κιχέω κιχῶ) κιχείω, κιχειην, κιχήμεναι, κιχείς. Pres. Μ. part. 
κιχήμενος as Present or Aorist, Epic. 

κίχρημι (χράω), to lend, F. χρήσω, A. ἔχρησα, P. P. κέχρημαι. Mid. 
κίχραμαι, later κιχράομαι, to borrow, A. ἐχρησάμην. 

κίω, to go, Poetic, xiw, κίοιμι, κίε, κίειν, κιών, Imperf. éxcov usually as 
Aorist. — KIA@Q, Imperf. ἐκίαθον μετ-εκίαθον, as Aorist. 

κλάζω (KAAYT-, KAATT-, KAHT-), clango, io shout, scream, clang, 
Poetic, F. κλάγξω, A. ἔκλαγξα, P. κέκλαγχα, 2 A. ἔκλαγον, 2 P. κέ- 
Anya, κέκλαγγα, as Present, Εἰ, Perf. κεκλάγξομαι, as future to κέ- 
κλαγγα. 

κλαίω, κλᾶω, (KAAIE-, KAAE-, KAAY-) 49 weep, F. κλαύσω, κλαύσο- 
μαι, κλαυσοῦμαι, κλαιήσω Or κλαήσω, A. ἔκλαυσα, Ῥ P. κέκλαυμαι, 
A. Ρ. ἐκλαύσθην, F. Perf. κεκλαύσομαι. 

κλἄάω (KAHMI), to break, A. ἔκλᾶσα, Ῥ. Ρ. κέκλασμαι, A. Ρ. ἐκλάσθην, 
2 A. part. ἀπο-κλάς. 

κλείω, claudo, to shut, F. κλείσω, A. ἔκλεισα, P. κέκλεικα, P. P. κέ- 
κλειμαι, commonly κέκλεισμαι, A. P. ἐκλείσθην, F. Perf. κεκλείσομαι. 
--- κατακλιεῖ, F. 3 sing. . 

κλέπτω (KAEU-), clepo, to steal, F. κλέψω, κλέψομαι, A. ἔκλεψα, 
P. κέκλοφα, P. P. κέκλεμμαι, A. P. ἐκλέφθην, 2 A. ἔκλαπον later, 

"9 Α. P. ἐκλάπην. 


κληΐζω, to celebrate, call, Poetic, F. κλείξω Doric, P. P. κεκλήϊσμαι. 


ἐκλήϊσμαι, Plup. P. ἐκληΐσμην. : : 
κληΐω (κλείω), lo shut, Ionic, A. ἐκλήϊσα, P. P. κεκλήϊμαι and κεκλήϊ 
σμαι, A. P. ἐκληΐσθην. 


μευ 


ν᾿ 








ᾧ 133.] ANOMALOUS AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 191 


κλῖνω, in-clino, to bend, incline, ἘΝ". κλινῶ, A. ἔκλῖνα, P. κέκλϊκα, P. P. 
κέκλϊμαι, A. P. ἐκλίθην, Poetic ἐκλίνθην, 2 A. P. ἐκλίνην. 

κλύω (KAYMI), to hear, Poetic, Iraperf. ἔκλυον as Aorist, P. κέκλυκα 
as Present, 2 A. (ἔκλυν) imperat. κλῦθι, κλῦτε, 2 A. M. (ἐκλύμην) 
part. κλύμενος, celebrated, 2 P. (κέκλυα) imperat. κέκλῦθι, κέκλῦτε, 
as Present. 

κναίω, to scrape, regular; P. P. κέκναισμαι, A. Po ἐκναίσθην. 

κνάω, for κναίω, Imperf. 3 sing. ἔκνη (ἔκναε) as Aorist, F. κνήσω, A. 
ἔκνησα, P. P. κέκνησμαι, A. P. ἐκνήσθην. 

κολούω, to check, regular; A. P. ἐκολούθην, ἐκολούσθην. 

κοναβίζω (KONABE-), to resound, A. ἐκονάβησα. 


 xérre (ΚΟΠ-), to cut, regular; F. Perf. κεκόψομαι, 2 A. P. ἐκόπην, 


2 P. κέκοπα Epic. 
κορέννυμι (KOPE-), to satiate, F. κορέσω, xopéw, A. ἐκόρεσα, P. M. 
kexdpecpat, not Attic κεκόρημαι, A. ἐκορεσάμην, A. P. ἐκορέσθην as 
middle, 2 P. part. κεκορηώς as middle, 
κορύσσω (KOPYO-, κόρυς), to arm, Poetic, regular; P. P. part. κεκο- 
ρυσμένος, κεκορυθμένος. 
κοτέω, κοταίνω, to be angry, F. κοτέσομαι (σσ)ὴ, Poetic, A. ἐκότεσα, 
A.M. ἐκοτεσάμην, 2 P. part. cexornas. 
κοχύω (xéw), to trickle down, Imperf. κοχύεσκον, or κοχύδεσκον, Epic. 
κράζω (KPAT-, KEKPAT-), to cry aloud, F. κράξω not common, A. 
ἐκέκραξα later, 2 A. ékpayov, 2 P. κέκρᾶγα as Present, 2 Plup. ἐκε- 
Kpayew as Imperfect, F: Perf. κεκραγήσω, κεκράξαμαι as future to 
κέκραγα. --- κέκραχθι, 2 P. imperat. 2.sing. syncopated. 
κραιαίνω, a protraction of κραίνω, Epic, Imp. ἐκραίαινον, A. ἐκρήηνα, 
P. P. 3 sing. κεκρᾶανται, Plup. 3 sing. κεκράαντο, A. P. ἐκρᾶ- 
' a Ρν. 
᾿ κραίνω (KPAN-), to finish, complete, rule over, Poetic, Ἐἰ. κρανῶ, A. 
éxpava, Epic ἔκρηνα, P. P. 3 sing. κέκρανται, A. P. ἐκράνθην, F. M. 
Kpavovpat aS passive. 
κρεμάννυμι (Κρεμάω), to hang, Ἐ'. κρεμάᾶσω κρεμῶ, A. ἐκρέμᾶσα, P. P. 
κεκρέμασμαι, A. P. ἐκρεμάσθην, A. Μ. ἐκρεμασάμην. [ 
κρέμημι (κρεμάω), to hang transitive, rare in the active. Mid. κρέμα- 
μαι, to hang, be in a state of suspension, to be hanging, Imperf. éxpe- 
μάμην, I. κρεμήσομαι. 
ἢ κρημνάω or κρήμνημι, for κρεμάννυμι. . 
_ KPIZQ (ΚΡΙΓ-, KPIK-), to creak, shriek, squeak, 2 A. ἔκρικον, 2 P. κέ- 
kptya as Present. 


I κρίνω, to separate, judge, F. κρινῶ, A. éxpiva, P. xéxpixa, P. P. κέκρϊ- 





᾿ς μαι, A. P. ἐκρίθην, Epic ἐκρίνθην. : 
_ «pot, to knock, regular ἢ P. P. κέκρουμαι, κέκρουσμαι, A. P. ἐκρού- 
| σθην.᾿ 
_ xptarro (KPYB-, KPY®-), to hide, regular; F’. Perf. κεκρύψομαι, 2 A.P 
ἐκρύβην, rarely ἐκρύφην. --- ἔκρυβον, tmperf. from KPYBQ, (N. Τ' 
Luc, 1, 24.) : 

κτάομαι, to acquire, F. κτήσομαι, P. κέκτημαι, ἔκτημαι, Subj. κεκτῶμαι or 
᾿ς κέκτωμαι, Opt. κεκτήμην OF κεκτῴμην, aS Present, to possess, A. ἐκτή- 
θην passively, A. ἐκτησάμην, F. Perf. κεκτήσομαι, ἐκτήσομαι, as fu- 
ture to κέκτημαι. 


192 INFLECTION OF WoRDs. [§ 133. 


κτείνω (KTEN-, KTAN-, KTA-, KTHMI-), fo Kill, slay, F. κτενῶ, Epic 
κτανέω, A. ἔκτεινα, P. ἐκτόνηκα rare, later éxraxa, éxrayxa, A. P. 
ἐκτάθην Epic, ἐκτάνθην later, F.M. κτανέομαι as passive, 2 A. éxra- 
voy, also €xrav, Poetic, 2 A. M. ἐκτάμην as passive, Poetic, 2 P. 
éxrova the usual Perfect. 
κτίμενος (KTIMI, κτίζω), built, founded, Epic ; a defective 2 A. M. 
part. with a passive signification; used only in composition, ἐϊ-κτί- 
μενος. , 
κτίννυμι, κτιννύω, (κτείνω) to Kall, ἀπο-κτίννυμι. ---άπο-κτίννυμεν, 
subj. 1 plur. 
κτυπέω (KTYII-), to sound, crash, A. ἐκτύπησα, 2 A. ἔκτυπον. 
κυέω, κύω, to be pregnant, to bring forth, F. κυήσω, κυήσομαι, A. ἐκύ 
oa, also ἔκῦσα to impregnate, P. κεκύηκα. 
κυΐσκω, κυΐσκομαι, (κύω) to conceive, A. M. éxioduny, ἐκύσάμην (oc). 
κυλίνδω, κυλινδέω, κυλΐω, to roll, F. κυλινδήσω, A. ἐκύλῖσα, P. P. 
κεκύλισμαι, A. P. ἐκυλίσθην. 
κυνέω (KY-), to kiss, F. κυνήσομαι, A. ἔκῦσα. The compound προσ- 
xuvew, to worship, is regular. 
κῦρω, to fall in with, to meet, to chance, F. κύρσω, A. ἔκυρσα. 


A. 

λαγχάνω (AAX-, AHX-, AETX-), fo obtain by lot, F. λήξομαι, Tonic 
λάξομαι, P. εἴληχα, λέλαχα, λέλογχα, P. P. εἴλ πος A. P. ἐλη- 
χθην, 2 A. ἔλαχον (λέλαχον).---ἔλλαχον, 2 A. Epic.—Aayxdnp, 
2 A. opt. for λαχοίην. 

αμβάνω (AAB-, AABE-, AHB-), to take, F. λήψομαι, P. εἴληφα, rare- 

ly λελάβηκα, P. P. εἴλημμαι, sometimes λέλημμαι, A. P. ἐλήφθην, 
F. Perf. λελήψομαι, 2 A. ἔλαβον, 2 A. Μ. ἐλαβόμην (λελαβόμην). 
AAMBGQ gives the Ionic λάμψομαι, λέλαμμαι, ἐλάμφθην. ---- ἔλλα- 
βον, ἐλλαβόμην, 2 A. Epic. 

λάμπω, to shine, regular; 2 P. λέλαμπα. 

λανθάνω, Poetic λήθω, (AAG-) lateo, to lie hid, escape notice, F. Anco, 
A. ἔλησα rather rare, P.M. AeAnopar, Tonic λέλασμαι, A. P. ἐλά- 
σθην Doric, F. Perf. λελήσομαι, 2 A. ἔλαθον (λέλαθον). 2 A.M. ἐλα- 
θόμην (λελαθόμην), 2 P. λέληθα, Doric λέλαθα as middle. Mid. λαν- 
θάνομαι, to forget. 

λάσκω (AAKE-, AAK-), loquor, fo speak, gabble, Poetic, F. λακήσο 
μαι, A. ἐλάκησα, 2 A. ἔλακον, 2 A. M. ἐλακόμην (λελακόμην), 2 P 
λέλακα, Epic λέληκα, as Present. 

Ada, to see, Epic, Imperf. λάον. 

λέγω. loquor, to say, regular; A. P. ἐλέχθην, F. Perf. λελέξομαι. 

λέγω, to enumerate, to collect, F. λέξω, A. ἔλεξα, P. εἴλοχα, P. P. εἰ 
λεγμαι, λέλεγμαι, A. P. ἐλέχθην, 2 A. P. ἐλέγην. ---- Imperf. ἐλ έ- 
γμην, for ἐλεγόμην, 3 sing. λέκτο, for ἐλέγετο. both Aoristic. 

λείπω, λιμπάνω, (ΛΙ1Π-} linquo, éo leave, F. λείψω, A. ἔλειψα later, 
P. P. λέλειμμαι, A. P. ἐλείφθην, F. Perf. λελείψομαι, 2 A. ἔλιπον, 
2 A.M. ἐλιπόμην, 2 A. P. ἐλίπην later, 2 P. λέλοιπα. ---ἔλλιπον, 
2 A. Ἐρὶς. ---ἔλειπτο, Imperf. 3 sing. for ἐλείπετο, as Aorist. 

λείχω. lingo, to lick, regular; 2 P. part. λελιχμώς or λελειχμώς. 

λέπω, to peel, regular ; 2 A. ἐλάπην. 














§ 133. ] ANOMALOUS AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. ° 193 


λεύω, to stone, regular; A. P. ἐλεύσθην. 

AEXQ, to put to bed, A. ἔλεξα, P. part. λελοχυῖα. Mid. AEXOMAT, 
to sleep, F. λέξομαι, A. ἐλεξάμην. ---λέξο, Pres. imperat. 2 sing. 
for λέχου, Aoristic; ckara-héy Oat, Pres. inf. for κατα-λέχεσθαι, 
Aoristic ; κατα-λέγμενος, Pres. part. for--Aeydpuevos. —éxro 
or ἔλεκτο, Imperf. 3 sing. Aoristic. —A¢€éeo, A. imperat. 2 sing. 
for λέξαι. 

'ληΐζω, to pillage, regular; P. P. AeAniopat, λέλῃσμαι, A. M. ἐληΐϊσά- 
μην, ἐλῃσάμην. 

AIZQ (AITT-), to twang, A. ἔλιγξα. 

λιλαίομαι (AIAA-, Adw), to crave, Epic, P. λελίημαι, the participle 
λελιημένος means also eager, hastening, Plup. λελιήμην. 

λίσσομαι, λίτομαι, to supplecate, A. ἐλισάμην, 2 A. ἐλιτόμην. --- ἐλλε- 
σάμην, A. Epic. 

Acéw, to bathe, transitive, Epic, A. ἐλόεσα (oo), F. M. λοέσομαι (ov), 
A. M. ἐλοεσάμην (oc). 

Ado, lavo, to bathe, Poetic in the active, Imperf. ἔλοον ἔλουν, ἔλοε 
ἔλου, ἐλόομεν ἐλοῦμεν. Mid. λοῦμαι, to bathe, reflexive, imperat. 
Aod, inf. λοῦσθαι, part. λούμενος, Imperf. ἐλούμην, ἐλοῦτο, ἐλοῦν- 


το. 
λύω (AYMI), solvo, to loose, F. λύσω, A. ἔλῦσα, P. λέλὕκα, Ῥ. P. 
hAAvpat, A. P. ἐλύὔύθην, F. Perf. λελύσομαι, 2 A. imperat. ADO, 
2 A.M. ἐλύὕμην λύτο λύντο. --- λελῦτο, Perf. Pass. opt. 3 sing. 
AS λῇς Ag, plural Adpes λῆτε λῶντε, inf. λῆν, part. Adv, Doric for θέ- 
Aw, contracted from Ada. 


M. 


μαίνω (MAN-, MANE-), used only in the compound éx-paive, to madden, 
A. Gunva, 2 A. P. ἐμάνην as middle, 2 F. μανήσομαι as middle, 2 Ρ, 
μέμηνα as Present middle, to be mad, to rave. Mid. μαίνομαι, ἘΝ, 
μανοῦμαι, P. μεμάνημαι, A. ἐμηνάμην. 

ααίομαι (MA-), to feel after, touch, seek, probe, F. pavopa(oo), A. 
ἐμασάμην (oo). 

μανθάνω (ΜΑΘΕ-, MA®-), fo learn, understand, F. μαθήσομαι, P. pe- 
μάθηκα, 2 A. ἔμαθον, F. M. (μαθέομαι) μαθεῦμαι Doric. —éppa- 
θον, 2 A. Epic. 

udpvapa, to fight, Poetic, subj. μάρνωμαι, opt. μαρνοίμην, imperat 
(μάρνασο) μάρναο. Imperf. ἐμαρνάμην. 

μάρπτω (MAPII-, ΜΑΠ-), 10 seize, catch, F. μάρψω, A. ἔμαρψα, Plup. 
P.3 sing. ἐμέμαρπτο, 2 A. μέμαρπον, μέμαπον, ἔμαπον. ---- βράψαι, 
A. inf. for μάρψαι. 

udcow (MAT-), to wipe, regular; 2 A. P. ἐμάγην. 

μιίχομαι, Lonic also for μαχέομαι, di-mico, to fight, F. μαχέσομαι pa- 

᾿ χέομαι μαχοῦμαι, Epic μαχήσομαι, P. μεμάχημαι, rarely μεμάχεσμαι, 

᾿ x ἐμαχέσθην later, A.M. ἐμαχεσάμην, later also ἐμαχησάμην.---μα- 
xeovpevos, Pres. part. Ionic for μαχόμενος. 

MAQ (MQ-, MEN-), éo desire earnestly or strongly, to be eager, intend, 
Poetic, 2 P. μέμαα, pépova, as Present, 2 Pluperf. ἐμεμάειν as Im- 
perfect. Mid. μάομαι, μώομαι, 3 sing. μῶται, as active, imperat. 
2 sing. μώεο, inf. μῶσθαι (μώεσθαι), part. popevos, A. ἐμωσάμην. 

' ) 9 


194 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§ 133. 


— μέμαεν, 2 Pluperf. 3 sing. with the ending and force of the Im- 
perfect. (§ 118, 1, 4.) 

μέδομαι (MEAE-), to concern one’s self about, think of, plan, machi- 
nate, ἘΝ μεδήσομαι, rarely μεδήσω. 

μεθίημι (μετά, ἴημι, ἴω), to send off; let go, μεθήσω, &c., a3 in ἴημι ; Ρ, 
μεμέθεικα, P. P. part. μεμετιμένος Tonic. 

μεθύσκω (μεθύω), to intoxicate, A. éuébica, P. P. pepébvopa, A. P. 
ἐμεθύσθην as middle. Mid. μεθύσκομαι, to get drunk.— pe bio θην, 
A. P. inf. Holic for μεθυσθῆναι. 

μεθύω, to get drunk, defective. 

μείρομαι (MEP., MOPE-, MOPAZ-), to obtain, acquire, Poetic, F. pap- 
gona, P. μεμόρηκα, Ῥ. M. 3 sing. εἵμαρται, μεμόρηται, μέμορται,, 
μεμόρακται, ἔμβραται, it is fated, inf. μέμορθαι, part. εἱμαρμένος. με- 
μορημένος, μεμορμένος, βεβραμένων, Jeted, ordained by fate,: Plu- 


perf. εἵμαρτο, μεμόρητο, it was fated. Observe that εἵμαρται εἵμαρτο 
εἱμαρμένος take the rough breathing. 


μέλλω (MEAAE-), to be about to do any thing, to intend, delay, Imperf. 
ἔμελλον ἤμελλον, A. ἐμέλλησα ἠμέλλησα. 

μελο-ποιέω, 10 compose odes, regular; P. P. part. μεμελοπεποιημένος. 

μέλω (MEAE-), to concern, to care for, F. pats 2 P. μέμηλα as 
Present, Epic, 2 Plup. ἐμεμήλειν. as Imperfect, Ρ μέλημαι as 
Present: active, Pluperf. M. μεμελήμην as Imperfect, A. a3 part. μελη- 
θείς as active. —péepBrerat, μέμβλεσθε, P. M. for μεμέληται, 
μεμέλησθε ; μέμβλετο, Plup. M. for μεμέλητο ; all Epic. 
Μέλει, ἐξ concerns, impersonal, μέλῃ, μέλοι, μέλειν, μέλον, Imperf. 
ἔμελε, F. μελήσει, A. ἐμέλησε, p. μεμέληκε, Pluperf. ἐμεμελήκει. 
μένω (MENE-), maneo, fo remain, F. μενῶ, A. ἔμεινα, P. μεμένηκα, 
2 P. μέμονα rare. 

MENQ,seeMAQ. 

μερμηρίζω, to ponder, reflect, F, μερμηρίξω, A. ἐμερμήριξα, rarely pep 
μήρισα. 

μεταμέλομαι (μετά, μέλομαι), Ionic μεταμελέομαι, to repent, F. perape- 
λήσομαι as passive. 

MerapeXerat, poenitet, it repents, impersonal. 

μηκάομαι (MHK-, MAK-), to bleat, 2A.€ Sei 2 P. μέμηκα as Pres- 
ent. — pepaxvia, 2 P. part. fem. Epic, ἢ of siz. μηκυῖα. --- ἐμέ- 
μη a” 2 Plup. with the ending and force of the perfect. (§ 118, 
1, 


iva, 5 stain, regular ; A. ἐμίηνα, épiava, Ῥ. Ῥ. μεμίασμαι. --- μιάν- 

με; Α. Ρ. 3 plur. Epic, for ἐμίανθεν, ἐμιάνθησαν. 

ree » μιγνύω, γι (ΜΓ-) misceo, to mix, F. μίξω, A. ἔμιξα, 

; μέμιγμαι, Α.Ρ. ἐμίχθην, F. Perf. μεμίξομαι, 2 A. P. ἐμίγην. 

—pixto or ἔμικτο, 2 A. M. for ἐ Mer 

μιμνήσκω (MNA-), memoro, fo remind, F. μνήσω, A. ἔμνησα, A. P. 
ἐμνήσθην as middle, F. Perf. μεμνήσομαι as middle. Mid. paper 
σκομαι, Epic μνάομαι, reminiscor, to remember, F. μνήσομαι, 
μέμνημαι as Present, memini, subj. hasan’ or 2 pes om opt. pe- 
μνήμην OF μεμνῴμην, imper. μέμνησο, inf. papers θαι, part. μεμνημέ- 
νος, Plupertf. ἐμεμνήμην as_ Imperfect. M. opt. 2 sing. pe- 
pvoto, 3 sing. μεμνέῳτο Ionic for μεμνῷτο; 3 plur. μεμναίατο, 








§ 133.] ANOMALOUS AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 195 


lonie for μεμνῇντο ; imperat. 2 sing. μέμνεο ; part. pepydue- 
vos. — μνώεο, imperat. 2 sing. from MNQQ. 

μίμνω, Poetic for μένω. ΄ 

μινύθω (MINY-, ΜΙΝΥΘΕ-, ΜΙΝΥΘΙΖ-), minua, to diminish, to be less, 
A. ἐμινύθησα, ἐμινύθισα, P. μεμινύθηκα, A. ἐμινύθην. 

μνημονεύω, to call to mind, regular; P. ἐμνημόνευκα. 

MOAQ, see βλώσκω. © 

pio, μυζάω, μυζέω, to suck, A. ἐμύζησα, 2 P. part. dual μεμυζότε. 

μύζω, to mutter, grumble, A. ἔμυξα, ἔμυσα. 

μῦκάομαι (MYK-), mugio, éo bellow, F. puxnoopa, A. ἐμυκησάμην, 
later ἐμύκησα, 2 A. ἔμυκον, 2 P. μέμῦκα as Present, 2 Plup. ἐμεμῦ- 
kev as Imperfect. - 

μῦω, to close the lips.or eyes, A. ἔμῦσα, ἔμῦὕσα, P. μέμῦκα. 


N. 


ναιετάω, to inhabit ; part. fem. ναιετάωσα, Doric as to form. 

ναίω (NA-), to dwell, Poetic, F. νάσομαι, A. ἔνασα causative, P. P. 
νένασμαι, A. P. ἐνάσθην, A.M. evacdpnv.—vdo Oat, 2 A.M. inf. 
from NHMI. 

vacow or νάττω, to stuff, press close together, F, νάξω, A. ἔναξα, 
P. P. vévacpat, Ionic νέναγμαι. 

vaw, to flow, Imperf. vaov, ναῖον. 

νείσσομαι, See νίσσομαι. 

νεικέω, to chide, Epic, F. νεικέσω, A. ἐνείκεσα. 

νέμω (NEME-), 10 distribute, consider, pasture, F. veya, νεμήσω, A. 
ἔνειμα, P. νενέμηκα, P.P. νενέμημαι, A. ἐνεμήθην, ἐνεμέθην, A. M. 
ἐνειμάμην, eveunodpnv. — NEMEOQ, Imperf. ἐνεμεθόμην, Epic. 

᾿ ψέομαι, contracted νεῦμαι, to go away, return, usually as Future, 2 sing. 

(νέεαι) vetat, subj. 2 sing. νέηαι. \ 

νέω (NEY-), no nare, to swim, F. νευσοῦμαι, A. ἔνευσα, P. νένευκα. 
— ἔννεον, Imperf. Epic. 

νέω, 10 heap up, A. ἔνησα, P. P. νένημαι, νένησμαι. 

véw, νήθω, neo, to spin, F. mo, A. ἔνησα, P. P. νένησμαι, A. P. ἐνή. 
θην, A.M. ἐνησάμην. : 

νηέω, νηνέω, lonic for νέω, to heap up, A. ἐνήησα, A. M. ἐνηησάμην. 

vito, later νίπτω, (NIB-) to wash, as the hands or feet, Εἰ, νίψω, A. 
ἔνιψα, P. P. νένιμμαι, A. P. ἐνίφθην. 

νίσσομαι Or νείσσομαι, Epic for νέομαι. 

viper, ningit, to snow, to cover with snow, impersonally, F. vives, 
A. ene. 

νοέω ane, to think, perceive, regular in the Attic dialect. The 
Tonic contracts on into ὦ ; thus, ἔνωσα, νένωκα, νένωμαι, ἐνενώμην. 

νυστάζω, to feel sleepy, A. évicraca, later ἐνύσταξα. 


a. ; 


| Ea, to scrape, A. é&eoa, P. P. ἔξεσμαι.. 
ξυν-νεφέω (EYN-NE®-), to be clouded, to lower, P. ξυν-νένοφα. 
Evpéw, Evpaw, (ZYP-) to shave, regular. Mid. ξυρέομαι, commonly 


Evpopat. 
_ ξύω, to polish, A. ἔξῦσα, P. Ῥ, ἔξυσμαι, A. P. ἐξύσθην. 


᾿ 





196 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [δ 138. 


0. 


ὀδάξομαι (OAAZE-, OAAK-), ἐο bite, F. ὀδαξήσομαι, Ῥ. P. ὥδαγμαι, 
A. M. ὠδαξάμην. 

ὀδάξω. to smart from a bite, Imperf. ὥδαξον. 

OAYOMAI, to be angry, P. ὀδώδυσμαι as Present, A. ὠδυσάμην. 

ὄζω (OZE-, OA-), oleo, to emit a smell, have the smeil of, Γ ὀζησσω, 
Ionic ὀζέσω, A. ὥζησα, Ionic ὥζεσα, 2 P. ὄδωδα as Present, 2 Plu- 
perf. ὀδώδειν, ὠδώδειν, as Imperfect. 

οἴγω, οἴγνυμι, to open, Poetic, F. οἴξω, A. ᾧξα, dita, A. P. οἴχθην, 
2A. Ἐν χν. 2 Ῥ. ἔῳγα as Present intransitive, to stand open, 

_ _ Pass. οἴγομαι, Imp, οἰγόμην, ὠϊγνύμην. Prose-writers use ἀνοίγω. 
oixéw, to dwell, regular ; Imperf. ἐῴκεον, rare. 

-olxodopéw, to build a house, regular.—orxodopnrat, P. P. subj. 
3 sing. in the Heraclean Tables. 

οἰμώζω (οἴμοι), to bewail, lament, F. οἰμώξομαι, later οἰμώξω, A. ᾧμω- 

» P. οἴμωγμαι, A. P. οἰμώχθην. 

oivoxoew, to pour out wine, regular; Imperf. 3sing. ἐῳνοχόει, in Ho- 
mer. 

οἴομαι, oem. (OIE-) opinor, éo think, 2 sing. ote, Imperf. φόμην, 


ᾧμην, Ἐς. οἰήσομαι, ὠφήθην. The connecting vowel is dropped only 
in οἶμαι, ᾧμην. --- Epic ὀΐω, ὀΐομαι, (1) ὠϊόμην, diero, A. ὠΐσθην, 
A.M. ὠϊσάμην, ὀϊσάμην. 


οἴχομαι (OIXE-, OIXO-), to be gone, as Perfect, Imperf. ὠχόμην, as 
Aorist, sometimes as Pluperfect, F’. οἰχήσομαι, P. οἴχωκα, sometimes 
ᾧχωκα, Epic ᾧχηκα, P. P. ὥχημαι equivalent to οἴχωκα. 

OIQ, see φέρω. 

ὀλισθαίνω, ὀλισθάνω, rarely ὀλισθάζω, (OAISO-, OAISCE-) to skp, 
A. ὠλίσθησα, P. ὠλίσθηκα, 2 A. ὥλισθον. 

ὄλλυμι, ὀλλύω, (ὀλέω, OA-) to destroy, lose, F. ὀλέσω, 6AG, A. ὥλεσα, 
P. ὀλώλέκα, 2 P. ὄλωλα as middle, to have perished, 2 Pluperf. ddo-_ 
Aew, rarely ὠλώλειν, as middle, 2 A. (ddov) opt. ddoinv rare, 2A 
M. ὠλόμην. ---ὀλέεσκεν, Imperf. iterative from ὀλέω. --- ὀλόμε- 
vos Or οὐλόμενος, 2 A. Μ. part. as an adjective, fatal. 

ὄμνυμι, ὀμνύω, (OM-, OMO-) to swear, F. ὀμόσω, commonly (ὀμέομαι) 
ὀμοῦμαι, A. dpooa, Ῥ. ὀμώμοκα, P. P. ὀμώμοσμαι, ὀμώμοται, A. P. 
ὠμόθην, ὠμόσθην, A. M. ὠμοσάμην.---- ὀμνύην, Pres. ορί.--ο-οὀμοῦν- 
τες, part. from OMOQ. 

ὀμόργνυμι (OMOPT-), to wipe off, F. ὀμόρξω, A. ὥμορξα, A. P. ὠμόρ- 

θην as middle. 

ὀνίνημι (ONA-, ONE-, ONHMI), ἐο benefit, F. ὀνήσω, A. ὥνησα, A. P. 
ὠνήθην. Mid ὀνίναμαι, to derive benefit, F. ὀνήσομαι, A. ὠνησάμην, 
ὠνἄσάμην, later, 2 A. ὠνάμην OY ὠνήμην, ὀναίμην, ὄνησο, ὄνασθαι OF 
ὀνῆσθαι, ὀνήμενος. ---ὀνοῦντα, Pres. part. from ONEQ. : 

ὄνομαι (ON-, ONO-, ONQMI), to insult, think lightly of, find sault 
with, inflected like δίδομαι, F. ὀνόσομαι, A. ὠνοσάμην, Epic ὠνάμην, 
A. P. ὠνόσθην as middle.—otveo 6c, Pres. 2 sing. for ὄνεσθε, from 
ONQ. : 

νοματο-ποιέω, to form a word expressive of some sound, regular; P. P. 
ὠνοματοπεποίημαι. ; 








§ 133.] ANOMALOUS AND DEFECTIVE VERBS, 197 


ὀπυίω, to marry, said of the man, Ε΄. ὀπῦσω without the «. 

ὁράω (OII-, EIA-), to see, Imperf. ἑώρων, Ionic ὥρων, ὥρεον or ὅρεον, 
F’, ὄψομαι, 2 sing. dyer, A. ὦψα rare, P. ἑώρᾶκα, rare and Poetic 
ἑόρᾶκα, also Spa rare, Plupert. also pew rare, P. P. ἑὠρᾶμαι, dp- 
pa, A. P. ὥφθην, rarely ὡράθην, A. M. ὀψάμην rare, 2 A. εἶδον, 
2 A. Μ. εἰδόμην, 2 P. ὄπωπα, Ionic and Poetic. 

ὀρέγω, ὀρέγνυμι, to stretch out, F. ὀρέξω, A. dpeEa, P. ὀρώρεχα, P. M. 
ὀρώρεγμαι, A. P. ὠρέχθην as middle. 

ὅρημι, for ὁράω, Doric ; subj, 2sing. ὅρηαι or ὁρῆαι. 

ὄρνυμι, ὀρνύω, (OP-, OPOP-) to rouse, F. ὄρσω, A. ὦρσα, 2 A. dpo- 
gov, 2 P.dpwpa as Present middle, 2 Plup. dpapew, ὠρώρειν, as 
mperfect middle. Mid. ὄρνυμαι, ὀρέομαι, to rise, rush, Imperf. 
ὠρνύμην, and ὀρεόμην, F. ὀροῦμαι, P. ὀρώρεμαι as Present, 2 A. 
ὠρόμην.---ὄρσεο ὄρσευ, A. M. imperat, 2 sing. Epic, implying 
ὠρσάμην (dapodunv).—2 A. M. 3 sing. ὦρτο, for ὥρετο, imperat, 
ὄρσο;, inf. ὄρθαι for ὀρέσθαι, part. ὄρμενος. ---ὀρώρηται, P.M. 
subj. 3 sing. from ὀρέομαι. 

ὄρομαι (ὄρνυμι), ἐπι-όρομαι, to watch over, Imperf. 3 plur. ἐπ-όροντο. 

ὀρύσσω or ὀρύττω (OPYT-, OPYX-), ἐο dig, regular; P. ὀρώρυχα, op Bi 
@pvypat, ὀρώρυγμαι, Plup. ὀρωρύγμην, ὠρωρύγμην, ὠρύγμην, 2 A. P. 
ὠρύγην, 2 F. P. ὀρυγήσομαι; or ὀρυχήσομαι. 

dodpaivopa, rarely ὀσφράομαι, (ΟΣΦΡ-} to smell, perceive by the smell, 

. ὀσφρήσομαι, A. P. ὠσφράνθην later, A. ὠσφρησάμην later, 

2A. M. ὠσφρόμην (ὠσφράμην). 4 

οὐρέω; mingo, Imperf. ἐούρεον, οὔρεον, F. οὐρήσω, commonly οὐρήσο- 
pat, A. ἐούρησα, οὔρησα, P. ἐούρηκα, A. Ρ. οὐρήθην. . 

οὐτάω (OYTHMI), to wound, Epic, A. οὔτησα, A. P. οὐτήθην, 2 A. οὖ- 
Tay, obra, οὐτάμεναι OF οὐτάμεν, 2 A. M. odrdpevos as passive. 

ὀφείλω, Epic ὀφέλλω, (OPEIAE-, OPEA-) to owe, I ought, I must, 
F. ὀφειλήσω, A. ὠφείλησα, P. ὠφείληκα, 2 A. ὥφελον or ὄφελον, 
used only in the expression of a wish, O that! would to God !— 
ὥφελον or ὄφελον, in the later writers, has the force of the pariz- 
cle εἴθε, utinam. 

ὀφέλλω, to increase, glorify, A. opt. 3 plur. ὀφέλλειεν Aolic as to 
form. 

ὀφλισκάνω (OPAE-, ΟΦΛ-), to be guilty, incur as a penalty, to owe, 
F. ὀφλήσω, A. ὥφλησα rare, P. ὥφληκα, 2 A. ὦφλον, ὀφλεῖν, 
ὄφλων. ---ὥφλεε, 2A. 3 sing. Ionic for ὦφλε. 

ὀχθῆσαι, to feel indignant, Epic, found only in the A. act. ind. 3 plur. 
ὥχθησαν, and part. ὀχθήσας. 


παίζω, to play, F. παίξω, commonly παίξομαι, παιξοῦμαι, A. ἔπαισα, 
later ἔπαιξα, P. πέπαικα, P. P. πέπαισμαι, πέπαιγμαι, A. P. ἐπαί- 
χθην later. 

maiw (ILAIE-), to strike, F. παίσω, Poetic παιήσω, A. ἔπαισα, P. πέ- 
maka, P. P. πέπαισμαι, A. P. ἐπαίσθην, A. M. ἐπαισάμην. 

παλαίω, to wrestle, regular; P. Ῥ. πεπάλαισμαι, A. P. ἐπαλαίσθην. --- 
mwadnoece, A. opt. 3 sing. for παλαίσειε, implying ΠΑΛΑΩ. 


198 INFLECTION OF WORDS. --[§ 183. 


a to repeat, regular; Pluperf. P. 3 sing. ἐπαλλιλόγητο, 
| onic 


πάλλω (ITAA-), to brandish, A. ἔπηλα, P. M. πέπαλμαι, 2 A. part. ἀμ- 
πεπαλών Epic, 2A. Ρ. ἐπάλην. ---πάλτο, 2 A.M. 3 sing. for ἐπά- 
λετο. 

ΠΑΟΜΑΙ, fo acquire, F. πᾶσομαι, Ῥ. πέπᾶμαι as Present, possess, Plup. 
ἐπεπάμην, πεπάμην, as Imperfect, A. ἐπασάμην, F. Perf. πεπάσομαι. 

παρα-νομέω, to transgress the law, regular ; Imperf. παρενόμουν, παρὴ- 
νόμουν, Perf. Pass. παρηνόμημαι. 

παρ-οινέω, to act like a drunken person, to insult, Imperf. érapoiveov, 
ἐπαρῴνεον, A. παρῴνησα, ἐπαρῴνησα, P. πεπαρῴνηκα, P. P. πεπαρῴ- 
νημαι, A. P. ἐπαρῳνήθην. : 

πάσχω (ΠΑΘ-, ΠΗΘ-, IENO-), to suffer, F. πείσομαι, A. ἔπησα rare, 
P. πέποσχα rare, 2 A. ἔπαθον, 2 P. πέπονθα, Epic πέπηθα. ---πέπο- 
σθε, 2P.2plur. Epic for rexdvOare. —weraOvia, 2 P. part. fem. 
Epic for πεπηθυῖα. --- συνευ-πεπονθώς, 2 P. part., benefited, well 


treated with. 
πατέομαι (IIA-), pascor, éo taste, eat, Poetic, F. racopa, P. πέπασμαι, 
. ἐπᾶσάμην. 


παΐω, to cause to cease, to stop, repress, regular; A. Ῥ. ἐπαύθην, ἐπαύ- 
σθην, middle, F. P. παυθήσομαι as middle, F. Perf. πεπαύσομαι as 
middle, 2A.P. ἐπάην rare and doubtful. Mid. παύομαι, to cease, 


stop. 

πείθω (ΠΙΘ-), to persuade, regular; 3. Α. ἔπιθον (πέπιθον) Poetic, 
2. A. Μ. ἐπιθόμην, 2 Ρ. πέποιθα as Present middle, to trust. Mid 
πείθομαι, fido, to believe, οὗεψ. ---πέπεισθι, 2 P. imperat. 2 sing. 
-ἐπέπιθμεν, 2 Pluperf. 1 plur. Epie for ἐπεποίθειμεν. ---- ΠΙΘΕΩ, 
ΠΕΠΙΘΕΩ, F. πιθήσω, will obey, πεπιθήσω, will persuade, A. part. 
πιθήσας, trusting, Epic. . 

ewae, to hunger, regular; later forms, F. πεινάσω, A. émeivaca. — 

4 f πεινήμεναι, inf. Epic, from ΠΕΙΝΗΜΙ. 

“Yreipa, to pierce, regular; 2 A. P. ἐπάρην. 

7 πελάω (ΠΛΑ-, ΠΛΗΜΙ), to bring near, πελάθω, to approach, Epic, int. 
(πελᾶν) πελάαν, P. P. πέπλημαι, A. P. ἐπλᾶθην as middle, 2 A. M. 
ἐπλήμην, approached, 

πέλω, wéAopat, to be, Poetic, Imperf. ἔπελον, πέλον, ἐπελόμην, πελό- 
pnv.— Syncopated forms; Imperf. 3 sing. ἔπλε, was; 2 sing. 
ἔπλεο, ἔπλευ, πέλευ, thou art ; 3 sing. ἔπλετο, he is; part. ἐπτ- 
mwAGpevos, περι-πλόμενος. 

πέμπω, to send, regular ; P . πέπομφα. 

πενθέω, to sorrow, regular.— πεν θήμεναι, inf. Epic, from ΠΕΝΘΗ- 
MI. 

πέρδομαι (IIAPAE-, ΠΕΡΔ-), pedo, F. παρδήσομαι, 2 A. ἔπαρδον 
(ἔπραδον), 2 P. πέπορδα as Present, 2 Plup. ἐπεπόρδειν as Imperfect. 

πέρθω, to sack asa city, Poetic, regular ; 2 A. ἔπραθον Epic, 2 A. M. 
ἐπραθόμην as passive. Pass. πέρθομαι, ἐπερθόμην, both Aoristic. ~ 
πέρθαι, Pres. inf. for πέρθεσθαι, Aoristic. 

πέρνημι (περάω), Poetic for πιπράσκω. - 

πέσσω OF πέττω, later πέπτω, (ΠΕΠ-) coquo, to cook, digest, A. ἔπε ᾿ 
Wa, P. P. πέπεμμαι, A. P. ἐπέφθην. 


§ 133.] ANOMALOUS AND DEFECTIVE VERB. 199 


πέταμαε, the same as πετάομαι. 
πετάννυμι, πεταννύω, later wera, (IIET-) pando, to expand, F. πετᾶ- 
σω πετῶ, A. ἐπέτᾶσα, P. πεπέτἄκα, P. P. πεπέτασμαι, πέπτᾶμαι, 
A. P. ἐπετάσθην. . 
πετάομαι, to fly, A. éméraca, later, A. P. ἐπετάσθην. 
πέτομαι (πετάομαι), to fly, F. πετήσομαι, 2 A. ἐπτόμην, mroipny, πτέ- 
αι, πτόμενος. 
πήγνυμι, πηγνύω, later πήσσω or πήττω, (ITAT-, IIHT-) pango, figo, 
to fix, to freeze, F. πήξω, A. ἔπηξα, P. P. πέπηγμαι, A. P. ἐπή- 
xOnv not common, 2 A. P. ἐπάγην the usual aorist passive, 2 P. πέ- 
anya as Present middle, to be fixed, to stand ‘fast, 2 Plup. ἐπεπή- 
yew as Imperfect middle. — πήγνῦτο, Pres. Mid. opt. 3 sing. — 
ἔπηκτο; 2A. M. for ἐπήγετο. ---περιπηγείς, 2 A. P. 
mew, to squeeze, regular. — mie ζέω, πιεζεόμενος πιεζεύμενος, ἐπιέζε- 
ov ἐπιέζευν, lonic. 
πιλνάω (πελάω), to bring near. Mid. πίλναμαι, to approach. 
πίμπλημι, πιμπλάω, (IIAA-) pleo, to fill, Imperf. ἐπίμπλην, rarely 
ἐπίμπλαον, F. πλήσω, A. ἔπλησα, P. πέπληκα, P. P. πέπλησμαι, 
Plup. P. ἐπεπλήμην, A. P. ἐπλήσθην, 2 A. M. ἐπλήμην. 
The present and imperfect drop the first » when, in composition, 
another » comes to stand before the first syllable; as ἐμ-πίπλημι. 
The same remark applies also to πίμπρημε; as ἐμ-πίπρημι. --- ἐμ- 
σίπληθι, imperat, 2 sing. ---οὠἰμ-πιπλείς, Pres. part. 
πίμπρημι, πιμπράω, rarely πρήθω, (IIPA-) to burn, F.apnow, A. 
ἔπρησα, rarely ἔπρεσα, P. πέπρηκα, P. P. πέπρημαι, πέπρησμαι, A. P. 
ἐπρήσθην, F. Perf. πεπρήσομαι. --- ὑπο-πίμπρῃσι, Pres. subj. 
3 sing. for πιμπρῇ. 
πινύσκω, later πινύσσω, (IIINY-, ΠΝΥ-) to render intelligent, to advise, 
P. πέπνῦμαι as Present, to be wise, discreet, imperat. rémviico, 
inf. πεπνύσθαι, part. πεπνυμένος, Pluperf. ἐπεπνύὕμην as Imperfect, 
A. P. ἐπινύθην later. — πενυ μένη, part. fem. from DINYMI. 
πίνω (ΠΙ-, MIMI, ΠΟ-), poto, bibo, ἐο drink, Ἐς, πίομαι (i, ¢), later 
πιοῦμαι, P. πέπωκα, P. P. πέπομαι, A. P. ἐπόθην, 2 A. ἔπιον, πίω, 
πίοιμι, me commonly rift, πιεῖν, πιών. --τ-πῶθιε, or πῶ, 2 A. im- 
perat. from ΠΩΜΙ. ---ἐμ-πίσεο, A. M. imperat. 2 sing. later Epic. 
-“-κατα-πίει, for κατα-πίνει. 
πιπίσκω (ΠΙ-), tv give to drink, F. πίσω, A. ἐν-τέπισα, A. Ῥ. ἐπίσθην. 
πιπράσκω, περάω, (IIPA-) to sell, F. περάσω, repo, Epic, A. ἐπέρᾶσα 
(oo), Epic, later émpaca, P. πέπρᾶκα, P. P. πέπρᾶμαι, A. P. ἐπρᾶ- 
θην, F. Perf. πεπρᾶσομαι the usual future passive. In the Aorist 
and Future, Attic writers use ἀπεδόμην, ἀποδώσομαι. 
πίπτω (ILET-, ΠΤΕ-, ΠΤΟ-), cado, to fall, F. πεσοῦμαι, Ionic πεσέο- 
μαι, A. ἔπεσα, commonly ἔπεσον; πέσω, πέσαιμι commonly πέσοιμι; 
πεσεῖν, πεσών, P. πέπτωκα, rare πέπτηκα, 2 A. ἔπετον Doric, 2 P. 
part. πεπτηώς, -via, -@ros or -éros, also πεπτεώς, -@ros, Attic me- 
πτώς -@ros, contracted, A. M. ἐπεσάμην later. 
πιτνάω, πίτνημι, (πετάω) for πετάννυμε, to expand, Epic. 
πίτνω (IIET-), for πίπτω, to fall, Poetic, Imperf. ἔπετνον as Aorist. 
πιφαύσκω (φάσκω, PAY-, ΦΑ-), to say, tell, to show. Mid. πιφάσκο- 
μαι, πιφαύσκομαι. 


200 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§ 133. 


πλάζω (IIAAT-, IIAATT-), to cause to wander, Poetic, A. ἔπλαγξα, 

A. P. ἐπλάγχθην as middle, F. M. πλάγξομαι, A. M. ἐπλαγξάμην. 
Mid. πλάζομαι, to wander. 

πλέκω, tu knit, regular ; P. πέπλοχα, 2 A. P. ἐπλάκην. 

πλέω (IIAEY-), to sail, F. πλεύσω, commonly πλεύσομαι, πλευσοῦμαι 
A. ἔπλευσα, P. πέπλευκα, P. P. πέπλευσμαι, A. P. ἐπλεύσθην. 

πλήθω (ILAA-), to be full, 2 P. πέπληθα as Present, 2 Plup. ἐπεπλή- 
θειν as Imperfect. 

πλήσσω OF πλήττω (IIAAT-, IEAHT-), to smite, F. πλήξω, A. ἔπληξα, 
Ρ. Ρ. πέπληγμαι, A. P. ἐπλήχθην rare, F. Perf. πεπλήξομαι, 2 A 
πέπληγον Epic, 2 A. M. πεπληγόμην, 2 A. Pass. ἐπλήγην, in compo- 
sition generally ἐπλᾶγην, κατ-επλάγην, 2 P. wéxAnya, sometimes as 
passive. Mid. also πλήγνυμαι. ---πέπληγον, ἐπέπληγον, 2 Plu 
perf. with the ending and force of the Imperfect. (ὃ 118, 1, d.) 

πλύνω, to wash as clothes, F. πλυνῶ, A. éxdova, P. P. πέπλῦμαι, A P. 
emAvOnv. 

πλώω (ITAQMT), Ionic for πλέω, regular ; 2 A. ἔπλων, part. ἐπι-πλώς. 

πνέω (IINEY-), to blow, F. πνεύσω, commonly πνεύσομαι, πνευσοῦμαι, 
A. ἔπνευσα, P. πέπνευκα, A. P ἐπνεύσθην. 

ποθέω, to desire, miss, F. ποθήσω, mobécopa, A. ἐπόθησα, ἐπόθεσα, P. 
πεπόθηκα. ---- ΠΟΘΗΜΙ, inf. ποθήμεναι, Epic. 

ποιέω Or ποέω, to make, do, regular; F, Perf. πεποιήσομαι. 

ποινάομαι, to punish, F. ποινᾶσομαι. 

πονέω, to labor, F. πονήσω, πονέσω, A. ἐπόνησα, ἐπόνεσα, P. πεπόνηκα, 
Ρ. Ρ. πεπόνημαι, A. P. ἐπονήθην. 

ΠΟΡΩ (ΠΡΟ-, ΠΑΡ-), to give, allot, Poetic, A. ἔπρωσα rare, 2 A. ἔπο 
pov, inf. πεπορεῖν 01 πεπαρεῖν, P. P. 3 sing. πέπρωται, it is fated, 
πεπρωμένος, fated, Plupert. P. ἐπέπρωτο, it was fated, 

πράσσω (IIPAY-), to do, regular; F. Perf. πεπράξομαι, 2 P. πέπρᾶ. 
ya, as intransitive, to have done well or ill, 

TIPIAMAI, ¢o buy, 2 A. ἐπριάμην ; the rest is borrowed from ὠνέομαι. 

προυσελέω, to insult, 1 plur. προυσελοῦμεν, part. προυσελούμενος. 

προ-χειρίζομαι, to undertake, regular ; A. ἐπροχειριξάμην, Doric. 
πρωγγυεύω (mpo-éyyvos), to give security, P. πεπρωγγύευκα, Doric. 
πτάρνυμαι (IITAP-), to sneeze, 2 Ἀ. ἔπταρον, 2 A. P. part. πταρείς. 

πτήσσω (IITAK-, ΠΤΗΚ-, ΠΤΑ-, ΠΤΗΜΙ), to crouch from fear, F. 
πτήξω, A. ἔπτηξα, P. ἔπτηχα, 2 A. ἔπτακον, also (ἔπτην) 3 dual 
πτήτην, 2 P. part. πεπτηώς, -via, -@Tos. 

πτύρομαι. to be frightened, regular ; 2 A. P. ἐπτύρην. 

πτύσσω (IITYT-), to fold, regular ; 2 A. P. ἐπτύγην. 

πυκάζω, to cover up, regular. —wemuxadpévos, P. P. part. 

πυνθάνομαι, Poetic πεύθομαι, rarely πύθομαι, to inguare, F. πεύσομαι; 
πευσοῦμαι, Ῥ. πέπυσμαι, 2 A. ἐπυθόμην. 

πυρέσσω, πυρέττω, to have a fever, F. πυρέξω, A. ἐπύρεσα, ἐπύρεξα. 

Ρ, 

ῥαίνω (PAN-, PAA-), to sprinkle, F. ῥανῶ, A. ἔρρανα, Epic ἔρρασα, 
P. P. éppacpat, ἔρραμμαι (*), A. P. éppavOnv.— éppadarat, eppas 
δατο, P. and Plup. P. 3 plur. 

paiv, to rend, regular; A. P. ἐρραίσθην. 





ᾧ 133.] ANOMALOUS AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 201 


ῥαπίξω, to strike with a rod, regular. — ῥεράπισμαι, P. P. Poetic. 

γάτα (ΡΑΦ-), to sew, regular ; 9 A. P. ἐρράφην. ---ἔραπτον, Imoerf. 

oetic. : 

ῥέζω (PET-), for ἕρδω, to do, Poetic, F. ῥέξω, A. ἔρρεξα, ἔρεξα, A. P 
part. ῥεχθείς. 

pew (PEY-, PYE-, PY-), to flow, F. ῥεύσω, commonly ῥεύσομαι, A. 

ἔρρευσα, P. éppinxa, 2 A. P. éppinv, 2 F. P. ῥνυήσομαι as active. —- 
peovpevos, part. Ionic for peduevos. ; 

PEQ, to say, Perf. εἴρηκα, P. P. εἴρημαι, A. P. ἐρρήθην, ῥηθῶ, ῥηθείην, 
ῥηθῆναι, ῥηθείς, (sometimes ἐρρέθην, Ionic εἰρήθην, εἰρέθην, only in 
the indicative,) F. Perf. εἰρήσομαι as Future passive. See also EI- 
ΠΩ. 

ῥήγνυμι, ῥηγνύω, Poetic ῥήσσω, (PAT-, ΡΗΓ-, POT-) frango, to break, 

. ῥήξω, A. ἔρρηξα, P. P. ἔρρηγμαι, A. P. ἐρρήχθην, 2 A. P. ép- 
paynv, 2 P. éppnya, éppwya, as passive. —edpayn (thatis, erpayn), 
2 A. for ἐρράγη. 

ptyéw (PIT-), to shudder, Poetic, F. ῥιγήσω, A. ἐρρίγησα, 2 P. eppiya 
as Present, 2 Pluperf. eppiyew as Imperf.— ἐρρίγοντι, 2 P. part. 
dat. sing. Doric. (ᾧ 118, 1, d.) 

ῥιγόω, frigeo, rigeo, to shiver, regular. —fuydr, inf. for ῥιγοῦν, Dor- 
ic, found also in Attic Poetry. — pry, subj. 3 sing. regularly con- 
tracted from ῥιγόῃ. ---- PITAQ, opt. 3 sing. ῥιγῴη ; part. ῥιγῶσα. 

pinto, ῥιπτέω, (ΡΙΦ-) to cast, F. ῥίψω, A. ἔρριψα, Poetic ἔριψα, P. 
ἔρριφα, P. P. ἔρριμμαι, A. P. ἐρρίφθην, 2 A. P. ἐρρίφην, Poetic épi- 
φην. ---ῥερίφθαι, P. P. inf. Poetic. 

δύομαι, to rescue, F. picopa, A. éppicdunv, piodunv. —PYMI, inf. | 
ῥῦσθαι; Imperf. ἔρρῦτο as Aorist, 3 plur. ῥύατο Epic. 

ῥυπόω, to make dirty, regular. — ῥερυπω μένα, P. P. part. in Homer. 

ῥώννυμι, ῥωννύω, (PO-) to strengthen, A. ἔρρωσα, P. M: éppopa as 
Present, A. P. ἐρρώσθην. 


2. 


caipw (SAP-) ; different from caipw, to sweep ; 2 P. σέσηρα as Present, 
to grin. — σεσἄρυϊα, 2 P. part. fem. Epic for ceonpvia. 

σαλπίζω (SAAIITT-), to sound a trumpet, A. ἐσάλπιγξα, ἐσάλπισα, 

P. σεσάλπιδμαι. 
σαόω (σάω), to save, Epic, regular.— odo, imperat. 2 sing. contract- 
ed from odoe; Imperf. 3 sing. σάω, ἐσάω, from otioe, ἐσάοε. 

σάω, to sift, commonly σήθω, A.éonoa, P. P. σέσημαι, σέσησμαι. 

σβέννυμι, σβεννύω, (ZBE-, SBHMI) ἕο extinguish, F. σβέσω, A. ἔσβε- 
σα, P. ἔσβηκα as middle, P. P. ἔσβεσμαι, A. P. ἐσβέσθην, F.M. 
σβήσομαι, 2 A. ἔσβην, σβῆναι, ἀπο-σβείς, as middle. 

σεβάσσατο, he forbore, a defective A. M. 

σείω, to shake, regular; P. P. σέσεισμαι, A. P. ἐσείσθην. ---- ἐσ σ εἰ- 
ovro, Imperf. P. 3 plur. Epic.—dva-coeiaoxe, Imperf. itera- 
tive, Epic. 

DEYQ (SY-, SYMI), to move, drive away, Poetic, A. ἔσσευα, ceva, 
A. P. ἐσύθην, ἐσσύθην, as middle, P. M. ἔσσυμαι, ἐσσύμενος, A. M. 
σευάμην, 2 A. M. ἐσσύμην, 2 A. P. ἀπ-έσσονα (2). Mid. σεύομαι, 
to pursue, part. σύμενος. --- σεῦται, Pres. 3sing for σεύεται. ---ὐὸ ὃ 
61,2 A imperat.2sing.  9* 


202 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [Ὁ 183. 


σήπω (ΣΔΠ:), to rot, regular ; 2 P. σέσηπα as intransitive, to rot, 
24. P. ἐσάπην. ---σαπήῃ, 2 A. P. subj. 3 sing. Epic. 

σιγάω, to be silent, regular ; ἘΝ Perf. σεσιγήσομαι. 

τκάπτω (ΣΚΑΦ-), ‘to dig , regular ; ; 2A. P. ἐσκάφην.- 

σκεδάννυμι, Se HE By ’ (SKEAA-) to scatter, F. σκεδάσω oxeda, A. 
ἐσκέδᾶσα, P. P. ἐσκέδασμαι, A. P. ἐσκεδάσθην. --δια-σκεδάννυ- 
ot, δια-σκεδάννυται, subj. 3 sing. 

SKEAAQ (3KEA-, 3KAA-, 3KAA-, 3KAHMI), to dry up, A. ἔσκηλα, 
P. ἔσκληκα as middle, F. M. φηλφόμας, σκελοῦμαι, 2 A. ἔσκλην, 
σκλαίην, σκλῆναι, as middle. Mid. σκέλλομαι, to wither. 

σκέπτομαι, commonly oe σκοποῦμαι, specio, to consider, F. σκέ- 
ψομαι, P. ἔσκεμμαι, A. ἐσκέφθην, ἐσκεψάμην, F. Perf. ἐσκέψομαι 
passively. 

σκίδνημι, for σκεδάννυμι, A. x ἐσκιδνάσθην. 

σμύχω, to burn, regular ; 2 A. P. ἐσμύγην (?). 

σόομαι σοῦμαι, equivalent to σεύομαι, imperat. σοῦ. ---ἀπο-σοῦν, 
Pres. inf. act. : 

onde, to draw, F. σπᾶσω,. A. ἔσπᾶσα,. P. ἔσπᾶκα, P. P. ἔσπασμαι, 

Au? hawt τὲ 

flee tad hs sow, regular; 2 A. P. ἐσπάρην. 

σπένδω, to offer a libation, F. σπείσω, A. ἔσπεισα, P. ἔσπεικα, P. Ῥ, 
ἔσπεισμαι, A. P. ἐσπείσθην, regular. 

᾿ στείβω (2TIBE-), to tread, press down, A. ἔστειψα, P. P. ἐστίβη 

στέλλω (STEA-), to send, F. seals A. ἔστειλα, P. ἔσταλκα, ἫΝ 
ees A. P. ἐστάλθην rare, 2 A. P. Jovihes. -waprakébnre, 
Plup. M. 3 plur. Ionic, from STAAAAQ. ---ἀφ-εστάλκαμεν, P. 
1 plur. for ἀπ-εστάλκαμεν. 

στενάζω, to sigh, F. στενάξω, A. ἐστέναξα. 

στέργω, to be fond of, regular; 2 P. éeropya. 

στερέω, στερίσκω, (STEP-) to deprive, F. στερήσω, A. ἐστέρησα, Epic 
ἐστέρεσα, P. ἐστέρηκα, P. P. ἐστέρημαι, Ἂς ἘΠῚ: ἐστερήθην, F. M. 
στερήσομαι, 2 A. P. part. orepeis. Mid. also orépopat. 

στεῦται, pl. στεῦνται, to pledge one’s self, threaten, Poetic, Imperf. 
στεῦτο, defective. 

στορέννυμι, στόρνυμι, (ΣΤΟΡ-) sterno, fo strew, F. στορέσω στορῶ; 
A. ἐστόρεσα, A. P. ἐστορέσθην. 

στρέφω, to a F. στρέψω, A. ἔστρεψα, P. ἔστροφα, P. P. ἔστραμ- 
pa, A. P. ἐστρέφθην, lonic ἐστράφθην, 2 A. P. ἐστράφην the usual 
aorist passive. 

στρώννυμι, στρωννύω, (ΣΤΟΡ-, ΣΤΡΟ-) the same as στορέννυμι, F. 
στρώσω, A. ἔστρωσα, Ῥ. Ρ. ἔστ ς 

στυγέω (ΣΤΥΓ- “Ds 3 to shudder at, A.é σα; ἔστυξα, P. ἐστύγηκα, ΡΟ 

. ἐστύγημαι, ἔστυγμαι, Ἀ. Ῥ. Pri «2 2 A. ἔστυγον, F. M. orv- 
γήσομαι as passive. 

συν-ίημι, to understand, A. ἐσυνῆκα, for συνῆκα, rare. 

συρίσσω, συρίζω, to hiss. whistle, ἘΝ. συρίξομαι, Α. ἐσύριξα, ἐσύρισα. 

σχάω, σχάζω, to cut open, let loose, F. σχάσω, A. ἔσχἄσα, ἔσχᾶσα; 
Μ. ἐσχασάμην, to leave o, give up, abandon. 

aaa, to save, regular; A. P. ἐσώθην from ode. 








§ 193.] ANOMALOUS AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 203 


T. 


TATO, TAQ, fo take, Epic, imperat. (rae) τῆ, Doric (raere) τῆτε, 2 A. 
part. tera} av, Epic. 

TAAAQ, TAAQ, TAHMI, to endure, venture, Poetic, I’. ταλάσω rare, 
Ε΄. M. rAnoopa, A. ἐτάλᾶσα, P. τέτληκα, A. M. ἐταλασάμην (oc), 
2 P. (rérhaa), τετλαίην, τέτλαθι, rerAavat, τετληώς, 2 A. ἔτλην, TO, 
er ih τλῆθι, τλῆναι, TAds. —TéTAG, 2 P. imperat. 3 sing. for τέ- 
τλαθι 

τανὕω, lonic ταννύω, to stretch, F. τανύσω (ὕ), Epic τανύω, A. ἐτάνι- 
σα, Ῥ. Ρ. τετάνυσμαι, A. P. ἐτανύσθην as middle, F. Perf. τετανύ- 
σομαι. --- TANYMI, Pres. P. 3 sing. τάνυται. 

τάσσω (TAT-), to arrange, regular; ἘΝ Perf. rera£opat, 2 A. P. éraynv. 

τείνω (TEN-, TA-), tendo, ἐο stretch, F. reva, A. érewa, P. réraxa, 

P. τέταμαι, A. P. ἐτάθην. 

τείρω, to afflict, F. τέρσω. 

τελέω, to finish, pay, F. τελέσω τελέω τελῶ, A. ἐτέλεσα, P. τετέλεκα, 
P. P. τετέλεσμαι, A. P. érehéoOnv. . 

τέμνω, Ionic τάμνω, (τέμω, TMA-) to cut, F. τεμῶ, P. τέτμηκα, P. P. 
τέτμημαι, A. P. ἐτμήθην, F. Perf. τετμήσομαι, 2 A. ἔτεμον, rarely 
ἔταμον, 2 A. Mid. ἐτεμόμην, rarely ἐταμόμην, 2 P. part. τετμηώς as 
passive. — ἐκ-τέτμησθον, P. P. subj. 3 dual. 

TEMQ, fo find, 2 A. τέτμον, ἔτετμον, Epic. 

τέρπω, to amuse, F. τέρψω, A. ἔτερψα, A. P. ἐτέρφθην, Epic érdp- 
φθην, as middle, 2 A. P. ἐτάρπην as middle, Epic, 2 A. M. ἐταρπό- 
μὴν (τεταρπόμην). --- ττραπείομεν, 2 A. P. subj. 1 plur. Epic for 
ταρπῶμεν. ὃ 

τέρσομαι, to become dry, to be drying, Ionic, A. ἔτερσα, A. M. ἐτερσά- 
μην, Ὁ A. P. érépony. 

TEYXEQ, P. M. τετευχῆσθαι, to arm one’s self. 

τεύχω (TYX-), to prepare, make, F. τεύξω, A. ἔτευξα, P. rérevya as pas- 
sive, P. P. τέτυγμαι, A. P. ἐτύχθην, Ionic ἐξεύχθην, F. Perf. rerev- 
Eoua. The forms τέτυγμαι, ἐτύχθην are found intransitive, nearly 
equivalent to εἰμί, τυγχάνω, ἔτυχον. ---τετεύχετον, 2 Pluperf. 

-.3 dual with the ending and force of the Imperfect? (§ 118, 1, αν 

τῆ, see TATQ. 

τήκω (TAK-), to melt, regular; 2 A. P. ἐτάκην, 2 P. τέτηκα as mid- 
dle, to melt away. 

TIEQ, to sadden, ver, Ῥ. Ῥ. τετίημαι, τετιημένος, 2 P. part. τετιηώς as 
passive, saddened, dejected. 

τιθέω (O€w), to put, place, Imperf. ἐτίθουν, F. M. τιθήσομαι. ---- éri 
6ea, Ionic for ἐτίθεον. 

τίθημι (τιθέω, Oéw), to put, place, F. θήσω, A. ἔθηκα only in the indic- 
ative, P. τέθεικα, Doric τέθεκα, P. p. τέθειμαι, Doric τέθεμαι, A. P 
ἐτέθην, 2 A. ἔθην, θῶ, θείην, θές, θεῖναι, θείς. Mid. τίθεμαι, Onoo- 
μαι, P. τέθειμαι, A. ἐθηκάμην, 2 A. ἐθέμην, θῶμαι, θείμην, (θέσο 
60) θοῦ, θέσθαι, θέμενος. The singular ἔθηκα, ἔθηκας, ἔθηκε, and 
the 3 plur. ἔθηκαν, are, with good writers, much more common than 
the remaining persons. On the other hand, the singular of the 2 A. 
ἔθην is not used in the indicative, at least by good writers. Of the 


204 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§ 133 


aorist middle only the indicative ἐθηκάμην and the participle Onxape- 
-os are found. —ri@nre, Pres. 3 sing. Doric for τίθησι. 

τίκτω (TEK-), to bring forth, beget, F. reEw, commonly τέξομαι, A. fre 
ξα rare, P. P. réreypa, τέτογμαι, both later, A. P. ἐτέχθην, 2 A 
ἔτεκον, 2 A. Μ. ἐτεκόμην, 2 P. τέτοκα, F. M. τεκοῦμαι. 

tizaw, to honor, regular; F. Perf. reripnoopat. 

τίνω (τίω), to pay, expiate, atone for, I. riaw, A. ériaa, P. τέτικα, 
P. P. τέτισμαι, ΠΡ. ἐτίσθην. ---- Mid. also τίνυμαι or τίννυμαι. 

se pie τίτρημι, (TPA-) terebro, tobore, A. ἔτρησα, P. P. τέτρημαι, 

. ἐτρήθην. 
τιτρώσκω (ror-, TPO-, TPQMI), to wound, F. τρώσω, A. ἔτρωσα, 
-P. τέτρωμαι, A. P. ἐτρώθην, 2 A. τέτορον, also ἐξ-έτρων. ---τέτορ- 

θαι, P. P. inf. 

τιτύσκομαι, Tarely τιτύσκω, (TYX-, τύκω) to prepare, take aim at, Epic, 
2 A. τέτυκον, 2 A. M. τετυκόμην. 

tiw, to honor, regular ; 2 P. τέτια, rare. 

τμήγω, τμήσσω. to cut, F. τμήξω, A. ἔτμηξα, 2 A. ἔτμαγον, 2 A. P. 
ἐτμάγην, ἐτμήγην. 

τορέω (TOP-), to merce, F. τορήσω, A. ἐτόρησα, 2 A. ἔτορον. --- τετο- 
pnow, from TETOPEQ. 

τρέπω, lonic τράπω; to turn, F. τρέψω, A. meas te Tonic ἔτραψα, P. 
τέτροφα, εχ τέτραφα, P ῥ᾽ τέτραμμαι, A. P. ἐτρέῴφθην, Ionic 
ἐτράφθην, F. Perf. τετράψομαι, 2 A. ἔτραπον, 2 A. P. ἐτράπην usu- 
ally as middle, 2 A. M. ἐτραπόμην. 

τρέφω, rare τράφω, (OPE®-) to nourish, F. θρέψω, A. ἔθρεψα, P. τέ- 
τροῴα, also ἔτροφα, P. P. τέθραμμαι, A. P. ἐθρέφθην rare, 2 A. 
ἔτραφον as passive, 2 A. P. ἐτράφην. 

τρέχω, Doric τράχω, (OPEX-, APEM-, APAME-) to run, F. θρέξομαι 
commonly δραμοῦμαι, rarely θρέξω, δραμῶ, Spdpoua, A. ἔθρεξα rare, 
P. δεδράμηκα, rarely ὑπο-δεδρόμηκε, P. P. δεδράμημαι, 2 A. ἔδραμον, 
2 P. δέδρομα, ἀνα-δέδρομα, Epic. 

tpew, to tremble, A. érpeca. 

τρίβω, to rub, regular; 2 A.P. ἐτρίβην, F. M. συν-τριβεῖται rare. 

tpit» (TPIT-), to chirp, screech, 2 P. rérptya as Present, 2 Plup. ére- 
tptyew as Imperfect. 

τρῦχω (TPYXO-), to wear out, afflict, F. τρύξω, P.P. τετρύχωμαι. Pass. 
τρυχόομαι. : 

τρώγω (ΤΡΑΓ-), to eat, gnaw, F. τρώξομαι, A. ἔτρωξα, Ῥ. Ρ. τέτρω- 
γμαι, 2 A. ἔτραγον. 

τυγχάνω (τεύχω, TYXE-, TYX-), to obtain, hit, happen, F. τεύξομαι, A. 
ἐτύχησα Epic, P. rérevya, commonly τετύχηκα, Pluperf. ἐτετεύχεα 
Tonic, happened, 2 Α. ἔτυχον. In the sense to happen, chance, hap- 
pen to be, it has τυγχάνω, ἐτύγχανον, ἐτύχησα, ἐτετεύχεα, ἔτυχον. 
-τόσσαι (τόχ-σαι), for τύξαι, A. inf. found only in ἐπ-έτοσσε 
(ἐπέτυχε), and part. ἐπι-τόσσαις Aolic. 

τύπτω (TYIITE-, TYI-), to strike, F. rio, commonly τυπτήσω, A 
ἔτυψα, P. P. τέτυμμαι, τετύπτημαι, A. P. ἐτυπτήθην rare, 2 A. érv 
mov (rérvrov) rare, 2 A. P. ἐτύπην. 

rigw (OY®-), to raise smoke, burn, A. ἔθυψα rare, P. P. τέθυμμαι, 
2 A. P. ἐτύφην. 





ᾧ 193.] ANOMALOUS AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 205 


AY. 
ὑλάσκω, ὑλἄω, to bark as a dog, A. ὕλαξα later. 
χ ὑπ-ισχνέομαι, Poetic and lonie ὑπ-ίσχομαι, to promise, F. ὑποσχήσομαι, 
. ὑπέσχημαι, A. ὑπεσχέθην rare, 2 A. M. ὑπεσχόμην. 
ὑφαίνω (ὑφάω, ὝΦΑΝ-), to weave, regular; P. P. ὕφασμαι, rarely 
ὑφύφασμαι. 
ὕω (Ὁ), to rain, regular; P. Ῥ. ὕσμαι, A. P. ὕσθην. 


Φ. 

ΦΑΤΓῺ, see ἐσθίω. ἱ 

φαίνω (φάω, ΦΑΝ-), to show, shine, F. φανῶ, A. ἔφηνα, later ἔφᾶνα, 
P. πέφαγκα, P. P. πέφασμαι, A.P. ἐφάνθην, 2 A. ἔφανον, 2 A. ἐφα- 
νόμην, 2 A. P. ἐφάνην as middle, 2 P. πέφηνα as middle. — φα ἀν- 
θην, ἐφαάνθην, A. P. Epic for ἐφάνθην. 

φάσκω, see φημί, πιφάσκω. : 

φάω, to shine, Epic, F. Perf. πεφήσομαι as middle. 

@AQ, to kill, see BENQ. : 

φείδομαι (ΦΙΔ-), fo spare, F. φείσομαι, A. ἐφεισάμην, 2 A. πεφιδό- 
μην Epic. —TIE®IAEQ, Β΄. πεφιδήσομαι, Epic. 

GENO, ΦΑΩ, fo Kill, Epic, P. P. πέφᾶἄται, πέφανται, inf. πεφάσθαι, F. 
Perf. πεφήσομαι, 2 A. πέφνον or ἔπεφνον, πέφνω, πεφνέμεν, πέ- 
φνων (not πεφνών). 

φέρβω, to feed, 2 P. πέφορβα. 

φέρω (OI-, ENEK-, ENEIK-, ENEIK-), fero, porto, to bring, F. οἵ- 
aw, A.(@oa), imperat. οἶσε, inf. οἴσειν, P. ἐνήνοχα, P. P. ενήνε- 
γμαι, rarely οἶσμαι, A. P. nvexOnv, F. P. ἐνεχθήσομαι, οἰσθήσομαι, 
2 A. ἤνεγκον or ἤνεγκα. Tonic forms, A. ἤνεικα, P. P. ἐνήνειγμαι; 
A. P. ἠνείχθην. ---- φέρτε, imperat. 2 plur. for φέρετε. ---φέρμεν, 
inf. Epic for φερέμεν. ----φέρησι, 3 sing. Epic, from 6EPHMI. 

φεύγω (SYT-, ΦΥΖ-), fugio, to flee, F. φεύξομαι, hevéodpa, P. M. 
part. πεφυγμένος, A. M. ἐφευξάμην rare, 2 A. ἔφυγον, 2 P. πέφευ- 
ya, Epic part. πεφυζότες. ---πεφύγγων, 2 P. part. Avolic, from 
®YITQ. 

φημί; φάσκω, (ΦΑ-) fari, to say, φῶ, φαίην, φάθι or φαθί, φάναι, pas, 

mperf. ἔφην, ἐφάμην, usually as Aorist, F. φήσω, A. ἔφησα, P 
. πέφᾶμαι, part. mehacpevos. 

φθάνω (ΦΘΑ-, ΦΘΗΜΙ), to anticipate, F. φθάσω. commonly φθήσομαι, 
A. ἔφθᾶσα, P. ἔφθᾶκα, 2 A. ἔφθην, φθῶ, φθαίην, φθῆναι, φθάς, 
2 A. Μ. part. φθάμενος as active.— παρα-φθαίησι, 2A. opt. 
Epic for παραφθαίη. 

¢ bcipw (ΦΘΕΡ-), to corrupt, ἘΝ. sgl oat Epic φθέρσω, F. M. φθεροῦ- 
pa, φθαροῦμαι, A.épOerpa, P. ἔφθαρκα, P. P. ἔφθαρμαι, 2 A. P, 
epOdpny, 2 P. ἔφθορα, sometimes as intransitive or middle.— 
ἔφθορθαι, P. P. inf. AXolic for ἐφθάρθαι. 

φθίνω (φθίω, POINE-, ΦΘΙΜΙ), to be consumed, A. ἐφθίνησα rare, P. 
κατ-εφθίνηκα rare, 2 A. (€pOiv), inf. φθῖναι, part. φθῖσα rare, — 
ΦΘΙΘΩ, Imperf. ἀπ-ἐφθιθον as Aorist. 

φθίω (ΦΘΙΜΙ), to consume, waste, F. φθίσω φθιῶ, A. ἔφθισα, P. P. 
épbipa, Plup. ἐφθίμην, A.P. ἐφθίθην, 2 A. M. ἐφθίμην, φθίωμαι, 
pbipny φθῖτο, φθίσθω, φθίσθαι. φθίμενος. 


206 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§ 133. 


φθονέω, to envy, regular. —épOdveca, A. later for ἐφθόνησα. ~ 

φιλέω, to love, regular; F. Perf. Τὰ ΤΕ οὐ τ — Epic A.M. ἐφζλά- 
μην, ropa, φίλαι (φῖλαι), Pirduevos, from SIAQ. — φιλήμε- 
vat, inf. fie Pa sia $ Be SiNae 

ΦΛΑΖΩ (SAAA-), to burst asunder, P. P. πέφλασμαι, 2 A. ἔφλαδον. 

φλέγω, to burn, regular; 2 A. P. ἐφλέγην. ; 

Prva, περι-φλύω, (BAEY-) to scorch, P. P. περι-πέφλευσμαι. 

φράζω (PPAA-), fo tell, explain, regular; 2 A. réppadov, ἐπέφραδον, 
Epic.—apo-redpadpevos, P. P. part. for προ-πεφρασμένος. ---- 
φράδεν, Imperf. 3 sing. for ἔφραζεν. 

pew, used in composition with ἐκ, eis, διά, regular.— SPHMI, 2 A. 
(ἔφρηνί, imperat. dpes, inf. φρῆναι. 

φρύγω, frigo, to parch, regular; 2 A. P. ἐφρύγην- 

φυχάσσω (ΦΥΛΑΚ-), to watch, regular; 2 P. πεφύλακα. ---προ-φύ- 
Aax Ge, Pres. imperat. 2 plur.. for προφυλάσσετε. 

φῦρω, to knead, mix, A. ἔφυρσα, P. P. πέφυρμαι, A. ἐφύρθην, F. Perf. 
πεφύρσομαι, 2 A. P. ἐφύρην. --- ΦΥΡΑΩ, φυρᾶσω, &c., regular. 

φύω (ΦΥΜΙ), to produce, F. φῦσω, A. pica, P. πέφῦκα as Present 
middle, ἐο be, Plup. ἐπεφύκειν as Imperfect middle, 2 P. πέφυα as 
Present middle, 2 A. ἔφῦν, hia, φύῦην, φῦναι, dvs, as Present mid- 
dle, fore, to be, 2 A. P. ἐφύην. ---- ἐπέφυκον, Plup. with the end- 
ing and force of the Imperfect. (ᾧ 118, 1, 4) 


- X. 

χάζω, ἀνα-χάζω, χάζομαι, (XAA-, KEKAAE-) cedo, to yield, F. χάσο- 
pat, kexadnow causative, A.xexadjoa rare, A. M. ἐχασάμην, 2 A. 
κέκαδον causative, Ὁ Α. M. κεκαδόμην, 2 Pluperf. ἐκεκήδειν rare. 

χαίνω, see χάσκω. 

χαίρω (XAIPE-, XAPE-, XAP-), to rejoice, F. χαιρήσω, A. ἐχαίρησα, 

. κεχάρηκα as Present, 2 A. P. ἐχάρην as active, Εἰ. Perf. xeyapn- 
σω, κεχαρήσομαι, as future to κεχάρηκα, P. M. κεχάρημαι, κέχαρμαι, as 
Present, Poetic, A. M. ἐχηράμην not Attic, 2 P. κεχαρηώς as Pres- 
ent, Epic, 2 A. M. ἐχαρόμην (κεχαρόμην). 

χαλάω, to loosen, F. χαλάσω, A. ἐχάλᾶσα, P. κεχάλᾶκα, P. P. κεχά- 
λασμαι, A. P. ἐχαλάσθην. 

xavdavw (XAA-, XANA-, XENA-), to contain, grasp, hold, F. χείσομαι, 
2 A. ἔχαδον, 2 P. κέχανδα as Present. 

χάσκω, later χαίνω, (XA-, XAN-) hio, to gape, F. χανοῦμαι, A. ἔχᾶνα, 
xava, rare, 2 A. ἔχανον, 2 P. κέχηνα as Present, to be open, gape. 

χέζω (XEA-), caco, F. χέσομαι, χεσοῦμαι, A. ἔχεσα, ἔχεσον, P. P. κέ- 
χεσμαι, 2 P. κέχοδα. - 

χέω (χεύω, XY-, XYMI), fo pour, Ἐ΄. χέω like the present, Epic χεύσω 

eva, later yea, A. ἔχεα, Epic ἔχευσα €xeva, rare ἔχῦσα, P. κέχὕκα, 

. P. κέχὕμαι, A. éxvOnv, FM. χέομαι, A. M. ἐχεάμην, Epic ἐχευ- 
dunv, 2 A. M. ἐχύμην. ~Mid. χέομαι, Epic χεύομαι. 

XAAZ- (XAAA-), to bubble up. 2 P. part. κεχλᾶδώς. ---κεχλάδειν, 
P, inf. Doric ; κεχλάδων, P. part. Aolic; both with the force of 
the Present. ἕ : 

χλιδάω (XAIA-), to Live luxuriously, 2 P. κέχλῖδα as Present. 

χαλόω, to enrage, regular; Εἰ. Perf. κεχολώσομαι as Future middle. 


§ 134.] ADVERBS. 207 


χόω, ώννυμι, χωννύω, to heap up, F. yoow, A. ἔχωσα, P. κέχωκα, 
. κέχωσμαι, A. P. ἐχώσθην. 
ΧΡΑΙΣΜΕΩ (ΧΡΑΙΣΜ-), ἐο help, avert, Epic, F. χραισμήσω, A. 
ἐχραίσμησα, 2 A. ἔχραισμον. 
χράομαι; to use, " χρήσομαι, P. κέχρημαι, A. ἐχρήσθην, A. Μ. ἐχρη- 
σάμην, erf. κεχρήσομαι. 
χράω ( ΚΝ τᾶς ΧΡΗΜΙ), to need, rare in the personal form, P. M. κέχρη- 
μαι, κεχρημένος, as Present active. 
Χρή, it is necessary, there is need, _Ampersonal, χρῇ: Χρείη, χρῆναι 
or χρῆν, χρεών, Imperf.. ἐχρῆν or χρῆν, I. χρήσει, A. ἔχρησε. 
χράω, to lend, see κίχρημι. 
χράω, to give an oracular response, Ἐς. χρήσω, A. ἔχρησα, P. κέχρηκα, 
P. κέχρημαι, κέχρησμαι, A. P. ἐχρήσθην. Mid. χράομαι, to con- 
sult an oracle, 
χρεμετίζω (XPEMIZ-), to neigh, A. ἐχρέμισα. 
χρίω, to anoint, regular, P. P. κέχρϊμαι, κέχρισμαι, A. P. ἐχρίσϑην. 
χρώζω, χρώννυμι, χρωννύω, (XPO-) to color, A. ἔχρωσα, P. P. κέχρω- 
opat, rarely κέχρωμαι, A. P. ἐχρώσθην. 


ΨΣ 
ψαύω, to handle, regular; P. P. ἔψαυσμαι, A. P. ἐψαύσθην. 
ψύχω, to cool, regular ; 2A, P. ἐψύχην and ἐψύγην. 

Q. 


ὠθέω (20-), to push, F. ὠθήσω, commonly ὥσω, A. Zoca, Ionic dca, 
P. ἐξ-έωκα, Ρ. P. ἔωσμαι, lonic ὦσμαι, A. Ρ. ἐώσθην, rarely ἐώθην, 
Α. Μ. ἀπ-ωσάμην. —av- ὠθεοίη, opt. 3 sing. in an touted inscription. 


᾿ ὠνέομαι, to buy, Imperf. ἐωνούμην, ὠνούμην, F. ὠνήσομαι, P. ἐώνημαι, 


A. ἐωνήθην passively, A.M. ἐωνησάμην, ὠνησάμην. Classical writ- 
ers generally use ἐπριάμην for ἐωνησάμην. 


xs 134. ADVERBS. 


1. Endings of Adverbs answering to πόθι or ποῦ, where? 
-θι; as ἄλλοθι, ἀγρόθι, ἐγγύθι, ἐκεῖθι. 


κου; as αὐτοῦ, ἀλλαχοῦ, πανταχοῦ, ἀγχοῦ. 

ται; “only i in χαμαί, humi, 

-οἵ ; as Ἰσθμοῖ, Πυθοῖ, Φαληροῖ, Meyapot. — Θἴκοι. 

εῦι, Aolic for τοι; μέσυι (μέσοι), τυῖδε, πήλυι, ἄλλυι, τοὔτοι, ἀτέρυι 

τῷ ; ἄνω, κάτω, εἴσω, ἔσῳ, ἔξω, ὀπίσω, πρόσω, πόρσω, πόρρω. 

-σι is found in names of towns or cities ; as Αθήνησι, Θήβησι, Ολυμ 
πιᾶσι, Θεσπιᾶσι. 

-δον, -ττος, -θα; ἔνδον, ἐντός intus, ἐκτός, ἔνθα, ἐνταῦθα, ὕπαιθα. 


“2. Endings of Adverbs answering to πόθεν, whence? 
26ev, Latin-nde; as ἄλλοθεν, οὐρανόθεν, Αθήνηθεν. 
θα, AXolic and Doric ; πρόσθα, ἔμπροσθα, ἔνερθα, ὄπισθα ὔπισθα, 
ἐξύπισθα, ἄνωθα. 
-ὦ, Doric, in rovré, τηνῶ, ὦ. αὐτῶ 


ἣν 


208 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§ 135. | 


AB Endings of Adverbs answering to πόσε or ποῖ, whither 2 
᾿ς -8e is regularly appended to the accusative ; as οἶκόνδε, Gade. — Φύ- 
ade, from φυγή, annexes -δὲ to the root... Οἴκαδε, from οἶκος 
bo lows the same analogy, with a change ord, into a. —In the Epie 
expression ὅνδε δόμονδε, -δὲ is annexed also to 6v.— The Epic ”Ai- 
δόσδε appends -de to the genitive, in consequence of the omitted ac- 
cusative δόμον. ---- This adverbial accusative always retains its pecu- 
liar “i aud may be accompanied by an adjective ; as Κόωνδ᾽ ei- 


ναιομέ 
-des, ἘΠ ‘and Doric ; χαμάδις, οἴκαδις, ἄλλυδις ; χαμάνδις, Ολυμπι- 
άνδις, ἀγράνδις. 


-ζε is appended to the root ; as Αθήναζε, θύραζε, EPA terra ἔραζε, 


χαμᾶζε. ---- Opia has Opiate. 
-σε; ἐκεῖσε, ἄλλοσε alio, ποτέρωσε. 


4, Endings of Adverbs answering to πότε, when? 


-τε, AZolic -ra, Doric-xa; as ποτέ, πάντοτε, πότα πόκα. 
παῖς only in πάλαι, ancient! Ψ. 

Other adverbs of time: dei αἰεί, αὔριον, ἔπειτα, ,Χχθές ἐχθές heri, 
veworTi nuper, νύκτωρ, noctu, νῦν nunc, ὀψέ, πέρυσι, πρίν prius, 
πρώην, πρωΐ, σήμερον τήμερον, τῆτες. 


5. Endings of Adverbs answering to πῶς, how? 


ὡς; English -ly, is appended to the root of adjectives, participles, or 
pronouns. or practical purposes it is-only necessary to change -ov 
of the genitive plural into “ws ; as σοφός σοφῶς, “ἥσυχος ἡσύχως, 
ἡδύς ἡδέως, ἀληθής ἀληθῶς, οὗτος οὕτως, ἐρρωμένος ἐρρωμένως. 

-δην, -δα, appended to the root of verbs ; as γράβδην, μίγδην Lan’ Bee 

The ending -δὴν is often preceded by a, in which case the radical] 
vowel ε becomes 0; as Aoyddny, σποράδην sparsim. — Πλοῦτος 
gives πλουτίνδην, and ἄριστος, ἀριστίνδην. 

δόν, Latin -tim, from nouns and verbs ; as ἰλαδόν, ἀγεληδόν, κυνη- 
δόν, χανδόν. 

i or - εἰ, from adjectives ; as ἐθελοντί, avati OF avatei, ἀμισθί, ὁ ὀνομα- 


OTi, ἀκηρυκτί OF ἀκηρυκτεί, be yale βαρβαριστί, Ἑλληνιστί. 
&, from verbs ; as ὀδάξ, ἐναλλ. 


6. Endings of Adverbs answering to πῇ, in what way? 


“0 (η), -ᾳ (-a), Doric - εἴ (rare) ; as οὐδαμῇ, ἄλλῃ, πεζῇ, ἰδίᾳ, δημο- 
σίᾳ, κοινῇ, ἀλλαχῇ, διχῆ; λάθρᾶ, πάντῃ, παντᾶ; Doric πεῖ, αὐτεῖ; 
τουτεῖ, τηνεῖ, ὁπεῖ. 


Xx § 13%. 1. Some genitives, datives, and accusatives, denot- 
Hie various relations, are commonly regarded as adverbs ; as, 


° 


G. ἑξῆς, ὁ ὁμοῦ, προικός, αἴφνης 
D. κομιδῇ, εἰκῆ, ἁρμοῖ, κύκλῳ, ἕκᾶτι, ἕκητι, ἀέκητι 
Α. μακράν, χάριν, μάτην, δίκην, τέλος, ἀρχήν, καιρόν, τὴν ταχίστην, 


ἄγαν, λίᾶν, ἕνεκα 


“- 
7 
΄ 


§ 186.] ῬΕΕΡΟΒΙΓΙΟΝΕ. 209 


2. Especially the accusative of the neuter of an adjective is 
often used adverbially; as μόνον, only; πολύ or πολλά, much. 
So πλησίον, ὕστερον, μάλα, κάρτα, κρύφα, δίχα, τάχα. 


. Sometimes a word with the preposition governing it is 
used adverbially ; as παρα-χρῆμα, προύργου (mpo-epyov), καθ-άπερ, 
ἐφ-εξῆς. So ἐξ-αίφνης, ἐκ-ποδών, ἐμ-ποδών, ἐπ-έκεινα, ἐπι-σχερώ.. 
κατ-όπιν. 


§ 136. PREPOSITIONS. 


Apt (ἀμφίς), amb-, around, about, mostly Ionic and Poetic. In 
- composition it sometimes implies two sides, which is properly its origi- 
nal meaning. 

Ava, on, upon. — AXolic and Thessalian ὁν- ; as ὁν-τέθην for dva-re- 
θῆναι ; dv τὸ μέσον, for ἀνὰ τὸ μέσον. : 

Αντί, instead of. In composition it often means against, contrary 
to, which is its original meaning. 

᾿Από (dai), a, ab, abs, from. In composition, also off, away. 
Acad (διαί), through. In composition, also asunder. 
Eis, Ionic and old Attic Es, to, into. — Argive évs, Doric, Beotic, 
and ‘Thessalian, ἐν. 
Ex or Eé, 6, ex, out of, from. — Doric ἐξό whea it stands for ἔξ- 
ἐστι ; Beeotic and Thessalian ἐς before a consonant, ¢éoo before a vow- 
el, as ἐς Μωσάων, ἐσγόνως, ἐσσάρχι. ---- It has already been remarked 
that ἐκ is used before a consonant, and ἐξ before a vowel. It is added 
Phere, that, in inscriptions, ἐξ is found before p; a8. ἐξ Ῥηνείας. 

Ἐν, in, at. — Epic évi, εἰν, eivi ; Doric and AXolic évd, but only when 
it stands for ἔν-εστι. 

Emi, upon, on. 

Κατά (xarai), down. In composition, also utterly, up, completely. 

Μετά, after, with. — AXolic and Beotic πεδά. 

Tlapa (mapai), along, near. 

Περί, around, about,—In the Elean inscription ΠΑΡΠΟΛΕΜΟ 
περὶ πολέμου. 

Πρό, prae, before. i 

Πρός, before, towards, — Doric mpori, rori; Beeotic mori. 

Σύν or Ξύν, cum, con-, with. . 

Ὑπέρ (ὑπείρ), Super, over, _ aia V3 

Ὑπό (vrai), sub, under. In composition, it may correspond to the 
English diminutive ending -ish ; as ὑπόλευκος, whitish. 


Nore. The word &s sometimes has the force of εἰς ; it is never, 
however, prefixed to a noun denoting an inanimate object. ἡ 








910 


8 187. 


ἀλλά, sed, at, but. 
ἅτε, _quippe, inasmuch as, because, 
αὐτάρ, ἀτάρ, 
x enim, for. 
and, but, for, on the other hand. 
ἐάν. ἄν, OF ἦν, (εἰ ἄν) Epic εἴ κεν, 
Doric αἴκα, if, of ἔπι any way. 
εἰ, Dorie ai, si, if, whether, that. 
4, Epic and Ionic 7, vel, or guam, 
than. 


ἠδέ, ἰδέ, and, corresponding to ἡμέν. 
ἡμέν, both, as well, followed by ἠδέ. 


§ 138. 


a, ἅ, ha! ha! of laughter. 

ai, αἰβοῖ, of wonder. 

ἀππαπαΐ Or ἀπαπαΐ, of approba- 
tion. 

ἀτταλαττατά, of joy. 

ἀτταταῖ, ἀταταῖ, Or ἀτταταιάξ, of 
sorrow and disgust. 

BaBai, or βαβαιάξ, of astonish- 
ment. 

ἕξ, or ἔ, hei! heu! eheu! ah! 


of grief. . 
εἴα, or ἐΐα, eja! on! courage! 
εἶεν, well, be it so; ἃ modifica- 


tion of the preceding. 

ἐλελεῦ, of grief « or joy. 

εὖγε, that is εὖ ye, euge! eu! 
well done! bravo ! 

evoi, evoe! evax! the cry of the 
baechanals. 

ἤν, ἢ nvi, ἡνίδε, en! lo! behold! 

iarrarat, or ἰατταταιάξ, of sorrow ; 
with the Genitive. 

tad, iavoi, eho! ehodum! heus! 
in answer to a call ; sometimes 
it is equivalent to FR ἰώ. 

ἰδού, lo! behold! 

in, of exultation. 

ἰού, alas! of grief. 


INFLECTION 








OF WORDS. [$§ 137, 138. 


CONJUNCTIONS. 


ἤτοι, either, or; in Homer, equiv. 


alent to μέν. 

ἵνα, ὅπως, ὡς, ut, that, in order 
that. 

καί, et, and. 

μέν, indeed, on the one hand, fol- 
lowed by δέ. 

ὅ s, yet, still. 

οὕνεκα, Since, because. 

ὄφρα, Poetic for iva, ὅπως. 

Te, que, and, 


INTERJECTIONS. 


ἃ, ah! of sorrow and compassion. | ia, 


io! of joy or grief. 

pd po, of pain; it is made by 
breathing strongly through the 
nostrils. 

8d, woe! alas! Ὁ 

ot, οἱ ! alas! woe! with the Da- 

~ tive. 

οἴμοι, that is οἵ μοι, woe is me! 

- with the Genitive. 

OTTOTOL, GTOTOL, OTTOTOTOL, OF οτο- 
Tororo, of sorrow. 

ovai, vae! woe! with the Dative. 

παπαΐ, παπαιάξ, papae! of pain, 
sorrow, joy, wonder. 

manana, how nice I feel! of pleas- 


ure. 

πόπαξ, πόποι, ὦ πόποι, O gods! 
of complaint. 

πύπαξ, πύππαξ, of wonder, or ad- 
miration. 

purarat, used by rowers. 

6 3, of smelling. 

φεῦ, φῦ, αἴας ! “with the Genitive. 

ὦ, oh! of wonder, or grief; witk 
the Nominative. 

ὦ, O! with the Vocative. 

on, of grief. 

or, used in encouraging row- 
ers. 


——" 





ᾧ 139.] DERIVATION OF WORDS. 211 


DERIVATION OF WORDS. 


AS 139. Substantives are derived from adjectives, verbs, and from 
other substantives, 


κα G. as, from adjectives in os pure or pos, and from verbs in pa. 
Those derived from adjectives denote the abstract, and are always 
paroxytone ; as ὁσία, αἰτία, ἔχθρα. ‘Those derived from verbs de- 
note action, and regularly change the radical e into 0; as χαρά, 
φθορά, μοῖρα. 

-ados G. ov, rare; ὅμαδος, χρόμαδος, ὀρυμαγδός. 

-atva Ὁ. ns, chiefly from 1 mastulinesin wy; as λέαινα, δράκαινα, θέ- 
atva. 

-ap, -ἄς, G. aros, neuter, from verbs ; as ἄλειαρ, ἄλειφαρ, ἄλκαρ, εἷ- 

bap, εἶλαρ, μῆχαρ ; δέρας, τέρας (from TEPQ, terreo). 

-as G. ados, feminine, chiefly in national appellatives; it denotes 
either a female or a country ; as Δηλιάς. 

-as Ὁ. ov, denoting the agent of a verb chiefly in composition ; as 
ὀρνιθοθήρας, φυγαδοθήρας, ὀνοματοθήρας. 

-δών G. ὄνος, feminine, rarely - δώ νη G. ns, from verbs ; as ἀλγηδών, 
χαιρηδών, μελεδών μελεδώνη, κλεηδών κληδών. 

-era G. as, from nouns in evs; only βασίλεια, ἱέρεια. 

-e.a G. as, from verbs in eva; it denotes action ; as παιδεία. 

-ειἅ G. as, sometimes -ia (Ionic -in), from adjectives; it denotes 
the abstract of the primitive ; as ἀλήθεια, ἀμάθεια ἀμαθία, ὠφελία, 
ἀβλαβίη, appadin. 

-ΕΥΣ, G. és, oxytone, English -man, -er, from nouns and verbs; as 
ἱππεύς, γραμματεύς, Awpievs. Those derived from verbs denote the 
agent, and regularly change the radical ε intoo; as γραφεύς, φθο- 
pevs, Towevs. — Sometimes it denotes a thing conceived of as an 
agent; as ἐμβολεύς. 

-n G. ns, from adjectives and verbs. Those derived trom adjectives 
denote the abstract, and are always paroxytone; as κάκη. ‘Those 
derived from verbs denote action, are generally oxytone, and regu- 
larly change the radical e into o ; as στροφή, dowdy, σπουδή, μάχη. 
So dywyn, ἀκωκή, dxoxn, ἐδωδή, ὀπωπή. ---- Sometimes it denotes 
the effect ; as τομή, ὦ section. 

_-np Ὁ. épos, the same as -rnp, rare; dnp, αἰθήρ. 

_-ns 6. ov, denotes the agent of a verb, chiefly in composition ; as_ 

γεωμέτρης, ἀλλαντοπώλης, τριηράρχης, παιδοτρίβης. 

«-βρᾶ 6. as, a modification of -τειρα, -τρα ; as ἀναβάθρα, οὐρῆθρα. 

_ -Opov 6. ov, a modification of -τρον ; as ῥεῖθρον, τεῖθρον. 

_ -IA, G.as, English -ness, -dom, denotes the abstract of adjectives; as 

_ κακία, εὐδαιμονία. 

_ «is G. i8os, feminine, chiefly in national appellatives ; it denotes a 

female or country; as Περσίς, Ἑλληνίς, Paxais. — A few come 

from verbs; ἐλπίς, dyupis, ὄπις, τρόπις, χάρις, φρόνις, τρόχις, Sais. 

_-Xn or-AXa G. ns, chiefly from verbs ; as ἀγέλη; ζεύγλη Oundn, τρώ- 

᾿ς γλη, ἄελλα, θύελλα. 





~ 


212 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [8 139 


» 


τλον or -λλον G. ov, chiefly from verbs; as φῦλον, εἴδωλον, δαί 


δάλον. 

-λος or-AXos 6. ov, chiefly from verbs ; as αὐλός, βηλός, κρύσταλ- 
λος, ὀπτίλος ὀπτίλλος, ὄκταλλος OCUlus. 

-MA, G. ατος, denotes the effect of a verb; it regularly has the pe- 
nult of the first person of the perfect passive ; as πράσσω πρᾶγμα, 
@ dopa ἅλμα, σπείρω σπέρμα. ---Ἴθμα, do Opa, from εἶμι, do. — 
Sometimes it denotes action; as φρόνημα, γέννημα. 

-pn G. ns, denotes the action, and sometimes the effect, of a verb ; it 
regularly has the penult of the first person of the perfect passive ; 
aS μνήμη, γνώμη, τιμή, ypappy.— Στάθμη from ἵστημι. 

pes, ἃ modification of -μη, rare; δύναμις, θέμις, φῆμις. 

-μός G. ov, denotes the action of a verb; it regularly takes the penult 
of the first person of the perfect passive ; as ὀδυρμός, διωγμός, σει- 
σμός. — It is often strengthened by 6; as βαθμός, apAuds, ἑλκηθμός. 
--Ισθμός, from εἶμι. ---- Sometimes it denotes the effect; as xpy- 
σμός, πλόκαμος πλοχμός, ῥωχμός. 

-νη G. ns, chiefly from verbs ; στεφάνη, δρεπάνη, ἐργάνη, ζώνη, πά- 
xn, φάτνη, μηχανή. 

-vov G. ov, from verbs ; γλύφανον, δρέπανον, τύμπανον, ὄργανον, τέ- 
KVOPV. 

-vos G. eos, from verbs ; ἔθνος, ἴχνος, τέμενος. 

-vos G. ov, chiefly from verbs; στέφανος, καπνός, κάμινος, κοίρανος 
τύραννος, λύχνος (from AYKQ, luceo). 

-ora G. as, rare ; ἄνοια. 

τον G. ov, from verbs; ζῶον, ἔργον, ζυγόν. 

-ovn G. ns, chiefly from verbs ; as ἀγχόνη, ἀκόνη, βελόνη, σφενδόνη, 

a ns πλησμονή. ἡδονή. ὃ 

ὩΣ apy κυρη σέ μῳ the pin or agent of a verb; in dissyllables, the 
radical « becomes 0; as ἔλεγχος, λόγος, ὄνθος, ὄγκος. Those de- 
noting the agent are found chiefly in composition ; as ζωγράφος, λα- 
τόμος. μουσοποιός. ---- Sometimes this ending is active when the acute 
is on the penult, and passive when on the antepenult; as μητροκτό- 
vos, matricide, μητρόκτονος, one slain by his mother. 

-os G. eos, is appended to the root of a verb; as mpayos, γένος, δέος, 
tpupos, ἄνθος. ---Ἔ σθο ς from ἔννυμι. ---- When the verbal root is lost 
sight of, neuters of this ending are commonly referred to adjectives 
in us ; as βάθος, ὄξος, αἶσχος, κάλλος, μῆκος, ὕψος, μάκρος 

-ga G. as, chiefly from verbs ; ἕδρα, αἴθρα. 

ρον G. ov, chiefly from verbs ; ξυρόν, δῶρον, κέντρον, βλέφαρον, pe 
Tpov, λέπυρον, θύρετρον. 

ρος G. ov, chiefly from verbs; ξυρός, δαιτρός, ἰατρός, ὄλεθρος, κλῆρος, 
ἄργυρος, αἶθρος. 

s, feminine, appended to the root of verbs; as dy, dy, φλόξ, Sais, 
Sas, πτύξ, ῥώξ, τὴν vipa, τῇ ἀλκί, ai στάγες, THs στιχός ; but ὁ Bre 
— Sometimes it denctes the agent ; as ἄναξ, κήρυξ, φύλαξ, mascu 
line. 

wa or-o7 G. ns, from verbs ; δόξα, μύξα, Faooa, αἶσα (from AIQ, 


aio), cca (ΕἘΠΩ), μοῦσα, don. So μάζα, σχίζα, φύζα, with a 


change of ea into ¢. 


aie 





§ 139.] DERIVATION OF WorDs. 213 


-SIA, G. as, paroxytone, equivalent to -σις ; as eixacia, θυσία. -- 
When it denotes the abstract of a verbal adjective in ros, it comes 
from -ria by changing r intow; as ἀφθαρσία, δυσπεψία, ἀπραξία. 
ἀθανασία. : 

-ΣΊΙΣ, G. ews, Latin -tio, English -ing, -ment, denotes the action of a 
verb ; it regularly takes the penult of the second person singular of 
the perfect passive ; 85 τίσις, ποίησις, ὅρᾶσις, πρᾶξις, θλῖψις, κόλα- 
σις. 

-σος G. eos, -σον G. ov, rare; ἄλσος, πῖσος, aos, τέλσον. 

-Σ ΣΑ, G. ns, English -ess, from masculines ; as Λίβυσσα, ἄνασσα, θῆσ- 
σα, βασίλισσα, ἡρώϊσσα. 

-ΣΎΝΗ, 6. ns, paroxytone, English -ness, denotes the abstract of ad- 
ae ; as δικαιοσύνη, σωφροσύνη. ---ερωσύνη and a few others 

lengthen o into before σ. 

-retpa G. as, from masculines in -rnp ; as ὀλέτειρα. 

στη G. ns, rare ; ἀρετή, ἄτη (avdra), yevern, δαίτη. 

-THP, 6. npos, oxytone, -THS, G. ov, English -ter, -er, denotes the 
agent of a verb, and regularly takes the penult of the third person 
singular of the perfect passive; as σωτήρ, ῥυτήρ, δικαστής, ἱκέτης. 
— Sometimes it denotes a thing conceived of as an agent; as ζω- 
OTHp, ποτήρ, anrns, ἐπενδύτης. 

THS, G. ov, paroxytone, English -er, -man, from nouns; it is com- 
monly preceded by 4, n, t, τᾷ (Ionic in), ἑω ; as Πισάτης, γεννειήτης, 
πολίτης, Σπαρτιάτης, ἠπειρώτης, νησιώτης. 

ΤῊΣ, G. ητος, feminine, paroxytone, sometimes oxytone, Latin -itas, 
English -2ty, -ness, denotes the abstract of an adjective ; as ἰσότης, 
ὀξύτης, ddporns, βραδυτής. -- Π οτῆή ς from πίνω. 

τις G. wos, feminine to -τῆς from nouns ; as φυλέτις, γεννειᾶτις, πο- 
Airis. — A few come from verbs ; πίστις, μνῆστις, φάτις, φροντίς. 

-τός Ὁ. od, Latin -tus, apparently the same as verbal adjectives in ros; 
as ἀμητός, κωκῦτός, παγετός. Sometimes the accent is placed as far 
back as the last syllable permits; as βίοτος, πότος, θάνατος, κάμα- 
τος. ΐ 

-rpa G. ας, a modification of -τρια, -τειρα ; it commonly denotes the 
instrument used by the agent ; as Ψήκτρα, ξύστρα, ῥήτρα. 

τριᾶ ἃ. as, the same as -retpa ; aS ὀρχήστρια. 

tpov G. ov, from -rpa ; as δίδακτρον, νίπτρον, πλῆκτρον, λοετρόν. 

τρίς G. idos, the same as -retpa, -rpia ; aS αὐλητρίς, ἀλετρίς. 

rvs G. vos, feminine, from verbs ; as ἀκοντιστύς, Bonris, ὀρχηστύς, 
κιθαριστύς, ἀγορητύς. 

“τωρ G. ορος, Latin -tor, the same as -τήρ; as ἑστιάτωρ, πράκτωρ. 

-vs G. vos, rare; ἰσχύς, πληθύς. 

ὦ, -ὡς, G. ods, from verbs; ἠχώ, τὰς εἰκούς, πειθώ, αἰδώς. 

ὦν G. ονος or ovros, in participial nouns; as ἀγών, ἄξων, ἀηδών, ἀρη- 
γών, καύσων, τένων. , 

-ὧν G. ὥνος, masculine, denotes the place where many things of the 
same kind are kept; as δαφνών, γυναικών. 

ὠνης G. ov, rare ; τελώνης, νομώνᾶς Beotic. 

wvid G. as, the same as τών ; as ῥοδωνιά. 

ap G. opos, the same as -rwp, rare; κέντωρ, θαλασσοκράτωρ παντον 
κράτωρ. 


ῃ 





214 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [88 140, 141, © 


. τῶρ, neuter, from.verbs, Epic ; ἔλδωρ ἐέλδωρ, ἕλωρ. 
-ωρή G. js, from verbs, Epic ; ἀλεωρή, ελπωρή, θαλπωρή. 


ᾧ 140. Patronymics, that is, names of persons derived from their — 
parents or ancestors, end in | 
-adns G. ov, Holic -ἄδεος G. @, in nouns of the first declension; as — 

Ἱππότης “Inrorddns, the son of Hippotes ; Βορέας Bopeddns, AXevas — 

Akevadns, Αὐγείας Αὐγηϊάδης, Ὕρρας Yppadios, Τίνας Twadios. — 

Nouns in -cos of the second declension change -os into -ddns; 85 

“Aows Ασιάδης. ; 

-idns G. ov, Beotic -δας, in nouns of the second and third declensions; — 
it is appended according to the following examples : Aiaxds Αἰακίδης, 
Λητώ Anroidns, Βοηθόος Βοηθοίδης : Ἀγαμέμνων -ovos, Ayapepvovi- 
δης, Τυδεύς -έος, Τυδείδης ; Αχαιμένης -εος, Αχαιμενίδης, Ἡρακλῆς 

κλέος, Ἡρακλείδης. ---- For -εἰδης, the Aolic and Doric use the un- 

contracted form -eidas ; as Κρηθε-ΐδας, Oive-idas. 

-ιάδης G. ov, an Epic ending, always preceded by a Jong syllable; as 
Ayxions Αγχϊσιάδης, ΓἌρητος Ἀρητιάδης, Βάκχος Βακχιάδης, Λαομέ- 
dav Λαομεδοντιάδης, Οἱλεύς Οἱλιάδης, Καπανεύς Καπανηϊάδης. 

-ἰων G. -ἴωνος or -ἴονος, masculine, Poetic; ἃ5 [Ἄκτωρ Axropiwy, Κρό- 
vos Κρονίων, Πηλεύς Πηλεΐων. 

tovidns G, ov, rare; Ἐλατ-ιονίδης, Ταλα-ϊονίδης, Ἰαπετ-ιονίδης. 

-ἄς Ὁ. -ddos, feminine to -ddns ; as Θέστιος Θεστιάς, daughter of Thes- 
fus. ] 

-is G. -idos, feminine to -ίδης ; as”ArAas ArAavris, daughter of Atlas, 
Κάδμος Καδμηΐς, Θησεύς Θησηΐς Θησῇς. 

-ivn, -ιώνη, G. ns, feminine to -iwy; as Εὔηνος Einvivn, Ἀκρίσιος 
Ἀκρισιώνη. 


§ 14. A diminutive signifies a small (or dear) thing of the 
kind denoted by the primitive. Diminutives end in 
-cov ἃ. ov, the most usual ending; as ἄνθρωπος ἀνθρώπιον. παῖς παιδός 

παιδίον. ---- Many diminutives in -:oy have lost their diminutive signi- 

fication ; as πέδον πεδίον, ἕλωρ ἑλώριον, βίβλος βιβλίον, θήρ θηρίον. 

Stull, in such cases, the primitive is always more dignified than the 

diminutive form. 

ίδιον, commonly contracted with the preceding vowel; as γραῦς 
pads γραΐδιον γράδιον, γῆ γήδιον, βοῦς Bods βοίδιον, λέξις -eos λεξεί- 
τον. -- The endings -υΐδιον, -είδιον are aiways written -vdsoy, 

-tdtov; as ἰχθύς ἰχθύδιον, ὗς ὕδιον, ἱμάτιον ἱματίδιον. ---- The ending 

-εἰδιον may be written also ἔδεον; as ῥῆσις ῥησείδιον OF ῥησίδιον. 
-tdevs G. ews, denoting the young of an animal; as ἀετός ἀετιδεύς, 
Aayds λαγιδεύς. 7 
-is eh idos or ἴδος ; as ἅμαξα ἁμαξίς, νῆσος νησίς, πίναξ πινακις. 
-ίχνιον, -ίχνη, only in πόλις πολίχνη πολίχνιον, κύλιξ κυλίχνη κυ 

χνιον. 

ίσκιον, -ίσκος, -ioxn, (Beotic -ἐχος, -txa, chiefly in i 

names ;) as κοτύλη κοτυλίσκη κοτυλίσκιον, νεανίας νεανίσκος ; i 

ὀρτάλιχος, πύρριχος. 





















v 


ᾧ 142.] -. DERIVATION OF WORDS, 215 


τάριον; 85 ποῦς ποδάριον, ὠδή ὠδάριον. 

τάσιον, κύρη κοράσιον, the only example. 

-vAXos or τὐλος, -υλλίς, -ύλλιον, Latin -ulus; as Ἔρως Ἐρωτύ- 
λος, μεῖραξ μειρακύλλιον. 

-ὐδριον; as μέλος μελύδριον, νῆσος νησύδριον. 

-vdiov, -ἀφιον; as ζῶον ζωὔφιον, χῶρος χωράφιον. 


§ 142, Adjectives are derived from substantives, verbs, adverbs, 
nd from other adjectives. 


*atos is formed by annexing -tos to the root of nouns of the first de- 
elension ; as ἀγοραῖος, τροχαῖος, Ἀθηναῖος. ---- Its neuter is sometimes 
used substantively ; as τρόπαιον or τροπαῖον, Ἡραῖον. 

-ακός, equivalent to -txos, from nouns in os, ta, wov; aS σπονδειακός, 
Κορινθιακός, καρδιακός, Ολυμπιακός, Ἰλιακός. : 

-ἄλιμος, rare and Epic; κυδάλιμος, εἰδάλιμος, πευκάλιμος. 

-ἄνός after a vowel, -ηνός after a consonant, lonic always -ηνός, 
Latin -@nus, used in names of places out of Greece Proper; it is 
equivalent to -cos, and has no neuter. Most commonly adjectives of 
this ending are used substantively. E. g. Πάριον Παριανός, Φασια- 
vos, ABvdnvds, Λαμψακηνός. 

-as G. ados, common gender, chiefly from verbal nouns ; as ἱππάς, λο- 
yds, pawds, πτωκάς, ἀμοιβάς. 

-axos is found chiefly in adverbs in -χοῦ, -y7, -χῶς ; aS ἀλλαχοῦ, ἀλ- 


αχῇ. 
aoe s is formed by annexing -ἵνος to the root of nouns of the third 
declension ; as ὀρεινός, ddyewds. It is found also in adjectives de- 
rived from nouns of the first two declensions ; as ποθεινός, εὐδιεινός, 
ὑγιεινός, ἐρατεινύς. 

“εἰος is formed by annexing -1os to the root of nouns of the third de- 
clension ; as ὄρειος, Apyetos. It is appended also to the root of 
nouns of the same declension; as γυναικεῖος, atyetos. Not unfre- 
quently, however, ε takes the place of a oro in nouns of the first 
two declensions ; as μουσεῖος, σπονδεῖος, ἀνθρώπειος. Ἐπικούρειος. ---- 
Its neuter is often used substantively ; as κουρεύς κουρεῖον, Θησεῖον, 
Ἐρεχθεῖον, Ἡράκλειον. 

εἰς G. evros, from substantives ; it generally denotes fulness, and is 
preceded by ἡ; 0, ore; as φωνήεις, δενδρήεις, πλακόεις, χαρίεις. 

-eos, Latin-eus, English -en, made of, consisting of, chiefly from 
nouns denoting metals; as χρύσεος, ἀργύρεος. ---- In poetry, it is of- 
ten used for -εἰος ; as Bpdreos, Bdeos. — Sometimes it comes from 
other adjectives ; as Aaiveos, Keveds. 

, , , 

‘npns G. eos, rare; ποδήρης, ξιφήρης. 

-ns ἃ. ov, from nouns; as εὐώπης, ἐθελοντής, τριακοντούτης. 

~H3, G. eos, oxytone, from verbs ; as φραδής, ἀμαθής, θεοειδής, andns, 
oivoBapns, Geovdns. — In a few instances, it is actzve when the acute 
is on the penult, and passive when on the last syllable ; as θεομίσης, 
god-hating, θεομισής, hated by the gods. 

«ἧς G. qros, chiefly from verbals in -nros ; as ἀδμής, ἀκμής. 

ἼΚΟΣ, oxytone, Latin -icus, English -ic, -ish, belonging to, pertain- 


7 


216 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§ 142. 


ing to, from nouns; as ποιητικός, ἀρχικός, Meyapixéds. — When the 
root ends in a, the adjective may end in -aixds ; as τροχαϊκός, Ka- 
oravaixés, Πλαταϊκός. 

“ἐμος, sometimes -tuacos, from nouns; it denotes fitness; as ἐδώδι- 
μος, χρήσιμος. πότιμος, ὑποβολιμαῖος. 

ΝΟΣ (ἴ), English -en, made of, consisting of, from nouns; as ξύλι- 
vos, Spvivos. —Adivds, χθεσινός, from ἄδην, χθές. 1 

-tvos, equivalent: to -ανός ; it has no neuter, sad is most commonly — 
used substantively ; as Axpayavrivos, Acovtivos.—Ayxtorivos, 
from ἄγχιστός. | 

ΟΣ, Latin -ius, belonging to, derived from, from nouns ; as οὐράνιος, 
αἰθέριος, σωτήριος, ἑσπέριος, πάτριος. --- Those derived from names 
of places are commonly used substantively in the masculine and fem- 
inine ; as Νάξιος, Τήνιος, Kopivéios. —'Those ‘derived from other 
adjectives do not materially differ from their primitives; as ἐλευθέ- 
pos, καθάριος, abepiorvos. —The neuter is often used substantively ; 
as Διονύσιον, ποτήριον. ᾿ 

τες G. ios, feminine or common, from nouns ; as εὐῶπις, τριακοντοῦ- 
Tis, ἄναλκις, πατρίς, μητρίς. 3 

-κός, Tare ; θηλυ-κός. ; j 

-Ads, -héos, -Atos, or-Ats, from verbs and nouns, denote quality | 
or fulness; as δειλός, στρεβλός, εἴκελος, σιγηλός, ὑπνηλός, ψωοα- 
λέος, ἁρπαλέος, ἀπατήλιος, φύξηλις. 

“Hos, rare; ἀμφίδυμος, ἥδυμος, δίδυμος, ἔτυμος. --- Ανδρόμεος, from 




















ἀνήρ. Ξ 

μῶν Ἐς, ovos, from verbs ; it has an active signification ; as ἐπιστή: 
μων, νεκροδέγμων. 

-vés, chiefly ose verbs ; δεινός, orvyvds, σεμνός, ἐρεβεννός ἐρεμνός, 
στιλπνός. : 

τοιος is formed by annexing -ἰος to the root of nouns of the second 
declension ; as aidotos, notos, ὁμοῖος OF ὅμοιος. 

os, from verbs, with a change of the radical ε into 0; used chiefly in 
composition ; as rayvypados, bods, dipOoyyos, Aowrés. —In a few 
instances it is active when the acute is on the penult, and passive 
when on the antepenult ; as πρωτοκτόνος, that slays first, πρωτόκτο- 
vos, first slain. 

-ρός denotes quality or fulness ; chiefly from nouns or verbs ; it is 
commonly preceded by e, n, or v; as τρυφερός, πονηρός, ἁλμυρός, 
λαμπρός, ψυχρός. ἐχυρός, KPYQ xpvepds, NEKQ neco νεκρός, λύζι 
lugeo λυγρός. --- ΕἸΔΩ ἴδρις. 

s, from verbs ; as ἅρπαξ, ἐπίτεξ, πολυάϊξ, νέηλυς ἔπηλυς. ͵ 

-σίος is formed from -τιος by changing τ into 7; as φιλοτήσιος, πὰ 
σιος, Ἀφροδίσιος, Μιλήσιος, γερούσιος (γερόνσιος), ἀκηράσιος, ἐκ 
σιος (€xdvotos), Siheiod. τἰλήμ αν ike the following imply. 8 
primitive in -ήτης : βροτήσιος, ἡμερήσιος, γυκτερήσιος, Ιθακήσιος. © 

συνος; γηθόσυνος. δεσπόσυνος. θάρσυνος, πίσυνος. μ᾿ 
ΤΕΟΣ paroxytone, Latin -ndus, from verbs; it denotes obligat 
necessity, propriety ; regularly with the penult of the third pe 
singular of the perfect passive ; as γράφω ypanréos, scribendu 


to be written, that must be writien. 





§ 143.] DERIVATION OF WORDS. 217 


TOS oxytone, Latin -tus, from verbs, equivalent to the perfect passive 
hy participle ; regularly with the penult of the third person singular 
of the perfect passive ; as γράφω ypanrds, scriptus, wrilten. — 

Sometimes it denotes capableness ; as θεατός, visible, capable of being 
seen. — Sometimes it has an active signification ; a8 καλυπτός, cov- 
ering. 

GRee: Latin -ulus, English -ish, diminutive, Doric ; μικκός μικκύλος. 

«ὖς is appended to the root of verbs ; as ἡδύς, θράσσω tpaxvs, NEKO 
νέκυς. Not unfrequently the verbal force is lost; as πλατύς, εὐρύς, 
βαθύς, γλυκύς, ταχύς, ὠκύς. 

-b8ns, English -y, -like, contracted from -οειδής, from EIAQ, de- 
notes resemblance or fulness ; as πυροειδής πυρώδης, σφηκώδης, ave- 
μώδης. 

-ὠΐο i contracted - os, formed by annexing -cos to the root of nouns ; 
as npwios ἡρῷος, Koos. — In a few instances, the does not belong 
to the root; as πατρῷος, μητρῷος, παππῷῴος. 

-ων G. ovos, wvos, participial adjectives ; πέπων, αἴθων. 

-ώνιος, AXolic, formed by annexing -cos to the genitive plural of 
nouns; dAA@mos, ἑτερώνιος, παντώνιος. 

-@s, from adjectives in -wros ; as aBpas, ἀγνώς. 


8 143. Verbs are derived from substantives, adjectives, inter- 
jections, and from other verbs. : 


_-do, formed by annexing ὦ to the root of nouns of the first declen- 
SiON ; aS τιμάω, ἀτάομαι, τολμάω. 
-€@, from nouns, denotes a state, being, or action ; as πολεμέω, εὐτυ- 
€@. 
-evw, from nouns, is equivalent to -έω ; as ταμιεύω, κολακεύω, βασι- 
devo. 
τόω is commonly formed by annexing ὦ to the root of nouns of the 
second declension ; as δουλόω, cravpdw.— Sometimes it comes from 
nouns of the other declensions ; as ζημία ζημιόω, πῦρ πυρόω. 
ζω, -ἄἀζω, -ἰζω, from nouns and interjections ; as ἁρμόζω, σκευάζω, 
ὁρίζω, οἰακίζω, αἰάζω (ai at), οἰμώζω (οἴμοι), μύζω (μῦ), ἐλελίζω (ἐλε- 
λεῦ), ἔφευξα (φεῦ). : 
-aiva@, English -en, to be, to make, commonly from adjectives in os, or 
substantives in pa ; a8 μωραίνω, σημαίνω. 
«ὕνω, English -en, to make, commonly from adjectives in vs ; as βαθύ- 
Yo, σεμνύνω. | 
-σείω, Latin -urio, desiderative, from the future of the primitive ; as 
δράω δρασείω. 
-tdw, rarely -dw, desiderative, from substantives; as στρατηγιάω, ὠνη- 
τιάω, κλαυσιάω, θανατιάω θανατάω, πασχητιάω, χεζητιάω. 
εύλλω, diminutive, rare; as ἐξαπατύλλω, βδύλλω. : 


Nore. When the root of a verb is obsolete, it is customary to de- 
rive the actual form from a kindred noun ; thus Bodo, φιλέω, δικάζω, 
_ which are mere prolongations of the roots BO-, ®IA-, AIK-, are com- 
_ monly derived from Bon, φίλος, δίκη. 

10 








218 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [& 144- 146. 


COMPOSITION OF WORDS. 


Xs 144. 1. When the first component part of a compound word 
a noun of the first or second declension, its ending is dropped, and 
an o is regularly substituted. When it is a noun of the third declen- 
sion, an o is generally placed between its root and the second compo- 


nent part. E. g. 


θάλασσα κρατέω θαλασσ-ο-κράτωρ 
πρῶτος τίκτω πρωτ-ο-τόκος 
παῖς τρίβω παιδ-ο-τρίβης 


Sometimes the connecting letters are οἱ, oo, oo, ἢ: ty ας a0, at; 85 
ὁδ-οι-πόρος, θε-όσ-δοτος, πολισ-σο-νόμος, λαμπαδ-η-φόρος, καλλ-ι-πάρει- 
ος; ποδ-α-νιπτήρ, δικ-ασ-πόλος, μεσ-αι-πόλιος. 


_2-The connecting letter ο is regularly omitted when the second 
~ component part begins with a vowel, or when the root of the first part 
ends in ¢ or v; as Ψυχ-αγωγός, πτολί-πορθος, ἀστυ-γείτων. 


3. In words compounded with numerals, the first four numerals are 
povo- (before a vowel pov-), d:-, τρι-, terpa- (before a vowel rerp-) ; 
as μονό-παις, δί-πους, τρί-κερως, τετρά-πους, TéOp-immov. — Ἣμε-; 
semi-, half; as ἡμι-μαθής, ἡμι-κύκλιον. 

But δίς, and τρίς, in composition, retain their original force ; as δίσ- 
εφθος, doubly d, τρισ-όλβιος, thrice happy. 

Nore 1. When the second part is a digammated word, it is regular- 
ly preceded by 0; in which case -oepyos, -dexos may be contracted 
into -oupyos, -odxos ; 85 θεο-ειδής, pevo-erkns, ἀγαθο-εργός ἀγαθουργός, 
«axo-epyds κακοῦργος, (δαδό-εχος) Sadodxos. 

Nore 2. For the compounds of nouns in -ns, -os, G. eos, -as G. aros, 
aos ; of nouns in -ως of the second declension ; of some primitives in 


-μα of the third (as αἷμα) ; and of yéa γῆ, βοῦς, ναῦς, μέλας, πᾶς 


πᾶν, see Lexicons. 


§ 145. 1. When the first component part is a verb, the connect- — 


> 


ing letters are €, 1, εσ; σε: σι, EL, TO; AS pev-€-paxos ; apx-t-Kepav- 
vos ; φερ-έσ-βιος. 

- So περ-σέ-πολις ; ἐρυ-σί-πολις ; δηξί-θῦμος, τερψί-νοος ; ταμ-εσί- 

χρως. 


2. When the second component part begins with a vowel, the con- | 


necting letters are omitted. Sometimes however o stands between 
the component parts. Εἰ. g. πειθ-αρχῶ ; Πείσ-ανδρος, ῥίψ-ασπις. 


! ᾿ 
xS 146. The prepositions lose their final vowel, when the word 
with which they are compounded begins with a vowel; except repi 
and πρό; as ἀν-άγω, ἀνθ-οπλίζω, ἀπ-έχω, ἐπ-αινέω, περι-έχω, προ-έχω. 

Πρό may be contracted with the second part, when it begins wi 


εἰ 88 προέχω προὔχω, προέλεγον προὔλεγον. 








δῇ 147, 118] ΟΟΜΡΟΒΙΤΙΟΝ oF wonrDs. | 219 


Note 1, The final vowel may be retained before a digammated 
word; as ἀμφιέννυμι, ἀναοίγεσκον, ἀποειπεῖν, διαείδομαι, ἐπιέννυμι, 
καταέννυμι, μεταΐζω. 


Nore 2. The A®£olians, Dorians, and Epic Poets may drop the final 
vowel of dvd, κατά, παρά, mori, rarely ἀπό, ὑπό, before a consonant ; 
as ἀνστάντες, ἀννεῖται, ἀλλέξαι, ayEnpaive ; παρθέμενοι, ποτθέμεν, ἀπ- 
πέμπω, ὑββάλλω (for ὑπβάλλω). For κατά, see above (ᾧ 13, 11). 


Nore 8. The A®olic and Doric may change περί into περ, in com- 
position; as πέροδος, méppoxos, meppexew, for περίοδος; mepioxos, πε- 
ριέχειν. 


§ 1417. The inseparable particles are a-, apt-, ept-, δυσ-, 8a-, ζα-» 
Aa-, and νη-. 


a-, before a vowel ay-, English in-, im-, un-, or -less, called a privative 
or negative; prefixed to substantives or adjectives; as ἄθεος, ἄχρη- 
στος; ἀνόμοιος. ---- In two or three instances it is prefixed to verbs; 
thus, driw, ἀναίνομαι. ---- Before a digammated word, it is a-; as 
ἀεικής, ἄϊδρις, dovros (but dvovraros).—Ap-dacin, dva-edvos, 
exceptions to the rule. 

α- intensive; as ἀσπερχές, ἀτενής. 

a- denoting union; as ἄλοχος, ἄκοιτις. 

apt-, ept-, very, much, both intensive; as dpiyveros, ἐριβρεμέτης. 

dvoa-, Latii dis-, English mis-, un-, the opposite of εὖ, denotes diffi- 
culty, misfortune, badness, and is prefixed to substantives or adjec- 
tives ; as δύσπορος, δυστυχής. --- In δυσθνήσκω, it is prefixed to 

- θνήσκω. 

da-, ζα-, Xa-, very, all intensive ; as δαφοινός, Capers, Adpayos. 

vn-, Latin ne, negative ; as νήποινος, νῆστις, νώνυμος. 


§ 148. When the second component part is a noun beginning 
with G, ¢, 0, its initial vowel is often lengthened ; as ὑπ-ήκοος, στρατ- 
ηγός, ὁδ-ηγός, Nox-ayds, vav-adyds, ἀγ-ήνωρ, δυστ-ήλατος, ἀν-ώνυμος. 


PART ὙΠ: 
SYNTAX. 





SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. 


NOMINATIVE. 


§ 149. 1. The subject of a sentence or proposi- 
tion is that of which any thing is affirmed. ‘The 
predicate is that which is affirmed of the subject. 


2. The subject is either a nominative, or a word 
standing for a nominative. ‘The predicate is either 
a verb alone, or a verb and a substantive, adjective, 
pronoun, or participle ; in the latter case, the verb 
is called the copula. Both the subject and the 
predicate may have other words connected with 


them. Εἰ. g. 


Ἐγὼ λέγω, I say. 

Λέρνος ἦν βασιλεύς, Lernus was a king ; here Aépvos is the subject ; 

ἦν βασιλεύς, the predicate ; and ἦν, the copula. 

Axovoas ταῦτα 6 Κῦρος ἐπείθετο, Cyrus, hearing these things, was 

persuaded; here ἀκούσας ταῦτα ὁ Κῦρος is the subject. 

Nore 1. The most usual copulas are εἰμί, ὑπάρχω, πέφυκα, φῦναι, 
πέλω, πέλομαι, γίγνομαι, αὐξάνομαι, μένω, καταστῆναι: ἔοικα, aivo- 
μαι, ὁρῶμαι, δηλοῦμαϊ: καλοῦμαι, ὀνομάζομαι, λέγομαι, ἀκούω : aipe- 
θῆναι, ἀποδείκνυμαι : νομίζομαι, κρίνομαι, ὑπολαμβάνομαι : εἶμι, κατα- 
πέμπομαι, ἐπιβαίνω. , 


Note 2. The copula retains its peculiar character even when it be- 
comes a participle ; as Λέρνου ὄντος βασιλέως, Lernus being a king. 


§ 150. 1. A finite verb agrees with its subject- 
nominative in number and person ; as, 





§ 150.] | NOMINATIVE. 221 


Ἐγὼ λέγω, I say, It is Iwho say. Ἡμεῖς λέγομεν, We say, It is we 
who say. 

Σὺ λέγεις, Thou sayest. Ὑμεῖς λέγετε, You say. 

Ἐκεῖνος λέγει, He says. 


Ey, vo, ἡμεῖς are of the first person; σύ, σφώ, ὑμεῖς, of 
the second person; all other nominatives are of the third person. 


(a) A subject in the dual may take a plural verb. On the other 
hand, a subject in the plural may take a verb in the dual when two 
persons or things are meant; as Avo veavioxw προσέτρεχον, Two 
young men ran up. ‘Qs δ᾽ Gre χείμαρροι ποταμοὶ Kar’ ὄρεσφι ῥέοντες 
εἰς μισγάγκειαν συμβάλλετον ὄβριμον ὕδωρ, And as when two winter- 
torrents descending from the rocks unite ther mighty waters in a ravine; 
where two streams running on opposite sides are meant. 


(b) The verb may agree in number with the nominative in the pre- 
| i as Eordv δύω λόφω ἡ Ιδομένη ὑψηλώ, Idomené is two high 

2. ‘Two or more nominatives in the singular, 
connected by «ai (expressed or understood), take 
the verb in the plural and in the chief person, 
which is the first with respect to the second and 
third, and the second with respect to the third ; as, 

Ἐγὼ καὶ od ἐλογιζόμεθα, I and thou concluded. 

Πάρειμι καὶ ἐγὼ καὶ οὗτος Φρυνίσκος. Both I and ths Phryniscus are 

present. 


Τεθνᾶσι Κηφισόδωρος καὶ Audixpdarns καὶ ἄλλοι, Cephisodorus and 
Amphicrates and others are dead, 


(a) The verb may agree with the nearest or most prominent sub- 
ject ; as Αποτέμνεται ἡ κεφαλὴ καὶ χεὶρ ἡ δεξιά, The head is cut off, 
and also the right hand. 

(b) The verb may be put in the dual, if it belongs to two substan- 
tives in the singular ; as “Ηλυροποιικὴ καὶ ἡ κιθαριστικὴ πολὺ διαφέ- 
perov ἀλλήλοιν, The art of making lyres, and the art of playing on the 
harp, differ much from each other. 


(c) A nominative in the singular followed by μετά or σύν, with, 
may take the verb in the plural; as Δημοσθένης peta τῶν ξυστρατη- 
γῶν σπένδονται, Demosthenes with his fellow-generals made a treaty. 


3. When two or more nominatives of different 
persons and numbers are connected by 7, οὔτε, οἱ 
μήτε, the verb agrees with one of them, and is un 
derstood after the rest. 


222 SYNTAX, [§ 151. 


_ When however the nouns are regarded. as one whole, the 
verb is put in the plural. E. g. 
Δημοφῶν ἣ i Θηριππίδης € ἔχουσιν, Demophon or Therippides has. 


Οὔτε σὺ οὔτ᾽ ἂν ἄλλος οὐδεὶς δύναιτο, Neither you nor any body else 
could, 


So Ὅπως μὴ φθάσωσι pee Κῦρος μήτε of Κίλικες καταλαβόντες, In 
order that neither Cyrus nor the Cilicians may occupy them beforehand, 


4. The copula εἰμέ and its participle are very 
often omitted; as, 


*Apioroy μὲν ὕδωρ, Water is indeed the best thing ; sc. ἐστι. 
*Qv ὑφηγητῶν, Who being leaders ; sc. ὄντων. 


Nore 1. The first person plural is sometimes used, for the sake of 
modesty, ‘instead of the first person singular ; as Ὦ Αλκιβιάδη, καὶ 
ἡμεῖς τηλικοῦτοι ὄντες δεινοὶ τὰ τοιαῦτα ἦμεν, O Alcibiades, we too, 
a your age, were keen in such matters ; where Pericles alone 


Nore 2. In the Epic language the dual is sometimes used for the 
plural ; thus (ii. 5, 487) ἁλόντε refers to the Trojans. (1. 8, 185) 
ἀποτίνετον, ἐφομαρτεῖτον, σπεύδετον refer to four horses. 
( Od. 8, 48.49) κούρω κρινθέντε, βήτην apply to fifty-two persons, 
(Hyman. 1, 487. 501) κάθετον, λύσαντε, ἵκησθον refer to the Cre- 
tan sailors. 


Note 3. When ἕκαστος, ἕτερος, and ἄλλος in the expressions 
ἄλλος ἄλλον, ἄλλος ἄλλοθεν, are connected with a plural verb, they 
are really i in apposition with the subject of that verb ; as KoaBalsevres 
ὅπῃ ἐδύναντο ἕκαστος, Ascending as well as they each could, Ἡρώτων 
ἄλλος ἄλλο, one asked one thing, and another, another. 


§ 151. 1. Whenever a noun in the plural is re- 
garded as one whole, or when several nouns are 
regarded as one whole, the verb may be in the sin- 
gular. Particularly, 

The nominative of the neuéer plural regularly 
takes the verb in the singular. Εἰ. g. 

Τὰ στρατεύματα ἀγωνίζεται, The armies are contending. 

Ταῦτα οὐκ ἐνὰ These chang happened. 

So Ἡμῖν οὐκ ἔστι κάρυ᾽ ἐκ hoppidos δούλω παραρριπτοῦντε τοῖς θεω- 
μένοις, We have not (do not exhibit) a couple of slaves throne g nuts 
out of a basket to the spectators. 

‘2. On the other hand, a collective noun in the 
singular may have the verb in the plural ; as, 











δῷ 152, 153.] NOMINATIVE. 223 


Τὸ πλῆθος οἴονται, The multitude think. 
Td στρατόπεδον ἀνεχώρουν, The army were retreating. 


ZS 152. 1. The nominatives of the personal pronoun are 
implied in the personal endings of the verb. (ὃ 115. n.) Con- 
sequently, when they are expressed, they are either emphatic 
or antithetic. 
Thus, Τράφω, I write; Ἐγὼ γράφω, It is I that write; or I write 
with an emphasis upon J. Τράῴφετε, You wrile ; Ὑμεῖς ypadere, It 
ἐδ you that write. 


2. When a verb in the third person appears without a nomi- 
native, its subject must be determined by the context. Partic- 
᾿ς ularly, ὦ ' 


» 


(a) The nominative is omitted when any thing general and indefinite 
(ris, πρᾶγμα, χρῆμα) is expressed; as λέγουσι, They say. Οὕτως 
ἔχει, 11 15 80. Δείξει δὴ τάχα, Time will soon show it. 

(0) When the verb indicates the employment of a person, the word 
denoting that person is generally omitted ; as Ἑκήρυξε τοῖς Ἕλλησι 
παρασκευάσασθαι, sc. ὁ κήρυξ, ‘The herald proclaimed to the Greeks to 
make ready. 

(c) When it is implied in some part of the clause ; as Τὸν ᾿Ισθμὸν 
ἐτείχεον καί σφι ἦν ἐν τέλεϊ, They were building a wall across the Isth- 
mus, and their work (wall) was near the end. 

(d) Frequently the active verb is changed into the ¢hérd person sin- 
gular passive, and its subject-nominative into the dative of the agent; 
as Τοῖς πολεμίοις εὐτύχηται, for Οἱ πολέμιοι εὐτυχήκᾶσι, The enemy 
have succeeded. 

(e) The subject of verbs denoting the state of the weather or the op- 
erations of nature is not expressed; as ὕει, ἐξ rains; vider, it snows ; 
ἔσεισε, there was an earthquake. 


\s 1423. In general, any word, sentence, expression, or 
ause may be the subject of a sentence. Particularly, 


\(a) The subject may be an infinitive; in which case the verb is 
éalled zmpersonal. Such is the subject of 


δεῖ, ἐξ is necessary, one must. most commonly followed by an 
δοκεῖ, ἐξ seems good or proper. adjective. τῇ 
εἵμαρται, it is fated; εἵμαρτο, it λέγεται, it is said. 

was fated. ; μέλει, to take care of. 
ἐνδέχεται, it is possible, it hap-| πέπρωται, it is destined. 

pens. πρέπει, προσήκει, tt ἐδ proper, it 
ἔοικε, it seems, it becomes. behooves, it becomes, 
ἔνεστι, it is possible. συμβαίνει, it happens. 
ἔξεστι, it is lawful, proper. χρῆν it is necessary, there is need 
ἐστί, it is possible, easy, convenient,| one must. 





- 


224 SYNTAX, [§§ 154-156. 


(b) The subject may be a sentence beginning with ὅτε, that; as 
Δῆλον ἦν ὅτι ἐγγύς που βασιλεὺς ἦν, It was manifest that the king was 
pretty near. . ς. 

(c) The subject may be a preposition with a numeral adjective fol- 
lowing it; as Ἔφυγον περὶ ὀκτακοσίους, About eight hundred fled, 


§ 154. 1. The nominative often has the appearance of 
the vocative ; as ‘H Πρόκνη ἔκβαινε, Procné, step out. 

2. The nominative is used in designating an object without 
asserting any thing respecting it; as Ὁμήρου Ιλιάς, Homer’s 
Iliad. 

3.. The nominative, with or without an interjection, is used in 
certain exclamations; as “Qua ἐγὼ dedds! Oh wretched me! 
“Ὦ ducpopos! Unhappy man that I am! 


VOCATIVE. 


155. ‘The vocative with or without ὦ is used 
in addressing ; as, 

ἜἜπεμψεν ἡμᾶς ἡ στρατιὰ πρὸς σὲ, ὦ Κλέανδρε, The army has sent us 

to you, O Cleander. 

Note 1. The vocative singular may be used in addressing a num- 
ber of persons ; 85 Ἴτ᾽ ὑμεῖς. ὦ “Hpimnida, Go ye, O Herippidas, where 
Herippidas with others is addressed. 

Nore 2. (a) Ὦ may stand after the adjective agreeing with the 
substantive ; as Maxap ὦ Στρεψίαδες, O happy Strepsiades ! 

(b) It may stand between the substantive and its adjective; as Ἔρε- 
Bos ὦ φαεννότατον, O most bright Erebus. 


(c) It may be repeated ; as Ὦ τέκνον ὦ γενναῖον, O my noble child! 


(d) It may be separated from its substantive by a parenthetical ex- 
pression ; as Ἡμῖν εἰπὲ, ὦ πρὸς Διὸς Μέλητε, In the name of Zeus, 
tell us, O Melétus ! 


SUBSTANTIVE. AND ADJECTIVE. 


§ 156. 1. A substantive annexed to another 
substantive or to a pronoun, for the sake of expla- 
nation, is, by apposition, put in the same case. 

So when the annexed substantive is in the predicate of the 
sentence. E. g. ᾿ 

Ξέρξης βασιλεύς, Xerxes, a king, or King Xerzes. 


Ἐγὼ ὁ Tnpevs, I Tereus. Ἐμὲ τὸν Τηρέα, Me Tereus. 
Σὺ Ἕλλην εἶ, Thou art a Grecian. 











§ 156.] SUBSTANTIVE AND ADJECTIVE. 225 


So Λαβὼν Τισσαφέρνην ὡς vo Taking with him Tissaphernes as 
a friend. Θεμιστοκλῆς ἥκω, I Themistocles have come, 

(a) In Poetry, especially in Epic Poetry, a noun denoting a part is 
often put in apposition with the noun denoting the whole. In trans- 
lation, the leading noun may be regarded as an adnominal genitive. 
Τὰ, g. Δηΐπυρον Ἕλενος ξίφεϊ ἤλασε κόρσην, Helenus smote the temple 
of Deipyrus with a sword. : 

So Αλλ᾽ οὐκ Arpeidy Αγαμέμνονι ἥνδανε θυμῷ, But it did not please 
the heart of Agamemnon, the son of Atreus. 

(b) Possessive pronouns and adjectives implying possession are often 
followed by a genitive, which is in apposition with the genitive implied 
in the possessive pronoun or adjective ; as Τὸν ἐμὸν αὐτοῦ τοῦ ταλαιπώ- 
pov βίον, The life of me, a miserable man ; here αὐτοῦ τοῦ ταλαιπώρου 
is in apposition with ἐμοῦ implied in ἐμόν. A@nvaios dv πόλεως τῆς 
μεγίστης, Being a citizen of Athens, the greatest city in the world. 

(c) A noun is sometimes put in apposition with a whole sentence 
regarded as a substantive, ‘I'he noun thus appended is in the nomina- 
tive or accusative according as the principal word in the sentence, to 
which it refers, is a subject or an object. Εἰ. g. Τὼ παῖδε τὼ σὼ μέλ- 
λετον, τολμήματ᾽ αἴσχιστα, μονομαχεῖν, Thy two sons are about to fight a 
duel, a most disgraceful act, «Ἑλένην κτάνωμεν, Μενέλεῳ λύπην πικράν, - 
Let us slay Helen, to the bitter πος, of Menelaus. 

This rule applies also to such parenthetical phrases as Τὸ λεγόμενον, 
As the saying 1s ; Wav τοὐναντίον, The very reverse ; On the contrary; 
Τὸ τοῦ “Ounpov, As Homer says; According to Homer. 


(d) When the subject of a sentence is a demonstrative pronoun, it 
commonly takes the gender of the noun in the predicate; as Ἐπὶ Iv- 
λας τῆς Κιλικίας καὶ τῆς Συρίας. Ἦσαν δὲ ταῦτα δύο τείχη, To the 
Gates of Cilicia and Syria. Now these Gates were two walls; for αὗ- 
Tat, sc. ai πύλαι. 


2. A substantive in apposition to two οἱ more 
substantives is put in the plural. 


So when the substantive in apposition is in the predicate. 
E. g. | : 
Φιλήσιος καὶ Λύκων of Axatot, Philesius and Lycon the Acheans. 


3. A noun denoting a whole, which is regularly 
put in the genitive, may take the case of the nouns 
denoting the parts; as, 

Οἰκίαι ai μὲν πολλαὶ ἐπεπτώκεσαν, ὀλίγαι δὲ περιῆσαν, Most of the - 

houses had fallen, and but few remained standing, 


Nore 1. Sometimes a substantive ( commonly a proper name) is re- 
peated for the sake of emphasis; in which case, the repeated noun 


226 | SYNTAX. τ [§ 157. 


may, by attraction, be put in the nominative when there is a nomina- 

_ Uve in its vicinity closely connected with it; as Λαοθόη θυγάτηρ "Αλ- 
Tao γέροντος - “Arew bs Λελέγεσσι φιλοπτολέμοισιν ἀνάσσει, "Laothoe 
the bachier of Altes old ; of Altes who rules over the warlike Leleges. 
So Ἀνδρομάχη θυγάτηρ μεγαλήτορος Ἠετίωνος - Ἠετίων ὃς ἔναιεν ὑπὸ 
Πλάκῳ ὑληέσσῃ, Andro the daughter of magnanimous Eétion ; 
Eétion who dwelt at the foot of woody Placus. 


Nore 2. The limiting noun, which regularly is put in the genitive, 
may stand in apposition with the limited noun when both nouns refer 
to the same thing ; as Δέκα μναῖ εἰσφορά, A contribution of ten mine. 

Nore 3. Sometimes apposition takes place even when the nouns 
are partially related to each other; as (Her. 2, 133) “Iva οἱ δυώδεκα 
ἔτεα ἀντὶ ἕξ ἐτέων γένηται, ai νύκτες ἡμέραι γενόμεναι, In order that the 
number of years might become for him twelve instead of six, the nighis 
being reckoned as days. 

So (Id. 2,41) Τοὺς Bots θάπτουσι, τὰ κέρατα ὑπερέχοντα, They bury 
the oxen with the horns above the ground. (Soph, An. 259) Λόγοι δ᾽ ἐν 
ἀλλήλοισιν ἐρρόθουν κακοὶ, ἐρεῖ ἐλέγχων φύλακα, And hard words 
passed between them, — w blamang watchman. 

Note 4. A personal or national appellative may be used adjective- 

‘ly; as Πόλις Ἑλλάς or Ἑλληνίς, A Grecian city. Θῆσσαν τράπεζαν 
Frugal table ( fare). : 

Note 5. Ανήρ, man, may accompany personal or national appella- 
tives, regarded as adjectives; as Βασιλεὺς ἀνήρ, A man who is a king, 
simply A king. “Avdpes A@nvaios! Men of Athens! Athenians! “Av- 
Opes δικασταί! Judges ! 

Nore 6. In Poetry, a verbal substantive of the masculine gender 
is sometimes put in apposition with a feminine noun; as (Eurip. Med. 
1390) Μυσαρὰ καὶ παιδολέτορ, Vile murderess of thy own children! 
(Id. Hip. 689) Ὦ παγκακίστη καὶ φίλων διαφθορεῦ, O thou most wicked 
woman and destroyer of thy friends! 


X § 157. 1. An adjective agrees with its substan- 
tive in gender, number, and case. 


So when the adjective is in the predicate of the sentence. 

This rule applies also to the article, the adjective pronouns, and to 
the participle. E. g. 

Ανὴρ σοφός, Or Σοφὸς ἀνήρ, A wise man. 

Τῷ ἐμῷ πατρί, To my father. 

Παρὼν ὁ Κῦρος, Cyrus being present. 

Ἐγὼ ἄτολμός εἰμι, I am timid, 

With respect to position, when the substantive has no article, the 
adjective is placed before or after its substantive. 

(1) A noun or pronoun in the dual may take a participle in the 


Ἷ 


ᾧ 157.] SUBSTANTIVE AND ADJECTIVE. 227 


plural. On the other hand, a noun or pronoun in the plural may take 
a participle in the dual when two things are meant. Εἰ. ¢. Νὼ καταβάν- 
τες, We both descending. Αἰγυπιοὶ κλάξοντε μάχονται, Two vultures 
uttering loud shrieks fight. 


(b) The masculine of the dual of all adjective forms may agree with 
a feminine substantive ; as To 630, The two ways. Tovrow τοῖν κῖνη- 
σέοιν, Of these two motions. 


(c) When the subject of a sentence is, or is regarded as, an inani- 
mate thing (τὶ, χρῆμα, πρᾶγμα), the adjective in the predicate is put in 


the neuter singular; as Ἢ χιὼν ἦν ἀλεεινόν, The snow was warm (a 
warm thing). 


(d) When the subject is any word but a nominative, the adjective in 
the predicate is put in the neuter singular or plural ; as Ράδιον ἦν Aa- 
Beiv, To take was easy, It was easy to take. Αδύνατα ἦν τοὺς Λοκροὺς 
ἀμύνεσθαι, It was impossible to chastise the Locrians. 


(e) The participle of the copula may agree in gender with the noun 
in the predicate ; as “H λέαινα ἐὸν ἰσχυρότατον, The lioness being a very 
strong animal. 

2. If an adjective refers to two or more substan- 
tives, it is put in the plural, and in the leading gen- 
der, which is the masculine with respect to the 
other genders, and the feminine with respect to the 
neuter. 

So when the adjective is in the predicate of the sentence. E. g. 


Βοῦν καὶ ἵππον καὶ κάμηλον ὅλους ὀπτούς, An ox, a horse, and a camel, 
roasted whole, 

Γραΐδια καὶ γερόντια καὶ πρόβατα ὀλίγα καὶ βοῦς καταλελειμμένους, 

ες Old women and old men, a few sheep, and oxen, abandoned. 


(a) If the substantives denote inanimate beings, the adjective is reg- 
ularly neuter; as Ai@ot τε καὶ πλίνθοι καὶ ξύλα ἀτάκτως ἐρριμμένα, 
Stones, brick, and timber, thrown together without order. 


(b) The adjective may agree with one of the substantives, common- 


ly with the most prominent one; as (Eur. Bac, 905) ‘Erépg..... 


ὄλβῳ καὶ δυνάμει, In another kind of prosperity and power. 
(c) The adjective or participle may be put in the dual if it refers to 


two substantives ; as Καλλίας καὶ Ἀλκιβιάδης ἡκέτην ἄγοντε τὸν Πρόδι- 
ov, Callias and Alcibiades came bringing Prodicus. 


3. Acollective substantive in the singular may 


‘take an adjective or participle in the plural; as 


) Τροίην ἑλόντες Ἀργείων στόλος, The army of the Ar- 


gives having taken Troy. 


228 SYNTAX. [85 158, 159. 


- 


Nore 1. (a) Sometimes the gender and number of the adjective are . 


determined by the adnominal genitive ; as Πτηνῶν ἀγέλαι ὑποδείσαντες, 


flocks of birds having been terrified. 


(ὦ) Sometimes the gender of the adjective or participle is determin- — 


ed by the gender implied in the substantive; as Φίλε τέκνον, Dear 
child. E)@av-Bin “Hpaxdnin, The might of Hercules having come; 
that is Hercules. 


Nore 2. The masculine is commonly used in general remarks or — 
assertions, even when the objects spoken of belong to the female sex ; 


as Mg ἐγαθοί, the good ; οἱ κακοί, the wicked; oi tixrovres, parents. 

Ὁ when, in the tragic Poets, a woman speaks of herself in the 
reas (ᾧ 150, x. 1.) 
XNore 3. Avo or Ava, two, is very often joined to plural substan- 
tives ; as Avo ψῦχάς. Δυοῖν οἰμώγμασι. 


Δοῦρε, two spears, and ὄσσε, the eyes, in Homer, are accompanied — 
by a plural adjective. 


§ 158. 1. Any adjective or participle may be used sub- 

tively, the substantive with which it agrees being under- 

stood ; as φίλος, a friend ; οἱ θνητοί, the mortals; τὰ ἐμά, my 
property ; οἱ φιλοσοφοῦντες, philosophers. 


2. The neuter singular of an adjective or participle, preced- 
ed by the article, may be used for the corresponding abstract 
noun ; as τὸ καλόν, the beautiful, beauty ; τὸ θεῖον, divinity ; τὸ 
δεδιός, fear ; τὸ μέλλον, the future. 


So τὸ ἐμόν, that which is mine, periphrastically for eyo, I. 


3. Masculine and feminine adjectives often supply the place 
of adverbs; as χθιζός, hesternus; ἄσμενος, gladly. Particu- 
larly numeral adjectives in -aios 3; as τριταῖος, πεμπταῖος. 


ἃ 159. 1. When the comparative is not followed by the 
genitive, the conjunction 7, than, is put between it and the word 
with which it is compared; the case of the latter being the 
same as that of the former; as, 


Μέλλεις ἐπ᾽ ἄνδρας στρατεύεσθαι ἀμείνονας ἢ Σκύθας, Thou art about 
to march against men superior to the Scythaans, 

Τοῖς βασιλεῦσι τῶν Λακεδαιμονίων ἀδικεῖν ἧττον ἔξεστιν ἢ τοῖς iia 
ταις, The kings of the Lacedemonians have less power to do wrong 
than private individuals, 

αἱ Μαιάνδρου ποταμοῦ καὶ ἑτέρου οὐκ ἐλάσσονος ἢ Μαιάνδρου, 
(6 sources of the river Meander, and of another river not smaller 
than the Meander, 


(a) Sometimes the nominative is used after 7, the context determin 








ᾧ 159.] SUBSTANTIVE AND ADJECTIVE. 229 


ing its verb; as Τοῖς νεωτέροις καὶ μᾶλλον ἀκμάζουσιν ἢ ἐγὼ, παραινῶ, 
sc. ἀκμάζω, I advise the young who are more vigorous than I am, 

(b) Πρός, κατά, ὅτε. ὡς, ὥστε; may be used after ἤ; as Μείζω ἢ 
κατὰ δάκρυα, Too great for tears. 


2. A comparison between two qualities of*the same person 
or thing is expressed by means of two comparatives with ἢ be- 
tween them; as Μανικώτεροι ἢ ἀνδρειότεροι, More rash than 
brave. 


“Ἢ 


3. When the word, with which the comparison is made, is 
omitted, the Greek comparative corresponds to the English 
positive with too, rather, somewhat, pretty, a little, a little too ; 
as Ὅπου δὲ στενωτέρα εἴη ἡ ὁδός, And wherever the road was too 
narrow. 


4, 'The comparative may be strengthened by ἔτι, etiam, yet, 
still, μέγα, much, μακρῷ, longe, by far, ὀλίγῳ, ὀλίγον, little, by 
less, πολλῷ, ἔτι πολλῷ, πολύ, multo, much, more, ὅσῳ, ὅσον, by as 
much as, the more, τοσοῦτον, τοσούτῳ, so much, the more; also by 
μᾶλλον, more. Ἔ 


5. The superlative may be strengthened by μακρῷ, πολλῷ, 
πολύ, ὅσῳ, τοσούτῳ, οἷος, ὡς, ὅπως, ὅτι ; ἧ, (uam, very ; ἐν τοῖς, 
of all, among all; also by μάλιστα, πλεῖστον, μέγιστον, most, very. 


Nore 1. When a word implies a comparison, it may be followed by 
i, than ; as Τοὐναντίον δρῶν ἢ προσῆκ᾽ αὐτῷ ποιεῖν, Doing contrary to 
what he ought to do. are 

Words of this class are βούλομαι, ἐθέλω, ζητέω, δίκαιον, σοφόν, ἐναν- 
τίον, πικρός, and some others. . 


Nore 2. The adverbs πλέον, μεῖον, ἔλαττον, often have the ap- 
pearance of indeclinable adjectives ; as Πελταστὰς καὶ τοξότας πλέον ἢ 
ει  Α 4 5 
εἴκοσι μυριάδας, More than twenty myriads of targeteers and archers, 


Nore 3.”H may be omitted after πλέον, πλείω, ἔλαττον, followed 
by a numeral ; 85 Ἔτη γεγονὼς πλείω ἑβδομήκοντα, Being upwards of 
seventy years of age. 


Nore 4. The superlative in a few instances has the force of the 
comparative ; as Σεῖο δ᾽, Αχιλλεῦ, οὔτις ἀνὴρ προπάροιθε μακάρτατος, 
No man, O Achilles, was ever more completely happy than thou. 


Nore 5. After οἷος, ὡς, ὅπως, ὅτι (properly 6 τι), and 7, the words 
~ δυνατόν ἐστι, or δύνασθαι, as much as possible, as he can or could, may 
be mentally supplied ; as "Avdpas Πελοποννησίους ὅτι πλείστους, AS 
many Peloponnesians as possible. 


290 SYNTAX. [§ 160. 


PRONOUNS AND ARTICLE. 


¥§ 160. 1. The genitive of the personal pronoun corre- 
sponds to the English my, mine, our, ours; thy, thine, your, 
yours ; his, her, hers, its, their, theirs. 


2. Ἐμοῦ, ἐμοί, ἐμέ, are more emphatic than the correspond- 
ing enclitics μοῦ, poi, μέ. In Poetry, however, even the-latter 
are sometimes emphatic or antithetic. 


3. After a preposition, ἐμοῦ, ἐμοί, ἐμέ are generally used. 
Except μέ in the expression πρός με, which however is‘less 
strong than πρὸς ἐμέ. 


. Αὐτός is the usual third person of the personal pronoun. 
If the oblique cases it refers either to a person or thing: dif- 
ferent from the subject of the sentence, or to the subject of the 
principal sentence. The same remark applies to the oblique 
cases of 7. E. g. 
Ὃ νόμος αὐτὸν οὐκ ἐᾷ, The law does not permit him. 
Κῦρος ἐδεῖτο τοῦ Saka σημαίνειν αὐτῷ, Cyrus desired Sacas to notify 
to ham (sc. Cyrus). 


ς (a) Αὐτός, accompanied by a substantive, is emphatic, se/f, very. 
Sometimes it means by one’s self, in the sense of alone. E. g. Αὐτὸς 
Μένων, Menon himself. Κῦρος αὐτός, Cyrus himself. Αὐτοὶ yap ἐσμεν. 
For we are alone. 


(b) Αὐτός, self, very, may be placed before a personal pronoun ex- 
pressed or implied ,; as Αὐτός εἶμι, sc. ἐγώ, I am the very man. Αὐτὸς 
ov, or Σὺ αὐτός, Thou thyself. Ταῦτα αὐτοὶ ἐποιεῖτε, You did these 
things yourselves. Ξ 


(c) Αὐτός, self, very, may be connected with οὗτος or ἐκεῖνος, for 
the sake of emphasis ; as Αὐτὸς οὗτος, This very person. Αὐτὸς ἐκεῖ- 
vos, That very person. Αὐτοῦ ἐκείνου, His own. 


(d) Αὐτός is used with ordinal numbers, to show that one person 
with others, whose number is less by one than the number implied in 
the ordinal, is spoken of; as ‘HipéOn πρεσβευτὴς és Λακεδαίμονα δέκα- 
tos αὐτός, He being the tenth (with nine others) was appointed plenipo- 
tentiary to Lacedemon. 


(e) In sentences containing the reflexive pronoun, the nominative of 
αὐτός may, for the sake of emphasis, be placed near the reflexive 
pronoun ; as Παλαιστὴν νυν παρασκευάζεται ἐπ᾽ αὐτὸς αὑτῷ, He is now 
preparing an antagonist against himself. 

(f) In Homer, Αὐτός is often used when a person or thing is to be 
opposed to any thing connected with it; as Πολλὰς δ᾽ ἰφθίμους ψῦχὰς 
"Aid: προΐαψεν ἡρώων, αὐτοὺς δὲ ἑλώρια τεῦχε κύνεσσιν, And sent pre- 


Sentence, like the Latin sui, sibi, se. 


§ 161.] PRONOUNS AND ARTICLE. ᾿ " 99] 


maturely many brave souls of heroes to Hades, and made their bodies the 
prey of dogs. . 

5. Αὐτός, preceded by the article, signifies idem, the same; as 
Περὶ τῶν αὐτῶν τῆς αὐτῆς ἡμέρας οὐ ταὐτὰ γιγνώσκομεν, We do not 
have the same opinion concerning the same things on the same day. 


Nore 1. In the Ionic writers, οὗ and the other cases commonly re- 


} fer to a person or thing different from the subject of the sentence. In 
| the Attic writers they generally refer to the subject of the principal 


Note 2. Sometimes the personal pronoun is equivalent to the re- 


y 


——_ 


ἢ flexive ; that is, it refers to the subject of the sentence ; as Οἶμαι λη- 


pew pe, I think I am talking nonsense. ᾿Αλλὰ πολλοῦ μοι δοκῶ τὰ ὑμέ- 


 τερα ἔχειν, But I think I am far from having your things. 


Nore 3. In some instances the third person of the persona] pronoun 
stands for the second; (JJ. 10, 398) Σφίσιν for ὑμῖν. (Her. 3, 71) 


Shéas for ὑμᾶς. 


Nore 4. The personal pronoun is sometimes repeated in the same 


᾿ sentence for the sake of greater perspicuity ; as Ἐμοὶ μὲν, εἰ καὶ μὴ καθ᾽ 


Ἑλλήνων χθόνα τεθράμμεθ᾽, ἀλλ᾽ οὖν ξυνετά μοι δοκεῖς λέγειν, To us, 
although we have not been brought up in the land of the Greeks, never- 
theless thou seemest to speak intelligible things. 


__ Nore 5. When a noun is separated by intermediate sentences from 
| the verb with which it is connected, αὐτός, in its regular signification 


(4), is, for the sake of perspicuity, put in apposition with that noun; 


if 
Vas bys μὲν οὖν βασιλέα, ᾧ πολλὰ οὕτως ἐστὶ τὰ σύμμαχα, εἴπερ προθῦ- 


4 . “ 
μεῖται ἡμᾶς ἀπολέσαι, οὐκ οἶδα ὅ τι δεῖ αὐτὸν ὀμόσαι, Now, Sor my part, 
1 do not see why the king, whose resources are so great, should swear 


ἢ 0 us, if he really meant to destroy us. 


_ Nore 6. Αὐτός in the oblique cases is sometimes joined to the rel- 
‘ative pronoun for the sake of perspicuity ; ἃ5 Ὧν ὁ μὲν αὐτῶν, One of 
whom. Examples of this kind are of frequent occurrence in the Sep- 
tuagint and New ‘Testament. 


_ Nore 7. The genitive of the first and second persons of the per- 
‘Sonal pronoun is seldom put after a substantive in classical writers ; 











thus ‘O πατήρ pov is much rarer than Ὁ ἐμὸς πατήρ, My father. 


_ § 16]. 1. The reflevive pronoun refers either to the sub- 
ject of the sentence in which it stands, or to the subject of the 
Principal sentence ; as Σαυτὴν ἐπιδείκνῦ, Show thyself. Ὃ Ap- 
μένιος ἐσιώπα ἀπορῶν πότερα συμβουλεύοι τῷ Κύρῳ κατακαίνειν ἑαυτόν, 
the Armenian king kept silence, hesitating whether to advise 
Cyrus to slay him. | 






When the genitive of this pronoun depends on a noun, it is equiv- 
nt to the genitive of the personal pronoun, or to the possessive pro- 



















232 SYNTAX. [88 162, 163. 


noun; aS Ἀστυάγης μετεπέμψατο τὴν ἑαυτοῦ θυγατέρα καὶ τὸν παῖδα 
αὐτῆς, Astyages sent for his own daughter and her son. 


2. The reciprocal pronoun regularly refers to the subject of 
the sentence in which it stands ; as A\AnAas ἑώρων,. They looked — 
at each other. 


Nore 1. The reflexive pronoun may also refer to the object of the 
sentence to which it belongs ; as ἀπὸ σαυτοῦ ἐγώ σε διδάξω, I will il- 
lustrate it to you from your own case. . 

Nore 2. Sometimes ἑαυτοῦ stands for ἐμαυτοῦ οἵ σεαυτοῦ; as 


Δεῖ ἡμᾶς ἀνερέσθαι ἑαυτούς, We must ask ourselves. Μόρον τὸν αὑτῆς 
οἶσθα, Thou knowest thy fate. 


Nore 3. The third person of the reflexive may stand for the recip- 
rocal. On the other hand, the reciprocal may be used for the reflexive, 
Τὰ g. Avti ὑφορωμένων ἑαυτὰς ἡδέως ἀλλήλας ἑώρων, Instead of look- 
tng cross at cach other, they looked smilingly. Καθ᾿ αὑτοῖν, Against ear” 
other. Διέφθειραν ἀλλήλους, They destroyed themselves ; that is, Eaca 
destroyed himself. 7 


§ 162. The possessive pronoun is equivalent to the-gen- 
itive of the personal ; consequently it has all the properties of 
the adnominal genitive ; as Ὁ ἐμός πατήρ, for Ὁ πατήρ pov, My 
father. Oikos ὁ σός, Thy house. 

So Οἶκος ods, A house of thine, One of thy houses Πόλιν τὴν ἡμε- 
tepav, Our city; Πόλιν ἡμετέραν, A city of ours. Οἱ ἐμοὶ παῖδες, My 
children ; παῖδες ἐμοί, Some of my children. ds πόθος, My regret for 
thee. 

Norte. “Os, his, in Homer, sometimes stands for ἐμός, ods.— Sh é- 
tepos for ὑμέτερος, in Hesiod ; for ἐμός, in Theocritus. 


x 163. ΥἹ. The demonstratives ὅδε, οὗτος, τόσος, τοῖος, ὧδε, 
ὡς regularly denote that which is before the mind of the 
speaker ; as Οὗτος ὁ ἀνήρ, This man. ᾽Ἔλεγε τάδε, He said these 
things. 

2. Exeivos, that, he, she, it, regularly refers to a remote per- 
son or thing ; as Ἐκεῖνοι ἀπολοῦνται, Those men will perish. 

Nore 1. In Herodotus, οὗτος, τοσοῦτος, τοιοῦτος, and οὕτως regu- 
larly refer to what precedes; ὅδε, τοσόσδε, τοιόσδε, ὧδε, to what fol- 
lows. 

Nore 2. The dethonstrative pronoun is sometimes apparently equiv- 
alent to the adverbs ἐνταῦθα, ὧδε, ἐκεῖ ; as ᾿Ηνάγκασα σὲ τοῦτον, } 
compelled thee who art here. 

So Αὕτη δέ σοι γῆς περίοδος πάσης. “Opas; Aide μὲν Αθῆναι, Here t 
for thee a map of the whole earth. Seest thou? Here is Athens, 





δῷ 164 -- 166.] ARTICLE. 233, 

Nore 3. The demonstrative may refer to a noun which goes before 
in the same sentence, if that noun has been separated from its verb 
by intervening sentences; as Μεγιστίην τὸν Ακαρνῆνα .... τοῦτον TOY 
εἴπαντα ἐκ τῶν ἱρῶν τὰ μέλλοντά σφι ἐκβαίνειν, Megistias the Acarna- 
nian .... the one who foretold by the entrails of the victims what would 
happen to them. 


Note 4. The demonstrative sometimes follows the relative_in the 
same sentence ; IvSdv ποταμὸν ὃς κροκοδείλους δεύτερος οὗτος ποταμῶν 


πάντων παρέχεται, The river Indus, which 15 the second river in the 
world that produces crocodiles. 


Nore 5. Τοῦτο may refer to a sentence or clause ; as Αἰσθόμενος 
τὸν Αθάμαντα ἀποκτεῖναι θέλοντα τὸν Φρίξον δηλοῖ τοῦτο τῷ Φρίξῳ, 
Perceiving that Athamas intended to slay Phrixus, he makes τὸ known 
to Phrizus. 


§ 164. The interrogative pronouns and adverbs are used 
in direct or indirect questions; as Σὺ τίς εἶ; Who art thou? 
Οἶδε τί βούλεται, He knows what it wants. 


165. The indefinite ris, annexed to a substantive, means 

certain, some, or simply a, an. Without a substantive, it 

means some one, somebody, some person, a certain one ; as Ὄρ- 
vibés tives, Some birds. Λέγουσί τινες, Some (persons) say. 


Nortel. (a) Τὶς is sometimes used for ἕκαστος ; as Εὖ ris δόρυ 
θηξάσθω, Let every one sharpen his spear well. 


(b) Sometimes it refers to the speaker or to the person addressed ; 
as Ποῖ τις φύγῃ, Whither can one (I) go? Ἥκει τῳ κακόν, Misfor 
tune has come to some one (thee). . 

(c) Tis may mean somebody in the sense of a distinguished person, 
a man of consequence ; τὶ, something great, ta the purpose; as Knyav 
φαίνομαί tis jes, I too seem to be somebody. "Ἐδοξέ τι εἰπεῖν τῷ 
Αστυάγει, He seemed to Astyages to say something to the purpose. 


Nore 2. Tis is often joined to adjectives and adverbs of quality 
or quantity, for the sake of strengthening or weakening their signifi 
cation, as the case may be; as Γυνὴ ὡραιοτάτη τις, A most blooming 
woman. Ἡμέρας ἑβδομήκοντά τινας, Some seventy days. Πόσος tis; 
How hig a one? ᾿ 

Nore 3. The Poets may repeat ris inthe same sentence ; ἀβ Ἔστι 
τις ov πρόσω Σπάρτης πόλις τις, There is, not far from Sparta, a cer- 
tain cily. 


ARTICLE, 


§ 166. 1. Originally the article was a demonstrative or 
relative pronoun; he, she, it, this, that; who, which, what. 
Thus, in the Epic dialect, it is generally a demonstrative or 


234 SYNTAX. [§ 167. 


᾿- : 
relative pronoun ; in the new Ionic, and Doric, very often ; and 
not unfrequently in the Tragedians. E. g. 
Ὁ yap βασιλῆϊ χολωθείς, For he having been incensed against the 
king. . 
Ai ΠΑ ἐπέμυξαν Αθηναίη τε καὶ Ἥρη, And they muttered, Athené and 
‘Hera. 


“Opvis ipds τῷ οὔνομα Φοίνιξ, A sacred bird, the name of which is 
Phenix. - : 


2. In the Attic prose-writers, the article retains its demon- 
strative force in the following cases : 

(a) When it is followed by μέν, δέ, without a substantive; espe- 
cially in the formula ὁ pev.... 6 δέ, the one .... the other, one .... 
another, some .... others; a8 Ὅ μὲν ἦρχε οἱ δ᾽ ἐπείθοντο, He com- 
manded and they obeyed. 3 

(0) Before the relatives ὅς, ὅσος, οἷος ; as Τὸν ὃς ἔφη, Him who 
said. Οὐδενὸς τῶν ὅσα αἰσχύνην ἐστὶ φέροντα, None of those ne 
which are regarded as bringing shame. Micétv τοὺς οἷός περ οὗτος, 
hate such as are like this man. ὲ 

(c) In the expression καὶ τόν, and he, before an infinitive ; as Καὶ 
τὸ: κελεῦσαι, And he commanded. 

(6) In the expression τὸν καὶ τόν, this man and that man; τὸ καὶ 
τό, this and that, so and so. 

(e) ἴῃ τό ye, this ; πρὸ rod, or προτοῦ, before this time, formerly. 

(ἢ) In τῷ, for this reason, therefore, borrowed from the Epic style. 


§ 167. In its usual signification, the article is a weak de- 
monstrative pronoun. Accordingly it is used when a person or 
thing is before the mind of the speaker, writer, hearer, or 
-eader. Εἰ g. 

Sg Jac A horse; Ὃ ἵππος, The horse, weaker than this or that 


56. 
ἔΑνδρες, Men, A number of men; Οἱ ἄνδρες, The men. 


1, Proper names may take the article; as 6 Σωκράτης, ὃ 
Ὄλυμπος, ai Αθῆναι. : 


2. Abstract nouns, and names of sciences, and the elements 
of nature, may take the article ; as ἡ ἀχαριστία, ingratitude ; ἡ 
ἀριθμητική, arithmetic; 6 χρῦσός, gold as a metal; ὁ ἀήρ, air; 
ἡ γῆ, earth. 


3. When the article is prefixed to such objects as are closely 
connected with a particular person, it has the force of the pos- 
sessive pronoun; Ἔρχεται 7 Μανδάνη πρὸς τὸν πατέρα, Mandane 
came to her father. | : 








§ 168.] ARTICLE. 235 


4, The article may be placed before τοιοῦτος, τοιόσδε, τοσοῦ- 
Tos, τηλικοῦτος, Tis, ποῖος, and even before a personal or reflexive 
pronoun. Δεῖνα, such-a-one, always takes the article. 


5. The article is put before a numeral depending on ἀμφί, 
περί, εἰς, ὑπέρ; AS Αμφὶ τὰ πέντε ἢ ἑκκαίδεκα ἔτη αὐτοῦ γενομένου, 
He being about fifteen or sixteen years old. 

6. The neuter singular of the article may be prefixed to any 
word or expression regarded as a substantive; as Td ὑμεῖς, The 
word ὑμεῖς. Τῷ εἶναι χρῆσθαι, To use the word εἶναι. 


So before the infinitive ; as Τὸ πίνειν, Drinking, To drink. Tod 
κτήσασθαι, Of acquiring. Ev τῷ χρῆσθαι, In using, In the use. 













7. In grammatical language, every word regarded as an in 
dependent object takes the gender of the name of the part of 
speech to which it belongs; as ὁ γάρ, sc. σύνδεσμος, The con- 
junction γάρ 3 ἡ ἐγώ, SC. ἀντωνυμία, The pronoun ἐγώ ; τὸ τήν, SC. 
ἄοθρον, The article τήν. 

Nore 1. Sometimes the article is of the gender of the substantive 
which refers to a quotation; as Καλὴν ἔφη παραίνεσιν εἶναι τὴν Kad- 
δύναμιν ἔρδειν, He said, ““ To sacrifice to the gods according to thy 
power,’’ is good advice, where the gender of the article before the ex- 
pression καδδύναμιν ἔρδειν is determined by the substantive παραίνεσιν. 


Nore 2. When the force of the article is lost sight of in the 
words ταὐτόν (τὸ αὐτό), and θάτερον (τὸ ἕτερον), they may be pre- 
ceded by another article ; as Περὶ τὸ ταὐτόν, About the same thing. 
Ὁ τοῦ θατέρου κύκλος, The circle of the other. . 


§ 168. 1. When a noun which has just preceded would 
Naturally be repeated, the article belonging to it is alone ex 
pressed; as Οἵ re Ξενοφῶντος παῖδες καὶ of τῶν ἄλλων πολϊτῶν, 
Both the children of Xenophon, and those of the other citizens 


2. In certain phrases, a noun is understood after the article 


"Avdpes, Ανθρωποι, men, people; as Οἱ ἐν ἄστει, Those in the 
city. Οἱ σὺν αὐτῷ, Those with him.—Oi ἀμφί τινα, or Οἱ περί 
twa, Those about any body, most commonly means a person and his 
attendants, men, suite, followers, or disciples ; sometimes it stands for 
the person merely. : 
Γῆ, or Χώρα, land, country ; as Eis τὴν ἑαυτῶν, To their own coun- 
__ Tvvh, wife, rarely ; as Βυρσίνης τῆς Ἱππίου, Byrsine the wife of 
Hippias. Φερετίμης τῆς Barrew, Of Pheretima the wife of Battus. 
I paypa, or Χρῆμα, thing, affairs ; as Ta τῆς πόλεως, The affairs 
of the state. Ta τῶν θεῶν, That which comes from the gods. Τὸ τοῦ 
“Opunpov, That which Homer says. — Not unfrequently the neuter ar- 
ticle with a genitive is equivalent to a substantive ; as Τὰ τῆς ὀργῆς, 


236 SYNTAX. [Ὁ 169, 


Ul 


for ἡ ὀργή, wrath, anger. Td τῶν πρεσβυτέρων ἡμῶν, for Ἡμεῖς οἱ 
πρεσϑύτεροι, We the old people. - 
Υἱός, son; ἃ5 Ὁ Κλεινίου, The son of Clinias: 


§ 169. 1. The article may be separated from its substan-— 
ve by an adjective, a possessive pronoun, or participle ; also — 


by an adnominal genitive, an adverb, or by a preposition with 
its case ; as, 

Ὃὧ σοφὸς ἀνήρ, The wise man. 

Γοῦ ἐμοῦ οἴκου, Of my house. 

Τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν δύναμιν, The force which is. 

Τὸ ἐκείνων πλοῖον, Their vessel. 

Οἱ τότε ἄνθρωποι, The men af that time. 

youd ἄστρα Ζηνός, Of Zeus who dwells among the stars; in 

ven. 


Ko, The word or words accompanying the substantive may 
come, with the article, after the substantive ; in which case the 
article may be placed also before the substantive ; as, 

Ανὴρ ὁ σοφός, or Ὁ ἀνὴρ 6 σοφός. 

Οἴκου τοῦ ἐμοῦ, OF Τοῦ οἴκου τοῦ ἐμοῦ. 

Δύναμιν τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν, or Τὴν δύναμιν τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν. 

Τὸ πλοῖον τὸ ἐκείνων. 

“AvOpwrot οἱ τότε. ᾿ 

Τοὺς πολέμους τοὺς πρὸς τοὺς Καρδούχους, The wars with the Car- 

duchians. 


3. When a substantive is accompanied by two or more ad- 
juncts, the article may be repeated with each one of them. 

When, however, the substantive and one of the adjuncts are 
regarded as one complex idea, the article is placed only before 
the other adjuncts. Εἰ. g. 

Ἐχρῶντο ταῖς ξυλίναις ἀσπίσι ταῖς Αἰγυπτίαις, They used the Egyp- 

tran wooden shields. 

Ἐν τῇ τοῦ Διὸς τῇ μεγίστῃ ἑορτῇ, At the grand festival of Zeus. 

So Τὸ ἐν Ἀρκαδίᾳ τὸ τοῦ Διὸς τοῦ Λυκαίου ἱερόν, The temple of Zeus 
Lyceus in Arcadia. Τὰ τείχη τὰ ἑαυτῶν τὰ μακρά, Their own long 
walls. Ἀπὸ τῶν ἐν τῇ Εὐρώπῃ πόλεων Ἑλληνίδων, From the Grecian 
states in Europe. 


4. The article may be separated from its substantive also by — 


μέν, δέ, τέ, γέ, γάρ, δή, αὐτὸς αὑτοῦ, and, in the Ionic dialect, by 
tis. Also by the object (genitive, dative, accusative) of the 
sentence. E.g. . : 
"Τῶν τις στρατιωτέων, Some one of the soldiers. 
Τοῖς αὐτὸς αὑτοῦ πήμασι βαρῦνεται, He is burdened with his own suf- 
Serings. 


3 


—_ Ψι 











ᾧ 169.] ARTICLE. 237 


5. Sometimes the article is separated from its noun by an 
incidental sentence ; as Αποπαύσας τοῦ ὁπότε βούλοιντο ἕκαστοι 
γυναῖκα ἄγεσθαι, Having caused them to cease from marrying 
whenever they wished. 


6. When an adjective without the article agrees with a sub- 

stantive with the article, the copula εἰμί, or its partwiple ὦν, is, 

in good Greek, always understood; that is, the adjective forms 
a predicate ; as, 

ὋὉ ἀνὴρ σοφός, or Σοφὸς 6 ἀνήρ, The man is wise ; Wise is the man. 

So Πολλῶν τῶν ἐπιτηδείων, or Τῶν ἐπιτηδείων πολλῶν, The provis- 

tons being many. ‘Eopa πολλὰ τὰ κρέα, He saw that the meat was 


abundant ; that there was much meat. Τοῖς λόγοις βραχυτέροις ἐχρῆτο, 
The words which he used were shorter. 


7. When several substantives are connected by καί, τὲ. 

καί, the article is repeated with each when they are indepen- 

dent of, or contrasted with, each other. But when they are 

regarded as one whole, only the first one takes the article. 

_E. g. 

Ἐπὶ Πύλας τῆς Κιλικίας καὶ τῆς Συρίας, To the Gates of Cilicia and 
ria. 


Ai ἔλαφοι καὶ δορκάδες καὶ οἱ ἄγριοι ὄϊες καὶ οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι ἀσινεῖς 
εἰσιν, Hinds and gazelles, wild sheep and wild asses, are harmless. 





















8. Two or even three articles may stand together ; as Οἱ τῶν 
παίδων διδάσκαλοι, The instructers of the boys.. Ta τῆς τῶν πολ- 
Ady ψυχῆς ὄμματα, The eyes of the souls of the many. 


ΟΠ Nore1. When a verbal noun denoting the action of the verb is 
“followed by a preposition with its case, the preposition may be put 
δ. after that noun without the repetition of the article; as Ἢ νῦν ὑμετέ- 
ρα ὀργὴ ἐς MirvAnvaiovs, Your present excitement against the Mityle- 
mans. 


Notre 2. When the article.is separated from its substantive ac- 
cording to the first paragraph, it designates the substantive and its 
adjunct or adjuncts as one complex idea; thus 6 σοφὸς ἀνήρ, without 
any special reference to those who are not σοφοί. But when it comes 
after the substantive, according to the second paragraph, it emphasizes 
the adjunct or adjuncts following it ; thus, ἀνὴρ ὁ σοφός, the man who 
25 wise, as distinguished from those who are not wise. 


_ Nore 3. Whenpécos, medius, middle, ἄκρο ς, extreme, ἔσ χα- 
τος, last, are arranged according to the sixth paragraph, they mean 
the middle, the ettremity, or top, of the object denoted by the noun 
with which they agree, even when the article is omitted; as Διὰ μέσου 
οὔ παραδείσου, Through the middle of the-park. 


Nore 4. (a) *AAXos, with the article, means the rest, the other 


238 | SYNTAX. [§§ 170, 171. 


part, of any thing; as Τὸ ἄλλο στράτευμα, The rest of the army; bag 
Αλλο στράτευμα, Another army. 

(b) When τὰ ἄλλα (τἄλλ a) is followed by a substantive with the 
article, that substantive is in apposition with ra ἄλλα ; as Ta ἄλλα τὰ 
πολιτικά, The other things, to wit, politics. 

















§ 170. 1. When a substantive with the article is m appo- 
sition with a proper name, it is placed after that proper name ; 
in which case the proper name rarely takes the article. But 
names of rivers, mountains, countries, (rarely of islands,) are 
with respect to the position of the article, regarded as adjec- 
tives: and if the nouns are of different genders, the article i 
repeated. E. g. 

Βοΐσκος ὁ πύκτης 6 Θεσσαλός, Boiscus the boxer, the Thessalian. 

Τοῦ Τίγρητος ποταμοῦ, Of the river Tigres. 

Τῆς Ἴδης τοῦ ὄρους, Of Ida, the mountain. 


2. When a substantive with the article is accompanied by 
personal or demonstrative pronoun, or by πᾶς, ἅπας, ὅλος, ἕκα' 
στος, ἑκάτερος, ἄμφω, ἀμφότερος, it is placed before or after these 
words ; as, 
Ἡμεῖς of or, i, We, the generals. Adineiet vale os oBurépous 
Te ails Retin 8 | gir 
Οὗτος 6 ὄρνις, or ‘O ὄρνις οὗτος, This bird. 
Πάντες οἱ “EXAnves or Οἱ Ἕλληνες πάντες, All the Greeks. 
Τὼ παῖδε ἀμφοτέρω, or Αμφοτέρω τὼ παῖδε, Both the children. 


Ν oTE 1. When ἃ proper name is appended to ὅδε, οὗτος, ἐκεῖνος, 
αὐτός, the article is commonly omitted. It is omitted also when ἃ 
abstract noun is appended to αὐτός ; as Αὐτὴ ἐπιστήμη, Knowledg 

itself; The essence of knowledge. 


Norte 2. Οὗτος ἀνήρ, Οὑτοσὶ ἀἁ ἀνήρ, This man, This fellow he 
are used in colloquial style ; but Ὅ δ᾽ ἀνήρ is more dignified than th 
preceding. 


Nore 3. When πᾶς, ἅπας are adjectives, they take the article 
cording to the “gies tule. 


RELATIVE. | 

δ 171. 1. Originally the relative pronoun had the forc 
of the demonstrative ; this, that, he, she, it. Thus, in the ee » 
dialect it sometimes staniis for ὅδε. οὗτος ; as, j 
᾿Αλλὰ καὶ ὃς δείδοικε Διὸς μεγάλοιο κεραυνόν, But even he dreads ti 
thunderbolt of great Bixee” 

Ὃς yap Sevraros ἦλθε, For he came last. 


Πάτροκλον κλαίωμεν - ὃ yap γέρας ἐστὶ θανόντων, Let us mourn £ 
trocius, for this is honor to the dead, 


§ 172.] ; RELATIVE. , 239 


2. In prose, és retains its demonstrative force in the follow- 
ing expressions : 

(a)*Os peév....ds δέ, equivalent to ὁ pev....6 δέ; as Πόλεις Ἕλλη- 
vidas, ἃς μὲν ἀναιρῶν, εἰς ἃς δὲ τοὺς φυγάδας κατάγων, Destroying some 
of the Grecian cities, and bringing back the exiles into others, 

(0) Kai ὅς, And he; as Καὶ ὃς ἐξαναστὰς φεύγει, And he rising up 
fled. Kai ot ἠρώτων, And they asked. 

(c)*Os καὶ ὅς, This man and that man, Some one; as Tas βασι- 
Anias ἱστίας ἐπιόρκηκε ὃς καὶ ὅς, Some one has sworn falsely by the 
royal hearth. 

(4) Ἦ δ᾽ ds, Said he; Ἦ δ᾽ 7, Said she; used parenthetically, 


Νοτε. This rule applies also to the adverb ὥς, thus, with the 
acute accent, 


172. In its usual signification, the relative 15 a 
ind of weak demonstrative. 


1. The relative agrees with its antecedent, that 
is, the noun to which it refers, in gender and num- 
ber ; its case is determined by the construction of 
the sentence in which it stands; as, 


Τῶν δώδεκα μνῶν ds ἔλαβες, Of the twelve mine which thou recerv 
edst. 

‘Eopriv ἐν Βαβυλῶνι ἤκουσεν εἶναι, ἐν ἧ πάντες of Βαβυλώνιοι ὅλην 
τὴν νύκτα πίνουσιν, He heard that a feast was celebrating in Baby- 
lon, during which all the Babylonians drink the whole night. 


(a) The person of a verb agreeing with the relative pronoun is de- 
termined by that of the antecedent, expressed or implied; as Ἡμῖν οὐ 
θύετε αἵτινες τηροῦμεν ὑμᾶς, You do not sacrifice to us who preserve you, 
So when the antecedent is implied in a possessive pronoun; as Avay~ 
Spia τῇ ἡμετέρᾳ οἵτινές σε ov διεσώσαμεν, Through our cowardice 
(of us), who did not save thee. 

(0) The masculine of the dual of the relative may agree with a fem- 
inine antecedent ; as “Ἡμῶν ἐν ἑκάστῳ δύο τινέ ἐστον ἰδέα ἄρχοντε καὶ 
ἄγοντε, οἷν ἑπόμεθα, In each one of us there are two principles ruling 
and leading, which we follow. 


(c) When the antecedent is, or is regarded as, an znanimate thing, 


the relative is put in the neuter singular. Also, when the antecedent 


isa sentence. FE. σι, Tupavvida θηρᾶν, ὃ πλήθει χρήμασίν θ᾽ ἁλίσκεται, 
“Ὁ hunt power, which is caught by means of numbers and money. 
So Οἱ ἐξελθόντες Ἑλληνες σὺν αὐτοῖς ἐπεφεύγεσαν μάλ᾽ ὄντες συχνοί" 
ὃ οὔπω πρόσθεν ἐπεποιήκεσαν, The Greeks who went out with them had 
Te although quite numerous; a thing which they had never done be- 
ore. . 


940 SYNTAX. [§ 172. 


(d) When the relative is connected with a verb signifying fo call, to 
name, to be, to believe, it may.agree in gender and number with the 
noun in apposition with it ; ἃ5 Ὃ φόβος ἣν αἰδὼ εἴπομεν, That kind of 
fear which we have called respect. 'To ἦθος ἥπερ ἦν δευτέρα πίστις, 
Character, which certainly is a second source of confidence. 

(e) The relative in the singular may refer to a noun in the plural, 
when one of the persons or things contained in that noun is meant; as 
Οἶνός σε τρώει μελιηδὴς ds τε καὶ ἄλλους βλάπτει, ὃς ἄν μιν χανδὸν 
ἕλῃ, Wine, sweet as honey, makes a fool of thee, which ruins others also, 
— whoever pours tt down immoderately. 


2. If the relative refers to two or more nouns, it 
is put in the plural and in the leading gender ; as, 
Αἴας καὶ Τεῦκρος ot μέγιστον ἔλεγχον ἔδοσαν τῆς αὑτῶν ἀνδρείας, 
Ajax and Teucer, who gave the ciearest proof of their valor, 


(a) If the antecedents denote inanimate objects, the relative is regu- 
larly neuter ; as Περὶ πολέμου καὶ εἰρήνης ἃ μεγίστην ἔχει δύναμιν, Con- 
cerning war and peace, which have very great influence. 


(b) The relative may agree with one of the antecedents, commonly 
with the most prominent one ; as Θάνατον καὶ Κῆρα μέλαιναν ὃς δή σφι 
σχεδόν ἐστι, Death and dark Destiny, who (Death) is now near them. 


(c) The relative may be put in the dual when it refers to two sub- ; 


stantives. : 


3. The relative may be put in the plural, when 
it refers to a collective noun in the singular, or to a 
whole class of persons or things implied in a singu- 
lar antecedent. E. g. 
Πλήθει οἵπερ δικάσουδι, To the multitude who will judge. 
Πᾶς τις ὄμνῦσι οἷς ὀφείλων τυγχάνω, Every man, to whom I happen 
to owe money, swears. if pe mud 
Avjp αὐτουργὺς οἵπερ σώζουσι τὴν γῆν, A man of the working 
shih dey dee ΩΣ ἑκα δ δὲν ω 


\“4. The antecedent is omitted when it is either 
neral word (χρῆμα, πρᾶγμα, οὗτος, ἐκεῖνος), Or one 
which can be easily supplied from the context ; as, 
Οὗτοί εἰσιν obs ὁρᾶτε, sc. ἐκεῖνοι, These are they whom you see. 
To μέγεθος ὑπὲρ Sv συνεληλύθαμεν, sc. ἐκείνων, The magnitude of 
those things for which we are assembled. _ 
Παρακαλέσας ὁπόσους ἔπειθεν, Having invited as many as he could 
induce. 
This rule applies also to relative adverbs; as Ἴστε δήπου ὅθεν 6 


* 





eS 





Ὡ 


Se μῶν ὁ 
5» ¥ 





| 
| 


: 
| 
: 





b 
᾿ τέκνων ἐκύρησε ! ᾽ Evdal 


§§ 173, 174.] RELATIVE, | 241 


ἥλιος ἀνίσχει καὶ ὅπου δύεται, You surely know whence the sun rises 
énd where it sets. 


Norg 1. Sometimes the gender of the relative is determined by the 
gender implied in the antecedent ; as Τὰς Αθήνας οἵ γε ἐμὲ καὶ πατέρα 
riv ἐμὸν ὑπῆρξαν ἄδικα ποιεῦντες, Athens (the Athenians) who δεραπ. 
Jirst to act unjustly towards me and my father. 


Nore 2, The omission of the antecedent gives rise to the following 
words and phrases: 


ἔνιοι (ἔνι οἵ), some; ἐνίοτε (ἔνι ὅτε), sometimes, 

εἰσὶν οἵ, ἔστιν οἵ, ἔστιν οἵτινες, for ἔνιοι, twes sunt qui, 
there are who, simply some ; regarded as one word. , 

ἔστιν 7 οἵ ὅπῃ, for πή, in some way. 

ἔστιν ὅπως, for πώς, somehow. 

οὐκ ἔσθ᾽ ὅπως, by no means, in no manner. 


δ 173. When the sentence containing the relative is, τὰ 
the mind of the speaker or writer, more important than that 
containing the antecedent, it is, by inversion, placed first ; as, 

*A πάντες ἴσᾶσι, τάδ᾽ ἐστί, What all know is this; These are the 

things which all know. : 

Ὅ τι καλὸν, φίλον αἰεί, Whatever is beautiful is always dear. 

So Οἱ δ᾽ dre δή ῥ᾽ ἵκᾶνον ὅθι σκοπὸν Ἕκτορος ἔκταν, ἔνθ᾽ Οδυσεὺς 
μὲν ἔρυξεν ὠκέας ἵππους, And when they came where they had slain the 
spy of Hector, then Ulysses checked the swift horses, 


ὃ 174. 1. The relative often stands for the interrogative, 
but only in indirect interrogations ; as Φράζει τῷ ναυκλήρῳ ὅστις 
ἐστί, He declared to the captain of the vessel who he was. 


So Av’ ἣν αἰτίην, For what reason. Ηγνόει 6 τι τὸ πάθος εἴη, He did 
not know what the disease was. Θεάσασθε οἵα ἡ κατάστασις ἔσται, See 


what the condition will be. “AvOpwre, τί ποιεῖς; Ὅ τι ποιῶ ; Man, 


what art thou doing 2 What am I doing 2 


2. Ofos, ὅσος, and ὡς are often used in expressions of aston- 
tshment, wonder, or admiration ; as Ὅσα πράγματα ἔχεις! How 
much trouble you have Ὡς ἀργαλέον πρᾶγμ᾽ ἐστὶν, ὦ Ζεῦ καὶ 
θεοί ! What a hard thing it is, O Zeus and gods ! 


So in indirect expressions of this class: as Af Ἀργεῖαι ἐμακάριζον 
τὴν μητέρα οἵων τέκνων εκύρησε, The Argive women congratulated their 
mother that she had been blessed with such children ; they said, ‘‘ Ofop 


ίμων μοι ὁ ἀνὴρ ἐφαίνετο, ὡς ἀδεῶς καὶ γεν- 
ναΐως ἐτελεύτα !' The man appeared to me to be happy, — how fearlessly 


and nobly he ended his life J 


11 


242 SYNTAX. [ὁ 175. 


- 


χξ 175. 1. In general, when the relative would 
naturally be put in the accusative, it is, by attrac- 
tion, put in the case of its antecedent, when the 
antecedent is in the genitive or dative ; as, 


Ex τούτων ὧν λέγει, From these things which he says; for ἅ. 
Παισὶν οἷς ΓΑρης ἐγείνατο, With the children whom Ares begat. 


This rule applies also to relative adverbs; as Ex γῆς ὅθεν προῦ- 
xecto, From the place where it lay. 


(a) If the antecedent be a demonstrative pronoun, this pronoun is 
generally omitted, and the relative takes its place; as Ἔξιμεν ἐξ ὧν 
τυγχάνομεν ἔχοντες, We go away from those possessions which we hap- 
pen to have, 

_ So Οὐδὲν ἂν πράξαιμ᾽ ἂν, ὧν od σοὶ φίλον, I would do none of those 
things, to do which is not agreeable to thee; for ἐκείνων & pe πρᾶξαι οὗ. 


(b) The antecedent may be placed after the relative thus attracted ; 
as Σὺν ἡ ἔχεις δυνάμει, With the forces which you have. 

This inversion takes place also when apparently there is no attrae- 
tion ; as Ἐκδύσασθαι ὃν ἔχω χιτῶνα, To put off the tunic which I have 
on. Πάντα ἃ ἔλαβε κρέα, All the meat which he received, 

(c) In attraction, the noun also in apposition with the relative, after 
a verb signifying ¢o call, to believe, to consider, to regard, regularly takes 
the case of the relative; as Τούτων ὧν σὺ δεσποινῶν καλεῖς, Of these 
whom thou callest mistresses ; for ἃς δεσποίνας. 


(d) In some instances, the relative, even when it would be in the 
nominative or dative, is attracted by the antecedent; particularly the 
nominative of οἷος, ἡλίκος; as, 

Οὐδέν κω εἰδότες τῶν ἦν περὶ Σάρδις, Knowing as yet nothing o 

slid hasiacabe at Hares ig ey ar a. (Herod. 1, 78.) Bie 

ὯΩν ἠπίστει πολλούς, Many of those whom he mistrusted ; for ἐκείνων 

- ois. (Xen. C. 5, 4, 39.) 

So Πρὸς ἄνδρας τολμηροὺς οἵους καὶ Αθηναίους, To daring men, such 
as the Athenians are ; for οἷοι καὶ A@nvaioi εἰσι. Exeivo δεινὸν τοῖσιν 
ἡλίκοισι νῷν, That will be a hard thing to men of our years ; for ἡλίκοι 
νώ ἐσμεν. ---- So Neavias δὲ οἵους σὺ διαδεδρακότας, But young men, lke 
yourself, decamping; for οἷος σὺ εἶ, where σύ isnot changed into σέ. 


2. On the other hand, the antecedent is often 
put in the case of its relative. Most commonly, 
however, only its most important word or words are 
attracted by the relative and placed after it. LE. σ΄. 


Οὐκ οἶσθα μοίρας ἧς τυχεῖν αὐτὴν χρεών ; Knowest thou not the fate 
PY east she must meet? 
erat φεύγων ὃν ἦγες μάρτυρα, The witness whom you have brought 
hes cehen to is ἀκ δαρα ἀν, 








[ . 
᾿ 
; 





§ 176.] NUMERALS. 243 


So Adyous ἄκουσον οὖς σοι δυστυχεῖς ἥκω φέρων, Hear the melan- 
choly news which I have brought to thee. "Ἔφασαν εἰς Ἀρμενίαν ἥξειν, 


= 


. ἧς Opdvras ἦρχε πολλῆς καὶ εὐδαίμονος, They said that we would come 


to Armenia which Orontas governed, —a great and rich country. 


This rule applies also to relative adverbs ; as”AdXooe ὅποι ἂν ἀφίκῃ, 
In other places whither you may go. 


3. The relative sometimes assumes the case re- 
quired by a subordinate clause ; as, 


ἈΑνθρώπους, ois ὁπόταν τις πλείονα μισθὸν διδῷ, μετ᾽ ἐκείνων ἐφ᾽ ἡμᾶς 
ἀκολουθήσουσιν, Men, who, when one gives them higher pay, will come 
with him against us ; for ot μετ᾽ ἐκείνων ἐφ᾽ ἡμᾶς ἀκολουθήσουσιν, ὁπό- 
ταν Tis αὐτοῖς πλείονα μισθὸν διδῷ. 

"So Χωρίον ἔφη εἶναι ἄκρον, ὃ εἰ μή τις προκαταλήψοιτο, ἀδύνατον 
ἔσεσθαι παρελθεῖν, He said there was an elevated place, which it would be 
impossible for one to pass, unless he should occupy it beforehand; for ὃ 
ἀδύνατον ἔσεσθαι παρελθεῖν, εἰ μή τις προκαταλήψοιτὸ αὐτό. 

Nore. Attraction gives rise to the following expressions: ἼΑχρι 
ov, or Μέχρι οὗ, as far as, until, till. Ἕως οὗ, until, till. ἘΠῚ οὗ, 
Ἐξ ὅτου, Ἐξ ὧν, or Ad’ οὗ, since. Eis 6, or Ἔστε (that is, Es 
ὅ re), until, till, 


NUMERALS, 


§ 176, 1. A mized number, of which the fractional part is 
one half, is expressed by a circumlocution when it denotes a 
coin or weight; as Πέμπτον ἡμιμναῖον, Four and a half mine ; 
literally The fifth part being a half-mina, implying that the 
remaining four parts are whole mine: but Πέντε ἡμιμναῖα, Five 
half-mine, or Two and a half. 


2. A circumlocution with δέω ν, wanting, may be used when 
the number consists of tens accompanied by eight or nine; as 
Δυοῖν δέοντες εἴκοσι, Twenty wanting two, simply eighteen. ‘Evds 
δέοντες τριάκοντα, Thirty wanting one, simply twenty-nine. 

This principle applies also to ordinals, as ‘Evds δέον εἰκοστὸν ἔτος, 
The nineteenth year. | 

Acar, being wanting, neuter, with its substantive may be put in the 

enitive absolute ; as Πεντήκοντα μιᾶς δεούσης, Fifty wanting one ; 
orty-nine. “‘Evds δέοντος τριακοστῷ ἔτει, In the twenty-ninth year. 


«44 SYNTAX. [88 177 - 180. 


OBJECT. — OBLIQUE CASES. 


§ 177. 1. That on which an action is exerted 
is called the tmmediate object. ‘That with relation 
to which an action is exerted is called the remote 
object. 


2. The immediate object is usually put in the ac- 
cusative. ‘The remote object is put in the genitive 
or dative ; it often however depends on a prep 
tion. E. g. 

Αἴολος ἔδωκεν Οδυσσεῖ τοὺς ἀνέμους, Molus gave the winds to 


Ulysses, where τοὺς ἀνέμους is the immediate, and Οδυσσεῖ the re- 
mote object. 


3.- When the active is followed by two cases, the 
passive or middle regularly takes that of the re- 
mote object. (For examples see below.) 


§ 178. 1. Participles and verbal adjectives in τέ fav or rhe 
are followed by the same case as the verb from which they are 
derived. (For examples see below.) 


2. The verbal in réoy with ἐστί (expressed or understood) 
is Squires to δεῖ with the infinitive active or middle ; as, 


ἀκουστέον ΟΥ ἀκουστέα ἐστίν, one must hear ; it is necessary to hear ; 
the same as δεῖ ἀκούειν : μιμητέον, one must imitate; δεῖ μιμέῖσϑαι. 


Notre. In some instances, the verbal in τέον or réa has a pas- 
sive signification; as ἡττητέον or ἡττητέα, One must be conquered, the 
same as δεῖ ἡτεῶσθαι. 


~§ 179. In general, any word, sentence, expression, or 
clause may be the object of a verb. Particularly, 


(a) The object of a verb may be an infinitive; as Ἐθέλω χρῆσθαι, 1 
wish to use. 

(b) It may be a sentence beginning with ὅτι, ὡς, iva, ὅπως, ὄφρα. 
(For examples see below.) 


§ 180. ° The object of a verb is omitted when it can be 
readily determined by the context ; as Ποιήσᾶσα ἑαυτῇ εἰκόνα λι- 
δι» Ὁ ἔστησεν ἐπὶ τῷ τύμβῳ τῶν ie sc. αὐτήν, Having made 
‘or herself a stone-image (statue) she placed it on the tomb of 
her children, 





δῷ 181, 182.] ACCUSATIVE. 245 


ACCUSATIVE. 


§ 151. 1. The immediate object of a transitive 
verb is put in the accusative ; as, 


Ταῦτα ποιῶ, I do these things. 
Ποιήσας ταῦτα, Having done these things. 
Ποιητέον ταῦτα, One must do these things. 


2. Any verb may be followed by the accusative 
of a noun having a kindred signification. Here 
the accusative is generally followed by an adjec 
tive. E. g. 

Πεσεῖν πτώματ᾽ οὐκ ἀνασχετά, To fall an insupportable fall, 
ἮΗιξαν δρόμημα δεινόν, They rushed furiously. 

3. Verbal adjectives and substantives, which reg- 
ularly take the genitive, are sometimes followed by 
the accusative ; as, 

Τρίβων ra τοιάδε, Skilled in such matters. 
Τὰ μετέωρα φροντιστής, One who ponders on things above. 


Further, adjectives or substantives are sometimes followed by the 
accusative of a kindred noun ; as Δοῦλος τὰς μεγίστας θωπείας καὶ Sov- 
λείας, The most abject slave. ; 


Nors 1. The accusative is, in Poetry, sometimes joined to a verb 
signifying to see, to look, to mark the expression of the look; as Ἡ 
Βουλὴ ἔβλεψε νᾶπυ, The Council looked mustard. 


Nore 2. Many verbs, which are intransitive in English, are transi-° 
tive in Greek ; as Αθανάτους ἀλιτέσθαι, To sin against the immortals. 


¥¥ 182. The accusative is often put after verbs, 
adjectives, substantives, and certain expressions, for 
the sake of limiting, or more fully explaining, their 
meaning. The accusative, thus used, is called 
synecdocical. E. g. 


Κροῖσος ἦν Λυδὸς τὸ γένος, Cresus was a Lydian by birth. 

Ταῦτα ψεύδονται, They he in these things. 

So τί, for what? ri, in any thing, in something, somewhat ; οὐδέν, 
in nothing, not ; τἄλλα, in other respects ; τοῦτο μέν, on the one hand, 
τοῦτο δέ, on the other. 


246 SYNTAX. [δῷ 183, 164. 


§ 183. The accusative follows the particles of 
protestation wa and v7. 


Μά is used in negative, and νή in affirmative sentences. But 
when vai is placed before μά, the sentence is affirmative. 
. EB. g. - 

Ma τὴν Ἀναπνοὴν, pa τὸ Χάος, pa τὸν Ἀέρα, οὐκ εἶδον, By Breath, by 

Chaos, by Air, I did not see. 

Νὴ τὸν Ποσειδῶ φιλῶ oe, By Posidon, I love thee. 


Note 1. Sometimes μά is omitted ; as Ov, τόν δ᾽ Ὄλυμπον, No, 
by this Heaven. 

Note 2. Sometimes the name of the god sworn by is omitted after 
these particles, in which case the article of the omitted name is always 
expressed; as Ma τόν ἐγὼ μὲν οὐδ᾽ ἂν ἐπιθόμην, By . 1 should 
not have believed it. ΡΩΝ 








\& 184. 1. Verbs signifying to ask, to teach, to 

ἂν away, to clothe, to unclothe, to do, to say, to 
conceal, and some others, are followed by two ac- 
cusatives, the one of a person, and the other of a 
thing ; as, 

Ταῦτά pe ἐρωτᾷς, Thou askest me about these things. 

Aireiv τὸν δῆμον φυλακάς, To ask guards of the people. 

Τὸν δῆμον χλαῖναν ἤμπισχον, I clothed the people with a cloak. 

Μουσικὴν ὑπὸ Λάμπρου παιδευθείς, Having been taught music by 

Lamprus. 


The accusative of the thing may, in signification, be kindred to the 
verb ; as Ὃ Φωκικὸς πόλεμος ἀείμνηστον παιδείαν αὐτοὺς ἐπαίδευσεν͵ 


The Phocian war has taught them an ever memorable lesson. 


2. Certain verbs may be followed by the accusa- 
tive and a relative or interrogative sentence, or a 
sentence beginning with ὅτε, that, μή, lest. 


In translation, the accusative is regarded as the nominative of the 
‘ollowing sentence. E. g. 


Γίνωσκε σαυτὸν ὅστις εἶ, Know what thou art. 
“Hider αὐτὸν ὅτι μέσον ἔχοι τοῦ Περσικοῦ στρατεύματος, He knew that 
he occupied the middle of the Persian army. 


3. Sometimes passive and middle verbs are fol- 
owed by the accusative of the remote object, al 
though the active construction is not used ; as, 





§§ 185, 186.] | ACCUSATIVE. 247 


Αποτμηθέντες τὰς κεφαλάς, Their heads being cut off; Being be- 

headed, 

Note 1. The accusative of the person is regularly omitted after 
verbs signifying to conquer (as vikdw). The accusative of the thing 
after these verbs denotes the nature or place of the conquest. E. g. 
Μάχην νικᾶν, sc. τινά, To conquer one ina battle; To gain a battle. 
Ολύμπια νενικηκώς, Having conyuered in the Olympic games. Toddas 
μάχας ἥττηνται, They have been defeated in many battles. 


Norte 2. Some verbs of this class are often constructed different- 
y; thus, Αποστερέω Or στερέω τινά τινος, To deprive one of any 
thing. Adatpéopai (or mapatpéopat, περιελεῖν) τινά τινος, 
To deprive one of any thing. Agatpodpai τί τινος, To take some- 
thing from some one. 
" Δέγω or εἰπεῖν τινα εὖ, καλῶς, or κακῶς, To speak well, or ill, of 
any one. 
Ἕρδω ri τινι, To do any thing to any body. Ἰοιέω τί τινι, To do 
any thing to anyone. Also Ilovéw τινα εὖ, καλῶς, or κακῶς, To 
do good, or evil, to any one. 


X§ 185. Verbs signifying to name, to call, to 
choose, to render, to constitute, to esteem, to consider, 
to divide, are followed by two accusatives referring 
to the same person or thing. : 


The second accusative may be an adjective or participle. 
In the passive, these verbs become copulas. E. g. 
Στρατηγὸν αὐτὸν ἀπέδειξεν, He appointed him general. 
Τὸ στράτευμα κατένειμε δώδεκα μέρη, He divided the army into twelve 
parts. ° ; 


x oTE 1. In reality, the second accusative forms a predicate ; that 
, it is in apposition with the first, and consequently may be preceded 
by εἶναι; as Σοφιστὴν ὀνομάζουσι τὸν ἄνδρα εἶναι, They call him a 
sophist ; They say that he is a sophist. “Απεδείχθη τῆς ἵππου εἶναι in- 
mapxos, He was appointed master of the horse. ‘ 


Norte 9. Sometimes the noun denoting the thing divided is put in 
the adnominal genitive ; a8 Διειλόμεθα τῆς εἰδωλοποιικῆς εἴδη δύο, We 
have divided the art of making images into two parts. 


Terminal functions of the Accusative. 


§ 186. 1. In poetry, the accusative often de 
notes the place whither ? as, 


Ayhads ἔβᾶς Θήβας, Thou camest to illustrious Thebes. 
Ἴλιον εἴσω, Into Ilion, 


248 SYNTAX. [8 18. , 


2. The accusative is used to denote eztent of 
space, or duration of time; as, 


Ἐξελαύνει σταθμοὺς δύο, παρασάγγας δέκα, He marched two stations, 
equal to ten parasangs. 
Δέκα ἔτη κοιμῶνται, They <n f ten years. 
So Ὃς τέθνηκε ταῦτα τρία ἔτη, Who has been dead these three years, 
Οὐδέν πω εἴκοσι ἔτη γεγονώς, Not being quite twenty years old. 


Nore 1. Sometimes the accusative seems to denote repetition of 
time ; as Ἐντειλάμενος τὴν ὥρην ἐπαγινέειν σφίσι τὰς αἶγας, Command- 
ing him zo bring the goats to them at the regular time. 


Nore 2. When the accusative denoting duration of time is accom- 
panied by an ordinal number, it answers to the question, how long 
ago? as Ἐννάτην ἡμέραν γεγαμημένην, Having been married nine days. 


GENITIVE. 


XY 187. 1. A substantive which limits the mean- 
ing of another substantive, denoting a different 
person or thing, is put in the genitive, called ad- 
nominal. 


This rule applies also to pronouns, and to adjectives and par- 
ticiples used substantively. E. g. 

Τὸ τέμενος τοῦ θεοῦ, The temple of the god. 

es ‘Hoaicrov, A work of Hephestus. Py 

Η ἀκρόασις τῶν λεγόντων, The act of hearing the 

Τὴν πόλιν ἡ ἡμῶν, Our state, Τὴν ἑαυτοῦ ἀδελφήν, His own sister. 

Μέσον ἡ ἡμέρας, The middle of the day. 

Τὸ τετραμμένον τῶν βαρβάρων, The defeated portion of the barba- 

rians. 

Εἰς τοῦτο ἀνάγκης, To this degree of necessity. 

So when the first substantive is omitted after the article. (For ex- 
amples, see § 168, 2.) 


. Many verbal adjectives and adverbs, which 
ave an active signification, are followed by the 
genitive of the object ; as, 


Τρίβων ἱππικῆς, Skilled in horsemanship. 
Ἀρχικὸς ἀνθρώπων, Qualified to rule men. 


3. The genitive limits the meaning of some aa- 
jectives and adverbs denoting possession, equality, 
similarity, nearness, or union ; as, 


᾿ 
Σ 
; 
᾿ 
| 
A, 








ᾧ 188.] GENITIVE. | 249 


Τοῖς αὐτῶν ἰδίοις προσέχειν τὸν νοῦν, To attend to their private affairs. 

‘Iepds τῆς Ἀρτέμιδος, Sacred to Artemis. 

This rule applies to ἴδιος, ἱερός, οἰκεῖος, ἐπιχώριος, κοινός, ἴσος and 
its compounds, ὅμοιος, ἀδελφός, γείτων, πλησίος, ἀντίος, ἐναντίος, ἀντί- 
στροῴος, πολέμιος, ἐχθρός ; and some of the compounds of ὁμοῦ and σύν, 
as ὁμώνυμος, συγγενής. ‘These adjectives, however, with the exception 
of ἴδιος, ἱερός, and ἐπιχώριος, are most commonly followed by the da- 
teve. — Adverbs of this class are ἄγχι ἀγχοῦ, ἐγγύς, ἴκταρ, πέλας, 
πλησίον. : 


4. "The genitive limits the meaning of some ad- 
verbs of place, and of some adverbial cases (§ 135); 
as, 7 : 


Σκηνῆς ἔνδον, Wathin a tent. 
Ἐντὸς ov πολλοῦ χρόνον, Within a short time. 
Ἐμπορίας ἕνεκα, For the sake of trade. 


Ἕ ξῆς is followed by the genitive or dative. 


Note 1. The adnominal genitive denotes various relations, the 
most common of which are those of possession, subject, object, quality, 
material, a whole, component parts. 

It is called subjective when it is equivalent to the subject-nominative ; 
objective, when it denotes the object of an action. ‘Thus, in Ἔργον 
Ἡφαίστου, it is subjective, because the expression stands for*0 Ἥφαι- 
στὸς εἰργάσατο, That which Hephestus made; in Ἢ ἀκρόασις τῶν λε- 
γόντων, it is objective, because the expression stands fcr Τὸ ἀκροᾶσθαι 
τῶν λεγόντων, To hear the speakers, 


Note 2. A substantive is sometimes followed by two genitives de- 
noting different relations ; as Τὴν Πέλοπος ἁπάσης Πελοποννήσου κατά- 
ληψιν, The taking of the whole of Peloponnésus by Pelops. 

Note 3. The genitive is in a few instances used where one would 
naturally expect apposition ; as (A¥sch, Pers. 448) Αθηνῶν πόλις, The 
city of Athens ; for Αθῆναι πόλις. 

Nore 4. Sometimes the genitives μοῦ, σοῦ are equivalent to the 
apparently superfluous datives poi, σοί; a8 Τεθορύβηταί μου ἡ ψυχή, 
My soul is troubled. 


Nore 5. Ακόλουθος and διάδοχος are followed by the genitive 
or dative. ἡ 


, 


«x§ 158. 1. Adjectives, pronouns, participles, and 
adverbs, denoting a part, are followed by a genitive 
denoting the whole ; as, 


Οἱ ἀγαθοὶ τῶν ἀνθρώπων, The guod.among men; The good men.. 
Ὃ ἥμισυς τοῦ ἀριθμοῦ, Half the number. 
Τὴν πλείστην τῆς στρατιᾶς, The greatest part of the army 

11* 


290 SYNTAX. [δῷ 189, 190. 


Τῆς μαρίλης συχνήν, A good deal of coal-dust. 

Oi καταφυγόντες αὐτῶν, Such of them as escaped. 
Οὐδεὶς τῶν μειρακίων, No one of the young men. 
Πάντων apr, πρότατος, The most splendid of ail. 
Ποῦ γῆς; Where on earth ? 

Ais τῆς ἡμέρας, Twice a day. 


2. The genitive of the reflexive pronoun is put 
after an adjective of the superlative degree, in order 
to express the highest degree to which a ried or 
thing attains ; as, 


“Ore δεινότατος σαυτοῦ ταῦτα ἦσθα, When your skill in these matters 
was greatest, 


Nore 1. The gender of the governing word is generally the same 
as that of the noun in the genitive. 


Nore 2. The genitive plural is used when the whole consists, or 
is regarded as consisting, of many parts. 


Note 3. Sometimes this construction is employed even where the 
partitive relation is not obvious ; thus, δῖος, τάλας. σχέτλιος, δείλαιος, 
φίλη, may be followed by the genitive plural of the noun with which 
they properly agree ; as Ata γυναικῶν, Divine woman. 


»<§ 189. Verbs implying a noun are followed by 
the genitive ; as, 
Βασιλεύει αὐτῶν, He is their king. (§ 187.) 
Πάντων διαπρέπεις, Thou surpassest all. ἢ 188.) 
This rule applies chiefly to verbs signifying Zo rule, to surpass, to 
excel, to inherit. 


Note. Avdooa, ἄρχω, and ἡ ἡγέομαι, may take the dative in- 
stead of the genitive. KAnpovopéa, in later Greek, may be follow- 
ed by the accusative of the thing inherited, and even of the person 
whose property is inherited. 

Such examples as Κρατεῖσθαι ὑπὸ τοῦ "Eporos, To be ruled by Love, 
show that κρατέω may take the accusative instead of the genitive. 


x § 190. The genitive after verbs signifying to 
be, to belong, denotes most of the relations ex- 
pressed by the adnominal and partitive genitive ; 
as, 


Ὁ παῖς Λακεδαιμονίων ἐστί, The boy is the gift of the Lacedaemoni- 
ans. (ᾧ 187.) 


§§ 191, 192.] GENITIVE. 251 


Avoias ἐστι τὸ θηρᾶσθαι κενά, It is characteristic of folly to pursue 
vain things. 

Εἶναι ἐτῶν τριάκοντα, To be thirty years old. 

*Ovra τὸ εὖρος πλέθρου, Being a plethrum in breadth. 

Τούτων γενοῦ por, Do become one of them for my sake. (§ 188.) 


7S 191. 1. In general the genitive may be put 
after any verb when its action does not refer to the 
whole object, but to a part only ; as, 

Πέμπει τῶν Λυδῶν, He sends some of the Lydians. 

Λαβόντα τῶν ταινιῶν, Taking some of the fillets. 

2. Particularly, the genitive is put after verbs 
signifying to partake, to enjoy, to obtain; as, 


Μετεῖχον τῆς ἑορτῆς, They shared in the festival. 
Απολαύομεν πάντων τῶν ἀγαθῶν, We enjoy all the good things. 
Οὕτως ὀναίμην τέκνων, So may I enjoy my children. 


Nore. Sometimes ἀπολαύω, λαγχάνω, μεταδίδωμι, μετα- 
λαγχάνω, τυχεῖν, to hit, μετέχω, are followed by the accusative. 


Sy192. 1. The genitive is put after verbs sig- 
nifying to take hold of, to touch, to feel, to hear, 
to taste, to smell, to perceive, to consider, to under 
stand, to remember, to forget. 

Causatives of this class are followed by the accu 
sative of the person and the genitive of the thing. 
E. g. | 

Λάβεσθε τούτου, Take hold of this man. 

“Ἄπτεσθαι αὐτῶν, To touch them. 

Tedoa τῆς θύρας, Taste of the door; Knock at the door. 

Μέμνησό μου, Remember me. 

Ὑπέμνησέν τέ ἑ πατρός, And he reminded him of his father. 

Ex δέ με πάντων ληθάνει, And makes me forget all things. 


Τοὺς παῖδας γευστέον αἵματος, One must make ihe children taste 
blood; give them a taste of blood. 


\2. Verbs signifying to take hold of are often fol- 
lowed by the accusative of the object taken hold 
of, and the genitive of the part by which it is 
taken ; as, 

Ελάβοντο τῆς ζώνης τὸν Ορόντην, They took Orontes by the girdle, 


Nore 1. Some verbs of this class may be followed by the accusa- 


252 SYNTAX. [S$ 193, 194, 


tive; as Αἰσθέσθαι τι, To perceive something. Those signifying to see 
are generally followed by the accusative of the immediate object. 

ΝΟΤΕ 9. Μιμνήσκω and yevo may be followed by two accusa- 
tives ; as Οἱ Ἐγεσταῖοι ξυμμαχίαν ἀναμιμνήσκοντες Αθηναίους, The in- 
habitants of Egesta reminding the Athenians of their alliance. Τεύσω 
σε μέθυ, 1 will give thee wine to taste. 

Nore 8. Ακούω, πυνθάνομαι, and their-synonymes, may take 
that which is heard in the accusative, and that from fvhich the thing 
heard proceeds, in the genitive ; as Ἤκουσε τοῦ ἀγγέλου τὰ mapa τοῦ 
Κύρου, He heard from the messenger the words of Cyrus. Τὸν ἄνδρα 
πυνθάνου τῶν ὁδοιπόρων, Inquire of the travellers about the man. 


& 193. Verbs signifying to admire, to contemn, 
desire, to care for, to neglect, are followed by the 
genitive ; as, wa | : Aspe 

“Ayao@a τῆς ἀρετῆς, To admire virtue. 

Μεγάλων ἐπιθυμεῖς, Thou desirest great things. 

Nore 1. Many verbs of this class are sometimes followed by the 
accusative of the object; as Φροντίζοντας τὰ τοιαῦτα, Caring about 
such things. (Eurip. Bac. 503) Karadpovet pe, He despises me; 
treats me with contempt. : 

So in the passive ; Εἰπὼν οὖν ταῦτα κατεφρονήθην ὑπ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Saying 
therefore these things I was despised by him. 


Norte 2. “Ayapac and its.synonymes may be followed by the gen- - 
itive of a person: and the accusative of a neuter pronoun; as Tad’ 
αὐτοῦ ἄγαμαι, I admire him for these things. *O θαυμάζω τοῦ ἑταίρου 
σου Πρωταγόρου, For which I admire your friend Protagéras. 

§ 194. 1. The genitive after certain verbs and 
xpressions denotes that on account of which any 
thing takes place; as, 7 

Ζηλῶ σε τῆς εὐβουλίας, I admire you for your wisdom. 

Τῇ ὑμετέρᾳ πόλει τῆς γῆς τῆς ὑπ᾽ Ὡρωπίων δεδομένης φθονοῦσι, They 
are jealous of your city, on account of the land given to you by the 
Oropians. 

2. The genitive, with or without an interjection, 
is used in exclamations ; as, 

OQ Πόσειδον, τοῦ μάκρους ! Posidon, what alength ! 

Kai ris εἶδε πώποτε βοῦς κριβανίτας ; τῶν ἀλαζονευμάτων ' And who 
ever saw oxen roasted whole in the oven? what tough stories ! 

3. In Poetry, the genitive is sometimes used 


after verbs signifying to entreat to denote the per- 





ᾧ 195.] GENITIVE.. 253 


son or thing for the sake of which the ‘person en- 
treated is to grant the request; as, 


Mn pe γούνων γουνάζεο μηδὲ τοκήων, Entreat me not by my knees, nor 
by my parents. « 

Ταύτης ἱκνοῦμαί σε, I beseech thee for her sake. 

Aiooopat Ζηνὸς Odvpriov, I pray you let me alone, for the sake of 

. Zeus Olympius, (Od. 2, 


4. Verbs signifying to accuse, to prosecute, to con- 
vict, are followed by the accusative denoting the 
person accused, and the genitive denoting the 
crime ; as, 


Διώξομαί σε δειλίας, Iwill prosecute you for cowardice. 
Κλέωνα δώρων Advres, Convicting Cleon of bribery. 


Nore 1. Φεύγω, to be accused, and ἁλῶναι, to be convicted, are 
followed by the genitive alone because they have a passive significa- 
tion. 


OTE 2, Airtdopat τινά τι, to accuse one of any thing. Emeét- 
ναι or Ἐπισκήπτεσθαί τινί τινος, to prosecute one for any thing. 


Note 3. The genitive of a person after verbs compounded with 

κατά, as καταγιγνώσκω, καταδικάζω, κατακρίνῳ, κατατρέχω, καταχει- 

οτονέω, καταψεύδομαι, καταψηφίζομαι, κατερεῖν, “κατηγορέω, common- 
ly referred to this head, really depends on κατά in composition; as, 


Σεωῦτοῦ καταδικάζεις θάνατον, Thou condemnest thyself to death. 


(a) The passzve construction of these verbs implies that they ean 
take the accusative of a person; as Exeivos κατεψηφίσθη, He was 
condemned, 

Ὁ) The accusative is often wanting after these verbs ; as Κατηγο- 
ρεῖν αὐτοῦ, To accuse him. 


(c) Karnyo pew is sometimes followed by two genitives ; as Πα- 
ραπρεσβείας αὐτοῦ κατηγορεῖν, To indict him for unfaithfully discharg~ 
ing his duties as ambassador. 


Note 4. Ἔνοχος and ὑπεύθυνος, accused of, charged with, guil- 
ty of, are followed by the genitive because they have the force of 
passive participles. —’”Evoxos may be followed by the genitive of 
punishment. "Evoxos, devoted to, takes the dative. 


§ 195. 1. The genitive is sometimes put after 
some adjectives, verbs, and adverbs of manner for: 
the sake of limiting or more fully explaining their 
meaning; as, 


254 SYNTAX. [δῷ 196, 197. 


"Amats ἀρρένων παίδων, ΓΆτεκνος ἀρσένων παίδων, or “Amats ἔρσενος 
γόνου, Childless in respect to male offspring ; Having no sons. 
Avdpds ὡραία, Of the ripe age to be married. 
Ed ἥκειν βίου, to be well off as to property. 
Καλῶς ἔχειν μέθης, To be well off as to drunkenness ; pretty tipsy. 
Ὡς εἶχε τάχους, As fast as he could. 
Οὕτω τρόπου ἔχεις, This is your character. 
2. The genitive is sometimes found after verbs 
of saying, judging, inquiring, and examining ; as, 
Τοῦ κασιγνήτου τί φής; What sayest thou concerning our brother ? 
Εὐδαιμονίας δὲ καὶ ἀθλιότητος ὡσαύτως ἢ ἄλλως κρίνεις ; But about 
happiness and misery dost thou judge hkewise or otherwise? 
3. After σπένδω and ἐγχέω the genitive is used 
in libations and toasts ; as, 


Σπεῖσον ἀγαθοῦ δαίμονος, Pour out the wine in the name of (or éo 
the honor of ) good fortune; May good fortune attend us. 
Ἔγχει ᾿Ἡλιοδώρας, Pour out to the health of Heliodora. 


Local and Temporal functions of the Genitive. 


§ 196. The genitive often denotes the place 
where? and the time when? how long since? or 
how soon? The genitive of place is chiefly Poetic. 
EF. g. ; 

Oix”Apyeos ἦεν ; Was he not in Argos? 

Τῆς νυκτὸς νέμονται, They feed in the night. 
grees ἡμερῶν ἀπὸ ταύτης τῆς ἡμέρας, Within thirty days from 
this day. ; 


Ablative functions of the Genitive. 
PA; 197. 1. In Poetry, the genitive sometimes 
e 


notes the place whence ? as, 
Πυθῶνος ἀγλαὰς ἔβας Θήβας, From Pytho thou camest to illustrious 
Thebes. 


)2. The genitive is put after verbs, adjectives, 
and adverbs, implying proceeding from, separation, 
departure, cessation.— 

Transitive verbs of this class are followed by 


δῷ 198, 199.] τς ΘΕΝΊΤΙΨΕ. 255 


the accusative of the immediate, and the genitive 
of the remote, object. E. g. 
Δαρείου καὶ ἸΤαρυσάτιδος γίγνονται παῖδες δύο, Of Darius and Pary- 
satis were born two children. 
Τούτου μεθίεσθαι, To let him go. 


Διέσχον ἀλλήλων, They separated from each other. 
“Aveu τινός, Without any thing. 


Note. Acddopos, different, takes the genitive; διάφορος, dp- 
posed to, hostile, takes the dative. —Kardpxo is found also with the 
accusative. 


§ 198. 1. The genitive is put after adjectives 
and adverbs of the comparative degree to denote 
that with which the comparison is made ; as, 


Κρείττων τούτου, Better than this man. 
Τῶν ἵππων θᾶττον ἔτρεχον, They ran faster than the horses. 


2. The genitive is put after adjectives, adverbs, 
and verbs implying a comparison ; as, 
‘Erépous τῶν νῦν ὄντων, Other than those who now are. 
Ὄρνιν τριπλάσιον Κλεωνύμου, A bird three times as large as Cleony- 
mus. ; 


Πλεονεκτήσω τοῦ Ἱπποκενταύρου, I shall have the advantage of the 
Hippocentaur. 


So Ελασσοῦν τινά twos, to make one less than any thing. — I po- 
έχω, to surpass, is found also with the accusative. 


3. When the substantive which is compared 15 
the same as that with which it is compared, the 
latter is omitted when it is limited by the ad- 
nominal genitive ; as, , 
Χώραν ἔχετε οὐδὲν ἧττον ἡμῶν ἔντιμον, You have a position not less 

ja than ours ; 80. τῆς χώρας. . 


Terminal functions of the Genitive. 


199. The genitive sometimes denotes that 
towards which an action is directed ; as, 


Ἑστοχάζετο τοῦ μειρακίου, He was taking aim at the young man 
Οἴστευσον Mevedaov, Shoot an arrow at Menelaus. 

Ρίψω πέτρον taxa σου, I will soon throw a stone at you. 

Εὐθὺ Πελλήνης, Straight to Pellene. 


956 SYNTAX. [§ 200. 


Instrumental functions of the Genitive. 


200. 1. Sometimes the genitive denotes the 
tnstrument, or the agent after a passive form; as, 


Πρῆσαι πυρὸς δηΐοιο θυρετρα, To burn the gates with consuming 
fire. 
Πληγεὶς θυγατρὸς τῆς ἐμῆς, Being struck by my daughter. 


2. The genitive is used after verbs and adjec- 
tives to denote the material of which any thing is 
made; as, 


Χαλκοῦ ποιέονται, They are made of brass. 
Ρινοῦ ποιητήν, Made of ox-hide, 


«3. The genitive is used after verbs, adjectives, 
and adverbs, implying fulness or want. 

Transitive verbs of this class are followed by 
the accusative of the immediate, and the genitive 
of the remote, object. Εἰ. g. 


Πενίας ἔγεμεν, It was full of Fe é 
Kevay δοξασμάτων πλήρεις, Full of cae notions. 
"Τῶν τεθνηκότων ἅλις, Enough of the dead. 


4. The genitive is used to denote the price of 
fa thing; as, 


Τῶν πόνων πωλοῦσιν ἡμῖν πάντα τἀγάθ᾽ οἱ θεοί, The gods sell to us 
every good thing for labor. 

*Qvéovra Tas γυναῖκας παρὰ τῶν γονέων χρημάτων μεγάλων, They buy 
their wives of their parents for much money. 

Χρημάτων ὠνητή, That can be bought for money. 


Nore 1. The noun denoting the punishment, that is, the price of 
crime, is sometimes put in the genitive. In classical Greek, however, 
this applies chiefly to θανάτου, of death ; as, 

Θανάτου ὑπαγαγὼν Μιλτιάδεα ἐδίωκε, He accused Miltiades capitally. 

Καταδικασθεὶς θανάτου ἢ φυγῆς, Being condemned to death or banish- 

ment, — 

"Evovos δεσμοῦ, Deserving chains. 


Nore 2. "Agios, worthy, and a£iws, worthily, are followed by the 
genitive of price or value ; as ΓΑξιος θανάτου, Worthy of death. — Its 
verb ἀ ξεόω. to think worthy, is followed by the accusative of a person, 
and the genitive of a thing; as ᾿Αξιοῦσιν αὐτὸν μεγάλων, They think 
him worthy of great things. 


§ 201.] DATIVE, 257 


When ἄξιος means fit, proper, becoming, it is followed by the da- 
tive. : 


DATIVE, 


χξ 201. 1. The dative is used after many verbs, 
Gdiectioes, adverbs, and substantives, to denote the 
object to or for which any thing ts or 15. done. 

Transitive verbs of this class are followed by the 
accusative of the immediate, and the dative of the 
remote, object. E. g. 


Tots θανοῦσι πλοῦτος οὐδὲν ὠφελεῖ, Wealth in no way benefits the 
dead. 

Avpatvopern τῷ νεκρῷ, Abusing the dead body. 

Δοκῶ μοι, I seem to myself; It seems to me. Aoxéis μοι, You seem 
tome. Δοκεῖ μοι, It seems to me. 

Ὑπισχνοῦμαί σοι δέκα τάλαντα, I promise to you ten talents. 

Ποθεινὸς τοῖς φίλοις, Dear to his friends. 

Ἐγώ tim ἐμποδών εἰμι; Am I in any body’s way ? 

So Τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ δόσιν ὑμῖν, The gift of the god to you. Βασιλεῖ da- 

σμός, Tribute to the king. : 


2. Some verbs, adjectives, and substantives may 
_ be followed by the genitive of a hema and the da- 
_ tive of a person; as, ~ 


Τῶν κρεῶν διαδιδόναι τοῖς θεραπευταῖς, To give some of the meat to 
the attendants. (ᾧ 191.) 

Ὑπεχώρησεν αὐτῷ τοῦ θρόνου, He yielded the throne to him. 
(§ 197, 2.) 

Αὐτῷ προειστήκει τοῦ ξενικοῦ, He was the commander of his merce- 
nary troops. (§ 189.) 

Μάλιστα σπουδῆς ἄξια 7. πόλει, Of the utmost consideration to the 
state, or Deserving the most serious uttention of the state. (§ 200, 
n. 2.) 

Δεῖγμ᾽ ἐστὶ πᾶσι μικροψυχίας, It is a sign of pusillanimity to all: 
All consider it a sign se pusillanimity. (§ 187.) 


. The dative is used after verbs signifying to be 
(εἰμί, γίγνομαι), to denote that to which any thing 
belongs ; as, 


Τέλλῳ παῖδες ἦσαν καλοί τε κἀγαθοί, Tellus had pe and noble chil- 
dren. 

Τοῖς πλουσίοις πολλὰ παραμύθιά φασιν. εἶναι, They say that the rich 
have many consolations. 

Πάντα σοι γενήσεται, All things will be done to thee. 


258 SYNTAX. [ὃ 201. 


4. The dative is used after verbs and adjectives 


to denote that with regard to which any thing is 
affirmed ; as, 


Σφῷν μὲν ᾿τολὴ Διὸς ἔχει τέλος δή, As to you two, the command of 

ts now done, 

Ti σοι παράσχω δῆτα τῷ τεθνηκότι, What shall I now offer thee for 

the deceased ? 

Amd Ἐλεφαντίνης πόλιος ἄνω ἰόντι ἄναντές ἐστι τὸ χωρίον, To a 

person going up Srom the city Elephantiné the country appears 
Steep. 

In certain parenthetical phrases ὦ ς precedes this dative ; as Ἐπεί περ 
εἶ γενναῖος ὡς ἰδόντι, Since thou art of. noble descent to one who sees thee ; 
as thy appearance indicates. ‘Qs ἐμοί or Ὥς γ᾽ ἐμοί, In my opinion. 
Ὡς γέροντι, For an oldman. Κρέων ἦν ζηλωτὸς, ὡς ἐμοί, ποτε, Creon 

was once, in my opinion, enviable. 


5. The dative is often used after verbs, and 
Sometimes after nouns, where the adnominal gen- 
itive would naturally be expected ; as, 


"Hpxov τοῦ ναυτικοῦ τοῖς Συρακουσίοις, They commanded the navy of 
the Syracusans. 

Oi ἵπποι αὐτοῖς δέδενται, Their horses are tied. 

Διὰ i ta αὐτῷ τὸ στράτευμα, Because his army has dis- 
pers 


6. The dative is put after the ¢nterjections οἵ, ὦ, 
ἰώ, ovat; as Οἵ μοι, Woe is me! 


Norte 1. Many verbs of this class are sometimes followed by the 
accusative of the immediate object ; as Ὠφελεῖν τοὺς φίλους, To benefit 
one’s friends, 


So in the passive: Οἱ Λακεδαιμόνιοι ἀπιστοῦνται ὑπὸ πάντων Πελο- 
ποννησίων, The Lacedemonians are distrusted by all the Peloponnesians ; 
implying Πάντες Πελοποννήσιοι ἀπιστοῦσι Λακεδαιμονίους. 


Note 2. Αφαιρῶ τί τινι, To take away any thing from any one. 
Aéxopai ri τινι, To receive or accept any thing from any one. Qvei- 
o Oar or Πρίασθαί τι τινι, To buy any thing "of any one. 


Nore 3. In the Epic dialect the dative is sometimes followed by a 
participle in the genitive; and on the other hand a participle in the 
dative is sometimes appended to a noun in the genitive (5); as (Od. 
9, 257) Ἡμῖν δ᾽ αὖτε es φίλον ἦτορ δεισάντων. (il. 14, 139) 
Ἀχιλλῆος ὀλοὸν κῆρ +.... δερκομένῳ. 


Note 4. The coals δεῖ, χρή. μέλει. μέτεδτι, προσήκει 
may be followed by the genitive sa a thing and the dative of a person; 


§ 202.] | DATIVE. . 259 


as Δεινῶν δέ σοι βουλευμάτων ἔοικε δεῖν, And it is clear that you need 
strong arguments. Μέλει σοι τούτου, Thou carest for this. 

Most commonly, however, ὃ εἴ and χρή are followed by the accusative 
of a person, and the genitive of a thing; as Αὐτόν σε δεῖ Προμη- 
θέως, Thou thyself needest a Prometheus, 

The genitive in connection with μέτεστι and προσήκει depends 
on μέρος expressed or understood ; as Ὧν μηδὲν μέρος τοῖς πονηροῖς μέ- 
τεστι, Of which the wicked have no part. Προσήκει οὐδενὶ ἀρχῆς, 
Government belongs to nobody. 


Norte 5. Frequently the dative of the personal pronoun is apparent- 
ly superfluous ; Eimépevai μοι, Tpdes, ἀγαυοῦ Ἰλιονῆος πατρὶ φίλῳ καὶ 
μητρὶ γοήμεναι, O ‘Trojans, do tell the beloved father and mother of 1l- 
lustrious Ilioneus to bewail, where μοι might have been omitted with- 
out any essential injury to the sense. 

It may be observed here that the pronoun roi (σοί) most commonly 
has the force of a particle, and may be rendered You know, You see, 
certainly, or Sir. 


§ 202. 1. The dative is used after adjectives, 
adverbs, verbs, and substantives, implying resem- 
blance, equality, union, approach. 

Transitive verbs of this class are followed by the 
accusative of the immediate, and the dative of the 
remote, object. E. g. 


Ὅμοιοι τοῖς τυφλοῖς, Like the blind. 

Ἐγγὺς ὁδῷ, Near a road. β 

Λακεδαιμονίοις διαμάχεσθαι, To fight against the Lacedemonians. 

Ὃ σίδηρος ἀνισοῖ τοὺς ἀσθενεῖς τοῖς ἰσχυροῖς, Steel renders the weak 
equal to the strong. ; 

“OptAnra Σωκράτει, Companions (pupils) of Socrates. 


2. When the substantive, which depends on cos, 
or ὅμοιος, is the same as that with which ‘aos, or 
ὅμοιος, agrees, the former is omitted, and the limit- 
ing noun is put in the dative; as, : 
Κόμαι Xapirecow ὁμοῖαι, Hair resembling that of the Graces; for 
ὁμοῖαι ταῖς κόμαις τῶν Χαρίτων. 


9 


Οὐ γὰρ μετεῖχες τὰς ἴσας πληγὰς ἐμοί, For thou didst not receive the 
same number of stripes with me. 


Note 1. ‘O αὐτός, idem, the same, and εἷς, one, the same, may be 
_ followed by the dative. In general, however, the dative to which they 
directly refer is omitted, and the limiting noun takes its place. KE. g. 


. 





260 SYNTAX. [$$ 208 -- 906. 


Ovder τῶν αὐτῶν ἐκείνοις πράττομεν, We do nothing like the things which 
they did, αὐτῶν refers to the deeds, and ἐκείνοις to the doers. 

Ὡσαύτως, likewise, in the same manner, the adverb of ὁ αὐτός, 
takes the dative. 


Nore 2. Κοινωνέω, κοινωνός, μετέχω, συμμετέχω may be © 
followed by the genitive of a thing, and the. dative of a person. 
($$ 187; 189; 191.) 


Xs 203. The dative is used after verbs to denote 
he cause of an event, or that on account of which 
any thing takes place ; as, 

Asothboie νόσῳ, He died of disease, 


Ταύτῃ γαυριᾷς ‘You t feel proud on account of this. 
Tois πεπραγμένοις αἰσχυνόμενοι, Being ashamed of their past deeds. 


Local and Temporal functions of the Dative. 


ἢ 204. The dative often denotes the place 


where, and the time when; as, 


Μαραθῶνι ὅτ᾽ ἦμεν, When we were at Marathon. 
Ταύτῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ οὐκ ἐμαχέσατο βασιλεύς, The king did not fight on 
that day. - . 
Terminal functions of the Dative. i . 
§ 205. The dative is used after certain verbs 
and adjectives to denote that to or towards which 
their action is directed ; as, 


Αὐτῷ ἀφίκοντο, They came Ὁ him. 
Πίπτειν πέδῳ, To fall on (to) the ground. 


Instrumental and Modal functions of the Dative. 
Υ 206. 1. The dative is used to denote the ἴη- 
strument, manner, and means; as, 


Θύρσον: λαβὼν δεξιᾷ χειρί, Taking the thyrsus with the right hand. 
Apéyue ἴεντο és τοὺς βαρβάρους, went running against the bar- 
barians. 





δ Ξ The dative is often put after adjectives, sub- 
antives, verbs, and adverbs of manner, for thé sake 
of limiting or more fully explaining their meaning ; 

as, 





§ 206.] "DATIVE. 261 


Δυνατοὶ τοῖς σώμασι, Strong in body. Ἰσχυειν τοῖς σώμασι, To be 
strong in body. 

Θάψακος ὀνόματι, Thapsacus by name. 

Ἐγχείῃ ἐκέκαστο, He was eminent with the spear. 


3. The dative is put after comparatives to denote 
the excess of one thing over another ; as, 


Πόλϊ λογίμῳ ἡ Ἑλλὰς γέγονε ἀσθενεστέρη, Greece has become weaker 
by one distinguished city, 

Πολλῷ ὕστερον, Long after. 

‘Evi μόνῳ προέχουσιν οἱ ἱππεῖς ἡμᾶς, The horsemen SUrpass Us in one 
thing only. 


“ 


4. The dative after passive verbs and verbal ad- 
Jectives in -ros and -reos denotes the agent of the 
action ; as, 

Προσπόλοις φυλάσσεται, He is taken care of by the servants, 

Εἴρητο ταῦτα τῷ Εὐθυδήμῳ, These things had been said by Euthy- 
demus. 

Τοῖς ἄλλοις εὐκτά, Desirable to others. . 

Ὠφελητέα σοι ἡ πόλις ἐστίν, The state must be benefited by thee. 


. The dative denotes that by which any thing 
5 accompanied ; as, 


Tots λειπομένοις ἐς Πλάταιαν ἐλθόντες, Having come into Platea 
with those that were left. — ; 

Ἐβοήθησαν τοῖς Δωριεῦσιν ἑαὐτῶν τε πεντακοσίοις καὶ χιλίοις ὁπλίταις 
καὶ τῶν ξυμμάχων μυρίοις, They assisted the Dorians with one thou- 
sand five hundred heavy-armed soldiers of their own, and ten thou- 
sand of their allies. 


___ This rule applies also to the dative of αὐτός accompanied by a sub- 
_ ‘Stantive ; as Τριήρεις αὐτοῖς πληρώμασι διεφθάρησαν, A number of gal- 
_ leys was Paribas 3 with every thing on board. 






Nortel. Δωρέομαί τί τινι, To present any thing to any one, 
($201, 15) or Δωρέομαί τινά τινι, To Present one with any thing. 


i QNors 2. The dative after ypdopat, utor, to avail one’s self, to 

_ ‘supply one’s need with, to use, denotes the instrument. This dative 

_ may have another dative in apposition with it ; or it may be accompa- 

_hied by the synecdochical τί, τὶ, ὅτι. --- No μίζω, to use, takes the 
dative after the analogy of its synonyme χράομαι. 


Nore 3. .The dative after such verbs as input, σφενδονάω, de- 
_ hotes the instrument; as ‘Qs εἶδε τὸν Κλέαρχον διελαύνοντα ἵησι τῇ 
 ἀξίνῃ, As he saw Clearchus riding by, he threw the axe at him; in- 


_ tending to hit him with the aze. 
. 










262 SYNTAX. [88 207, 208. 


Note 4. The dative of instrument may be put after a substantive ; 
as “H τοῖς βέλεσιν ἔφεσις, The throwing of missiles. 


Note 5. When the verbal in-réov or-réa is equivalent to δεῖ 
with the infinitive, the accusative may be used instead of the dative ; 
as Οὔτε μισθοφορητέον ἄλλους ἢ τοὺς στρατευομένους, Nor must others, 
than those who serve in the army, recetve wages; equivalent to Οὔτε δεῖ 
ἄλλους μισθοφορεῖν ἢ τοὺς στρατευομένους. 


VOICES. 
fe 207. 1. The active voice comprises the greater number 
ο 


f' active or transitive, and neuter or intransitive, verbs; as” 
κόπτω, τρέχω, εἰμί. 


2. Causative verbs, that is, verbs signifying to cause one to 
do any thing, have the active form; as yevo, to cause to taste. 


Note 1. The accusative of the reflexive pronoun is often omitted, 
in which case the verb becomes intransitive ; as ἐλαύνω, to wmpel one’s 
self, to proceed, march ; μίγνυμι, to join one’s self. 

Norte 2. The second perfect and pluperfect, and second aorist active, 
of some verbs have the signification of the passive or middle; as ἄγνυμι 
aya, ἵστημι ἔστην. Also the perfect of ἁλίσκομαι, γίγνομαι, ἵστημι; 
σβέννυμι, SKEAAQ, and dia. 

Nore 3. Some active verbs are often constructed like passives ; 
that is, they are followed by ὑπό or πρός with the genitive of the 
agent ; as ἀκούω, κλύω, to be called, ἀποθνήσκω, τελευτάω, to die by the 
hand of. : 

Nore 4. ‘The grammatical subject of an active verb is not always 


the agent of the action. Thus, κατακαίω τι, 1 burn something, may 
mean also I cause or order somebody to burn something. 


§ 208. The passive takes for its subject that which was 
the immediate object of the active. That which was the sub- 
ject-nominative in the active becomes genitive in the passive, 
and depends on ὑπό, πρός, παρά, or ἐξ. E. g. 

Κύων τὸν δεσπότην φιλεῖ, The dog loves his master, in the passive 

becomes Ὁ δεσπότης φιλεῖται ὑπὸ τοῦ κυνός, The master 15 loved 
by his dog. 

Nore 1. (a) The aorist passive often has the force of the middle , 
in which case, the aorist middle is either rare or obsolete; as amaA- 
λάσσω, to deliver, ἀπαλλαγῆναι, to deliver one’s self; μιμνήπκω, tc re- 
mind, μνησθῆναι, to remind one’s self, to remember. 

(0), The future passive sometimes has the force of the middle ; as 
μιμνήσκω, μνησθήσομαι, μεμνήσομαι. 








- 


§ 209.) VOICES. : 263 


Nore 2. Some neuter verbs are used also in the passive, especially 
when they are followed by the dative of the agent ; as Ἐμοὶ κεκλαύσε- 
rat, for Κεκλαύσομαι. 


§ 209. 1. Frequently the middle is equivalent to the ac- 
tive followed by the accusative of the reflexive or reciprocal 
pronoun ; as, 

Νίπτομαι, I am washed, se. by myself, the same as νίπτω ἐμαυτόν, I 

- wash myself. 

AoWopotpeba, We revile one another. ; 


2. Very frequently the middle is equivalent to the active fol- 
lowed by the dative of the reflexive or reciprocal pronoun. In 
this case the middle is used transitively. E. g 
Ποιεῖσθαι τὴν εἰρήνην, To make peace Jor one’s self ; but Ποιεῖν τὴν 
εἰρήνην, To make peace for others. 
Τὴν χώραν κατανενέμηνται, They have divided the place among them- 
selves. | 


3. The middle is not unfrequently equivalent to the active 
followed by the genitive of the reflexive pronoun. Here also 
it is used transitively. E. g. 

Tlaida μ᾽ ὠνομάζετο, He called me his son. 

Λυσόμενος θύγατρα, To ransom his own daughter. 

Αποφήνασθαι γνώμην, To express one’s own opinion. 

Στέφου κάρα, Crown thy head. 


Note 1. When the active is causative, the middle is commonly 
intransitive ; as ἔλπω ἔλπομαι, γεύω γεύομαι. 

Nore 2. Sometimes the reflexive or reciprocal pronoun is, for the 
sake of emphasis, annexed to a middle verb; as Ἐπεδείξαντο τὰς αὗ- 
τῶν ἀρετάς, They showed their virtues. Ισχὺν ἡμῖν αὐτοῖς προσθησό- 
μεθα, We shall add power to ourselves. 

Nore 3. The middle, like the active, may be used to express an 
action which takes place at the command of the subject of the verb; 

as Τράπεζαν παρατίθεσθαι, To place a table, or To have a table placed, 
before one’s self. 

Nore 4. Sometimes the middle is apparently equivalent to the ac- 
tive; as ὁρᾶσθαι, ἰδέσθαι, χορεύσασθαι. 


Note 5. (a) The future middle of many verbs is equivalent to the 


future active, in which case the future active is either rare or obso- 





lete ; as θαυμάζω θαυμάσομαι. (See Catalogue of Greek Verbs, § 51.) 
(b) Not unfrequently the future middle has a passive signification " 
as ἀδικέω ἀδικήσομαι. (See Catalogue of Greek Verbs, § 52.) 


_Nore6. In the Epic dialect, the second aorist middle has some- 
times the force uf the passive; as βλῆσθαι, κτάσθαι, οὐτάμενος 


—— 


264 SYNTAX. [δὲ 210, 211. 
x 210. In respect to signification, a deponent verb is 


ither transitive or intransitive ; as ἐπιμέλομαι, ἐπεμελήθην, to 
take care of 3 Bpitxdopa, ἐβρυχησάμην, to rear. 

Note 1. Some deponents have both the aorist passive and the ~ 
aorist middle ; as δύναμαι, ἠδυνήθην, ἐδυνησάμην. Most commonly, 
however, when both aorists are used, the passive has a passive signi- 
fication; as δέχομαι, δεχθῆναι, δέξασθαι. . 

Nore 2. It has already been remarked that the future of a depo- 
nent verb is taken from the middle. It is added here that a few de- ; 
ponents have also a future passive ; as ἐπιμέλομαι, ἐπιμελήσομαι, ἐπι- 
μεληθήσομαι. (ᾧ 82, 2.) 

Nore 3. Some deponents have, in the perfect and pluperfect, also 
a passive signification ; as ἐργάζομαι εἴργασμαι, μιμέομαι μεμιμημένος. 


TENSES. 


‘4 211. 1. The present in the indicative expresses action 
ar being which is going on now ; as γράφω, I write, I am writ- 
ing ; εἰμί, I am. 

In the other moods and in the participle, the present ex- 
presses continued action, but without regard to time. 


2. The perfect, in all the moods and in the participle, ex- 
presses action which is completed, and whose effects are, or are 
regarded as, still continuing ; as γέγραφα, I have written, 


3. The future, in all the moods and in the participle, = 
presses an action or event which will take place; as γράψω, 1 
shall or will write. 


4. The future perfect is equivalent to the perfect participle 
with the future of εἰμί, to be ; that is, it denotes an action which 
will be completed i in future time ; as γεγράψεται, the same as 
᾿ γεγραμμένον ἔσται, tt will have been written. 

Most commonly, however, the future perfect does not differ from 


the future ; as δέω, δεδήσομαι, shall be bound; πιπράσκω, πεπράσομαι, 
shall be sold. 


5. The imperfect expresses continued or repeated action go- 
ing on in past time ; as ἔγραφον, I was writing. 





6. The aorist in the indicative and participle expresses fin- 
ished past action, without reference to the time required for its 
reget ; it simply narrates that which took place; as 
ἔγραψα, I wrote. 

In the other moods, the aorist expresses finished action with- 
out regard to time. 








§ 211] TENSES. 265 


7. The pluperfect expresses action which was completed at 
some past time ; as ἐγεγράφειν, I had written. 


Nore 1. In animated narration, the present and even the perfed 
may be used for the aorist ; as Παίει κατὰ τὸ στέρνον, καὶ τιτρώσκει διὰ 
τοῦ θώρᾶκος, He struck him in the breast, and wounded him through 
the cuirass. Ἑλήλυθε ἀνὴρ A@nvaios, An Athenian came. (Her. 8, 50.) 


Note 2. The perfect and aorist are often used for the present to 
express a customary action ; as Ὁ κρατῶν ἅμα πάντα συνήρπακε, He 
who conquers takes possession of every thing. 

So Παρὰ μὲν οὖν φίλου od μάθοις ἂν τοῦθ᾽, ὁ δ᾽ ἐχθρὸς εὐθὺς ἐξη- 
νάγκασεν, Now from a friend you might not learn this; but the enemy 
(as a common thing) wmmediately compels you to learn it. 


Nore 3. The perfect, aorist indicative, and future perfect are some- 
times used for the future to denote the rapidity or certainty of an ac- 
tion ; as [ΓὍλωλας εἴ σε ταῦτ᾽ ἐρήσομαι πάλιν, Thou shalt certainly 
perish, if I ask thee again this question. Απωλόμεσθ᾽ ἄρ᾽ εἰ κακὸν 
προσοίσομεν νέον παλαιῷ, Then we are undone, of weadd a new evil to 
an old one. 

So Πράσσω, to do; πεπράξεται, It shall immediately be done. Θά- 
nro, to bury; τεθάψεται, He shall be buried in spite of thee. 


Nore 4. Sometimes the present is used for the future ; as προσκτᾶ- 
σθε, ἐλευθεροῦτε, for προσκτήσεσθε, ἐλευθερώσετε, ( Thuc. 4, 98.) ---- 
Εἶμι most commonly has the force of the future, I shall go. 

On the other hand, the future is sometimes used where one would 
naturally expect the present; as ὑπάξεται, ἐπάξεται, δυσόμενος, κατα- 
βήσεται, in Sophocles, Homer, and Hesiod. 


Note 5. Ἥκω, to have come, and οἴχομαι, to be gone, have 
the force of the perfect. The imperfect ἧκον has the force of the 
pluperfect, I had come ; ὠχόμην is used as aorist or pluperfect ; J 
was gone; I had gone. 

Τίκτω, to be the parent of, and ἀκούω, to hear, in certain connec- 
tions, stand for the aorist ἔτεκον, ἤκουσα. 


_ 9dNote6. The perfect of some verbs has the signification of the 
resent ; in which case, the pluperfect has the signification of the im- 
perfect ; as εἴκω ἔοικα, to seem ; ἐῴκειν, 1 seemed. 


Note 7. The perfect imperative is used when the perfect has the 
_ force of the present (n. 6) ; as ἀνώγω ἀνωγέτω ἀνώγετε, γίγνομαι γε- 
γονέτω, κράζω κέκραχϑι κεκράγετε, EIAQ ἴσθι, μιμνήσκω μέμνησο, χά- 
_ TKO κεχήνετε, πείθω πέπεισθι πέποιθε, κλύω κέκλυκε, παραπίπτω παρα 
 WETT@KETO. 

_ [ἢ the passive and middle; however, the third person of the perfect 
_ imperative of any verb is equivalent to the perfect participle with 
_ the imperative of εἰμί ; as ἤχθω, let it be drawn and remain so; de- 
 δόσθω, be it given; λελείφθω, let it remain; λελέχθω, εἰρήσθω, be tt 


12 τὶ 


a 


266 ᾿ SYNTAX, | [Ὁ 211. | 


Norte 8. In later Greek, the perfect is sometimes confounded with 
the aorist ; as (N. T. Matth. 13, 46) AwedOav πέπρακε πάντα ὅσα εἶχε, 
καὶ nyépacev αὐτόν. (Heb. 11, 17) Πίστει προσενήνοχεν Ἀβραὰμ τὸν 
Ἰσαάκ. 

Note 9. The future perfect is the natural future of verbs whose 
perfect has the force of the present (n. 6); as xrdopat κέκτημαι, κεκτή- 
copa, I shall possess ; μιμνήσκω μέμνημαϊ, μεμνήσομαι, I shall remain 
Note 10. The imperfect may denote a customary past action ; as 
_ Tods πολῖτας μεθ᾽ ὅπλων ἐξέπεμπον, They usually sent out the citizens 
"armed, 

Nore 11. The imperfect is often used for the aorist, especially in 
the Ionic writers ; as ἔφην, I said, not I was saying ; ἐκαθεζόμην, I sat, 
sometimes, I was sitiing. ὶ 

When the regular signification of the imperfect is aoristic, the pres- 
ent of the dependent moods and participle also becomes aoristic ; that 
is, these m are, so far as signification is. concerned, subjoined to 
the imperfect ; as ἔφην, φῶ φαίην habe φάναι has ; ἔσχεθον, σχέθω 
σχέθοιμι σχέθε bef iy jderkigg Btn verbs in -ἄθω, of which the 
present indicative is not used ; as ἀλέξω, ἀλκάθειν aoristic. 


Nore 12. Sometimes the imperfect expresses an attempt ; as Ἐμε- 
σθοῦτο τὴν αὐλήν, He endeavoured to hare the court-yard. Οὐκ ἔπειθε 
τὸν Ξέρξεα, He could not convince Xerxes. . 


Note 13. The imperfect is sometimes used where one would natu- 
rally expect the present ; as (Xen. A. 1, 4,9) ἐνόμιζον, εἴων, for νομέ- 
ζουσιν, ἐῶσιν. 

ἮΝν, was, often stands for ἐστίν, ts ; as Ἀγαθὸν γὰρ ἦν οὗ πάντες ἐφί- 
evra, For that is good which all men desire. 

Ἔπλευ, πέλευ, thou art; ἔπλετο, heis; from πέλω, πέλομαι, to 
be. So ἐγίγνετο, ἀπώλλυτο, for yiyverat, ἀπόλλυται. The aorist 
ἔφυν, from φύω, regularly has the force of the present, to be, to be 
born. 


Nore 14. The aorvst indicative and participle is often used where 
the perfect or pluperfect would be more logical; as Κατάβηθ᾽ as ἐμὲ, 
ἵνα μ᾽ ἐκδιδάξης ὧνπερ οὕνεκ᾽ ἐλήλυθα. TOK. Ἦλθες δὲ κατὰ τί; 
Come down to me, to teach me those things for which I have come. 
Soc. But you have come for what? - 


Nore 15. The aorist indicative of some verbs is, in colloquial 
style, often used for the present, in order to express a decided feelin 
of admiration, pity, contempt, or pleasure ; as Ἥσθην ἀπειλαῖς, i 
amuses me to hear your threats. 

So ἐγέλασα, I can’t help laughing ; ἤνεσα, ἐπήνεσα, I admire, or 1 
thank you ; ἀπέπτυσα, I do despise ; ᾧμωξα, I groan from the bottom 
of my heart; ἀπεπυδάρισα, περιεκόκκυσα, I sneeze at it. 

Norte 16. In the old writers, the pluperfect sometimes has the 
force of the aorist ; as βεβλήκει for ἔβαλε. (Il. 5, 66.) 


~ 





$$ 212, 218.] MOODS. — QUOTATIONS. 267. 
MOODS. 


§ VIZ. 1. The indicative is the mood of certainty ; it af- 
firms or denies, and is used in independent or dependent sentences. 


ὦ. The subjunctive is the mood of probability ; it is used in 
dependent sentences, and is regularly connected with the pri- 
mary tenses of the indicative, the imperative, or with any ver- 
bal form implying time present or future. : | 


3. The optative is the mood of possibility ; it is used in de- 
pendent sentences, and is regularly connected with the secon- 
dary tenses of the indicative, the aorist participle, or with any 
verbal form implying time past. ; 


4. The imperative is used to express a command, an exhor- 
tation, entreaty, or a prohibition. 


Nore. When the past is represented as present, the subjunctive o1 
indicative takes the place of the optative. On the other hand, when 
the present is conceived of as past, the optative is used for the subjune- 
tive or indicative, 

In later Greek, however, the indicative and subjunctive are very 
often used where the early writers would have used the optative. 


QUOTATIONS (ὅτι, ὦ 9). 


τ 282. 1. Words said by ἃ person may be quoted with- 
out any change. Further, ὅτι may stand before the words thus 
quoted. KE. g. 


“c? 


Amexpivaro ὅτι ““ Ὦ δέσποτα, οὐ ᾧῇ,᾽ He answered, “0 master, he 


15 not living.” 
\ 2. When that which is quoted is not in the words of the 
speaker, the indicative with ὅτι or ὡς (negatively ὅτι οὐ, ὡς οὐ) 
is used after the primary tenses and after the imperative ; the 
optative with the same particles is used after the secondary 
tenses. In this case, the tense employed by the person whose 
words or thoughts are indirectly quoted is used. E. g. 
Λέγουσι Πέρσαι ὡς Δαρεῖος ἦν κάπηλος, The Persians say that Da- 
rius was a huckster ; they say, * Δαρεῖος ἦν κάπηλος.» 
Εἰσάγγελλε Τειρεσίας ὅτι ζητεῖ νιν, Announce that Tiresias inquires 
Sor him; say to him ‘ Τειρεσίας ζητεῖ σε." ᾿ 
Ἤδη γὰρ, ὅτι ἐξ αὐτῶν καλόν τι ἀνακύψοιτο τῶν ἐρωτημάτων, For I 
knew that something good would come out of these questions ; 1 
said to myself, ““ Ἐξ αὐτῶν καλόν τι ἀνακύψεται τῶν ἐρωτημάτων."" 


(a) As the optative has no imperfect, the imperfect indicative, in in 


» 
- 


268 SYNTAX. — [Ὁ 214 


direct quotations, remains unaltered ; as Εἶχε λέγειν ὅτι βασιλεῖ συνε- 
μάχοντο, He could confidently say that they fought with the king, where 
συμμάχοιντο would mean that he said ““ Βασιλεῖ συμμάχονται.᾽" 


(b) Before an interrogative word, ὅτι, ὡς, are omitted ; as Ἡρώτων 
τί θέλοι, They asked what he wanted. 

Nore 1. (a) In animated narration, the indicative takes the place of 
the optative ; ἃ5 Ἔλεγεν ὅτι ἐλεύθερός ἐστι, He said that he was a free- 
man. 

(b) On the other hand, when the present is conceived of as past, the 
optative takes the place of the indicative ; as Awopynpoveverat ὡς λέ- 
you; for ἔλεγε. 

Notre 2. When the present has the force of the aorist, it is regular- 
ly followed by the optative with ὅτι, ὡς ; as Τράφει ἐπιστολὴν mapa 
βασιλέα ὅτι ἥξοι, He wrote a letter to the king, saying that he should come. 

Norte 3. The imperfect or pluperfect indicative is sometimes used 
for the optative; as (Xen. An. 3, 1, 2) ὅτι ἦσαν, ἔμελλεν, προὐδεδώ- — 
κεισαν, καταλελειμμένοι ἦσαν. 


END, MOTIVE, (να, ὡς, ὅπως, ὄφρα) 


A§ 214. 1. The subjunctive and optative, preceded by ἕνα, 
‘és, Gras, ὄφρα, (negatively ἵνα μή, ὡς μή, ὅπως μή, ὄφρα μή,) reg- 
ularly denote an end or motive ; as, 


Αναμνήσω ὑμᾶς iva εἰδῆτε, I will remind you, that you may know. 

Ἐκβίβασον αὐτὴν ἵνα καὶ νὼ θεασώμεθα τὴν ἀηδόνα, Bring her out, 

that we too may see the nightingale. 

Ἑπτακοσίους λογάδας τῶν ὁπλιτῶν ἐξέκρῖναν ὅπως εἴησαν φύλακες, 

They selected seven hundred heavy-armed soldiers, in order that they 
might serve as guards. 

(a) The expression ὅπως μή, after words denoting fear, anxiety, ex- 
pressed or understood, generally omits ὅπως ; in which case μή is 
usually translated Jest; as, 

Δέδοικά σ᾽, ὦ πρεσβῦτα, μὴ πληγῶν δέῃ, I am afraid, O old man, 

that you will need stripes. 

Ἐδεδοίκειν μὴ φάρμακα μεμιγμένα εἴη, I was afraid lest poisons had 

teen mised with it. 

(b) The future indicative, with ὅπως (rarely ὅπως ἄν), or 2 : 
(negatively ὅπως μή, ὄφρα py, or simply μῆ,) may take the place of the 
subjunctive ; as, 

Δέδοικα ὅπως μὴ ἀνάγκη γενήσεται, I fear lest there will be a neces- 

sity. 

Φοβοῦμαι μὴ εὑρήσομεν, I fear lest we shall find. 


_ (c) The secondary tenses of the indicative are sometimes put after 
ἵνα, ὡς, ὅπως, rendered so, so that, so as, in this way; as, 








ᾧ 214.] END, MOTIVE. 269 


Τύριον οἶδμα λιποῦσ᾽ ἔβᾶν ty’ ὑπὸ δειράσι Mapvacod κατενάσθην, Hav- 
ing left the Tyrian surge I came, so that I might have dwelt under 
the summits of Parnassus, ES 


2. All the sentences depending upon wa, as, ὅπως, or ὄφρα, 
are put in the subjunctive or optative, as the principal verb may 
require ; as, 

Ἔδωκε τὰ γράμματα τοῖς φίλοις καὶ τοῖς ἄρχουσιν ὅπως εἰδεῖεν τῶν ἐπι- 
τρόπων οἵ τε σῶα αὐτοῖς ἀποδιδοῖεν, οἵ τε pn, He gave the inventory to 
his friends and to the rulers, that they might know who of the agents © 
delivered the things safe, and who did not. Ἐπιβουλεύουσιν ὡς, ἢν δύ- 
νωνται, ἀπολέσωσιν, They are plotting against us, in order that they 
may destroy us, uf they can. 


Nore 1. In animated speech, or when the aorist has the force of 
the perfect, the subjunctive, or future indicative with ὅπως, ohpa, or 
ὅτῳ τρόπῳ, takes the place of the optative. On the other hand, when 
the present is conceived of as past, the optative takes the place of the 
subjunctive. KE. g. *Arére Αβροκόμας κατέκαυσεν ἵνα μὴ Κῦρος διαβῇ, 
Which Abrocomas then burned up, that Oyrus might not pass over, 
Τοῦτον δ᾽ 6x ἵνα μὴ ταλαιπωροῖτο, And I let this fellow ride that he 
may not suffer hardship. 


Norse 2. When the present is used for the aorist, it is regularly 
followed by the optative; as Βουλὴν ἐπιτεχνᾶται ὅπως μὴ ἀλισθεῖεν 
Αθηναῖοι, He contrived a plan, which should prevent the Athenians from 
assembling. 


ἌΣ ore 3. Sometimes ὅπως, or ὅπως μή, depends on ὅρα, σκόπει, see, 

consider, understood ; as Ὅπως δὲ γρυλλιξεῖτε καὶ κοΐξετε, And be sure 
to grunt and squeal. Kai σοι φράσω πρᾶγμ᾽ ὃ σὺ μαθὼν ἀνὴρ ἔσει - 
ὅπως δὲ τοῦτο μὴ διδάξεις μηδένα, And I will tell you sonething which 
one learned you will be aman; but see that you communicate it to no- 
ody. 

Nore 4. Ὅπως may be omitted before the future indicative; in 
which case this tense has the appearance of the imperative; as Διώ- 
fers δὲ μηδαμῇ εἰς ἀφανές, And thou shalt by no means pursue the enemy 
into a place out of sight. 


Nore 5. After βούλει or θέλεις, ἵνα may be omitted; as Etre τι 
βούλει προσθῇς ἢ ἀφέλῃς, Whether thou wishest to add or take away 
any thing. 
Here re βούλει corresponds to quodvis, quidvis, quodlibet, 
quidlibet. 


Note 6. Sometimes ἄν accompanies ἵνα, ὅπως, ὡς, ὄφρα, py, with 
the optative. ; 
_, Nore 7. The future optative is rarely found after ὅπως. (Xen. Oyr. 
8, 1, 43) Ὅπως ἔσοιντο. (Id. ib. 8, 3, 8) Ὅπως ἕξοι. 


Nore 8, In later Greek, iva is sometimes followed by the future in- 
dicative. 


_ 270 SYNTAX. [§ 215. 


CONDITIONAL SENTENCES (ei, ἐάν, ἄν, ἤν). 


fos 2135. In a clause containing a condition and consequence 
conclusion, the former is called protasis, and the latter apo- 
dosis. © 

The protasis usually begins with εἰ, ἐάν, dv, or ἦν, si, if, 
negatively εἰ μή, ἐὰν μή, ἂν μή, Or ἣν μή, nisi, if not, unless. 


1. When the condition is assumed as a certainty, the prota- 
sis is put in the indicative with εἰ. When it is not assumed as 
a certainty, it is put in the subjunctive with ἐάν, ἄν, or ἦν, 
(rarely ¢i,) or in the optative with εἰ (rarely ἐάν). 

When the consequence is assumed as a certainty, the apodo- 
sis is put in the indicative, imperative, or subjunctive in prohi- 
bitions. When it is not assumed as a certainty, it is put in the 
indicative or optative, generally with the modifying adverb ἄν 
(negut vely οὐκ ἄν). E. g. 


Δεινὰ πεισόμεθα εἰ σιγήσομεν, We shall suffer terrible disasters if we 
shall keep silence. 


Εἰσόμεθα αὐτίκα ἂν ποιήσωμεν ψόφον, We shall immediately know, if 
i make a noise, 
ap μηδὲ ταῦτα οἶδα, καὶ τῶν ἀνδραπόδων φαυλότερος ἂν εἴην, a I 
not know even these things, then I am perhaps more vile than the 
slaves. 


Εἴ i τις ἔροιτό με, τί νομίζω μεγιστον εἶναι τῶν Εὐαγόρᾳ πεπραγμένων, 
εἰς πολλὴν ἀπορίαν ἂν κατασταίην, Should any one ask me, w 


of the deeds of Evagéras I consider greatest, I should find my- 
self in great perplexity. 


2. When the condition and consequence refer to time past, 
the secondary tenses of the indicative are used both in the pro- 
tasis and in the apodosis. The apodosis is accompanied by the 
adverb ἄν, except when the consequence admits of no doubt 
whatever. E. g. 

Οὗτοι εἰ ἦσαν ἄνδρες οἱ, οὐκ ἄν ποτε ταῦτα ἔπασχον, Jj had 

been οἷος psig ict never have suffered ἊΣ thin, te 


Nai pa ‘hia ἠσχυνόμην μέντοι, εἰ ὑπὸ πολεμίου ye ὄντος ἐξηπατήθην, 
Yes, by Zeus, I should be ashamed indeed, ot γεγο, που γὼ 


one who was my avowed enemy. 


3. Not unfrequently the protasis is lost sight of; in which 
case, the optative with or without ἄν has the appearance of a 
weak present or future indicative, or of a mild imperative ; the 
subjunctive in this case always has the force of a weak fu- 
sure indicative. The simple negative particle is od. But, m 





§ 215.] - CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 97} 


the Attic dialect, the subjunctive can have the force of the fu- 
ture only when it comes after od μή. ΕἸ. g. 


Od yap ἂν ἥψατ᾽ αὐτῶν, For he could not have touched them. 

Οὐκ ἂν μεθείμην τοῦ θρόνου, I will not give up the throne. 

Ἡδέως ἂν οὖν αὐτῶν πυθοίμην, Fain would I ask them. 

Λέγοις ἄν, You may speak; milder than λέγε, speak thou. — 

Οὔτε γίγνεται οὔτε γέγονεν οὐδὲ οὖν μὴ γένηται, It és not, it has not 
been, τὲ will never be. 


4, When both the protasis and the apodosis are in the opta- 
tive, the sentences depending upon them are put in the optative 
or indicative ; as, 

Ei δὲ πάνυ σπουδάζοι φαγεῖν, εἴποιμ᾽ ἂν ὅτι παρὰ ταῖς γυναιξίν ἐστιν, 

ἕως παρατείναιμι τοῦτον, And Ν he was very eager to eat, I would 


tell him he was in the women’s apartment, until I worried this fel- Ὁ 


lew to death. 


5. Sometimes the infinitive or participle with ἄν is used 
_ where one might expect a finite mood ; as, 


- Εἰ ἐθέλεις ἐλθεῖν, οἴομαι ἄν σε πιστευθῆναι. If you would go, I think 
you would be believed. 
Τὰ δικαίως ἂν ῥηθέντα κατὰ τῆς πόλεως, Those things which might 
justly be said against the state. 


Note 1. Sometimes the optative is used in the apodosis instead of , 
the indicative, especially in the Epic writers, contrary to the second’ 
rule ; as Kal νύ κεν ἔνθ᾽ ἀπόλοιτο ἄναξ ἀνδρῶν Αἰνείας, εἰ μὴ ἄρ᾽ ὀξὺ 
νόησε Διὸς θυγάτηρ Αφροδῖτη, And now Ζηοαδ, king of men, had per- 
ished, had not Aphrodite, daughter of Zeus, quickly perceived. 


Nore 2. Jn the Attic dialect the future indicative in the apodosis 
is very seldom accompanied by the adverb ἄν. The present and per- 
fect indicative, in the apodosis, were most probably never accompa- 
nied by ἄν. 


Nore 3. The secondary tenses of the indicative are sometimes used 
in the apodosis even when the protasis is in one of the primary tenses 
of the indicative, or in the optative; as Ei οὕτω ταῦτα ἔχει, πῶς ἂν 
πολλοὶ ἐπεθύμουν τυραννεῖν ; If these things are so, how is it that man 
desire to be tyrants.2 Ἐγὼ μὲν ἄν, εἰ ἔχοιμι, ὡς τάχιστα ὅπλα ἐποιού- 
μην, For my part, if I could, I would, as quickly as possible, make arms 
Sor myself. 3 


Nore 4. In the Epic dialect, the subjunctive, with or without κέ or 
κέν is often used in the apodosis instead of the future indicative; as 
Ei δέ κε μὴ δώωσι, ἐγὼ δέ κεν αὐτὸς ἕλωμαι, But if they shal not give 
it, I will take it myself. d 


“wer 


Nore 5. “Ay is often repeated in the apodosis; as Obs οὐκ ἂν et- — 


λεσθ᾽ οὐδ᾽ ἂν οἰνόπτας προτοῦ, Whom formerly you would not have 
appointed even inspectors of wine . | 


272 SYNTAX. [§ 216 


Nore 6. (a) After certain words, ei or ἐάν has the force of an in- 
terrogative word, whether, whether....or not; as Ἐπυνθάνετο εἰ σωθεῖεν 
πάντες, He asked whether all were safe. 

So Σκοπεῖν or Σκέψασθαι ei, To see whether. Tov νοῦν προσέχει» 
ei, To see whether. Οὐ δῆλον εἰ, It is not known whether. 

(Ὁ) Sometimes εἰ has the force of ὅτι, that, because of ; as Αἰσχύ- 
νεσθαι εἰ, To be ashamed of. Αγαπᾶν εἰ, To be contented that. Θαυ- 
patew ei, ΤῸ wonder that. 

(c) Not unfrequently εἰ has the foree of a relative adverb of time 
(ὅτε, ὁπότε) ; in which case it is followed by the optatzve when it de- 
pends on a secondary tense ; as Οὐκ ἦν λαβεῖν, εἰ μὴ θηρῷεν, It was not 
possible to take, unless they hunted. "Ωικτειρον ei ἁλώσοιντο, They 
pitied them, if they should be taken. 

(d) Ei res is often equivalent to the relative ὅστις, whoever, what- 
ever, such as. 


Note 7, “Ay is sometimes found without a verb, when the verb 


can be easily supplied from the context ; as Φοβούμενος ὥσπερ ἂν εἰ 
παῖς, Fearing like a child; as a child would fear. 


Expression of a Wish. 


§ 216. 1. When the wish refers to present time, the pres- 
ent optative with or without εἰ, ei yap, εἴθε, as, (negatively εἰ 
μή; εἰ yap py, εἴθε μή, ὡς μή, or simply μή.) O that, would 
that, is used; as, 

Ei yap ἐγὼν Διὸς παῖς αἰγιόχοιο εἴην ' O that I were the son of egis- 
bearing ! 

2. If the wish refers to past time, the secondary tenses of the 
indicative are used after the above-mentioned particles; as, 

Εἴθ᾽ εἶχες, ὦ τεκοῦσα, βελτίους φρένας ! Would that thou, O mother, 

hadst a better understanding ! 

Εἴθε σ᾽ ὑπ᾽ Wig ἤναρε Saipwv! O that fate had slain thee under 

lion! 

3. If the wish refers to future time, the aorist optative is 
used with or without the above-mentioned particles ; as, 

Ei yap γένοιτο! May it come to pass! 

‘Qs ἀπόλοιτο! Thus may he perish ! 


4. The sentences depending upon the expression of a wish 
are put in the optative, subjunctive, or indicative, as the sense 
may require ; as, 

Tevoipav ἀετὸς ὑψιπέτᾶς ὡς ἂν ποταθείην, May I become a soaring 

eagle that I may fly. - | 

Σοὶ δὲ θεοὶ τόσα δοῖεν ὅσα φρεσὶ σῆσι μενοινᾷς, And may the gods © 

give thee as many things as thou desirest in thy heart. 








§ 217.] RELATIVE SENTENCES. 273 


5. The infinitive preceded by ὥφελον, ὦ φειλον, from ὀφεὶ- 
λω, with or without the above-mentioned particles, is often used 
in the expression of a wish. The time to which the wish in 
this case refers is determined by the tense of the infinitive. 
E. g. 

“Odere μηδεὶς ἄλλος Ἀριστογείτονι χαίρειν ! Would that no other man 

delighted in Aristogiton ! 

Ολέσθαι δ᾽ ὥφελον ! And would that I had peris ved ! 


Nore 1. The subjunctive is very seldom used after εἴθε ; (Eurip. 
Sup. 1029; Hel. 270) Eide φανῶσι. Eide λάβω. 


Nore 2. The imperfect indicative is often used when the wish τὸ 
fers to present time; it is however milder than the present optative ; 


»” 


thus, εἴθ᾽ εἶχες is weaker than εἴθ᾽ ἔχοις. 


Nore 3. In later Greek, ὥφελον or ὄφελον has the force of the 
particle εἴθε ; as (N. T. Cor. 2, 11,.1). τ 


Norte 4. Sometimes the expression of a wish assumes the form of 
a question beginning with πῶς dy with the optative ; as Πῶς ἂν ὀλοί- 
yav; How might I perish? May I perish! 


RELATIVE SENTENCES. 


§ 247. 1. When the relative sentence is assumed as a 
certainty, the relative is connected with the indicative. (δ 212, 1.) 
The negative particle is οὐ, placed after the relative word. E. g. 

Αὐτός εἶμι dv ζητεῖς, I am the very man you inquire for. ; 

"Hoa πρὸς τῇ κώμῃ ἔνθα Χειρίσοφος ηὐλίζετο, They were near the 
village where Chirisophus was encamped. 

These rules apply to relative pronouns, pronominal adjectives, and ad- 
verbs. Also to ἄχρι, μέχρι, ἔστε, ἔνθα, ἔνθεν, ἐπεί, ἐπειδῆ, (δῷ 75; 76.) 

2. When the relative sentence is assumed as a probability 
or possibility, the relative is connected with the subjunctive 
(generally with dv), or optative (generally without ἄν), as the 
leading sentence may require (ἢ 212, 2. 3). The negative par- 
ticle is μή, placed after the relative word. E. g. 


Za οὐ ταῦτα καλεῖς, ἃ ἂν ψυχὴν ἔχῃ; Do you not call animals those 
things which have life. 

πότερ᾽ ἂν ἀποκρίνηται τὸ μειράκιον, ἐξελεγχθήσεται, Whatever 
answer the young man may give, he will be confuted. 

Ἔσφαττον ὧν κρατεῖν δύναιντο, They butchered those whom they 
could get hold of. : 

Ἐδίδοσαν λαμβάνειν 6 τι βούλοιτο, They allowed him to.take whatever 
he wished ΣῊΝ 

Εἷλκον τὰς νευρὰς ὁπότε τοξεύοιεν, They pulled the strings when 
they shot. 

54a 


274 SYNTAX. [3 218. 


—— ἐκέλευον ὅπου τὸν δρόμον πεποιηκὼς εἴη, They requested 


im to lead them to the place where he had prepared the race-~ 


ground, 


3. Ὥστε, so that, so as, denotes a consequence or effect, 
and is followed by the indicative, optative, infinitive, and some- 
times by the imperative. Ὥστε ἄν is used with the optative, 
infinitive, or with the secondary-tenses of the indicative. E. g. 
Ta ἐν τῷ παραδείσῳ θηρία ἀνηλώκει Gore ὁ Ἀστυάγης οὐκέτ᾽ εἶχεν 
αὐτῷ συλλέγειν ϑηρία, He destroyed the wild beasts in the park, so 

that Astyages could no longer collect wild beasts for him. 


4. Ed’ 6, or Ed’ ᾧτε, on this condition, on condition that, 
for the purpose of, is followed by the infinitive, and sometimes 
by the future indicative. 

Note 1. When the past is represented as present, the subjunctive 
or indicative takes the place of the optative ; as (Xen. An. 4, 7, 20 
24) ὄψονται, σκηνήσουσι, for ὄψοιντο, σκηνήσοιεν. 

On the other hand, when the present is represented as past, the op- 
tative takes the place of the subjunctive. 

Nore 2. The indicative with the relative sometimes denotes pur- 
pose, end, motive ; as Πρεσβείαν δὲ πέμπειν ἥτις ταῦτ᾽ ἐρεῖ, And to send 
ambassadors who shall say these things ; in order to say. 

Note 3. The relative may take the indicative even when its ante- 
cedent is logically indefinite ; in which case the negative particle 1s 
μή 3 as Avnp δίκαιός ἐστιν οὐχ 6 μὴ ἀδικῶν, ἀλλ᾽ ὅστις ἀδικεῖν δυνάμε- 
vos μὴ βούλεται, A just man 15 not he who does no wrong, but he who 
being able to do wrong is not willing. 

Note 4. ‘Qs dv, Ὥσπερ ἄν, As if, are followed by the optative. 

The Epic Poets may use ὡς, as, with the subjunctive, and ὧ σ εἶ, as 
if, with the suhjunctive or optative in comparisons. 


EXHORTATION S, COMMANDS, PROHIBITIONS. 


§ 218. 1. The imperative is used to express a command, 
an exhortation, or entreaty; as φεῦγε, begone! φευγόντων, let 
them depart. 


2. The first person of the subjunctive, and the second or 
third of the optative, may be used in exhortations. The first 
person of the subjunctive may be preceded by ἄγε, φέρε, come, 
¢a, let ; and the second person of the optative may be accom- 
apes: by ἄν. The negative particle in this case is μή, not. 

4. 8. 

Φέρ᾽ ἴδω, Let me see. Φέρε ἀκούσω, Let me hear. 

Τὸν Μενέλεων μιμώμεθα, us imitate Menecaus. Μὴ ἴωμεν, Let 

us not go. 


“ 








.ο 
§ 219.] INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 275 


Κλαίοιτε τὸν ἱμερόεντα Biwva, Weep ye for the lovely Bion. Aéyous 
ἄν, You may speak ; softer than Λέγε, Speak thou. 

Ἕλθωμεν δ᾽ ἀνὰ ἄστυ, βοὴ δ᾽ ὥκιστα γένοιτο, And let us go to the 
city, and let a loud cry be set up very quickly. 


3. In prohibitions, the present imperative, or the aorist sub- 
junctive, is used after μή ; as, 

Μὴ λέγε, Say not. Μὴ λεγέτω. Let him not say. 

Μὴ AcEns, Say not. Μὴ λέξη, Let him not say. 


Nore 1. Sometimes py 1s followed by the aorist imperative, par- 
ticularly by the third person; as Μὴ πρίω, Μηδεὶς ἰδέτω. 


Note 2. When the speaker is in great haste, the second person of 
the imperative may be used for the third; as Χώρει δεῦρο πᾶς ὑπη- 
ρέτης; τόξευε πᾶς tis, Come hither, every servant, shoot, every one of 
you ! 

Nore 3. The imperative is sometimes found in dependent sen- 
tences, especially in connection with a relative pronoun or adverb after 
οἶσθα; knowest thou? where one might expect δεῖ with the infini- 
tive ; as, 

Οἶσθ᾽ οὖν ὃ Spacov; Knowest thou what thou must do? Oicé’ ὡς 

ποίησον; Dost thou know how thou must act ? 

Οἶσθα νῦν & μοι γενέσθω ; Dost thou know what I now desire to be 

done for me? 


Note 4. The imperative φέρε is sometimes found with the sec- 
ond person of the subjunctive ; as (Soph. P. 300) Φέρε μάθῃς, essen- 
tially the same as μάθε. ; 

Nore 5. In the New Testament, ἄφες is used for dye or φέρε 
with the subjunctive ; as "Ades ἐκβάλω. “Ades ἴδωμεν. 


INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 


§ 219. 1. When a definite answer is expected, the indic- 
ative is used in interrogative sentences. ‘The negative particle 
in this case is οὔ, not. Εἰ. g. 

Ti ποιεῖς ; What art thou doing? 

Οἶδε τί βούλεται, He knows what it wants. *Hv πύθησθ᾽ ὅστις εἰμί, 

When you have learned who I am. 
Οἴει γάρ σοι μαχεῖσθαι, ὦ Κῦρε, τὸν ἀδελφόν ; Dost thou really think, 
O Cyrus, that thy brother will fight. 


2. When no definite answer is expected, the subjunctive 
(generally without ἄν) or the optative (with or without dy) is 
used ; as, 

Πῶς φῶ ἐπίστασθαι; How can I say that I know? 

Timor’ ἂν οὖν λέγωμεν; What shall we then say? 


276 SYNTAX, [§ 219. 


Tis ἂν φράσειε;. Who could tell? 
Καὶ ri ῥέξαιμι; And what could I do? 
Tut τις φύγοι ; or Ποῖ τις ἂν φύγοι; Whither should one flee? 


3. When a person asks another what he is to do, the first per- 
son of the subjunctive, with or without βούλει or θέλεις.- 15 used. 
The negative particle here is μή. E.g. . 

Βούλει οὖν δύο εἴδη θῶμεν πειθοῦς; Wilt thou that we now suppose 

two kinds of persuasion ? 

εἴπω τι; Shall I say any thing? 

Εγὼ σιωπῶ; Am I to keep silence? 


4. In negative interrogations, οὐ is used when yes is expect-. 


ed; and μή, when no is expected or desired» Further, οὐ with 
the future indicative forms an emphatic imperative. E. g. 


Ov mapapeveis; Wall you not wait? I wish you would wait. 

Μὴ ἀρχιτέκτων βούλει γενέσθαι; Οὐκ οὖν ἔγωγε, Do you wish to be- 
come an architect? Not I. 

Μή πῃ δοκοῦμέν σοι οὐκ ἀναγκαῖα ἕκαστα διεληλυθέναι ; Do you sup- 
pose that we have not gone through every thing necessary? No, 1 
do not suppose any such thing. . 


5. Interrogative sentences may be preceded by the interrog- 
ative particles 9, dpa or ἄρά ye, οὐκοῦν (οὐκ οὖν), μῶν (μὴ οὖν), 
an? -ne? num?  Αἶβο ὃν the phrase ἄλλο re or ἄλλο τι 
q. KE. g. 

Ἦ οὗτοι πολέμιοί εἶσιν; Are they enemies 7 

Οὐκοῦν καὶ τῷ γείτονι βούλει σὺ ἀρέσκειν; Do you not wish to please 

your neighbour also? 1 know you do. 

Ti χρῆμα μαστεύουσα ; μῶν ἐλεύθερον αἰῶνα θέσθαι ; Desiring what? 

to obtain your liberty ? 

So Ei μὲν yap reas ταῦτα ἀληθῆ ὄντα, ἄλλο τι ἢ ἡμῶν 6 Bios ava- 
τετραμμένος ἂν ein; If these things were true, would not then our life 
be in confusion ? - 

Notre 1. The second and third persons of the subjunctive, and the 
second of the optative, are not much used in interrogations. Further, 
when the third person of the subjunctive is used after interrogatives, it 
almost always stands for the first ; as Ποῖ ris οὖν φύγῃ ; Ποῖ τις ἔλθῃ ; 

Nore 2. When οὐ μή stands before the future indicative or the 
aorist subjunctive, in an interrogative sentence, ov is interrogative, and 


μή modifies the verb immediately following ; as Ov μὴ λαλήσεις, ἀλλ᾽ ~ 


ἀκολουθήσεις ἐμοί; Won't you stop your nonsense and follow me? 
Prate not, but follow me. 

Note 3. The sentences depending upon the optative in interroga- 
tions are put in the optative or indicative, according to ᾧ 215, 4; as 
Πῶς δ᾽ ἂν νῆες ὅποι Sei ἀφίκοιντο; How could ships safely arrive at the 
place of their destination? 


Te εν δ. ... 


ee 


δῷ 220, 221.] INFINITIVE. ᾿ 277 


Note 4 When εἰ means whether, that 1s, when it is an interroga- 
tive particle, it may be followed by the subjunctive; as Οὐκ oid’ εἰ 
Χρυσάντᾳ τούτῳ δῶ, I do not know whether I shall give to this Chry- 
santas ~ 


COMPARATIVE SENTENCES (7, than). 


§ 220. 1. Ἤ, than, after a comparative adjective or ad- 
verb ney. stand before any tense or mood ; as, . 

Θᾶττον ἢ ἢ ὥς τις ἂν ᾧ ᾧετο, Sooner than one coal have thought. 

Newrepoi εἰσι ἢ ὥστε εἰδέναι, They are younger than to ) know ; too 
young to know. 

“Hotov οὐδὲν οὐδὲ μουσικώτερον ἢ δύνασθαι λοιδορούμενον φέρειν, 
Nothing is pleasanter or more musical than to be able to bear being 
ridiculed ; to bear ridicule. 


After πρίν, prius, before, before that, ἤ is omitted; mol ἤ, 
priusquam, however, is sometimes found before the infinitive, 
or the enone tenses of the indicative. 


2.\ 11 ate, before, before that, is used with the subjunctive, 
optative, or with the secondary tenses of the indicative. With 
the subjunctive and optative it refers to future time; with the 
secondary tenses of the indicative, to time past. Further, with 
the subjunctive, it is regularly followed by ἄν. 

Most commonly πρίν is preceded by πρότερον, πρόσθεν, 
or by another πρίν, in the same sentence. E. σ. 

οὐ ven glen παύσομαι πρὶν ἂν φράσῃς μοι, I will not cease before you hows 

to 

ὠς οὐχόμενος αὐτοῖς μὴ παύσασθαι πρὶν αὐτοὺς κατάγοι, Promising to 

them not to cease a7 he brought them back. 

Ov πρόσθεν ἐπαύσαντο πολεμοῦντες πρὶν ἐποίησαν, They did not cease 

from waging war, until they made. 


Nore. In the Epic dialect, the future indicative is sometimes used 
for the subjunctive with πρίν; as (11. 18, 283) Πρὶν ἔδονται. (Il. 1, 
29) Πρὶν ἔπεισιν, with the totes of the future. 


INFINITIVE. 


§ 221. The infinitive with or without the neu- 
_ter article always has the force of a neuter verbal 
noun. 

The subject“of the infinitive, if expressed, is put 
in the accusative ; as, 


Aci ἐμὲ λέγειν, It is necessary that I should speak. 


278 ; SYNTAX. [§ 222. 


Τὸ ἁμαρτάνειν ἀνθρώπους ὄντας οὐδὲν, οἶμαι, θαυμαστόν, That men, 
as such, should err, is I think nothing strange. 


222. 1. In certain connections, the infini- 
tive, with or without the article, has the force of the 
subject-nominative (§ 153, a); as, 


Aci κράτιστόν ἐστι τἀληθῆ λέγειν, It is always best to speak the truth. 
Δρᾶν ταῦτα χρή, One must do these things. 


Sa When the infinitive has the force of the gen- 
ttive or dative, it is generally preceded by the arti- 
cle. When it has the force of the accusative, it 
takes the article chiefly when it depends on a prep- 
osition. Εἰ. g. 


Κρεῖττόν ἐστι τὸ σωφρονεῖν τοῦ πολυπραγμονεῖν, To be wise is better 
than to meddle with other men’s affairs. 

Ὥρα βαδίζειν, It is time to go ; genitive. 

Ἀνάγκη σε πάντα ἐπίστασθαι, You must of necessity know all things; 
genitive. 

Πρὸς τὸ πρᾶγμα φιλονεικοῦντα λέγειν τοῦ καταφανὲς γενέσθαι, To 
argue Reig ae the thing Pad become pres age (§ 194. 1.) 

Σεμνυνόμεθα ἐπὶ τῷ Bedtiov γεγονέναι τῶν ἄλλων, We pride ourselves 
upon being of nobler descent than other people. 

Διὰ τὸ πολλοὺς ἔχειν ὑπηρέτας, Because he had many servants. 


3. After certain verbs and expressions, the infin- 
itive has the force of the accusative of the imme- 
diate or remote object ; as, 


Ἐθέλω μαθεῖν, I wish to learn. 

Μανθάνουσι τοξεύειν, They learn to shoot with bow and arrows. 
Αδικεῖν δυνάμενος, Being able to do wrong. 

Ἐδεῖτο αὐτῶν βοηθεῖν ἐμοί, He prayed them to aid me. 

Παραινῶ σοι σιωπᾶν, I advise thee to be silent. . 
Παρήγγειλεν ἡμῖν καθεύδειν, He commanded us to sleep. 
Διδάσκουσιν αὐτοὺς πείθεσθαι, They teach them to obey. 


(a) When a verb, in addition to the infinitive, is followed by a noun 
denoting a person, a participle referring to that noun is commonly put 
in the accusative; as, 

Ἐγὼ δὲ ὑμῶν δέομαι καταψηφίσασθαι Θεομνήστου, ἐνθυμουμένους ὅτι, 
And I beseech you to condemn Theomnestus, when you consider 
that. 3 

Eevia ἥκειν παρήγγειλε χαβόντα τοὺς ἄνδρας, He requested Xenias to 
take the men come. ἢ 


§ 222.] : INFINITIVE. 279 


This construction arises from the fact that, in connection with the 
infinitive, any verb may take the accusative. Thus (1566. Frag. 5) 
Δέομαι οὖν ὑμᾶς συγγνώμην ἔχειν. (Absch. Ch. 16) Ὦ Zed, δός pe 
τίσασθαι μόρον πατρός. ' 


) When a verb would be followed by the accusative of the refler- 
vé pronoun and the infinitive, the reflexive pronoun is omitted, except 
in case of emphasis or antithesis ; as, 

Οἶμαι εὑρηκέναι, sc. ἐμαυτόν, I think I have found. Οἷμαί. με ακη- 
σέναν, I think I have heard. i as Paes 
"Edn ἔσεσθαι, He said he should be. 
Κροῖσος ἐνόμισε ἑωῦτὸν εἶναι ἀνθρώπων ἁπάντων ὀλβιώτατον, Cresus 
thought that he himself was the happiest of all men. 
Ἐβούλετο ἑαυτὸν φιλεῖσθαι, He wished that he alone should be be- 
* loved. ὁ 


(c) The nominative of the .personal pronoun, expressed or under- 
stood, may, in connection with the infinitive, take the place of the ac- 
cusative of the reflexive; which nominative, grammatically consider- 
ed, is in apposition with the subject of the verb on which the infinitive 
depends ; as, ‘ 

Νομίζεις ἡμᾶς μὲν ἀνέξεσθαί σου, αὐτὸς δὲ τυπτήσειν; Dost thou think 
that we shall tolerate thee, and that thou canst strike? here αὐτός 
stands for σαυτόν. 

Evyeo δ᾽ Απόλλωνι ῥέξειν ἑκατόμβην οἴκαδε νοστήσας, And vow to 
Apollo to offer him a hecatomb when thou returnest home ; sc. σύ, 
for σαυτόν. 


4. After verbs signifying to say, promise, think, 
and their synonymes, the infinitive is put in the 
tense employed by the person whose words or 
thoughts are indirectly quoted ; as, 


"Edacav ἀποδώσειν, They said they would give back; they said 
“ Ἀποδώσομεν.᾽ 

Εἶναι θεοὺς ἐνόμιζεν, He believed that there are gods ; he said to him- 
self ““ Εἰσὶ θεοί." 


(a) The present infinitive may stand also for the imperfect ; as Τὸ; 
Κῦρον ἔφασαν λέγειν, They said that Cyrus said; they said ‘* Ὃ Κῦρος 
ἔλεγεν.᾽᾽ Ἰᾶσθαι αὐτὸς τὸ τραῦμά φησι, He says that he himself cured 
the wound ; he said ““Ἰώμην ἐγὼ τὸ τραῦμα. 


(b) Sometimes the aorist or present infinitive takes the place of the 
future ; as Ὑποσχόμενος μὴ παύσασθαι, Promising that he would not 
cease; he said ““ Ov παύσομαι." 


(c) When the active takes the accusative and infinitive, the passive 
retains the infinitive ; as Λέγουσι or Ομολογοῦσι τὸν Κῦρον γενέσθαι ; 
in the passive Ὃ Κῦρος λέγεται or Ομολογεῖται γενέσθαι. 


280 SYNTAX. [§ 222. 


5. The infinitive is often put after a sentence to 
denote a cause or motive; as, 


Tlapéxovow ἑαυτοὺς τοῖς ἄρχουσι χρῆσθαι, They offer themselves to 
the magistrates to employ. 


| re The infinitive is put after certain adjectives, 
verbs, pronouns, substantives, and expressions, for 
the sake of limiting or more fully defining their 


meaning ; as, 


Πολεμεῖν ἱκανός, Capable of fighting. 

Πίνεσθαι ἥδιστος, Very pleasant to drink. 

Πάσχειν ἀλγεινός, Painful to endure. 

Θαῦμα ἰδέσθαι, A wonder to behold. 

Οὐχ οἷός τ᾽ εἴμ᾽ ἀποσοβῆσαι τὸν γέλων, I am not able to drive away 

my laughter. : 

Pronouns of this class are τοῖος, τοιόσδε, τοιοῦτος, τηλίκος, οἷος, οἷός 

τε, capable ; ποῖος, how capable? what sort of ? ὅσον, ὅσα, enough, suf- 


7. Two or even three infinitives may stand to- 
gether ; as, 
© “Edn ἐθέλειν πορεύεσθαι, He said he was willing to go. 

Αθηναίους πάντας μετὰ τοῦ θείου νομίζεις δυνήσεσθαι ποιῆσαι πείθε- 
σθαί σοι; Do you think that you will be able to make all the Athe- 
nians, together with your uncle, follow your advice? _ 

“Hy 68: μὲν οὔ φησι χρῆναι τοὺς νέους ἀσκεῖν, Which, this man says, 
young men ought not to exercise. 

- When two infinitives are in connection with an impersonal verb, one 
of them has the force of the subject-accusative ; as Δοκεῖ μοι πρέπειν 
ἐντεῦθεν ποιήσασθαι τὴν ἀρχήν, It seems to me proper to begin here ; 
where ποιήσασθαι is the subject of πρέπειν. 


Nore 1. (a) The infinitive is sometimes omitted, when it can be 
readily supplied from the context; as (Arist. Pl. 1100-2) Ei ἐμοὶ, 
ov τὴν θύραν ἔκοπτες οὑτωσὶ σφόδρα ; EPM. Ma Av, ἀλλ᾽ ἔμελλον, Tell 
me, was it you that knocked at the door so furiously? Herm. No, by 
Zeus, but I was going to knock. ; ᾿ 

In certain connections, ἰέναι, to go, is omitted; as (Jd. Ran. 
1279) Ἐγὼ μὲν οὖν és τὸ βαλανεῖον βούλομαι, Now for my part, I wish 
to go to the bath. 

(b) On the other hand, the verb upon which the infinitive depends 
is, in certain connections, omitted; as "A δειλοί! πόσ᾽ ἴμεν; Ah! 
wretches ! whither do ye intend to go? 


Nore 2. After verbs denoting volition (as ἐθέλων, the future and 
perfect infinitive were perhaps never used by classical writers. 





ᾧ 223.] INFINITIVE. 281 


223. 1. The infinitive is often put after 4s, ὥστε (some- 
times ὥστ᾽ ἄν), so that, so as, that, ἐφ᾽ 6, ἐφ᾽ dre, on this con- 
dition, on condition that, for the purpose of ; as, 

Κύπρις ἤθελ᾽ ὥστε γίγνεσθαι τάδε, Cypris wished that these things 
should happen. 
Ἔφασαν ἀποδώσειν ἐφ᾽ ᾧ μὴ καίειν τὰς χώρας, They said they would 
delever on condition that they should not burn the villages, 


2. The infinitive with the relatives ὡς, ὅσον, 6 re, is often 
used in parenthetical phrases; és however may be omitted; as, 

‘Qs ἔπος εἰπεῖν, So to speak. Οὐ πολλῷ λόγῳ εἰπεῖν, Not to use 

many words, 

Ὡς ἐν πλέονι λόγῳ δηλῶσαι, To explain more fully. 

Ὅσον γ᾽ eu εἰδέναι, At least as far as my knowledge extends. - 

Ὅ τι κἄμ᾽ εἰδέναι, For aught I know. 

Δοκεῖν ἐμοί, As it appears to me. 

Ολίγου δεῖν, almost, nearly. In phrases like this, δεῖν is sometimes 


omitted. 


3. The infinitive is often put after πρίν (Epic πάρος), πρὶν ἢ, 
πρότερον 7}, or πρόσθεν 7, prius, priusquam, before, before that, 
and sometimes after ὕστερον ἤ, postquam, after, after that; as, 

Διέβησαν πρὶν τοὺς ἄλλους ἀποκρίνασθαι, They passed over before the 

others answered, 
~ Ὕστερον ἢ αὐτοὺς οἰκίσαι, After they settled. 


4. In narration, the infinitive often takes the place of the in- 
dicative ; as, 
** Saxa δὲ,᾽" φάναι τὸν Αστυάγην, “ οὐδὲν δίδως ;” ‘* But,”’ said As- 
tyages, ‘‘ will you not give Sacas something ?”’ 
5. The infinitive often takes the place of the imperative ; as 


Μήποτε σὺ γυναικὶ ἤπιος εἶναι, Thou must never be indulgent to 
thy wife. : 


6. The infinitive is used also in exhortations, commands, 

proclamations ; as, 

Axovere λεῴ! τοὺς émirds vivpert ἀνελομένους Oma ἀπιέναι πά- 
λιν οἴκαδε, Hear ye people! the hoplite must for the present take up 
their shields and go back home. 

7. Sometimes the infinitive expresses a wish; as Zed πάτερ, ἢ 

Αἴαντα λαχεῖν ἢ Τύδέος υἱόν, Father Zeus, grant that the lot may 
fall upon Ajax or upon the son of Tydeus. 


8, The infinitive with or without ré is sometimes used in 
exclamations of surprise or indignation; as Τὸ δὲ μὴ κυνέην 


282 ‘ SYNTAX. [δὴ 224, 225. 


οἴκοθεν ἐλθεῖν ἐμὲ τὸν κακοδαίμον᾽ ἔχοντα, But that I, a wretch, 
should have come from home without a helmet — it is too bad. 


9. The infinitive εἶναι, to be, is sometimes apparently super- 
fluous, particularly in connection with ἑκών, willing, and gen- 
erally in negative sentences ; as “Exay re εἶναι οὐδ᾽ ἂν μουνομαχέ- 
oyu, And if I had my choice, I should not fight even against a 
single man. 


ἢ 224. When the copula of a sentence is an 
infinitive, the noun in the predicate agrees in case 
with the noun to which it refers; as, 


Exeivos εἶναί φησι Διόνῦσος beds, He says he is the god Dionysus. 
Κύρου ἐδέοντο προθυμοτάτου γενέσθαι, They besought Cyrus to be 
very eager. 
Πολλοὶ τῶν προσποιησαμένων εἶναι σοφιστῶν, Many of those who 
pretended to be sophists. 
Eq’ ἡμῖν ἔσται τὸ ἐπιεικέσι καὶ φαύλοις εἶναι, It will depend upon 
ourselves to be respectable or worthless. 
Βούλεσθε γενέσθαι αὐτὸν σοφόν; Do you wish him to become wise? 
Nore. Sometimes the noun in the predicate is put in the accusa- 
tive, although the noun it refers to is in the genitive or dative; as Aéy- 
ναίων ἐδεήθησάν σφισι βοηθοὺς γενέσθαι, They prayed the Athenians to 
become their helpers. 
So Ὑπὸ τῶν δεομένων pov προστάτην γενέσθαι, By those who desired 


me to become their protector, Ἐνόμιζον αὐτοῖς προσήκειν ἀγαθοὺς εἶναι. 
They thought that it became them to be good. 


PARTICIPLE. 


7§ 225. 1. The participle preceded by the article is equiv- 
alent to ἐκεῖνος és, he who, and the finite verb; as Ὁ λέγων, He 
who says. ‘H λέξουσα, She who will say. Td λεχθέν, That 
which was said. 

But when the article stands before the substantive with which the 
participle agrees, the participle retains its participial signification; as 
Ἀκούσας δὲ 6 Κλέαρχος ταῦτα ἤρετο τὸν Ridin And Clearchus, hav- 
ing heard this, asked the messenger. 


2. The participle is very often equivalent to the indicative, 
subjunctive, or optative, with a relative: pronoun or a relative 
adverb of time; as, 

Πόλις ἐστὶν ἐν τῷ Ἐῤξείνῳ Πόντῳ a καλουμένη, There is a 

aty on the Euxine Sea, called 

Γέροντα δὲ αὐτὸν myers: ἡ ὄψις Faron And when he became an 

old man, his eyesight failed him. 


§ 225.] PARTICIPLE. 283 


3. The participle often denotes the manner or means ; as, 

Πυθομένη ἡ Αλκηστις ὅτι μέλλει “Aduntos ἀναιρεῖσθαι δι᾽ αὐτὴν, 
ἐξελθοῦσα ἑαυτὴν παρέδωκεν, Alcestis, hearing that Admetus was 
about to be put to death on her account, came out and surrendered 
herself. 

Λαβὼν δὲ τὴν Γοργόνα κατέκοψεν, And taking Gorgon he cut her up 


ΧΆ. The participle often denotes a cause. When it denotes 
n assumed cause, it is preceded by ὡς, as, as if, supposing 
that ; as, 

Αγανακτησάμενος Ἡρακλῆς ἐπιτίθεται τῷ Axdot@, Hercules being in- 

dignant fell upon Acastus. 

Μετεμέλοντο ἀποδεδωκότες, They regretted that they had restored. 

Τιμώμενοι χαίρουσιν, They delight in beng honored. 

So in the phrases Ti μαθών; For what reason? Ὅ τι μαθών, be- 
cause. Ti παθών; From what motive? What induced or possessed you? 


. The future participle (and sometimes the present) is 
gularly put after verbs of motion to express the purpose of 
he action of those verbs ; as, 


Ἦλθε πρὸς τὸν Αγησίλᾶον ἀσπασόμενος, He came to Agesilaus to 
bid him farewell. Σ 


6. The participle may form the protasis of a conditional 
viause. 

It is used also where the English employs although, not- 
withstanding ; in which case it is commonly preceded by καί, 
nai περς καίτοι, kat ταῦτα, or followed by ὅμως. E. g. 

Tevdpevos δὲ καὶ σὺ γνώσῃ ὅτι ἡδέα ταῦτά ἐστιν, If you taste, you 

also will see that these things are sweet. 

Οὐκ ἂν mpodoinr οὐδέ περ πράσσων κακῶς, I will not betray, though 

LI am unfortunate, 


7. In connection with certain verbs, adjectives, and phrases, 
the participle is apparently equivalent to the object of these 
words. And when it refers to the subject of the sentence, it 
is put in the nominative. Εἰ. g. 


Μέμνημαι σφὼ ἐπαγγελλομένω, I remember your professing. Μέμνη- 
pat ἀκούσας, I remember having heard. a 

Τνοὺς βαπτιζόμενον τὸ μειράκιον, Perceiving that the striping was 
overwhelmed. Ἐπειδὰν γνῶσιν ἀπιστούμενοι, When they perceive 
that they are distrusted. . 

TS δύνασθαι διψῶντα ἀνέχεσθαι, To be able to endure thirst. 

Παῦσαι φλυᾶρῶν, Stop talking nonsense. 

Ἡμεῖς ἀδύνατοι ὁρῶμεν ὄντες, We see that we are unable, 

Δῆλος ἦν ἀνιώμενος, It was evident that he was grieved 


ὅδε. | SYNTAX, [§ 225. 


‘8. The participle after the following auxiliary verbs contains 
the leading idea of the expression : 


By, he went, in Homer ; Βῆ φεύγων ἐπὶ πόντον, He fled to the sea. 

Aaya, to pass time; Διάγουσι μανθάνοντες, They pass their time in 

ng. 

Διατελέω, Διατρίβω, to continue; Διατελοῦσι δικάζοντες, They 
are continually deciding cases. 

Λανθάνω, to escape notice; Λέληθα ἐμαυτὸν σοφὸς ay, I did not 
know that I was wise. 

Οἴχομαι, to be gone; "Quyero φεύγων, He departed precipitately. 
Leaner to happen; Tvyxavopev ἐπιθυμοῦντες, We happen to be 

irous. 

Saivopat, to appear; Διαφέρων ἐφαίνετο, He appeared differing, 
He differed. 

Φθάνω, to anticipate; Φθάνει ἀναβάς, He went up first. ‘The 
phrase Οὐκ ἂν φθάνοις, with a participle, may be rendered You cannot 
be too soon; quackly. 

Add to these the Ionic expressions πολλός εἶμι, πολλὸς ἔγκειμαι; 
παντοῖος γίγνομαι ; also, the periphrastic tenses. 


9. The dative of the participles βουλόμενος, θέλων, ἡδόμενος, 
προσδεχόμενος, ἔλπόμενος, and of the adjective ἄκων, after εἶναι 
and after verbs signifying to come, has the force of the cor- 
responding verbal noun, willingness, wish, expectation, hope, 
unwillingness ; as, 

Oi Κροτωνιᾶται εἶπον οὐκ ἄν σφισι βουλομένοις εἶναι, The Crotoni- 

τ΄ ans said that it would not be in accordance with their wishes. 


Nore 1. The participle is sometimes preceded by αὐτίκα, ἐξαίφνης, 
εὐθύς, μεταξύ, Or dua; as Εὐθὺς μὲν μειράκιον ὧν ἐπεθῦμει γενέσθαι 
ἀνήρ, As soon as he was a boy, he wished to become a man. “Apa κατα- 
λαβόντες προσεκέατό σφι, As soon as they had overtaken them, they 
pressed hard upon them, 

So Μεταξὺ παίζων εἰσέρχεται, He came in while he played. Τὸ pe- 
ταξὺ πορευομένους μήτε ἐσθίειν μήτε πίνειν, Neither to eat nor drink 
while marching. 


Nore 2. (a) The participle after σύνοιδα and συγγιγνώσκω, 
followed by the dative of the reflexive pronoun, is put either in the da- 
tive, or in the nominative, the case of the subject of the verb ; as 
τῷ ξυνήδειν οὐδὲν ἐπισταμένῳ, I was conscious to myself that I 
nothing. Πῶς οὖν ἐμαυτῷ τοῦτ᾽ ἐγὼ ξυνείσομαι φεύγοντ᾽ ἀπολύσας 
ἄνδρα; Now how shall I endure the thought that I have let a defendant 
escape ? 

(0) In a few instances the participle, in connection with these verbs, 
is put in the accusative ; as (Xen. CEc. 3, 7) Ἐγώ σοι civoi8a....dnord- 
μενον... βαδίζοντα... «ἀναπείθοντα. 

(c) When the participle after οἶδα refers to the subject of the sen- 
tence, it is put either in the nominative, or in the accusative agreeing 


ee 





ᾧ 226.] PARTICIPLE. * i 285 


with the reflexive pronoun; as Κρείττων ἤδει dv, He knew he was su- 
perior. as ἴσθι, sc. av, Know that thou art safe. “Hider ἑαυτὸν 
ἥττονα ὄντα, He knew himself to be inferior ; He knew that he was in- 
Sertor. . 

Note 3. Ἔχων, having, in certain expressions denoting con- 
tempt, is apparently superfluous; as Ποῖα ὑποδήματα φλυᾶρεῖς ἔχων; 
What shoes art thou talking nonsense about ? 


_ Nore 4. Ἔχων, ἄγων, φέρων, λαβών, having, bringing, tak- 
ing, are in certain connections rendered with, 


J 226. A substantive with a participle is often 
put in the genitive, called absolute, to denote time, 
manner, means, cause, condition ; as, 


Ταῦτ᾽ ἐπράχθη, Κόνωνος στρατηγοῦντος, These things were done 
when Conon was general. 

Τελευτήσαντος Αλυάττεω, ἐξεδέξατο τὴν βασιληΐην Κροῖσος, After 
the death of Alyattes, Ογαδιιβ received the kingdom. 

XO) Frequently ὡς, ὥσπερ, ὥστε, ἅτε, οἷα, that, as if, inasmuch 

_ fas, on the supposition that, stand before the genitive absolute, when it 

᾿ denotes an assumed cause. Often however the accusative is put after 
these particles instead of the genitive. 


‘Os ὧδ᾽ ἐχόντων τῶνδ᾽ ἐπίστασθαί σε χρή, Thou must know that 
these things are so. 

Οἱ Ἕλληνες οὕτως ἠγανάκτησαν, ὥσπερ ὅλης τῆς Ἑλλάδος 'πεπορθη- 
μένης, The Greeks felt very indignant, as if the whole of Greece 
had been devastated. 

Evxero πρὸς τοὺς θεοὺς ἁπλῶς τἀγαθὰ διδόναι, ὡς τοὺς θεοὺς κάλλι- 
στα εἰδότας, He prayed to the gods to give him the good things 
without specifying them, because he believed that the gods knew 
best what was good for him. 

Οὐχ ὕβρει λέγω τάδ᾽, ἀλλ᾽ ἐκεῖνον ὡς παρόντα νῷν, I do not say these 
things out of wantonness, but because I believe that he is near us. 

So Ἦν yap ἀδύνατος, ὥστε σηπομένου τοῦ μηροῦ, For he was feeble, 
inasmuch as lis thigh was ulcerating. , 

(b) When the subject of a sentence is not_expressed, or when it 
begins with ὅτε, the participle alone is put in the genitive absolute. 
But when the subject of a sentence is an infinitive, the participle is | 
put in the accusative absolute. E. g. 


"Yovros πολλῷ, It raining heavily; from "Yeu πολλῷ, It rains 
heavily. 

Σαφῶς δηλωθέντος ὅτι ἐν ταῖς ναυσὶ τῶν ἝἙλλήνων, It being quite 
apparent that in the ships of the Greeks. 

Παρεὸν αὐτῷ βασιλέα γενέσθαι, ἄλλῳ περιέθηκε τὸ κράτος, It being 
wn his power to become a king, he conferred this dignity upon 
another person. 

Ὡς ἐξὸν ἤδη ποιεῖν αὐτοῖς 6 τι ἂν βούλοιντο, Inasmuch as it now 
was permitted to them to do whatever they pleased. 


‘ 


986 SYNTAX. [S$ 227 - 229. 


Note 1. When the subject of a sentence begins with ὅτι, the 
participle absolute may be put in the genitive plural, if the subject 
of the sentence beginning with ὅτε is in the plural; as Εἰσαγγελθέν- 
τῶν ὅτι Φοίνισσαι νῆες ἐπ᾽ αὐτοὺς ἐπέπλεον, It having been announced 
that Phenician ships were sailing against them. 

Note 2. The genitive absolute refers to a person or thing different 
from the subject of the sentence. Sometimes however it refers to the 
Subject of the sentence ; as Ταῦτα εἰπόντος αὐτοῦ ἔδοξέ τι εἰπεῖν τῷ 
Ἀστυάγει, Saying these things, he seemed to Astyages to say something 
to the purpose. 

Nore 3. Ina few instances, the dative seems to take the place of 
the genitive absolute ; as (Xen. Hel. 3, 2, 25) Περιιόντι δὲ τῷ ἐνιαυτῷ 
φαίνουσι πάλιν οἱ ἔφοροι φρουρὰν ἐπὶ τὴν Ἦλιν. 


᾽ 


ADVERB. 


§ 227. Adverbs modify verbs, participles, ad- 

jectwves, and other adverbs ; as, 

Οὕτω ποιῶ, I do so. 

Καλῶς ποιῶν, Doing well. 

Ἐπιτήδειος πάνυ, Very convenient: 

Πάνυ καλῶς, Very weil. ut 

Note, The following adverbs modify all parts of speech: δή, 
δῆτα, θήν, δῆθεν, δήπουθεν,- dai: γέ, πέρ, τοί: μήν (Doric μάν), ; 
ἤπου, ἤτοι, ἢ μήν, μέν τοι, μενοῦν OF μὲν οὖν, μὲν δή. 


ὁ 228. 1. An adverb preceded by the article has the force 
of an adjective ; as Οἱ τότε ἄνθρωποι, The men of that time. 
Κάδμου τοῦ πάλαι, Of ancient Cadmus. 


2. An adverb preceded by the article, without any substan- 
tive expressed, has the force of a substantive ; as Ἢ αὔριον, sc. 
ἡμέρα, The morrow. Πρὸς τοὺς οἴκοι, To those at home. 

So τὸ πάλαι, or τοπάλαι, in olden time; τὰ νῦν, OY τανῦν, at the pres- 
ent time ; τὸ αὐτίκα, t } - 

3. Not unfrequently, an adverb has the force of a noun even 
when no article is prefixed to it; in which case it always de- 
pends on a preposition or another adverb ; as, ἀπὸ τότε, or ἔκτο- 
τε, from that time; εἰσαεί, for ever ; ἔμπροσθεν, before, μέχρι 
ἐνταῦθα, as far as here. ; 


29. The Greek has two simple negative adverbs, οὐ, 
non, no, not, and μή, ne, nof. Both od and μή precede the 
word to which they belong. 





| 


ᾧ 230.} ADVERB. | 287 


. Od expresses a direct and absolute negation ; consequent- 
ly it is used with the indicative. The same remark applies 
also to its compounds οὐδέ, οὔτε, οὐδείς, οὔτις, οὐκέτι, ὅζο. 


2. Μή is used with the subjunctive, optative, or imperative. 
The same remark applies also to its compounds μηδέ, μήτε, μη- 
Seis, μήτις, μηκέτι, We. 


3. When the action of the infinitive or participle is assumed 
as a certainty, od is used ; im all other cases, μή ; as, 


Elva: δίκαιος, κοὺ δοκεῖν εἶναι θέλει, He means to be just, and not 
merely to appear to be such. 
Τὸ μὴ φιλεῖν, Not to love; The not loving. . 
Κήρυγμα romodpevos μηδένα ἅπτεσθαι τῆς ληΐης, Proclaiming that 
no one should touch the booty. 
Ὁ οὐ πειθόμενοι, He who does not obey. ‘O μὴ πειθόμενος, He who 
may not obey. 
Οὐκ ἀκροώμενοι, Not hearing. Μὴ ἀκροώμενοι, Not hearing, as a 
_ Supposition. 
4. Adjectives, adverbs, and abstract nouns may take od or 
μή ; as, 
Οὐχ ἱκανός, Who 15 not capable. Μὴ ἱκανός, Who may not be capa- 
ble. 
Οὐ σοφῶς, Certainly not wisely. Μὴ σοφῶς, Perhaps not wisely. 
Ἡ ov διάλυσις, The not destroying. ‘H μὴ ἐμπειρία, The not hav- 
ing experience. 


Nore 1. The formulas οὐ ..... TE, οὔτε ..... re, (sometimes τε ov..... 
Te, ovre ..... Kal, οὔτε ..... δέ,) are equivalent to οὔτε ..... οὔτε, when both 
refer to the same verb; as (Il. 1, 603) Οὐ μὲν φόρμιγγος περικαλλέος 
ἣν ἔχ᾽ Δπόλλων, Μουσάων θ᾽ ai ἄειδον, Neither of the harp of. sur pass- 
ait beauty, which Apollo had, nor of the Muses, who were singing. 

ut if the verb of the second sentence is different from that of the 
first, the second member (ré) of the formula has an affirmative mean- 
ing: as Οὔτε πρότερον ἡμεῖς ἤρξαμεν πολέμου πρὸς ὑμᾶς " νῦν τ᾽ ἐθέλο- 
μεν σπονδὰς ποιεῖσθαι, We never began the war against you; and now 
we are willing to make a treaty. 


Nore 2. The first negative particle of a negative formula is some- 


times omitted ; as Τρωὰς οὔθ᾽ Ἑλληνίς, for Οὔτε Τρωὰς οὔθ᾽ Ἕλληνίς, 





Neither a Trojan woman nor a Grecian woman. 


Nore 3. Not unfrequently μή is used where od might be expected , 
on the other hand οὐ is sometimes used where μή would be more logi 
68], 


§ 230. 1. Two or more negatives, belonging to the same 
verb, strengthen the negation ; as, 
Οὔποτε ἐρεῖ οὐδείς, No one will ever say. 


258 SYNTAX. [ὃ 231. 


Ὅταν μὴ φῆτε καλὸν εἶναι μηδέν, When you say that there is nothing 
beautiful; when you deny. 


2. But when they refer to different verbs, they retain their 
distinct force ; as, 

“Ev@ οὐκ ἂν βρίζοντα ἴδοις Ἀγαμέμνονα, οὐδ᾽ οὐκ ἐθέλοντα μάχεσθαι, 
re you could not have seen Agamemnon sleeping, nor unwilling 
to fight. 

Οὔτε fa μεμνῆσθαι δύναμαι αὐτοῦ, Neither can I forget him. 

Οὐδὲν 6 τι οὐκ ἠρώτα, Nothing which he did not ask; He asked every 

thing. 

Οὐδεὶς ὅστις οὐκ Geto, There was no one who did not think; Every 

body thought. ; 

3. Verbs, nouns, and adverbs which contain a negation are 
regularly followed by μή or μὴ οὐ, with the infinitive ; and some- 
times by ὅτε οὐ, or ὡς od, with the indicative or optative ; as, 

Tots νέοις ἀπειπέτην μὴ διαλέγεσθαι, They forbade him to converse 

with young men. 

Οὐκ ἐναντιώσομαι τὸ μὴ ov γεγωνεῖν, I will not object to speaking. 

Norte 1. The double negative μὴ οὐ is used with the infinitive or 
participle, and is almost always preceded by a negation, expressed or 
implied. 

Notre 2. When οὐ is preceded by ὅπως μή, or μή, after verbs de- 
noting fear, anxiety, it belongs to the verb following ; as Μὴ νύ τοι ov 
χραίσμῃ, Fear lest τὲ be of no avail to thee. (ὃ 214, 1, a.) 

Nore 3. When οὐ or μή is equivalent to a~privative, it should be 
regarded as a part of the word to which it belongs; (see οὐκ ἐθέλοντα 
for ἀθελέοντα, μὴ μεμνῆσθαι for ἐπιλανθάνεσθαι. under the second para- 
graph.) 


Norte 4. Μή and μὴ ad after negative words, and words implviag — 


fear, anxiety, are, so far as sense is concerned, superfluous. (δὺ 230, 
3; 214, 1, a.) 


§ 231. PREPOSITION, 


Api, AROUND, aBouT, with’ Genitive, Dative, or Accusative. — 
Αμφὶ τοῦ, around, about, concerning, on account of, for, for the sake 
of. — Apdi τῷ, around, about, upon, near, at, concerning, on account 
of, for, for the sake of. — Ἀμφὶ τόν, around, about, round about, along. 


Avd, ON, UP, UPON, with Genitive (rarely), Dative, or Accusative. 
—Ava τοῦ, only in the Homeric expression Ava νηὸς βαίνειν: To go 
on shipboard. — Ava τῷ. on, upon, Epic and Lyric. — Ava τόν, on, up, 
upon, up te, in, to, through, during ; with numerals it means at ἐ 
rate of, apiece, 


Avri, with Genitive, BEFORE, AGAINST, rare in this sense ; common- 
ly instead of, in the place of, equal to, for, for the sake of. 





§ 231.] PREPOSITION, 289 


Από, with Genitive, rrom, away from, far from ; after, with refer- 
ence to place or time; by means of. After passive verbs, by, on the 
part of. 

Atd, THROUGH, with Genitive or Accusative. — Ac τοῦ, through, 
during. Before numeral adjectives it denotes repetition ; as Διὰ rpi- 
του ἔτους, Every third year. — Διὰ τόν, through, during, on account 


of, for. 


Eis or Es, with Accusative, To, 1nTo, fill, until. It. is also found 
before the Genitive, the noun to which it properly belongs being omit- 
ted ; as Eis παιδοτρίβου, sc. οἶκον, To the teacher’s house. 


Ex, or Eé, with Genitive, out or, From. After passive forms it 
means by. 


Ev, iN, AT, with Dative. Also before the Genitive, its noun be- 
ing omitted ; as, Ἐν ἽΑιδου, sc. δόμῳ, In Hades. 

Emi, UPON, on, with Genitive, Dative, or Accusative. — Ἐπὶ τοῦ, 
upon, on, at, near, towards, to, during, in, concerning. — Ἐπὶ To, 
upon, on, at, by, near, against, in addition to, on account of, for, on 
condition that. — Ἐπὶ τόν, upon, on, until, during, for, against. 


Κατά, Down, with Genitive or Accusative. — Κατὰ τοῦ, down, 
down from, down upon, against, down to, under, on. — Κατὰ τόν, 
down, down. to, in, on, near, throughout, during, according to, in rela- 
éton to, as to. 


Μετά, AFTER, WITH, with Genitive, Dative, or Accusative. — Me- 
τὰ Tov, with, together with, among. — Μετὰ τῷ, with, among, in, Po- 
etic. — Mera τόν, after, among, to, into the madst of. 


Παρά, ALONG, NEAR, with Genitive, Dative, or Accusative. — Tapa 
τοῦ, from near, from, of, by. —Tlapa τῷ, near, at, with, among, by the 
side of. — Παρὰ τόν, along, near, to, besides, contrary to, against, dur- 
ing, tn comparison with, than, on account of. 


Περί, AROUND, ABOUT, with Genitive, Dative, or Accusative. —Ile- 
pi tov, around, about, concerning, in respect to, on account of, for, for 
the sake of. —Tlept τῷ, around, about, upon, near, at, concerning, on 
account of, for, for the sake of.— epi τόν, around, about, along, 
during. 

Πρό, with Genitive, perore, tn behalf of, for the sake of, in prefer- 
ence to, in comparison with, than. 


Πρός, BEFORE, TOWARDS, with Genitive, Dative, or Accusative. — 
Πρὸς τοῦ, before, towards, on the side of, in behalf of, for, for the sake 
of, in the name of, by. — Ipds τῷ, before, with, in addition to. — Ἰτρὸς 
τόν, towards, to, with, in respect to, in, against. 

Svv or Ξύν, with Dative, wirn, together with, by means of, with 
ihe help of. 

‘Ya ép, OVER, with Genitive or Accusative. — Ὑπὲρ τοῦ, over, above, 
beyond, in behalf of, for, for the sake of. —‘Yrép τόν, over, beyond, 
above. ᾿ 


13 


290 SYNTAX. | [§ 232. 


Ὑπό, UNDER, with Genitive, Dative, or Accusative. —‘yzé τοῦ, 
under, ὃψ. ---- Ὑπὸ τῷ, under, at the foot of , ὃψ. ---- Ὑπὸ τόν, under, dur- 
ing. 

Nore 1. A preposition is often used even where the relation would 
be denoted by the case alone; as Mei{ov’ ὅστις ἀντὶ τῆς αὐτοῦ πάτρας 
. φίλον νομίζει, Whoever loves another more than his own country. 

So Seas αὐτοὺς ἐς ἐξ μοίρας διεῖλον, They divided themselves into 
six parts. Αἰνῶς ἀθανάτῃσι θεῇς εἰς ὦπα ἔοικεν, She surprisingly re- 
sembles the immortal goddesses in looks ; in the face. 

Nore 2. (a) Sometimes a preposition is, by anastrophe, placed after 
the noun to which it belongs ; as Παιδὸς πέρι. Νεῶν ἄπο. Ex6pay 
ὕπερ. Κακῶν ἔξ. Αρτέμιδι ξύν. ᾿ 

(0) Sometimes it stands between its substantive and an adjective 
agreeing with that substantive ; as Πῶς ἐμὰς ἦλθ᾽ εἰς χεῖρας ; How did 
he come into my hands? ; 

Nore 3. In Poetry, especially in Epic Poetry, two prepositions 
sometimes stand together ; thus, Διὰ πρός Αμφὶ περί. Tapéx or Πα- 
oc. “Yréx. Αποπρό. Περὶ πρό. 

Norte 4. Sometimes a preposition (ἀπό, περί) is found in connec- 
tion with ἕνεκα, χάριν. 


§ 282. 1. When several substantives depend on a prep- 
osition, that preposition is repeated with each when they are 
independent of, or contrasted with, each other. But when they 
are regarded as one whole, only the first one takes the preposi- 
tion. E. g. 3 

Περὶ τῶν ἐνθάδε καὶ περὶ τῶν ἐν Αἰγύπτῳ καὶ ἐν Sixedrla δύνασθαι 

φροντίζειν, To be able to take care of what is going on here and in 
Zypt and in Sicily. 
apres ἔχειν πρός τε ψύχη καὶ θάλπη, Not to be inured to cold 


2. A preposition before a relative pronoun is commonly 
omitted when it would be’ the same as that upon which its an- 
tecedent depends ;- as, 3 


Παρὰ πόλεσιν αἷς ἂν ἀμφότεροι ξυμβῶσιν, Αἱ the cities where both 
parties would agree to meet. 


This peculiarity gives rise to the following words and expressions : 

Διότι or simply Ὅτε (that is A’ ὅ τι, Ὅ τι), because; for Διὰ τοῦ- 
το ὅτι, or Διὰ ταῦτα 6 τι. Ρ 

Οὕνεκα or Ὁ θούνεκα (that is Οὗ ἕνεκα, Ὅτου ἕνεκα), because; for 
Τούτου ἕνεκα οὗ or ὅτου. ; 

E@ ᾧ, or Ef’ ᾧτε, upon this condition that ; on condition that, 
fort se of ; for Ἐπὶ τούτῳ ᾧ, or Ἐπὶ τούτῳ ἐφ᾽ ᾧ, (Her. 3, 83.) 

Ev 9, while ; for Ev τούτῳ ᾧ. : Υ 














§§ 233 -- 235.] PREPOSITION. 291 


§ 233. A preposition in composition is often 
followed by the same case as when it stands by 
itself; as, 


Ὑπερενεγκόντες τὰς ναῦς τὸν Ισθμόν, Carrying the ships across the 
Isthmus. 

Ἐσῆλθέ pe, It came into my mind, 

Παρεκομίζοντο τὴν Ἰταλίαν, They were carried along the coast of It- 
aly ; sailed along. 


§ 234. A preposition retains its adverbial force in the fol- 
lowing cases: 


(a) When it is not followed by a noun; as Kal κατακτενῶ ye πρός, 
And in addition I will slay thee. Mera δέ, moreover, after. 


(b) In composition ; as ἀποκόπτω, to cut off; σύνειμι, to be with ; 
προσπταίω, to stumble against. 


(c) When it is, by ¢mesis, apparently separated from the verb with 
which it is compounded; in which case it may come after the verb; 
as Απὸ μὲν ἔθανε 6 στρατηγός, On the one hand, the general was killed. 
"Qoe δ᾽ ἀπὸ ῥινόν λίθος, And the stone knocked off the shield. 


(d) When it apparently stands for εἰμί, to be, compounded with it- 
self; as Πάρα τοι δίφρος καὶ ἵπποι, sc. ἐστί, There are near thee a 
chariot and horses; thou hast. Οὐδ᾽ ἔπι φειδώ, And there is no spar- 
ing. 

Norte. In case of tmesis, when the same compound word is to be 
repeated several times, after the first time the preposition alone is some- 
times used ; as Κατὰ μὲν ἔλευσαν αὐτοῦ τὴν γυναῖκα, κατὰ δὲ τὰ τέκνα, 
for Κατέλευσαν μὲν αὐτοῦ τὴν γυναῖκα, κατέλευσαν δὲ τὰ τεκνα, On 
the one hand, they stoned his wife, and, on the other, they stoned his 
children. 


§ 233. Sometimes, by a kind of attraction, eis, από, ἐν 
are used for ἐν, ἐπί; ἐν for eis; mapa rod for παρὰ τῷ; 
ἀπό, ἐκ, after verbs signifying to hang, for ἐπί. KE. g. 

Es τοῦ Πρωτεσίλεω τὸ ἱρὸν τὸ ἐς Ἐλαιοῦντα ἀγινεόμενος γυναῖκας, 

Carrying women to the temple of Protesilaus which was at Eleus. 
Διήρπαστο ὑπὸ τοῦ βασιλικοῦ στρατεύματος καὶ αὐτὰ τὰ ἀπὸ τῶν οἶκι- 

ὧν ξύλα, The very timber of the houses had been taken away by the 

royal army. , 


Adverbs of place also are subject to this kind of attraction ; thus, 
ποῖ, ὅποι, ἐκεῖσε, ἐκεῖθεν, οἴκαδε are Sometimes used for ποῦ, ὅπου, ἐκεῖ, 
οἴκοι ; ἔνδοθεν for ἔνδον ; ὅπου for ὅποι. 


292 SYNTAX. [§ 236. 


CONJUNCTION. 


δ 236. The conjunctions καί, τέ, ἀλλά, 7, con- 
nect similar words ; as, | 


Πολέμου καὶ μάχης, Of war and batile. 
Δικαίως κἀδίκως, Jusily and unjustly. 
Ayaray ἣ μῖσεῖϊν, To love or to hate. 


Nore 1. Sometimes a possessive pronoun or adjective and a gent- 
tive are connected by καί; in which case the genitive is joined to the 
genitive implied in the pronoun or adjective ; as Παῖδες ἐμοὶ καὶ πατρὸς 
ἀτασθάλου, Sons of me and of a wicked father. 

So when the dative has the force of the genitive ; (Eur. Jon. 884) 
Παῖς μοι καὶ σός, My son and thine. 

Nore 2. After adjectives and adverbs implying resemblance, union, 
approach, καί may be rendered as ; as Οὐχ ὁμοίως πεποιήκᾶσι καὶ Ὅμη- 
pos, They have not composed in the same manner as Homer. 

So Παραπλήσιά τε ἐπεπόνθεσαν καὶ ἔδρᾶσαν αὐτοὶ ἐν πύλῳ, And 
ey suffered disasters similar to those they themselves had caused at 

La “a 


Nore 3. Conjunctions often correspond to each other and to other 
words ; thus, 


KGL ..... καί both ..... and, as well ..... as 

TE wee. TE both ..... and 

τε καί (not separated) both ..... and 

kal Te ..... τε , stronger than καί, and 

καὶ ..... TE stronger than καί, and 

μὲν .«.... δέ : on the one hand..... on the other, 
indeed ..... but 

ἡμὲν ..... NOE OF ἰδέ both ..... and, as well ..... as 

ov μὴν ἀλλά nevertheless, meanwhile, rather 

οὐ μόνον ..... ἀλλά not only ..... but 

οὐ μόνον ὅτι ..... ἀλλά not only ..... but 

οὐχ OTL..... ἀλλά not only ..... but 

οὐχ ὅπως ὅτι ..... ἀλλά not only not ..... but 

οὐχ ὅπως (οὐχ οἷον) ..... ἀλλ᾽ οὐδέ not only not..... but not even 

μὴ ὅπως ..... ἀλλά not only not ..... but 

μὴ ὅτι ..... ἀλλ᾽ οὐδέ not only not ..... but not even 

μὴ ὅτι (οὐχ ὅπως) alone much less 

OU ..... ἀλλά NOL «224+ but 

Ff OL FTO we ἤ “ either ..... or Ἶ 
πότερον OF πότερα ..... ἤ whether ..... ΟΥ̓ 
ELTE 2.00. εἴτε whether ..... OF 








§ 237.] IRREGULAR CONSTRUCTION. 293 


IRREGULAR CONSTRUCTION. 


§ 237. 1. Frequently a nominative stands without a 
verb ; as, ; 

( Xen. Hier. 6, 6) Ὥσπερ οἱ ἀθληταὶ οὐχ, ὅταν ἰδιωτῶν γένωνται 
κρείττους, ih αὐτοὺς εὐφραίνει, ἀλλ᾽ ὅταν τῶν ἀνταγωνιστῶν 
ἥττους, τοῦτ᾽ αὐτοὺς ἀνιᾷ, As the athletes, when they become su- 
perior to inexperienced men, — this does not gladden them; 
but when they prove inferior to their opponents, — this grieves 
them ; where one might expect Oi ἀθληταὶ ..... τούτῳ εὐφραίνονται 
..... τούτῳ ἀνιῶνται. 

(Il. 8, 211) “Apdo δ᾽ ἑζομένω, γεραρώτερος ἦεν Οδυσσεύς, But 
when both were sitting, Ulysses looked more commanding ; 
where one might expect Αμφοῖν δ᾽ ἑζομένοιν. 


2. The dative of the participle is sometimes used instead of 
the genitive or accusative ; as, 


( Thuc. 1, 82) "Hy δὲ γνώμη τοῦ Ἀριστέως τὸ μὲν μεθ᾽ ἑαυτοῦ 
στρατόπεδον ἔχοντι ἐν τῷ Ἰσθμῷ ἐπιτηρεῖν τοὺς Αθηναίους, And it 
was the design of Aristeus on the one hand to observe, at the 
Isthmus, the movements of the Athenians with the army which 
he had with him; where the author had in his mind ἔδοξε τῷ 


ἈΑριστεῖ. 


8. The accusative is often found where one might expect a 
different construction ; as, 

(Od. 1, 275) Μητέρα δ᾽, εἴ of θυμὸς ἐφορμᾶται γαμέεσθαι, ἂψ 
ἴτω ἐς μέγαρον πατρός, As to thy mother, if she very much desires 
to be married, let her go back to her-father*s house ; where the 
speaker had ἀπόπεμψον in his mind; (see Od. 2>-118.) 

(Aristoph. Av. 1268-9) Δειδόν ye τὸν κἠρῦκα, τὸν mapd τοὺς 
βροτοὺς οἰχόμενον, εἰ μηδέποτε νοστήσει πάλιν, It is a terrible thing, 
that the herald who was despatched to the mortals should not 
return; where an infinitive would be more regular. 


_ (dd. ib. 650) Ὡς ἐν Αἰσώπου λόγοις ἐ ἐστὶ “λεγόμενον δή τι, τὴν 
ἀλώπεχ᾽, ὡς φλαύρως ἐκοινώνησεν ἀετῷ ποτε, That in the fables of 
Zsop something is said about the ‘fox, that she was once scur- 
vily treated by her partner the eagle ; the indicative instead Ὸβ 
the infinitive. 


(Soph. El. 479) Ὕπεστί μοι Soibsus ἁδυπνόων dca 
ἀνειράτων, I take courage, having just heard sweetly breathing 


294 SYNTAX. [δ 238, 239. 


dreams ; where κλύουσαν depends on θράσος μ᾽ ἔχει, implied in 
the first three words. 


ὁ 238. Sometimes with two or more substantives only 
one verb is put, which can belong only to one of them. This 
irregularity of construction is called zeugma. E. g. 

(ZEschyl. Prom. 21,22) Ἵν᾽ οὔτε φωνὴν, οὔτε του μορφὴν Bpo- 
τῶν ὄψει, Where thou wilt neither hear the voice, nor see the 
form of any mortal ; where φωνήν, properly speaking, depends 
On ἀκούσει understood. 


ARRANGEMENT OF WORDS. 


ὁ 289. 1. When the words of a sentence are logically 
arranged they stand in the following order: 


Subject before its predicate. 

Leading substantive before the substantive in apposition to it. 
‘Substantive before its adjective. 

The oblique cases after the words on which they depend. 
The remote object after the immediate. 

Adverbs after the words modified by them. 


2. The Greeks however most commonly disregard what is 
called the logical arrangement ; their rule is this :° 


The word or sentence, which, in the mind of the speaker or 
writer, is most important, is said or written first. Not unfre- 
quently, however, euphony determines the position of a word or 
sentence. 


3. The following words do not commence a sentence: 
Adverbs, ἄν, κέ or κέν, dpa, ῥά, ad, δή (except the Epic δὴ τότε, 
δὴ yap), Sai, δῆθεν, δῆτα, δήποθεν, γέ, γοῦν, θήν, πέρ, Toi, μέντοι, 
τοίνυν, οὖν, μήν, νύν, ποθέν, mobi, moi, πῇ, πού, πώς, ποτέ, πώ. 
Conjunctions, μέν, δέ, τέ. 


4. The Greeks were fond of connecting kindred words as 
closely as possible ; as, (ischyl. Ag. 836) Τοῖς αὐτὸς αὑτοῦ πή- 
μασι βαρύνεται, He is oppressed by his own misfortunes. (Id. 
Choéph. 87) Παρὰ φίλης φίλῳ γυναικὸς ἀνδρί, From a dear wife 
to a dear husband. 


PART IV. 


VERSIFICATION. 


--- 





ὃ 240. -Every verse is divided into portions called feet. 
Feet are either simple or compound. A simple foot consists 
of two syllables or three syllables ; a compound foot, of four. 


Simple Feet. 
Spondee -- Tribrach Senin ae 
Pyrrhic -~ Μοϊοβθυβ " --- 
Trochee -~ Amphibrach ver 
Tambus - - Cretic in aaa 
Dactyle -~~ Bacchius --- 
Anapest --- Antibaechius --~ 


| Compound Feet. 


Dispondee ---- Fpitritus 1 ---- 
Proceleusmatic ~~~ ~ . Epitritus I 2 ---- 
Ditrochee πυ-ν Kpitritus ΠῚ --~- 
Diiambus --~- Epitritus IV ---- 
Greater Ionic --~~ Peon I -~~~ 
Smaller Ionic -v-- Peon II ad 
Choriambic ---- Peon ΠῚ ver 
Antispast va-~ Peon IV ---- 


§ ΦΔΠ, Arsis is that part of ἃ foot on which the stress 
(ictus, beat) of the voice falls. ‘The rest of the foot is called 
thesis. 'The arsis is on the long syllable of a foot. For exam- 
ple, the arsis of an iambus or anapest is on the last syllable ; 
the arsis of a trochee or dactyle, on the first. 

The arsis of a spondee is determined by the nature of the verse in 


which this foot is found. Thus, in trochaic or dactylic verse the 
arsis is on the first syllable ; in iambic or anapestic, on the last. 


296 VERSIFICATON. [ὁ 242. 


The zribrach has the arsis on the first syllable, when it is found in 
trochaic verse ; on the third syllable, when it stands in iambic verse. 

The dactyle in anapestic or iambic verse has the arsis on the last 
syllable. 

The anapest in trochaic verse has the arsis on the first syllable. 


§ 242. 1. Verses are usually denominated from the foot Ὁ 


which predominates in them. For example, the verse is called 
dactylic, when the dactyle predominates in it. 


2. A complete verse is called acatalectic. A verse, of which 
the last foot is deficient, is called catalectic. 


3. The trochaic, iambic, and anapestic verses are measured 
by dipodies ; (a dipody is a pair of feet.) Thus, an iambic 
verse of four feet is called iambic dimeter ; of six, iambic tri- 
meter ; of eight, iambic tetrameter. . 


4. The last syllable of most kinds of verse is common ; that 
is, it can be long or short without regard to the nature of the 
foot. 


5. Anacrusis is an introductory syllable at the beginning of 
a verse of which the fundamental foot begins with a long syl- 
lable ; as Πα-ρων απο-δημει. 

Sometimes the anacrusis consists of two short syllables ; as 
Γλυκυ-πικρον α-μᾶχανον ορπετον. 


6. Basis is an introductory foot at the beginning of a verse 
of which the fundamental foot commences with a long syllable. 
The basis consists of one of the following feet: trochee, spon- 
dec, tribrach, dactyle, iambus, anapest, ee bacchius, 
antibacchius, molossus, pzon third. 


7. The repetition of one of these feet, trochee, spondee, 
tribrach, dactyle, iambus, anapest, gives a double basis, so 
called. 

Further, these feet, taken two and two, give thirty more dou- 
ble bases, some of which however may not be in use. 


8. Sometimes a double basis receives an anacrusis. 


9. The basis, or the double basis, is sometimes placed at 
the end of a verse, in which case it is called ecbasis, 


10 In most kinds of verse a long syllable may be resolved 


i ll δι “, 


§§ 243, 244.] VERSIFICATION. 297 


into two short ones. ‘Thus, a cretic is equivalent to five short 
syllables, to a pzon first, or to a pzeon fourth. 


§ 243. Cesura is the separation, by the ending of a word, 
of syllables rhythmically or metrically connected. ‘There are 
three kinds of cesura; cesura of the foot, ceesura of the 
rhythm, cezesura of the verse. 


1. The cesura of the foot occurs when a word ends before a 
foot is completed ; as Tsou εξαλα-παξε mo-Aw, xn-pace δ᾽ αγυιᾶς. 


2. The cesura of the rhythm occurs when the arsis falls up- 
on the last syllable of a word. ‘This can take place only in 
feet which have the arsis on the first syllable. ΕἸ. g. Apes A-pes 
βροτολοιγε, pracpove τειχεσιπλῆτα. - 


3. The czsura of the verse is a pause in verse, so introduced 
as-to aid the recital, and render the verse more melodious. It 
divides the verse into two parts, and in most kinds of verse its’ 
place is fixed. 


§ 244, 1. The Epic and Lyric Poets often shorten a long 
vowel or diphthong at the end of a word, when the next word 
begins with a vowel; in which case a diphthong is shortened 
by simply dropping its last vowel; but a, 7, , respectively be- 
come a,e,o. This kind of elision can take place only when 
the long vowel or diphthong is in the thesis of a foot. E. g. 


Q πόποι, ἡ pada dn pereBovdev-cav θεοι adrdos 
Χρύσεῳ a-va σκήπτρῳ, και ε-λίσσετο παντας Axatous 


2. A short syllable is often made long by the Epic Poets. 
This takes place chiefly when the short syllable is in the ursis 
of a foot. E. g. 

Ἐπει-δη rovd avdpa θεοι δαμασασθαι εδωκαν 
Δωρα παρ᾽ Αἰιοτλου μεγαλήτορος ἹἽπποταδᾶο ; 

3. Sometimes a long vowel or diphthong, before another 
vowel, is shortened even in the middle of a word ; thus, ἔμπαιον, 
τοιαυτί, τουτουΐ, αὑτηΐ are often to be scanned ἔμπᾶον, roavri, του- 
Tol, αὑτεΐ. 


4. In a dactylic verse, when the first two syllables of a word, 
beginning with ¢, or ox, form an iambus, ¢, ox do not make 
position ; as, 

Oi re Ζἄ-κυνθον exov, ηδ᾽ of Σαμον αμῴενεμοντο 
Δωκε δ᾽ ε-πειτα σκε-παρνον εὔξοον" npxe δ᾽ ὁδοιο 
185 


298 VERSIFICATION. [5 245. 


Nore. It is natural to suppose that when the Poets lengthened a 
short vowel, they substituted its corresponding long vowel. When 
however the vowel to be lengthened was followed by A, yp, ν, p, a, it 
is more than probable that the consonant following it was doubled in 
pronunciation, and not unfrequently even in writing ; as, 

Znvos ε-νι μεγαροισιν Ολυμπιου αθροοι ησαν 
To δε κορυσσεσθην ἅμα δε vedos εἵπετο πεζων 
Ἐκ δε και αυτοι βημεν. ἐ-πι ρηγμῖνι θαλασσης 
Αλλ᾽ οὐχ ἥρει horas 6-re σευαιτο διωκειν 
‘In an ancient inscription we find the following dactylic pentameter ; 


Τρισσον ur od λυκαβαν Tpapparixos τέλεω, where υπολλυκαβαν 
stands for ὑπὸ λυκάβαν. 


TROCHAIC. 


§ 245. The fundamental foot of the trochaic verse is the 
trochee. ‘The tribrach can stand in every place instead of the 
trochee. ‘The ’spondee or the anapest can - Stand only in the 
even places (2d, 4th, 6th, 8th). 


In proper names the dactyle can stand in ‘all the places, ex- 
cept the 4th and the 7th. 


1. The trochaic monometer consists of two feet; the dimeter, 
of four feet ; the trimeter (a rare verse), of six feet; as, 


Τὴν de vovt monometer acatalectic 
Ξυμφε-ρει Monometer catalectic 

Touro μεν γε npos avec dimeter acatalectic 
Tov de χειμω-νος πα-λιν dimeter catalectic ¢ 
Tw ex τωνδ᾽ | εἰκα-σαι λο-γος mapa 


Δωρι-ῳ φω-νᾶν εν-αρμο-ξαι πε-δῖλῳ trimeter 
With an anacrusis, the trochaic dimeter acatalectic forms the 
third verse of the Alcaic strophe ; as, 
Οὐ yap wor ἀαμνᾶ-στει γ᾽ ὁ φῦσᾶς 
2. The Ithyphallic verse is a trochaic tripody (three feet) ; 
as Βαρβα-ρους πε-ρωντες. 
(a) Sometimes the Ithyphallice is subjoined to a ‘vedi or iambic 
dimeter acatalectic ; as Ἐμφερη ἐχοισα μορφᾶν Κληΐς ἃ ᾽γαπᾶτᾶ. Τὸν 


πήλον, ὦ πατερ TaTEp, τουτονῖ 
» (b) Sometimes two Ithyphallics are united into one verse ; as Acupo 
Bevre, Μοισαι, χρῦσιον λιποισαι. 


3. The trochaic tetrameter acatalectic (a rare verse) i is com- 
posed of two trochaic dimeters acatalectic ; as Κλῦθι pev γερον- 
tos eve-Geipa χρύσοπεπλε κουρη. 


4. The trochaic tetrameter catalectic is formed by sihipacaaly 


§ 246.] TROCHAIC. — LAMBIC. 299 


the trochaic dimeter cataiectic to the trochaic dimeter acatatec- 
tic. Its verse-ceesura occurs at the end of the first hemistich , 
but it is sometimes neglected. E. g. 


Οισθα viv ἁ μοι γενεσθω; || Sov ro σημαίνειν rode 
Ex δοκεῖ στείχωμεν; ὦ yev-vatoy eupnkas eos 


5. The Hipponactean trochaic tetrameter is the same as the 
preceding, except that its seventh foot is always a spondee ; as 
Επτα δ᾽ ἐστιν εκ θαλασσης θυννος ov κακον βρωμα. 


6. Sometimes the trochaic tetrameter is formed by subjoining 
a peon first, and a cretic or dactyle, to the trochaic dimeter 
acatalectic ; in which case the verse-czesura is commonly at the 
end of the fourth foot; as, 


Ovdev εστι θηριον γυτναικος αμαχωτερον 
Oude πῦρ, ovd’ ὧδ᾽ αναιδης ovdeysa παρδαλις 


(a The trochaic pentameter catalectic (a rare verse) consists 
of nine feet and a syllable; as Ἔρχεται modus μεν Αἰγαιον διατμη- 
Sas an’ οινηρης Χιου. . 


ΙΑΜΒΙΟ. 


§ 246. The fundamental foot of the iambic verse is the 
iambus. The tribrach can stand in every place instead of the 
jiambus. ‘The spondee or the dactyle can stand in the odd 
places (Ist, 3d, 5th, 7th). 

The anapest can ‘stand in all the places except the last. The 
tragedians admit an anapest in an even place only when it is 
contained in a proper name. 


1. The iambic monometer consists of two feet; the dimeter, 
of four -feet ; as, 
Kat τοῖς κολοῖς Monometer acatalectic 
Ava δακρῦ-εις Monometer 
“Avnp ανευτρηκεν τι ταις dimeter acatalectic 
Σπονδαι-σιν ἧτδυ κοὐκ eot- dimeter acatalectic 
κεν ov-devt με-τταδω-σειν dimeter catalectic 


2. The IAMBIC TRIMETER ACATALECTIC consists of six feet. 
It never has a tribrach in the last place. 


The tragedians admit a dactyle only in the first and third 
places. They admit an anapest chiefly in the first place; but 
in proper names they admit the anapest in any place (except 
the last), in which case the anapest is contained in the proper 
name. 


800 ΄ _ VERSIFICATION. [§ 247 


The verse-cesura occurs after the thesis of the third foot; 
and sometimes after the thesis of the fourth foot. E. g. 
To σὸν yap av-Gos || παν τεχνου πυρος σελας 
“As σοι πατηρ εᾧειττο, |. προς πετραες 
2 παν-τα νώ-μων, Τει-ρεσιᾶ διδα-κτα τε ᾿ 


ἀρ-ρηκτοις 
Kippepe-cov ἥξεις, 6v θρασυ-σπλαγχνως 
Της wap ted ἐπ᾿ αὖτ τε αι-πυμη-τα πότ sad 


3. The scazon or choliambus is the same as the preceding, 

except that its last foot is a spondee or trochee ; as, 
Eye SAams, 4 πιβωτος ἀανθρωποις 

4. The iambic tetrameter acatalectic (a rare verse) is com- 
posed of two iambic dimeters acatalectic ; as Βοῖσκος 6 απο Κυ- 
(ixov παντὸς γραῴευς ποιηματος. 

5. The iambic tetrameter catalectic is formed by subjoining 
the iambic dimeter catalectic to the iafnbic dimeter acatalectic. 
Its verse-czesura occurs at the end of the first hemistich ; but it 
may be neglected. E. g. 

Οὐκοῦν παλαι δηπου λεγω; || ov δ᾽ avros ove axovess 
Ὃ δεσπότης yap φησιν ὑ-μᾶς ἥδεως ἅπαντας 


DACTYLIC. 


§ 247. The fundamental foot of the dactylic verse is the 
dactyle. ‘The spondee may stand for the dactyle. 

1. The dactylic dimeter consists of two feet ; the trimeter, of 
three ; the tetrameter, of four; the pentameter, of five ; as, 








| 
ι 
: 
| 


2. The Elegiac pentameter consists of two dactylic trimeters 


ee ee eee tae σὶ 


Ee eee eee ee 


§ 248.] DACTYLIC. 301 


catalectic on one syllable. The first hemistich almost always 
ends in a long syllable ; the second hemistich always consists 
of two dactyles anda syllable. The verse-ceesura occurs at the 


end of the first hemistich. 


This kind of verse is customarily subjoined to the heroic 
hexameter. E. g. 


Βουλεο δ᾽ ευσεβεων ολιγοις συν χρημασιν οἰκειν, 
H πλου-τειν, αδι-κως || χρηματα πᾶσαμε-νος 


3. The dactylic hexameter acatalectic consists of six feet, the 
last of which is a dactyle. It is used by the tragedians in sys- 
tems of tetrameters. E. g. 

AN’ @ παντοιας pitornros ἀαμειβομεναι χαριν 


4. The dactylic nexamerTeR catalectic on two syllables (or 
HEROIC HEXAMETER) consists of six feet, the last of which isa 
aochee or spondee ; the fifth foot is commonly a dactyle. 

(a) The predominant verse-cesura is that in the middle of the third 
foot, either directly after the arsis, or in the middle of the thesis of a 
dactyle ; as, 

Μηνιν a-ede, θε-ἃ, || n-Ania-Sew Axt-Anos 
μοι evverre, μουσα, || πο-λυτροπον, ὃς pada πολλα 
Μνησομαι οὐδὲ λα-θωμαι Ἀ-πολλω-νος “Exa-rovo 

(0) Not unfrequently the verse-cesura occurs immediately after the 
arsis of the fourth foot; as, 

Apvupe-vos ἣν τε ψυ-χην || καὶ νοστον ἑ-ταιρων 

(c) The pause at the end of the fourth foot is called the bucolic cw 
Sura; as, . 

Νῦν poda φοινισ-σεσθε τα πενθιμα, | νῦν ave-pova 
Apxere Sixehi-xat τω πενθεος, | ἀρχετε, Μοισαι 

5. The herameter mitrus (μείουρος) is the same as the pre 

ceding, except that its last foot is an iambus ; as, 
Αλλ᾽ ebave ψολοεντα δαμεισα θεου ppeva Beret 


§ 248. A dactylic verse is called Ἰοσασάΐς (λογαοιδικός) 
when its beginning is dactylic, but its end trochaic; as, , 
Mappape-ais εν avyats Kat κνισ-σῃ τινα θῦμι-ησᾶς 
1. The greater Alcaic consists of an anacrusis, a trochee, a 
trochee or a spondee, and two es; the last foot may be a 
cretic. The verse-cesura y comes at the end of the 

second foot. E. g. 


809 ΝΕΚΒΙΡΙΟΑΤΙΟΝ. [§ 248 


Ov χρη κα-κοισι || θῦμον ε-πιτρεπειν 
Nov χρη με-θυσθην, και τινα προς βιᾶν 
2. The lesser Alcaic consists of two dactyles and two tro. 
chees ; the last foot may be a spondee ; as, 


Owvov €-vetxape-vors με-θυσθην 


3. The Sapphic verse consists of five feet ; a trochee, a tro- 
chee or spondee, a dactyle, and two trochees; the last foot 
may be aspondee. The verse-cesura is after the.second foot, 
or after the arsis of the dactyle ; sometimes it comes in the 
middle of the thesis of the dactyle. E. g. 

Ποικι-λοθρον᾽ || ἄθανατ᾽ Adpo-dira 
Φαινε-ται For || xnvos t-cos θε-οισιν 
Tas e-pas av-das || αἴτοισα πηλυι 

4. The Phalecean verse consists of five feet, the first of 
which is a dissyllabic basis ; the second a dactyle ; the rest are 
trochees ; the last foot may be a spondee ; as, 

Φρουρειν ομμ᾽ emt ow μα-λιστα καιρῳ 
ἔτχει μεν Ἀνδρομε-δὰ κα-λᾶν ἀ-μοιβᾶν with anacrusis 

5. The Glyconic verse consists of ἃ basis, a dactyle, a tro- 
chee or tribrach, and a long syllable. When the last syllable 
is short by nature, the consonant or consonants at the begin- 
ning of the next verse make it long by position. — Sometimes 
the last syllable is resolved into two short ones. E. g. 


Αλλα και τοδ᾽ ε-γωγε θαυ- Περιβαλλ᾽, ὦ τεκνον, ὠλε-νᾶς 
μαζω της ὑο-μουσι-ᾶς ‘Iv’ ὑπο δειρασι νιφοβο-λοις 
Ὅθεν περ και Ὃ-μηρι-δαι Iovt-ov κατα κολπον ελᾶ- 
Ἐπιμε-νει με κο-μᾶς €-pas TQ πλευ-σᾶσα πε-ριρρυ-των 


(a) Sometimes the Glyconic verse. wants the first syllable; as 
Ke-xnvas 6 vous δε σου. 

(b) Sometimes it has a redundant syllable at the end; and some- 
times it takes an anacrusis ; as Παλιμ-ποινα θε-λὼν α-μει-ψει. 

(c) The Glyconic polyschematist (πολυσχημάτιστος), so called, con- 
sists of a double basis, a dactyle, and a iong syllable. 


Φιλοκρα-της λε-ξει πολυ του- Erepa δε νυν αντιμα-θων 
TOU κα-κηγο-ριστοτε-ρον Βοτρυος ἕλικα παυσιπο-νον 
Ξηρων τροπῶν και βιο-της. Op-Bpov λι-πουσαι χειμερι-ον 


6. The Pherecratean verse is the Adonic with a basis ; or 
the Glyconic deprived of its last syllable ; as, : 


Ελδε-αι φιλον ἡτορ ; 
Ai μου-σαι τον E-pwra a 
7. The Priapean verse is formed by subjoining the Phere- 
cratean to the Glyconic ; as, 





& 249.] ANAPESTIC. 303 


Eupevns δ᾽ ὁ Λύυκειος ἐετστω πᾶσᾳ veohag 
Ηριστησα μεν ιτριου || λεπτου μικρον αποκλᾶς 


8. The Eupolidean verse is formed by subjoining the tro- 
chaic dimeter catalectic to the Glycanic polyschematist ; the 
first foot of the second hemistich however is a basis ; as, 

Ὁ θεωμενοι κατερω || προς ὑ-μᾶς edevdepas 

Οὗτω νἴκησαιμι τ᾽ eye || και νο-μιζοιμὴν σοῷος 

ὋὉ σωφρων τε χῴ καταπῦτ-γων ἀ-ριστ᾽ nKovoaTny 
Kdra μυροπωλειν τι μαθοντ᾽ || avdp’ e-xpyv καθημενον 


9. An Zolian verse, so called, is a series of dactyles with a 
dissyllabic basis, or a double anacrusis ; as, 
Ατθι, σοι ἐεμε-θεν μεν α-πηχθετο 
Owos, @ ide παι, λεγε-ται και a-\abea 
Γλυκυ-πικρον α-μᾶχανον opmetov 


ANAPESTIC. 


§ 249. The fundamental foot of the anapestic verse is the 
anapest. ‘The spondee, the dactyle, or the proceleusmatic, may 
stand for the anapest. 

A dactyle very seldom precedes an anapest in the same 
dipody. . 

1. The anapestic monometer consists of two feet ; as Toor 
9-EvBoay acatalectic. 


2. The anapestic dimeter acatalectic consists of four feet, 
the last of which is an anapest, a spondee, or a trochee. ‘The 
verse-ceesura is commonly at the end of the second foot, and~ 
sometimes after the first short syllable of the third foot. Some- 
times it is omitted. E. g. : 

Te ov προς μελαθροις ; || τι ov τῃ-δε πολεις 
“Hep δοριλη-πτος || er’ nv λοιπὴ 
Δειλαι-ἃ δειτλαιου γηρως 


3. The anapestic dimeter catalectic (parwmiacus) consists of 
three feet and a syllable: it has no verse-cesura. ΕἸ. δ. 
Πολεμου στῖφος mapexov-res 
Δουλει-ᾶς Tas ov τλᾶ-τᾶς - 


4, The ANAPESTIC TETRAMETER CATALECTIC (ARISTOPHANE 
aN) is formed by subjoining the anapestic dimeter catalectic to 
the anapestic dimeter acatalectic. The principal verse-cesura 
comes after the first hemistich ; the secondary verse-czesura is 


804 VERSIFICATION. [§§ 250 - 252. 


the same as that-of the first hemistich. ‘The principal cesura 
is very seldom neglected. E. g. 
Ove παρεβὴ προς To θεᾶτρον || λεξων ὡς SeEvos ἐστι 
Διαβαλλομενος δ᾽ ὗπο των εχθρων || ev Αθηναιοις ταχυβουλοις 
Αλλα τον αὗτου γε νεων βαλλει || και Σουνίον axpov Αθηνεων 


§ 20. —An anapestic verse is called logawdic when its 
beginning is anapestic, but its end iambic; as, 
Tov απαι-δα δ᾽ aro-orvye - 


Opyas εδιδα-ξατο και δυσαυ-λων 


CRETIC OR PHONIC. 


§ 281. The fundamental foot of the cretic verse is the 
cretic. ‘The pe@on first or fourth may stand for the cretic. 
Further, it may resolve the long syllables. 


1. The cretic monomeier consists of one foot; the trimeter, 
of three ; the pentameter, of five; the hexameter, of six; as, 


Σου θρασους Ev πολει monometers 

Tov avat-dwy avai- dimeter 

δεστεροι kat To πρᾶγμ᾽ dimeter 

Μηδεν ολι-γον ποει dimeter 

Kpa-vous amn-Aaypevos dimeter 

Autos ετι mats ων dimeter catalectic 
Mn τι τλῃς τᾶν ixerw εἰσιδιν _— trimeter 

Nopoy avopoy οἷα τις Eovba trimeter catalectic 


Zor, φοιβε, Mov-ca τε ξυμ-βωμεν with anacrusis. 
Tlavr’ ἀγαθα δὴ γεγονεν avdpacw €-pns aro συν-ουσιας 
2. The cretic teirameter consists of four feet; the verse- 
cesura occurs at the end of the second foot; but it may be 
neglected ; as, 
Μᾶτερ @ ποτνια, κλῦθι νυμφᾶν ἁβρᾶν ¢ 
Χαιρε bn, Movoa- χρονι-ἃ μεν ἥ-κεις, ὅμως δ᾽ 


Ὡ μακαρι᾿ Αντομενες, ὡς σε μακα-ριζομεν 
Κούκετι καττηλθε παλιν οικαδ᾽ ὗπο μίσους 


§ 252. 1. The dochmius is formed by prefixing an iam- 
bus, a tribrach, spondee, or dactyle, to a cretic or its equiva- 
lent (§ 242, 10), or toa molossus, a greater ionic, a smaller 
ionic, or to an anapest followed by a pyrrhic. Accordingly 
the dochmius has thirty-two different forms, all of which hows 
ever may not be in use. E. g. 

Aovioov-vas ὑπερ ο΄ Tlovrope-dov αναξ 
Geos tor’ apa Tore Toy κατα-ρᾶτοτατον 


§§ 253-255.]  ὁΘΒΟΠΙΑΜΒΙΟ. --- ΙΟΝΊΟ. 800. 


2. The dochmius may be preceded by cretic, iambic, tro- 
chaic, choriambic, anapestic, and dactylic measures. E. g. 


Θρευμαι φοβερα peyar’ ayn Te ρε-ξεις προδω-σεις 
Te μελ-λομεν ἀγα-στονοι “Av mor εὐυ-φιλη-ταν εθου 


CHORIAMBIC. 


§ 203. The fundamental foot of the choriambic verse is 
the choriambus. 'The tribrach may stand for the trochee of the 
choriambus. Sometimes two tribrachs supply the place of the 
choriambus. 

Further, an iambic monometer may supply the place of tne 
choriambus. 

Most commonly, a choriambic verse, besides the ἜΜΕΝ ΤΙ 
foot, contains iambic monometers, trochaic monometers, single 
iambuses and trochees, spondees, and other feet. 

The choriambi¢ monometer consists of one foot; the chori- 
ambic dimeter, of two; the choriambic trimeter, of three; the 
choriambic teltrameter, of four; as, 


Mov μινυθει monometer 
Μισθοφοροι τριήρεις monometer 
Αλλα παλαι-αγαρ monometer 
Νῦν de τὸν εκ Onperepov dimeter 
Οἰμοι φοβου-μαι το προσερ-πον περιῴαν-τος dynp 
Ex de κυρει τις πελας- οιτωνοπολὼν trimeter 
Δευτε νυν α-βραι Χαριτες, καλλικομοι Te Μοισαι 
Ov φορ-βᾶν ἱερᾶς γᾶς σπορον ουκ αλλων 

Aciva μεν ουν δεινα ταρασ-σει coos οι-ωνοθετᾶς 


IONIC. 


§ 204. The fundamental foot of the ionic a majore is the 
greater ionic. ‘The trochaic monometer, the molossus, or the 
epitritus third may stand for the ionic. Further, a long syl- 
lable may be resolved into two short ones. Εἰ. g. 

Tis την vdpt-nv ὕμων dimeter 
Kpnooa νυ ποθ᾽ ὧδ᾽ eupede-ws ποδεσσιν *rimeter 

The ionic tetrameter catalectic (Sotadic) consists of three 

feet and a spondee or trochee’; as, 


Av χρῦσοφο-ρῃς,. TOUTO TU-xXNS ETL ἐ-παρμα 
Exs οὐχ ὁσι-ην tpdpadt-nv To κεντρον wes 


§ 243. The fundamental foot of the ionic a minore is the 


- 


306 VERSIFICATION. - [Ὁ 255. 


smaller ionic. The trochaic monometer, the pzon third, or the 
molossus may stand for the smaller ionic. Further, a long syl- 
lable may be resolved into two short ones. | 


1. The ionic dimeter or Anacreontic consists of two feet. 
Most commonly its first foot is a peon third. E, g. 
Εθελησεις τι μοι ovv, ὦ Πολιοι μὲν ἡμιν ηδη 
Πατερ, nv σοῦ τι δεηθω Κροταφοι καρὴ δε λευκον 
Σικέλος κομ-Ψος avnp catalectic 


2. The ionic trimeter consists of three feet ; the tetrameter, 
of four; as, 
Ao pot θα-νειν γενοιτ΄. Ov yap av αλλῃ 
Λυσις εκ πο-νῶν γενοιτ᾽, ουτδαμα Tov 
Πεπερᾶκεν μεν ὁ περσε-πτολις ηδη βασιλειος 


Στρατος εἰς αν- τιπορον γει-τονα χώραν, λινοδεσμῳ 
Προφανως του-το διδασκων αποδῦσῃ βιοτην Gallambic 


APPENDIX. 










REMARKS ON THE ALPHABET. 


ἢ § 256. In the following table, the names of the Hebrew letters 
re taken from the Septuagint : 


Hebrew. Old Greek. Roman. 
"Aref A ἔΑλφα A 
Bnd B Βῆτα B. 
Tiper a Tappa G ΄ 
Δάλεθ Δ Δέλτα D 

“Ἢ E Ei E 
Οὐαῦ F(Y) Bad F(V, U, Y) 
Zaiv Z Zita (Z 

"HO H *Hra 

THO Θ Θῆτα 

Io I Ιῶτα I (J) 
Χά Κ (Δ) Κάππα σ (K) 
Λάμεδ A Λάμβδα L 
Μήμ Μ Μῦ Μ 
Νούν ~ ᾿ No es 
Σάμε Σίγμα 

”Aiv i O οὗ, : O 
Φῇ (®) “τὶ Ρ 
Τσαδή DRS ον sala, Raph 

Ko Q Κόππα Q 
Pnxs P “PO ἘΝ R 
Xoev > Sav 
Cad T Tav T 


Old Attic ABTAEZHOIKAMNXSONPSTYSXS20 
“Ionic ABTAEZHOIKAMN EOUPSTYSX ¥Q- 


᾿ς The old Greek alphabet was the same as the Phenician. This is 
evident from the names, forms, arrangement of the letters, and from 
‘tradition. This alphabet is found in inscriptions cut about the sixth or 
“seventh century before the commencement of the Christian era. 
The old Attic alphabet is found in inscriptions cut before the archon- 
ship of Euclides (B. C. 403). The Ionic alphabet is found in all the 
Ionic inscriptions ; also in Attic inscriptions cut after the archonship of 
_Euclides. This alphabet is the same as that used at the present day, 
and called the Greek alphabet. ‘ 


Ἵ 




























308 APPENDIX, [§§ 257 - 258 


§ 27. Ἐ,Η. In the old Greek alphabet, the character E re 
resents the vowels e, ἡ, or the diphthong εἰ ; in the Ionic alphabet 
stands for ε or εἰ ; as AGENAIOI Αθηναῖοι, ἘΠΙΘΕΝΑΙῚ ἐπιθεῖναι. 

It is observed further that when the I in the diphthong εἰ was not 
radical letter, this diphthong was generally represented by E; bu 
when I was a radical or essential letter, this diphthong was alwa 
represented in the usual way, EI ; as ΠΟΛΕῚ πόλει, EYHEIOES εὐπεῖς 
Ons, AEIOS λεῖος, OHEAAOKAEIAAS Οφελλοκλείδας, KEIMENO! 
κείμενον, EAEI ἔδει, ΕἸΠΕΝ εἶπεν. During the Alexandrian perio¢ 
this diphthong was generally represented by EI. 

The character H, in the old Greek and old Attic alphabets, has th 
power of the Latin H, or of the rough breathing of the later Greeks 
as HIEPOIIOIOI ἱεροποιοί, HOYTOI οὗτοι, HEKTEI ἕκτηι, TPIHEM 
TIOAIOS τριἡμιποδίους, ENHOAIA ἐνόδία. 

In the Ionic alphabet, H represents long E; as ΜΗΝῸΣ 
AOHNHSI Αϑθήνησι. The change of H into a long vowel must ha’ 
been gradual, for in the Therean inscriptions this character is bot 
a breathing and a vowel; thus, IPOKAH® Προκλῆς, APKHATET 
Apxayeras. . 

0,2. In the old Greek alphabet, the character O represents the vo 
els o, w, and the dipthhong ov. In the Ionic alphabet, it represents 
or ov. During the Alexandrian period the diphthong ov was generall 
represented in the usual way, OY. E. g. AIO®AINONTON, a: 
φαινόντων, HIEPON ἱερῶν, EKASTOI ἑκάστωι, ΤΟΙ AEMOI τῶι δή 

In the pronoun οὗτος and the adverb οὐ, the diphthong ov is com 
monly represented by OY even in the old Attic alphabet; as TOYTO 
OYK or OK, OYAE. 

EE for H and OO for Ὡ are found only in spurious inscriptions, 
chiefly in those of Fourmont. 

Y is — δσ- attenuation of the consonant F’; consequently it is t 
F, what the Latin i is to 7. ν 

In his Cratylus, Plato says expressly that E, Y, Ο, and Ω had no 
names; in pronunciation the first three were merely lengthened inte 
Ei, Ὗ, Οὖ, respectively. It is evident therefore that the epithets 
grag μικρόν, and μέγα, appended to these letters, were introduced in’ 
ater times. 


§ 258. 9, 6, x. The prototype of © is the Phenician Τήθ, 
which had the same relation to Gad (T) that Κώφ (Q) had to K. 

Before the introduction of @ and X, the Greeks used ΠΗ for ®, anc 
KH for X; as EKMHANTOI ee AMENTIHE> me aie ΓΡΟ- 
ΠΗΟΝ ρόφων, AEATIHIS Δελφίς, ἘΠΕΥΚΗΟΜΕΝΟΣ ἐπ μενος 
APKHATETAS, found in the PMelian and ‘Therean hla te 
(Compare the Latin TH, PH, CH.) TH for © has not yet been 
found in any inscription. ἈΝ 

§ 259. z,=,¥. It has already been remarked that Ζ is not 
double consonant. It is added here that AS for Z is found only i 
Fourmont’s spurious inscriptions. 

Before the introduction of = and Ψ, the A®olians and Dorians uses 
ἘΣ for =, and ΠΣ for ¥; the Athenians used ΧΣ for =, and ΦΣ for ¥° 





δῷ 200 - 263.] APPENDIX. 309 


as AEKSAI δέξαι, ΠΡΟΧΣΕΝΟΣ πρόξενος ; ISHN Wav, ΦΣΥΧΑΣ ψυ- 
χάς, found in inscriptions, 

ἢ 260. Q,S,3. The Greek Q is found only in Doric inserrp- 
tions, and is usually followed by Ο ; as AYQOAOPKAS Avxoddpxas. 
After it ceased to be a letter of the alphabet, Q was employed as a 
numeral, denoting 90. 

Originally Σίγμα and Say were two different letters, the former cor- 
responding to Σάμεχ, and the latter to Shin. The original form of 
Biypa, the prototype of the Roman S, was not unlike the three upper 
lines of 2; that of Sav wasSorM. ‘The Ionians, after the rejection 
of Say, put Σίγμα in its place. 

The characters Κόππα and Σάν were used also as brands on horses, 
which, thus marked, were respectively called Κοππατίαι, Koppa- 
branded, and Σαμφόραι (written also Σαπφόραι), San-branded, | 

§ 268. After H was converted into a vowel, the character }, 
resembling the first half of H, was employed to denote the rough 
breathing. This character however does not occur in inscriptions be- 
longing to Greece Proper ; it is found only in the Heraclean Tables, 
and on Heraclean and Tarentine coins. 

In process of time, this character became L, which being further 
modified, produced our rough breathing (‘). 

_ It is proper to remark here, that in inscriptions in which H has the 
power of long E, there is no mark for the rough breathing ; always 
excepting the Heraclean Tables and Heraclean and Tarentine coins. 

‘The character 4, resembling the second half of H, was employed 
to denote the smooth breathing. This being modified became _], 
and finally (᾽). ‘The smooth breathing is not found in any ancient in- 
scription, 

— § 262. The digamma, the sixth letter of the old Greek alpha- 

bet, is, in inscriptions belonging to Greece Proper, almost always Ἂν» 

resented by F’; hence its later name δΔίγαμμα, double gamma. [15 

‘true name is Bad, Vau, the same as the Oriental Ovad. the Hera- 

clean Tables it is represented by ΓΞ, which is the prototype of the nu- 

-meral s, often mistaken for the abbreviation s for στ. 

The digamma was most probably sounded like the English W. 

_ Digammated words are found in inscriptions, on coins, in Dionysius 

of Halicarnassus, Trypho, Apollonius, Piscine and Hesychius. In 

the glossary of Hesychius, however, Tis put for F, either because, in 

some of the dialects, the digamma was changed into I, or because He- 

sychius or his transcribers mistook F for Τ'. 

263. 1. The digamma was often changed into its kindred la- 
bial B ; as βείκατι, Bideiv, for Feixatt, Fideiv. 

_ 2. Sometimes it was changed into Τ᾽: as dypéw, ἄγρυπνος, for 

aFpew, aFumvos. Ρ 

3. Not unfrequently it was changed into ᾧ ; as Φέσπερος, for Fé- 

σπερος. 

4. tt was very often changed into its corresponding vowel Y. This 

_is generally the origin of the diphthongs av, ev. Εἰ. g. βουῶν, βούεσσι, 

‘for Borav, βόξεσσι, from βοῦς ; vais, καυάξαις, evade, for vars, καξα- 

ξαις, erade. 



























310 APPENDIX. [δ᾽ 


5. In a few instances it was changed into 0; as δοάν, Οιτυλ 
*Oafos, Οἱλεύς, for δεάν, Firvdos, Εάξος, Εἰλεύς. 
6. In many instances the digamma was attenuated into the roug 

breathing ; as Mus, ἁνδάνω, for Fadus, Favddve. F 
7. The digamma was never doubled ; but instead of this, its cor- 

responding vowel Y was prefixed, and sometimes annexed, to it, 
hus, in inscriptions we find BaxevFa, EvFapa, aFurov. 
8. Some words are found digammated only in Latin and other cir 

dred languages; as ἐννέα, nOVem, nine; νέος, nOVUS, NEW; KA 

kAnis, clavis. 
9. Words which originally began with two consonants, the secon 

of which was Εν, often appear with one only; as sweet, suavis 

(Fadvs) Badvs ἁδύς ἡδύς ; Schwaher, socer, (Fexvpds) ἑκυρός. ᾿ 
§ 204. In the following list, digammated words found in i 

scriptions are spaced; as Fapyov, Feros. Words which once ha 

the digamma, but in which the digamma was npn. ὅν: into β, y, v, 

o, also words which appear digammated only in Latin, are includ 

within parentheses, 

AFAQ AAQ, αὐάτᾷ ἄτη, αΡατάομαι ἀτάομαι, ἀάβακτος ἀάατος. 
(AFTQ) αὔξω αὐξάνω, augeo vigeo vegeo. 

αξείδω ἀείδω, ἀβηδών ἀηδών ; aFuvdos ἀοιδός, found in the Beoti 
ἀυλαξυδος, κιθαραρυδος, κωμαξυδος, ραψατυδος, τραγα 
Ευδος. — (αγημε, aFo) ἄημι do, ἀβήρ αὐήρ ἀήρ, αὔελλα ae 
αὐήτης ἀήτης, αὔρα. ---- (AFPQ) AYPQ, ἀγρέω αἱρέω, ἀρύω, haurio. 

αξυτος αὐτός. —(aFes) αὔως das nas ἀβώρ ἀβάσαι. --- αἰ ει aie 
aevum, αἰών. — Arras Alas. — (atFeros)  aiBerds aierds. — ( 
Faouat) ἀκροβάομαι axpodopat 

BaxevFat Baxeva. — (SoFs) Bove, bos bovis. 

(ypars) γραῦς, καραβίδες, gray, Romaic ypiBos γραβανός. 

(AAFQ) AAYO δαίω, δάειος δήϊος.. δάβελος δαυλός. ---- AaFos, D avus 
—(drav) δοάν dyv. —(dFo) δύο, duo, two.— AIFS ΔΙΣ 
AcFe-Au, divus. 

EvFapa Evdpa.— (Fae) ἐβάω edo. —(evveFa) ἐννέα, novem, nine 

Εάγνυμι ,ἄγνυμι, Faxtés, βάγος, Εαξος “Oagos *A£os, Ἑαύξιος F¢ 
ξιος “Agus, καυάξαις. ---- (Fayw) ἅγω ἄγω, i he és, ago vago 
veho vagabundus, wagon wain vaga — (Fadtxiwra 
βαλικιώτας ἡλικιώτης. ---- Fade ἅλις. ---- Fades "Adis Ἦλις, Εαλεῖο 
Ηλεῖος. ---- (Γαλισκομαι) ἁλίσκομαι, εὑάλωκεν ἑάλωκεν. --- Κάλλο 
ἧλος, γ8115. -- Εάναξ ἄναξ, βάννας, Ἐαναξιων, Βαναξιβουλο 
Ευρυβανασσα. ---Κανδάνω ἁνδάνω, Fadeddw, Fadopat βάδομαι ἥδε 

Ἑαδεώ, βᾶδος, ἧδος, κάδιξ, Faooa, βαδύς sive, suavis, sweet 
παδων “Adav, evade, γηθέω, gaudeo.—Favnp ἀνήρ. ---- Ἑαρνός 
τοῦ ἀρνός, Εαρνὼν Αρνων. — (ξασκαριζω)ὴ βασκαρίζω ἀσκαρίζι 
Ἑασκων ἴΆσκων. ---Έαστυ ἄστυ, αστινιος, Εαστυμειδοντ 
Os, _Parorvoxos. — εατάλαι ὠτειλαί. 

Féap ἔαρ ip, Vet, Ἑηράνθεμον. --- Ῥέρκαλος εὔκηλος. .--- Εέθω ἔθω, Sues 
60, Ρῆθος ἦθος. βεσόν ἔθος, εὐέθωκεν. — Feidoy εἶδον, video, wi 
wise, βιδεῖν ἰδεῖν, εὔϊδε cide, Ficape ἴσαμι, Είστωρ ἵστωρ, Βοίδημ 
οἶδα. F ἐδριας Ἰδρίας. αὐΐδετος — Fetkate Είκατι βείκατι, εἴ 
viginti, Ἐεξικατιδειον Εἰκατιδειον, FexariFeties εἶκ 


9 264.] APPENDIX, 911 


τεῖς, Εικατιπέδον. --- Feikw εἴκω, βεικηλά, weak, schwach, 
weich.—Feido εἴλω, FEAYO EAYQ, volvo, wallow, welter, wal- 
Zen, FiAn ἴλη, Fewdéw εἰλέω, eyFnAnOtovre ἐξειληθῶσι, Ῥέλουτρον 
ἔλυτρον, Βολαμός οὐλαμός, βειλάρχας ἰλάρχης, βειλαρμόστας ἴλαρ- 
μόστας, βέλημα εἴλημα. --- Feurety εἰπεῖν, επος ἔπος, VOX, Voice. 
- Feipo εἴρω, 5610, Ρειρήνα εἰρήνη. ---- Ἐεκάς Feikas ἑκάς, βεκῶς. --- 
(Fexupos) ἑκυρός, socer, Schwaher. — Βεκών ἑκών, Ρεκαθά ἑκοῦσα. 
— εκέλα βέλα ἕλα εἵλη. ἀβέλιος ἀέλιος, 50], FeAoduTia ἡλιοδυσία, σέ- 
λας, σελήνη. --- FeXarva Ἐλάτεια, FeXarenos Ἐλατειαῖος. ---ελένα 
Ἑλένα. --- τελίσσω ἑλίσσω, Fedikn ἔλιξ. --- FEAAQ, Ρέλλαι εἷλαι, 
vello, Βέλκω, vellico, sulcus.—FreAms ἕλπίς ἐλπίς.--- Fedyxavos 
Ἑλχάνος. --- Βελεῖν ἑλεῖν, Fevro ἕλετο, Fevvov ἑλοῦ. ---- Févvos φέννος 
ἕνος, ἃ ἢ ἢ 08. ---- Ρέννυμι. ἕννυμι, Υ 6 5110, Ῥέμμα Foypa εἷμα, ΡῬεστία, 
vestis, Vest, Βέσερα, ξεῖθρον, βέστον, Bérrov.— FENNQ FEQ ἝΩ, 
Fevvou, ἔζομαι, ἵζω, σατίνη o€ Apa σφέλας, sedeo sedo sido, seat 
set sit, Schwelle.—revrep γαστήρ, venter, waist, Wanst, 
—reé ἕξ, sex, six, FeEnxovta ἕξηκοντα, Fextos ἕκτος, Fe§a- 
κατιοι ἑξακόσιοι. — (Ferouar) ἔπομαι ΣΕΠΩ, sequor, seek. 
FEPIQ ἘΡΓῺ, work, Ῥέργανον ὄργανον, Ραργον ἔργον, Werk. — 
τ (Ρερπὼ) ἕρπω, Serpo. — Feppw ἔρρω, Verro, erro, Ρερητηρία, βαρ- 
pet, βέρρης βέρης, βερρεύει, βερηδεύει. ---- (Γεσπερα) ἑσπέρα, Υ 68- 
pera, Φέσπερος Ἕσπερος. --- (Εεστια) Ἕ στία, Vesta, ---Εετος 
ἕτος ἔτος, vetus vetustus, Feras ἔτης, Εἰκατιξετίες eiko- 
σαετεῖς. ---- (Fexw) ἔχω ἔχω, veho? : 
Fi i, τοῦ ov, Foi_ol, Fe ἕ, τέθεν ἕθεν, τίν ἵν, Fés ὅς, ods, σφέ, sui 
Rach on nes rid oe ἵδιος ἴδιος, Viduus. —(Fiepaé) ἱέραξ, βεί- 
ρακες ἱέρακες, Betpaxn. —(Fidevs) Οἰλεύς. ---(Ειξος) ἰξός, viscus, 
-- πίον tov, viola, violet.—(fis) ts, vis.— Fioos βισξός ἴσος, 





> ia , δ , « , ~ 
Ρισοτελια ἰσοτέλεια, Biwp tows. — Ειστίαι ἱστουργοί. --- Ῥιστιῶ, 
, j ΄ 
future. — (Γισχω) ἴσχω, Ρισχύν βισχύν ἰσχύν. --- Firéa iréa, βί- 


Tus ἴτυς, οἰσύα, Vitex, with withy, Οἰτυλος Βειτυλος. - 

Ροῖκυς οἶκος, VICUS, Foukta Εὐκια οἰκία, πεδαΡοικος μέτοικος. --- 
Foivos, Vinum, wine, — Βοῖτος οἶτος. ---- κόρτυξ ὄρτυξ. 

(Ρραιδιος) βραΐδιος padios. — (Fpaxadov) βράκαλον ῥόπαλον. --- FPEQ 
PEQ, Fparpa pyrpa, βρήτωρ ῥήτωρ. --- Ερήγνυμι ῥήγνυμι, frango, 
bre ak, wrec k, brehen, Ρρῆξις ῥῆξις, βράκος ῥάκος, εὐράγη ἐρρά- 
yn, αὔρηκτος ἄρρηκτος. ---- (Fpvyew) ῥιγέω φρίσσω, frigeo frigus. 
--ἰΡριζα) βρίσδα βρίζα ῥίζα. --- πρίνος ῥινός. ---- (Ἐροδον) βρόδον ῥόδον, 
rosa, rose. — (FPYQ) PYQ, βρυτῆρες, ῥυτῆρες, βρυτίδες ῥυτίδες. 

(Fumvos) ὕπνος, d-yp-vmvos, Somnus. —(Fus) σῦς ds, SUS, Swine 
SO Ww. 

(Fa@veouat) ὠνέομαι, Veneo, venum, vendo. 

H pFaouots ‘Hpaovors. 

(kAeFts) κλείς KAnis, clavis.—kXeFos κλέος, celeber, celébro, 

AaFés λαυός λαός, ΛαΡοκόξων Aaoxéwv. — (AoF@) λόω λούω, lavo. — 
(AaiFos) λαιός, laevus, left .— (AeFpos AeFios) λευρός λεῖος, lae 
vis, levis. : 

(vaFos) vavds ναός. --- (νας) vais, navis, navy.—(veFos) νέος, NO 

Vus, ne w. — (veFpov) νεῦρον, nervus, nerve. 
ὄξις Gis, OViS. — (opouvFw) dpovBw dpovw. 


312 APPENDIX. [$§ 265 -268. 


(προστελω) προυσελέω προυτελεῖν, προυσελλεῖν. . 

(σαξω) σάω, salvus, salveo, save safe, — (σκαιξος) σκαιός, 568 6- 
vus. 

(ὕλεη) ὕλῃ, Sylva. 

Paros φάβος φάος, Δημοφάξων Δημοφῶν, φαυοφόρος. 

ὠξόν ὥβεον adv, OVUIN, egg. ; 

§ 260. In the Epic poets and in Pindar, a number of words, — 
beginning with a vowel, have the following peculiarities : 

(a) A short vowel standing immediately before them is commonly 
not elided ; as οἶκόνδε ἕκαστος. 

(b) ‘The final syllable of the preceding word, if short, is commonly 
made long, as if by position, even when it stands in the thesis ; as dp- 
νύμε-νος ἥν. - 

(c) A final long vowel or diphthong, in the thesis, often remains 
unaltered before these words ; as αὐτίκα δ᾽ ἔγνω ἧσιν. 

As most of these words are found or implied in the preceding list, 
nothing is more natural than to suppose that these poets commonly 
pronounced them with F. It is to be observed, however, that in 
our copies of these authors N movable is introduced before these 
words when the preceding word admits of it ; also οὐχ or οὐκ for ov. 

The words to which these remarks apply are chiefly ἄγνυμι, Mus, 
"Aus, ἄναξ, ἁνδάνω, ΓΆρνη, τοῦ ἀρνός, ἄστυ, δεινός, δήν, ἔαρ, ἔθω, εἶδον, 
εἴκοσι, εἴκω, εἴλω, εἰπεῖν, ἑκάς, ἕκαστος. ἑκυμός, ἑκών, Ἔλατος, ἑλίσσω, 
ἔλπω, € hep, ἕννυμι, ἔργω OF ἔργω, EPTQ, ἕσπερος, ἔτος, ἦνοψ,, Ἴλιον, 
ἴον, Ἶρις, Ἶρος, ts, ἶσος, ἰτέα, ἴτυς, οἶκος, οἶνος, οὗ οἷ ἕ, ὅς possessive, 
with their compounds and derivatives. 

When the digammated word is preceded by a short vowel in the ar- 
sis, F'is to be mentally changed into Y, after the analogy of evade, 
evide, εὑάλωκεν, εὐέθωκεν, καυάξαις ; as φίλε ἑκυρέ, HrdeYexupe ; ἄρα 
ἔρξαν, apaYep£av. ; 


NUMERALS. 


§ 266. In the most ancient numeral system, I, 0, A, , Ἡ, 
F,X, ®, M, P, respectively denote 103, one, Πέντε, five, Δέκα, 
ten, Tlevraxis Δέκα, fifty, Hexatov (ἑκατόν), hundred, Πεντάκις Hexa- 
tov, five hundred, Χίλιοι, thousand, Πεντάκις Χίλιοι, five thousand, Μύ- 
prot, ten thousand, Tevraxis Μύριοι, fifty thousand. ; 

This system is analogous to the Latin, except that 4 is always ITII; 
9, TIM; 19, ΔΠΠΠ ; 90 is expressed by the character for 50 follow- 
ed by AAAA; 900, by the character for 500 followed by HHHH. 

267. The system which employs the letters of the Alphabet 
in their numerical order is limited in its application, inasmuch as it 
does got extend beyond twenty-four ; as Ἰλιάδος Ραψῳδία A, The first 
book δ᾽ the Iliad ; Οδυσσείας Payodia 2, The twenty-fourth book of the 
Odyssey. = 

268. In the latest numerical system, the first nine letters, 1π- 
cluding the obsolete s (ΕἾ, denote units ; the next nine, including the 
obsolete g, tens; the last nine, including the character Savm, hundreds. 
Thousands commence the alphabet again with a stroke before. — 








δῷ 269, 270.] 3 APPENDIX. - 918 


The letters denoting units, tens, and hundreds have an accent above, 
which however is not found in ancient inscriptions. 


a 1 ta’ 11 Ὧν Ἢ 30 v 400 
BS 2 B 12 μ 40 j 509 
y 3 wv 13 ν΄ δ0 x 600 
δ΄ 4 ιδ΄ 14 & 60 ψ' 700 
€ 5 te 15 οἵ 0 ω΄ 800 
ς- 86 i’ 16 "ἢ 86 DorA 900 
es (δἰ ἋΣ ¢ 9 J 1000 
η΄ 8 ιη΄ 18 ρ 100 ᾿ β 2000 
δ. 9 19 σ΄ 3200 ᾿ , 8000 
ra 10 K 20 τ: 900 ; &e. 


ον κου awps, 1846 ; αψμε, 1745; γχη; 3608; εθ, ὅ009 ; βηθν 


§ 269. The character Σάνπι is found neither in inscriptions nor. 
on coins ; it is not mentioned by any ancient author, with the excep- 
tion perhaps of a corrupt Scholium on the twenty-third line of the 
Clouds of Aristophanes ; of course it was never used as a letter of the 
Greek alphabet. The first form of this mark is evidently the same as 
the Phenician ων“, Shin, with an additional tooth; the second is pre- 
cisely the same as one of the forms of the Phenician Shin. 

As to the name Σάνπε, evidently compounded of Say and Ii, it, 
properly speaking, applies to the first of these figures, which has the 
appearance of C (one of the later forms of >) and II united into one 
form. This name therefore is analogous to Δίγαμμα (dis, γάμμα), 
that is, it owes its existence to fancy. Joseph Boshiger and others 
supposed that Σάνπε was the same as the Hebrew Toady ; consequent- 
ly, in their alphabetical tables, they make it occupy the place of Toady, 
which arrangement is the origin of the hypothesis that Σάνπι was so 
called because it stood next to Ii. 


REMARKS ON PRONUNCIATION. 


ᾧ BZO. Roman mode of writing Greek Words. 


A, I, ¥ are represented by A, J, Y. 
E by E short, H by E long ; as ἐπιθήκη Epithéca. 
oe by O short, Ὡ by O long ; as ὀβελίσκος dbeliscus, ὡὠμοπλάται 6mo- 
atae, ; 
᾿ Al by AE, rarely AI; as αἰγόκερως aegoceros, Maia Μαῖα; the 
diphthong a, by d; as Θρᾷκες Thraces. 
AY by AU; as αὐτόπῦρος autopyrus. 
ἊΣ by I long, sometimes by E long, as Σειρήν Siren, Μηδεία Me- 
a ‘ 


EY by EU; as εὖγε euge. 

OI by OE, rarely by OL ; a8 οἶστρος oestrus; Τροία Troia, 
oY by U long; as ἀρκτοῦρος arctirus.- 

YI by YJ; as’Aprua Arvin: 

Ql by OZ, or O long ; as κωμωιδός comoedus, φδή ode. 


14 


Kw 


ιἅ 


314 APPENDIX. [§§ 271, 272. 


B. Γ, A, by B, G, D, respectively. Before y, x, x, £, Γ' is repre- 
sented by N; as gn syngrapha, ἔγκαυστος encaustus, Ay xi- 
ens Anchises, Spiyé Ad ea 
‘ Ny K, A, M,N, &, U, by Z, TH, C, L, M, N, X, P, respect- 
rely. 

P by R; ‘P by RH; as ῥήτωρ rhetor, cxippos scirrhus. 

>, ἐᾷ Φ, X, by S, 1, PH. CH, raeene: 

¥v by PS, sometimes by BS; as ἀψίς apsis or absis. 


§ VTL. Greek mode of writing Latin Words. 


4, is represented by A. 
short by E, E long by H; as caréré κάρηρε. 
J, 1, by 1; as Soins. Σκιπίων, Julius Ἰούλιος. 
O short by O, O long by 2; as Commodus Κόμμοδος, Clodius Κλώ- 
dios. 
U by OY or Y; as Fuscus Φοῦσκος, Lucius Λύκιος. After g, by O, 
OY, or Y; as Quintus Kéivros, Kovivros, Kvivros. 
AE by AI, rarely by H; as Caesar Καῖσαρ, Maevianus Μηουβιανός. 
__ AU, OE, by AY, OI, respectively ; as Augustus Αὔγουστος, Cloe- 
lia Κλοιλία. © 
B, C, D, F, G, L, M, N, P, by B, K, A, ὦ, I, A, M, N, Π, re- 
spectively. 
CH by X; as Chorus Χῶρος. 
HI by the rough breathing ; as Honorius ‘Ovapios. 
Q, R, S, T, by K, P, 3, T, respectively. ~ 
V by B or OY; as Verus Οὐῆρος, Flavia Φλαβία, Flavius Φλαούϊος. 
After e, a, or 0, it is represented by 8, ov, or v, as Severus Σεβῆρος 
Σεουῆρος ΟΥ̓ Σευῆρος, Avidius Αβίδιος Avidios, novembris νοβεμβρίων 
νουεμβρίων. 
by =; as Sextus Σέξτος. 


§ 272. Romaic Pronunciation. 


A, like ain father. After the sound ε (c, εἰ, 7, 7, ot, v, vt), like a 
in peculiarity, nearly. 

E is a little longer than the first e in veneration. 

H, like «. 

I, like ¢ in machine, or ee in feel. 

O is a little longer than o in confuse. 

Y, Q, like ε, 0, respectively. 

B, like v, but not so strong; or like Spanish ὃ between two vowels. 

I, before the sounds ε and ε, like y in yet, yes, yoke, but stronger ; 
in all other cases, like the German g in Tug, very nearly. Befcre x, 
x, ἕξ: or another y, like ng in hang. 

A, like th in that, rather ; or like Spanish d between two vowels. 

Z, like z. 0, like th ὃς pa ibe pan 

K, like &. After y, like g hard; as ἀγκάλη, ang-géh-lee. 

A, like 7. Before’ the ace t, like es tiizam or like Italian 
εἰ, but not so strong. ᾿ 

Μ. like m. 


- 





§ 273.] | APPENDIX. 315 


N, like n. Before the sound 1, like Italian gn, or Spanish ἢ, 
but not so strong. The final ν of the proclitics ἄν, δέν, ἐν, σύν, τόν, 
τήν, and of some other words, before κ or &, is pronounced like γ un- 
der the same circumstances, that is, like ng; before π᾿, or yp, like μ. 

=, like x-in aze. 

II, like p. After p, like ὃ ; as εμπρός, embross. 

P, like r. ; 

>, like 5 in soft. Before β, y, δ, », v, and p, in the same or in the 
next word, like ¢; as Σμύρνη, pronounced Ζμύρνη. 

T, like ¢ in ¢e/l. After ν, like d; as ἔντιμος, éndimos. So also 
after ἄν, δέν, σύν, τόν, τήν. 

ΤΣ (formerly TZ), like és. 

®, like f or ph. X, like German ch, or Spanish 2 (2). 

Ψ, like ps in perhaps. After p, like bs; as ἔμψυχος émbsychos, 

at, like €; as γυναῖκα, pronounced γινέκα. 

qa, like a; as αἰτίᾳ, pronounced eria. 

av, ev, nv, wv, before a vowel, or before B, y, δ, A, p, v, p, like a8, 
εβ, nB, @B ; as αὔριον, νεῦμα, ηὗρα, ὠὖριπίδη, pronounced ἄβριον, νέβ- 
μα, ίβρα, ὠβριπίδι ; in all other cases like ad, ed, np, of, respectively. 

εἰ, 7; Ol, v, vt, like v; as εἶπα ima, ἐκείνῃ εκίνι, λοιπόν λιπόν, κύριος 
kiptos, vids ιός. 

ov, like 00 in moon, pool. ῳ, like o; as κυρίῳ κιρίο. 

The rough breathing is silent; thus, ἅγιος, ὅσος, ὁποῖος, ὡς, are Pro~ * 
nounced ἅγιος, όσος, οπίος, os. 

When a consonant is doubled, only the first one is pronounced ; as 
σφάλλω, φυλάττω, γράμμα, pronounced σφάλο, φιλάτο, γράμα. 

The circumflex does not differ from the acute ; as ἐκεῖνος, καλῶς, PTO" 
nounced exivos, KaAds. ‘The grave, or rather the acute at the end of a 
word, is somewhat weaker than the acute. 

A proclitic is pronounced as if it were a part of the next word; as 
ὡς ἄνθρωπος, οσάνθροπος. An enciitic is pronounced as if it were a 
part of the attracting word; as ἄνθρωπός tis, ἄνθρωποί τινες, pronounc- 
ed ἀνθροπόστις, ἀνθροπίτινες, with a secondary accent on the -zos, 
-ποι; ἐδικός pov, εδικόζμου ; γυναικῶν τινων, γινεκόντινον. When the 
attracting word has the circumflex on the penult, the second accent is 
disregarded ; as δεῖξόν μοι, δίξονμι. 


Probable ancient Pronunciation. 


§ S73. It is hardly necessary to remark in this place that the 
Greeks, during the most flourishing period of their language, wrote as 
they pronounced. 

A, like a in father, far. (Dionys. de Comp. ᾧ 14.) i 

B, I, A, like ὁ, g hard,d; in later times like Romaic B, y, ὃ. 
(Aristot. Poet. § 20; Seat. ad Gram. 1,5.) Before x, y, x, &, I had 
the sound of ng in hang. . 

E, like Romaic e, or Italian e. 

Z, like z, but stronger. (Dionys. thid.; Bekker. Anecd. 2, p. 815; 
Quinctil. 12, 10, 27; Victorin. Gram. 18; Isidor. Hispal. 1, 4, 15.) 

H, like French é as in féte. (Plat. Crat. 418 Ὁ ; Dionys. ub, supr. " 
Sext. ub. supr \ 





816 APPENDIX. . [8 273. | 


©. like th in thin, ether, saith. 

1, like ¢ in machine. (Dionys. ub. supr.) 

K, like k. (Priscian. p. 543.) - 

A, M, like J, m, respectively. 

N, like m. At the end of a word it was often pronounced and writ- 
ten as if it were a part of the next word. (ᾧ 34, n. 2.) 

=, in the Attic dialect, like XS; in the other dialects, like KS. In 
later times the sound ΚΣ prevailed. : 

O, like Romaic o, or Italian 0. (Dionys. ub. supr.) 

I, like p. 

P, like r. At the beginning of a word it was rolled; when 1t was 
doubled, only the second one was rolled. It was rolled also after 6, 
, x- (Seat. ub. supr.) : 

>, like s in soft, past. Before μ, it was, in later times, sounded like 
¢, and even changed into ¢ in writing ; as Ζμύρνα for Σμύρνα, in an in- 
scription. (Lucian. Jud. Voc. δ 9; Seat. ub. supr.) - 

T, like ¢ in ¢ell, strong. 

Y, like French u. (Dionys. ub. supr.; Quinctil. 12, 10, 27.) 

&, like f, but stronger. ( Quinctil. 1, 4, 14; Priscian. p. 543.) 

X, like Romaic x, German ch, or Spanish 7 (4). 

¥, in the Attic dialect, like 6; in the other dialects, like ΠΣ. In 
later times, the sound ΠΣ prevailed. 

Q, like o in note, nearly. (Dionys. ub. supr.) 

When a consonant was doubled in writing, it was doubled also in 
pronunciation. (Lucian. Pseudosoph. p. 563.) 

During the most flourishing period of the language, both the vowels 
of a diphthong were distinctly heard. During the brazen age, and 
probably during the latter part of the silver age, the diphthongs ΑἹ, 
‘EI, OY, had each the power ofa single vowel. (Seat. ub. supr.) 

AI, like ai in ais/e ; in later times, like ἡ, or French @; during the 
latter part of the brazen age, like e. 

AY, like ou in our, house ; in later times, like av, af. 

EI, like e in freight, nearly ; in later times, like «. ( Callimach., 
Epigr. 29.) During the silver and brazen ages, E was often prefixed 
to I long merely to mark its quantity; as κρείνω, τεῖσαι, τειμῆσαι. 
And when quantity began to be disregarded, even short I was repre- 
sented by EI; as Εἰσίδωρος, Εἰσοκράτης, γυμνασειαρχήσας. (Seat. 
1,9; Priscian. 1, 9.) 

EY, like eh-oo rapidly pronounced ; in later times, like ev, ef. 

OI, like δὲ in oz/, nearly. 

OY, like oh-oo rapidly pronounced ; in later times like 00 in moon, or 
like French ou, Italian wu. When the Beotians used OY for Y, they 
pronounced it long er short according as the original Y was long or 
short; thus, in ovdep, σούν, it was short, like 00 in book; in ovAn, 
ἐσουλία, long, like 00 in moon. (Eustath. ad Il. 1, 10.) 

YI, like τοῦ in twist; “YI, like whi in whtp; in later times, like Y. 

As to the diphthongs a, 7, , av, nv, ov, they differed from a, et, 
ot, av, ev, ov only in the prolongation of the first vowel. In later 
times, a, 7, @ were pronounced like a, ἡ, @, respectively. (Sirah. 
14, p. 648; Sert. 1, 9.) 








INDEX. 


GREEK 


INDEX. 


The figures designate the sections (§) and their subdivisions: n. stands 


for Nore. 


a-, inseparable, 147. 

ἀγάλλομαι τῷ, 203. 

ἄγαμαι, 193, n. 2. 

ἄγαν, 14, n. 8. 

ἀγαπάω τῷ, 203. 

ἀγγέλλω, with participle, 225, 7. 

ἁγνὸς τοῦ, 197, 2. 

ἄγχι, ἀγχοῦ, τοῦ, 187, 3. 

ἄγω, ἄγων, 225, n. 4.— dye, 218, 
2. — ἄγομαί τινα τοῦ, 192, 2. 

ἀδελφός, 187, 3. 

ἄδην τοῦ, 200, 3. 

 ἀθυμέω τῷ, 203. 

Αἰήτης, αἰναρέτης, 43, 4, ἃ. 

αἱρέω, ἑλεῖν τινα τοῦ, 192, 2. 

αἰσϑάνομαι, with participle, 225, 7. 

αἰσυμνάω Tov, 189 

αἰσχύνομαι τῷ 203. — with partici- 
ple, 225, 4. 

αἴτιος τοῦ, 187, 2. 

αἰτιῶμαι, 194, n. 2. 

ἀκόλουθος, 187, n. 5. 

ἀκούω, 192, n. 3; 211, n. 5.— 
with participle, 225, 7. 

ἄκρος, 169, η. 3. 

ἅλις τοῦ, 200, 3. 

ἀλλοῖος τοῦ, 198, 2. 

ἄλλος, 150, n. 3; 169, n. 4.— 
with genitive, 198, 2.— ἄλλο τι, 
ἄλλο τι ἤ, 219, 5. 

Ἰλλότριος Tod or τῷ, 198, 2; 202. 

ἀλύσκω τοῦ, 197, 2. 

Ddva, 194, πη. 1. 

dua τῷ, 202. — with participle, 
225, 1. 1. 





ἁμαρτάνω τοῦ, 197 2, 

ἀμόθεν τῶν, 188, 

ἀμπλακίσκω τοῦ, 97, 2. 

ἀμφὶ περί, 231, n. 3. 

ἀμφισβητέω τοῦ, 194. 

ἄν, 215, et seq. 

ἀνακουφίζω τι τοῦ, 197, 2. 

ἀνάσσω τοῦ, 189, 

ἀνέλκω τινὰ τοῦ, 192, 2. 

ἄνευ τοῦ, 197, 2. 

ἀνέχομαι τοῦ, 192; 1931 --- with 
participle, 225, 7. 

ἀνήρ, 156, n. 5. 

ἀνίημι Tov, 197, 2. 

ἀνθ᾽ ὧν, because, 232, 2. 

ἀντιάω Tov, 191,2. . 

ἀντιπέρας τοῦ, 187, 4. 

ἀντιποιοῦμαί τινι τοῦ, 201; 194,1. 

ἀντίστροφος τοῦ, 187, 3. 

ἄνω τοῦ, 187, 4. 

ἄξιος, ἀξίως, ἀξιόω, 200, n. 9. 

ἀπειθεῖν τοῦ, 192; 189. 

ἀπολαύω τοῦ, 191, n. 

ἀποπρό, 231, n. 3. 

ἀπορέω τῷ, 903. 

ἀποστερέω, 184, η. 9. 

ἀποτέμνω, ἀποτέμνομαι τὴν κεφα- 
λήν, 184, 3. 

ἀποτίνω, ἀποτίσασθαί τι τόν, 184, 

ἄπωθεν τοῦ, 197, 9. 

dpa, dpa γε, 219, 5. 

dpt-, inseparable, 147. 

ἀρχήν, 135. 

ἄρχω, ἄρχομαι, to begin, 197, 2.—: 
apxe, to rule, 189, n, 


918 GREEK 
Gre, 226, a. 
ἀτιμάζω τι τόν, 184. 
αὐτίκα, with participle, 995, n. 1. 
αὐτός, 160, 4. 5.—6 αὐτός, 202, 
n, 1. — dative of, 206, 5. 
aaupa, oe n. 2. — ἀφαιροῦμαι, 
184, n. 
ἄφες, ASS n. 5. 
ἀφικνέομαι τῷ, 205. 
ap’ οὗ, 175, n. 
ἄχθομαι τῷ, 
225, 4. 
ἄχρι, ἄχρις, 17, 1; 217. — τοῦ, 
scars — ἄχρι οὗ, 175, n. 
meee TOU, 189. 
Bh 22 > 
βλάπτω, βλάπτουσι κελεύθου, 197. 
- βλαβέντα λοισθίων δρόμων, 
1907. 
βλαστάνω τοῦ, 197, 2. 
βορέας. βορρᾶς, 7, n. 2. 
Βούλει, 214, n. δ: 219, 3. 
γεύω, 192, n. 9. 
γίγνομαι τοῦ, 190. — to be born of, 
197, 2. — with dative, 201, 3. 
γιγνώσκω, with participle, 225, 7. 
γράφειν τι τόν, 184 
τς τοῦ, 200, 3. 
inseparable, 147. 
δασὺς τοῦ, 200, 3. 
δεῖ, 201, n. 4. 
δείκνυμι, with pee. 225, 7. 
δείλαιος, 188, n. 3. 
δεῖνα, 72, 2. ts δεῖνα, 167, 4. 
δεῖσαί τινος, 194, 1. 
δεσπόζω τοῦ, 189. 
δεύτερος τοῦ, 198, 9, 
δέχομαι, 201, π. 2. 
δέω. δέομαι. τοῦ, 200, 3. —- δέομαι 
τοῦ τι, 182. — ὧν ἀν, σοὺ ἢ δεηθῶ, 


9203. --- ἢ participle, 


entreat of thee, (Xen. C. 5, 5, 
35.) 

δηλόω, δῆλος, with participle, 225, 
7. 

dua ω, 225, 8. 

ὃ έχομαι τῷ, 202. 


διαδοχὴ τῷ. 202, 
διάδοχος, 187, n.-5. 
διαπρό, 231, n. 3. 
διασκοπέω ΤΩΣ 192, 1. 





INDEX, 


διατελέω, 225, 8, 

διατρίβω, 995, 8. 

διαφέρω τοῦ, 197, 2. 

διάφορος, 197, 2, n.; 198, 2. 

διίστημι, διέστηκα, τοῦ, 197, 2, 
198, 2. : 

διορίζω τινὰ τοῦ, 197, 2. 

δῖος, 188, n. 3. 

διότι, 232, 2. 

διπλόος, διπλάσιος, τοῦ, 198, 2 

δὶς τόσως τοῦ, 198, 9. 

dude τοῦ, 193. 

δοῦρε, 157, τι. 3. 

δράττομαι τοῦ, 192,1. 

δύναμαί τι, 181, η. 2. 

δύο, 157, n. 3. 

δυσ-, inseparable, 147. 

δωρέομαι, ὁ 206, πη. 1. 

εἰς μα τῷ, 901. 

18, 2, 

ἐάν, 215. 

ἐγγὺς τοῦ, τῷ, 187, 3; 202, 1. 

ἐγχέω, 195, 3. 

ei, 215, et seq. — whether, 219, ἢ, 
4, 


ei yap, 216. 
εἴθε, 216. 
εἶμι, ἰέναι τῷ, 205. 
ἐμί omitted, 150, 4. 
εἶναι Superfluous, 223, 9. 
εἰπεῖν, 184, n. 2, 
εἷς, 202, n. 1. 
εἰσὶν οἵ, 172, n. 2. 
eis 6, 175, n. 
εἴσω τοῦ, 187, 4. 
εἴ τις, 215, n. 6, ἀ. 
ἐκ, 13, n. 1; 17; 38, n. 
ἕκαστος, 150, n. 3. 
ἐκτὸς Tov, 187, 4. 
ἑκὼν εἶναι, 223, 9. 
ἔλαττον, 159, n. 2. 
ἐλαττοῦν, 198, 1, 
ἐλαύνω τινὰ τοῦ, 197, 9. 
ἐλεύθερος τοῦ, 197, 2, 
ἐλλείπομαι, with participle, 225, 7. 
ἕνεκα Tov, 187, 4. — in connection — 
with a preposition, 231, n. 4. 
ἔνθα, 217. 
ἔνθεν, 217. --- rod, 187, 4. 
ἔνιοι, 172, n. 2. 








GREEK 


ἔνοχος, 194, η. 4. 

ἐν τοῖς, 159,.5. 

ἐντὸς τοῦ, 187, 4. 

ἐν ᾧ, 232, 2. 

ioldone. 225, ἢ. 1. 

ἐξελέγχομας, with participle, 225, 7. 

ἑξῆς, 187, 

ἐξικνεῖσθαι τοῦ, 191, 2. 

ἐξ οὗ, ἐξ ὅ ὅτου, ἐξ by, 175, n. 

ἐπαρκέω τοῦ, 191, 

ἐπεί, ἐπειδή, 217. 

ἐπεξιέναι, 194, n. 9, 

ἐπιβουλεύω, ἐπιβουλὴ; τῷ, 901. 

ἐπισκήπτεσθαι, 194, n. 

ἐπιτρέπω, ἐπιτρέπομαί τι; 184, 3. 

ἐπιχώριος, 187, 3. 

ἑπτακαιεικοσαπλάσιος τοῦ, 198, 2. 

ἕρδω, 184, n. 2. 

ἐρημοῦσθαι tov, 200, 3. 

ἐρι-, inseparable, 147. 

ἔρις τῷ, 202. 

ἔρχομαι, with future participle, 89. 
— ἐλθεῖν τῷ, 205. — πεδίοιο, 

196. 

ἔστε, 175, n.; 217. 

ἑστιάω τινὰ ποδὶ 192, 1. 

ἔστιν οἵ, οἵτινες, ἧ, ὅπῃ, ὅπως, 172, 

n. 2. 

ἔσχατος, 169, n. 8. 

ἕτερος, 150, n. 3. — with genitive, 

_ 198, 2, 

eaipey τοῦ, 194, 

εὐθὺ τοῦ, 199. 

εὐθύς, 225, n. 1. 

εὑρίσκω, with participle, 225, 7. 

εὐωχοῦμαι τοῦ, 191, 2. 

δε ἡ , ἐφ᾽ ᾧτε, 217, 4; 223; 232, 


to, τινὰ τοῦ, 197, 2.—with an 
adverb and genitive, 195, 1. -- 
ἔχομαι τοῦ, 192, 1.— ἔχων, 225, 
n. 3. 4. 

ἕως οὗ, 175, ἡ. ; 199, 

ζηλοῦν τινα τοῦ, 194, 1. 

Ths 150, 3; 236.— ἢ κατά, πρός, 
ὅτε, ὡς, ὥστε, 159 ; 220 

, 169, 5. 
ἔομαι, 189, n. 

. τῷ. 203. — with participle, 
225, 4 





i 
‘ 
T 
ῖ 


a 





j Ἔ 


INDEX. 319 


ὅς, 171, 2, d. 

ἥκω, 211, n. 5. — with adverb and 
genitive, 195, 1.— with dative, 
205. 


ἡλίκος, 175, 1, d. 


ἡμι-, 176 

ἡμιόλιος τοῦ, 198, 2. 

ve τοῦ, 198, 2. ---μάχας, toa 
n 

θανάτου, 200, n. 1. 

θαυμάζω τῷ, 203. 

θαυμαστὸν, ὅ ὅσον, θαυμαστῶς os, See 
ὅσος, ὡς. 

θέλεις, 214, n. 5; 919, 8, 

θέω, θέειν welton. 196, 

θρασὺς πολλοῦ, 200, 3. 

ἴδιος τοῦ, 187, 3. 

ἰδιωτεύω τοῦ, 189. 

ἰέναι τοῦ πρόσω, 199. -- τῷ, 205. 

ἱερὸς τοῦ, 187, 3. 

ἴημι τῷ, 906, η. 8. 

ἰθὺς τοῦ, 199. 

ἱκετεύω, ἱκνοῦμαι, τινὰ τοῦ, 194, 3. 

ἵνα, 914. ---- ἵνα τί, wherefore? sup- 
ply γένηται. 

ἴσος, 187, 3; 202, 2. 

ἵσταμαι τοῦ, Ἰ97, δ, 

καθαίρω τοῦ, 197, 2. 

καθαρὸς τοῦ, 197, 2. 

καί, 150, 2; 236; 225, 6. 

καὶ ὅς, 171, 2, b. 

καὶ τόν, 166, 2, 

καλῶς τοῦ, 198. 

κάμνω, with participle, 225, 4. 

κατά, 13, 11.— genitive after verbs 
‘compounded with, 194, n. 3. 

κατάγνυμι, κατεαγέναι τῆς κεφαλῆς, 

. κατάξαι τινὸς τῆς κεφαλῆς, 19ὅ, 
ἘΣ 

καταμανθάνω τοῦ, 192, 1. 

κατάρχω, 197, π. 

κατηγορέω, 194, n. 8. 

κάτω Tov, 187, 4. 

κινδυνεύειν Tov, 189. 

κιττάω Tov, 193, 

κληρονομέω, 189, ἢ, 

κλύω τοῦ, 192,1. 

κοινὸς τοῦ, 187, 3. 

κοινωνέω; easvmnde, 202, n. 2, 


nite τι τόν, 184. 


“320 GREEK 

Kpaive τοῦ, 189, 

κρατέω τοῦ, 189, n. 

κρεμαστὸς τοῦ, as participle, 192, 2. 

eae tov, 187, Pi ati 

κύκλῳ, round, 204. 

κυρέω Tov, 191, 9. 

Aa-, inseparable, 147, 

λαβών, 225, n. 4. 

λαγχάνω, 191, n. 

λάθρα τοῦ, 187, 2. 

λανθάνω, 225, 8. 

λείπω, λείπομαι τοῦ, 197, 2; 198, 2. 

Aourds, τοῦ λοιποῦ, 196. 

λούεσθαι ποταμοῖο, 196. 

μά, 183. 

μακάριος τοῦ, 194. 

μάλιστα, 159, 5. 

μᾶλλον, 159, 4. 

μανθάνω, with participle, 225, 7.— 
τί μαθών, 225, 3. 

μεγαίρω τινὶ τοῦ, 194. 

μέγιστον, 159, 5. 

μεθύσκομαι τοῦ, 200, 3. 

μεῖον, 159, n. 2. 

μειονεκτέω τοῦ, 191, 2. 

μέλει, 201, n. 4. 

μέλημα τῷ, 901. 

μέλλω, with infinitive, 89. 

μέσος, 169, n. 3. 

μεσόω Tov, 189. 

μεστός, with participle, 225, 7. 

μεταδίδωμι, 191, n. 

μεταλαγχάνω, 191, n. 

μεταμέλομαι, With participle, 225, 4. 

μεταξὺ τοῦ, 187, 4.—with parti- 
ciple, 225, n. 1. 

μεταποιοῦμαι Tov, 194. 

μέτεστι, 201, n. 4. 

μετέχω, 191, π. ; 202, n. 9. 

μέχρι, μέχρις, 17, 1; 217. — τοῦ, 
199. --- μέχρι οὗ, 175, π. --- μέχρι 
οὗ or ὅτου is sometimes followed 
by a genitive in apposition with 
ov or Grov. (Herod. 2, 173.) 

pn, 214, et seq. ; 229, et seq. 

μὴ οὐ, 230, 3, n. 1. 

pyre, 150, 3. 

μιᾶς χειρός, at a single stroke, 


μικρός, μικροῦ δεῖν, or simply μι- 


'ὁράω, with participle, 225, 7. 





Kpov, 223, 2. 


INDEX. 


μιμνήσκω, 192, n. 9. --- μεμνῆ 
with participle, 225, 7. 

μονοῦσθαι τοῦ, 197, 2. 

pov, 187, n. 4. 

μῶν, 219, 5. 

v movable, 16. 

vn-, inseparable, 147. 

vn, 183 

νικάω τι, 184, n. 1, 

νομίζω, 206, n. 2. 

νοσφίζω τινὰ τοῦ, 197, 2. 

ξυλλαμβάνειν τινός τινι, 191, 2; 
201, 2. 

ξυνάρασθαι τοῦ, 191, 2. 

ὄζω τοῦ, to have the smell of, 192. 
It may be followed by two gen- 
itives, one of which denotes that | 
from which the smell proceeds. | 

ὁθούνεκα, 232, 2. 

οἷα, 226, a. 

οἱ ἀμφί, oi περί, 168, 2. 

οἶδα τοῦ, 192, 1. — with participle, 
225, n. 2, 6. -- οἷσθ᾽ ὃ δρᾶσον, 
218, n. 3. 

οἰκεῖος, 187, 3. 

οἰκτείρω τινὰ Tod, 194, 1. 

οἷος, 159, 5; 174, 2; 175, 1, d; 
222, 6. — with the article, 166, 
2, b. — οἷός re, 222, 6. 

οἴχομαι, 211, n. 5; 225, 8. 

ὀκταπλάσιος Tov, 198, 2. ‘ 

ὀλίγος, ὀλίγου δεῖν, or simply ὀλέ-. 
you, 223, 2. 

ὁ μὲν, ὁ δέ, 166, 2. 

ὅμοιος, 187, 3; 909, 2.— with par- 
ticiple, 225, 7. 

ὁμολογέω, with participle, 225, 7. 

ὅμως, 225, 6. 

ὀνίνασθαι τοῦ, 191, 2. 

ὄπισθεν τοῦ, 187, 4. 

ὅπως, 214. 





6 ὃς Tov, 200, 3. ; 

és with the article, 166, 2, b. — és 
καὶ ὅς, 171, 2, 0. — ds μὲν, ὃς δέ, 
171, 2, a. 

ὅσος, 174, 2.— with the article, 
166, 2, b. —dcov, dca, 222, 6; 
223. — θαυμαστὸς ὅσος, apxa- 
vos ὅσος, ὑπερφυὴς ὅσος, in 
oblique cases, 175, 2, 








GREEK 


doce, 157, n. 3. 

ὅτι, 159, 5; 213; 232, 2. 

6 tt, 223; 182, 

ὅτῳ τρόπῳ, in the sense of ὅπως; 
214, n. 1. 

ov, 17, 3 ; 229, et seq. 

οὐδεὶς ὅστις οὐ, οὐδεὶς ὃς οὐχί, 230, 


οὐδέν, 182. 

οὐκ ἂν φθάνοις, 225, 8. 
οὐκ ἔσθ᾽ ὅπως, 172, n. 2. 
οὐκοῦν, 219, 5. 

οὐ μή, 215, 3; 219, n. 9. 
οὕνεκα, 939° 9. 

οὔτε, 150, 3. 

οὕτως, 17. 


ὄφελον, 216, n. 3. 


ὄφρα, 214. 

πάλιν, πᾶν, 14, n. 5, 6, 

παντοῖος γίγνομαι, 225, 8. 

παραιροῦμαι, 184, n, 2. 

παραχωρέω τινὶ τοῦ, 197, 2; 201, 2. 

παρέξ, παρέκ, 231, n. 8. 

πάροιθεν τοῦ, 187, 4. 

παροῖξαι τῆς θύρας, 191. 

πάρος, 223, 3. 

πάσχω, τί aber, 225, 4. 

παύω, παύομαι, with participle, 225, 
τὰ 


πείθω τινὰ τόν, 184. ---- πείθεσθαι 
τοῦ, 192. 

πεινάω Tov, 193. 

πειράομαι τοῦ, 192. 

πέλας τοῦ, τῷ, 187, 3; 202. 

Πελοπόννησος, 7, τι. 2. 

πέλω, πέλομαι, 211, n. 13. 

πένης τοῦ, 200, 3. 

πέραν Tov, 187, 4. 

περιελεῖν, 184, n. 2. 

περιπρό, 231, n. 3. 

περιστεφὴς Tov, 200, 3. 

περιττὸς Tov, 198, 2. 

πλεῖον, 159, n. 2. 

πλεῖστον, 159, 5. 

πλεονεκτέω τοῦ, 191, 2; 198, 2. 

πλὴν τοῦ, 197, 2. 

πλησιάζω τοῦ, 189. 

πλησίος τοῦ, 187, 3. 

πλούσιος, went, rod, 200, 3. 

πνέω τοῦ, 192. 





INDEX. 321 


ποιέω, 184, n, 9. 

motos, 222, 6, 

πολέμιος, 187, 3. 

πολλαπλάσιος Tov, 198,-2. 

πολλός εἶμι, ἔγκειμαι, 225, 8, 

πόρρω τοῦ, 197,2, 188. 

πρεσβεύω τοῦ, 198, 2 :- 1891 

πρίασθαι, 201, n. 2. 

πρίν, πρὶν ἤ, 220; 223. 

πρό, genitive after the compounds 
of, as προκατακλίνομαι, 198, 2. 

mpoexw, 198, 2. 

Tiponévinaas, 2, tt. 2. 

προσβάλλει Tod, 192. 

προσδίδωμι τοῦ, 191, 2. 

προσήκει, 901, π. 4. 

πρόσθεν τοῦ, 187, 4, — πρόσθεν ῆ, 
223, 3. 

πρόσω Tov, 188. 

προτιμάω τοῦ, "ὦ care for, 193. 

προτοῦ, 166, 2, 

πυνθάνομαι, 192, π. Si 

ῥίπτειν τοῦ, 199. 

σ᾽ movable, 17. 

σάττω, σέσαγμάι τοῦ, 200, 3. 

-σκον, 118,1, c 

cov, 187, n. 4. 

σοφὸς τοῦ, 187, 2. 

σπένδω, 195, ὃ. 

στέργω τῷ, 203. 

στερέω, 184, π. 9, 

στοχάζομαι τοῦ, 199. 

στρατηγέω τοῦ, 189. 

συγγιγνώσκω; | 225, n. 2 

συμμετέχω τινί τινος, 202, π. 2. 

σύν, 14, 7. 

σύνοίδῳ, 225, n. 2. 

συντρίβω, συντριβῆναι τῆς κεφαλῆς, 
συντρῖψαι τῆς κεφαλῆς τινος, 195, 
1 


σφίσι, σφέας, 160, π. 3. 
σχέτλιος, 188, n. 3. 

σώζω τοῦ, 197, 2. 

τάλας Tov, 194; 188, n. 3. 
τἄλλα, 182. 

τεκνόω τι Tov, 197, 2. 


ἼΩΝ verbal in, 178, 2; 206, 4, π, 


sakes: 222, 6. 
τηλοῦ τῶν ἀγρῶν, 188, 


322 


ri, 189. 

τί μαθών, 225, 4. 

τί παθών, 225, 4. 

τίκτω, 211, n. 5. 

τιτύσκομαι τοῦ, 199. 

τό ye, 166, 2, 6. 

roi, 201, n. 5. 

τοῖος, τοιόσδε, τοιοῦτος, 222, 6. 

τὸν καὶ τόν, τὸ καὶ τό, 166, 2, d. 

τοξεύω τοῦ, 199. 

τοῦτο, 163, n. 5. —synechdochical, 
182, 

τρέχω, δραμεῖν τοῦ, 199. 

τριπλόος, τριπλάσιος, τοῦ, 198, 2. 

τυγχάνω, to hit, 191, 2.— with par- 
tciple, 225, 8. 

τῷ, therefore, 166, 2, f. 

ὑπαντάω τοῦ, 191, 2. 

ὑπάρχω, with participle, 225, 7. 

ὑπείκω τινὶ τοῦ, 197, 2; 201, 2. 

ὑπέκ, 231, n. 3. 

ὕπερθεν τοῦ, 187, 4. 

ὑπεύθυνος, 194, n. 4. 

ὑπηρετεῖν τοῦ, 194, 1. 

ὑποχωρέω τινὶ τοῦ, 197, 2; 201, 2. 

ὑστεραῖος τοῦ, 198, 2 

ὑστερέω τοῦ, 198, 9, 

φαίνομαι, 225, 8. 

φανερός, with ‘participle, 225, 7. 

φείδομαι τοῦ, 193. 

Φέρω, φέρε, 218, 9. ----φέρων, 225, 

— with an adverb and gen- 

five. 195, 1. 
ὕγω, 194, n. 1.— with genitive, 
197, 2. 

φημὶ τοῦ, 195, 2. 

φθάνω, 225, 8. 

φθονεῖν τινι τοῦ, 194. 


"φι, τῴιν, 42, n. 2. 





GREEK INDEX. 


φίλη, 188, n. 3. 

φύω, ἔφυν τοῦ, 197, 2.--- 1 am, 
211, n. 13. 

φωνήεσι, 14, 5. 

me Ὁ τῷ, 203. — with participle, 

pole παρεόντων, 1917 

χάριν τοῦ, 187, 4.— with a prepo- 
sition, 231, n. 4. 

Xpdopat, 206, n. 2. 

χρή, 201, n. 4. 

χρήζω τοῦ, 900, 3. 

χωρὶς τοῦ, 197, 2. 

Ψαύω τινὰ τοῦ, "192, 2. 

ψεύδεσθαι τοῦ, 197, 2.— ts τόν, 
184. 
tAove bat τοῦ, 200, 3. 
155, n. 2. 

ὠνέομαι τῷ, 201, n. 2. 

és, 38, π. 6. 

ὡς, in exclamations, 174, 2.— with 
dative, 201, 4.—in quotations, 
213. — for iva, 214. —in the ex- 





pression of a wish, 216.—rela- _ 


tive, 217, n. 4. — with partici- 
ple, 225, 4; 226, a.—in θαυμα- 
στῶς ὡς attracts the adverb, after 
the analogy of ὅσος, which see; 
compare θεσπέσιον ὡς. _ 

ὡς, to, 136, π. 

ὡς ἄν, 217, n. 4. 

ὡσαύτως, 202, n. 1. 

ὡσεί, 917, n. 4. 

ὥσπερ, : 226, a. 

ὥσπερ ἄν, 217, n. 4. 

ὥσπερ ἂν εἶ, 915, n. 7. 

ὥστε, ὥστε ἄν, 217, 3; 223; 226, a. 

ὥφελον, 216, n. 3. 








VALUABLE SCHOOL BOOKS 
PUBLISHED BY | 
WM. JAS. HAMERSLEY, 
HARTFORD, CONN,, 


And to be obtained through the principal Booksellers of the Country, 





Swirt’s First Lessons ON NATURAL PuiLosopHy. _ Part First and 
Second. Revised and enlarged editions, with numerous illustrations, 
containing new chapters on electricity, the daguerreotype, &c. 

The remarkable success of the first editions of these books has 
abundantly proved that natural science can be made clear to the 
minds of young children, and that these books are eminently adapted 
to that purpose, having gained for themselves a circulation in every 
State in the Union. Their great success has induced the publisher 
to bring out an enlarged edition. For simplicity of style and aptness 
of illustration, Miss Swift has obtained a reputation as wide as our 


sountry. 


Roserns’ OUTLINES OF ANCIENT AND MODERN HISTORY: on a new 
plan. Embracing Biographical Notices of Illustrious Persons, and 
General Views of the Geography, Population, &c.;>-&e., of Ancient 
and Modern Nations. With Questions. New and revised edition. 


GALLAUDET’S AND HOOKER’S PRAOTIOAL SPELLING-Book: with 
Reading Lessons. 

This spelling-book is extensively used, and has received the most 
decided commendation from practical teachers and other friends of 
education. As it is on a new plan, it must be examined to be prop- 
erly appreciated. 


Ciass-Boox or Nature. Comprising Lessons on the Universe— 
the Three Kingdoms of Nature, &c. Improved edition. 


Fiint’s TREATISE ON SURVEYING; in which the principles of 
Rectangular Surveying without Plotting are explained. Revised 
edition. With additional Tables and Rules. By George Gillet and 
1. W. Meech, A. M. | 


9 ADVERTISEMENTS. 


This work—highly recommended by surveyors and civil engineers 

as eminently plain, clear and practical—having been revised, is 

in offered to teachers as a first class text-book. It contains a new 
rule for correcting deviations of the compass. 


WoopsripGe’s MopERN ScHooL GEOGRAPHY; on the Plan of 
Comparison and Classification: with an Atlas. Exhibiting, on anew 
plan, the Physical and Political Characteristics ‘of Countries. By 
Wiliiam C. Woodbridge. Improved edition. 


Woopsrine¢e’s AND WILLARD’s UNIVERSAL GEOGRAPHY, for the 
use of the Higher Classes in Schools. Embracing a description of 
the various Kingdoms, Republics, Provinces, &c.; also Races and 
Tribes of Men, &. Accompanied by Modern and’ Ancient Atlases, 
expressly adapted to the work. 


WILLARD’s ANCIENT GEOGRAPHY AND ATLAS. 


GREEK SERIES. 


The following series of Greek text-books has been received with 
great favor by classical teachers. Sophocles’ Greek Grammar is used 
in Harvard, and many other colleges of the Union, and in a large 
number of high schools and academies. The text-books prepared by 
President Woolsey of Yale College, are too well known to classical 
teachers to need any comment. 

Sopnoctes’ First Book in Greek. 

Sopnocies’ GREEK Lessons. 

Sorpocies’ GrEEK GRAMMAR, old edition. 

Sopnocies’ GREEK GRAMMAR, new edition. 

Sopnocies’ GREEK EXERCISES. | 

Soppocies’ Romaic GRAMMAR. 

Fexton’s GREEK READER. 

Goopricu’s Greek GRAMMAR. 

Tue Goreras or Pato, with notes. By Theodore D. Wool 
sey, LL. D., President of Yale College. 

Tse Antigone or Sopnocties, with notes. By Theodore D. 
Woolsey, LL. D., President of Yale College. ~- 

Tue Axcestis or Evrimes, with Notes. By Theodore ἢ. 
Woolsey, LL. D., President of Yale College. 

Tue Execrra or Sopnocies, with Notes. By Theodore D. 
Woolsey, LL. D., President of Yale College. 

THE Daniecanen or Aiscuytvus, with Notes. By Theodore D. 

Woolsey, LL. D., President of Yale College. μ 














This book is due on the 


last date stamped , Or 
On the date to which renewed, ia er 
Renewed books are subject to imm 






29 Jan 65Se 
Sp ae ae 


LD 21A4—60m-4,'64 
(Ε4555510) 4788 


ediate recal]. | 





a 


U.C. BERKELEY LIBRARIES 


, + ΤᾺ 
a) 
La 





CO31380954 















































































} nr ee ‘ 
vce ee σι 3 at 
of ® ᾿ 7. vy ‘ 
' & tuta:* ve by 5 
᾿ 30% oo 
cial ade oat a > κι 2 
τ ' 4 ce’ 
somes, Ὁ 7 i ᾿ ’ at ᾿ 
A Pete Ge i A 
ue wa hs oe oy Ὁ ᾿ ᾿ 
᾿νε fv . ; ᾿ 
. i ‘ Ὁ ‘ ty : 
Aare 7 ῦ : . ‘ ‘ 
pte be: 5 » . . ‘ . 
x a ᾿ eve ‘ Lisle ὦ , oe ‘ 
ἀν εν}, bis a . G < ἢ ᾿ 
ἢ Ξ 
᾿ ." ad wed , 
᾿ ΠῚ . , . 
‘ “ os ' ᾿ 
"γῶν ει ͵ 
εὐθυὲ A by ᾿ 
' ‘ 
Ra) ‘ ᾿ ᾿ 
rar ᾿ 
- ‘ 
a ” as 8 
i: ᾿ 
ἊΨ κ᾿ eee δὲ ψ 
. ' : 
ie Lan 
‘ 
a) * . ' ' 
i 
$j ‘ « 
τ΄ : 
eto - ᾿ υ Ν ᾿ ᾿ 7 
τ: av te ‘ 
’ ; Ξ 
ake r τ το» ᾿ 
A> 
- ν᾽ τ ᾿ ᾿ ᾿ ᾿ 
t . ῃ «ἐς 
4 ost. ᾿ 5 ᾿ 
saa ᾿ ᾿ a? , : τ᾿ jie 
‘ Xe ore » 
: . 4 τὸ 
ες τ πολ τας an ᾿ 
᾿ - A “* 
“« . 7 + + . . 
b+ Ν Γ ’ . 
wath ean. Ὁ “ a ‘ aby: ¢ 
4 Ἄς, 5 . - “ , » , 4 
ieee ee ws . Ἢ ς ; 
Wise ς . - ἥν ἴτ᾽ τὲ 
i Pactarertey et Ὄρὶνσν rl 5 ᾿ . 
ἘΝ δεν ὅκα " : 4 Ry 
en karin ΣΕ at ΩΝ ere te ie wea owe 
day ome ate ᾿ς tet eS Νισσὺ des - fe tee whey - ΙΝ iv a Ἀν 6, ε ἃ ᾿ 
aac ΟΝ a. ie Rake cone Ἢ Pie rey er er as ἢ Cees ay we ᾿ ᾿ 
wary “᾿ 4 7 ic 
* ae 3 
ἢ Ν Pi 
or) ᾿ 
: i on ὁ 
Ξ ᾿ τ 
, Wotan ὦ 
ie; = 
7 ι Β ἶ 
" ΩΝ 
1 ἃ 
᾿ ΕΝ 
‘ .- 
ἄφες an Fy ᾿ νι ταν Β 
Avelert meh ride yes te Φ ὧν ὅν κα ᾿ ᾿ 
ὟΝ tere ace «- Hargett : 
Het ‘ey ἮΝ ἵ 
et seine wigs : a 
ΧΗ a8 es Η ee 
Be a oer ᾿ ᾿ μ᾿ : 
of . + δι Ὁ 
ἃ; : ‘ 
rar . τεῦς ἀξ σοι 
Tt νὴ ἃ Φιι 5 ᾿ : 
SSS ων Η ; ᾿ 
Ἐς ψτν Daten e anes faba δ 
Ἐν «τὰ “3 ᾿ 
. 
Ὁ on ᾿ 
‘ - = 2 
᾽ fy mi nV) . - 
tf yA = 
‘ " ‘ 
bata a ἢ " 
. sas 7 
Η > 
‘ ; 4 an 
ta. ΠΏΜΩ “« ᾿" ΓΝ ἣΝ 
a ad ap yet ᾿ ἢ 
᾿ λεῖον ; : ᾿ : 
ενὐ « ΓΙ ‘ 
es 1, ‘ 
oes 
ἐξ 3 


